B-1701(18)User's Manual

SmartAXIS FT2J/1J
MICRO/I HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSSAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Be certain to read this manual and the hardware manual for each product carefully before using the integrated
display controller SmartAXIS FT2J/1J (Hereinafter referred to as “SmartAXIS”) and the operator interface MICRO/I
HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P (Hereinafter referred to as “MICRO/I”). If thisproduct is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
• This product has been manufactured with careful regard to quality. However, if you intend to use this product inapplications where failure of this equipment may result in damage to property or injury, ensure that it used inconjunction with appropriate fail-safe backup equipment.
• Precautionary measure should be taken to avoid unauthorized access from the outside network to this product.
Please note that the Company shall not be liable for any loss, damage or other expenses incurred directly or
indirectly by unauthorized access, etc.
• In this manual, safety precautions are categorized depending on the severity as Warning or Caution:
Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe
personal injury or death.
Caution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage toequipment.

SmartAXIS, MICRO/I (Common to all models):• This product is not designed for use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability and safety, such as
applications for medical devices, nuclear power, railroads, aerospace, and automotive devices. This productshould not be used for such applications.
• Special expertise is required to install, wire, configure, and operate this product. Person without such expertisemust not use this product.
• The screen will not be visible if the backlight of this product burns out. However, the touch panel and the function
keys will remain functional. Thus, Erroneous touch panel operation or function key operation may occur while
controlling the touch panel. Because such erroneous operations could result in damage, the touch panel and thefunction key should not be used once the backlight is burned out.
FT2J/1J:• This product self-diagnostic function may detect internal circuit or program errors, stop programs, and turn outputs
off. Configure circuits so that the system containing this product is not jeopardized when outputs turn off.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:• When more than one panel spot is pressed at the same time, due to the detection mechanism of the analog type
touch panel used in the main unit, the unit assumes that only the center of the pressed spots is sensed and theunit assumes that only one button is pressed. Therefore, do not operate this product by pressing more than one
button simultaneously.

SmartAXIS, MICRO/I (Common to all models):• Make sure of safety before starting and stopping this product. Incorrect operation of this product may cause
mechanical damage or accidents.
• This product cannot be directly connected to the communication lines (including public wireless LAN) of
telecommunication carriers (mobile communication companies, fixed-line communication companies, Internet
providers, etc.). When connecting this product to the Internet, be sure to connect via a device, such as a router.
• When using this product in a system that requires clock accuracy, set the time regularly.
• Do not switch off the power or pull out the SD Memory Card or the USB flash drive while it is being accessed, as
this may result in destruction of the stored data. If the data on the SD Memory Card or the USB flash drive iscorrupted, format the SD Memory Card or the USB flash drive.
• Turn off the power supply of this product before connecting or disconnecting USB devices other than USB memory.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:• Be sure to confirm that the SD Memory Card Access lamp is not lit prior to turning the power off to the main unit
or pulling out the SD memory card. Refer to this manual for details.

Preface-1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Revision history

Revision history
August 2015:

First Edition

May 2016:

Second Edition

July 2016:

Third Edition

November 2016:

Fourth Edition

March 2017:

Fifth Edition

June 2017:

Sixth Edition

August 2017:

Seventh Edition

December 2017:

Eighth Edition

March 2018:

Ninth Edition

June 2018:

Tenth Edition

March 2019:

Eleventh Edition

May 2019:

Twelfth Edition

December 2019:Thirteenth Edition

July 2020:

Fourteenth Edition

December 2020:

Fifteenth Edition

March 2021:

Sixteenth Edition

January 2022:

Seventeenth Edition

September 2023:

Eighteenth Edition

July 2024:

Nineteenth Edition

Caution• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV4 application are copyright, and all rights are reserved by IDEC
Corporation. Unauthorized reproduction, reprinting, sale, transfer, or rental is prohibited.
• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV4 application are subject to change without notice.
• IDEC Corporation accepts no responsibility for circumstances arising from the use of this manual or the
WindO/I-NV4 application.
• Please contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation with any problems regarding the operation of this product.

Trademarks

MICRO/I, SmartAXIS, WindLDR and WindO/I are registered trademarks of IDEC CORPORATION in JAPAN. Microsoft
and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other company names and product names used in this manual or the WindO/I-NV4 application are trademarks of
their respective owners.
This product uses fonts made by ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-2

Preface

PrefaceThis manual describes the functions, setting methods, and precautions of the integrated configuration software
WindO/I-NV4. The information includes drawing tools, setup procedures, and how to configure all products.
Please read this manual and the hardware manual of your product carefully before use and ensure that you fully
understand the functions and performance of the FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T,
HG1G/1P and the WindO/I-NV4.
IDEC Corporation makes the latest product manual PDFs available on our website at no additional cost. Please
download the latest product manual PDFs from our website.
Read the following materials as necessary for your particular application.
References

Content

WindO/I-NV4 User's Manual(This document)

Describes the hardware specifications of the FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2GV, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P.

Ladder Programming Manual (PDF)

Describes basic operations for programming with ladders, monitoring methods on
the WindLDR, instruction lists, and details of each instruction.

SmartAXIS Hardware Manual (PDF)

Describes the product specifications, installation and wiring instructions of the
FT2J/1J, optional items, and I/O cartridges.

MICRO/I Hardware Manual (PDF)

Describes the product specifications, installation and wiring instructions of the
HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T and HG1G/1P, optional
items, and expansion modules.

WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup
Manual (PDF)

Describes the connection procedures and available device addresses for various
communication including the Device Link Communication, O/I Link
communication, and DM Link communication.

Network User's Manual (PDF)

Describes how to configure and use specific communication protocols (BACnet/IP
communication, EtherNet/IP communication, MQTT communication).

WindO/I-NV4 Help

Describes the operating procedures. The user is allowed to view all manuals via
Help.

WindLDR Help

Describes usage instructions for WindLDR, programming software for setting
control functions.

Character Table (PDF)

A list of fonts can be used with the FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/
3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P and WindO/I-NV4. For restrictions on using the FT2J/
1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

Preface-3

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualSymbols Used in this Manual

Symbols Used in this ManualThis manual uses the following symbols to facilitate explanation.

Symbols……

Information that requires special attention. Failure to operate the product in accordancewith the information provided can lead to serious injury or damage.

……

Information relating to requests or material to reference in the use of a function……

Useful information relating to a function

……

Indicates the chapter and page of related reference information.

OK……

Screen buttons are indicated by bold text or by using the actual graphic icon.

SHIFT, A……

Keyboard keys are indicated by the keyboard inscription in capital letters or enclosed insquare brackets.

****

……

Controls are indicated by bold text.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-4

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual
Item

Description

FT2J

The name is short for SmartAXIS FT2J/1J22*AF-B.

FT1J

The name is short for SmartAXIS FT1J-4F1**AG-*.

HG2J

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2J/1JT22TF-B.

HG1J

The name is short for MICRO/I HG1J-4FT22TG-*.

HG5G-VThe name is short for MICRO/I HG5G-VFXT22MF-B.

HG4G-VThe name is short for MICRO/I HG4G-VCXT22MF-B.

HG4G

The name is short for MICRO/I HG4G-CJT22*F-B.

HG3G-VThe name is short for MICRO/I HG3G-V*XT22MF-*.

HG3G

The name is short for MICRO/I HG3G-*JT22*F-*.

HG2G-VThe name is short for MICRO/I HG2G-V5FT22TF-*.

HG2G-5F

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2G-5FT22TF-*.

HG2G-5T

The name is short for MICRO/I HG2G-5T*22TF-*.

HG1G

The name is short for MICRO/I HG1G-4VT22TF-*.

HG1P

The name is short for MICRO/I HG1P-ST32*BFH-B0.

FT2J/1J

The format used to refer to FT2J and FT1J.

HG2J/1J

The format used to refer to HG2J and HG1J.

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V

The format used to refer to HG5G-V, HG4G-V, HG3G-V and HG2G-V.

HG5G/4G/3G-V

The format used to refer to HG5G-V, HG4G-V and HG3G-V.

HG4G/3G

The format used to refer to HG4G and HG3G. HG4G-V and HG3G-V is not included.

HG2G-5F/-5T

The format used to refer to HG2G-5F and HG2G-5T.

HG1G/1P

The format used to refer to HG1G and HG1P.

SmartAXIS

Generic term for integrated display controller FT2J/1J.

MICRO/I

Generic term for HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P.

External Device

Generic term used to refer to a PLC or micro computer that is connected to andcommunicates with the main unit.

Device Address

Memory that is capable of storing values in unit of bits or words loaded on the main unit
and external device.

System Area

Device address area that is pre-allocated for exchanging screen management, error
information, and clock data between the main unit and an external device.

Device Link Communication

A communication method that performs communication with the external device
according to the setting of the screen and without a program.

DM Link Communication

A communication method that reads to or writes value to external devices using
dedicated memory for DM Link in the main unit.

User Communication

A communication method which performs communication with external devices such as
barcode readers and inverters.

External Device Communication

Generic term used to refer to Device Link Communication and DM Link Communication.

Sub Host Communication

A communication method that performs communication with external device according
to the set device address list and without a program.

O/I Link

A connection format that enables connections of up to 16 units of the main unit withhigh-speed communication of 115,200bps.

O/I Link Master

The main unit that is directly connected to external device on the O/I Link network.

O/I Link Slave

The main unit that is not directly connected to external device on the O/I Link network.

WindO/I-NV4

Integrated configuration software application for creating projects of the main unit.

WindLDR

Editor for control function settings that can be launched from WindO/I-NV4.

Operating System

Software used to manage and control system software. Only FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J support
the update.

System Software

Software for basic control and management of the main unit.

Preface-5

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualAbbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual

Item

Description

Project

Data including image data required for operating the main unit, which is created with
WindO/I-NV4.

Manager

WindO/I-NV4 provides tools to manage pictures, text and script etc. With the Managers,
you can create and manage them in your project.

Setup

Generic term used to refer to the common settings in the project.

Project Settings

Basic settings of operation in the Setup settings.

Alarm Log

A function where the main unit collects log data of alarms.

Data Log

A function where the main unit collects value of device addresses.

Data Transfer Function

Generic term for using external memory device, the project transfer function that
downloads and uploads project data to the main unit, the PLC program transfer functionthat downloads and uploads PLC programs to a PLC connected to the main unit, and thefile copy function that copies files between external memory devices.

HMI function

Functions such as screens and settings of the main unit that can be created by the
WindO/I-NV4.

Control function

Functions such as ladder program and setting of the main unit that can be created by
the WindLDR.

ScriptA script is an executable list of commands created by a simple programming language.

Text GroupA group of 32 texts maximum that is in order to dynamically switch the character
displayed on the main unit according to the value of the device address.

Windows Font

A character font that can be used on a computer running WindO/I-NV4.

Stroke Font

A glyph's outline is defined by the vertices of individual strokes and stroke's profile.
Scalable fonts scale easily without jagged edges.
Under font settings, “Stroke” is a stroke-based font.

Maintenance Communication

Communications between the WindO/I-NV4 and the main unit using a dedicatedprotocol.

Device Monitor

A special Popup Screen on the main unit on which value of the device address can bedisplayed or changed.

Pass-ThroughA function that enables maintenance of the external device via the main unit.

System Screen

Pre-allocated screen dedicated for performing initial setting of the main unit,
self-diagnosis, and clearing the log data etc.

External Memory Device

The generic term for an SD memory card and a USB flash drive.

NV Metafile

A graphic data file that integrates drawings created on the WindO/I-NV4 edit screen.

Window

Screens that are loaded on to the Base Screen, including Popup Screen and Device
Monitor.

Internal Device

The generic term for internal device addressing on the main unit such as internal relays,
registers, etc.

HMI Device

Generic term for internal devices that control the HMI functions.

Control Device

Generic term for internal devices that control the control functions.

Keep Device

The generic term for internal device not initialized at the start of operation. Even after
the power is turned off, the values are retained by the battery.
HMI Device:
HMI Keep Register (LKR), HMI Keep Relay (LK)
Control Device: In WindLDR, on Memory Backup tab in the Function Area Settings
dialog box, set whether or not to handle as a keep device.

Drawings

Define as as non functional content (i.e. shape, picture, text).

Parts

Define as functional content (i.e. button, pilot lamp, commands, etc.)

ObjectDefine as combination of Drawings and Parts placed on WindO/I-NV4 edit screen.

Touch Switch

A part that operates a function by pressing parts that have been placed on the screen.

Standard Keypad

Keypad that is displayed when operating Numerical and Character Input parts whenStandard is selected under Type in the Keypad menu for Numerical and Character
Input parts.

Movie File List

It is a list of movie files that have been registered in the Multimedia Function settings.
You cannot change the order when you play files.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-6

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual

Preface-7

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................ Preface-1
Revision history ........................................................................................... Preface-2
Caution ....................................................................................................... Preface-2
Trademarks ................................................................................................. Preface-2
Preface ....................................................................................................... Preface-3
Symbols Used in this Manual ........................................................................ Preface-4
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual ............... Preface-5

Chapter 1
1

System Composition
System Composition.............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1

Overview ........................................................................................................1-1

1.2

System Composition for the RUN operation.......................................................1-1

1.3

System Composition for Creating Screens .........................................................1-2

2

About the WindO/I-NV4 ........................................................................................ 1-3

3

Operating Modes .................................................................................................. 1-4

4

Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation ..................... 1-5

Chapter 2
1

2

3

4

5

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations
WindO/I-NV4 Specifications ................................................................................... 2-1
1.1

Available Data.................................................................................................2-1

1.2

Available Text .................................................................................................2-6

1.3

Available Number of Colors ............................................................................ 2-20

1.4

Available Image Files..................................................................................... 2-20

1.5

Available Sound Files ..................................................................................... 2-37

1.6

Available Movie Files ..................................................................................... 2-37

Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV4 ........................................................................ 2-38
2.1

Starting WindO/I-NV4....................................................................................2-38

2.2

Exiting WindO/I-NV4 ..................................................................................... 2-40

Configuration & Functions ................................................................................... 2-41
3.1

Application Menu Command List.....................................................................2-42

3.2

Quick Access Toolbar..................................................................................... 2-43

3.3

Ribbon Command List....................................................................................2-46

3.4

Windows Displayed in the Workspace .............................................................2-56

3.5

Status Bar .................................................................................................... 2-57

Customizing WindO/I-NV4 ................................................................................... 2-60
4.1

Configuring the Work Environment ................................................................. 2-60

4.2

Customizing the Workspace ...........................................................................2-68

WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings.................................................... 2-72
5.1

Device Address Settings.................................................................................2-72

5.2

Setting Conditional Expressions ......................................................................2-75

5.3

Search for Text ID......................................................................................... 2-78

5.4

Replacing Device Addresses ...........................................................................2-80

5.5

Replacing Font .............................................................................................. 2-83

5.6

Use Part Library ............................................................................................ 2-86

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-8

Contents

Chapter 3
1

2

3

4

5

6

Chapter 4
1

Preface-9

Communication with External Devices
Device Link Communication....................................................................................3-1
1.1

Overview ....................................................................................................... 3-1

1.2

Device Link Communication Settings................................................................ 3-2

O/I Link Communication.........................................................................................3-3
2.1

Overview ....................................................................................................... 3-3

2.2

O/I Link Communication Settings..................................................................... 3-4

DM Link Communication.........................................................................................3-5
3.1

Overview ....................................................................................................... 3-5

3.2

DM Link Communication Settings..................................................................... 3-7

No External Devices ...............................................................................................3-8
4.1

Overview ....................................................................................................... 3-8

4.2

No External Devices Settings........................................................................... 3-8

User Communication..............................................................................................3-9
5.1

Overview ....................................................................................................... 3-9

5.2

User Communication Settings Procedure .........................................................3-10

5.3

Protocol Manager ..........................................................................................3-33

5.4

Example of User Communication Settings........................................................3-81

5.5

Connection Diagram for User Communication..................................................3-87

Sub Host Communication .....................................................................................3-88
6.1

Overview ......................................................................................................3-88

6.2

Supported Protocols and Communication Driver...............................................3-88

6.3

HMI Link Register (LLR) Assignment ...............................................................3-89

6.4

Sub Host Communication Configuration Procedure...........................................3-90

6.5

Error Information ..........................................................................................3-93

Project Settings
Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data ..............................................4-1
1.1

Creating New Project Data .............................................................................. 4-1

1.2

Opening Project Data ..................................................................................... 4-4

1.3

Saving Project Data ........................................................................................ 4-5

1.4

Printing Project Data ...................................................................................... 4-7

1.5

Comparing Project Data .................................................................................4-19

1.6

Changing Project Settings ..............................................................................4-20

1.7

Closing Project Data ......................................................................................4-24

2

Project Settings Configuration Procedure...............................................................4-25

3Project Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................................4-26
3.1

System Tab ..................................................................................................4-26

3.2

Communication Interface Tab ........................................................................4-37

3.3

Communication Driver Tab.............................................................................4-50

3.4Communication Driver Network Tab................................................................4-55

3.5

O/I Link Tab .................................................................................................4-58

3.6

User Communication Tab ...............................................................................4-59

3.7

Sub Host Communication Tab ........................................................................4-63

3.8

Printer Tab ...................................................................................................4-65

3.9

External Memory Device Tab..........................................................................4-66

3.10

Autorun Tab .................................................................................................4-67

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

4

Chapter 5
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

3.11

Expansion Module Tab................................................................................... 4-68

3.12

Web Server Tab ............................................................................................ 4-74

3.13

FTP Server Tab .............................................................................................4-76

3.14

E-mail Tab.................................................................................................... 4-78

3.15

Project Details Tab ........................................................................................ 4-83

3.16

Font/Kanji Dictionary Data Tab....................................................................... 4-84

3.17

Compatible Tab.............................................................................................4-85

3.18Internal Clock Tab......................................................................................... 4-88

3.19

Network Tab................................................................................................. 4-90

Project Restrictions ............................................................................................. 4-91
4.1

Download Restrictions ................................................................................... 4-91

4.2

Maximum Number of Control Devices and External Device Addresses................ 4-91

ScreenScreen Overview................................................................................................... 5-1
1.1

Screen Types ..................................................................................................5-1

1.2

Screen Size.....................................................................................................5-2

Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens .................................................... 5-3
2.1

Creating Screens.............................................................................................5-3

2.2

Opening Screens.............................................................................................5-4

2.3

Closing Screens...............................................................................................5-6

2.4

Duplicating Screens.........................................................................................5-8

2.5

Deleting Screens ........................................................................................... 5-10

2.6

Reusing Screens............................................................................................ 5-12

2.7

Batch Editing of Multiple Screen Settings ........................................................ 5-14

Base Screen ....................................................................................................... 5-15
3.1

Properties of Base Screen Dialog Box.............................................................. 5-15

3.2

Displaying Layered Base Screens.................................................................... 5-19

Popup Screen ..................................................................................................... 5-21
4.1

Properties of Popup Screen Dialog Box ........................................................... 5-21

4.2

Popup Screen Configuration ...........................................................................5-25

4.3

Standard Keypad Popup Screen......................................................................5-26

Password Input Screen........................................................................................ 5-27
5.1

Properties of Password Input Screen Dialog Box..............................................5-27

5.2

Password Input Screen Configuration .............................................................5-29

5.3

Standard Password Input Screen.................................................................... 5-30

Screen Restrictions ............................................................................................. 5-31
6.1

Screen Number .............................................................................................5-31

6.2

Maximum Number of Parts............................................................................. 5-31

6.3

Maximum Number of Control Devices and External Device Addresses................ 5-32

6.4

Text and Messages........................................................................................ 5-32

6.5

Vertical Installation .......................................................................................5-32

Drawings and Parts Overlapping .......................................................................... 5-33
7.1

Overview ...................................................................................................... 5-33

7.2

Displaying Overlapping Drawings and Parts..................................................... 5-34

7.3

Restrictions................................................................................................... 5-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-10

Contents

Chapter 6123

Chapter 7
1

2

3

4

5

6

Preface-11

Drawings
Shapes .................................................................................................................6-1
1.1

Line............................................................................................................... 6-1

1.2

Polyline ......................................................................................................... 6-3

1.3

Polygon ......................................................................................................... 6-6

1.4

Rectangle ...................................................................................................... 6-9

1.5

Circle/Ellipse .................................................................................................6-12

1.6

Arc ...............................................................................................................6-15

1.7

Pie ...............................................................................................................6-18

1.8

Equilateral Polygons ......................................................................................6-21

1.9

Fill................................................................................................................6-24

Picture ................................................................................................................6-26
2.1

Picture Configuration Procedure .....................................................................6-26

2.2

Properties of Picture Dialog Box......................................................................6-27

Text ...................................................................................................................6-28
3.1

Text Configuration Procedure .........................................................................6-28

3.2

Properties of Text Dialog Box .........................................................................6-29

Buttons
Bit Button .............................................................................................................7-1
1.1

How the Bit Button is Used ............................................................................. 7-1

1.2

Bit Button Configuration Procedure .................................................................. 7-3

1.3

Properties of Bit Button Dialog Box .................................................................. 7-4

Word Button .......................................................................................................7-19
2.1

How the Word Button is Used ........................................................................7-19

2.2

Word Button Configuration Procedure .............................................................7-22

2.3

Properties of Word Button Dialog Box .............................................................7-23

Goto Screen Button .............................................................................................7-39
3.1

How the Goto Screen Button is Used ..............................................................7-39

3.2

Goto Screen Button Configuration Procedure ...................................................7-40

3.3

Properties of Goto Screen Button Dialog Box ...................................................7-41

Print Button ........................................................................................................7-56
4.1

How the Print Button is Used .........................................................................7-56

4.2

Print Button Configuration Procedure ..............................................................7-57

4.3

Properties of Print Button Dialog Box ..............................................................7-58

Key Button ..........................................................................................................7-72
5.1

How the Key Button is Used ...........................................................................7-72

5.2

Key Button Configuration Procedure ...............................................................7-74

5.3

Properties of Key Button Dialog Box................................................................7-75

5.4

Key Buttons ..................................................................................................7-94

5.5

Key Browser ............................................................................................... 7-100

5.6

Key Button Usage Examples......................................................................... 7-104

Multi-Button ...................................................................................................... 7-111
6.1

How the Multi-Button is Used ....................................................................... 7-111

6.2

Multi-Button Configuration Procedure............................................................ 7-113

6.3

Properties of Multi-Button Dialog Box............................................................ 7-114

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

7

8

9

Chapter 812

Chapter 9
1

2

3

4

Keypad .............................................................................................................7-143
7.1

How the Keypad is Used .............................................................................. 7-143

7.2

Keypad Configuration Procedure .................................................................. 7-144

7.3

Properties of Keypad Dialog Box................................................................... 7-145

Selector Switch ..................................................................................................7-147
8.1

How the Selector Switch is Used .................................................................. 7-147

8.2

Selector Switch Configuration Procedure ....................................................... 7-148

8.3

Properties of Selector Switch Dialog Box ....................................................... 7-149

Potentiometer....................................................................................................7-164
9.1

How the Potentiometer is Used .................................................................... 7-164

9.2

Potentiometer Configuration Procedure......................................................... 7-165

9.3

Properties of Potentiometer Dialog Box ......................................................... 7-166

Lamps
Pilot Lamp ............................................................................................................ 8-1
1.1

How the Pilot Lamp is Used .............................................................................8-1

1.2

Pilot Lamp Configuration Procedure ..................................................................8-2

1.3

Properties of Pilot Lamp Dialog Box ..................................................................8-3

Multi-State Lamp ................................................................................................ 8-16
2.1

How the Multi-State Lamp is Used .................................................................. 8-16

2.2

Multi-State Lamp Configuration Procedure ...................................................... 8-18

2.3

Properties of Multi-State Lamp Dialog Box.......................................................8-19

Data Displays
Numerical Input.................................................................................................... 9-1
1.1

How the Numerical Input is Used .....................................................................9-1

1.2

Numerical Input Configuration Procedure..........................................................9-2

1.3

Properties of Numerical Input Dialog Box ..........................................................9-3

1.4

How to Enter Values...................................................................................... 9-25

1.5

Advanced Usage ........................................................................................... 9-26

Character Input .................................................................................................. 9-27
2.1

How the Character Input is Used.................................................................... 9-27

2.2

Character Input Configuration Procedure ........................................................ 9-28

2.3

Properties of Character Input Dialog Box ........................................................ 9-29

2.4

How to Enter Text......................................................................................... 9-47

2.5

Character Input Usage Examples.................................................................... 9-49

2.6

String Data Storage Method ...........................................................................9-55

2.7

Advanced Usage ........................................................................................... 9-55

Picture Display.................................................................................................... 9-56
3.1

How the Picture Display is Used .....................................................................9-56

3.2

Picture Display Configuration Procedure..........................................................9-59

3.3

Properties of Picture Display Dialog Box ..........................................................9-60

3.4

Picture Display Usage Examples .....................................................................9-76

Video Display...................................................................................................... 9-81
4.1

How the Video Display is Used ....................................................................... 9-81

4.2

Video Display Configuration Procedure............................................................ 9-83

4.3

Properties of Video Display Dialog Box............................................................ 9-84

4.4

File Screen.................................................................................................... 9-92

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-12

Contents

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Chapter 10
1

2

3

4

Preface-13

Message Display ..................................................................................................9-96
5.1

How the Message Display is Used ...................................................................9-96

5.2

Message Display Configuration Procedure .......................................................9-98

5.3

Properties of Message Display Dialog Box........................................................9-99

5.4

String Data Storage Method ......................................................................... 9-116

Message Switching Display ................................................................................. 9-117
6.1

How the Message Switching Display is Used .................................................. 9-117

6.2

Message Switching Display Configuration Procedure ...................................... 9-119

6.3

Properties of Message Switching Display Dialog Box....................................... 9-120

Alarm List Display .............................................................................................. 9-138
7.1

How the Alarm List Display is Used ...............................................................9-138

7.2

Alarm List Display Configuration Procedure ................................................... 9-139

7.3

Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box.................................................... 9-140

Alarm Log Display.............................................................................................. 9-156
8.1

How the Alarm Log Display is Used...............................................................9-156

8.2

Alarm Log Display Configuration Procedure ................................................... 9-157

8.3

Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box ................................................... 9-158

Data Log Display ............................................................................................... 9-174
9.1

How the Data Log Display is Used ................................................................ 9-174

9.2

Data Log Display Configuration Procedure..................................................... 9-175

9.3

Properties of Data Log Display Dialog Box ..................................................... 9-176

Numerical Display .............................................................................................. 9-188
10.1

How the Numerical Display is Used ...............................................................9-188

10.2

Numerical Display Configuration Procedure ................................................... 9-189

10.3

Properties of Numerical Display Dialog Box.................................................... 9-190

Calendar ........................................................................................................... 9-208
11.1

How the Calendar is Used ............................................................................ 9-208

11.2

Calendar Configuration Procedure................................................................. 9-209

11.3

Properties of Calendar Dialog Box................................................................. 9-210

ChartsBar Chart ............................................................................................................10-1
1.1

How the Bar Chart is Used .............................................................................10-1

1.2

Bar Chart Configuration Procedure..................................................................10-2

1.3

Properties of Bar Chart Dialog Box..................................................................10-3

Line Chart ......................................................................................................... 10-21
2.1

How the Line Chart is Used .......................................................................... 10-21

2.2

Line Chart Configuration Procedure .............................................................. 10-22

2.3

Properties of Line Chart Dialog Box...............................................................10-23

Pie Chart........................................................................................................... 10-58
3.1

How the Pie Chart is Used............................................................................ 10-58

3.2

Pie Chart Configuration Procedure ................................................................ 10-59

3.3

Properties of Pie Chart Dialog Box ................................................................ 10-60

Meter................................................................................................................ 10-69
4.1

How the Meter is Used................................................................................. 10-69

4.2

Meter Configuration Procedure ..................................................................... 10-70

4.3

Properties of Meter Dialog Box ..................................................................... 10-71

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

Chapter 11
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Commands
Bit Write Command............................................................................................. 11-1
1.1

How the Bit Write Command is Used .............................................................. 11-1

1.2

Bit Write Command Configuration Procedure................................................... 11-3

1.3

Properties of Bit Write Command Dialog Box ................................................... 11-4

Word Write Command........................................................................................11-10
2.1

How the Word Write Command is Used ........................................................ 11-10

2.2

Word Write Command Configuration Procedure ............................................. 11-12

2.3

Properties of Word Write Command Dialog Box ............................................. 11-13

Goto Screen Command.......................................................................................11-19
3.1

How the Goto Screen Command is Used ....................................................... 11-19

3.2

Goto Screen Command Configuration Procedure............................................ 11-20

3.3

Properties of Goto Screen Command Dialog Box............................................ 11-21

Print Command..................................................................................................11-26
4.1

How the Print Command is Used .................................................................. 11-26

4.2

Print Command Configuration Procedure....................................................... 11-27

4.3

Properties of Print Command Dialog Box....................................................... 11-28

Script Command ................................................................................................11-33
5.1

How the Script Command is Used................................................................. 11-33

5.2

Script Command Configuration Procedure ..................................................... 11-34

5.3

Properties of Script Command Dialog Box ..................................................... 11-35

Multi-Command .................................................................................................11-39
6.1

How the Multi-Command is Used.................................................................. 11-39

6.2

Multi-Command Configuration Procedure ...................................................... 11-40

6.3

Properties of Multi-Command Dialog Box ...................................................... 11-41

Timer................................................................................................................11-61
7.1

How the Timer is Used ................................................................................ 11-61

7.2

Timer Configuration Procedure..................................................................... 11-62

7.3

Properties of Timer Dialog Box ..................................................................... 11-63

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-14

Contents

Chapter 12
1

2

Alarm Log Function
Overview ............................................................................................................12-1
1.1

How the Alarm Log Function is Used...............................................................12-1

1.2

Alarm States .................................................................................................12-3

1.3

Sampling Data ..............................................................................................12-4

1.4

Data Configuration ........................................................................................12-5

1.5

Saving and Deleting Data...............................................................................12-7

1.6

Using Data and Detected Alarms ....................................................................12-9

Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure ....................................................... 12-10
2.1

Configuring the Device Addresses to Monitor and the Alarm Detection Condition.................................................................................................................. 12-10

3

Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................ 12-13
3.1

4

Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box...................................................................... 12-13

Using Data and Detected Alarms......................................................................... 12-31
4.1

Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display ......................................... 12-31

4.2

Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According

4.3

Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred

4.4

Saving the Data as a CSV File....................................................................... 12-38

to the Active Alarm...................................................................................... 12-33.................................................................................................................. 12-36

Chapter 13
1

2

Data Log Function
Overview ............................................................................................................13-1
1.1

How the Data Log Function is Used ................................................................13-1

1.2

Sampling Values of Device Addresses .............................................................13-3

1.3

Data Configuration ........................................................................................13-5

1.4

Saving and Deleting Data...............................................................................13-6

1.5

Using the Data ..............................................................................................13-7

Data Log Function Configuration Procedure ...........................................................13-8
2.1

3

4

Preface-15

Configuring the Device Addresses to Collect Data and the Sampling Condition ...13-8

Data Log Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................. 13-13
3.1

Data Log Settings Dialog Box ....................................................................... 13-13

3.2

Individual Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................... 13-15

Using the Data .................................................................................................. 13-33
4.1

Displaying the Data in the Line Chart ............................................................ 13-33

4.2

Displaying Data on the Data Log Display ....................................................... 13-35

4.3

Displaying Data as Numerical Values............................................................. 13-36

4.4

Saving the Data as a CSV File....................................................................... 13-45

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

Chapter 14
1

2

Operation Log Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 14-1
1.1

How the Operation Log Function is Used......................................................... 14-1

1.2

Recorded Events ........................................................................................... 14-3

1.3

Data Configuration ........................................................................................ 14-4

1.4

Saving and Deleting Data ..............................................................................14-6

1.5

Using the Data.............................................................................................. 14-7

Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure................................................... 14-8
2.1

3Operation Log Settings Dialog Box ......................................................................14-10
3.1

4

1

Operation Log Settings Dialog Box................................................................ 14-10

Using the Data ..................................................................................................14-22
4.1

Chapter 15

Configuring the Events and the Condition for Recording...................................14-8

Saving the Data as a CSV File ...................................................................... 14-22

Data Storage Area
Overview............................................................................................................ 15-1
1.1

What is the Data Storage Area? .....................................................................15-1

1.2

Data Storage Area......................................................................................... 15-2

2

Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure .......................................................... 15-3

3

Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box .......................................................... 15-4

Chapter 16
1

2

Recipe Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 16-1
1.1

How the Recipe Function is Used.................................................................... 16-1

1.2

Data for Recipes ........................................................................................... 16-2

1.3

Data Configuration ........................................................................................ 16-3

Recipe Function Configuration Procedure.............................................................. 16-4
2.1

3

4

Chapter 17
1

Configuring Recipe Function Operations and Device Addresses ......................... 16-4

Recipe Settings Dialog Box .................................................................................. 16-8
3.1

Recipe Settings Dialog Box............................................................................. 16-8

3.2

Individual Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................... 16-10

Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes ...............................................................16-14
4.1

Editing Recipe Data ..................................................................................... 16-14

4.2

Creating Recipe Files ................................................................................... 16-17

4.3

Editing Recipe Files ..................................................................................... 16-21

4.4

Deleting Recipe Files ................................................................................... 16-22

Data Copy Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 17-1
1.1

What Can Be Done with the Data Copy Function ............................................. 17-1

1.2

Data Copy Function Operation........................................................................17-2

2

Data Copy Function Configuration Procedure ........................................................ 17-3

3

Data Copy Settings Dialog Box............................................................................. 17-5
3.1

Data Copy Settings Dialog Box ....................................................................... 17-5

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-16

Contents

Chapter 18
1

2

Preventive Maintenance Function
Overview ............................................................................................................18-1
1.1

How the Preventive Maintenance Function is Used...........................................18-1

1.2

Counting the Operation Time and Operation Count ..........................................18-2

1.3

Thresholds....................................................................................................18-3

Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure......................................18-4
2.1

3

4

Counting Operation Time and Operation Count................................................18-4

Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box ..........................................................18-6
3.1

Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box....................................................18-6

3.2

Individual Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................18-8

Using the Data .................................................................................................. 18-11
4.1

Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display .................... 18-11

4.2

Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold.................................................................................................................. 18-14

Chapter 19
12

3

Chapter 20
1

2

Preface-17

Email Function
Overview ............................................................................................................19-1
1.1

What Can Be Done with the E-mail Function....................................................19-1

1.2

System Composition ......................................................................................19-1

1.3

Supported Protocols and Authentication methods ............................................19-1

1.4

Verified SMTP Servers....................................................................................19-2

1.5

E-mail Sending Operation ..............................................................................19-2

1.6

Operating E-mail function and checking sending status ....................................19-3

1.7

Restrictions of each E-mail .............................................................................19-4

E-mail Function Configuration Procedure ...............................................................19-5
2.1

Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP) Settings.............................................................19-5

2.2

Configuring the E-mail ...................................................................................19-7

2.3

Creating an E-mail Group............................................................................. 19-10

2.4

How to use the E-mail Address Book in another project.................................. 19-12

2.5

Creating an E-mail Address Book file with a Text Editor.................................. 19-14

E-mail Settings Dialog Box.................................................................................. 19-15
3.1

E-mail Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................... 19-15

3.2

E-mail Address Book Dialog Box ................................................................... 19-19

3.3

Attach Files Dialog Box ................................................................................ 19-23

3.4

Insert Value of Device Address Dialog Box .................................................... 19-25

SNS Function
Overview ............................................................................................................20-1
1.1

What Can Be Done with the Social Media Function...........................................20-1

1.2

System Composition ......................................................................................20-1

1.3

Social media message Sending Operation .......................................................20-2

1.4

Operating Social media function and checking sending status ...........................20-3

1.5

Restrictions of each Tweet .............................................................................20-3

Social Media Function Configuration Procedure ......................................................20-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

3

Chapter 21
12

Chapter 2212Social Media Settings Dialog Box.......................................................................... 20-8
3.1

Social Media Settings Dialog Box .................................................................... 20-8

3.2

Social Media Account Manager ..................................................................... 20-11

3.3

Insert Value of Device Address Dialog Box .................................................... 20-13

FTP Function
FTP Server Function............................................................................................ 21-1
1.1

What Can Be Done with the FTP Server Function............................................. 21-1

1.2

System Composition ...................................................................................... 21-2

1.3

Hierarchy of the FTP Server ...........................................................................21-3

1.4

Supported Commands and Transfer modes ..................................................... 21-3

1.5

Verified FTP Client......................................................................................... 21-3

1.6

FTP Server Function Configuration Procedure .................................................. 21-4

FTP Client Function ............................................................................................. 21-5
2.1

What Can Be Done with the FTP Client Function..............................................21-5

2.2

System Composition ...................................................................................... 21-5

2.3

Supported Commands and Transfer modes ..................................................... 21-6

2.4

Verified FTP Server........................................................................................ 21-6

2.5

FTP Client Function Configuration Procedure ................................................... 21-6

2.6

FTP Server Manager .................................................................................... 21-12

2.7

File Transfer Settings Dialog Box .................................................................. 21-16

Sound Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 22-1
1.1

How the Sound Function is Used .................................................................... 22-1

1.2

Supported Sound Files................................................................................... 22-1

Sound Function Configuration Procedure .............................................................. 22-2
2.1

3Sound Settings Dialog Box................................................................................... 22-6
3.1

4

Chapter 23
1

2

3

Configuring Sound Files & Trigger Conditions .................................................. 22-2
Sound Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................. 22-6

Operation..........................................................................................................22-11

Multimedia Function
Function and Settings.......................................................................................... 23-1
1.1

How the Multimedia Function is Used .............................................................23-1

1.2

Supported Movie Files ................................................................................... 23-2

Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure........................................................ 23-3
2.1

Registering Movie Files .................................................................................. 23-3

2.2

Configuring the Event Recording Function.......................................................23-6

2.3

Configuring the Video Input ......................................................................... 23-11

Multimedia Settings Dialog Box ...........................................................................23-12
3.1

Multimedia Settings Dialog Box .................................................................... 23-12

4

Checking the Status of the Function ....................................................................23-16

5

Restrictions .......................................................................................................23-17

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-18

Contents

Chapter 24
1

2

3

User Accounts and the Security Function
Overview ............................................................................................................24-1
1.1

User Accounts ...............................................................................................24-1

1.2

Protecting Data .............................................................................................24-3

1.3

Protecting Displays and Operations.................................................................24-8

Security Function Configuration Procedure........................................................... 24-11
2.1

Creating and Editing User Accounts .............................................................. 24-11

2.2

Adding and Editing Security Groups .............................................................. 24-19

2.3

Protecting the Display and Operation of Screens and Parts ............................. 24-25

Security Dialog Box............................................................................................ 24-37
3.1

4

5

Chapter 25
1

2

3

4

Password Input ................................................................................................. 24-47
4.1

Entering the Password on the Main Unit........................................................ 24-47

4.2

Entering the Password in WindO/I-NV4 ......................................................... 24-49

Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit ............................................................... 24-50
5.1

Opening the User Account Setting Screen ..................................................... 24-50

5.2

Editing a User Account................................................................................. 24-51

5.3

User Account Setting Screen Configuration.................................................... 24-60

ScriptAbout the Script Function .....................................................................................25-1
1.1

Overview of the Script Function......................................................................25-1

1.2

Types and Trigger Conditions of the Script in HMI Functions ............................25-2

1.3

Data Type of the Script..................................................................................25-3

1.4

Script Error in HMI Functions .........................................................................25-4

Editing and Management of the Script...................................................................25-5
2.1

Script Registration Procedure .........................................................................25-5

2.2

Script Manager..............................................................................................25-7

2.3

Script Editor................................................................................................ 25-12

Global Script ..................................................................................................... 25-16
3.1

Setting procedures for Global Script.............................................................. 25-16

3.2

Global Script Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................25-18

3.3

Global Script Dialog Box............................................................................... 25-19

Script Definition Method..................................................................................... 25-21
4.1

5

Preface-19

Security Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 24-37

Format List ................................................................................................. 25-21

Script Coding Examples...................................................................................... 25-32
5.1

Control Statements...................................................................................... 25-32

5.2

Relational Operators .................................................................................... 25-37

5.3

Logical Operators ........................................................................................ 25-39

5.4

Arithmetic Operators ................................................................................... 25-40

5.5

Bitwise Operators ........................................................................................ 25-41

5.6

Bit Functions............................................................................................... 25-43

5.7

Word Functions ........................................................................................... 25-44

5.8

Data Type Designations ............................................................................... 25-59

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

6

Chapter 26
12

3

Important Notes ................................................................................................25-60
6.1

Important Notes Regarding the While Definition ............................................ 25-60

6.2

Important Notes Regarding the Data Type Designations ................................ 25-60

6.3

Regarding Communication Error................................................................... 25-60

6.4

Maximum Number of Control Devices and External Device Addresses.............. 25-61

6.5

About the Priority of the Operator ................................................................ 25-61

Text Group
Overview............................................................................................................ 26-1
1.1

How to Create the Text Groups and Text Registrations .................................... 26-1

1.2

Functions that Support Text Groups ............................................................... 26-2

Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure ..................................................... 26-3
2.1

How to Create the Text Groups and Text Registrations .................................... 26-3

2.2

Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device Address....................... 26-10

Text Manager ....................................................................................................26-12
3.1

Chapter 27

Text Manager ............................................................................................. 26-12

Web Server Function

1

Overview............................................................................................................ 27-1

2

System Composition............................................................................................ 27-2

3

Minimum System Requirements ........................................................................... 27-3

4

How to Set up and Access ................................................................................... 27-4

5

6

Chapter 28
1

2

4.1

Web Server Function Configuration Procedure.................................................27-4

4.2

Accessing from a Web Browser ......................................................................27-5

System Web Page............................................................................................... 27-7
5.1

Page configuration ........................................................................................ 27-7

5.2

Screen configuration ..................................................................................... 27-8

5.3

System Detailed Information Page.................................................................. 27-9

5.4

Remote monitoring page ............................................................................. 27-12

5.5

Remote control page ................................................................................... 27-14

Custom Web Page .............................................................................................27-16
6.1

Web Page Editor ......................................................................................... 27-16

6.2

Creating Custom Web Page.......................................................................... 27-16

Control Function
Ladder Program.................................................................................................. 28-1
1.1

RUN and STOP.............................................................................................. 28-1

1.2

Create Program.............................................................................................28-3

Function Area Settings ........................................................................................ 28-4
2.1

Function List ................................................................................................. 28-4

2.2

Configuration Procedure ................................................................................ 28-5

2.3

Run/Stop Control ..........................................................................................28-6

2.4

Memory Backup .......................................................................................... 28-11

2.5

High-Speed Counter .................................................................................... 28-12

2.6

Catch Input ................................................................................................ 28-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-20

Contents

3

Chapter 29
1

2

3

4

5

2.7

Interrupt Input............................................................................................ 28-32

2.8

Frequency Measurement.............................................................................. 28-35

2.9

Input Filters ................................................................................................ 28-36

2.10

Analog/Digital Inputs................................................................................... 28-38

2.11

Analog Outputs ........................................................................................... 28-40

2.12

Timer Interrupt ........................................................................................... 28-42

2.13

Watchdog Timer Setting .............................................................................. 28-44

Constant Scan ................................................................................................... 28-45

Communication with Main Unit
Overview ............................................................................................................29-1
1.1

What Can Be Done Communicating with a Main Unit........................................29-1

1.2

Connect a Main Unit to a Computer ................................................................29-4

1.3

Change Communication Settings ....................................................................29-5

Downloading ..................................................................................................... 29-12
2.1

Downloading Project Data to the Main Unit ................................................... 29-12

2.2

Download Dialog Box................................................................................... 29-14

2.3

Downloading Files to an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit ..... 29-18

2.4

Downloading the System Software of Expansion Modules............................... 29-20

Uploading ......................................................................................................... 29-21
3.1

Upload Project Data from the Main Unit ........................................................ 29-21

3.2

Upload Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 29-23

3.3

Uploading Files from an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit...... 29-24

Clear ................................................................................................................ 29-26
4.1

Clear Data from the Main Unit ...................................................................... 29-26

4.2

Deleting Data from an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit........ 29-27

Formatting ........................................................................................................ 29-28
5.1

6Chapter 30
1

Formatting an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit.................... 29-28

System Information ........................................................................................... 29-29
6.1

Displaying System Information ..................................................................... 29-29

6.2

Target Information Dialog Box ..................................................................... 29-31

Monitor Function
Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4...............................................................................30-1
1.1

How the Monitor Function in WindO/I-NV4 is Used ..........................................30-1

1.2

Debugging in WindO/I-NV4............................................................................30-4

1.3

Display the Value of Device Address in Popup................................................ 30-18

1.4Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions ............................................ 30-18

1.5

Switching the Screen of the Main Unit........................................................... 30-19

1.6Open Current Screens.................................................................................. 30-19

1.7

Change Values of Device Addresses and Check the Operationof Project Data Offline ................................................................................. 30-19

2

Monitoring on the Main Unit ............................................................................... 30-20
2.1

How the Monitoring Function of the Main Unit is Used.................................... 30-20

2.2

Device Monitor............................................................................................ 30-21

2.3

Change Values of Device Addresses and Check the Operationof Project Data Offline ................................................................................. 30-27

Preface-21

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

Chapter 31
1

Simulator Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 31-1
1.1

2

3

4

Chapter 32
12

3

Chapter 33
1

2

How the Simulator Function is Used ............................................................... 31-1

Using the Simulator ............................................................................................ 31-4
2.1

Starting the Simulator ................................................................................... 31-4

2.2

Debugging in Simulator .................................................................................31-5

2.3

Saving the Displayed Screen as an Image .......................................................31-7

2.4

Start simulation of ladder program ................................................................. 31-8

Simulator ........................................................................................................... 31-9
3.1

Simulator...................................................................................................... 31-9

3.2

Screen Monitor ........................................................................................... 31-12

3.3

Custom Monitor .......................................................................................... 31-13

3.4

Batch Monitor ............................................................................................. 31-15

3.5

Script Debugger .......................................................................................... 31-17

Restrictions .......................................................................................................31-19

Pass-Through Function
Overview............................................................................................................ 32-1
1.1

How the Pass-Through Function is Used ......................................................... 32-1

1.2

Supported External Devices ...........................................................................32-2

1.3

How to Connect when Using the Pass-Through Function .................................. 32-3

1.4

Use the Pass-Through Function ......................................................................32-3

Pass-Through Function Settings Procedure ........................................................... 32-4
2.1

How to Enable the Pass-Through Function in WindO/I-NV4 .............................. 32-4

2.2

How to Enable the Pass-Through Function in System Mode on the main unit ..... 32-5

Important Notes ................................................................................................. 32-8

External Memory Devices
External Memory Devices .................................................................................... 33-1
1.1

Supported External Memory Devices............................................................... 33-1

1.2

What Can Be Done Using an External Memory Device......................................33-1

1.3

Specifications of External Memory Devices ...................................................... 33-2

1.4

File structure ................................................................................................ 33-3

1.5

Reading/Writing Data ....................................................................................33-5

1.6

Setting the External Memory Device Folder ................................................... 33-13

1.7

Deleting Files on the External Memory Device ............................................... 33-14

1.8

Formatting the External Memory Device........................................................ 33-15

1.9

Removing an external memory device .......................................................... 33-18

1.10

Precautions................................................................................................. 33-19

Project Transfer Function ...................................................................................33-20
2.1

What Can Be Done with the Project Transfer Function ................................... 33-20

2.2

Project Transfer Procedures ......................................................................... 33-21

2.3

Converting Project for Transfer .................................................................... 33-22

2.4

Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands
to Transfer Project Data .............................................................................. 33-25

2.5

Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer Project Data ........................ 33-26

2.6

Precautions................................................................................................. 33-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-22

Contents

3

PLC Program Transfer Function .......................................................................... 33-35
3.1

Supported PLCs........................................................................................... 33-35

3.2

What Can Be Done using the PLC Program Transfer Function ......................... 33-36

3.3

PLC Program Transfer Procedures ................................................................ 33-36

3.4

Creating ZLD Project File.............................................................................. 33-37

3.5

Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands
to Transfer PLC Programs ............................................................................ 33-38

4

5

6

3.6

Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer PLC Programs ...................... 33-40

3.7

Precautions................................................................................................. 33-48

File Copy Function ............................................................................................. 33-49
4.1

What Can Be Done with the File Copy Function ............................................. 33-49

4.2

File Copy Operating Procedures.................................................................... 33-50

4.3

Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Copy Files................ 33-51

4.4

Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer Project Data......................... 33-52

4.5

Precautions................................................................................................. 33-57

USB Autorun Function........................................................................................ 33-58
5.1

Overview of the USB Autorun Function ......................................................... 33-58

5.2

USB Autorun Function Configuration Procedure ............................................. 33-62

5.3

Creating a USB Autorun Definition File .......................................................... 33-65

5.4

USB Autorun Function Security ..................................................................... 33-74

USB Popup Screen Function ............................................................................... 33-76
6.1

Chapter 34
1

Chapter 35
12

Preface-23

Automatically Displaying a Popup Screen when a USB Flash Drive is Inserted .. 33-76

Peripherals
Printer ................................................................................................................34-1
1.1

Supported Printers ........................................................................................34-1

1.2

Functions Available with the Printer ................................................................34-1

1.3

Connecting a Printer to a Main unit.................................................................34-1

1.4

Setting and Monitoring the Printer ..................................................................34-2

Internal Devices
Bit Devices ..........................................................................................................35-1
1.1

HMI Device Addresses ...................................................................................35-1

1.2

Control Device Addresses...............................................................................35-7

Word Devices .................................................................................................... 35-12
2.1

HMI Device Addresses ................................................................................. 35-12

2.2

Control Device Addresses............................................................................. 35-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualContents

Chapter 36
12

3

Chapter 37
1

2

3

Main unit Setup
Maintenance Screen............................................................................................ 36-1
1.1

Maintenance Screen Overview........................................................................36-1

1.2

Displaying the Maintenance Screen................................................................. 36-2

1.3

Adjusting Screen Brightness...........................................................................36-2

System Mode Overview ....................................................................................... 36-3
2.1

System Mode Screens....................................................................................36-3

2.2

Names and Layout of Setup Menus................................................................. 36-5

Settings ............................................................................................................. 36-7
3.1

Initial Setting (Initial Setting) ......................................................................... 36-7

3.2

Clock Setting .............................................................................................. 36-11

3.3

Offline (Offline)........................................................................................... 36-12

3.4

Run............................................................................................................ 36-12

3.5

System Information (System Info.)............................................................... 36-12

3.6

File Manager............................................................................................... 36-13

3.7

Ext.Mem.Device .......................................................................................... 36-13

3.8

Top Page.................................................................................................... 36-13

3.9

Self Diagnosis (Self Diag.)............................................................................ 36-13

Troubleshooting
HMI Function Error ............................................................................................. 37-1
1.1

Errors Displayed on the Screen ......................................................................37-1

1.2

Low Power Supply Voltage............................................................................. 37-4

1.3

Initializing Clock Data and Backup Data ..........................................................37-4

Control Function Error ......................................................................................... 37-5
2.1

Check error status......................................................................................... 37-5

2.2

Clearing Errors.............................................................................................. 37-7

2.3

Error Information ..........................................................................................37-9

Handling Problems .............................................................................................37-11
3.1

Cannot Download Project Data..................................................................... 37-11

3.2

The backlight is OFF and the buzzer sounds.................................................. 37-11

3.3

Touch Panel Does Not Respond Correctly...................................................... 37-11

3.4

Power LED light is OFF ................................................................................ 37-12

3.5

POWER LED is lit or flashing ........................................................................ 37-12

3.6

Problem Occurs with Control Function .......................................................... 37-13

3.7

Problem Occurs with USB Autorun Function .................................................. 37-14

Appendix1

Color Number ....................................................................................................... A-1

2

View Browser ....................................................................................................... A-3

3

Color Palette......................................................................................................... A-4

4

Pattern Palette...................................................................................................... A-5

5

Text Alignment ..................................................................................................... A-7

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Preface-24

Contents

Preface-25

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualSystem Composition

Chapter 1

1.1

System Composition
Overview
There are two types of system compositions used in operating the main unit: One that is configured for the operation,and the other that is used for creating projects required for performing operations. In creating projects, use the
WindO/I-NV4, the dedicated configuration software application.
Main unit
External Device

WindO/I-NV4
130

Download

Periodically reads
values of device addresses

Writes changed
values of device addresses● MICRO/I
The MICRO/I is equipped with a high-brightness, color LCD with fast screen drawing speed, quick-response touch
switches, and high-speed communications to provide a comfortable man-machine interface. It is designed to allow
easy data read/write from/to external device's, and does not burden the operator with issues relating tocommunications software.
● SmartAXISThe SmartAXIS is a controller integrated with a display, a full-fledged PLC control function and a programmabledisplay HMI function.
SmartAXIS is equipped with two CPUs, each of which processes HMI functions and control functions inparallel. When reading from or writing to the control devices from HMI functions, there is a delay in datatransfer between the CPUs. In addition, since HMI functions communicates with external devices, whenreading from or writing to control devices in communication with external devices, consider the delay
between the CPUs and check the operation sufficiently.

1.2

System Composition for the RUN operation
The main unit can be operated in the following system configuration. Devices that can be connected vary dependingon your main unit model. Refer to the specifications of the model for the details.
Web Browser Terminal(Computer, Smartphone, etc.)

Main unit
Monitor

Read

Operation

Write

Writing data
Reading
data
External Memory Device
SD memory card

External Device

Print

Printer

USB flash drive

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Data reception
Datatransmission
External device(User Communication)

1-1

System Composition

11

1 System Composition

1.3

System Composition for Creating Screens
It is necessary to create and download a project to the main unit for operating it. Use the WindO/I-NV4 to create aproject. The project you have created can be downloaded to the main unit by directly connecting it to the computer,or the project data can be downloaded to external memory device, and then it can be copied from external memory
device to the main unit equipped with the memory card interface or the USB interface.
Main unit
Computer
130

Download

WindO/I-NV4

UploadInstall

Copy

Download
UploadCopy
External Memory Device
SD memory card

1-2

USB flash drive

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 About the WindO/I-NV4

1

About the WindO/I-NV4
WindO/I-NV4 is software that is exclusively designed for operation with the main unit, for specifying settings, creating

screens and ladder programs*1. The set of data made up of settings, created screens and ladder programs*1 is calleda project.
Using WindO/I-NV4, you create a project and then download it to the main unit, to build the interface necessary for
operation.
Download
WindO/I-NV4

Main unit

UploadExternal Memory Device
Download

SD memory card

USB flash drive

UploadDownload
Upload*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1-3

System Composition

2

3 Operating Modes

3

Operating Modes
The main unit includes multiple modes, so you switch between modes as and when necessary. These modes arecalled operating modes. The functions and the operations and conditions for switching are as follows.
ModeThis is the mode at the time of executing project
data. The created screen is displayed.
The ladder program is executed by setting the main
Run Mode

unit*1 to the RUN state, and stops by setting themain unit to the STOP state. When stopped, thecharacters “Ladder Stop” flashes at the bottom rightof the main unit*1.

System Mode

Monitor Mode

Conditions required forswitching to the mode

Functions• Turn ON the power to the main unit.
• Press [Run] on the Top Page in System
Mode or on the Main Menu.
• The download of the project data iscompleted.

Perform initial settings, clock settings, self-diagnosis,
etc. for the main unit.

• Press down for 3 seconds or more at the
top-left corner of the screen to display the
Maintenance Screen, and then press
System Mode.
• Using the screen switching button, multibuttons, screen switch or multi commands,
switch to the System Mode.
• All data is cleared using WindO/I-NV4.
• Write the System Area 1 Display screen
number (address number+0) to FFFFh.

Monitor Mode is used for monitoring values ofdevice addresses using WindO/I-NV4.
In this mode, the characters “Monitor Mode” flashes
at the bottom-left of the main unit screen.

On the WindO/I-NV4 Online tab, in the
Monitor group, click Start Monitor.

Ladder Monitor Mode is used for monitoring theladder program using WindLDR.*1
In this mode, the characters “Ladder Monitor Mode”
flashes at the bottom-left of the main unit screen.

On the WindLDR Online tab, in the Monitor
group, click Monitor.

Offline Mode

The main unit stops communicating with theexternal devices. It takes you to a Main Menu withmany internal settings to choose from including
Initial Setting, Clock Setting and System Informationetc.
In this mode, the characters “Offline Mode” flashes
on the bottom-left of the main unit screen.

• Press Offline on the Top Page in System
Mode or on the Main Menu.
• While monitoring in WindO/I-NV4, on theOnline tab, in the Monitors group, click
Go offline.

Data Transfer
ModeTransferring data between a computer and the mainunit.

• Download project data.
• Upload project data.

Forcibly downloads the main unit OS, system
software and project data if the main unit does notstart normally or you forget its password.

• Turn on the power while pressing the RESET
switch on the back of the main unit, andpress and hold the RESET switch for 3
seconds or longer.
• Turn on the main unit with the main unit OSor system software corrupted.

Boot Mode*2

When switched to System Mode, operation of the main unit stops.
• To display the Maintenance Screen, the Enable Maintenance check box from the System Settings tabof the Project Settings dialog box must be checked.
• For details about Maintenance Mode, refer to Chapter 36 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 36-1.

*1 FT2J/1J only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

1-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation

1

Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation
The following flowchart describes the sequence of step from the screen and ladder program*1 creation for the main
unit to the Run operation.

1

Launch the WindO/I-NV4( refer to Chapter 2 “2.1 Starting WindO/I-NV4” on page 2-38)

2Creating a Project, Screen and Ladder Program*1
Creating a new project ( refer to Chapter 4 “1.1 Creating New Project Data” on page 4-1)
• Creating new screens ( refer to Chapter 5 “2.1 Creating Screens” on page 5-3)
• Creating new ladder programs*1 ( refer to Chapter 28 “Control Function” on page 28-1)

Modifying the project3

Saving the project( refer to Chapter 4 “1.3 Saving ProjectData” on page 4-5)

4Downloading the project( refer to Chapter 29 “2 Downloading” onpage 29-12)

5

Debug
(refer to Chapter 30 “Monitor Function” onpage 30-1)

6

Troubleshooting( refer to Chapter 37 “Troubleshooting” onpage 37-1)

8

Maintenance(refer to Chapter 29 “3 Uploading” on page
29-21)(refer to Chapter 31 “Simulator Function”
on page 31-1)(refer to Chapter 21 “FTP Function” on page
21-1)
(refer to Chapter 27 “Web Server Function”
on page 27-1)(refer to Chapter 19 “Email Function” onpage 19-1)(refer to Chapter 20 “Chapter 20 SNS
Function” on page 20-1)

7RUN*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1-5

System Composition

44 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation

1 Launch WindO/I-NV4
Launch WindO/I-NV4.

2 Creating a Project, Screen and Ladder Program*1
Create a project and performing various settings.
Create display screens and ladder programs*1.

3 Saving the project
Save the project data at any time after the configuration settings are done.

4 Downloading the project
Connect the computer to the main unit using a USB cable or Ethernet cable and download the created project data to
the internal memory of the main unit.

5 Debug
Using Monitor function and Simulator function, you can correct created project data while confirming actual actions.

6 Troubleshooting
If there is a module or communication-related problem*1, or a problem with the screen and the ladder program, anappropriate message is displayed at the top screen of the main unit.
In addition, error information is saved to the HMI Special Data Register (LSD) or a special data register (D)*1. By
referring to this information and repeatedly correcting the project, downloading, and debugging, the project can becompleted.

7 RUN
Starting communication with the external device and execute various functions according to the project settings.

8 MaintenanceThe data in the main unit or external memory devices can be uploaded to the computer. The FTP function allows data
manipulation from remote locations. In addition, the Web Server function allows the user to remotely monitor oroperate the state of the main unit from the web browser. The e-mail function can be used to send an e-mailcontaining the corrective action when a problem occurs. The SNS function allows to tweet about each main unit andcheck the status all at once from the Twitter screen.

*1 FT2J/1J only

1-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualWindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Chapter 2

This chapter describes the minimum system requirements for WindO/I-NV4, how to start and exit it, and theconfiguration of its screens and menus.

1.1

WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Available Data

● Data types
Data type is the format of the data related to the minimum and maximum values of data that can be processed by apart and handling of negative and real numbers.
Data types and data ranges that can be used on the main unit and WindO/I-NV4 are listed below.
Data type

Required word countProcessable data range

UBIN16(W)1

0 to 65535

BIN16(I)1-32768 to 32767

UBIN32(D)2

0 to 4294967295

BIN32(L)2-2147483648 to 2147483647

BCD4(B)

1-999 to 9999

BCD8(EB)

2-9999999 to 99999999
38 to -1.18x10-38,

0, 1.18x10-38 to 3.4x1038

Float32(F)

2

Bit

-

0, 1

String(S)-String data. It handles from the beginning to the NULL(00h) character as acharacter string.

-3.4x10

Data types of WindLDR are displayed as follows: UBIN16(W) as W (word), BIN16(I) as I (integer),
UBIN32(D) as D (double word), BIN32(L) as L (long), and Float32(F) as F (float).
● Data handling
Data stored in device addresses is handled as described below.
Data type

Data handling
bit
15

bit
0

1 wordUBIN16(W)Data is handled as an unsigned 16-bit integer.

bit
15

1 wordbit
0

Lower wordbit0

BIN16(I)

Data is handled as an signed 16-bit integer.
If the sign bit (bit 15) is 1, the value is two’s complement.

Sign bitbit
31

Upper word

UBIN32(D)bit
31Upper word

BIN32(L)
Sign bit

Lower wordbit0

Handled as an unsigned 32-bit integer with the starting address
number as the lower word.

Handled as a signed 32-bit integer with the starting address
number as the lower word.
If the sign bit (bit 31) is 1, the value is two’s complement.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-1

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

12

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

Data type

Data handling
Data is handled as a four digit (16-bit) binary-coded decimal value.
Each four bits from bit 0 to bit 11 is handled as the absolute value
3rd
2nd
1st
for the 1st to 3rd digit.
Sign Absolute value Bit 12 to bit 15 is handled as the minus sign (-) when its value is F
(Hex) and it is handled as the absolute value for the 4th digit when
0 to 9 (Hex).

bit
15

BCD4(B)bit
31

BCD8(EB)

6th

Sign

5th

4th

3rd

2nd

Data is handled as an eight digit (32-bit) binary-coded decimalvalue.
Each four bits from bit 0 to bit 27 is handled as the absolute value
for the 1st to 7th digit.
Bit 28 to bit 31 is handled as the minus sign (-) when its value is F
(Hex) and it is handled as the absolute value for the 8th digit when
0 to 9 (Hex).

bit
0

Lower word

Upper word
7th

bit
0

1 word1stAbsolute value

Data is handled as a 32-bit floating-point real number. The number of significant digits is 6 digits. The
floating-point type data format conforms to the IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)
standard for the single precision storage format as explained next.

Single precision floating-point values in IEEE 754 (32 bits)

Single precision floating-point values in IEEE 754 are expressed with a total of 32 bits (2 words) using 1 bit forthe sign s, 8 bits for the exponent e, and 23 bits for the significand f. The sign bit indicates the sign of theexpressed value (positive or negative). The exponent is an 8 bit signed integer with a value from -128 to 127.

Float32(F)

bit
31

bit
30

bit
23

s

e (exponent) [bit 30 to 23]

bit
22

bit
0

f (significand) [bit 22 to 0]+127

Represents after the decimal of 1.xxx

Sign bit (0: positive, 1: negative)

Example:sef
0 01111101 10000000000000000000000
1 . 1 × 2 -2

If all bits are 0, the value is “0”.

The internal representation of Float32(F) is described here, but the data for Float32(F) (floating-point real
numbers) is handled with a special bit configuration, so do not directly access the bits.
Data type

Data handling
The entered text are stored in the upper byte and the lower byte according to the Storage Method ofString Data setting of WindO/I-NV4.
Select the from Upper byte in the Storage Method of String Data
String Data
1 word1st
character2nd
character3rd
character

Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte

String(S)n-2-thcharactern-1-thcharactern-thcharacter

NULL
(00ｈ)

Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte

Select the from Lower byte in the Storage Method of String Data
String Data
1 word2nd
character1stcharacter4th
character

Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte

n-1-thcharactern-2-thcharacter

NULL
(00ｈ)

n-th
character

Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte

For details, refer to Chapter 9 “2.6 String Data Storage Method” on page 9-55.
The Storage Method of String Data is configured on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog
box.

2-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Example:Data handling

Data type

Storing 0FFF (Hex) in LDR0
bit
15

bit
15

bit
0

LDR0

1111 111111111111

0000111111111111

FFFF (Hex)

0FFF (Hex)

0FFF (Hex) is handled as 4095 (Dec).
bit
15

FFFF (Hex) is handled as 65535 (Dec).
bit
15

bit
0

LDR0

0000 1111 1111 1111

BIN16(I)

Data type+1111 1111 1111 1111−

0FFF (Hex)

Storing FFFF (Hex) in LDR0, 0FFF (Hex) in LDR1

Storing FFFF (Hex) in LDR0, FFFF (Hex) in LDR1

LDR1

LDR0

bit
31

bit
0

00001111111111111111111111111111
0FFFFFFF (Hex)0FFFFFFF (Hex) is handled as 268435455 (Dec).
bit
31

LDR1

LDR0

LDR0

bit
0

FFFFFFFF (Hex)FFFFFFFF (Hex) is handled as 4294967295 (Dec).
bit
31

bit
0

0FFFFFFF (Hex)

+

LDR1

1111 1111111111111111111111111111

00001111111111111111111111111111

BIN32(L)

LDR1

LDR0

bit
0

11111111111111111111111111111111
FFFFFFFF (Hex)−

The sign bit is 0, so the positive number 0FFFFFFF(Hex) is handled as 268435455 (Dec).

Sign bit is 1, so two’s complement of the negative
number FFFFFFFF (Hex), handled as -1 (Dec).

Storing 1234 (Hex) in LDR0

Storing F765 (Hex) in LDR0

Data type

bit
15

bit
15

bit
0

LDR0

0001001000110100
+

LDR0

bit
0

1111011101100101

234 (Hex)−

765 (Hex)

The sign is 1 (Hex), so the binary-coded decimalvalue of the positive number 234 (Hex),
handled as 1234 (Dec).

The sign is F (Hex), so the binary-coded decimalvalue of the negative number 765 (Hex),
handled as -765 (Dec).

Storing 5678 (Hex) in LDR0, 1234 (Hex) in
LDR1

Storing 4321 (Hex) in LDR0, F765 (Hex) in
LDR1

bit
31

LDR1

LDR0

bit
0

bit
31

00010010001101000101011001111000

BCD8(EB)

FFFF (Hex)Sign bit is 1, so FFFF (Hex) is two’s complement,
handled as -1 (Dec).

UBIN32(D)Data type

bit
0

LDR0

0FFF (Hex) is handled as 4095 (Dec).

bit31

BCD4(B)

2

bit
0

LDR0

+

2345678 (Hex)

The sign is 1 (Hex), so the binary-coded decimalvalue of the positive number 2345678 (Hex),
handled as 2345678 (Dec).

Data type

LDR1

LDR0

bit
0

1111 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001−

7654321 (Hex)

The sign is F (Hex), so the binary-coded decimalvalue of the negative number 7654321 (Hex),
handled as -7654321 (Dec).

Storing 0000 (Hex) in LDR0, BFA0 (Hex) in LDR1
LDR1
BFA0 (Hex)
bit
31

LDR0
0000 (Hex)bit bit
23 22

bit
0

10111111101000000000000000000000

Float32(F)Sign
1Exponent
01111111

Significand
01000000000000000000000

20+21+22+23+24+25+26 = 127
Negative

2-2 = 0.25

−1.25×2127-127 = −1.25

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-3

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic OperationsUBIN16(W)

Storing FFFF (Hex) in LDR0

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

Data type

Storing "MICROI" in LDR50
Select from Upper byte in Storage Method of String Data
LDR50
Stored value

String(S)

M
(4d)

I
(49)

LDR51
C
(43)

R
(52)

LDR53

LDR52
O
(4f)

I
(49)

00h

(No change)

Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byteLower byte

Select from Lower byte in Storage Method of String Data
LDR50
Stored value

I
(49)

M
(4d)

LDR51
R
(52)

C
(43)

LDR53

LDR52
I
(49)

O
(4f)

(No change)

00hUpper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byteLower byte

In the data types UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), and Float32(F), two words (upper word and lowerword) are used for a single value. The main unit and external devices communicate data in device
addresses in one word units, so when the upper word and lower word are sent in separate packets, thevalue may have already changed when the data for both words is received, which may cause an
unexpected result.

2-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications● Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings
The indirect specification of a device address means to add a value (indirect value) to the address number of the set
device address and use that address number as the actual read source or write destination. You can change the readsource or write destination address number just by changing this indirect value.
Add the indirect value to the address number of the device address set as the read source and read the value of theindirectly specified device address.
Example: To read an indirectly specified value of device address into LDR200
When the device set as the read source is LDR10 and the indirect value’s device address is D21, if 4
(indirect value: 4) is set in D21, the device address of the value actually read is LDR14.
Device address set as read source
Indirect value
D21
4
4 words

Device address for Indirect value
Device address with actually read value

LDR10
LDR11
LDR12
LDR13
LDR14

100
200
300
400
500

Read
LDR200500

Indirect write
Add the indirect value to the address number of the device address set as the write destination and write a value tothe indirectly specified device address.
Example: To write the value in LDR20 to an indirectly specified device address
When the device set as the write destination is LDR100 and the indirect value’s device address is D20, if 3
(indirect value: 3) is set in D20, the device address of the value actually written is LDR103.
Device address set as write source
Indirect value
D20
3

Device address for Indirect value

3 words

Device address with actually written value

LDR100LDR101LDR102LDR103

100
200
300
1000

Write
LDR20

1000

Parts you can indirectly read and indirectly writePart

Indirect readIndirect write

Word Button

YES

YES

Multi-Button

YES

YES

Numerical Input

YES

YES

Character Input

YES

YES

Numerical Display

YES

NO

Word Write Command

YES

YES

Script Command

YES

YES

Multi-Command

YES

YES

• Enter the value for indirect values as the data type UBIN16(W). Indirect values can be set in the range of
0 to 32767. When an indirect write is executed with an out-of-range indirect value, “Device range error”
is displayed. Similarly, when an indirect read is executed, the previous value before the indirect valuechanged is retained for a data display part, and “Device range error” is displayed for a part that is not adata display part.
• For reading device address indirectly, decide the read source address number after the indirect value changes
and after the screen changes, and then read the value of device address. For the device address of an
external device, communication may take some time as the value is read from the external device, so whentransferring or calculating the data that was read, repeatedly execute the corresponding part.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-5

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Indirect read2

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

1.2

Available Text

● FontFT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Supported Languages
The main unit can display multiple fonts by installing them. In addition to the fonts installed on the main unit, all
Windows fonts*1 displayed on your computer can be used on the display.

In addition, the main unit has a function that switches between two or more text groups dynamically. With thisfunction, the registration text of buttons can be switched to different languages according to the conditions.
For details, refer to Chapter 26 “Text Group” on page 26-1.
Group 1: English
Text ID: 1 Goal reached

External device

Main unit

D100 :

1

Goal reached

D100 :

2

䗴ᡆⴤḽ

D100 :

3

目標達成*1 Fonts that use the following character sets are not supported.
Other, OEM/DOS, Mac

2-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualGroup 2: ChineseGroup 3: Japanese

䗴ᡆⴤḽ

目標達成

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Installed Fonts in the Main Unit
This is the font installed in the main unit. The installed fonts vary based on the model.

■ FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
Font Name

Code System

Language

Japanese

Shift_JIS

Japanese

Western

ISO 8859-1

Icelandic, Irish, Italian, English, Dutch, Swedish, Spanish, Danish, German,
Norwegian, Portuguese, Finnish, Faeroese, French

Simplified Chinese

GB2312Chinese (Simplified Chinese)

Traditional Chinese

BIG5

Taiwanese (Traditional Chinese)

Hangul

KSC5601

KoreanCentral European

ANSI1250

Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Slovak, Slovene

BalticANSI1257

Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Greenlandic, Lappish

Cyrillic

ANSI1251

Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, Serbian 2, Macedonian, Russian

7-seg

ASCII

Displays number 0 to 9, alphabet character A to F, and symbols such asasterisk, plus, minus, and period only

■ HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P
Font Name

Code System

Language

Japanese

Shift_JIS(JIS level-1 andlevel-2 kanji sets)

Japanese

Western

ISO 8859-1 (Latin1)

Icelandic, Irish, Italian, English, Dutch, Swedish, Spanish, Danish, German,
Norwegian, Portuguese, Finnish, Faeroese, French

StrokeISO 8859-1 (Latin1)

Icelandic, Irish, Italian, English, Dutch, Swedish, Spanish, Danish, German,
Norwegian, Portuguese, Finnish, Faeroese, French

7-seg

ISO 8859-1 (Latin1)

Displays number 0 to 9, alphabet character A to F, and symbols such asasterisk, plus, minus, and period only

The main unit supports Stroke character code from 0x20 to 0x7E only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-7

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

All fonts installed in the FT2J/1J and the HG2J/1J are outline fonts, so they maintain a constant quality evenwhen scaling.

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Optional Fonts *1
Fonts downloaded from WindO/I-NV4.
Font Name

Code System

Language

Size

High-quality Japanese Font(First standard)

Japanese
Shift_JIS
Text can be displayed sharper when JIS level-1 kanji set is(JIS level-1 kanji set) enlarged.
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.

476KB

High-quality Japanese Font
(Second standard)

Japanese
Shift_JIS
Text can be displayed sharper when JIS level-2 kanji set is(JIS level-2 kanji set) enlarged.
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.

423KB

Simplified Chinese

GB2312Chinese237KB

Traditional Chinese

BIG5

Taiwanese

421KB

Hangul

KSC5601

Korean108KB

Icelandic, Irish, Italian, English, Dutch, Swedish, Spanish,
Danish, German, Norwegian, Portuguese, Finnish,
Faeroese, French
Text can be displayed sharper when European fonts areenlarged.
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.

101KB

High-quality Western Font

ISO 8859-1 (Latin1)

Central European

ANSI1250

Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Slovak, Slovene

5.25KB

BalticANSI1257

Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Greenlandic, Lappish

5.25KB

Cyrillic

ANSI1251

Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, Serbian 2, Macedonian,Russian

5.25KBThe single-byte part of Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese and Hangul are displayed with ISO 8859-1,
and as for double-byte part of Hangul, only the Hangul characters are supported.
The download size of font data is adjusted in multiples of 64KB.
The download size of font data is 64KB when the font size is 0KB or 64KB and smaller.
Example: When downloading Japanese large font (level-1 kanji set), Chinese, and European large fonts:
Font

Size

High-quality Japanese Font(First standard)

476KB

Simplified Chinese

237KB

High-quality Western Font

101KB

Total size of the font data:

814KB

Download size of font data:

832KB (814KB is adjusted in multiples of 64KB.)*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

2-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Available Fonts for Drawings and Parts

2

YES: Supported, NO: Not supported

Drawings

Buttons

Lamps

Data
Displays

ChartsInstalled Fonts inthe main unit*1

Optional Fonts*2

Windows Font

Text

YES

YES

YES

Bit Button

YES

YES

YES

Word Button

YES

YES

YES

Goto Screen Button

YES

YES

YES

Print Button

YES

YES

YES

Key Button

YES

YES

YES

Keypad

YES

YES

YES

Selector Switch*2

YES

YES

YES*3

Pilot Lamp

YES

YES

YES

Multi-State Lamp

YES

YES

YES

Numerical Input

YES

NO

YES

Character Input

YES

YES

NO

Message Display

YES

YES

YES*3*4

Message Switching Display

YES

YES

YES*3

Alarm List Display

YES

YES

YES*3

Alarm Log Display

YES

YES

YES*3

Data Log Display

YES

YES

NO

Numerical Display

YES

NO

YES

Calendar

YES

YES

NO

Bar Chart

YES

YES

YES*3

Line Chart

YES

YES

YES*3

Meter

YES

NO

NO

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Objects*1 The fonts that can be used vary based on the object. For details, refer to the setting of each object.
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 Windows font can be used only when the “Use Text Manager” is selected.
*4 Windows font can be used for fixed text only. Only the main unit-installed font and the optional fonts can be used for thevariable strings.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-9

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications● High-quality Fonts
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The high-quality fonts are the Japanese large fonts (first standard/second standard), and European fonts.
If you download high-quality fonts and select Use large font on the System tab in the Project Setting dialog box, themain unit can replace some of the optional fonts with the high-quality fonts.
Scaled text with a background color is replaced and displayed with these fonts for a more attractive look.
High-quality Western Font Display (Size 8x16)
W

0.5

1

2

3

4

5

H
0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

W
7

8

H
0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

2-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual6

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
High-quality Japanese Font Display (Size 8x16)

2

W
0.5

1

2

3

4

5

6

H

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

W
7

8

H
0.5
1
2
3

4

5

6

7

8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-11

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
High-quality Japanese Font Display (Size 16x16)
W
0.5

1

2

3

4

5

6

H
0.5
1
2

3

4

5

6

7

8

W
7

8

H
0.5
1
2

3

4

5

6

7

8

• When the high-quality fonts have not been downloaded into the operator interface, the installed fonts inthe main unit are used even if “Use large font” is selected.
• When the Character Input part display font size is 8x16, high-quality fonts are not displayed even if “Uselarge font” is selected.

2-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications● Windows Font
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Windows Font Settings
Windows Font settings are made in the Font Settings dialog box.

1 Click the Change button in the Windows Font group on the properties dialog box for Drawing Objects, Parts, or on
the Text Manager.

2 Set each item and click the OK button.
■ FontSelect the font to use.
■ Font style
Select italic, bold, or other style.
■ SizeSelect the size of the text.
■ SampleShows a preview using the specified font.
■ Script
Select the character set code.
• The right end of the text may have missing dots if Font style is set to Italic. You can remedy this byadding an extra space at the end of the line.
• An alternate font will be used if the Project Data uses a font that does not exist on the computer. Thismeans that text will appear differently if the Project Data is opened on another computer.

*1 Fonts that use the following character sets are not supported.
Other, OEM/DOS, Mac

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-13

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Selecting Windows Font for the Font property gives you access to all of the fonts*1 installed on your computer for use
on Drawing Objects and Parts. This allows you to display fonts and languages that are not installed on the main unit.

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Using Windows Fonts
This section describes how to use Windows Fonts.
• Selecting Windows Font for the Font property for Draw Objects and Parts automatically disables theseproperties:- Style:The style set under Windows Font will be used.

- Magnification: The width by height magnification will be set to 1 x 1. Note, Magnification can beselected on the Message Display, Message Switching Display, and Alarm List Display
parts, but will not be reflected on the actual text displayed. To use scrolling on theseparts, adjust the display area for text using the Magnification property.
• When the Place on the Top Layer check box on the Properties dialog box for parts with Windows fonts
set is selected, lines containing characters outside the part outline are not displayed.
To register and use a Windows Font in Text Manager
Applicable draw object

Applicable parts

Text
Buttons

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Print Button, Key Button,
Keypad, Selector Switch

Lamps

Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp

Data Displays

Message Display, Message Switching Display, Alarm List Display,
Alarm Log Display, Data Log Display

ChartsBar Chart, Line Chart

1 Select the Use Text Manager check box on the Properties dialog box for Draw Objects and Parts.
The Use Text Manager check box may appear in different locations depending on the object. This table showswhere to find this property:
Applicable objects

Location

Text

Properties dialog box

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Print Button, Key Button,
Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp

Registration Text tab

Selector Switch, Message Display

General tab

Message Switching Display

Message tab

Bar Chart

Label tabLine Chart

X-Axis tab, Y-Axis tab

The following parts display the text in the Text Manager, but the Use Text Manager check box is not
displayed.
Message Switching Display with Specify by Text ID selected on the Basic tab of the Properties dialog box,
Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, Data Log Display

2 Specify the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager.
• Using the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager, the text is displayed horizontally. even if
Vertical Writing is selected in the properties dialog box.
• In the Message Display, variable text “\@” appears as is.
• With the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display, line spacing is not automatically adjusted based on
the size of the text. Adjust it using the Line Height property on the Format tab.
• If text containing a carriage return is used for a label on a Bar or Line Chart, or for an Alarm List Display
or Alarm Log Display part, it will appear truncated after the carriage return if a non-Windows Font isused.
• When printing Alarm Logs, Text IDs set to a Windows Font will be printed using a font that exists on the main unit.

2-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
To select a font in the Properties dialog box
Applicable draw object

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Print Button, Key Button, Keypad

Lamps

Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp

Data Displays

Numerical Input, Character Input

Select Windows for Font on the Properties dialog box for a Draw Object or Part.
The Font property may appear in different locations depending on the part. This table shows where to find thisproperty:Part

Location

Text

Properties of Text dialog box

Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Print Button, Key Button, Pilot
Lamp, Multi-State Lamp

Registration Text tab

Numerical Input, Numerical Display

View tab

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-15

2WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Applicable parts

Text
Buttons

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications● Character Code Table
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Using the Character Code Table
Example: Finding the character code for the character “a” in the table.
Upper 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

Lower 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)

The upper four bits of the code are hexadecimal 6.
The lower four bits of the code are hexadecimal 1.
Therefore, the character code for "a" is as follows.

"a": 6 1
Lower 4 bits
Upper 4 bits

For other fonts and two-byte characters, refer to the table of the relevant code system.
Japanese: Shift_JIS(JIS First standard, JIS Second standard), Simplified Chinese: GB2312, Traditional
Chinese: BIG5, Hangul: KSC5601

2-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
High-quality Western Font (ISO 8859-1)

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Central European (ANSI 1250)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-17

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Baltic (ANSI 1257)

Cyrillic (ANSI 1251)

2-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Japanese Font (JIS X0201)

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Control Codes
Refer to the following table when using control codes in User Communications.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-19

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

1.3

Available Number of Colors
The available number of colors that can be used on the WindO/I-NV4 are listed below.
Model

Number of colors

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,

Picture Manager

65536 colors

HG2G-5F/-5T

Drawing objects and Properties sheet

256 colors

Picture Manager

Monochrome (16 shades)

Drawing objects and Properties sheet

Monochrome (16 shades)*1, HG1G/1P

HG2G-5T*2

1.4

TargetAvailable Image Files
The image file formats that can be displayed on the main unit are as follows.
File format

Description

JPEG

Supports JPEG files that conform to the JPEG standard (ISO/IEC 10918-1, ITU-T RecommendationT.81) that adopt baseline DCT coding. The JFIF extension specification is not supported.

BitmapSupports monochrome bitmaps, 16-color bitmaps, 256-color bitmaps, and 24-bit bitmaps in whichdata is stored from the bottom up. Run-length encoding is only supported for 256-color bitmaps.

• The main unit cannot handle image files that are larger than the size of the screen. Images that exceed
the screen size are not displayed.
• The Numerical Input, Character Input, Message Display, Message Switching Display, Numerical Display,
Calendar, and Meter cannot correctly display pictures that use a transparent color.
• IDEC recommends using bitmap image files when display speed is a priority. JPEG image files take moretime to display on the main unit than bitmap image files.
● Image File Management
Picture Manager is an application for managing pictures used for part diagrams and drawings.
• When saving, deleting, or reducing pictures, the following operations are displayed in Picture Manager.
- On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click(Picture Manager).
- Double click Picture Manager in the Project window.
• To set up the Picture from the Drawings, click on the editing screen where the Picture is positioned to display
Picture Manager.
• If setting a graphic for a positioned object, display Picture Manager from the Properties dialog box.

*1 Color LCD models*2 Monochrome LCD models

2-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications● Saving pictures in Picture Manager
This section describes how to save drawing objects in Picture Manager. Saved pictures can be used for part diagramsand drawings.
Saving image files

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

1 Click Import in Picture Manager.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

When managing pictures by category, create a new category, and select it. To create a category, click
Configure, and then click
Dialog Box” on page 2-31.

2(New Category) on the Category dialog box. For details, refer to “Category

2 Specify the image file, and then click Open.

Click Options to Apply Dithering or Color Exchange. For details, refer to “Open Dialog Box” on page 230.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-21

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
The picture is saved in Picture Manager. The name of the image file becomes the picture name.

(Picture name)• Even when the image is saved to a different category, if a picture of the same name is already saved inthat category, a confirmation message to overwrite the file is displayed.
- Click Yes to overwrite the image.
After overwriting, the image is saved in the list of the selected category, and the previous image isdeleted from the list.
Example:The picture "Picture00" is saved in the category "Pic_Lib".
If the picture "Picture00.bmp" is saved to the category "NewCategory01" the new image"Picture00" is saved to "NewCategory01" and the image named "Picture00" that waspreviously in "Pic_Lib" is deleted.

- Click No to stop saving the picture.
• If a picture is imported that is larger than the screen size, it will be automatically shrunk.
• When the product series set in the project being edited is FT1J or HG1J, images with 24-bit or higher
resolution will be registered in 24-bit.

2-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Selecting pictures from Symbol Factory

1 Click Symbol Factory in Picture Manager.

2

Symbol Factory is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

When managing pictures by category, create a new category, and select it. To create a category, click
Configure, and then click
Dialog Box” on page 2-31.

(New Category) on the Category dialog box. For details, refer to “Category

2 Select a category of pictures from Categories.
A list showing pictures in the category selected from Symbols is displayed.

(Categories tab)

(Symbol Options)

By using the settings in (Symbol Options), you can modify fill color and background color, and to flip or
rotate shapes. For details, refer to “Symbol Options” on page 2-33.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-23

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

3 Select a picture from (Categories tab) to display it in Preview.
The size of the picture displayed in Preview is equal the size of the registered picture.
The size of the picture displayed in Preview can be changed.
1. Right-click the picture displayed in Preview, then click Set Preview Size.
The Set Preview Size dialog box is displayed.
2. Specify the width and the height, and click OK.
Preview shows the picture with the specified size.
For details, refer to “ Set Preview Size Dialog Box” on page 2-35.

4 Right-click the picture displayed in Preview, then click Copy.
The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed.
You can also display the Picture Name Settings dialog box by double-clicking a picture displayed in Preview.

5 Enter the name of the graphic in Picture Name.
The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: " # $ & ' ( ) * / : ; < > ? \ ` | ~HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:"*/:<>?\|(Options)

Configures the image processing in Options. For details, refer to “Picture Name Setting Dialog Box” onpage 2-36.

2-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

6 Click OK.

The picture is saved in Picture Manager.

2

Saving drawing objects drawn on the editing screen
Drawing objects drawn on the editing screen are saved as pictures, in NMF (NV Metafile) format in Picture Manager.

1 Select and right-click the drawing object, then click Copy to Picture Manager.
The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed.

Grouped drawing objects can be saved to Picture Manager as a single picture.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-25

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

If a picture contains transparency or Transparent Color is selected as to for the imported picture, thetransparency range is displayed in magenta (R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

2 Enter the name of the drawing object in Picture Name.
The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: " # $ & ' ( ) * / : ; < > ? \ ` | ~HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: " * / : < > ? \ |(Options)

Configures the image processing in Options. For details, refer to “Picture Name Setting Dialog Box” onpage 2-36.

3 Click OK.

The drawing object is saved in Picture Manager.

If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency, thetransparency range is displayed in magenta (R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).

2-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications● Saving pictures as image files
To use a picture saved in Picture Manager on another computer, save the picture as an image file.

2

1 Select a picture to export, and then click Export.

• To select multiple pictures, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• To save as an image file in NMF (NV Metafile) format, select and right-click the drawing object drawn on
the editing screen, then click Export as NV Metafile.

2 Select the folder to save, and then click OK.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-27

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications● Picture Manager
Pictures used in pictures of part diagrams and drawings are managed using Picture Manager.

(Picture List)(Image)(Picture Name)(Check box)■

(Rename picture)
Renames the picture selected in the picture list. The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: " # $ & ' ( ) * / : ; < > ? \ ` | ~HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: " * / : < > ? \ |■(Delete)Deletes the picture selected in the picture list. Pictures that are used in project or parts cannot be deleted.

■(Reduce)
Deletes all the pictures not used in the project from the pictures saved in the picture list.

■(Check All)
Selects all of the check boxes for the pictures registered to the picture list.

■(Reset)Clears all of the check boxes for the pictures registered to the picture list.

■(Save Picture Files in External Memory Device)
Saves the image files for the pictures selected with the check boxes to external memory device.
Click this button to display the Select Drive dialog box.

■

(Category)
The name of the category is displayed.
Selects a category to save to when saving pictures.
When selecting a picture, select the category in which the arranged picture is saved.
The only default category is "Pic_Lib." To add a category, click Configure, and then click
Category dialog box.

(New Category) in the■ Configure
Opens the Category dialog box. You can add or change the category to save. For details, refer to “Category Dialog
Box” on page 2-31.

2-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications■ (Picture list)
The saved pictures are displayed as a list of images.
(Image):Click(Write Picture Files to External Memory Device) to save the image files for the pictures
selected with the check boxes to external memory device.
When the picture data is saved to external memory device, the amount of project data can be decreased,
which allows you to save the internal memory on the main unit. However, the display update rate of thepictures will become slower. To give priority to the display update rate, clear the check boxes.
If you place the cursor near an (Image) or (Picture Name), the size of the picture (width) x (height) and thefile size (kilobytes) is displayed in a popup.
■ Import
Save pictures in Picture Manager. Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving image
files” on page 2-21.
Supported file formats are as follows. When selecting images that are in WMF or ICO file format, the image isconverted to a bitmap before saving.
• BMP (bitmap file)• WMF (Windows Metafile)• JPEG• ICO (icon files)• NMF (NV Metafile)■ Export
Saves a picture selected in the picture list in BMP (bitmap), JPEG, or NMF (NV Metafile) file format, according to file
type. Click this button to display the Browse For Folder dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving pictures as image files”
on page 2-27.
Saved graphics can be saved using Import.
■ Symbol Factory
Display the Symbol Factory images. You can select an image provided by Symbol Factory on your project data. For
details, refer to “Symbol Factory” on page 2-32.
■ Select
Closes Picture Manager and sets the picture selected in the picture list.
■ CloseCloses Picture Manager.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-29

2WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations(Picture Name):(Check box):

An image of the picture is displayed. If a picture contains transparency or a picture is importedwith the option of enabling the transparency, the transparency range is displayed in magenta(R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).
The name of the picture is displayed.
Select this check box to save the picture data to external memory device and use it.

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Open Dialog Box
By clicking Options, you have the option to set the Apply Dithering and Color Exchange for the image to beregistered in the Picture Manager.

■ Apply Dithering
Selects this check box to perform dithering (error diffusion method) on images.
This function enables some images with tonal gradations and photo-like pictures to be rendered more beautifully
when they are saved.
■ Color Exchange
Selects this check box to convert the color of the picture.
From: Specifies color before conversion. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Specify the color,
and then click OK.
to:Selects the color after conversion (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades). Click this button to display the
Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette. Transparent Color can also be selected.
• The display of magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) used in registered pictures will vary based on the setting of
the Color Exchange check box.
Cleared:

Displays in magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255). However, if used on an object placed on the Top
layer, it will display magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) on the editing screen and transparent on themain unit.

Selected: Becomes transparent.
• If a color conversion to transparent is done when the monitor used for WindO/I-NV4 is a 16-bit color or256-color display, even colors other than the color specified in From may appear transparent. However,on the main unit they will appear normally.

2-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Category Dialog Box
Manage the categories where pictures are registered.

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations(Category List)■(New Category)
Creates a new category in the Category List.
The default category name is "NewBookn" (n: Number).

■(Delete Category)
Deletes a category from the Category List.

■(Rename Category)
Changes the name of the category selected in the Category List. The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the category name.
"*/:<>?\|■ (Category List)
The name of the category is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-31

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Symbol Factory
Symbol Factory is an English-version library tool that offers 5,000 images.

(Categories tab)

(Symbol Options)

For details, see online help for Symbol Factory.

■ Categories
The images supplied by Symbol Factory are divided into categories. Selects categories of pictures saved in PictureManager.
■ (Categories tab)Opens a tab for a category name selected from Categories, and shows a list of pictures. Selects a picture saved in
Picture Manager.
■ Preview
Display a picture selected from (Categories tab) according to (Symbol Options) setting.
■ (Symbol Options)
Modify the fill and background color and flip or rotate shapes. For details, refer to “Symbol Options” on page 2-33.

2-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

Symbol Options
Modify the fill color and background color, and to flip or rotate a picture selected in (Categories tab).

2■ Fill Color
Fill Color Mode: Select from the following picture color conversion methods.
Original:

The color of the image is not changed.

Shaded:The image filled with different shades of the color selected in Fill Color (for a 3D
effect).

Solid:The image is filled uniformly in the color selected in Fill Color.

Hollow:

All color is deleted.

Selects the color used for Shaded or Solid modes. Click this button to display the Color Settings
dialog box. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Fill Color:

This option can only be set when Shaded or Solid are selected as the Fill Color Mode.
Original

Defaults:

ShadedSolid

Hollow

Returns all settings in Fill Color to their default.

■ Orientation
Flip:

Select from the following flipping methods.
None:

The image is not flipped.

Horizontal: The image is flipped horizontally.
Vertical:

The image is flipped vertically.

Both:

The image is flipped both horizontally and vertically.

None

Horizontal

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Vertical

Both

2-33

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations(Symbol Options)1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

Rotation:

Select from the following rotation methods.
0:

The image is not rotated.

90:

The image is rotated 90° counterclockwise.

180:

The image is rotated 180° counterclockwise.

270:

The image is rotated 270° counterclockwise.

None

90

180

270

■ Export Options
Background Color: Selects the background color of the image when saving an image in Picture Manager or exporting
an image using Export from the right-click menu. Click this button to display the Color Settings
dialog box. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Defaults:

Returns the background color configured to the picture to default.
When exporting an image in the following formats by clicking Export from the right-click menu, this setting
is not applied.
GIF, PNG, SVG, VML, WMF, XAML

■ Options
Retain above Settings for Other Categories: Select this check box to keep (Symbol Options) settings.

2-34

Default All:

Returns the settings in Fill Color, Orientation and Export Options totheir default.

Help:

Displays the Symbol Factory Help.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

Set Preview Size Dialog Box
Configures the size of picture selected from (Categories tab).

2(Height)(Setting Method)■ (Width)
Enters the width of the picture in pixels.
■ (Height)
Enters the height of the picture in pixels.
■ (Setting Method)
Selects the setting method of the picture size from the following.
I want to set both the height and the width:

Change the width and the height of a picture
individually. Enters the width and the height of thepicture.

I want to set just the width(height is automatically adjusted). : Lock aspect ratio and change the size of a picture.
Enters the width of the picture only.
I want to set just the height(width is automatically adjusted). : Lock aspect ratio and change the size of a picture.
Enters the height of the picture only.
■ Apply these settings globally to all categories
Select this check box to apply the specified size to all pictures.
If this check box is not selected, applies to the picture selected in (Categories tab).
■ Defaults
Returns the size configured to the picture to default.
■ Help
Displays the Symbol Factory Help.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-35

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations(Width)1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications
Picture Name Setting Dialog Box
Specifies a name for images saved in Picture Manager.

(Image)■ (Image)
An image of the picture is displayed.
■ Picture NameEnter a name for the picture. The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: " # $ & ' ( ) * / : ; < > ? \ ` | ~HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: " * / : < > ? \ |■ Apply Dithering
Select this check box to perform dithering (error diffusion method) on images.
This function enables some images with tonal gradations and photo-like pictures to be rendered more beautifully
when they are saved.
■ Color Exchange
Select this check box to convert the color of the picture.
From: Specifies color before conversion. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Specify the color,
and then click OK.
to:Selects the color after conversion (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades). Click this button to display the
Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette. Transparent Color can also be selected.
To make the background color of the picture saved from Symbol Factory transparent, set From andBackground Color in (Symbol Options) to R: 254, G: 254, B: 254.

2-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 WindO/I-NV4 Specifications

1.5

Available Sound Files
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The sound file formats that can be played on the main unit are as follows.

1.6

Description

File format

Wave files (.wav)

Data format

PCM

Sampling rate

8000, 11025, 12000, 16000, 24000, 22050, 32000, 44100, 48000*1 Hz

Quantization
bit rate

16-bitAudio type

Mono or stereo

File size

Max. 512 KB

Available Movie Files
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Movie files that meet the following specifications can be played with the main unit:
Item
File format
Movie
Audio

Description
HG5G/4G/3G-V:

AVI file (.avi)

HG4G/3G:MP4 file (.mp4)

HG5G/4G/3G-V:

Motion JPEG

HG4G/3G:

MPEG-4 Simple Profile

HG5G/4G/3G-V:

PMC (Sampling rate 8000, 11025, 12000, 16000, 24000, 22050, 32000, 44100 Hz)

HG4G/3G:

AAC-LC (Bit rate 32 kbps or less recommended)

Frame rate

30 fps or less (15 fps or less recommended)

Resolution

720 x 480 dots or less (640 x 480 dots or less recommended)

File size

64 Mbyte or less (32 Mbyte or less recommended)

The main unit may not be able to play the formats above correctly depending on the minimum system requirements.
In this situation, shrink the size of the file by lowering the frame rate or the resolution of the file or by lowering the bit
rate of the audio. If audio is unnecessary, set to a file without sound.
Movie files is only supported by models that are equipped with a video interface.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-37

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Item

2

2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV42
2.1

Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV4
Starting WindO/I-NV4■ Windows 11/10
Click Start, click All Apps, click IDEC Automation Organizer, and then click WindOI-NV4.
■ Windows 8
On the Start screen tiles, click WindOI-NV4.
■ Windows 7
Click Start, click Programs, click IDEC Automation Organizer, and then click WindOI-NV4.
WindO/I-NV4 starts.
You can also start WindO/I-NV4 by double-clicking WindO/I-NV4 icon on the desktop.

2-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV4● Automation Organizer Updater Dialog Box
Automation Organizer Updater dialog box is a feature that keeps WindO/I-NV4 up to date.
If a new version of Automation Organizer is released, the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box is displayed when
WindO/I-NV4 starts.

■ Available Updates
Date:
Information:Shows the date the software was released.
Shows the software's title and version.
Click on this link to connect to IDEC's download site.
The software can be updated by downloading and running the latest version.

■ Description
This area shows the details of the latest changes in the software.
■ Preference
The Update Preference dialog box is displayed when this button is clicked.
To update information when WindO/I-NV4 starts, check this check box.
The Automation Organizer Updater dialog box will be displayed when there is an update.

■ CloseCloses the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box and start WindO/I-NV4.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-39

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

In order to display the Automation Organizer Updater, your computer must be connected to the Internet.

2

2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV4● Project Recovery Dialog Box
The Project Recovery dialog box is a feature to restore edited project data if your computer crashes while you wereediting. With this feature, you can return crashed the project to its last-saved state and restore project data that was
being edited. The Project Recovery dialog box is displayed if there is crashed project data when WindO/I-NV4 starts.

(Recovery data list)■ (Recovery data list)
This list shows recoverable data for a crashed project.
Project Name:

Shows the project name.

Last Save Time:

Shows the date and time when the data was last saved.

■ RecoverSelect the recovery data from the list and click this button to open the project data. The recovery data is deleted
when the project data is saved.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected recovery data.
■ Delete All
Deletes all recovery data.
■ CloseCloses the Project Recovery dialog box.
Recovery data is not deleted. The Project Recovery dialog box will be displayed again the next time WindO/I-NV4
starts.
If WindO/I-NV4 crashes in a state where you edit a screen and perform Save Screens after saving the
project data, the screen is not saved in the project data. Select the recovery data with the Project Recovery
dialog box and recover the project data.

2.2

Exiting WindO/I-NV4
Clickand then click Exit WindO/I-NV4.

WindO/I-NV4 ends.

2-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions

3

Configuration & Functions

2

This section describes the names and functions that make up WindO/I-NV4.

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Quick access toolbar

Title barApplication menu
RibbonWorkspace

Editing window

Status bar
Right click menu

■ Title bar
The title bar shows the name of the project being edited and the name of this software, “WindO/I-NV4”.
■ Application menu
The application menu displays commands for handling project data such as commands for creating new project data,
opening project data, and saving project data. For details, refer to “3.1 Application Menu Command List” on page 242.
■ Quick access toolbar
The quick access toolbar is an area where you can locate commands that you use frequently. You can customize thistoolbar by adding or deleting buttons. For details, refer to “3.2 Quick Access Toolbar” on page 2-43.
■ RibbonThe ribbon shows commands for creating project data and transferring data to the main unit. Common commands are
separated into their own tabs, so you can quickly execute. For details, refer to “3.3 Ribbon Command List” on page 246.
■ Workspace
The workspace is the area where the Project window, the Object List window, the Part Library window, theToolbox window, etc. are located. You can change the position and method for displaying windows in the workspace.
For details, refer to “3.4 Windows Displayed in the Workspace” on page 2-56.
■ Editing window
The editing window is the area for editing Base Screens and Popup Screens.
■ Right click menu
The right click menu is a popup menu that is displayed when right clicking the mouse on drawing objects and parts ina list. It displays context sensitive commands.
■ Status bar
The status bar shows information such as the type number, communication driver, project data size, and cursor
position. You can change the items displayed on the status bar. For details, refer to “3.5 Status Bar” on page 2-57.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2-41

3 Configuration & Functions

3.1

Application Menu Command List
Commands that can be executed from the application button are listed below.
Command2-42

Description

New

Creates project data by configuring settings displayed in dialog boxes step by
step.

Open

Opens project data that has already been created.

Save

Saves the project data being edited.

Save As

Saves the project data being edited with a new name.

Print

Outputs the project data being edited to a printer or Word file.

Close

Closes the project data being edited.

Recent Projects

Shows the list of recently used project data, up to a maximum of ten items.

WindO/I-NV4 Options

Customizes WindO/I-NV4 and configures the work environment.

Exit WindO/I-NV4

Exits WindO/I-NV4.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions

3.2

Quick Access Toolbar● Quick access toolbar buttons and menus

Quick access toolbar● Customizing the quick access toolbar
If you click the(Customize Quick Access Toolbar) button, the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu is displayed.

You can change the quick access toolbar to any desired settings.
■ Changing the buttons displayed on the quick access toolbar
Check only the buttons you wish to display on the quick access toolbar.

■ More Commands
You can add or delete quick access toolbar commands.

1 Click the

button on the quick access toolbar and then click More Commands.

The Quick access toolbar on the WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-43

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Click on a quick access toolbar button or click on ▼ to the right of a button and then click on the displayed command
to execute that command.

3 Configuration & Functions

2 Add or delete commands.

To add a command
1
2

Select the command to add in Choose commands from.
Click on the command to add from the list and then click the Add>> button.
The command is added.

To delete a command
Click the command to delete and then click the Remove button.
The command is deleted.
• If you right click a command on the quick access toolbar and click Remove from Quick Access
Toolbar, that quick access toolbar command can be deleted.
• To change the order of the commands, drag and drop a command.
• To return to the quick access toolbar to its default settings, click the Reset button.
■ Show below the Ribbon
You can change the position of the quick access toolbar to be located below the ribbon.
Click the2-44

button on the quick access toolbar and then click Show below the Ribbon.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions
The quick access toolbar moves below the ribbon.

2

To return the quick access toolbar to its original position, click the

button and then click Show above the Ribbon.

You can also return the quick access toolbar to its original position with the following methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show above the Ribbon.
• Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize on the
WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box.
■ Minimize the Ribbon
You can change the format of the ribbon to be displayed only as tabs.
Click thebutton on the quick access toolbar and then click Minimize the Ribbon.

The ribbon is displayed as only tabs.

Click on a tab to display its commands.

To return the ribbon to its original state, click the

button and then click on the Maximize the Ribbon.

You can also change the ribbon to be displayed as only tabs with the following methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Minimize the Ribbon when switching to
the tab only display, or click Maximize the Ribbon when returning to the original state.
• Double click a tab.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-45

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

You can also change the quick access toolbar display position to be below the ribbon with the following
methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show below the Ribbon.
• Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize on the
WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box.

3 Configuration & Functions

3.3

Ribbon Command List

● HomeHome is where basic operations are performed such as creating a new screen, editing, and downloading project data.
■ Clipboard
Command

Description

Paste

Pastes the contents of the clipboard.

Cut

Cuts the selected object from the editing window and copies it to the clipboard.

Copy

Copies the selected object to the clipboard.

Duplicate

Duplicates the selected object.

■ Screens
Command

Description
Adds a new screen to the active project data.

New

Base Screen

Adds a new Base Screen.

Popup Screen

Adds a new Popup Screen.

Password Input Screens

Adds a new Password Input Screen to the active project data.
Opens a screen that has already been created.

Open

Base Screen

Opens a Base Screen that has already been created.

Popup Screen

Opens a Popup Screen that has already been created.

Password Input Screens

Opens a Password Input Screen that has already been created.

Open Previous Screen

Opens a screen number before the currently selected screen.

Open Next Screen

Opens a screen number after the currently selected screen.

DeleteDeletes the selected screen.

Reuse

Copies another project’s screens.

■ Drawings
Command

Shapes

Basic
ShapesDescription

Line

Draws a line.

Polyline

Draws a polyline.

PolygonDraws an object that connects two or more vertices with straight lines.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

Circle/Ellipse

Draws a circle or ellipse.

Arc

Draws an elliptical arc.

Pie

Draws a pie.

Equilateral Polygons

Draws a equilateral polygon (triangle, diamond, pentagon, hexagon, or octagon).

Fill*1

Paints the closed region of the drawing object.

PictureLoads drawing objects that are registered in the Picture Manager onto the edit
screen.

Text

Draws text. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
Loads text that is registered in the Text Manager.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

2-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ Parts
Command

Lamps

Data
Displays

ChartsCommands

2

Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.

Word Button

Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination
address number or to perform operations on the written value.

Goto Screen Button

Switches to another screen or displays a window.

Print Button

Outputs a screenshot to a printer or external memory devices.

Key Button

Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying files,
and operating other parts.

Multi-Button

Executes multiple commands at once.

KeypadA part comprised of Key Buttons. Enters numbers and characters into numerical orcharacter input parts.

Selector Switch*1

Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device. This is an exclusive control that only writes a single
value as 1 and all other values as 0.

Potentiometer*1

Writes a value selected by pressing a slider button to a word device.

Pilot Lamp

Displays images. Switches the displayed image according to the value of a bit device.

Multi-State Lamp

Displays images. Switches the displayed image according to the value of a word
device.

Numerical Input

Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write entered numbers.

Character Input

Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write the character code for entered characters.

Picture Display

Displays images. Switches, moves or enlarges/reduces the displayed image according
to the value of a device address, the bit status within a word device or at a fixed
period.

Video Display*2

Displays images and plays movie files.

Message Display

Loads fixed text strings and word device values as character codes and displays themon the screen.

Message Switching
Display

Switches the displayed fixed text string according to the value of a word device or thebit status within a word device.

Alarm List Display

Switches the displayed fixed text string according to the value of a device address. Can
display alarms and multiple fixed text strings.

Alarm Log Display

Displays the alarm log stored in the internal memory of the main unit.

Data Log Display

Displays the data log stored in the internal memory of the main unit or the external
memory device.

Numerical Display

Displays the numerical in the specified format.

Calendar

Displays the date and time using the calendar data of the main unit.

Bar Chart

Displays values of word devices in a Bar Chart or a Peak Chart.

Line Chart

Displays data logs and values of word devices in a Line Chart.

Pie Chart

Displays values of word devices in a Pie Chart.

Meter

Displays a value of a word device using a needle gauge.

Bit Write Command

Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.

Word Write
Command

Writes a value to a word device when certain trigger conditions are satisfied. Can beused to indirectly specify the destination address number or to perform operations on
the written value.

Goto Screen
Command

Switches to another screen or displays a window when certain trigger conditions are
satisfied.

Print Command

Outputs a screenshot to a printer or external memory devices when certain trigger
conditions are satisfied.

Script Command

Executes a script when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.

Multi-Command

Executes multiple commands at once when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.

Timer

Starts a countdown when certain trigger conditions are satisfied, and writes 1 to aninternal device (HMI Timer Relay LTC) after the set time has elapsed.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G-V, HG4G/3G with a video interface only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-47

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Buttons

Description

Bit Button

3 Configuration & Functions■ EditingCommand

Arrange

Description

Bring to Front

Moves the selected object to the front.

Send to Back

Moves the selected object to the back.

Group

Groups multiple objects.

Ungroup

Cancels the group.

Align

Align Left

Aligns selected objects to the left.

Align Center

Aligns selected objects to the center.

Align Right

Aligns selected objects to the right.

Align Top

Aligns selected objects to the top.

Align Middle

Aligns selected objects to the middle.

Align Bottom

Aligns selected objects to the bottom.

Make Horizontal
Spacing Equal

Aligns selected objects to be equally spaced horizontally.

Make Vertical
Spacing Equal

Aligns selected objects to be equally spaced vertically.

Rotate Right 90° Rotates selected drawing objects 90° to the right.
RotateRotate Left 90°

Rotates selected drawing objects 90° to the left.

Flip Vertical

Flips selected drawing objects vertically.

Flip Horizontal

Flips selected drawing objects horizontally.

SearchSearch for the specified Text ID.

Replace

Batch replaces a specified device address with a separate device address.*3
Batch replaces a specified font with a separate Windows font.

SelectSelects objects in the editing window.

AutoResize*3

Automatically changes the text size to the object’s size and display region.
A specific value is added to the device address number of the object when pastingand duplicating parts.

Increment Bit Number*4

Enables or disables the increment bit number function.
A specific value is added to the bit number of the object when pasting andduplicating parts.

*3 For the following external devices, this feature cannot be used because the device address format is different.
- The Manufacturer is ABB or Emerson- The Manufacturer is Allen-Bradley and the Communication Driver is Logix Native Tag(Ethernet)*4 For the following external devices, this feature cannot be used because the device address format is different.
- The Manufacturer is Emerson- The Manufacturer is Allen-Bradley and the Communication Driver is Logix Native Tag(Ethernet)

2-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ Project
Command

Description

2

Downloads project data to the main unit.
This is the same as clicking the Download icon.

Files to External Memory
DeviceStops the main unit and then downloads files to the external memory device inserted
in the main unit. The main unit resumes running when files have finished
downloading.

Files to External Memory
Device while running

Downloads files to the external memory device inserted in the main unit without
stopping it.

Runtime System of

Expansion Modules*5

Downloads the system software to the expansion modules attached to the main unit.
Uploads project data from the main unit.

UploadCompareProject Data

This is the same as clicking the Upload icon.

Stored Data in External
Memory Device

Uploads data from the External Memory Device folder for the currently running
project.
Compares the screen data and scripts in an existing project with the project data
currently being edited and displays the results of that comparison.

Compare Projects

This is the same as clicking the Compare icon.

Re-verify

Updates the comparison results to the most latest state.

Target Info.

Displays version information for the main unit system software and project
information.

Comm.Setup

Configures the communication target and communication conditions between thetarget and the main unit or between the computer and the main unit.

*5 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-49

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Download

Project Data

3 Configuration & Functions● Configuration
Configuration is where you configure the system settings for the main unit that will use the project data being edited.
■ System Setup
Command

Description

Project

Configures the main unit operations and functions.

Alarm Log

Configures the alarm log.

Data Log

Configures the data log.

Operation Log

Configures the operation log.

Data Storage Area

Changes the allocation of the data storage area.

RecipeConfigures recipes.

Data Copy*1

Configures the Data Copy function.

Preventive MaintenanceConfigures the preventative maintenance function.

E-mailConfigures the e-mail function.

Social Media*1

Configures the social media function.

File Transfer Settings

Configures the file transfer function (FTP client function).

Sound*2

Configures the sound function.

Multimedia Function*3

Configures the multimedia function.

Global Script

Configures one global script.

■ ProtectCommandUser Accounts

Description
Configures security function, user accounts, and passwords.

■ Manager
Command

Description

Picture Manager

Shows the Picture Manager. Manages the registered images for project use.

Text Manager

Shows the Text Manager. Manages registered text which can be used for Text, Part objects,
title of Popup Screen, messages with Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display.

Script Manager

Shows the Script Manager. Manages registered scripts for project use.

Protocol Manager

Shows the Protocol Manager. Manages the user communication protocols that have beencreated.

E-mail Address Book

Shows the E-mail Address Book. Manages e-mail addresses.

FTP Server Manager

Shows the FTP Server Manager. Manages FTP serveres.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and the models with an audio interface only.
*3 HG5G/4G/3G-V, HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

2-50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions● Online
Online is where you download created project data and files to the main unit, where you upload data from the mainunit, and where you perform monitoring.
■ Transfer
Description
Downloads project data to the main unit.

Download

Project Data

This is the same as clicking the Download icon.

Files to External Memory
DeviceStops the main unit and then downloads files to the external memory device
inserted in the main unit. The main unit resumes running when files have finished
downloading.

Files to External Memory
Device while running

Downloads files to the external memory device inserted in the main unit without
stopping it.

Runtime System of

Downloads the system software to the expansion modules attached to the mainunit.

Expansion Modules*1

Uploads project data from the main unit.
UploadProject Data

This is the same as clicking the Upload icon.

Stored Data in External
Memory Device

Uploads data from the External Memory Device folder for the currently running
project.

■ MICRO/I
Command

Displays version information for the main unit system software and project
information.

Target Info.

Clear

Format*2

Description

All

Clears all of the data stored in the internal memory on the main unit.

Alarm Log Data

Clears all of the alarm log data stored in the internal memory on the main unit.

Data Log Data

Clears all of the data log data stored in the internal memory on the main unit.

Operation Log Data

Clears all of the operation log data stored in the internal memory on the main unit.

Values from All Device
Addresses

Clears the values from all device addresses.

Stored Data in External
Memory Device

Clears data saved to the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
Formats the external memory device inserted in the main unit.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-51

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Command2

3 Configuration & Functions■ Monitors
Command

Description

Start/Stop Monitor

Starts or stops monitoring the main unit with WindO/I-NV4. An external device
is required when configuring it.

Go Offline/Online

Switch the main unit to Offline Mode or Online Mode. Under Offline Mode, you
can change values of device addresses with WindO/I-NV4 and check theoperation of project data on the main unit.

Screens

Shows or hides the Screen Monitor window.

Object List

Displays a value of device address in a popup and emphasizes the object thatis satisfying the trigger condition in the object list or script editor.

CustomShows or hides the Custom Monitor window.

Batch

Shows or hides the Batch Monitor window.

External Devices

Shows or hides the External Device Monitor window during 1:N
communication.

Open Current Screens

Opens a monitored screen in the editing window.

Back

Returns to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen
was changed.

Forward

Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before thescreen was changed with the Back command.

Go to
ScreenFirst Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with the smallest screen number in the project data.

Previous Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with a screen number one smaller than the Base
Screen currently displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive
numbers, this command switches to the closest number.

Screen Number

Switches to the Base Screen with a specified number.

Next Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with a screen number one larger than the Base
Screen currently displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive
numbers, this command switches to the closest number.

Last Screen

Switches to the Base Screen with the largest screen number in the projectdata.

■ Simulator
Command

Description
Launch Simulator.

Simulator

Load Value of Device Address(External Device, LK, LKR)
and RunLoad the project data, and the values of device addresses on the external
devices, HMI Keep Relays (LK), and HMI Keep Registers (LKR), and thenlaunch Simulator.

Clear Value of Device Address(External Device, LK, LKR)
and RunClear Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR) and Run■ Communication
Command
Setup

2-52

Description
Configures the communication target and communication conditions between
the target and the main unit or between the computer and the main unit.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions● View
View is where you can switch the workspace display and display the Tag Editor, Screen Diagram, and various
managers.

2

You can configure the items displayed in the editing window.

Command

Description

Project Window

Shows the Project window. This window displays the saved screens and project
related information.

Screen List

Shows the Screen List window. The window displays the screens saved in the
project as thumbnails.

Object List

Shows the Object List window. This window displays all of the graphics and parts
placed in an editing screen.

Part LibraryShows the Part Library window. The part designs are listed in a window. You canselect a design from the displayed list and drag and drop it from the library screen to
the edit screen to create a screen. You can also register drawings, parts, andgrouped parts on the editing screen.

Tag Editor

Shows the Tag Editor. This window displays the list of registered device address, tag
name, and comments.

Comparison Result

Shows the Comparison Result window. This window displays the results of thatcomparison of projects.

Screen Diagram

Shows the Screen Diagram. This window displays the Overlapping Screen
information, and the screen numbers and titles of the screens linked by the Goto
Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, the Numerical Input, the Character
Input, the Alarm List Display and the Alarm Log Display.

ToolboxShows the Toolbox window. This window displays Parts and Drawings.

Information

Shows the Information window. This window displays various information such as
error message.

Web Page Editor

Shows the Web Page Editor. Creates a Custom Web Page.

Control Function*1

Start up WindLDR. This is an editor for performing various control function settingsand creating ladder programs.

■ Show/Hide
Command

Description

Part Name

Shows or hides drawing object names and part names.

Device Address

Shows or hides device addresses and tag names.

Trigger Condition

Shows or hides trigger conditions.

Security Group

DisplayShows or hides the display security group set for parts.

Input

Shows or hides the input security group set for parts.

Top Layer

Shows or hides drawing objects and parts placed on the top layer.

Popup Screen

Shows or hides a Popup Screen’s number, display frame, and the part name of thepart calling that Popup Screen.

Overlay Screens

Shows or hides the configured overlay screens.

Commands

Shows or hides the dotted frame for commands.

Gridlines

Shows or hides the gridlines in the editing window.

*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-53

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations■ Workspace3 Configuration & Functions■ Screens
Command

Description

Focus Order

State

Changes the order to move the focus with Numerical Input and Character Input.
Reset

Returns the displayed images to the default images.

ON/OFF State

Switches between the ON image and the OFF image for buttons and lamps.

Previous State

Changes the image for the displayed part to the previous state.

State Number

Changes the image for the displayed part to the image for the part with thespecified number.

Next State

Changes the image for the displayed part to the next state.

Active User

Displays only the parts that correspond to the specified user.

Text Group

Changes the displayed text to the text of the specified text group.

■ ZoomCommand
Zoom

Description
Changes the magnification of the editing window.

■ Window
CommandClose All

Description
Closes all editing windows.

● Format
Format is where you change the style of drawing objects, arrange objects, and change their size.
■ Shape Style
Command

Description

1 dot

Sets the line width to one dot.

2 dots

Sets the line width to two dots.

3 dots

Sets the line width to three dots.

5 dots

Sets the line width to five dots.

Solid

Sets the line to solid.

Dot

Sets the line to dotted.

Dash

Sets the line to dashes.

Long Dash

Sets the line to long dashes.

Long Dash Dot

Sets the line to long dash dot.

Long Dash Dot Dot

Sets the line to long dash dot dot.

Pattern

Changes the pattern.

Foreground Color

Changes the pattern’s foreground color.

Background Color

Changes the pattern’s background color.

■ Text Style
Command

Description

Regular*1

Sets the text style to regular.

Bold*1

Sets the text style to bold.

Shadow*1

Gives the text a shadow.

Text Color

Changes the text color.

Text Background Color

Displays the text as if it were highlighted with a highlighter.

Shadow Color*1

Changes the color of the shadow added to text given a shadow.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

2-54

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ Arrange
Command

Description
Changes the X-coordinate of the selected object.

Y-coordinate

Changes the Y-coordinate of the selected object.

Bring to Front

Moves selected object to the front.

Send to Back

Moves selected object to the back.

Group

Groups selected objects so they can be handled as a single object.

UngroupRestores a grouped object to its individual objects.

Rotate Right 90°

Rotates selected objects right 90°.

Rotate Left 90°

Rotates selected objects left 90°.

Flip Vertical

Vertically flips selected objects.

Flip Horizontal

Horizontally flips selected objects.

Align Left

Aligns selected objects to the left.

Align Center

Aligns selected objects to the center.

Align Right

Aligns selected objects to the right.

Align Top

Aligns selected objects to the top.

Align Middle

Aligns selected objects to the middle.

Align Bottom

Aligns selected objects to the bottom.

Make Horizontal Spacing
Equal

Arranges selected objects to be equally spaced horizontally.

Make Vertical Spacing
Equal

Arranges selected objects to be equally spaced vertically.

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

X-coordinate■ SizeCommand

Description

Width

Changes the width of the selected object.

HeightChanges the height of the selected object.

Make Same Width

Makes the selected objects a uniform width.

Make Same Height

Makes the selected objects a uniform height.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-55

3 Configuration & Functions

3.4

Windows Displayed in the Workspace■ Project window
Displays base screens and popup screens created in the project, popup screens for standard Keypads, systemsettings, editors, and managers in a tree view.
Double-click the screen to open it. Operations such as duplicating and deleting screens can be performed from theright-click menu.
Double-click System settings to display the dialog box for each setting.
Double-click an editor or manager to display the editor or manager.
■ Screen List window
Displays base screens and popup screens created in the project, and popup screens for standard Keypads as
thumbnails.
Double-click the screen to open it. Operations such as duplicating and deleting screens can be performed from theright-click menu.
You can change the display magnification of the Screen List window. For details, refer to “Changing the position of
windows” on page 2-68.
■ Object List window
Displays a list of the objects placed in an editing screen.
Double-clicking an item to display an appropriate properties dialog box or editor.
You can filter by selecting the check boxes of the objects displayed in View Entities.
Drawing, Part, Parts on the Top Layer
You can change the items displayed in the Object List window. For details, refer to “Object List tab” on page 2-71.
■ Part Library
Displays a list of the objects registered as libraries.
Screens can be easily created by selecting library parts listed in the Part Library and dragging and dropping them onto
the edit screen. For details, refer to “5.6 Use Part Library” on page 2-86.
■ Tag Editor
Displays a list of device address tag names, comments, etc. For details, refer to “Specifying a device address with the
Tag Editor” on page 2-72.
■ Comparison Result window
Displays a comparison result of the project data. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “1.5 Comparing Project Data” on page
4-19.
■ Screen Diagram
Displays the Overlapping Screen information, and the screen numbers and titles of the screens linked by the Goto
Screen Button, the Multi-Button, the Numerical Input, the Character Input, the Alarm List Display, the Alarm Log
Display, the Goto Screen Command and the Multi-Command.
You can filter by selecting the check box of the display condition.
All, Previous Screens, Next Screens, Popup Screens, Overlapping Screens, Title■ Toolbox
Displays Drawing tools and parts.
You can click a tool to place it on the editing screen.
To cancel placement, click Select or press the ESC.
■ Information window
Displays warnings and error messages about the project being edited.
The error information displayed immediately after executing the model conversion will be lost when the
project is closed.

2-56

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions

3.5

Status Bar
Mode

Data Size

Communication Driver

Position

Snap to Grid

Preview

Grid Settings

Zoom

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Type Number

2

Text Group

Active User

Zoom Slider

Zoom In button
Zoom Out button● Status bar items■ ModeThis section of the status bar shows WindO/I-NV4’s current mode.
■ Type NumberThis section of the status bar shows the main unit type set in the project data being edited.
■ Communication DriverThis section of the status bar shows the communication driver set in the project data being edited.
■ Data Size
This section of the status bar shows the download data file size for the project data being edited.
When you save the project, the display is updated with the latest information.
■ Position
This section of the status bar shows the X- and Y-coordinates of the mouse cursor in the editing window.
■ Text Group
This section of the status bar shows the current text group. The text displayed in the editing window changes
according to the displayed text group.
To change the text group, click ▼ and select the text group.
■ Active User
This section of the status bar shows the active user. You can hide or show objects in the editing window according to
the security group of the displayed user.
To change the active user, click ▼ and select the user.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-57

3 Configuration & Functions■ Snap to Grid
Click

to align objects to the grid.

■ Grid Settings
You can change the style and spacing of the grid displayed in the editing window.
Click

Type:

Style:
Color:

to display the Grid Settings dialog box. Configure the items and click the OK button.

Selects the type of grid.
Touch Panel:
Aligns the grid to the touch panels.
Other:
Aligns the grid to the specified spacing.
Enter the spacing for the grid in Horizontal and Vertical.
Select the grid style with Dot or Line.
Select the grid color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to open the color palette. Select the color with the color palette.

2-58

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Configuration & Functions■ Preview
You can preview an edited screen.
Click

2

to open the preview window.

button to switch between the OFF image and ON image for buttons and lamps.

You can save the image displayed in the preview window as a bitmap image file by clicking the Copy button.
The preview display and the actual screen displayed on the main unit may differ.
For example, the image for overlay screens in the preview display is always shown in front. However, whendrawing objects and parts overlap on the base screen or popup screen, the display varies based on where
the drawing objects and parts are placed on the actual screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7.2Displaying Overlapping Drawings and Parts” on page 5-34
■ ZoomZoom shows the magnification of the editing window.
You can zoom in and zoom out by specifying the magnification.

1 Click Zoom on the status bar.

The Zoom dialog box is displayed.

2 Specifying the zoom magnification (50% to 400%) and click OK.

You can also specify the zoom magnification by dragging the zoom slider or clicking thethebutton andbutton.

● Customizing the status bar
You can change the commands displayed on the status bar.
Right click the status bar and check only the commands you wish to display on the status bar.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-59

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Click the4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4

4
4.1

Customizing WindO/I-NV4
Configuring the Work Environment
You can configure WindO/I-NV4 settings such as mode and options when editing screens, the path when selecting
files, and the path for automatic backups. The settings configured here are saved even when you exit WindO/I-NV4.
The procedure for configuring the work environment is shown below.

1 Click

and then click WindO/I-NV4 Options.

The WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as desired.

2-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4● General Tab

2

Enable Increment Address Number:

When copying or duplicating parts, select thischeck box to add a specified value (-999 to 999)
to address number of the device address set forthe original part before pasting it to the screen.

Enable Text Auto Resizing:

Select this box to automatically change the text
size according to a change in part size.

Enable Input Method Editor (IME) when entering Device Address: Select this box to enter characters other thanalphanumeric characters using the input method
editor (IME) in text boxes for entering device
addresses.
You cannot enter full-width characters in text boxes that only accept alphanumeric input, even if the IME isenabled.
Select this box to use full-width characters in tag names in the device address settings.
■ Bit Number Symbol*1
Select the separator for address numbers and bit numbers. When manually entering device address, you can enter
either separator, but they will be displayed using the symbol selected here.
Dot (WindLDR Format):

Separates the address number and bit number with a dot.
Example: D100.00

Dash (WindO/I-NV4 Format):

Separates the address number and bit number with a dash.
Example: D100-0■ Workspace
Workspace Setup:

Displays the Workspace Setup dialog box. You can configure items displayed in
the workspace window. For details, refer to “4.2 Customizing the Workspace”
on page 2-68

*1 For the following external devices, this feature cannot be used because the device address format is different.
- The Manufacturer is ABB or Emerson- The Manufacturer is Allen-Bradley and the Communication Driver is Logix Native Tag(Ethernet)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-61

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations■ Editing4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4■ Compatibility
Use Compatible functions from previous version: Select this box to enable functions from previous versions. For
details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.17 Compatible Tab” on page 4-85.
Use HG1B Compatible functions:

Select this box to enable previous functions (HG1B). For details,
refer to Chapter 4 “3.17 Compatible Tab” on page 4-85.

■ Error Check
Verify that a string is invalid E-mail format:

When setting the E-mail address, place a check mark in the checkbox to check the string format used for the E-mail address. The
check target is as follows:• Sender E-mail Address in the E-mail tab on the Project
Settings dialog box• E-mail Address on the E-mail Address dialog box• Import was executed on the E-mail Address Book dialog box.

● Default Preferences Tab

The settings on this tab become the defaults just after creating or opening a project. Thereafter, while
editing the project, of the properties dialog boxes for the screen or the part and the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box, the priority is given to the settings in the dialog box that you last closed with the OK.
■ Set Default Settings
Returns the settings to the default.
■ CommonWindows Font: When Windows is selected for Font of each setting, Font, Size, Character Set and Stylespecified here become the default. To change the default, click Change and change each item in the
Font dialog box.
Edit Mode:

Select whether or not to display the Properties dialog box for parts in the Advanced mode.
Basic:

Displays the Properties dialog box in Basic mode to use only basic functions.

Advanced: Displays the Properties dialog box in Advanced mode so that all functions can be used.
You can also change the mode by clicking on the Advanced button and the Basic button in the Properties
dialog box for parts.
■ Set Device Address and Trigger Condition automatically
Select this check box to set the initial values of the device address and trigger condition when the part is placed.

2-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4■ Color LCD models, Monochrome LCD models
The background color of the base screen, popup screen, and password input screen
specified here becomes the default.

Part Properties:

The properties of the part specified here becomes the default.

2

To set the shape to be used for the appearance design of the part, click the Shape button.
The View Browser is displayed. For details on other settings, refer to the description of theproperties of each part. The part properties that can be set are as follows.
Parts
Bit Button
Word Button
Goto Screen Button
Print Button
Key Button
Multi-Button

KeypadSettings
View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern when OFF
Foreground Color, Background Color, Pattern and Flash when ON
Size - W, H

Registration
Text tabFont-

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Switch - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Registration Text - Font
Size - W, H

View tab

Knob Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Switch - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

Registration
Text tab

Font

View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Slider Color
Plate Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Switch - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Foreground Color, Background Color, Pattern and Not Display
Image when OFF
Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern when ON
Size - W, H

Registration
Text tab

Font

View tabSize - W, H

Registration
Text tabFontState tabOFF state and state 0 to 15 of Settings - Image, Foreground Color,
Background Color, Pattern and Flash

View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Plate Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

Format tab

Font

View tabSize - W, H

View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Plate Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Switch - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

Buttons
Selector Switch

Potentiometer

Pilot Lamp

Lamps

Multi-State Lamp

Data
Displays

Numerical Input
Character Input
Message Display
Message Switching
Display
Numerical Display
Calendar
Picture Display

Video Display

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-63

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Screen Background
Color:

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4

Parts

Alarm List Display

Settings

View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Plate ColorLine Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Switch - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Plate ColorLine Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Switch - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

Format tab

Font

View tabPlate Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Space between Bars
Size - W, H

Scale tabShow Tick Numbers for X-Axis and Y-Axis - FontLabel tabShow Label for X-Axis and Show Label for Y-Axis - Font

View tab

The shape used for the appearance design of the part
Plate Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

X-Axis tab

Scale, Label and Cursor - Font

Y-Axis tab

Scale and Label - Font

View tabFlange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

View tabNeedle Color
Plate Color
Flange - Foreground Color, Background Color and Pattern
Size - W, H

Data
Displays
Alarm Log Display
Data Log Display

Bar Chart

ChartsLine Chart

Pie Chart

Meter

2-64

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4● Save Tab

2
WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations■ Save Project
Default file location: Specify the default save location of the project data.
Click Browse to display the Browse For Folder dialog box.
■ AutoSave
Save the following information every:
Specify the interval (5 to 60 minutes) for creating an AutoRecover file or Backup from a project
being edited.
This option can only be set when AutoRecover file or Backup is selected.
AutoRecover file: A project being edited is automatically saved as often as you want. The saved
AutoRecover file is used to recover the project if a power failure or otherwise
occurs that forces WindO/I-NV4 to quit. The AutoRecover file is automaticallydeleted when the project is manually saved or WindO/I-NV4 exits. When the
AutoRecover file exists, the Project Recovery dialog box is displayed when
WindO/I-NV4 starts. For details, refer to “Project Recovery Dialog Box” onpage 2-40.
Backup:A backup copy of a project being edited is created as often as you want. The
file name of the backup is as follows:
Project Name_Backup Date.pn4
Backup date format: YYYYMMDDhhmmss(YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second)
Example: Project Name is "TEST01" at 4:56:07 on January 23, 2016
TEST01_20160123045607.pn4
If the project file has not been changed, a backup will not be created when
the interval specified in Backup elapses.
Backup file location:
Specify the save location of the backup file.
Click Browse to display the Browse For Folder dialog box.
This option can only be set when Backup is selected.
Display Warning Message when the number of files exceeds:
Select the maximum number of backup files from the following.
100, 500, 1000
When the specified number of files has been exceeded, a warning
message is displayed when WindO/I-NV4 starts.
This option can only be set when Backup is selected.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-65

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4● Quick Access Toolbar Tab■ Choose commands from
Select the category of command to add. A list of commands for selected category is displayed.
■ Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon
To change the position of the quick access toolbar to be located below the ribbon, select this check box.
■ Add>>
Add a command to the Customizing the quick access toolbar list.
■ Remove
Delete a command from the Customizing the quick access toolbar list.
■ Customize Quick Access Toolbar
Shows the list of commands displayed on the quick access toolbar.
To change the order of the commands, drag and drop a command.
■ ResetReturns the settings of the quick access toolbar to their default.
For details about the quick access toolbar, refer to “3.2 Quick Access Toolbar” on page 2-43.

2-66

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4● Resources Tab

2

Check for Updates:

This function will check for any updates.
If a new version of Automation Organizer is released, the Automation Organizer Updater
dialog box is displayed.
For details, refer to “Automation Organizer Updater Dialog Box” on page 2-39.

■ Go to IDEC
Go online:

Shows the IDEC web page for free updates, manuals, and online services.

■ About WindO/I-NV4
About:

Shows the About WindO/I-NV4 dialog box and displays the version of WindO/I-NV4.

In order to display the Automation Organizer Updater, your computer must be connected to the Internet.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-67

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations■ Get updates

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4

4.2

Customizing the Workspace● Changing the position of windows
Disabling docking
You can change the display position of the window by dragging and dropping the title bar of the window or its tab todisable docking. Windows that are not docked are called floating windows.
• If you drag the title bar of the workspace window, you can move all the docked windows together.
Title bar

Drag and drop

• If you drag the tab of a workspace window, you can move just the selected window.

Drag and drop

Tab

Docking windows
You can dock a floating window to WindO/I-NV4’s left, right, top, or bottom frame or a separate window.

1 Drag the window’s title bar or tab.
The

2-68

(Docking) icon is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4

When the mouse cursor gets close to a
to dock the window is displayed.

(Docking) icon while dragging the title bar or tab, the location

2

2 Drop the title bar or tab on theframe or a separate window.

(Docking) icon to dock that window to WindO/I-NV4’s left, right, top, or bottom• If the workspace window is dropped on theicon, it is docked to WindO/I-NV4’s left, right, top, or bottom

frame.

• If a floating window is dropped on the(Docking) icon, it is docked to WindO/I-NV4’s left, right, top, or bottom

frame or a docked window.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-69

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Window docking
location4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4• If you put the mouse cursor on another window while dragging a floating windows title bar, theis displayed. Drop the title bar on thedisplayed window with the tabs.

(Docking) icon

(Docking) icon to dock the floating window to that window. Change the● Changing the display method of windows
Auto HideIf the workspace window is docked, you can change the widow to automatically hide and show only its tabs.
Click the(Auto Hide) icon to change the window to show only its tabs.

Auto Hide icon

Tabs

The window is displayed when you bring the mouse cursor close to the tabs.
Mouse cursor

2-70• Click(Auto Hide) to secure the window in place.

• Click(Close) to close the window.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Customizing WindO/I-NV4● Change the display contents
In the Workspace Settings dialog box displayed by clicking Workspace Setup under Workspace in General tabon the WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box, you can change the display of each window.
Screen List tab

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

This tab changes the zoom level of the Screen List window.

■ ZoomSelect the zoom magnification for the thumbnails displayed in the Screen List window from the following.
100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
Object List tab
This tab changes the items displayed in the Object List window.

■ List Items
Shows the list of items that can be displayed in the Object List window.
■ Add
Adds an item to Display Items.
Select an item in List Items and click this button to add it to Display Items.
■ Delete
Deletes an item from Display Items.
Select an item in Display Items and click this button.
■ Display Items
Shows the list of items that are displayed in the Object List window.
■ Up
Shifts the selected item upward in the Display Items list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected item downward in the Display Items list.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2

2-71

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings

5

WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings
This section describes common settings when creating project data.

5.1

Device Address Settings
Device addresses are memory on the main unit and external devices that can store values in bit or word units.
By setting device addresses to parts and functions, you can control the screen display and operation of parts.
Device addresses are specified by combining the device type and address number in the following formats.
Dot (WindLDR Format):

Device type

Address number . Bit number

Dash (WindO/I-NV4 Format):

Device type

Address number - Bit number

Address number and bit number separator

The device address can be directly entered or it can be set with the Tag Editor.
● Direct entry
Enter a device address with the keyboard following the basic format.
To enter the bit (0 to 15) for a word device, enter the address number, the bit number separator “.” or “-”, and the bit.
You can enter the address with either separator, but it is displayed according to the Bit Number Symbol setting. Bit
Number Symbol is set on the General tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box.
● Specifying a device address with the Tag Editor
To display the Tag Editor, click
to the right of the text box for setting the device address. Use this Tag Editor to set
the device address.
The Tag Editor is different when the Manufacturer of the external device is ABB, Allen-Bradley or Emerson. For
details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.

(Toolbar)(Address number list)■ TargetSelect the device that includes the device address that will be set from HMI Device*1, Control Device*1,
MICRO/I*2 or External Device (External Device ID): (External Device Name).
You can configure the External Device ID and the external device name in the Communications Driver Network
tab on the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab” onpage 4-55.

*1 FT2J/1J only
*2 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

2-72

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ Device Type
Select the device type.
The list only shows device types that can be used.

2■ Bit Number
Specifies the bit number in a word device (0 to 15). This option can only be configured when a word device is selected
for Device Type.
■ Show
Select from the following and display the device addresses on the (Address list).
All:

Displays all of the device addresses that can be used with the device selected in Target.

Used:

Displays only the device addresses that are used in the active project data.

Unused:Displays only the device addresses that are not used in the active project data.

■ (Toolbar)(Cut):

Cuts the selected tag name or comment from (Address number list) and copies it to the
clipboard.

(Copy):

Copies the selected tag name or comment to the clipboard.

(Paste):Pastes the contents of the clipboard.

(Delete):Deletes the selected tag name or comment.

(Import):Shows the Open dialog box.
Select a file with exported tag names and comments (CSV file), and then click Open tocollectively overwrite (Address number list) with the tag names and comments in theselected file.

(Export):

Displays the Export dialog box.
Select the location to save the file, enter a file name, and then click Save to save the tag
names and comments of (Address number list) as a CSV file.

(Cross Reference):

Shows the Cross Reference dialog box. For details, refer to “Cross Reference Dialog Box” onpage 2-74.

(Refresh):Updates the Use column on the Tag Editor.

(Add New Tag):

Adds the Allen-Bradley tag data.
This is valid only if the Logix Native Tag(Ethernet) driver of Allen-Bradley is selected
and the external device is selected from the Target. For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4
External Device Setup Manual.

(Edit Tag):

Edits the registered Allen-Bradley tag data.
This is valid only if the Logix Native Tag(Ethernet) driver of Allen-Bradley is selected
and the external device is selected from the Target. For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4
External Device Setup Manual.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-73

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations■ Address Number
Specify the address number. The range that can be set differs according to the device type selected.

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ (Address number list)
Displays a list of device addresses that match the specified condition.
Device Address:

Displays the device addresses of the selected Device Type.

Tag Name:

Displays the tag name of the address number.
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the tag name. The maximum number is 20 characters.

The following characters and names cannot be used in the tag name.
#$*+,-/Spaces and control characters
Same name as device address
Names that start with a number
Comment:

Displays the comment of the address number.
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the comment. The maximum number is 255 characters.
You can enter multi-line messages by inserting a newline.

To enter a multi-line comment, press and hold SHIFT and ENTER.
Used:

Displays how many times each address number has used.
The device addresses of the main unit and external devices are collectively managed in Tag Editor. Tag Editor
can be displayed with the following procedures.
• On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click• Double click Tag Editor in the Project window.

(Tag Editor).

Cross Reference Dialog Box
On the Tag Editor, select the device address, and then clicknumber, and part number where that device address is used.
Enter the device address in Device Address and click

2-74(Cross Reference) to show the screen type, screen(Reflesh) to see the updated data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings

5.2

Setting Conditional Expressions

2

Specify conditional expressions with Condition on the Trigger Condition tab.
Conditional expressions are specified by combining data and operators using the following basic format.
Operator

Data

Directly enter the conditional expression or specify it with the Trigger Conditions Settings dialog box.
● Direct entry
Enter the conditional expression with the keyboard.
• There is no limit on data or operators. However, the maximum number is 1500 characters.
Data

Operator

Data

to
Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

OperatorData... (within 480 characters)• To enter a device address for data, always enclose it with “[” and “]”.
Example: [LDR 100] == 10• To flip bits, enter “~” before the data.
• Parentheses “(” and “)” can be used.

(

Data

Operator

Data) Operator (Data

Operator

Data)• Operator priority is the same as scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 25 “6.5 About the Priority of the Operator” onpage 25-61.
● Configuring conditional expressions with the Trigger Condition Settings Dialog Box
You can easily configure a basic conditional expression using the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
• Up to a maximum of five items of data can be used.
Data

Operator

Data

to
Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data• To flip the bits in data, select the Not check box.
• Operator priority is the same as scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 25 “6.5 About the Priority of the Operator” onpage 25-61.

1 Click the Condition

button to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.

2 Click Value or Device Address and enter a value or device address.
To flip the bits in data, select the Not check box.

3 Select the operator.
4 Click the next Value or Device Address and enter a value or device address.
To flip the bits in data, select the Not check box.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the necessary number of conditions.
If you display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box after directly entering a conditional expression, that
expression will be reflected in the dialog box. However, if you entered an expression that cannot bereflected, the portion of the expression that could not be reflected is deleted when you click the OK buttonand close the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-75

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Data

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings● Data and operations that can be configured
Data
You can specify these types and values of data for conditional expressions.
Item
Value
Device Address

Description
Set a constant number as data.
The range that can be set differs according to the selected data type.
For details, refer to “Data types” on page 2-1.
Set a device address for a bit device or a word device that stores the value to be handled as data.

Operators
Specify the type of arithmetic operation to execute on the data. (In the table below,
hand number,indicates the right-hand number.)Operator

Arithmetic
operators

Relational
operators*1

Bitwiseoperators

Logicaloperators*1

indicates the operator’s leftSupported
deviceBit
Worddevice device

Details+

Addition

Adds-

Subtraction

Subtracts

from*Multiplication

Multiplies

and/Division

Divides

Calculates the remainder after dividing

and

.

by

.
.
.

%

Modulo==Equal toCompares if

is equal to!=Not equal toCompares if

is not equal to

>=
<=

by

.

.
.

Greater than orequal toLess than orequal toCompares if

is equal or greater thanCompares if

is equal or less thanCompares if

is greater than.
.

>Greater than<Less than&

Bitwise Logical AND Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit in|

Bitwise Logical OR

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit in^

Bitwise XOR(exclusive OR)

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of~

Bitwise NOT

<<

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Flips the logic of each bits of.
For word device and fixed values, 0 will be 65535 and 65535 will be 0.
For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.

YES

YES

Left shift

Shifts each bit of

YES

YES

>>

Right shift

YES

YES

&&

Logical AND

YES

YES

||

Logical OR

Shifts each bit of
to right forbit(s).
Calculates the logical product (AND) of a conditional expression
and a conditional expression.
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of a conditional expression and aconditional expression.

YES

YES

Compares if

is less than

.
.
and
and

.
.
and

.

to left forbit(s).

• You cannot select logical operators in the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
• You cannot mix bit devices and word devices in a conditional expression when using other than logicaloperators.
As a basic rule, conditional expressions are calculated in order from the left, but when multiple arithmetic
operations are combined, they are calculated according to the operator priority.
For [LDR10] == [LDR 11] + [LDR 12] * 2 + [LDR 13], the expression is calculated in the following order.
LDR10

==

LDR11

+

LDR12

*

2

+

LDR13

1
2
3
4
For the operator priority, refer to Chapter 25 “6.5 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 25-61.
*1 1 if satisfied, 0 if not satisfied.

2-76

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings● Setting and operation examples
Settings
Direct entry[LM 0] == [LM 1]

Data
LM0

Op.
==

Data
LM1

[LM 0] == [LM 1] & [LM 2]

Data
LM0

Op.
==

Data
LM1

[LM 0] == ~[LM 1]

Data
LM0

Op.
&

Data
LM1

1234 == [LDR 0]

100 <= [LDR 0] + [LDR 1] + [LDR 2] +[LDR 3]0 != [LDR 0] % 10

[LDR 0] == ~[LDR 1] & ~[LDR 2] &[LDR 3] &[LDR 4][LDR 10] + [LDR 11] == [LDR 12] +[LDR 13][LDR 10] == [LDR 11] + [LDR 12] * 2 +[LDR 13]

The condition is satisfied if the values of
LM0 and LM1 are equal.
Op.
&

Data
LM2

The condition is satisfied if the result of the
bitwise logical AND operation on LM1 andLM2 is equal to LM0.

Not

The condition is satisfied if the result offlipping the bits in LM1 is equal to LM0.
The condition is satisfied if the value of
LDR0 equals 1234.

Data
1234

Op.
==

Data
LDR0

Data
100

Op.
<=

Data
LDR0

Op.
+

Data
LDR1

Op.
+

Data
LDR2

Op.
+

Data
LDR3

Data
0

Op.
!=

Data
LDR0

Op.
%

Data
10

Data
LDR0

Op.
==

Data
LDR1

Op.
&

Data
LDR2

Op.
&

Data
LDR3

Op.
&

Data
LDR4

Not

Not

Data Op. Data Op. Data
LDR10 + LDR11 == LDR12
Op. Data+ LDR13
Data Op. Data Op. Data
LDR10 == LDR11 + LDR12
Op.
*

2

ActionData
2

Op. Data+ LDR13

The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of LDR0 through LDR3 is
100 or greater.
The condition is satisfied if the value of theremainder after LDR0 is divided by 10 does
not equal 0 (the value of LDR10 cannot be
entirely divided by 10).
The condition is satisfied if the bitwise
logical AND operation on the flipped bits of
LDR1, the flipped bits of LDR2, the value of
LDR3, and the value of LDR4 is equal to
LDR0.
The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of LDR12 and LDR13 isequal to the result of adding the values
LDR10 and LDR11.
The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of LDR11, LDR12
multiplied by two, and LDR13 is equal tothe value of LDR10.

100 <= [LDR 0] + [LDR 1] + [LDR 2] +[LDR 3] + [LDR 4] + [LDR 5] + [LDR 6]+ [LDR 7]

This expression cannot be
configured in the Trigger
Condition Settings dialog box
because it has over 6 items ofdata.

The condition is satisfied if the result of
adding the values of LDR0 through LDR7 is
100 or greater.

[LDR 10] + [LDR 11] == [LDR 12]*([LDR 13] + [LDR 14])This expression cannot be
configured on the Trigger
Condition Settings dialog box
because it contains parentheses.

The condition is satisfied if the result ofmultiplying the value of LDR12 by the
result of adding the values of LDR13 andLDR14 is equal to the result of adding thevalues of LDR10 and LDR11.

This expression cannot be
configured on the Trigger
1 == [LM 0] & [LM 1] || [LM 2] & [LM 3]
Condition Settings dialog box
because it uses logical operators.

The condition is satisfied if the logical OR
operation on the result of the bitwise logicalAND operation on LM0 and LM1 and theresult of the bitwise logical AND operation
on LM2 and LM3 is equal to 1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-77

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Trigger Condition Settings
dialog box

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings

5.3

Search for Text ID
Search for text IDs used for object properties, screen titles, project features and settings. Text IDs not used in the
project are not searched.

1 Press CTRL and F, or click Search in the Editing group on the Home tab.
The Search dialog box is displayed.

2 Set each item and click ENTER or Search.

(Search range)(Search results list)■ Text ID
Specifies the text ID (1 to 32,000) to search for.
■ (Search range)
Specify the search targets from the following items.
Object, Screen title, System
When System is selected, the search targets are the Alarm Log Settings, Data Log Settings, Operation Log Settings,
and Text Manager.
■ Search
Searches for the targets and display them in the search results.

2-78

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ (Search results list)
Displays information about the text ID found by searching.
Double clicking the cell allows you to display a dialog box with settings using text IDs.

2

Displays the screen or function that use the text ID.

Object:Displays the type or setting item name of object that uses the text ID.

Name:

Displays Part Name in the property dialog box of the object or the dialog box name of the function thatuses the text ID.

Settings:

Displays the corresponding setting items in the property dialog box of the object or the settings dialog boxof the function that use text IDs.

■ Search Result
Displays the number of search results.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-79

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Location:5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings

5.4

Replacing Device Addresses
Replace the device addresses set in the features, screens, and the properties of objects with another device
addresses.

1 Press CTRL and R, or click Replace in the Editing group on the Home tab.
The Replace dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Device Address tab.

(Target Screens)

3 Set each item and click ENTER or Replace.

2-80

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ Replace Type
Select the replacement method from the following.
Device Address:2

Replaces the device type and address number of the set number of device addresses.

Address Number with Relative Value:

Example: Find Device Type is LDR, Start Address Number is 0, End Address Number is 4
and Relative Value is 10.
LDR0, LDR1, LDR2, LDR3 and LDR4 are replaced with LDR10, LDR11, LDR12, LDR13
and LDR14.
■ Target Device
Selects the device type as either Bit Device or Word Device.
Can only be set when Device Address is set to Replace Type.
■ FindSpecify the device address to search for.
Can only be set when Device Address is set to Replace Type.
Target:Select the device that includes the device address to search for from HMI Device*1, Control

Device*1, MICRO/I*2 or External Device (External Device ID): (External Device Name).
You can configure the External Device ID and the external device name in the Communications
Driver Network tab on the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Device Type:

Select the device type. The list only shows device types that can be used.

Address Number: Specify the address number. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
Bit Number:Specify the bit number in a word device (0 to 15). This option can only be configured when a word
device is selected for Device Type.

■ Change toSpecify the device address after replacement.
Can only be set when Device Address is set to Replace Type.
Target:Select the device that includes the replaced device address from HMI Device*1, Control

Device*1, MICRO/I*2 or External Device (External Device ID): (External Device Name).
You can configure the External Device ID and the external device name in the Communications
Driver Network tab on the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Device Type:

Select the device type. The list only shows device types that can be used.

Address Number: Specify the address number. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
Bit Number:Specify the bit number in a word device (0 to 15). This option can only be configured when a word
device is selected for Device Type.

■ Points to Replace
Specify the number of device addresses to replace.
Can only be set when Device Address is set to Replace Type.

*1 FT2J/1J only
*2 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-81

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Adds the Relative Value from the Start Address Number to the End Address Number of theset device type.

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ SettingsSpecify the device address to search for and range of address numbers, and the relative value to shift.
Can only be set when Address Number with Relative Value is set to Replace Type.

Target:Select the device that includes the device address to search for from HMI Device*1,

Control Device*1, MICRO/I*2 or External Device (External Device ID): (External
Device Name).
You can configure the External Device ID and the external device name in theCommunications Driver Network tab on the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to
Chapter 4 “3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Find Device Type:

Select the device type. The list only shows device types that can be used.

Start Address Number: Specify the start address number to search for. The range that can be set varies based on
the selected device type.
End Address Number:Specify the end address number to search for. The range that can be set varies based on theselected device type.

Relative Value:

Specify the relative value to shift the address number. The range that can be set varies
based on the selected device type.

■ Search Range
Target:Select the target to search for device addresses from the following items.
All, Current Screen, Selected Screen, Project Settings, Alarm Log Settings,
Data Log Settings, Operation Log Settings, Preventive Maintenance Settings,
E-mail Settings, Social Media Settings, File Transfer Settings, Recipe Settings,
Data Copy Settings, Sound Settings, Multimedia Settings, User Accounts,
Text Group Settings, Script Manager, E-mail Address Book, FTP Server Manager,
User Communication(Target Screens):

The target screens are displayed in this list. Can only be set when Current Screen or
Selected Screen is set to Target.

Add:

Adds the selected screen to (Target Screens).
Click this button, displays the Open Screens dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 5“Opening specific screens” on page 5-4

DeleteDeletes the selected screens from the (Target Screens).

■ Replace
Search Search Range and replace the device address according to Replace Type.
• The settings such as parts may not work due to replacements as follows. In that case, check the settings.
- Replaced the HMI devices with the control devices*1 or external device addresses.
- Replaced writable device addresses with non-writable device addresses.
• A confirmation message is displayed with the device address, tag name, and comment before and after
replacement.
- Click Yes to replace the device address displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click Yes To All to replace all the target device addresses.
- Click No to display the next confirmation message without replacing the device address displayed in theconfirmation message.
- Click Cancel to stop replacing device addresses and return to the Replace dialog box.

*1 FT2J/1J only
*2 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

2-82

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings

5.5

Replacing Font

2

Replace the font set in the properties of objects with the Windows font.

1 Press CTRL and R, or click Replace in the Editing group on the Home tab.

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

The Replace dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Font tab.

(Target Screens)(Object)

3 Set each item and click ENTER or Replace.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-83

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ FindSpecify the font to search for.
(Font):

Select the font to search for from the following items:
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic,
Cyrillic, Standard*1, Stroke, 7-Segment*1, Windows

Size:

Specifies the text size to search for. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, 7-Segment

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke, 7-Segment

8 to 128

Style*1:

Selects Regular or Bold for text style to search for.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic or Standard.

Magnification*1: W, H:

Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text to search for.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic or Standard.

Change:Change the setting for Windows of Font. Click this button to display the Font dialog box. For
details, refer to “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
Can only be set when Windows is selected for Font.

SamplePreviews a sample of the specified font.

■ Change to
Set the Windows font to use as the font after replacement.
Change:Change the settings displayed. Click this button to display the Font dialog box. For details, refer to“Windows Font” on page 2-13.
Can only be set when Windows is selected for Font.

SamplePreviews a sample of the specified font.

■ Search Range

Select the target to search for the font from the following.

Target:Target: Select the screen to search for the font from the following.
All*2, Text Manager*2, All Screens, Current Screen, Selected Screen(Target Screens):

The target screens are displayed in this list. Can only be set when Current
Screen or Selected Screen is set to Target.

Add:

Adds the selected screen to (Target Screens).
Click this button, displays the Open Screens dialog box. For details, refer to
Chapter 5 “Opening specific screens” on page 5-4

Delete(Object):

Deletes the selected screens from the (Target Screens).

Specifies the object to search for fonts.
All Objects:

Targets all of the following objects.

Specify Objects:

Select the target object from the following.

Text, Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Print Button, Key Button,
Multi-Button, Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp, Numerical Input, Numerical Display*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 Only when Windows is selected as Find

2-84

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ Replace

Search Search Range and replace the font with the set contents.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-85

2WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations• Replacing fonts may cause the text not to be displayed due to garbled or mismatched sizes. In that case,check the font.
• A confirmation message is displayed with the device address, tag name, and comment before and after
replacement.
- Click Yes to replace the device address displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click Yes To All to replace all the target device addresses.
- Click No to display the next confirmation message without replacing the device address displayed in theconfirmation message.
- Click Cancel to stop replacing device addresses and return to the Replace dialog box.
• Fonts of objects placed on the screen in custom libraries in the parts library and of text IDs used for theseobjects are not replaced.

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings

5.6

Use Part Library● What Can Be Done with the Part Library Function
The part library is a window that manages all the objects registered as a library. Objects registered as a library arecalled library parts.
You can easily create a screen by selecting the library parts listed in the part library and dragging and dropping them
onto the editing screen.
The part library has a standard library, sample library, and custom library. The standard library displays library parts ofimages provided by WindO/I-NV4. The sample library provides library parts that combine and group multiple parts toachieve functionality similar to existing selector switches and potentiometers. In the standard library and sample
library, the type of parts and registered parts cannot be edited. The custom library allow you to register objects
created on the editing screen as library parts and reuse them. The custom library can be saved to a file for use inother projects or on other computers.
Category folder

Library ScreenPart Library

RegisterStandard Library

RegisterSample Library
Project 1

Custom Library

Library Parts
Part Library

Read out
Part Library

Reuse

Project 2

Reuse

Project 3

If you edit multiple projects on the same computer at the same time, you can use the same parts library.
However, you cannot create, delete, import, export, rename, register objects, or edit a library part in thecustom library of the part library on the WindO/I-NV4 opened after the second one.
If you want to use library parts of the custom library on another computer, save the category folder as a fileand import the file in another project.
Right-click Category Folder in the Part Library window to export and import the file.

2-86

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings● How to use the Library Part in a project1 Double click the category folder that contains the library part you want to use.

2

Images of library parts are displayed on the library screen.

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

2 Select the library part and drag and drop it on the editing screen.
Part Library

Drag and drop

Library Screen

If the library part is placed on the editing screen and the corresponding project does not recognize thedevice address, the device address setting associated with the part becomes blank.
Example: When a bit button (Destination Device Address: #M0), registered as a library part and is createdby using the HG5G-V project, is placed on the HG2J/1J project, the Destination Device Address
becomes blank.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-87

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings● How to register an object in the parts library

1 Select the destination to register an object from the parts library.
Double click "Library1" in the custom library.
To create a new destination to register it, click(New).

"Library1" is a category folder prepared as default. It can be renamed or deleted.

2 Select an object on the editing screen, and drag and drop it onto the library screen to register.
Part Library

Drag and drop

Library Screen• Object settings are registered in the library, however the settings in the Security tab, the tag names andthe comments of device addresses are not registered.
• Device address cannot be registered when following external device is used.
- Manufacturer is ABB- Manufacturer is Allen-Bradley and Communication Driver is "Logix Native Tag(Ethernet)"• Objects that group drawings and parts cannot be registered.
Right-click an object on the editing screen, and select the category folder displayed by clicking Register inPart Library, it can be registered as a library part.
This concludes registering in the part library.
When a library part is placed on the editing screen, the text set in the library part is registered in the Text
Manager of the project being edited, image files in the Picture Manager, and scripts in the Script Manager.
However, if the device address set in the library part does not correspond to the project in which the librarypart will be placed, the device address setting is deleted when placing it to the editing screen.

2-88

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings● How to use a registered library part on another computer
To use the library part registered in the custom library on another project, save it as a part library file (*.plf), and thenimport it to a project. Parts library files are per category folder of the custom library.

Exporting library parts

1 Select the category folder to export from the custom library in the part library navigation, and click
toolbar.

(Export) on the

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the save location and the file name, and then click Save.
The maximum number for the part library file name is 255 characters.
You cannot use periods and the following characters in the part library file name.
"*./:<>?\|
This concludes exporting part library file.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-89

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

Export and import the parts library file (*.plf) to use library parts created by other user as well.

2

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings
Importing library parts

1 Click(Import) on the toolbar of the part library.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select a part library file (*.plf), and then click Open.
The category folder of the imported part library file is displayed in the custom library.
If there are already 64 custom libraries in the part library, it cannot be imported. Click Cancel to close theOpen dialog box, delete an existing custom library, and then import it.
This concludes importing the part library file.

2-90

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings● Part LibraryThis section describes items and buttons on the Part Library.

2(Library Screen)

WindO/I-NV4 Features & Basic Operations

ͧToolbarͨ

(Standard Library)(Sample Library)(Custom Library)(Category folder)(Library Parts)■ (Toolbar)(New):Creates a new category folder in the custom library. A maximum of 64 folders can becreated.
The default is "Library**" (**: number).

(Rename):Select the category folder or the library parts of the selected custom library and click thisbutton to change the name.

(Delete):Deletes the category folder or the library parts of the selected custom library.

(Import):Loads the category folder of the custom library saved as a part library file (*.plf) into thepart library. For details, refer to “Importing library parts” on page 2-90.
Click this button to display the Open dialog box.

(Export):Exports and saves the category folder of the custom library as a part library file (*.plf).
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Exporting libraryparts” on page 2-89.
The saved part library file can be imported with/

(ON/OFF):(Import).

Switches between the ON image and the OFF image for parts on the library screen.

(Zoom Level): Enter the display magnification (50% to 400%) of the library screen, or select from thefollowing.
400%, 300%, 200%, 100%, 50%

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2-91

5 WindO/I-NV4 Common Operations and Settings■ (Standard Library)
The library of the default parts contained within WindO/I-NV4 is displayed. Double click to display the part images
contained in the selected category folder on the library screen.
■ (Sample Library)
Displays the library parts that combine multiple parts and group them to achieve a function similar to existing selector
switches and potentiometers. Double-click to display the part images included in the selected category folder on thelibrary screen. The settings of the library parts registered in the sample library are as follows. Change the settings
according to the application.
Type

Selector Switch

Settings

Description

Name

Notch_No_Return

Notch_Return2Notch_No_Return

Switch Type

3-Notch No-return

3-Notch Both-return2-Notch No-return

Ch1

LM0

LM0

LM0

Ch2

LM1

LM1

LM1

Ch3

LM2

LM2

—

Name

SliderData Type
Potentiometer

UBIN16(W)Minimum

0

Maximum

100

Destination Device
Address

LDR0■ (Custom Library)
Displays the created library. Double click to display the part image registered in the selected category folder on thelibrary screen.
Clicking allows you to change the custom library name.
You can create up to 64 custom libraries and register up to 128 parts in one custom library.
■ (Library Screen)
Displays the image of the library parts in this window.
When you have selected the category folder of the custom library, you can drag and drop objects placed on theediting screen to this screen to register them in the custom library.
You can also drag and drop library parts from the library screen onto the editing screen to use them in the current
project.

2-92

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 3

Communication with External Devices

This chapter describes the communication between the main unit and the external device.

1

Device Link Communication

3

1.1

Overview
Device Link Communication refers to the communication protocol used for communication with the main unit, via the
CPU Unit*1 or PLC Link Unit*1 Programming Port of the external device connected to the main unit.

The main unit continuously reads the values of the external device addresses on the currently displayed screen, andexternal devices (such as relays and registers) on the screens are updated with the latest data at all times.
When a button is pressed or a command is executed in the main unit screen, the value is written to the external
device address.
Device Link Communication
Main unit
External device
Numerical Display
Reference Device Address: D0
Bit Button
Destination Device Address: M0

Read
1234

D0:

1234
0

Write

1

M0:

When the read source is the value from the device address of the external device, read all the value of
device addresses used with the functions that are always executed during operation and the functions thatset for the displayed screens before starting the screens scan. Therefore, if a communication error occurs,check the connection with the external device configured to the project.
• Functions that are always executed during operation:
Project Settings, Alarm Log Settings, Data Log Settings, Operation Log Settings, Recipe Function,
Preventive Maintenance Function, E-mail Settings, Social Media Settings, File Transfer, FTP ServerManager, Sound Settings, Multimedia Settings, User Accounts and Global Script• Functions that set for the displayed screens:
Parts set on the overlaying Base Screens and the displayed screens
For details regarding the Device Link Communication, refer to Chapter 1 "Device Link Communication" andChapter 2 "Connection to External Devices" in the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.

*1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-1

Communication with External Devices

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1 Device Link Communication● Connection Types
There are two basic types of connections. 1:1 Communication, where an external device is connected to a main unit;
and 1:N Communication, where multiple external devices are connected to a main unit.
■ 1:1 Communication
The main unit is connected to a single external device.
Main unit

Device Link Communication

External device

Read
Write

■ 1:N Communication
The main unit is connected to multiple external devices.
Main unit

Device Link Communication

External device

Read
Write
Station No.1

Read
Write
Station No.2

Read
Write
Station No.3

1.2

Device Link Communication Settings
The external devices connected to the main unit are selected on the Select Communication Driver dialog box, or theCommunication Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box.
• By clicking, and then clicking New, following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings, the SelectCommunication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Create new project data by using theinteractive quick start” on page 4-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Communication Driver tab on the Project
Settings dialog box tab on the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Changing Communication
Drivers” on page 4-22.
Specify Manufacturer and Communication Driver for each CPU Unit*1 or each PLC Link Unit*1 of the external
device. For details regarding the correspondence model, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.

*1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device.

3-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2 O/I Link Communication

2

O/I Link Communication
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

3

Overview

Main unit
O/I Link Master

Device Link Communication
External device
Read

D1:

5678
1

0
Write

M1:

O/I Link Communication
Read

Numerical Display
Reference Device Address: D1

Write

Read

Write

Read

Write

5678

Bit Button
Destination Device Address: M1

Main unit
O/I Link Slave(Slave 1)

Main unit
O/I Link Slave(Slave 2)

Main unit
O/I Link Slave(Slave 15)

O/I Link Communication can only be used for the External Device Communication 1 of the main unit
used as the O/I Link Master. The settings of the communication driver and External Device ID for External
Device Communication 1 of the O/I Link Master and O/I Link Slave should be the same.
For details regarding the O/I Link Communication, refer to Chapter 3 "O/I Link Communication" in the
WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
• Use the runtime system version 4.01 or later for HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F/-5S/-S when connecting the
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5S/-S, HG1G/1P via O/I Link Communication.
• The FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P and the HG4F/3F/2F/2S/1F
use a different protocol for the O/I Link Communication. To communicate them via the O/I Link
Communication, select the Use the same O/I Link Communication as the HG4F/3F/2F/2S/1F
check box on the Compatible tab of the Project Settings dialog box.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-3Communication with External Devices

O/I Link Communication is a protocol for communication between Master and Slave, where a main unit connected tothe external device is configured as a Master and multiple main unit (Slaves) communicate with the external device
via the Master.
The Master main unit unit communicates with the external device by means of Device Link Communication. The
Master main unit is called an O/I Link Master and a slave main unit connected to the O/I Link Master is called an O/I
Link Slave. A maximum of 15 O/I Link Slaves can be connected to an O/I Link Master.

2 O/I Link Communication

2.2

O/I Link Communication Settings
These settings are configured under the O/I Link tab on the Project Settings dialog box. The Project Settings dialog
box can also be accessed using the following methods.
• Click Project on the Configuration tab.
• Double click Project Settings in the Project window.
The O/I Link Communication Settings can only be configured when O/I Link Master or O/I Link Slave is selectedin Function under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.5O/I Link Tab” on page 4-58.

3-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual3 DM Link Communication

3

DM Link Communication
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

3.1

3

Overview

This method uses a dedicated IDEC protocol, so a communication program is required in the external device.
DM Link Communication

Main unit

External device

DM1:

DM0:

999

1234

5678

Read
999
5678

Write

Numerical Display
Destination Device Address: DM0
Numerical Display
Reference Device Address: DM1

Dedicated DM Link memory
DM0
DM1
DM2

DM8190DM8191For details regarding the DM Link Communication, refer to Chapter 4 "DM Link Communication" in the
WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
● Communication Methods
Over the serial interface, when one external device is communicating with one main unit using this communication
method it is called DM Link 1:1 communication, and when one external device is communicating with multiple mainunits, it is called DM Link 1:N communication. When external devices and the main unit are communicating using DM

Link communication over the Ethernet interface (UDP protocol), it is called DM Link Ethernet (UDP) communication*1.

■ DM Link 1:1 Communication
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The external device is connected to a single main unit by using a serial interface.
External device

DM Link 1:1 Communication

Main unit

Read
Dedicated DM
Link memory

Write

The Event Transmission function from the main unit can be used with DM Link 1:1 Communication.
The Event Transmission function is a function that works as follows. When value in the dedicated DM Link memory of
the main unit is changed, the data is transmitted from the main unit to the external device.
External device
DM0:

100

DM1:

150

DM2:

200

DM Link 1:1 Communication

Main unit

Event transmission
Dedicated DM
Link memory

DM0:

0

100

DM1:

0

150

DM2:

0

200

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-5

Communication with External Devices

DM Link Communication reads and writes value to external devices using the dedicated DM Link memory of the main
unit. The device type of dedicated DM Link memory is DM.

3 DM Link Communication■ DM Link 1:N Communication
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The external device is connected to multiple main units by using a serial interface.
External device

DM Link 1:N Communication

Main unit

Read
Write
Station No.1

Dedicated DM
Link memory

Read
Write
Station No.2

Dedicated DM
Link memory

Read
Write
Station No.3

Dedicated DM
Link memory

The Event Transmission function cannot be used with DM Link 1:N Communication.

■ DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The external device is connected to multiple main units by using the Ethernet interface (UDP protocol).
DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication
HUB
External Devices(Computer, PLC or board computer)

Read

Main unit

Delicated DM
Link memory

Write• The Event Transmission function cannot be used with DM Link Ethernet (UDP) communication.
• In DM Link Ethernet (UDP) Communication, when a Response is returned from the main unit to acommand source, the Response can also be returned to specified addresses (IP Address, Port Number) at
the same time. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “DM Link Communication” in the WindO/I-NV4 External
Device Setup Manual.

3-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual3 DM Link Communication

3.2

DM Link Communication Settings
DM Link Communication settings are selected on the Select Communication Driver dialog box, or theCommunication Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box.
• By clicking, and then clicking New, following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings, the Select(UDP)*1 in Communication Driver.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-7

3Communication with External Devices

Communication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Create new project data by using theinteractive quick start” on page 4-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Communication Driver tab on the Project
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 4-22.
Select IDEC System in Manufacturer, and then select DM Link (1:1), DM Link (1:N) or DM Link Ethernet

4 No External Devices

4

No External Devices
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Overview
In this case, there is no communication with an external device, so the main unit operates as a standalone unit.
It is only possible to operate the main unit with relays and registers.
Main unit

Internal device

4.2

No external device

No External Devices Settings
No external devices settings are selected on the Select Communication Driver dialog box, or the Communication
Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box.
• By clicking, and then clicking New, following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings, the SelectCommunication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Create new project data by using theinteractive quick start” on page 4-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Communication Driver tab on the Project
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 4-22.
Select No External Devices in Manufacturer.

3-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

5

User Communication
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

5.1

3

Overview

User Communication is supported up to three interfaces of the main unit, either serial, Ethernet, or USB interfaces.
Main unit

Device Link Communication
External device

User communication
Data transmission

Data reception

External device

When the serial interface connecting external devices is RS485, a maximum of 31 external devices can beconnected. However, carefully check the specifications including the command settings and error
processing and verify whether or not multiple external devices is possible and if so how many number ofexternal devices may be supported.
• Flow Control setting is None.
• The maximum size of sent data and the maximum size of received data is 1,500 bytes.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-9Communication with External Devices

User Communication allows you to develop a communication protocol to transmit and receive data from an external
device, such as a barcode reader.

5 User Communication

5.2

User Communication Settings Procedure
This section describes the procedure for setting user communication.

● Create a new user communication protocol, and then configure it to a communication interface
Using Transmission Command and Receive Command
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

To use the commands for inching function with HG1P, refer to “Using Inching Function” on page 3-22.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Communication Interface tab on the Project Settings dialog box.

3 Select the interface for user communication under Interface Configuration, and then select the user
communication in Function under Interface Settings.

3-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

4 Specify the items for Interface Settings.
The settings vary based on the interface.

■ Serial Interface• FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P*1
 For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When SERIAL1(RS232C), SERIAL1(RS422/485), COM(RS232C), orCOM(RS422/485) is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 4-42.

■ Ethernet Interface
 For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When Protocol1 to Protocol7 is selected for Ethernet under Interface
Configuration” on page 4-45.
■ USB Interface
 For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When USB1(USB-A) or USB2(USB-A) is selected under Interface Configuration”
on page 4-47.

5 Click the User Communication tab.

*1 Only special product of HG1P is equipped with a serial interface (RS232C).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-11

3Communication with External Devices• HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-F
 For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When COM1, COM2, COM2(RS232C), or COM2(RS422/485) is selected underInterface Configuration” on page 4-41.

5 User Communication

6 Enter the name of the user communication protocol that will be set in Protocol Name.
The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
"*,/:;<>?\|

7 Set the time out (0 to 255) in Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec).
For details on the Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec), refer to “Receiving Character Time Out (x100msec)” on page 3-33.

3-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

8 Set Transmission (TXD) command.
Click Add under Command List.

The Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

3

Specify the transmitted data to the external device connected to the main unit and the conditions for transmitting
data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-13

Communication with External Devices

9 Select TXD in Type.

5 User Communication

10 Select the condition to transmit data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Rising-edge
Data is transmitted when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Falling-edge
Data is transmitted when the value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Satisfy the condition
Data is transmitted when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Fixed Period
Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval.
Set the time interval between data transmissions as 1 to 3600 (seconds) in Period (sec).

11 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting that data transmission was successfullycompleted in Completed Device Address under Detail.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

12 Specify the destination word device for the transmitted data size and error information in Status Device Address
under Detail.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

13 Specify the wait time (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when the data is transmitted inTransmission Wait (x100 msec) under Detail.

14 Enter a comment for transmission command in Comment under Detail.
The maximum number is 40 characters.

3-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

15 Set data for transmission command.
Click Add under Data List.

The Data Settings dialog box is displayed.

3
Communication with External Devices

16 Select data type in Type.
Data setting items are displayed.
For details on transmission command, refer to “Transmission (TXD) Command” on page 3-50.

17 Set the data, and then click OK.
The data configured in Data List on the Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-15

5 User Communication

18 Repeat steps 15 through 17 to set all the data for the transmission command.

• The data is displayed in Data List in the order they were set. To change the order of data, select data,
and then click Up or Down to shift it.
• Click Expand Data List to hide Type, Trigger Condition and Detail, the number of the data displayedin Data List will increase.

19 Click OK.
The transmission command configured in Command List and Data List on Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

3-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

20 Specify Receive (RXD) command.

Click Add under Command List.
The Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

3
Communication with External Devices

21 Select RXD in Type.
Define the data configuration for received data from the external device.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-17

5 User Communication

22 Select the condition for being ready to receive data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Always Enabled
The device is always ready to receive data.
■ While ON
Ready to receive data when the value of device address is 1.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ While OFF
Ready to receive data when the value of device address is 0.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ While satisfying the condition
Ready to receive data while a condition is satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the type of data handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

23 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting that data receiving was successfullycompleted in Completed Device Address under Detail.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If the value of Completed Device Address automatically is not set to 0 after it is set to 1, select the Not Clear
Completed Device Address automatically check box.

24 Specify the destination word device for the received data size and error information in Status Device Address under
Detail.

Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

25 Enter a comment for receive command in Comment under Detail.
The maximum number is 40 characters.

3-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

26 Set data for receive command.
Click Add under Data List.

The Data Settings dialog box is displayed.

3
Communication with External Devices

27 Select data type in Type.
Data setting items are displayed.
For details on receive command, refer to “Receive (RXD) Command” on page 3-63.

28 Specify the data, and then click OK.
The data configured in Data List on the Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-19

5 User Communication

29 Repeat steps 26 through 28 to specify all the data for the receive command.

• The data are displayed in Data List in the order they were set. To change the order of data, select data,
and then click Up or Down to shift it.
• Click Expand Data List to hide Type, Trigger Condition and Detail, the number of the data displayedin Data List will increase.

30 Click OK.
The receive command configured in Command List and Data List on Project Settings dialog box is displayed.
To add a transmission command, repeat steps 8 through 19. To add a receive command, repeat steps 20 through 29.

3-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

31 Configure all commands, click OK.

3
Communication with External Devices

This concludes configuring user communication to use Transmission (TXD) and Receive (RXD) commands.
To set the created user communication protocol to another user communication or to use it in anotherproject, click Copy to Protocol Manager to register it in Protocol Manager. For details on the Protocol
Manager, refer to “5.3 Protocol Manager” on page 3-33.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-21

5 User Communication
Using Inching Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Communication Interface Tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

3 Select the interface for user communication under Interface Configuration, and then select the User
Communication 1*1 in Function under Interface Settings.

*1 Inching function can be configured only for User Communication 1.

3-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

4 Specify the items for Interface Settings.
The settings vary based on the interface.

■ Serial Interface*1
 For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When SERIAL1(RS232C), SERIAL1(RS422/485), COM(RS232C), orCOM(RS422/485) is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 4-42.

3Communication with External Devices■ Ethernet Interface*2
 For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When Protocol1 to Protocol7 is selected for Ethernet under Interface
Configuration” on page 4-45.

5 Click the User Communication tab.

6 Enter the name of the user communication protocol that will be set in Protocol Name.
The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
"*,/:;<>?\|*1 Only special product is equipped with a serial interface (RS232C).
*2 This is applicable for models with an ethernet interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-23

5 User Communication

7 Double click the cell under Inching Function and select Enable.

8 Specifies the Execution Interval (x10 msec) as 40 to 1000 (20 ms increments).
9 Select the Inching check box.
The items displayed in Command List can be changed with the TXD, RXD and Inching check boxes.
Commands in Command List are displayed in the order they were created, but commands for inching
function are always displayed above the transmission and receive commands in the list.

10 Configure the transmission command for the Inching Function.
Click Add under Command List.

The Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

3-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

11 Select Inching in Type.
Specify the transmitted data for the inching function to the external device connected to the main unit and theconditions for transmitting data.

3
Communication with External Devices

12 With Function Key under Trigger Condition, select the function key (F1 to F12) to which the command will beassigned.

The function key is the switch on both sides of the screen of the HG1P.

13 Select the condition to transmit data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Always Enabled
Data is always transmitted at the specified execution interval while a function key is pressed.
■ While satisfying the condition
Data is transmitted at the specified execution interval while a condition is satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

14 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting that data transmission was successfullycompleted in Completed Device Address under Detail.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

15 Specify the destination word device for the transmitted data size and error information in Status Device Address
under Detail.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-25

5 User Communication

16 Enter a comment of the command for the inching function in Comment under Detail.
The maximum number is 40 characters.

17 Set the command data for the inching function.
Click Add under Data List.

The Data Settings dialog box is displayed.

18 Select data type in Type.
Data setting items are displayed.
For details on transmission command, refer to “Transmission (TXD) Command” on page 3-50.

3-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

19 Set the data, and then click OK.
The data configured in Data List on the Command Settings dialog box is displayed.

20 Repeat steps 17 through 19 to set all the command data for the inching function.

3
Communication with External Devices• The data are displayed in Data List in the order they were set. To change the order of data, select data,
and then click Up or Down to shift it.
• Click Expand Data List to hide Type, Trigger Condition and Detail, the number of the data displayedin Data List will increase.

21 Click OK.
The command for the inching function configured in Command List and Data List on Project Settings dialog box isdisplayed.
To add a command for inching function, repeat steps 10 through 20.
To add a transmission command, repeat steps 8 through 19 of “Using Transmission Command and Receive
Command”.
To add a receive command, repeat steps 20 through 29 of “Using Transmission Command and Receive Command”.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-27

5 User Communication

22 Configure all commands, click OK.

This concludes configuring user communication.
To set the created user communication protocol to another user communication or to use it in anotherproject, click Copy to Protocol Manager to register it in Protocol Manager. For details on the Protocol
Manager, refer to “5.3 Protocol Manager” on page 3-33.

3-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication● Configuring registered user communication protocol to another user communication
Configure an user communication protocol registered in Protocol Manager to another user communication.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

3

protocol list, and then click Open Protocol Manager.
Protocol Manager is displayed.

3 Select a user communication protocol in (Protocol List), and click OK.

(Protocol List)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-29

Communication with External Devices

2 In the User Communication tab on the Project Settings dialog box, select the user communication to set from the5 User Communication
The user communication protocol selected in Protocol Manager is configured to the user communication specified on
the Project Settings dialog box.

3-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication● Using registered user communication protocol on another project
To use the user communication protocol registered in Protocol Manager on another project, save it as a file, and thenimport it to a project.
Saving registered user communication protocol as a file3

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Protocol Manager.
Protocol Manager is displayed.

Communication with External Devices

2 Select the user communication protocol in (Protocol List), and then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

(Protocol List)

3 Specify the save location, and then click Save.
The name of the saved file will be the name of the protocol.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-31

5 User Communication
Importing user communication protocol

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Protocol Manager.
Protocol Manager is displayed.

2 On Protocol Manager, click Import.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify the user communication protocol file, and then click Open.
The user communication protocol is registered in Protocol Manager. The name of the user communication protocol fileis set as the name of the protocol.

3-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

5.3

Protocol Manager
User communication protocols to use in user communication can be created and registered protocols can be edited.

3(Protocol List)

Communication with External Devices(Type)■ (Protocol List)
Displays the registered user communication protocol.
No.:

Displays the number for managing the user communication protocol.

Protocol Name:Enter the name of the user communication protocol. The maximum number for protocol name is 40
characters.

You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
"*,/:;<>?\|
Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec) :Specify the time out value (0 to 255) from when 1 frame of data has been received to when the next frame ofdata starts to be received. A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. If theReceiving Character Time Out is set to 0, it is not monitored. These setting items are used only with receive
command.
Example: The received data (1 frame) is 2 bytes, While ON is selected as Trigger Type in Trigger Condition
and LM100 is set to Device Address, LM101 is set to Completed Device Address, and LDR110 is
set to Status Device Address
The data of second byte starts to be received before exceeding the Receiving Character Time Out
duration after the data of first byte is received, and the values of the Completed Device Address andStatus Device Address when receiving of the data has been successfully completed are as follows.
• The value of the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 1.
When the Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically check box is not selected, whenthe value of the Trigger Condition device address LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of theCompleted Device Address LM101 changes to 0.
When the Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically check box is selected, the valueof Completed Device Address LM101 remains 1, so set 0 if necessary.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-33

5 User Communication• The value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address number+0, bit 15) of the Status Device
Address LDR110 remains 0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration

Receive command
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

First byte of receive data

Second byte of receive data

1
0
1
0

Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1(address number+0, bit 15)
of Status Device Address LDR110 0

When the Receiving Character Time Out duration exceeds until the data of second byte starts to bereceived after the data of first byte is received, the value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address
number+0, bit 15) of the Status Device Address LDR110 changes to 1 and the Completed Device
Address LM101 remains 0. In addition, when the value of the Trigger Condition device address LM100
changes from 0 to 1, the value of LDR110 (address number +0, bit 15) changes to 0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration

Receive command
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

First byte of receive data

Second byte of receive data

1
0
1
0

Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1(address number+0, bit 15)
of Status Device Address LDR110 0

Inching Function*1: Displays whether or not the inching function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable. This can only be set for the User Communication 1.

By using the inching function, data is transmitted at the specified execution interval.
Inching refers to the inching operation of the drive section. It is a general term for drive operations that
repeatedly start and stop in small increments for each operation, such as starting and stopping the drive
section when a push button or switch is pushed and released.
Execution Interval (x10 msec)*1: Specifies the interval to send the commands for inching function as 40 to 1000 (20ms increments).

This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Inching Function.
The command cannot be sent at the specified execution interval if the following conditions occur:• The transmission processing for a command cannot be completed within the time set by Execution
Interval.
⇒ Set Execution Interval to a time longer than it takes to send the command.
• The inching function was used at the same time as user communication transmission or receive
processing.
⇒Do not use transmission commands, receive commands and commands for inching function at onetime.
One frame is transmitted with no character spacing.

*1 HG1P only

3-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

Adds a user communication protocol to the (Protocol List).

Copy Protocol:

Copies the selected user communication protocol in the (Protocol List).
Click this button to add a copy of the selected user communication protocol to the end of the(Protocol List).

Import:Imports a saved user communication protocol file. Click this button to display the Open dialog box.
For details, refer to “Importing user communication protocol” on page 3-32.

Export:Export and saves a user communication protocol selected in the (Protocol List) as a file.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving registered user
communication protocol as a file” on page 3-31.
Saved user communication protocols can be imported using Import.

Delete Protocol: Deletes a user communication protocol selected in the (Protocol List).
■ Command List
The command settings for the user communication protocol selected in the (Protocol List) are displayed.
(Type)*1:

Changes the items displayed in the list according to the type of command.
TXD, RXD:

Select this check box to display transmission and receive commands.

Inching:

Select this check box to display commands for the inching function.

User communication protocol commands are displayed in the order they were created, but commands forinching function are always displayed above the transmission and receive commands in the list.
No.:

Shows the number for managing command settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.

Type:

Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Key:

Shows the function keys (F1 to F12) assigned to the command. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.
This option is displayed only when the Inching check box is selected.

Trigger Type:Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Condition:Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double
clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box. The displayed content varies based on
Trigger Type.
Always Enabled:

Trigger conditions are not necessary, so nothing is displayed.

Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF:Shows the bit device or the bit of the word device as the condition.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy the condition:Shows the conditional expression.
Fixed Period:

Shows the period.

Completed:

Shows the device address for reporting when transmission or receiving of data is successfullycompleted. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Status:Shows the destination device address for the transmitted or received data size and error
information. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Comment:

Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Size:

Shows the command data size in bytes. The maximum is displayed if there is data that has the
Variable check box selected on the Data Settings dialog box. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.

*1 HG1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-35

3Communication with External Devices

Add Protocol:

5 User Communication

Add:

Adds a command to the Command List. A maximum of 255 commands may be added.
Click this button, displays the Command Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Command
Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-37.

Edit:

Edits the command selected in the Command List.
Click this button, displays the Command Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Command
Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-37.

Copy:

Copies the command selected in the Command List.
Click this button to add a copy of the selected command to the end of the Command List. Inching
function commands are added above the transmission and receive commands.

Up:

Shifts the selected command upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected command downward in the list.

Delete:Deletes the selected command from the Command List.
Adding, copying, and shifting up and down happen within the range of the same type of command. There
are two types of commands: TXD, RXD and Inching.

■ Data List
Displays the list of command data selected in the Command List.
No.:

Displays the number for managing the data. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-49.

Data:

Displays the data settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details,
refer to “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-49.

Add:

Add: Adds a data to Data List.
Click this button, displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog
Box” on page 3-49.

Edit:

Changes the selected data in Data List.
Click this button, displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog
Box” on page 3-49.

Copy:

Copies the selected data in Data List.
Click this button to add a copy of the selected data to the end of the Data List.

Up:

Shifts the selected data upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected data downward in the list.

Delete:Deletes the selected data from Data List.

■ Expand/Contract Command List
Shows or hides the Data List. By hiding Data List, the number of commands displayed in Command List will
increase.

3-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication● Command Settings Dialog Box
Specify the command details for user communication protocol.

3
Communication with External Devices

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-37

5 User Communication■ TypeSelect the type of communication command from the following items.
TXD:

A command for data transmission from the main unit to an external device.
External device

Main unit
Transmission
dataTransmission

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Processing of transmission command is as follows.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is Rising-edge, Device Address is LM100 andCompleted Device Address is LM101
When the value of the Trigger Condition device address LM100 changes to 1, data istransmitted by user communication from the main unit to the external device. When datatransmission is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device Address LM101
changes to 1.
State in which user
communication is
not operating

State in which data can betransmitted by user communicationStart
transmission

Transmission data

State in which user
communication is
not operating

Completetransmission

1
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
Rising-edge 0
Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

RXD:

1
0

A command for analyzing and processing data received by the main unit from an external device.
External device
Main unit

Receive

Receive data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Processing of receive command is as follows.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device Address is LM100 andCompleted Device Address is LM101
When the value of the Trigger Condition device address LM100 changes to 1, data can bereceived (ready to receive) by user communication, so when data is transmitted from theexternal device, the main unit starts to receive the data. When data receiving is successfullycompleted, the value of the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 1.
State in which user
communication is
not operating

State in which data can bereceived by user communication
Data transmission fromexternal device
Start
receiving

Receive data

1
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

3-38

1
0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualComplete
receiving

State in which user
communication is
not operating5 User Communication

Inching:

Commands that send data from the main unit to the external device and execute inching operations of thedriving part.
This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Inching Function on the Project Settings dialog
box.
External device

Main unit

3

Driving part
Transmission

Data of Inching function
K
(4Bh)

1
(31h)

SOH
(01h)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

HG1P

Processing of the command for the inching function is as follows:
Example: Function Key in Trigger Condition is F7, Trigger Type is While satisfying thecondition, Condition is LDR300==5 and Completed Device Address is LM300
When the value of the Condition LDR300 is 5 and the Function Key F7 is pressed, data istransmitted by user communication from the main unit to the external device.
When data transmission is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device Address
LM300 changes to 1.
State in which user
communication is
not operatingStart
transmission

State of the function key"F7"

State in which data can betransmitted by user communication

Data of Inching function

State in which user
communication is
not operating

Completetransmission

ON
OFF

Satisfied
Condition for While satisfying
the condition in Trigger Condition
is LDR300==5 Not satisfied

Value of Completed Device Address
LM300

1
0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-39

Communication with External Devices

SOH
(01h)

5 User Communication■ Trigger Condition
Set the trigger conditions for transmission or receiving of data.
TXD is selected as Type:
Trigger Type:A condition for data transmission is selected from the following.
Rising-edge: Data is transmitted when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

Falling-edge: Data is transmitted when the value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Satisfy the condition:
Data is transmitted when the condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

Fixed Period: Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval.
Fixed time interval

ActionExecution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Data Type:

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition. You can only
specify the internal device.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.

Condition:

Period (sec):

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
Specify the period for command execution from 1 to 3600 (seconds).
This is enabled only when Fixed Period is selected in Trigger Type.

RXD is selected as Type:
Trigger Type:

Selects the condition to be ready to receive data from the following.
Always Enabled: The main unit is always ready to receive data.
ActionWhile ON:

Always Enabled

Ready to receive data when the value of device address is 1.
1

Value of Device Address
0

Action3-40

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

EnabledEnabled5 User Communication

While OFF:

Ready to receive data when the value of device address is 0.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionEnabledEnabled3

EnabledSatisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionEnabledEnabledEnabledData Type:

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition. You can only specify
the internal device.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.

Condition:

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Inching is selected as Type:
Function Key:
Trigger Type:

Select the function key (F1 to F12) assigned to the command.
A condition for data transmission is selected from the following.
Always Enabled: Data is always transmitted at a configured execution interval while a function key ispressed.
ActionAlways Enabled

While satisfying the condition:
Data is transmitted at a configured execution interval while a condition is satisfied.
Execution Interval

Execution Interval

Execution

Execution

Execution Interval

Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionData Type:

Condition:

Execution

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-41

Communication with External Devices

While satisfying the condition:
Ready to receive data while the condition is satisfied.

5 User Communication■ DetailCompleted Device Address:
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting that data transmission or receiving was
successfully completed. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device Address is LM100 and Completed
Device Address is LM101
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device Address LM101
changes to 1. When the value of the Trigger Condition device address LM100 changes from 0 to 1, thevalue of the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 0.
Receive command

Receive data 1 frame

1
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

1
0

Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically:
Select this check box when the value of the Completed Device Address is not set to 0 automatically after itchanges to 1. This can be configured when RXD is selected as Type.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device Address is LM100 and Completed
Device Address is LM101
When the Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically check box is not selected:
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device Address LM101
changes to 1. When the first data of the next frame is received, the value of the Completed Device
Address LM101 changes to 0.
Receive command

Receive data 1 frame

Receive data 1 frame

1
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

1
0

When the Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically check box is selected:
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device Address LM101 is set
to 1. Even after the first data of the next frame is received, the value of the Completed Device Address
LM101 does not change to 0.
Receive command

Receive data 1 frame

1
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

3-42

1
0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Receive data 1 frame

5 User Communication

Status Device Address:

You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: When LDR110 is configured as Status Device Address(Starting address number) +0+1

LDR110LDR111

Error information and time out information
Transmitted or received data size (bytes)

TXD or Inching is selected as Type:
Address
numberBit

Function

Cause

Solution• The Calculation Start Position and Calculation
End Position are not stored in 1 frame.
• The Calculation End Position is set before
Calculation Start Position.

Change the Calculation
Start Position andCalculation End Position
settings.

• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII(LCR), the data size from Calculation Start
Position to Calculation End Position is odd
bytes.
• The ASCII data contains data other than ASCII(30h to 39h, 41h to 46h) data.

Change the Calculation
Start Position andCalculation End Position
settings and thetransmission data.

When data type is Registering Constant(Character) or Registering Constant(Hexadecimal), the value of the Index Device
Address does not match the Index No. of theregistered Registering Constant.

Change the data stored in
the Index Device Address.

Use Reference Device
Data Error

When data type is Device Address and theUse Reference Device Address check box isselected, the device address in which the valueof the Reference Device Address is stored as
offset has exceeded the valid range.

Change the value stored in
the Reference Device
Address.

6

Device Data Variable
Specification Error

When data type is Device Address, the
Variable check box is selected and Device
Address is selected, the value of device
address is negative or exceeds the setting(number of bytes x number of words).

Change the value of device
address to a positive value
or to a value that does notexceed the setting (numberof bytes x number ofwords).

7

Transmission
Command Abandon
Error

When transmitting command after the Trigger
Condition is satisfied, the command with thesame Command No. was transmitting ortransmission (transmission is not completed).

Increase the time interval
for starting transmission.

8

Inching Transmission
Command Abandon
Error

The processing to send the inching functioncommand did not complete within the time set
by Execution Interval (transmission is notcompleted)

Increase the Execution
Interval for inching.

0

BCC Error

1, 2Reserved

3

Registering Constant
Data Error

4

Reserved+05

9 to 15 Reserved

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-43

3Communication with External Devices

Specify the destination word device for the transmitted or received data size and error information. Error
information and command data size is stored at the beginning of the configured device address. When datatransmission or receiving has not successfully completed, the value of each bit changes to 1. The bits of the Status
Device Address changes to 0 when the trigger condition is satisfied and they are not changed to 0 automatically.
When Always Enabled is selected in Trigger Condition of receive command, the value of the Status Device
Address is kept as long as a Clear command is not executed.

5 User Communication

Address
number+1

Function

Description

Transmission Data Size (bytes) Stores the size of transmission data.

When the Error Information bit changes to 1, data is not transmitted, and the Transmission Completed
Device Address does not change to 1.
RXD is selected as Type:
Address
Bit
Function
number

0

1
2
3

4
+0

5

6

7

BCC error

Received Data
Size Error
Registering
Constant Data
Error
Registering
Constant Error

Cause

Solution

The BCC that calculated the receive data did not matchthe BCC that is appended to the receive data.
• The Calculation Start Position and Calculation End
Position are not stored in 1 frame.
• The Calculation End Position is set before Calculation
Start Position.
• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII (LCR), thedata size from Calculation Start Position to
Calculation End Position is odd bytes.
• The ASCII data contains data other than ASCII (30hto 39h, 41h to 46h) data.
The received data size of the data does not match thatof the specified receive command.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.
Change the Calculation
Start Position andCalculation End Position
settings.
Change the Calculation Start
Position and Calculation End
Position settings and thetransmission data from theexternal device.
Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

The Constant (Character) or Constant(Hexadecimal) set up with the receive command
does not match the receive data.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

No data matches the registered setting of theRegistering Constant data.
• When data type is Device Address andConversion Type is ASCII to Hexadecimal, acode other than 0 to 9 or A to F receives as data.
Device Data
• When data type is Device Address andConversion Error
Conversion Type is ASCII to Decimal, a codeother than 0 to 9 receives as data. Or the converted
data exceeds 65535.
When data type is Device Address and the Use
Reference Device Address check box is selected, theDevice Data
device address in which the value of the Reference
Device Address is stored as offset has exceeded the valid
Reference
range. Or the number of words setting of the device
Device Error
address is beyond the range of device address for whichdata is stored.
Terminal Code of In the receive command whose trigger condition is
being satisfied, the start code matches while the
Receive Data
Miscompare Error terminal code does not match.

Device Storing
Error

During the reception process of multiple received
commands, the total number of words of the next
device address to be stored exceeds 800 words.
•The stored device addresses that Type is Device
Address.
•Index device address whose Type is Registering
Constant (Character) or Registering Constant(Hexadecimal).

8 to 13 Reserved

3-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

Change the value of theReference Device Addressor the change the numberof words.
Check the transmission datafrom the external device.
Change settings so that the
total number of device
addresses used for storage
at one time does notexceed 800 words.
Change settings so that thetrigger conditions forseveral receive commands
are not satisfied, to reduce
the number of receive
commands that areprocessed.

5 User Communication

Address
numberFunction

14

Receiving Time
Out

15

Receiving
Character Time
Out

+0

Cause

Solution

1 frame of data is not received even when the preset
Receiving Time Out duration has passed after the
Trigger Condition is satisfied.
While 1 frame of data is being received, even after thetime out period—the specified time interval between
receiving data (from when 1 frame of data has been
received to when the next frame of data starts to bereceived)—has elapsed, the next frame of data does
not start to be received.

Address
Function
number+1
Receive Data Size (bytes)

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

Check the transmission datafrom the external device.

Description
Stores the size of receive data.

After the Receiving Character Time Out duration has elapsed, the receive data is analyzed. When the Error
Information bit changes to 1, data is not received, and the Receiving Completed Device Address does not change to 1.
Transmission Wait (x100 msec):
Specify the wait time (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when the data is transmitted. Thiscan be configured only when TXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
After the Transmission Wait duration has elapsed from when the trigger condition is satisfied, transmission starts.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM100
Transmission
Wait duration

Transmission command

Transmission data 1 frame

Transmission
Wait duration

Transmission data 1 frame

Value of Device Address LM100 1
when Trigger Condition is
Rising-edge 0

Receiving Time Out (x100 msec):
Set the time out (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when 1 frame of data has been received.
A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. If the Receiving Character Time Out
is set to 0, it is not monitored.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type, and While ON, While OFF, or While satisfying
the condition is selected in Trigger Type.
When 1 frame of data could not be received, even though the Receiving Time Out duration has elapsed fromwhen the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device Address (address
number+0, bit 14) changes to 1. When the Receiving Time Out duration elapses, the value of the Completed
Device Address does not change to 1, and the receive data is not processed.
When the trigger condition again changes from not satisfied to satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of
the Status Device Address (address number+0, bit 14) changes to 0. When the value of this bit is not 0, theReceiving Time Out cannot be detected.
Receiving Time Out duration
Value of Device Address when 1
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of the Receiving Time Out 1(address number+0, bit14)of the Status Device Address 0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-45

3Communication with External Devices

Bit5 User Communication

Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device Address is LM100, Status Device
Address is LDR110, Completed Device Address is LM101 and the Not Clear Completed Device
Address automatically check box is not selected
When Status Device Address is LDR110, error information and time out information is stored in each
bit of LDR110.
When receiving of 1 frame of data is completed before the Receiving Time Out duration has elapsed
from when the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device
Address LDR110 (address number+0, bit 14) remains 0.
Receiving Time Out duration

Receive data 1 frame

Receive command

Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Receive data 1 frame

10

Value of Receiving Time Out 1(address number+0, bit 14)
of Status Device Address LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device Address LM101
0

When receiving of 1 frame of data could not be completed by the time the Receiving Time Out duration
elapses from when the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status
Device Address LDR110 (address number+0, bit 14) changes to 1.
Receiving Time Out duration

Receive data 1 frame

Receive command
Value of Device Address LM100 when 1
Trigger Condition is While ON
0
Value of Receiving Time Out 1(address number+0, bit 14)
of Status Device Address LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device Address LM101
0Receiving Time Out duration

Receive data 1 frame

Receive command

Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

10

Value of Receiving Time Out 1(address number+0, bit 14)
of Status Device Address LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device Address LM1010Comment：

3-46Enter a comment for a command. The maximum number is 40 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication■ Data List
Shows a list of command data. Double clicking the line displays the Data Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-49. The maximum data size that can be configured is 1500
bytes per command.
The content displayed in lists varies based on the type of command.

3

Constant (Character):Constant (Hexadecimal):
Displays the specified data with each byte value enclosed in ' '.
'Data of the first byte' 'Data of the second byte' 'Data of the third byte' 'Data of the forth byte'
Example: '31' '32' '33' '34'
Device Address:
Displays the specified data enclosed by < >, in the following order.
<Device Address Conversion Type Number of bytes Variable Words Storage Method of data>
Device Address:

Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]When the Use Reference Device Address check box is selected, displays as
OFFSET([Device Address], [Reference Device Address])

Number of bytes:

Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or received data.

Conversion Type:

Display the conversion methods for values of device addresses as follows.
The Conversion Type varies based on the type selected in Type on theCommand Settings dialog box.
TXD: HEX-A: Hexadecimal to ASCII is selected
DEC-A: Decimal to ASCII is selected
No conversion is selected
N:
RXD: A-DEC: ASCII to Decimal is selected
A-HEX: ASCII to Hexadecimal is selected
No conversion is selected
N:

Variable:

When the Variable check box is selected, variables are displayed as follows.
V00: NULL(00h) is selected for transmission command
V [Device Address]: Device Address is selected for transmission command
V: In the case of receive command

Words:

Displays the number of word devices for transmitting or receiving data.

Storage Method of data: Displays the handling method for value of read device address as follows.
U: from Upper byte is selected
L: from Lower byte is selected
Example: <OFFSET([LDR0100], [LDR0300]) N 2V[LDR0200] 2 U>
Registering Constant (Character):
Displays the specified data enclosed in << >>.
<<Index No. of No. 1: Data of No. 1 Index No. of No. 2: Data of No. 2 ... Index No. of No. N: Data of No.
N Index Device Address>> (N = 1 to 100)
Data:

Displays the data enclosed by " "Index Device Address: Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]Example: <<1:"123" 2 :"456" 3 :"789" [LDR0100]>>
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal):
Displays the specified data enclosed in << >>.
<<Index No. of No. 1: Data of No. 1 Index No. of No. 2: Data of No. 2 ... Index No. of No. N: Data of No.
N Index Device Address>> (N = 1 to 100)
Data:

Displays the data enclosed by ' 'Index Device Address: Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]Example: <<1:'313233' 2:'343536' 3 :'373839' [LDR0100]>>

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-47

Communication with External Devices

Displays the specified data enclosed in " ".
"Data"
Example: "1234"

5 User Communication

BCC:

Displays the specified data enclosed in BCC ( ).
BCC(Calculation Start Position Calculation End Position Calculation Type Conversion Type Number of bytes)
Calculation Start Position:Displays the data position where the BCC calculation starts.
Calculation End Position: Displays the data position where the BCC calculation ends.
Calculation Type:

Display the methods to calculate the data between the Calculation Start
Position and Calculation End Position as follows.
XOR:

XOR is selected

ADD:

ADD is selected

ADD2: ADD (2's Complement) is selected

Conversion Type:LCR:

Modbus ASCII(LCR) is selected

CRC:

Modbus RTU(CRC) is selected

Display the conversion methods for values of device addresses as follows.
HEX-A: Hexadecimal to ASCII is selectedN:

Number of bytes:

No conversion is selected

Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or received data.

Example: BCC(2 1 XOR N 2)
Skip: Displays the specified data enclosed in Skip( ).
Skip(Number of bytes)
Example: Skip(2)Add:Adds a data to Data List.
Click this button, displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog Box” onpage 3-49.

Edit:

Changes the selected data in Data List.
Click this button, displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog Box” onpage 3-49.

Copy:

Copies the selected data in Data List.
Click this button to add a copy of the selected data to the end of Data List.

Up:

Shifts the selected data upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected data downward in the list.

Delete:Deletes the selected data from Data List.

■ Command Size (byte)
Displays the data size of a configured command.
The calculation method for command size varies based on the type selected in Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
TXD:

Number of bytes for Constant Data + Number of bytes for a data of Registering Constant + Number ofbytes of BCC + Number of bytes of Device Address x Words of Device Address

RXD:

Number of bytes for Constant Data + Number of bytes for a data of Registering Constant + Number ofbytes of BCC + Number of bytes of Skip + Number of bytes of Device Address x Words of Device Address■ Start Code, Terminal CodeDisplay the start code and the terminal code in hexadecimal notation.
■ Expand/Contract Data List
Shows or hides the Type, Trigger Condition and Detail. By hiding Type, Trigger Condition and Detail, thenumber of the data displayed in Data List will increase.

3-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication● Data Settings Dialog Box
Specify the transmitted or received data by a command.

3
Communication with External Devices■ TypeSelects data types from the following items.
Constant (Character), Constant (Hexadecimal), Device Address, Registering Constant (Character),
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal), BCC, Skip
Skip can only be configured when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
Setting item varies based on the selection in Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
When TXD or Inching is selected, refer to “Transmission (TXD) Command” on page 3-50.
When RXD is selected, refer to “Receive (RXD) Command” on page 3-63.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-49

5 User Communication● Transmission (TXD) Command
Constant (Character)
The character data is sent without being converted.
This can be configured only when TXD or Inching is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andConstant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ DataEnter character data to be transmitted (1 to 1,500 bytes). The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that ofa double-byte character is two bytes.
Example: Constant (Character) for transmission command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the character data is transmitted in the following order.
Transmission data

Data
1234
No
conversion

3-50

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Order of transmission

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Constant (Hexadecimal)
The hexadecimal data is sent without being converted.
Use this setting to send a control code of ASCII data (00h to 1Fh).
This can be configured only when TXD or Inching is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andConstant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

Communication with External Devices■ DataEnter hexadecimal data to be transmitted (1 to 1,500 bytes).
Example: Constant (Hexadecimal) for transmission command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, 1234h is transmitted in the order 12h and 34h.
Transmission data

Data
1234h

12h

34h

No
conversion
Order of transmission

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3

3-51

5 User Communication
Device Address
The value of device address is either not converted or converted to ASCII and then sent as data with the specified size.
This can be configured only when TXD or Inching is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andDevice Address is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Conversion Type:
Select the conversion rule for the value of device address from the following.
Hexadecimal to ASCII:
Decimal to ASCII:
No conversion:

Considers the value of device address as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it
to ASCII data.
Considers the value of device address as binary-coded decimal number and converts it to
ASCII data.
No conversion is performed.

Displays the example of the selected Conversion Type.
■ Device Address
Specify the source word device for transmitted data. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Use Reference Device Address
To change the source word device for transmitted data according to values of device address, select this check box
and specify a device address. You can only specify an internal device.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-5.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Storage Method of data
Select the handling method for the value of read device address. This can be configured only when No conversion is
selected under Conversion Type.
from Upper byte: Value of device addresses are read from the upper byte.
from Lower byte: Value of device addresses are read from the lower byte.
■ Number of bytes
Specify the number of bytes of transmitted data. The number of bytes that can be specified varies based on thesetting under Conversion Type.
Hexadecimal to ASCII:
Decimal to ASCII:
No conversion:

3-52

1 to 4
1 to 5
1 to 2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 99) of transmitted data.
■ Variable
Select this check box to change the transmitted data size according to conditions. This can be configured only when
No conversion is selected under Conversion Type. When the check box is not selected, the amount of data(bytes) transmitted is data (bytes) for Number of bytes x Words.
Send the data from the start data of the value of device address up to 00 (hexadecimal). Data 00
will not be sent. This setting is effective for sending only the character data section of character
data having 00 (hexadecimal) as the last data.

Device Address:

Specify a word device to which a number of bytes is applied for transmitted data.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the value of device address exceeds Number of bytes x Words, or when it is negative, theDevice Data Variable Specification Error (address number+0, bit 6) of the Status Device Addresschanges to 1, and transmission does not occur.

Examples: Device address for transmission command data
Example 1
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device address is read and data is transmitted in the following order.

Words: 3

Value of Device Address
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:5678h
LDR102:
9ABCh

Upper

Lower

Transmission data

12h

34h

12h

56h

78h

9Ah

BCh

from Upper byte
1 byte56h

9Ah

Order of transmission

No conversion

Example 2
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

3

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device address is read and data is transmitted in the following order.

Words: 3

Value of Device Address
1234h
LDR100:5678h
LDR101:LDR102:
9ABCh

Upper

Lower

12h

34h

56h

78h

9Ah

BCh

Transmission data
34hfrom Lower byte
2 bytes

12h

78h

56h

BCh

9Ah

Order of transmission

No conversion

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-53

Communication with External Devices

NULL(00h):

3

5 User Communication
Example 3
Item

Setting

Conversion Type

Hexadecimal to ASCII

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device address is read, and data is converted to ASCII andtransmitted in the following order.

Words: 2

Transmission data

Value of Device Address
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:
5678h

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

3
(33h)

2 bytes

4
(34h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

Order of transmission

Hexadecimal to ASCII

Example 4
Item

Setting

Conversion Type

Decimal to ASCII

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device address is read, and data is converted to ASCII andtransmitted in the following order.

Words: 2

Transmission data

Value of Device Address
LDR100:1234
LDR101:
5678

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

3
(33h)

2 bytes

4
(34h)

7
(37h)

8
(38h)

Order of transmission

Decimal to ASCII

Example 5
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableON, NULL(00h)When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device address is read and data is transmitted in the following
order.

Words: 2

Value of Device Address
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:
0056h

Upper

Lower

12h

34h

00h

56h

Transmission data12h

No conversion

3-54

34h

from Upper byte
2 bytes
Order of transmission

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Example 6
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableON, Device Address: LDR200

3

When the LDR200 value is 3

Words: 2

Value of Device Address
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:
5678h

Upper

Lower

Transmission data

12h

34h

34h

56h

78h

from Lower byte
2 bytes

No conversion

12h

78h

LDR200=3
Order of transmission

Example 7
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

ON, Device Address: LDR200

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device address is read and data is transmitted in the following
order.
When the LDR200 value is 2

LDR200=2
Words: 2

Value of Device Address
LDR100:1234h
LDR101:5678h
LDR102:2537h
LDR103:
4619h

Upper

Lower

25h

37h

46h

19h

Transmission data
25hfrom Upper byte
2 bytes

37h

46h

19h

Order of transmission

No conversion

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-55

Communication with External Devices

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device address is read and data is transmitted in the following
order.

5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Character)
From the registered character data, character data according to the value of device address is read and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD or Inching is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andRegistering Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered character data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the character data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the character data.

Data:

Shows the character data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the character data.
■ DataEnter the character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that ofa double-byte character is two bytes.
The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device Address
Specify the source word device to serve as the Index No. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

3-56

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Example: Transmission command for Registering Constant (Character) data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 123

Registering Constants

3

Index No. 2: 456

Index Device Address

Communication with External Devices

Index No. 3: 789
LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the data of the Index No. according to the value of device address istransmitted.
When the LDR100 value is 2
Index No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
3:
Constants: 3

Data
123
456
789

Transmission data
Index Device Address
LDR100=2

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

Order of transmission

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-57

5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)
From the registered hexadecimal data, the hexadecimal data according to the value of device address is read andtransmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD or Inching is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andRegistering Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered hexadecimal data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the hexadecimal data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the hexadecimal data.

Data:

Shows the hexadecimal data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the hexadecimal data.
■ DataEnter the hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered.
The data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device Address
Specify the source word device to serve as the Index No. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

3-58

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Example: Transmission command for Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 1234

Registering Constants

3

Index No. 2: 5678

Index Device Address

Communication with External Devices

Index No. 3: 2537
LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the data of the Index No. according to the value of device address istransmitted.
When the LDR100 value is 3
Index No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
Constants: 3
3:

Data
1234h
5678h
2537h

Transmission data
25h
Index Device Address
LDR100=337h

Order of transmission

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-59

5 User Communication
BCC (Block Check Code)A BCC for the transmission data is automatically calculated and appended to the transmission data at an arbitrary
position and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD or Inching is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, andBCC is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Calculation Start Position
Specify the position of transmission data at which BCC calculation starts (1 to 15). The position is counted backwards,
with the first position of the transmission data taken as 1.
Calculation Start Position:
Transmission data:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation End Position
Specify the position of transmission data at which BCC calculation ends (0 to 15). The position is counted forwards,
with the data position before the BCC taken as 0.
Transmission data:
Calculation End Position:

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation Type
Select the method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position.
XOR:

Calculates the data with exclusive logical add.

ADD:

Calculates the data using addition.

ADD (2's Complement): Calculates the data using addition, inverts the bit and adds one.
Modbus ASCII (LCR):

Calculation is performed according to the following procedure. Conversion Type:
Hexadecimal to ASCII, Number of bytes: 2
1. Convert the ASCII characters between Calculation Start Position and Calculation End
Position into 1-byte hexadecimal data for each set of two characters.
Example: 37h, 35h→75h
2. Calculate the sum of the data obtained in step 1.
3. Invert the bit of the result of step 2 and add one. (2’s complement)
4. Convert the lower one byte data of the result of step 3 into ASCII characters.
Example: 75h→37h, 35h

3-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

Modbus RTU (CRC):

CRC-16 (Generating polynomial:x16+x15+x2+1) is calculated according to the following
procedure. Conversion Type: No conversion, Number of bytes: 2
1. Obtain an exclusive OR (XOR) of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh.
2. If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0, shift to the right by one bit. If the
bit is 1, shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value (A001h).
4. Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the data at Calculation End Position is processed.
6. Send the result of step 5 in the order of the lower byte and upper byte.
Example: 1234h→34h, 12h■ Conversion TypeAfter calculating the data using the specified calculation type, select the type of conversion for the data from thefollowing.
Hexadecimal to ASCII： Considers the data as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII data.
No conversion:

No conversion is performed.

■ Number of bytes
After converting according to the specifed conversion type, select 1 or 2 for the number of bytes for transmission
data.
Example: BCC for transmission command data
This example describes the case of transmitting the BCC calculation result from the following transmission data as
BCC data.
STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

• Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position
When Calculation Start Position is 2 and Calculation End Position is 1: Calculates the range 1234.
Calculation Start Position:

Calculation End Position:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

Data used for BCC calculation• Calculation TypeXOR:

31h^32h^33h^34h^=04h

ADD:

31h+32h+33h+34h=CAh

ADD (2's Complement):

Inverts the bit of CAh+1=36h

Modbus ASCII (LCR):

100h-(12h+34h) = BAh

Modbus RTU (CRC):

BA30h → BAh, 30h• Conversion Type
When the BCC calculation result is 0004h, the converted data is as follows.
Data
0004h

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

00h

04h

Hexadecimal to ASCII
Data
0004h
No conversion

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-61

3Communication with External Devices

3. Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times.

5 User Communication• Bytes and BCC data
When the converted data is 3034h, the data appended to the transmission data is as follows.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

1 byte

BCC data
4(34h)Converted data
BCC data(Second byte) (First byte)

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII (LCR)
When the BCC calculation result is 4241h after Hexadecimal to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes ofdata is appended to the transmission data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data

B
(42h)

4241h

A
(41h)

Hexadecimal to ASCII

2 bytes

BCC data
B
(42h)

A
(41h)

• When Calculation Type is Modbus RTU (CRC)
When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is appended to thetransmission data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data

BAh

BA30h
No conversion

3-62

BCC data
BAh

30h
2 bytes

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual30h

5 User Communication● Receive (RXD) Command
Constant (Character)
The received data is considered as character data and compared with the data specified without being converted.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and Constant(Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

When a Constant (Character) is set at the beginning of a command, the first one byte is recognized as thestart code. When a Constant (Character) is set at the end of a command, the last one byte is recognized as
the terminal code.
For details, refer to “Start Code and Terminal Code” on page 3-79.

Example: Constant (Character) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the following data.
Specified data
1234

Data used for comparison with received data

No
conversion

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Order of reception

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-63

Communication with External Devices■ DataEnter character data designated to be received (1 to 1,500 bytes). The size of a single-byte character is one byte andthat of a double-byte character is two bytes.

3

5 User Communication
Constant (Hexadecimal)
The received data is considered as hexadecimal data and compared with the data specified without being converted.
Use this setting to receive a control code of ASCII data (00h to 1Fh).
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and Constant(Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ DataEnter hexadecimal data designated to be received (1 to 1,500 bytes).
When a Constant (Character) is set at the beginning of a command, the first one byte is recognized as thestart code. When a Constant (Character) is set at the end of a command, the last one byte is recognized as
the terminal code.
For details, refer to “Start Code and Terminal Code” on page 3-79.

Example: Constant (Hexadecimal) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Data

1234

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the following data.
Specified data

Data used for comparison with received data
12h

1234h

34h

No conversion
Order of reception

3-64

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Device Address
From the received data, data of the specified size is unconverted, or converted to binary format, and stored in thedevice.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and Device
Address is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

3
Communication with External Devices■ Conversion Type
Select conversion processing for the received data from the following.
ASCII to Hexadecimal:

Considers the received data as a hexadecimal number and converts it to binary data.

ASCII to Decimal:

Considers the received data as a decimal number and converts it to binary data.

No conversion:

No conversion is performed.

Displays the example of the selected Conversion Type.
■ Device Address
Specify the word device for storing the received data. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Use Reference Device Address
To change the word device for storing the received data according to values of device addresses, select this check box
and specify a device address. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Storage Method of data
Select the handling method for received data. This can be configured only when No conversion is selected under
Conversion Type.
from Upper byte: Values of device addresses are stored from the upper byte.
from Lower byte: Values of device addresses are stored from the lower byte.
■ Number of bytes
Specify the received data size to be stored per word. The number of bytes to be specified varies based on
Conversion Type.
ASCII to Hexadecimal:

1 to 4ASCII to Decimal:

1 to 5

No conversion:

1 to 2■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 250) for storing the received data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-65

5 User Communication■ Variable
Select this check box to store data up to either Constant (Character) data, or Constant (Hexadecimal) data fromthe beginning of the received data in a device. Stores data of the size specified under Words.
When the stored data is smaller than the size specified under Words, the values of all remaining devices will stored 0.
Stored data

Number of words for stored data: 2

2
(32h)

1
(31h)

4
(34h)

3
(33h)

No
conversion

Value of Device Address
LDR100:3231h
LDR101:3433h
Number of specified words: 3
LDR102:0000h

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than the size specified for Words.

When the check box is not selected, the amount of data (bytes) stored is Number of bytes x Number of words.
When the Variable check box is selected, observe the following points.
• When data is set expect for the end of a command, set Constant (Character) data or Constant(Hexadecimal) data following Device Address data.
• When there is no data stored in the device address, all of the values of device addresses specified underWords will be 0.
• The maximum amount of the received data stored in the device address is Number of bytes x Number ofwords.
Examples: Device address for receive command data
Example 1
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

from Upper byte
1 byteOrder of reception

Upper

Lower

1
(31h)

0
(00h)

2
(32h)

0
(00h)

3
(33h)

0
(00h)

Value of Device Address
LDR100:3100h
Words: 3
LDR101:3200h
LDR102:3300h

No conversion

Example 2
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Order of reception

3-66

4
(34h)

from Lower byte
2 bytes

Upper

Lower

2
(32h)

1
(31h)

4
(34h)

3
(33h)

Value of Device Address
LDR100:3231hWords: 2
LDR101:3433h
No conversion

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Example 3
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII to Hexadecimal

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

3
Communication with External Devices

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes

Order of reception

Value of Device Address
LDR100:0012h
Words: 2
LDR101:
0034h

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)
ASCII to Hexadecimal

Example 4
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII to Decimal

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes

Order of reception

Value of Device Address(DEC)
LDR100:12
Words: 2
LDR101:
34
(DEC)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)
ASCII to Decimal

Example 5
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableON

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device address.
Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

Constant (Hexadecimal) data

3
(33h)

ETX
(03h)

Order of reception

from Upper byte
1 byteConstant (Character) data
0 is stored.

Upper

Lower

1
(31h)

NUL
(00h)

3
(33h)

NUL
(00h)

No
conversion

Value of Device Address
LDR100:3100h
Words: 3
LDR101:3300h
LDR102:0000h

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.

0 is stored.

The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-67

5 User Communication
Example 6
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Storage Method of datafrom Lower byte

Number of bytes

2

Words

3

VariableON

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device address.
Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

Constant (Hexadecimal) data

3
(33h)

ETX
(03h)

Order of reception

from Lower byte
2 bytes

Upper

Lower

2
(32h)

1
(31h)

NUL
(00h)

3
(33h)

No
conversion

Value of Device Address
LDR100:3231hWords: 3
LDR101:0033h
LDR102:0000h

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.

Constant (Character) data
0 is stored.

The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

Example 7
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII to Hexadecimal

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Number of bytes

1

Words

3

VariableON

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device address.
Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

Constant (Hexadecimal) data

3
(33h)

ETX
(03h)

Order of reception

1 byteASCII to Hexadecimal
1
(31h)
3
(33h)

Value of Device Address
LDR100:0001h
Words: 3
LDR101:0003h
LDR102:0000h

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

3-68

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Example 8
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeASCII to Decimal

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

OFF

Number of bytes

2

Words

3

VariableON

3

Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device address.
Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data

1
(31h)

Constant (Hexadecimal) data

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

ETX
(03h)

ASCII to Decimal

2 bytes

Order of reception

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

NUL
(00h)

3
(33h)

Value of Device Address(DEC)
LDR100:123(DEC) Words: 3
LDR101:LDR102:0(DEC)

Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.

Constant (Character) data
0 is stored.

The stored data is smaller than thesize specified for Words.

Example 9
Item

Setting

Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

ON, Device Address: LDR200

Storage Method of datafrom Upper byte

Words

2

VariableOFF

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.
When the LDR200 value is 2

Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Order of reception

4
(34h)

Bytes: 2

Upper

Lower

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

Value of Device Address
LDR100:0000h
LDR101:0000h
LDR200=2
LDR102:3132h
Words: 2
LDR103:3334h
No conversion

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-69

Communication with External Devices

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in device addresses in the following order.

5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Character)
The received data is compared with the registered character data and the number of the matching character data isstored in the device address.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and Registering
Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered character data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the character data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the character data.

Data:

Shows the character data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the character data.
■ DataEnter the character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that ofa double-byte character is two bytes.
The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device Address
Specify the word device for storing the Index No. of the character data matching the received data. You can only
specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

3-70

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Example: Registering Constant (Character) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 123

Registering Constants

3

Index No. 2: 456

Index Device Address

LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the registered data, and the value of theIndex No. 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device Address LDR100.
Received data
4
(34h)

5
(35h)

6
(36h)

CompareIndex No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
3:
Constants: 3

Data
123
456
789

Value of the Index Device Address
LDR100:2(DEC)

Order of reception

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-71

Communication with External Devices

Index No. 3: 789

5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)
The received data is compared with the registered hexadecimal data and the number of the matching hexadecimaldata is stored in the device address.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and Registering
Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Number of Registering ConstantsSpecify the number of data of the registered hexadecimal data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.:

Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the hexadecimal data.

Index:

Shows the Index No. of the hexadecimal data.

Data:

Shows the hexadecimal data.

■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the hexadecimal data.
■ DataEnter the hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered.
The hexadecimal data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it isoverwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settingscannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device Address
Specify the word device for storing the Index No. of the hexadecimal data matching the received data. You can only
specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

3-72

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
Example: Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) for receive command data
Item

Setting

Number of Registering Constants

3
Index No. 1: 1234

Registering Constants

3

Index No. 2: 5678

Index Device Address

LDR100

When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the registered hexadecimal data, and thevalue of the Index No. 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device Address LDR100.
When the LDR100 value is 3
Received data
37h

25h

CompareIndex No.
1:
Number of2:
Registering
3:
Constants: 3

Data
1234h
5678h
2537h

Value of the Index Device Address
LDR100:3(DEC)

Order of reception

Example of applying Registering Constant
When the same device address is specified for the Index Device Address for Registering Constant (Character)data or Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) data and for Use Reference Device Address for Device
Address data, the data storage destination for each unit of received data can be changed.
Data type

Item

Constant (Hexadecimal)

Registering Constant (Character)

Device Address

Constant (Hexadecimal)

Setting

Data02

Number of Registering Constants

2
Index No. 1: AA

Registering ConstantIndex No. 2: BB

Index Device Address

LDR100Conversion TypeNo conversion

Device Address

LDR100Use Reference Device Address

ON, Device Address: LDR200

Storage Method for Data

from Upper byte

Bytes

2

Words

2

Variable

OFF

Data

0D

When the following commands are received
STX
(02h)

B
(42h)

B
(42h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

• The first 1 byte is taken as the start code. Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
STX
(02h)

• The received data is compared with the registered data, and the value of the Index No. 2 (Dec) of the matchingdata is stored in Index Device Address LDR100.
Received data
B
(42h)

B
(42h)

CompareIndex No.
Number of1:
Registering2:Constants: 2

Data
AA
BB

Value of the Index Device Address
LDR100:2(DEC)

Order of reception

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-73

Communication with External Devices

Index No. 3: 2537

5 User Communication• Since the Indirect Device Address LDR100 of Device Address of the receive command data is 2 (Dec), the data isstored in the device address LDR202, which is offset by +2.
Value of Device Address
LDR200:0000h
LDR100=2
LDR201:0000h
LDR202:3132h• The last 1 byte is taken as the terminal code. Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
CR
(0Dh)

3-74

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication
BCC (Block Check Code)
The BCC comparison data is automatically calculated from the receive data and compared with the BCC part of thereceive data.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and BCC is selectedunder Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

Calculation Start Position:

(1)

STX
Receive data:
(02h)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation End Position
Specify the position (0 to 15) in the receive data where BCC calculation ends. The position is counted forwards, withthe data position before the BCC taken as 0.
Receive data:
Calculation End Position:

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

■ Calculation Type
Select the method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position.
XOR:

Calculates the data with exclusive logical add.

ADD:

Calculates the data using addition.

ADD (2's Complement): Calculates the data using addition, inverts the bit and adds one.
Modbus ASCII (LCR):

Calculation is performed according to the following procedure. Conversion Type:
Hexadecimal to ASCII, Number of bytes: 2
1. Convert the ASCII characters between Calculation Start Position and Calculation End
Position into 1-byte hexadecimal data for each set of two characters.
Example: 37h, 35h → 75h
2. Calculate the sum of the data obtained in step 1.
3. Invert the bit of the result of step 2 and add one. (2’s complement)
4. Convert the lower one byte data of the result of step 3 into ASCII characters.
Example: 75h → 37h, 35h

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-75

Communication with External Devices■ Calculation Start Position
Specify the position (1 to 15) in the receive data where BCC calculation starts. The position is counted backwards,
with the first position of the receive data taken as 1.

3

5 User Communication

Modbus RTU (CRC):

CRC-16 (Generating polynomial:x16+x15+x2+1) is calculated according to the following
procedure. Conversion Type: No conversion, Number of bytes: 2
1. Obtain an exclusive OR (XOR) of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh.
2. If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0, shift to the right by one bit. If the
bit is 1, shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value (A001h).
3. Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times.
4. Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the data at Calculation End Position is processed.
6. Compare the result of step 5 in the order of the lower byte and upper byte.
Example: 1234h → 34h, 12h■ Conversion TypeAfter calculating the data using the specified calculation type, select the type of conversion for the data from thefollowing.
Hexadecimal to ASCII:
No conversion:

Considers the data as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII data.
No conversion is performed.

■ Number of bytes
After converting according to the specified conversion type, select 1 or 2 for the number of bytes for comparison
data.
Example: BCC for receive command data
This example describes the case of comparing the BCC calculation result for the following receive data with the BCCpart of the receive data.
STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

• Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position
When Calculation Start Position is 2 and Calculation End Position is 1: Calculates the range 1234.
Calculation Start Position:

Calculation End Position:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

STX
(02h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

BCC

CR
(0Dh)

Data used for BCC calculation• Calculation TypeXOR:

31h^32h^33h^34h^=04h

ADD:

31h+32h+33h+34h=CAh

ADD (2's Complement):

Inverts the bit of CAh+1=36h

Modbus ASCII (LCR):

BA→42h, 41h

Modbus RTU (CRC):

BA30h→BAh, 30h• Conversion Type
When the BCC calculation result is 0004h, the converted data is as follows.
Data
0004h

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

00h

04h

Hexadecimal to ASCII
Data
0004h
No conversion

3-76

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication• Number of bytes and comparison data
When the converted data is 3034h, the data used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data is asfollows.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

4
(34h)

3

Comparison data4
(34h)

Bytes: 1

Converted data
Comparison data

(Second byte) (First byte)

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

Bytes: 2

0
(30h)

4
(34h)

• BCC data comparison
The comparison data is compared with the BCC part of the receive data.
In the following receive data, when the comparison data is the 1-byte 34h, there is a match since the BCC part datais 34h.
When there is no match, the BCC Error (address number+0, bit 0) of the Status Device changes to 1.
Receive data
STX
(02h)

BCC part

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

5
(35h)

BCC
(34h)

CR
(0Dh)
Match

Comparison data4(34h)

• When the calculation type is Modbus ASCII (LCR)
When the BCC calculation result is 4241h after Hexadecimal to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes ofdata is used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data
4241h

B
(42h)

A
(41h)

Hexadecimal to ASCII

Bytes: 2

Comparison data
B
(42h)

A
(41h)

• When the calculation type is Modbus RTU (CRC)
When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is used for comparison with
the BCC part of the receive data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)

Data
BA30h

BAh
No conversion

Comparison data
BAh

30h

30h

Bytes: 2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-77

Communication with External Devices

0
(30h)

5 User Communication
Skip
The data with the specified number of bytes in the receive data will be ignored.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected as Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and Skip isselected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.

■ Number of bytes
Specify the number of bytes (1 to 249) of receive data to be ignored.

Example: Skip for receive command data
Item

Setting

Number of bytes

2

In the received four byte data (1 (31h), 2 (32h), 3 (33h), 4 (34h)), only the data for 3 (33h) and 4 (34h) is received
and the two bytes of 1 (31h) and 2 (32h) are discarded.
Received data
1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Enabled data
4
(34h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

2 bytes(Ignored)
Order of reception

3-78

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication● Start Code and Terminal CodeA start code starts data reception and a terminal code judges the terminal of data reception. A start code and aterminal code can be configured for either Constant (Character) or Constant (Hexadecimal) settings for receive
command. The first 1 byte of the constant is recognized as the start code and the last 1 byte as the terminal code.
Command settings:

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Device Address

Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>

Terminal code 0dh

Code 00h to 7Fh can be set when Data Length under Interface Settings is 7 bits, and 00h to FFh when the data lengthis 8 bits. Data Length is configured under the Communication Interface tab on the Project Settings dialog box.
The procedure for terminal of data reception varies whether or not the receive data contains a start code and aterminal code, and whether the Variable check box for Device Address for receive command data is selected.
In the following description, With Variable indicates that the Variable check box for Device Address for receive
command data is selected and Without Variable indicates that the Variable check box is not selected. Also, when
there are multiple Device Address set for receive command data, and at least 1 command has the Variable checkbox selected, this corresponds to With Variable.
Start code

Terminal
code

Variable

Description of the procedure for terminal of data reception
Reception is started with the start code and terminated with the terminal code.
Command settings:

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Device Address

Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>
Start code 02h

Set

Set

Set
Not set'34' '35' '0d'
Terminal code 0dh

Receive

When the terminal code is followed by BCC, the data including the number of bytes of
BCC is received.
Command settings:

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Device Address

Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>

Constant(Hexadecimal)

BCC'34' '35' '0d'

BCC(1 0 XOR N 1)

Start code 02h

Terminal code 0dh

Receive

Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the
maximum command length.
Constant
Command settings: (Hexadecimal)

Device Address With Variable Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)

Receive data: '02' '31' '32'<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U><<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

Start code 02h

Terminal code: None

Maximum command length

Set

Receive

Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs.
Set

Not setConstant
Command settings: (Hexadecimal)

Device Address
With Variable

Constant(Hexadecimal)

Registering Constant(Hexadecimal)

Receive data: '02' '31' '32'<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>

'03'<<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

Start code 02h

Receiving charactertime out occurs.

Receive

Terminal code: None

Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the length ofthe command.
Constant
Command settings: (Hexadecimal) Device Address Without Variable

Not set

Receive data: '02' '31' '32'<[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>

Registering
Constant (Hexadecimal)<<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

Start code 02h

Terminal code: None

Command length
Receive

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-79

Communication with External Devices

Start code 02h3'34' '35' '0d'

5 User Communication

Start code

Terminal
code

Variable

Description of the procedure for terminal of data reception
Reception is started from the beginning and terminated with the terminal code.

Not set

Set

Set
Not setCommand settings:

Registering
Constant (Hexadecimal)

Receive data: <<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>

Device Address

Constant(Hexadecimal)<[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>

'34' '35' '0d'Start code: None

Terminal code 0dh

Receive

Reception is started from the beginning and the data is received according to the
maximum command length.
Command settings:
Receive data:

Constant(Character) Device Address With Variable

Skip

Skip(2)“123”<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>

Start code: None

Terminal code: None

Maximum command length
Receive

Set

Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs.
Not setCommand settings:

Not set

Receive data:

Constant(Character) Device Address With Variable

Skip

Skip(2)“123”

Start code: None<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>
Terminal code: None
Receiving character time out occurs.

Receive

Reception is started from the beginning and terminated when the data is received
according to the length of the command.
Command settings: Device Address Without Variable Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)

Not set

Receive data: <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U>

BCC<<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>> BCC(1 0 XOR N 1)

Start code: None

Terminal code: None

Command length
Receive• When trigger conditions are satisfied for two or more receive commands for which both start code andterminal code are set, all commands are analyzed and processed for receive processing. Sincecommands with and without errors may be mixed depending on the results of data reception analysis ofeach command, take extra caution regarding error handling.
• While the trigger condition is satisfied for a receive command for which either a start code or terminal
code is not set, only this command is processed for data reception when the trigger condition of anothercommand is being satisfied. When two or more commands exist for which either start code or terminal
code is not set, the command with the biggest number for managing the protocol is processed.
• When a start code of the receive command for which a start code is set cannot be received, all of thereceive data is ignored and abandoned. No error occurs.
• When start code is received with a receive command for which start code and terminal code are set, thedata reception is completed after the maximum number of bytes received in case of continuous
reception of data that does not match the terminal code of all receive command in which the trigger
conditions is satisfied.

3-80

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

5.4

Example of User Communication Settings
This section describes examples of user communication settings and command operations.

● Example 1
This section describes an example of user communication protocol settings for creating the following commands andcommand operations.

■ Settings in the User Communication tab on the Project Settings dialog box
Item

Setting

Protocol Name

Sample 1

Receiving Character Time Out

30 (×100 msec)

Transmission command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

SettingType

TXD

Trigger Condition

Rising-edge, Device Address: LM100

Completed Device Address

LM101

Status Device Address

LDR110Transmission Wait

50 (×100 msec)

Comment

TXD command

Command
Data Settings dialog box settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)'05'

Constant(Character)"D"

Device Address

Conversion Type: Decimal to ASCII,
Number of bytes: 4, Words: 1
Device Address: LDR100

Constant(Hexadecimal)'0D'

Operation for transmission command
When a value of LDR100 of transmission command data Device Address is 1234 (DEC), change the trigger condition
LM100 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission.
After the transmission wait duration (five seconds), the transmission data is sent. The transmission data is as follows.

Command settings:

Constant
Constant(Hexadecimal) (Character)Transmission data:

EQN
(05h)

D
(44h)

Device Address

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Constant(Hexadecimal)

4
(34h)

CR
(0Dh)

• When data transmission is successfully completed, the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address number+0 for Status Device Address LDR110 is 0, transmission is completed
without an error.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-81

Communication with External Devices• Transmission command for transmitting data using Constant (Hexadecimal), Constant (Character), Device Address,
Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings when the trigger condition device address changes to 1
• Receive command for receiving, processing, and storing data in device addresses, using Constant (Hexadecimal),
Constant (Character), Device Address, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings, for data transmitted from anexternal device, when the trigger condition device address is 1

3

5 User Communication
Receive command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Type

RXD

Trigger Condition

While ON, Device Address: LM101

Completed Device Address

LM102

Not Clear Completed Device Address
automaticallyNo

Status Device Address

LDR130Receiving Time Out

0 (No Receive Time Out)

Comment

RXD command

Command
Data Settings dialog box settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)'02'

Constant(Character)"D"

Device Address

Conversion Type: ASCII to Hexadecimal,
Number of bytes: 4, Words: 1
Device Address: LDR120, Reference Device Address: LDR100

Constant(Hexadecimal)'0D'

Operation for receive command

1 When data transmission of the transmission command is completed, the value of LM101 changes to 1, and since thesame device address is specified for the trigger condition user communication becomes ready for receiving.

2 Data is transmitted from the external device and the transmitted data is received and processed.
The receive data is as follows.

Command settings:

Constant
Constant(Hexadecimal) (Character)

Receive data:

STX
(02h)

D
(44h)

Device Address

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Constant(Hexadecimal)

4
(34h)

CR
(0Dh)

Since a value of 100 is written to LDR100 at the time of transmission, the data is stored in device address LDR220,
which corresponds to an offset of +100 from LDR120.
Value of Device Address
LDR120:0000
LDR121:0000
LDR230=100
LDR220:1234h• When data reception is successfully completed, the Completed Device Address LM102 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 of Status Device Address LDR130 is 0, reception is completed without anerror.

3-82

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication● Example 2This section describes an example of user communication protocol settings for creating the following commands andcommand operations.

■ Settings in the User Communication tab on the Project Settings dialog box
Item

Setting

Protocol Name

Sample 2

Receiving Character Time Out

30 (×100 msec)

Transmission command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

SettingType

TXD

Trigger Condition

Rising-edge, LM200

Completed Device Address

LM201

Status Device Address

LDR220Transmission Wait

0 (×100 msec)

Comment

TXD command
Constant (Hexadecimal) '05'

Command
Data Settings dialog box settings

Registering Constant(Character)

10: "AB", 20: "CD", Index Device Address: LDR200

Device Address

No conversion, from Upper byte, Number of bytes: 2,
Words: 2, Device Address: LDR210

BCC

Start Calculation Position: 1, End Calculation Position: 0,
XOR, Hexadecimal to ASCII, 2 bytes

Constant (Hexadecimal) '0D''0A'

Operation for transmission command

1 Write a value of 10 (Dec) to LDR200 for Registering Constant (Character) for transmission command data.
AB is selected.
Index No.
10:
Number of Registering Constants: 2
20:

Transmission data

Data
AB
CD

Index Device Address
LDR200=10

A
(41h)

B
(42h)

Order of transmission

2 Write a value of 3132h to LDR210 and 3334h to LDR211 for Device Address for transmission command data.
3 Change the value of the trigger condition LM200 from 0 to 1 to send the command.
The transmission data is as follows.

Command settings:
Transmission data:

Constant
Registering(Hexadecimal) Constant (Character)

EQN
(05h)

A
(41h)

B
(42h)

Device Address

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

BCC

4
(34h)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

Constant(Hexadecimal)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

• When data transmission is successfully completed, the Completed Device Address LM201 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address number+0 for Status Device Address LDR220 is 0, transmission is completed
without an error.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-83

3Communication with External Devices• Transmission command for transmitting data using Constant (Hexadecimal), Registering Constant (Character),Device Address, BCC, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings when the trigger condition device addresschanges to 1
• Receive command for receiving, processing, and storing data in device addresses, using Constant (Hexadecimal),
Registering Constant (Character), Skip, Device Address, BCC, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings, for datatransmitted from an external device, when the trigger condition device address is 1

5 User Communication
Receive command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

Setting

Type

RXD

Trigger Condition

While ON, Device Address: LM202

Completed Device Address

LM203

Not Clear Completed Device
Address automaticallyNo

Status Device Address

LDR260Receiving Time Out

0 (No Receive Time Out)

Comment

RXD command

Command
Data Settings dialog box
settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)'02'

Registering Constant(Character)

10: "AB", 20: "CD", Index Device Address: LDR230

Skip

2 bytes

Device Address

Conversion Type: No conversion, from Upper byte,
Number of bytes: 2, Words: 2
Device Address: LDR240, Reference Device Address: LDR230

BCC

Calculation Start Position: 1 Calculation End Position: 0, XOR
Hexadecimal to ASCII, 2 bytes

Constant(Hexadecimal)'0D''0A'

Operation for receive command

1 Change the trigger condition LM202 from 0 to 1 to be ready for receiving user communication.
2 Data is transmitted from the external device and the transmitted data is received and processed.
The receive data is as follows.
Command settings:

Constant
Registering(Hexadecimal) Constant (Character)

Receive data:

STX
(02h)

A
(41h)

B
(42h)

Device Address

Skip

C
(43h)

D
(44h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

Constant(Hexadecimal)

BCC

4
(34h)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

• The receive data is compared with the character data, and the value of the matching Index No. (10 (Dec)) is stored
in Index Device Address LDR230.
Received data
A
(41h)

B
(42h)

CompareIndex No.
Number of
10:
Registering
20:
Constants: 2

Data

Value of the Index Device Address

AB
CD

LDR230:10(DEC)

Order of reception• The 2 bytes (specified with Skip) of the receive command data 43h and 44h are ignored.
• Since the Reference Device Address LDR 230 of Device Address of the receive command data is 10 (Dec), thedata is stored in the device address LDR250 and LDR251, which is offset by +10.
Value of Device Address
LDR240:0000h
LDR241:0000h
LDR230=10
LDR250:3132h• [STX] ABCD1234 is calculated with BCC of receive command data and compared with 3032h.
- When Calculation Start Position is 1 and Calculation End Position is 0: Calculates the range STX ABCD1234.
Calculation Start Position:

Calculation End Position:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

STX
(02h)

A
(41h)

B
(42h)

C
(43h)

D
(44h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1)

(0)

Data used for BCC calculation

3-84

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

5 User Communication- The BCC calculation type is XOR.
02h^41h^42h^43h^44h^31h^32h^33h^34h^=02h- When the BCC calculation result is 0002h, the converted data will be 3032h.
Data
0002h

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

3

Hexadecimal to ASCII

Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte)
0
(30h)

2
(32h)

Comparison data

Bytes: 2

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

- The comparison data is compared with the BCC part of the receive data.
In the following receive data, when the comparison data is the 2-byte 3032h, there is a match since the BCC part
data is 3032h.
When there is no match, the BCC Error (address number+0, bit 0) of Status Device Address changes to 1.
Receive data
STX
(02h)

A
(41h)

BCC part
B
(42h)

C
(43h)

D
(44h)

1
(31h)

2
(32h)

3
(33h)

4
(34h)

0
(30h)

2
(32h)

CR
(0Dh)

LF
(0Ah)

Match
Comparison data
0
(30h)

2
(32h)

• When data reception is successfully completed, the Completed Device Address LM203 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address number+0 for Status Device Address LDR300 is 0, transmission is completed
without an error.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-85

Communication with External Devices- When the converted data is 3032h, the data for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data will be
3032h.

5 User Communication● Example 3This section describes an example of user communication protocol settings for creating the following commands andcommand operations.
Transmission command for transmitting data using Constant (Hexadecimal), Constant (Character), Constant(Hexadecimal), BCC, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings when the value of the trigger condition device
address is 1
■ Settings in the User Communication tab on the Project Settings dialog box
Item

Setting

Protocol Name

Sample 3

Receiving Character Time Out- (Cannot be configured)

Inching Function

EnableExecution Interval

10 (x10 msec)

Transmission command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item

SettingType

InchingFunction Key

F7

Trigger Condition

While satisfying the condition, LSD31==5Completed Device Address

LM301

Status Device Address

LDR330Transmission Wait

- (Cannot be configured)

Comment

TXD Inching command

Command
Data Settings dialog box settings

Constant(Hexadecimal)'01'

Constant(Character)"K"

Constant(Hexadecimal)'31''01'

BCC

Calculation Start Position: 1, Calculation End Position: 0,
XOR, Hexadecimal to ASCII, 2 bytes

Constant(Hexadecimal)'0D'

Operation for transmission command
When the value of Trigger Condition LSD31 is 5, press the Function Key F7 and command is transmitted in one
hundred milliseconds intervals.
The transmission data is as follows.
Command settings:
Transmission data:

Constant
Constant
Constant(Hexadecimal) (Character) (Hexadecimal)

BCC

Constant(Hexadecimal)

SOH
CR
K
1
SOH
0
2
(01h) (4Bh) (31h) (01h) (30h) (32h) (0Dh)• When data transmission is successfully completed, the Completed Device Address LM301 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address number+0 for Status Device Address LDR330 is 0, transmission is completed
without an error.

3-86

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 User Communication

5.5

Connection Diagram for User Communication
When connecting an external device to the main unit via user communication, refer to the following connection diagram.
■ Serial interface 1 (RS232C)

External Device (RS232C)
Name
Pin No.
FG
RD
SD
SG
-

3

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G (Terminal)
Pin No.
Name
1
SD
2
RD
3
RS
4
CS
5 or 10*1
SG

Shield Wire

Communication with External Devices

External Device (RS232C)
Name
Pin No.
FG
RD
SD
SG
-

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F (Connector)
Pin No.
Name
Cover
FG
3
SD
2
RD
7
RS
8
CS
5
SG

Shield Wire

■ Serial interface 1 (RS422/485)
External Device (RS422/485)
Name
Pin No.
FG
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
-

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G (Terminal)
Pin No.
Name
8
RDA(RD+)
9
RDB(RD-)
6
SDA(SD+)7
SDB(SD-)
5 or 10*1
SG

Shield Wire

External Device (RS422/485)
Name
Pin-No.
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG

Shield Wire

External Device (RS422/485)
Name
Pin No.
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
-

Shield Wire

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F (Connector)
Pin No.
Name
Cover
FG
1
RDA(RD+)
6
RDB(RD-)
4
SDA(SD+)SDB(SD-)
95SG
HG1P (Connector)
Pin No.
Name
1
FG
3
RDA+/TP1+
2
RDB-/TP15
SDA+/TP0+
SDB-/TP04
6
SG

There is no pin number corresponding to TERM. When you need a terminating resistor, read the Chapter 1"3 Important Points Regarding Wiring" in the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
■ Serial Interface 2
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F (Terminal)
Refer to the above “Serial interface 1 (RS232C)” and “Serial interface 1 (RS422/485)” about the connection diagramof the Serial Interface 2 on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F.

*1 FT1J, HG1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-87

6 Sub Host Communication

6

Sub Host Communication
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

6.1

Overview
Sub Host Communication is a function for communicating with an external device using the HMI Link Registers (LLR)
of the main unit.
The external device addresses are allocated to HMI Link Registers (LLR). When the main unit receives a request to
read from or write to HMI Link Registers (LLR), it reads from or writes to the allocated external device addresses, andthe execution results are stored in HMI Link Registers (LLR).
Main unit

HMI Link Register

Numerical Display
Display Device Address: LLR1

External Device Address

LLR0

1

Allocates M1

LLR1

5678

Allocates D1

5678

Bit Button
Destination Device Address: LLR0

Sub Host Communication

0

Read

Write

1

D1:

5678

M1:

External device

6.2

Supported Protocols and Communication Driver
The Sub Host communication can be used with the following protocols and communication drivers:
ProtocolCommunication Driver

MICROSmart

Manufacturer: IDEC
Communication driver: OpenNet,MICROSmart,SmartAXIS Pro/Lite(RS232C/485)

Modbus RTU Master

Manufacturer: Modbus
Communication driver: Modbus RTU MasterFor the device addresses that can be used by each protocol, communication cable connection, and usabledevice addresses, refer to “5.5 Connection Diagram for User Communication” on page 3-87 and Chapter 2"Connection to a PLC" in the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.

3-88

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Sub Host Communication

6.3

HMI Link Register (LLR) Assignment
This section describes how to allocate and the operation of HMI Link Registers (LLR) in Sub Host Communication.

● Example of HMI Link Register (LLR) Settings
Use the Device Link Communication between the external device and the serial interface (COM1) of the main unit,
and use the Sub Host communication between the external device and the serial interface (COM2) of the main unit.

Communication with External Devices

Allocate the following external device addresses to the HMI Link Registers (LLR).
■ Settings in the Communication Interface tab on the Project Settings dialog box
Interface

Function

COM1

External Device Communication 1

COM2

Sub Host Communication■ Settings in the Sub Host Communication tab on the Project Settings dialog box
Item

Settings

Protocol

MICROSmart

Allocate Device Address HMI Link
Register (LLR)

LLR0

0:D0100

LLR1

0:M0002

LLR2

1:D100-1

LLR3

2:D101

Example: HMI Link Registers (LLR) are configured for the following parts
Display Device Address for Numerical Display

LLR0

Destination Device Address for Numerical Input

LLR3

Destination Device Address for Bit Button

LLR1

Trigger Device Address for Pilot Lamp

LLR2Main unit

Numerical Display
Display Device Address: LLR0

External device
1234

Numerical Input
Destination Device Address: LLR3

2222

COM1
Pilot Lamp
Trigger Device Address:
LLR2

Bit Button
Destination Device Address: LLR1

COM2

OFF imageON image

HMI Link Register (LLR)
LLR0

1234

LLR1

1

LLR2

1

LLR3

2222

M2:

Read

D100:

1234

0

1

Read

Write

External device(External Device ID: 0)

Read

Write

External device(External Device ID: 1)
0

1

Write

External device(External Device ID: 2)
D101:

2222

D100-1:

Don't use the frequent write operation for HMI Link Register (LLR) which is caused by a script and a wordcommand. It may make the reading data operation too much slow.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3

3-89

6 Sub Host Communication

6.4

Sub Host Communication Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Sub Host Communication.

● Setting Sub Host Communication for a communication interface

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

2 Click the Communication Interface tab.

3 Select the interface for Sub Host Communication under Interface Configuration, and then select the Sub Host
Communication in Function under Interface Settings.
The Sub Host Communication tab is displayed.

Serial Interface (COM1*1, COM2*1, COM*2, or SERIAL1*3) can be used for Sub Host Communication. Two or
more interfaces cannot be used at the same time.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG1G/1P only
*3 HG2G-5T only

3-90

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Sub Host Communication

4 Configure the Interface Settings.
■ HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When COM1, COM2, COM2(RS232C), or COM2(RS422/485) is selected under Interface
Configuration” on page 4-41.

5 Click the Sub Host Communication tab.

6 Selects the protocol as MICROSmart or Modbus RTU Master in the Protocol.

*1 This is applicable for models with a serial interface (RS422/485) only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-91

3Communication with External Devices■ HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P*1
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When SERIAL1(RS232C), SERIAL1(RS422/485), COM(RS232C), or COM(RS422/485) is
selected under Interface Configuration” on page 4-42.

6 Sub Host Communication

7 Allocate the external device addresses to the HMI Link Registers (LLR) used with Address Number in Settings.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.7 Sub Host Communication Tab” on page 4-63.

8 Click OK.
This concludes configuring Sub Host Communication for communication interfaces.

3-92

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Sub Host Communication

6.5

Error Information
This setting is for monitoring all error information and for controlling Sub Host Communication.

● Monitor the error information of all Slave Numbers
The error information of all external devices communicated with using Sub Host Communication can be monitored.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Bit0

Function

R

R/W

Reserved

Initialize

R

Reserved

Current Error

R

Reserved

R

Finish 1st reading

Read/Write

Error Log for Reading

FunctionError Log for Writing

Reserved

Bit

Descriptions

Reserved―

1

Initialize

Clear all error information of Sub Host Communication.
Write 1 to clear all error information, and this bit changes to 0 after clear.
Error information of each slave number of the device addresses configured
with the Monitor the error information of each Slave Number checkbox is also cleared.

2

Finish 1st readingThis bit changes to 1 after all device addresses allocated to HMI Link
Registers (LLR) are read.

3

Reserved

4

Current Error

5

Reserved

6

7
8 to 15―This bit changes to 1 while a communication error occurs in any device
address allocated to HMI Link Registers (LLR). The bit changes to 0 after thecommunication error recovers.
―

Error Log for ReadingThis bit changes to 1 when the reading error has occurred in any device
address allocated to HMI Link Registers (LLR). This bit keeps 1 even if thereading error recovers.
Writes 1 to the Bit 1 (Initialize) to make this bit 0.

Error Log for Writing

This bit changes to 1 when the writing error has occurred in any device
address allocated to HMI Link Registers (LLR). This bit keeps 1 even if thewriting error recovers.
Writes 1 to the Bit 1 (Initialize) to make this bit 0.

Reserved―

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3-93

3Communication with External Devices

This option is configured on the Sub Host Communication tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Select theMonitor the error information of all Slave Numbers check box, and then specifies a word device to write theerror information.

6 Sub Host Communication● Monitor the error information of each Slave Number
The error information of external devices communicated with using Sub Host Communication can be monitored perexternal device.
This option is configured on the Sub Host Communication tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Select theMonitor the error information of each Slave Number check box, and then specifies a word device to write theerror information. 256 word devices from top device set in this option are used. Each device is assigned to each slave
number of PLC.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Read/Write

Bit

Function

R

R

Connection

Reserved

Finish 1st reading

ReservedR

Current Error

R

Reserved

Error Log for Reading

FunctionError Log for Writing

Reserved

Bit

R/W

Descriptions

0

Connection

Specifies the communication with the external devices of the relevant slave
number.
When this bit is 1, the main unit connects with each external device. When
this bit is 0, the main unit does not connect the external device.
Default value is 1 when the device addresses of the relevant slave number
are registered to HMI Link Registers (LLR).

1Reserved―

2

Finish 1st reading

3

Reserved

4

Current Error

5

Reserved

6

7

8 to 15This bit changes to 1 after all device addresses allocated to HMI Link
Registers (LLR) of the relevant slave number are read.
―This bit changes to 1 while the communication error occurs in the device
addresses allocated to the HMI Link Registers (LLR) of the relevant slave
number. This bit changes to 0 after the communication error recovers.
―

Error Log for ReadingThis bit changes to 1 when the reading error has occurred in any device
address allocated to the HMI Link Registers (LLR) of the relevant slave
number. This bit keeps 1 even if the reading error recovers.
Writes 1 to the Bit 1 (Initialize) of the Monitor the error information of
all Slave Numbers check box to make this bit 0.

Error Log for Writing

This bit changes to 1 when the writing error has occurred in any device
address allocated to the HMI Link Registers (LLR) of the relevant slave
number. This bit keeps 1 even if the writing error recovers.
Writes 1 to the Bit 1 (Initialize) of the Monitor the error information of
all Slave Numbers check box to make this bit 0.

Reserved―● Keep running with skipping the Slave Number of communication error
When this option is selected, skip the slave number error has occurred and connect with next slave number. This
option is configured on the Sub Host Communication tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Select the Keeprunning with skipping the Slave Number of communication error check box.
When this option is not selected, retry communication with same slave number until recover from the error.

3-94

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 4

Project Settings

The settings and screen data required to run the main unit are contained in a data structure called a Project. You
must create a project using WindO/I-NV4 before creating the screens and configuring the settings for the main unit.
This chapter describes the various settings required to create a project.

1

Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Project Settings

1.1

Creating New Project Data

● Create new project data by using the interactive quick start
You can create project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step.

1 Click, then click New.

A Select Product Series dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual44-1

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

2 Select Product Series, Type Number, and Installation, and then click Next.
The Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed.

■ Product Series
Select the main unit type.
■ Type Number
A list of model numbers associated with the selected main unit is displayed. Select the model number to use.
■ Installation
Select the installation direction of the main unit from the following options. The supported display orientation varies
based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G:

Horizontal, Vertical (Counter Clockwise), Vertical (Clockwise),
Horizontal (Rotate 180°)

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: Horizontal, Vertical (Counter Clockwise), Vertical (Clockwise)
HG1P:

4-2

Horizontal

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

3 Select Manufacturer and Communication Driver and then click OK.

4
Project Settings■ Manufacturer
Select the manufacturer name of the external device used.
■ Communication Driver
Shows the communication driver list for the select manufacturer. Select the communication driver to use.
■ Expression of Device Address Format
Select the format for the device address.
Allen-Bradley:Enter device addresses in the Allen-Bradley format.
Example: B 10:123/5

WindO/I-NV4:

Enter device addresses in the WindO/I-NV4 format.

Example: B 1012305
This option can only be configured when Allen-Bradley is selected for Manufacturer.
You can return to the Select Communication Driver dialog box and change its setting by clicking
Previous.
This concludes creating project data.
Next you will create a screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “3.1 Properties of Base Screen Dialog Box” on page 5-15.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-3

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

1.2

Opening Project Data

● Opening project data
You can open project data that has already been created.

1 Click, then click Open.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the file and click Open.

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Enterthe password for projects created with WindO/I-NV4 Ver. 1.11.4 or earlier using only 4 to 15 uppercase
letters and numbers.
The password to enter varies based on the check box setting of the Use Password to open a Project
found under the Options tab in the Security dialog box.
When this check box is checked, enter the password for Use Password to open a Project.
When this check box is unchecked, enter the password for the user account assigned to the Administrator
security group.
For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
Next you will open a screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “2.2 Opening Screens” on page 5-4.
Project data can also be opened by the following methods.
Click

4-4

and then click project data on the Recent Projects list

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

1.3

Saving Project Data

● Saving project data
You can save the project data being edited.
Click

and then click Save.

4
Project Settings

When new project data is created and you have never save it, the Save As dialog box is displayed.
Enter the project name and then click Save.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-5

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
● Saving project data with a different name
You can save the project data being edited with a different name.

1 Click, then click Save As.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter the project name and click Save.

• You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
"*/:<>?\|• You cannot create project data in read-only folders or in WindO/I-NV4’s working folders (temporary
folders that start with “~”).

4-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

1.4

Printing Project Data
You can print the settings for the project data being edited and its screen images.

1 Click

and then click Print and Print Settings.

The Print Settings dialog box is displayed.

4
Project Settings

If the print settings have been completed, click, and then press Print and Print to immediately start

printing.

2 Select the check boxes of the items to print in (Print Items), and configure the items as necessary.
When an item is selected, the settings are displayed in (Detailed Settings) to the right.

(Print Items)(Detailed Settings)

3 Select Output to and click Print.
■ Printer
The data is printed on the printer connected to the computer.
The Windows Print dialog is displayed. For details, refer to Windows help.
■ Word Document
The data is output to a Word file.
The Save As dialog box is displayed. Specify the save location and file name, and then click Save.
The data cannot be output to a Word file if Microsoft Office is not installed on the computer.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-7

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
● Print Settings Dialog Box
The items to print and details for those items are configured in the Print Settings dialog box.

(Print Items)(Detailed Settings)■ (Print Items)
Select the check boxes of the items to print.
Cover Page:

Select the cover page items, enter the information to print, and those items will be
printed. For details, refer to “Cover Page” on page 4-10.

Project Settings:

Select the project setting items and those settings will be printed. For details, refer
to “Project Settings” on page 4-11.

Alarm Log Settings:

Select the print target for the alarm log settings and those settings will be printed.
For details, refer to “Alarm Log Settings” on page 4-12.

Data Log Settings:

Select the print target for the data log settings and those settings will be printed.
For details, refer to “Data Log Settings” on page 4-12.

Operation Log Settings:

Target Events to record in the operation log settings will be printed.

Recipe Settings:

Settings in the recipe settings will be printed.

Data Copy Settings*1:

Select the print target for the data copy settings and those settings will be printed.
For details, refer to “Data Copy Settings” on page 4-13.

Preventive Maintenance Settings: Prints the Settings in the Preventive Maintenance.
E-mail Settings:

Select the print target for the e-mail settings and those settings will be printed. For
details, refer to “E-mail Settings” on page 4-14.

Social Media Settings*1:

Select the print target for the Social Media Settings will be printed. For details, refer
to “Social Media Settings” on page 4-14.

File Transfer:

Settings in the file transfer settings will be printed.

FTP Server Manager:

Settings in the FTP Server Manager will be printed.

Sound Settings*2:

Prints the (Settings) in Sound Settings will be printed.

Multimedia Settings*3:

Prints the Movie File List, Use Event Recording and Input Signal in theMultimedia Settings.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*3 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

4-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

Number, User Name, Security Group and the settings on the Option tab of theuser accounts will be printed.

Security Settings:

Number, Group Name, and the Operations that are permitted in the security
settings and the privileges for the Custom Web Pages will be printed.

Global Script:

Settings in Global Script will be printed.

Script Manager:

Select the print target for the Script Manager and those settings will be printed. For
details, refer to “Script Manager” on page 4-15.

Text Manager:

Select the (Text Messages List) for the Text Group and those settings will be
printed. For details, refer to “Text Manager” on page 4-15.

Tag Editor:

Prints the device addresses used in the project, the tag names and the comments.

Screens:

Items such as the screen settings, list of laid out objects, and an image of thescreen will be printed. For details, refer to “Screen” on page 4-16.

■ (Advanced Setting)This area is used to configure the details of the items selected in (Print Items). The configured items will be printed
according to the print format.
When an item is selected in (Print Items), the settings are displayed in (Advanced Setting).
■ Output toSelect the output destination when printing.
Printer:

The data is printed on the printer connected to the computer.

Word Document:

The data is output to a Word file.

The data cannot be output to a Word file if Microsoft Office is not installed on the computer.
■ Print Preview
Displays the Print Preview dialog box. An image of the layout to print on paper will be displayed in the preview. The
layout can be configured while checking the preview. For details, refer to “Print Preview Dialog Box” on page 4-17.
The print preview will not work properly if Internet Explorer 8 or higher is not installed on the computer.
■ Print
If Printer is selected for Output to, the Windows Print dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to Windows help.
If Word Document is selected for Output to, the Save As dialog box is displayed. Specify the save location and file
name, and then click Save.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-9

4Project Settings

User Accounts:

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
Cover Page

■ Screen Info
Select the check boxes of the items to print about the project data information.
Title:

Enter the title of the project data. The maximum length is 90 characters on 3 lines.

Created on:

Select the creation date of the project data.

Delivered on:

Select the delivery date of the project data.

Control No.:Enter the control number of the project data. The maximum length is 60 characters.

Version No.:Enter the version number. The maximum length is 60 characters.

■ Programmer Info
Select the check boxes of the items to print about the programmer of the project data.
Company:Enter the name of the company. The maximum length is 60 characters on 2 lines.

Address:

Enter the address of the company. The maximum length is 120 characters on 4 lines.

Department:

Enter the department in the company. The maximum length is 60 characters on 2 lines.

Name:

Enter the name of the programmer. The maximum length is 60 characters.

Phone:

Enter the telephone number of the company. The maximum length is 60 characters.

Fax:Enter the fax number of the company. The maximum length is 60 characters.

■ Supplementary Info
Select the check boxes of the items to print about the programmer of the project data.
Comment:

4-10Enter a comment for the project data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
Project Settings

4
Project Settings■ Print Content
Select the check boxes of the project settings to print.
System:The settings on the System tab will be printed.

Communication Interface:

Interface and Function that have been configured and the corresponding
Interface Settings will be printed.

Communication Driver:

The function of the configured external device and its Manufacturer andCommunication Driver will be printed.

Communication Driver Network:

Settings will be printed. The settings of external devices for which External
Device Communication is set to N/A will not be printed.

User Communication:

Protocol Name will be printed. Settings for which Protocol Name is set to N/Awill not be printed.

Autorun:The Enable USB Autorun and Open Popup Screen when USB Flash Drive isinserted settings will be printed.

Web Server:

All settings on the Web Server tab will be printed.

FTP Server:

All settings on the FTP Server tab will be printed.

Expansion Module*1

All settings on the Expansion Module tab will be printed.

External Memory Device:

All settings on the External Memory Device tab will be printed.

:

All settings on the E-mail tab will be printed.

E-mail:Sub Host Communication*2:

All settings on the Sub Host Communication tab will be printed.
If Function is set to O/I Link Master, then Slave Settings will be printed.

O/I Link:

If Function is set to O/I Link Slave, then O/I Link Station will be printed.
*2:

Font/Kanji Dictionary Data

The settings of the Optional Fonts to be downloaded and the Use Kanji input
mode will be printed.

Printer*1:

All settings on the Printer tab will be printed.
*3

All settings on the Internal Clock tab will be printed.

Internal Clock :*4:

Network - BACnet/IP Settings

Prints the settings for the Use BACnet/IP on the Network tab.

*3

Network - EtherNet/IP Settings : Prints the settings for the Use EtherNet/IP on the Network tab.
Network - MQTT Settings*3:

Prints the settings for the MQTT Settings on the Network tab.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*4 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-11

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
Alarm Log Settings■ Print Content
Select the print target to print from Basic or Advanced.
Basic:

Settings on the Channel tab will be printed.
The settings of numbers that do not use the alarm function will not be printed.

Advanced:

Prints the Basic print content, the Storage Method and the Monitoring Period on the General tab,and the contents of the External Memory Device tab, the Printing tab and the Options tab.

Data Log Settings■ Print Content
Select the print target to print from Basic or Advanced.
Basic:

Settings will be printed.
Channel numbers for which Log function is Disable will not be printed.

Advanced:

4-12

The Basic print content, Channel Name and Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area on the
General tab, the External Memory Device tab, and the output data of the data sampled for eachchannel will be printed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
Data Copy Settings
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4
Project Settings■ Print Content
Select the print target to print from Basic or Advanced. The settings of numbers for which Copy Function is
Disable will not be printed.
Basic:

Settings on the Channel tab will be printed.

Advanced:

Only content that differs from the default content will be printed for the Basic print content and Copy
content for each number.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-13

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
E-mail Settings■ Print Content
Select the print target to print from Basic or Advanced. The settings of numbers for which E-mail Function is
Disable will not be printed.
Basic:

Settings will be printed.

Advanced:

Only content that differs from the default content will be printed for the Basic print content and Email Function, Trigger Condition, and E-mail content for each number.

Social Media Settings
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

■ Print Content
Select the print target to print from Basic or Advanced. The settings of numbers for which Social Media Function
is Disable will not be printed.

4-14

Basic:

Settings will be printed.

Advanced:

Only content that differs from the default content will be printed for the Basic print content and Social
Media Function, Trigger Condition, and Social Media content for each number.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
Script Manager

4
Project Settings■ Print Content
Select the print target to print from Basic or Advanced.
Basic:

Prints the Script List.

Advanced:

Prints the Basic print content and the Script ID, the Script Name, the Data Type, the contents of
the registered script.

Text Manager■ Print Content
Please select the group numbers to print: Select the check boxes of the Text Group to print the Text Message List.
Up to 6 groups can be printed at once.
Group No.:

Displays the number of the Text Group.

Group Name:

Displays the Text Group Name.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-15

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
Screen■ Print Range
Screen Type:

Select the screens to print from the following items.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen

Screen List:

This list shows screens that have already been created. Select the check boxes of the screens toprint.

■ Print Content
Select the print target to print from Basic or Advanced.
Print Object List:

Select this check box to print the object list.
Select the items of data that will be output when printing the object list. Select the check boxesof the items to output.
Name, Type, Text ID, Text, Device Address, Trigger Type/Trigger Condition, Trigger
Type(visible)/Trigger Condition(visible)■ Screen Image
State:

Changes the state of the parts for printing. Select the state from the following items.
OFF, ON, ON, OFF (Both)

4-16

Invert white and black:Select this to print the screen by inverting the colors so white is black and black is white.

Display Object No.:

Select this check box to display and print object numbers.

Show Part Name:

Select this to print the screen by displaying part names.

Show Device Address:

Select this to print the screen by displaying device addresses.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
● Print Preview Dialog Box
Displays the Print Preview dialog box. An image of the layout to print on paper will be displayed in the preview. The
layout can be configured while checking the preview. This is a Windows dialog box.

4

(Current Page)■(Print Document)
The Windows Print dialog box is displayed. The opened project data will be printed. For details, refer to Windows
help.

■

(Portrait)
Sets the paper orientation to portrait.

■(Landscape)Sets the paper orientation to landscape.

■(Page Setup)
Displays the Page Setup dialog box. Use this dialog box to set up the page layout, such as the page size, orientation,and headers and footers.

■(Turn Headers and Footers On or Off)
Sets whether or not to print headers and footers when printing. Each click of the button switches between show and
hide.

■

(View Full Width)
Use this button to display one page of the print at its full width in the print preview dialog box.

■

(View Full Page)
Use this button to display one entire page of the print in the print preview dialog box.

■

(Show Multiple Pages)
Selects the number of pages to display in the preview from the following options.
1 Page View, 2 Page View, 3 Page View, 6 Page View, 12 Page View■

(Change Print Size)
Selects the print size on the paper from the following options.
30%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 200%, Custom

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-17

Project Settings(Print Preview)1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
■ (Print Preview)
Displays a preview of the content that will be printed.
■ (Current Page)
Indicates the current page number in (Current Page)/(Total Pages) format. You can also enter a page number todisplay it.
Drag/to adjust the margins.

■(First Page)
Displays the first page.

■(Previous Page)
Displays the previous page.

■(Next Page)
Displays the next page.

■(Last Page)
Displays the last page.

4-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

1.5

Comparing Project Data
Compares project data during editing with the screens and scripts of saved projects.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Compare.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

4
Project Settings

2 Select a file to compare with, then click Open.

The Comparison Result window is displayed.

Comparison results are displayed using colored text.
Blue:

Complete match

Red:

Different content

Green: Only saved in the open project
Gray:

Only saved in the comparison project
To compare with the comparison project data again, click the arrow to the right of Compare from theProject group of the Home tab, then click Recompare.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-19

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

1.6

Changing Project Settings● Changing Product SeriesThis section describes how to change the product series set in the project data being edited.
The fonts installed in the FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J are all outline fonts, so they keep constant quality evenwhen enlarged or reduced in size.

1 Click Change Product Series on the status bar.
The Change Product Series dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Product Series, Model, Installation, and Set Conversion Option, and then click OK.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

• FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V project data cannot be converted to HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F's.
• Color settings (color data) are not converted.
• If the Popup Screen size is larger than the Base Screen size after the Product Series is changed, thePopup Screen size is changed to the same size as the Base Screen.
• When Zooming Conversion is selected as Set Conversion Option, note the following points:- The coordinates and size of the object are adjusted to fit within the display area of ​​the screen,
however, if you convert to a model with a different screen aspect ratio, you may not be able tomaintain the coordinate or size ratio.
- Text and messages are adjusted to fit within the display area of ​​the object, however, you may not beable to maintain the ratio because the font size setting is not in pixels.
Fonts installed in the main unit vary based on the model. After changing the Product Series in the project
data, the glyphs may differ even if the font name is the same. For details about the installed fonts in themain unit, refer to Chapter 2 “Installed Fonts in the Main Unit” on page 2-7.

4-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

3 Specify the save location and file name, and then click Save.

4
Project Settings

4 When the data is finished being converted, click Close.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-21

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data
● Changing Communication Drivers
This section describes how to change the communication driver set in the project data being edited.

1 Click one of Communication Driver on the status bar.
The Communication Driver tab on the Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

3 Click the Communication Driver Network tab, change the settings as necessary and then click OK.
The confirmation message is displayed.

4-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

4 Check the message and click Yes.

4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-23

Project Settings

If there are no device addresses that correspond to the external device addresses used in the current
project data after changing the communication driver, the items set with those device addresses are blank.

1 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Project Data

1.7

Closing Project Data
You can close the project data being edited.
Click

and then click Close.

If the project data being edited has not been saved, a confirmation message for saving the project data isdisplayed.

• Click Yes to save the project data and close it.
• Click No to close the project data without saving changes.
• Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.

4-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Project Settings Configuration Procedure

2

Project Settings Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Project Settings dialog box is used to configure the operations and functions of the main unit for the project
overall.
This section describes the configuration procedure for project settings.

4

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.

Project Settings

The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-25

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3

Project Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Project Settings dialog box.

3.1

System Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The System tab is used to configure the operations of the main unit for the project data overall.

■ Display a Picture at Startup*1
Select this check box to display an image on the screen when the main unit is started.
(Image file name): Displays the file name of the imported image.
(Import):Shows the Open dialog box.
Select a bitmap format (* .bmp) image file and click Open to import it as an image to be
displayed at startup.
The maximum image size that can be used varies based on the model.
FT2J, HG2J: 800 x 480 dots and 1,160,000 bytes
FT1J, HG1J: 480 x 272 dots and 392,000 bytes(Export):

Displays the Save As dialog box.
Select the location to save the file, enter a file name, and then click Save to save the image file
as a bitmap file.

■ Start Time (sec)
It can be set vary based on the model of the main unit.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

Specifies the time to start communication with the external device and display initial screen(0 to 9999 seconds) after the power of the main unit is turned on and the POWER LED(green) changes from blinking to lit.

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
Specifies the time to start communication with the external device and display initial screen(0 to 9999 seconds) after the power of the main unit is turned on.
*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

4-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Screen Number Format
Selects the type of data to use for the System Area 1 Display screen number (address number+0) as BCD or BIN.
Default Screen: Specifies the screen number of the base screen to display first when the main unit is turned on (0 to3000). When 0 is specified, the main unit is in the screen waiting state. Write a screen number toSystem Area 1 Display screen number (address number+0) or specify the default screen number
from 1 to 3000.
If BCD is selected and a value outside the range is set for the Default Screen, that value will be treated as
an undefined value.

Auto OFF:

Select this check box to turn off the backlight when the main unit is unused for an extended
period of time. To turn on the backlight, touch the screen or the function keys*2, or write 1 toSystem Area 1 Backlight auto off bit (address number+1, bit 5) or System Area 1 Backlight bit(address number+1, bit 0).
Time (min): Specifies the time (1 to 9999) from when the main unit is last used to when thebacklight is turned off.

Halve the Brightness: Select this check box to lower the backlight brightness when the main unit is unused for an
extended period of time. To return to the backlight to its original brightness, touch the screen.
Time (min): Specifies the time (1 to 9999) from when the main unit is last used to when thebacklight brightness is lowered.
The value of System Area 1 Backlight bit (address number+1, bit 0) remains 1 because the backlight does
not turn off even if the brightness is lowered.
Light ON with Screen Changing:
When the backlight is turned off or when the backlight brightness has been lowered with thebacklight control function, select this check box to turn on the backlight or restore thebacklight brightness when the screen is switched.
This option can only be configured when the Auto OFF check box or the Halve theBrightness check is selected.
■ Enable Touch Sound
Select this check box to play a sound when the screen is pressed.
(Touch sound)*3:

These options select the touch sound.
These options can only be configured when Enable Touch Sound is selected.
Beep Sound:Plays a beep (electronic sound).
Sound File: Plays a sound file.
Sound ID:

Configures the sound file to play as the touch sound.
Click
to display the Sound Settings dialog box. For thesound file configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 22 “To playa sound file as a touch sound instead of a beep.” on page 22-3.

Control by Device Address:

Select this check box to control the touch sound with a value of device address.
(Device Address): Specifies the word device that controls the touch sound.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The control over a touch sound with a value of device address
is as follows.
0: Do not play the touch sound.
1: Play the touch sound.
2: Play a shortened*4 touch sound.

*2 HG1P only
*3 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*4 When the Sound File is selected, the sound is the same whether the device address is set to 1 or 2.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-27

Project Settings■ Backlight
These options configure the backlight control function.

4

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Enable MaintenanceSelect this check box to display the maintenance screen during operation. The methods for displaying themaintenance screen are as follows.
Press the upper-left corner of the screen of the main unit for three seconds or more.
If the base screen is switched before three seconds have elapsed, the load operation for the maintenance screen will
be canceled. Please press the screen again.
Main unit
Press and hold3 or more seconds■ Use Large Font*5
Select this check box to display text on the main unit in high-quality fonts. The Japanese or European font is
replaced with the high-quality fonts depending on the magnification.
To use high-quality fonts, the fonts must be downloaded to the main unit at the same time as the project. To
download fonts, specify the high-quality fonts under Optional Fonts to be downloaded in the Font Settings tab.
For details on high-quality fonts, refer to Chapter 2 “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.
■ Enable Two-point Push
Select this check box to enable two-point push for touch switches. When two-point push is enabled, the bottom
switch and the switch above it operate in order.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

Both switches operate when two overlapping touch switches are pressed.
Both of the two overlapping
switches work.
Button A
Operates

Main unit

Button B
Operates
Place overlapping switch A and switch B.

Both switches operate when two non-overlapping touch switches are pressed at the sametime.
Even if two non-overlapping switches
are pressed at the same time,
both switches will work.
Button A
Operates

Main unit

Button B
Operates

Place switch A and switch B side by side.

When the non-overlapping touch switch is pressed while pressing the overlapping touch
switches, the non-overlapping touch switch doesn't operate.
Main unit
Press the overlapping switch first.
Button A
Operates
Button B
Operates

1

2

Button C
Does notoperate1

2

Place overlapping switch A and switch B.
Place switch A,B and switch C side by side.

*5 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

4-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

When the overlapping touch switches are pressed while pressing the non-overlapping touch
switch, only the backmost switch among the overlapping touch switches operates.
Main unit
Press the non-overlapping switch first.
Button A
Button C
Does notOperates
operateButton B
1
2
Operates

2

1

4
Project Settings

Place overlapping switch A and switch B.
Place switch A,B and switch C side by side.

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
Both switches operate when two overlapping touch switches are pressed.
Both of the two overlapping
switches work.
Button A
Operates

Main unit

Button B
Operates
Place overlapping switch A and switch B.

Both switches don't operate when two non-overlapping touch switches are pressed at the sametime.
Pressing two non-overlapping switchesat the same time does not work.
Button A
Does notoperateMain unit

Button B
Does notoperatePlace switch A and switch B side by side.

■ Notify when clock data is initialized*1
The clock data will be initialized if the power of the main unit is turned off for 20 days or more. Select this check box
to display the clock data initialization message when the power is turned on.
■ Enable Low Battery Warning*6
Select this check box to display a warning message when the backup battery is dead.
This option also displays a warning message when it is time to replace the battery.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*6 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-29

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Show script error
Select this check box to display an error message on the screen when a script error occurs.
Script error information is saved to the HMI Special Data Registers (LSD52 and LSD53). For details, refer to
Chapter 25 “1.4 Script Error in HMI Functions” on page 25-4.
■ System Language
Selects the display language for the Maintenance screen, System Mode screens, Device Monitor, and Adjust
Brightness screen as English or Japanese.
For details, refer to Chapter 36 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 36-1.
■ Use System Area
The System Area is an area of predetermined device addresses to control the screen and communicate error
information and time information between the main unit and the external device. Select this check box to use the
System Area. For details, refer to “System Area” on page 4-32.
Device Address: Specifies the word device to use as the System Area. The System Area is allocated starting from theconfigured device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Use System Area 3, 4:

Select this check box to use System Area 3 and 4.

Clear Keypad bit in System Area automatically: Select this check box to automatically set the System Area 2
numerical input setting and character input setting bits to 0 after
they have been set to 1.
The System Area 2 bits cleared by this function are as follows.
Numerical input setting complete (address number+3, bit 0)
Numerical input setting cancel (address number+3, bit 1)
Character input setting complete (address number+3, bit 5)
Character input setting complete (address number+3, bit 6)■ Flashing Cycle
Selects the cycle when flashing (displaying a drawing object by switching it on and off at a fixed interval) drawings
and parts as 1.0 sec or 0.5 sec.
■ Watch Dog
Select this check box to monitor on the external device side whether or not the main unit and the external device arecommunicating by writing a set value (00FF (Hex)) at a fixed interval.
Device Address: Specifies the word device to write the value.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Time (sec):

Specifies the interval to write the value (1 to 65535).

■ Disable Switch
Select this check box to enable and disable touch switches with a value of device address.
Touch switches are enabled when the value of device address is 1. They are disabled when the device value is 0.
Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that is read to enable or disable touch
switches.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Display the screen after reading the values of the external device addresses
Select this check box to execute processing by reading all the values of the external device addresses configured for ascreen when switching the base screen or when displaying a popup screen.

4-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Start Part with synchronous
Select this check box to operate commands and HMI Special Internal Relays LSM1, LSM2, LSM3, and LSM5 after
reading all the values of the external device addresses configured on the screen.
When this check box is cleared, all processing is immediately executed when the screen is displayed.
■ Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of Numerical Input
Select this check box to display 0 when a Numerical Input that has the Always Entry Mode check box selected on
the General tab is displayed on the screen. When this check box is cleared, the value of device address is displayed.
This option is reflected for all Numerical Inputs configured in the project.

from Upper byte:

Values of device addresses are read from and written to the upper order byte.
Example: When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to the destination
device address LDR100
Device address
LDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'A' = 41 (Hex)'B' = 42 (Hex)'C' = 43 (Hex)'D' = 44 (Hex)'E' = 45 (Hex)0
NULL terminang characterfrom Lower byte:

Values of device addresses are read from and written to the lower order byte.
Example: When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to the destination
device address LDR100
Device address
LDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'B' = 42 (Hex)'A' = 41 (Hex)'D' = 44 (Hex)'C' = 43 (Hex)0'E' = 45 (Hex)NULL terminang character

When handling strings, 0 is written to the device address as the NULL terminating character and treated as
the end of the string.
■ Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data for HMI Devices
Selects the handling method for values of HMI devices when UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) is
selected for Data Type from the following. The initial value is set according to the communication driver that was
selected when the project was created.
from Upper word: Values of HMI devices are read from and written to the upper order word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is UBIN32(D) and the numerical value
12345678 (Hex) was entered and written to destination device address LDR100
Device address
LDR100LDR101

Stored value
1234 (Hex)5678 (Hex)from Lower word: Values of HMI devices are read from and written to the lower order word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is UBIN32(D) and the numerical value
12345678 (Hex) was entered and written to destination device address LDR100
Device address
LDR100LDR101

Stored value
5678 (Hex)1234 (Hex)When the bit devices in control devices are handled as words, this handling method is always the fromLower word.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-31

4Project Settings■ Storage Method of String Data
Selects the handling method for text entered with the Character Input and values of device addresses read by the
Message Display.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● System Area
Overview
The area of predetermined device addresses to control the screen and communicate error information and time
information between the main unit and the external device is called the System Area.
The System Area on the main unit is as follows.
System Area

Number of word addresses

Operations of the main unit

System Area 1

2

Read and write

System Area 2

2

Write

System Area 3

4

Write

System Area 4

4

Read

To use System Area 1 and 2, select the Use System Area check box on the Project Settings dialog box. To use
System Area 3 and 4, select the Use System Area 3, 4 check box.
Specify the word device to use as the System Area in Device Address to allocate the System Area starting at theconfigured device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: When Device Address is configured as LDR100(The address number of Top Device Address)
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11

LDR100LDR101LDR102LDR103LDR104LDR105LDR106
LDR107
LDR108LDR109LDR110LDR111

System Area 1
System Area 2

System Area 3

System Area 4

System Area 1
This area configures the display, beep, and clearing bits of the main unit.
Address
number+0

Bit

0 to 15

Function

Description

Display screen numberThis bit stores the number of the screen being displayed. Write a value tothis bit to change the screen to that number. Immediately after the poweris turned on, the value configured by Default Screen in the Project
Settings dialog box is stored here. This is the data type specified in
Screen Number Format on the Project Settings dialog box.
If the screen number is not exist in the project, “No Screen Data”
message will be displayed. If 0xFFFF (Hex) is written to this bit, the main
unit will display the Top Page of System Mode. However, when 0 is
written to this bit, the screen is not switched and no error message isdisplayed.
This bit stores the illumination state of the backlight. Write a value to thisbit to change the state.

0

Backlight

Off
Turns the backlight off.

1:

On
Turns the backlight on.

This bit stores the screen flash state (1 sec. cycle). Write a value to thisbit to change the state. This bit is 0 immediately after the power is turned
on.

+1

1

4-32

0:

Flash display (1 sec. cycle)0:

Do not flash
Stop flashing the screen and turn it on.

1:

Flash
Flashes the screen in one second intervals.
When the Flash display (1 sec. cycle) (address number+1, bit 1) andthe Flash display (0.5 sec. cycle) (address number+1, bit 2) are both
1, the screen flashes at one second intervals.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Address
numberBit

Function

Description
This bit stores the screen flash state (0.5 sec. cycle). Write a value to thisbit to change the state. This bit is 0 immediately after the power is turned
on.

2

0:

Do not flash
Stop flashing the screen and turn it on.

1:

Flash
Flashes the screen in 0.5 second intervals.
When the Flash display (1 sec. cycle) (address number+1, bit 1) andthe Flash display (0.5 sec. cycle) (address number+1, bit 2) are both
1, the screen flashes at one second intervals.

Reserved
This bit stores whether or not the function to automatically turn off thebacklight is enabled when the Auto OFF check box is selected underBacklight in the Project Settings dialog box. Write a value to this bit
to change the state. This bit is 0 immediately after the power is turnedon.

5

Backlight auto off

0:

EnabledAutomatically turns off the backlight when the main unit is unused
for an extended period of time.

1:

Disabled
Does not automatically turn off the backlight when themain unit is unused for an extended period of time. The backlightturns on if the value changes to 1 when the backlight is off.

This bit stores the beep state. Write a value to this bit to change thestate. This bit is 0 immediately after the power is turned on.

+1
6

Beep

0:

Stop
Stops continuous beeping.

1:

Beep
Starts continuous beeping.

This bit stores the screen display state. Write a value to this bit to change
the state.
7

Screen display

0:

Hide
Hides the screen when the backlight is on.

1:

Show
Displays the screen.

8

Reserved

9

Clear error

Write 1 to this bit to clear the error information bit (System Area 2,
address number+2). This bit automatically changes to 0 when processing
is finished.

10

Numerical input settingclear

Write 1 to this bit to clear the Numerical input setting complete bit(System Area 2 address number+3, bit 0) and the Numerical input setting
cancel bit (System Area 2 address number+3, bit 1). This bit
automatically changes to 0 when processing is finished.

11

Character input settingclear

Write 1 to this bit to clear the Character input setting complete bit(System Area 2 address number+3, bit 5) and the Character input setting
cancel bit (System Area 2 address number+3, bit 6). This bit
automatically changes to 0 when processing is finished.

12 to 15

Reserved

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-33

4Project Settings

3 to 4Flash display(0.5 sec. cycle)

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
System Area 2This area stores states and error information of the main unit. These bits are 0 immediately after the power is turnedon.
Address
numberBit
0 to 2+2Function

Description

Reserved

3

Communication error

4

Reserved

This bit changes to 1 when a communication error occurs in external
device communication. To clear this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit(System Area 1 address number+1, bit 9).

5

Processing error

This bit changes to 1 when executing the following arithmetic operations.
To clear this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit (System Area 1 address
number+1, bit 9).
• There is data which cannot be handled with the specified data type;
BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(E).
• A value is divided by 0.
• The setting of Origin, Minimum, or Maximum for the Bar Chart or Line
Chart are invalid, or the Minimum and Maximum are the same values.
• The setting of Minimum, Maximum, or ranges for the Meter are invalid,or the Minimum and Maximum are the same values.
• There is invalid clock data which is used in Calendar parts.

6

Device range error

This bit changes to 1 when writing a value to a device address that falls
outside its range or when exceeding the restrictions on the number ofconfigured device addresses. To clear this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit(System Area 1 address number+1, bit 9).

7

Clock IC error*1

This bit changes to 1 when the internal clock of the main unit stops. To
clear this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit (System Area 1 address
number+1, bit 9).

8External memory device(A:) access error

This bit changes to 1 when an error occurs when the external memory*2
device inserted in the main unit is accessed. To clear this bit, write 1 to
the Clear error bit (System Area 1 address number+1, bit 9).

9Printer timeout error*1

This bit changes to 1 when a printing error occurs when data is output tothe printer connected to the main unit. To clear this bit, write 1 to theClear error bit (System Area 1 address number+1, bit 9).

Script error

This bit changes to 1 when an error occurs during script execution. Error
details are stored in HMI Special Data Registers LSD52 and LSD53. For
details, refer to Chapter 25 “1.4 Script Error in HMI Functions” on page25-4. To clear this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit (System Area 1
address number+1, bit 9).

10

11
12
13

External memory device(B:) access error*3

Replace battery error*4
Replace battery error (lowbattery)*4

14

Backup data error*5

15

Reserved

This bit changes to 1 when an error occurs when accessing an inserted
USB flash drive.
This bit changes to 1 when it is time to replace the backup battery. To
clear this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit (System Area 1 address
number+1, bit 9).
This bit changes to 1 when the backup battery is low. To clear this bit,write 1 to the Clear error bit (System Area 1 address number+1, bit 9).
This bit changes to 1 when the data sampled by the log functions, theclock data and values in the HMI Keep Registers and HMI Keep Relays

disappears*6. To clear this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit (System Area
1 address number+1, bit 9).

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F*3 HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P only
*4 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G only
*5 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G only
*6 Only clock data is lost for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J.

4-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Address
numberFunction

Description

0

Numerical input setting
complete

This bit changes to 1 when finished entering a numerical value with the
Numerical Input. This bit changes to 0 when entering a numerical value
or when entering a numerical value has been canceled. Write 1 tonumerical input setting clear (address number+1, bit 10) to clear this bit.

1

Numerical input setting
cancelThis bit changes to 1 when entering a numerical value with the Numerical
Input was canceled. This bit changes to 0 when entering a numericalvalue or when entering a numerical value has been completed. Write 1 tonumerical input setting clear (address number+1, bit 10) to clear this bit.

2

Backlight auto off running

The value of this bit changes to 1 when Auto OFF is configured and thebacklight was turned off by this function. To configure Auto OFF, selectthe Auto OFF check box under Backlight in the Project Settings
dialog box. This bit automatically changes to 0 when the backlight turnson.

3

Sending output to a
printerThis bit changes to 1 when sending output to the printer. This bit
automatically changes to 0 when finished sending output.

4

Transferring recipe

This bit changes to 1 when transferring recipe data. This bit automaticallychanges to 0 when the transfer is finished.

5

Character input setting
complete

This bit changes to 1 when finished entering text with the Character
Input. This bit changes to 0 when entering text or when entering text has
been canceled. Write 1 to character input setting clear (address
number+1, bit 11) to clear this bit.

6

Character input setting
cancelThis bit changes to 1 when entering text with the Character Input iscanceled. This bit changes to 0 when entering text or when entering text
has been completed. Write 1 to character input setting clear (address
number+1, bit 11) to clear this bit.

7 to 15

Reserved

System Area 3This area is for changing the internal clock data of the main unit.
Address
number
+4
+5
+6

+7

Bit

Function

Description

0 to 7Clock data “Month”

Enter “Month” (01 to 12) as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data “Year”

Enter “Year” (00 to 99) as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 7Clock data “Hour”

Enter “Hour” (00 to 23) as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data “Day”

Enter “Day” (01 to 31) as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 7Clock data “Second”

Enter “Second” (00 to 59) as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data “Minute”

Enter “Minute” (00 to 59) as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 14

Reserved

Enter 0 in the reserved area.

15

UpdateWrite 1 to this bit to write the entered data (address number+4 to+6, bits 0 to 15) to the internal clock data of the main unit.

When the value of the update bit (address number+7, bit 15) becomes 1, the clock data is updated as awhole.
Year, month, day, hour, minute, and second cannot be set individually.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-35

4Project Settings

+3

Bit

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
System Area 4This area reads the internal clock data of the main unit in one minute intervals.
Address
number
+8
+9

+10

+11

4-36

Bit

Function

Description

0 to 7Clock data “Month”

These bits store the current “Month” (01 to 12) value as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data “Year”

These bits store the current “Year” (00 to 99) value as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 7Clock data “Hour”

These bits store the current “Hour” (00 to 23) value as a 2 digit BCD.

8 to 15

Clock data “Day”

These bits store the current “Day” (01 to 31) value as a 2 digit BCD.

0 to 7

Reserved

8 to 15

Clock data “Minute”

These bits store the current “Minute” (00 to 59) value as a 2 digit
BCD.

0 to 3Clock data “Day of Week”

These bits store the current “Day of Week” value as a 2 digit BCD.
The relationship between the day of the week and the value is asfollows.
00: Sunday
01: Monday
02: Tuesday
03: Wednesday
04: Thursday
05: Friday
06: Saturday

4 to 15

Reserved

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.2

Communication Interface Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Communication Interface tab is used to configure the functions used by the communication interfaces of themain unit.

4
Project Settings■ Interface Configuration
Interface Configuration lists the communication interfaces and functions to use. Select the appropriate Interface(COM1, COM2, etc.) to switch Interface Settings to the items that can be configured for that communicationinterface.
The items displayed in Interface vary based on the main unit model. The supported functions for each
communication interface are as follows.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
Function
External Device
User
O/I Link O/I Link
MaintenanceCommunication
Communication
MasterSlave
Communication*1
1 to 3
1 to 4

Name

InterfaceCOM(RS232C)

Serial Interface(RS232C)

YES

NO

NO

YES

COM
Serial Interface(RS422/485) (RS422/485)

YES

YES

YES

Ethernet

Ethernet Interface

YES

NO

USB1
(USB-A)USB Interface(Type A)NO

USB2
(USB-B)USB Interface(Type A)NO

Wireless LAN

Speaker

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

• When External Memory Device is selected as Save To for the sound file in Sound Settings,
configures Speaker to USB2(USB-A).
• For details about the functions supported by wireless LAN, refer to “List of functions supported byWireless LAN” on page 4-49.
*1 External Device Communication 4 is for HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-37

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V
Function
Name

Interface

External Device
User
O/I Link O/I Link
Sub Host
MaintenanceCommunication
Communication
Printer
MasterSlave
Communication
Communication
1 to 4
1 to 3

COM1

Serial Interface(RS232C or
RS422/485)

YES

YES*2

YES*2

YES

YES

NO

NO

COM2
(RS232C)

Serial Interface(RS232C)

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

COM2
Serial Interface(RS422/485) (RS422/485)

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

Ethernet

Ethernet Interface

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

USB2
(USB-A)USB Interface(Type A)

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

USB1
(USB-B)USB Interface(Mini-B)

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F
Function
Name

Interface

External Device
User
O/I Link O/I Link
Sub Host
MaintenanceCommunication
Communication
Printer
MasterSlave
Communication
Communication
1 to 4
1 to 3

COM1

Serial Interface(RS232C or
RS422/485)

YES

YES*2

YES*2

YES

YES

NO

NO

COM2

Serial Interface(RS232C or
RS422/485)

YES

YES*2

YES*2

YES

YES

NO

NO

Ethernet

Ethernet Interface

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

USB2
(USB-A)USB Interface(Type A)

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

USB1
(USB-B)USB Interface(Mini-B)

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

HG2G-5T
Function
Name

Interface

External Device
User
O/I Link O/I Link
Sub Host
MaintenanceCommunication
Communication
MasterSlave
Communication Communication
1 to 4
1 to 3SERIAL1(RS232C)

Serial Interface(RS232C)

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

SERIAL1(RS422/485)

Serial Interface(RS422/485)

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Ethernet

Ethernet Interface

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

USB2(USB-A)

USB Interface(Type A)

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

USB(USB-B)

USB Interface(Mini-B)

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

*2 RS422/485 only

4-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
HG1G/1P
Function
Name

Interface

External Device
User
O/I Link O/I Link
Sub Host
MaintenanceCommunication
Communication
MasterSlave
Communication Communication
1 to 4
1 to 3

COM(RS232C)*3

Serial Interface(RS232C)

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

COM(RS422/485)

Serial Interface(RS422/485)

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Ethernet

Ethernet Interface

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

USB2(USB-A)

USB Interface(Type A)

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

USB1(USB-B)

USB Interface(Mini-B)

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

4

• Barcode reader connection
 Refer to Chapter 3 “5 User Communication” on page 3-9.
Functions Available with the Ethernet Interface• Online Refer to Chapter 29 “Communication with Main Unit” on page 29-1.
• Debug Refer to Chapter 30 “Monitor Function” on page 30-1.
• Web Server
 Refer to Chapter 27 “Web Server Function” on page 27-1.
• BACnet/IP Communication*4, EtherNet/IP Communication*5, MQTT Communication*5
 Refer to Network User's Manual.

*3 Only special product of HG1P is equipped with a serial interface (RS232C).
*4 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only
*5 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-39

Project Settings

Functions Available with the Serial Interface

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
Functions Available with the USB Interface
Available functions vary based on the main unit model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F

HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P

Online

NO

YES

YES

Debug

NO

YES

YES

Printer connection

NO

YES

NO

Functions

Barcode reader connection

YES

YES

YES

Wireless LAN connection

YES

NO

NO

Speaker connection

YES

NO

NO

• Online Refer to Chapter 29 “Communication with Main Unit” on page 29-1.
• Debug Refer to Chapter 30 “Monitor Function” on page 30-1.
• Printer connection
 Refer to Chapter 34 “1 Printer” on page 34-1.
• Barcode reader connection
 Refer to Chapter 3 “5 User Communication” on page 3-9.
• Wireless LAN adapter connection
By connecting a general-purpose Wi-Fi dongle, the main unit can communicate with smartphones and personal
computers via wireless LAN. For USB devices that have been confirmed to work, please check the support page on
our website. For details on the functions that can be used with wireless LAN, refer to “List of functions supported byWireless LAN” on page 4-49.
• Speaker connection
 Refer to Chapter 22 “Sound Function” on page 22-1.

4-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Interface Settings
The items that can be configured vary based on the communication interface selected under Interface
Configuration.
With multiple communication interfaces, External Device Communication 1 to External Device
Communication 4*5, User Communication 1 to User Communication 3, Wireless LAN*6 or
Speaker*6 on the Function cannot be configured in multiple settings.
When COM1, COM2, COM2(RS232C), or COM2(RS422/485) is selected under Interface Configuration

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V:

COM1, COM2(RS232C), COM2(RS422/485)

HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:

COM1, COM2

Function:

Selects the function to use with the serial interface from the following.
N/A, External Device Communication 1, External Device Communication 2, External
Device Communication 3, External Device Communication 4*5, O/I Link Master, O/I
Link Slave, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, Sub
Host Communication
The O/I Link Master and the O/I Link Slave can only be configured when the COM1, theCOM2 or the COM2(RS422/485) is selected for the Interface under the Interface
Configuration.

Baud Rate:

Selects the communication speed with the external device from the following.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 187500
The baud rate that can be configured varies based on Function.

Data Bits:

Selects the data length as 7 or 8.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication
4*5, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, or Sub Host
Communication is selected for Function.

Stop Bits:

Selects the stop bits as 1 or 2.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication
4*5, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, or Sub Host
Communication is selected for Function.

Parity:Selects the parity from the following.
None, Odd, Even
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication
4*5, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, or Sub Host
Communication is selected for Function.

Flow Control:

Selects the flow control method as None or ER according to the external device being used.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication
4*5 or Sub Host Communication is selected for Function.

Serial Interface: Select the interface standard for the serial port. The items that can be displayed vary based on theInterface under the Interface Configuration.
COM1, COM2:

RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire, RS422/485 4-wire

COM2(RS232C):

RS232C

COM2(RS422/485): RS422/485 2-wire, RS422/485 4-wireThis option can only be configured when the External Device Communication 1, the External
Device Communication 2, the External Device Communication 3, the External Device
Communication 4*5, the User Communication 1, the User Communication 2, the User
Communication 3, or the Sub Host Communication is selected for Function.
*5 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*6 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-41

Project Settings

The items displayed in the Interface vary based on the main unit model.

43 Project Settings Dialog Box
When SERIAL1(RS232C), SERIAL1(RS422/485), COM(RS232C), or COM(RS422/485) is selected underInterface Configuration
The items displayed in the Interface vary based on the main unit model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG1G/1P:

COM(RS232C)*3, COM(RS422/485)

HG2G-5T:

SERIAL1(RS232C), SERIAL1(RS422/485)

Function:

Selects the function used by Serial Interface from the following.
N/A, External Device Communication 1, External Device Communication 2, External

Device Communication 3, External Device Communication 4*7, O/I Link Master, O/I
Link Slave, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, Sub
Host Communication
The O/I Link Master and the O/I Link Slave can only be configured when the
SERIAL1(RS422/485) or the COM(RS422/485) is selected for the Interface under theInterface Configuration.
Baud Rate:

Selects the communication speed with the external device from the following.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 187500
The baud rate that can be configured varies based on Protocol.

Data Bits:

Selects the data length as 7 or 8.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication

4*7, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, or Sub Host
Communication is selected for Function.
Stop Bits:

Selects the stop bits as 1 or 2.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication
4*7, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, or Sub Host
Communication is selected for Function.

Parity:Selects the parity from the following.
None, Odd, Even
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication
4*7, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, or Sub Host
Communication is selected for Function.

Flow Control:

Selects the flow control method as None or ER according to the external device being used.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication
4*7, or Sub Host Communication is selected for Function.

Serial Interface:

Select the interface standard for the serial port. The items that can be displayed vary based on theInterface under the Interface Configuration.
SERIAL1(RS232C), COM(RS232C)*3:

RS232CSERIAL1(RS422/485), COM(RS422/485):

RS422/485 2-wire, RS422/485 4-wireThis option can only be configured when External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device Communication

4*7, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3, or Sub Host
Communication is selected for Function.

*3 Only special product of HG1P is equipped with a serial interface (RS232C).
*7 HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P only

4-42

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
When Ethernet is selected under Interface Configuration
IP Settings:• Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway according to the local network environment being
used. When Automatically obtain the IP address is selected, the network settings are automaticallyassigned from the DHCP server on the local network environment being used. Settings assigned from the
DHCP server can be checked on the Top Page in the System Mode.
• When Automatically obtain the IP address is selected, note the following points:- It takes some time to acquire the network settings. If the download fails, increase the timeout time on
the Home tab, in the Project group, in Comm.Setup. For details, refer to Chapter 29 “1.3 Change
Communication Settings” on page 29-5.
- According to the DHCP server specifications, the IP address may change by removing and reinserting
the Ethernet cable.
- After connecting the main unit into a different network, turn the power to the main unit off and then on again.
• Regarding TCP port number of the main unit, note the following points.
The numbers that cannot be used: -2101: For FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass-through2538: For pass-through2539, 2541: For Maintenance communication (Data Transfer)
2540: For Maintenance communication (Control function)
44818: For EtherNet/IP communication

Duplicate numbers cannot be configured in the following functions:- Maintenance communication( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-43)- Web server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-75)- FTP server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-76)- TCP Server is selected for the User Communication( refer to “Port No.” on page 4-45)- Modbus as Manufacture and Modbus TCP Server as
Communication Driver are selected on the Communication
Driver tab( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)*6 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*8 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-43

4Project Settings

Selects the network setting method.
Automatically obtain the IP address (DHCP).:
Automatically sets the network when connected to a network.
Use the following IP address:
Manually specifies the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
IP Address:
Specifies the IP address. (Default: 192.168.1.150*6 or 192.168.1.6*8)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value
from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure toassign each device a unique IP address.
Subnet Mask:
Specifies the subnet mask. (Default: 255.255.255.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value
from 0 to 255.
This value must be the same for all devices.
Default Gateway: Specifies the default gateway. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value
from 0 to 255.
Set this value when using a router. Leave the value blank when not
required.
Port Number : Specifies the TCP port number (1 to 65535) to use for maintenance communication.
(Default: 2537)
Forbid Maintenance Communication:
Select this check box to prohibit maintenance communication via Ethernet
communication. Please make sure you fully understand that enabling this setting will
restrict access from the outside, such as disabling downloads.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

DNS Settings:

In order to access a DNS server from the main unit, the IP address of the DNS server must be
specified.
The setting method of the IP address of the DNS server is determined by the setting method of
the network settings selected under IP Settings.
Obtain DNS Server Address Automatically (DHCP):
Automatically sets the IP address of the DNS server.
This can be selected when Automatically obtain the IP address(DHCP) is selected under IP Settings.
Use the Following DNS Server Addresses:
Manually specifies the IP address of DNS Server.
Preferred DNS Server: Specifies the IP address of Preferred DNS
Server. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands
for a numeric value from 0 to 255.
Alternate DNS Server: Specifies the IP address of Alternate DNS
Server. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands
for a numeric value from 0 to 255.

Connect Speed*9: Select the Ethernet connection speed with the connected device from 10Mbps or 10/100Mbps.
When 10/100Mbps is selected, attach ferrite cores to the communication cable. For details,
refer to Chapter 1 “5.5 Specifications” in the MICRO/I Hardware Manual.
Example: To communicate with two main units and a computer via Ethernet
Set the main unit A, the main unit B, and the computer all to the same values: subnet mask
255.255.255.0, default gateway 192.168.1.254.
Set the IP addresses to values that do not conflict: the main unit A IP address 192.168.1.6, the main unit
B IP address 192.168.1.7, the computer IP address 192.168.1.8.
Local network
Ethernet communication

IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway

Main unit A

External
device192.168.1.6
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.254

Main unit B

192.168.1.7
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.254*9 HG1P only

4-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

External
deviceComputer

192.168.1.8
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.254

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
When Protocol1 to Protocol7 is selected for Ethernet under Interface Configuration
Function:

Selects the user communication to configure for the selected function from the following.
External Device Communication 1, External Device Communication 2, External Device

Communication 3, External Device Communication 4*5

User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3
Operation Mode:

TCP Client:

The main unit operates as a TCP/IP client and the external device operates as a TCP server.
The main unit connects to the TCP server and sends and receives data.

TCP Server:

The main unit operates as a TCP/IP server and the external device operates as a TCP
client. The main unit creates a listening port as a TCP server and waits for connections
from TCP clients. After a connection, it sends and receives data with the TCP client.

UDP*10:The main unit operates as a UDP server and client.
The main unit sends data to the listening port of the external device. The external device
also sends data to the listening port of the main unit and that data is received by the mainunit.

Target:Configures the IP address and port number for the external device.
These options can only be configured when TCP Client or UDP is selected for Operation
Mode.
IP Address: Specifies the IP address for the target.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to
255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure to assign
each device a unique IP address.
Port No. :Specifies the port number for the target (0 to 65535).

Change IP Address and Port Number by Device Address:
Select this check box and specify a word device to change the target's IP
address and port number during operation. You can only specify an internal
device. During the start of operation, the main unit writes the values
configured by IP Address and Port No. to this device address. After thestart of operation, the value of device address is read and the target ischanged.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: When IP Address is set to 192.168.1.1, Port No. is 2105, and thedevice address is LDR100
LDR100LDR101LDR102LDR103LDR104

MICRO/I:

2105
192
168
1
1

Port number

IP address

Configures the listening port number of the main unit.
These options can only be configured when TCP Server or UDP is selected for Operation
Mode.
Port No.:Specifies the listening port number of the main unit (0 to 65535).

*5 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*10 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-45

4Project Settings

Selects the operation mode when performing user communication with the Ethernet interface.
This option can only be configured when User Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User
Communication 3 is selected for Function.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box• When using the main unit as UDP, the main unit cannot automatically identify and reply to the IP address
and port number of the external device. UDP broadcasting is also not supported.
• For TCP client and TCP server, make a 1:1 connection between the main unit and the external device for
one user communication setting.
• When the Change IP Address and Port Number by Device Address check box is selected, thechanged IP address and port number are reflected when data is next sent.
• Regarding TCP port number of the main unit, note the following points.
The numbers that cannot be used: -2101: For FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass-through2538: For pass-through2539, 2541: For Maintenance communication (Data Transfer)
2540: For Maintenance communication (Control function)
44818: For EtherNet/IP communication

Duplicate numbers cannot be configured in the following functions:- Maintenance communication( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-43)- Web server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-75)- FTP server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-76)- TCP Server is selected for the User Communication( refer to “Port No.” on page 4-45)- Modbus as Manufacture and Modbus TCP Server as
Communication Driver are selected on the Communication
Driver tab( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)• Duplicate UDP port numbers of the main unit cannot be configured in the following functions.
- UDP is selected for the User Communication ( refer to “Port No.” on page 4-45)- IDEC System as Manufacture and DM LINK Ethernet(UDP) as Communication Driver are
selected on the Communication Driver tab( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)- OMRON as Manufacture and SYSMAC CS1/CJ series(Ethernet) as Communication Driver are
selected on the Communication Driver tab( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)• The connection status for TCP clients and the TCP server can be checked with the value of the HMI
Special Data Registers (LSD). The connection is disconnected when 0. The connection is connected
when 1.
LSD67-0: Connection status for User Communication 1 set to Ethernet interface
LSD67-1: Connection status for User Communication 2 set to Ethernet interface
LSD67-2: Connection status for User Communication 3 set to Ethernet interface• To forcibly disconnect the connection with TCP clients and the TCP server, set the value of the HMI Special
Data Registers (LSD) from 0 to 1.
LSD68-0: User Communication 1 set to Ethernet interface
LSD68-1: User Communication 2 set to Ethernet interface
LSD68-2: User Communication 3 set to Ethernet interface

4-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
When USB1(USB-A) or USB2(USB-A) is selected under Interface Configuration
Function:

Selects the function used by the USB interface (Type A) from the following.
N/A, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3,

Wireless LAN*6, Speaker*6

Access Point Setting: Configures the target access point to connect from the main unit via wireless LAN.
These options can only be configured when Wireless LAN is selected for Function.
Network Name (SSID): Enters the name (SSID) of the target access point. The network
name (SSID) is 1 to 32 characters.
WPA2-PSK

Password:

Enter a password. The password is 8 to 64 characters. Onlyalphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
Show Password: Select this check box to display the characters
entered in Password. When this check box is cleared,
the passwords are displayed with * (asterisk).

IP Settings:

Configure the IP address and subnet mask of the access point of the target. These options canonly be configured when Wireless LAN is selected for Function.
IP Address:

Specifies the IP address. (Default: 192.168.0.150)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value
from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure toassign each device a unique IP address.

Subnet Mask:

Specifies the subnet mask. (Default: 255.255.255.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value
from 0 to 255.
This value must be the same for all devices.

Default Gateway:

Specifies the default gateway. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx".
"xxx" stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.
Set this value when using a router. Leave the value blank when not
required.

Port Number:Specifies the TCP port number (1 to 65535) to use for maintenancecommunication. (Default: 2537)

Forbid Maintenance Communication:
Select this check box to prohibit maintenance communication via
wireless LAN communication.
Regarding TCP port number of the main unit, note the following points.
The numbers that cannot be used:• 2101: For FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass-through• 2538: For pass-through• 2539, 2541: For Maintenance communication (Data Transfer)• 2540: For Maintenance communication (Control function)• 44818: For EtherNet/IP communication

Duplicate numbers cannot be configured in the following functions:• Maintenance communication( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-43)• Web server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-75)• FTP server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-76)• TCP Server is selected for the User Communication( refer to “Port No.” on page 4-45)• Modbus as Manufacture and Modbus TCP Server as
Communication Driver are selected on the Communication
Driver tab( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)*6 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-47

Project Settings

Security Type:4

3 Project Settings Dialog Box• Check the IDEC web site for more information about compatible wireless LAN adapter.
• The wireless LAN network settings and connection status can be checked and controlled with the value ofthe HMI Special Data Registers (LSD) and HMI Special Internal Relays (LSM).
LSD292 to 341: SSID and password of the access point
LSD344 to 355: IP address, subnet mask and default gateway of the wireless LAN
LSD356:
Port number for maintenance communication on the wireless LAN
LSD366:
Wireless LAN connection status
LSD367:
Wireless LAN signal strength
LSM77:
Writing the wireless LAN network settings
LSM78:
Connecting and disconnecting from the wireless LAN
For details, refer to Chapter 35 “Internal Devices” on page 35-1.
When USB1(USB-B) or USB(USB-B) is selected under Interface Configuration
The items displayed in the Interface vary based on the main unit model.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F, HG1G/1P:
HG2G-5T:

USB1(USB-B)

USB(USB-B)

Function: Selects the function used by the USB interface (Mini-B) as N/A or Printer*11.
■ Default
Returns the configured values to their default values.

*11 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

4-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● List of functions supported by Wireless LAN
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Yes: Supported, No: Not supported
Functions

WAN

Download*1

Yes

No

UploadYes

No

Read System Information

Yes

No

Clear

Yes

No

MonitorYes

No

Search IP Settings

Yes

No

TCP

Yes

No

UDP

Yes

No

TCP

Yes

No

UDP

Yes

No

BACnet/IP

Yes

No

EtherNet/IP

No

No

MQTT

Yes

No

SNTP Client

No

Yes

E-mailNo

YesSocial Media

No

Yes

FTP Server

Yes

No

FTP Client

Yes

No

Web Server

Yes

No

User Communication
Device Link Communication*2

Network Communication

4
Project SettingsLAN

Maintenance Communication

Items*1 Excludes operating system*2 Devices that have been confirmed are Modbus (TCP Server, TCP Client) and IDEC FC6A Series

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-49

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.3

Communication Driver Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Communication Driver tab is used to configure the communication driver for the external device configured in
the current project data.

(Function)■ (Function)
Select the External Device Communication.
■ Manufacturer
Selects the manufacturer name of the external device to use in External Device Communication selected by(Function).
■ Communication Driver
The communication driver list for the selected manufacturer is displayed. Selects the serial interface to use.
■ Connection
The connection of the selected communication driver is displayed.
1:1: The main unit is connected to a single external device.
1:N: The main unit is connected to multiple external devices.
■ External Device
These options configure the communication driver to use. For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup
Manual.

4-50

Transmission Wait (x 10 msec):

Specifies the transmission interval for communication commands (0 to255).

Time Out (x 100 msec):

Specifies the time to wait for a response from the external device (1 to255).

Retry Cycles:

Specifies the number of times to execute a reconnection when the main
unit cannot communicate with the external device. When the number ofreconnect attempts reaches the number of times set here, acommunication error is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data : Selects the handling method for values of external device addresses when
UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) is selected for Data
Type from the following.
from Upper word:

Values of external device addresses are read from and written to the upperorder word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is UBIN32(D) andthe numerical value 12345678 (Hex) was entered and written todestination device address D100

from Lower word:

Stored value
1234 (Hex)5678 (Hex)Values of external device addresses are read from and written to the lower
order word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is UBIN32(D) andthe numerical value 12345678 (Hex) was entered and written todestination device address D100
Device address
D100
D101

for MICROSmart, SmartAXIS:Stored value
5678 (Hex)1234 (Hex)

The storage method of data varies based on device type when selecting
the following communication drivers.
Manufacturer

IDEC

Communication driver
MICROSmart(FC6A)(RS232C/485)
MICROSmart(FC6A)(Ethernet)
OpenNet,MICROSmart,SmartAXISPro/Lite(RS232C/485)
OpenNet,MICROSmart,SmartAXISPro/Lite(Ethernet)
MICRO3,MICRO3C• Device types handled as from upper word
Data Register, Timer Current Value, Counter Current Value, Timer Preset
Value, Counter Preset Value, Special Data Register• Device types handled as from lower word
Input (Word), Output (Word), Internal Relay (Word), Link Register,Special Internal Relay (Word), Shift Register (Word)
When using a communication driver other than those listed above and for
MICROSmart, SmartAXIS is selected, the values of all device addresses
are handled as from Upper word.
Enable Pass-Through:Select this check box to use the Pass-Through function.
This option is only displayed for models that can use the Pass-Throughfunction. For details, refer to Chapter 32 “1.2 Supported External Devices”
on page 32-2.

The Pass-Through function can only use one of External Device Communication 1 to External Device
Communication 4*1.

The Pass-Through Tool is required to use the Pass-Through function when using a version of WindLDR
before Ver. 6.01, another company's PLC programming software, or an external device other than IDEC's
external device.
Communication Driver Extension Settings:
This button is displayed when the communication driver extension settings are required.
Click this button to display the Communication Driver Extension Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Communication Driver Extension Settings Dialog Box” on page 4-54.

*1 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-51

4Project Settings

Device address
D100
D101

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Ignore communication errors and continue operation
Select this check box to continue to operate the main unit even when a communication error occurs.
Display error message: Select this check box to display an error message (communication error) when acommunication error occurs and operation continues. Ack is displayed on the error message(communication error).
When the Ignore communication errors and continue operation check box is cleared,
Ack is not displayed on the error message.
Auto retry:

Select this check box to automatically retry communication from the main unit to the station
number where the communication error occurred when a communication error occurs andoperation continues.
All other communication stops while retrying.

To manually retry communication, clear the Auto retry check box.
To retry all station numbers, write 1 in bit 1 (initialize) of the device address configured by Batch
monitoring the communication error information for all Station Numbers.
To individually retry communication, write 1 in bit 0 (connection setting) of the device address configured by
Monitoring communication error information for each station, individually.
Batch monitoring the communication error information for all Station Numbers:
Specifies the word device that stores communication error information for all station
numbers. Only an internal device can be configured for this option.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The information stored as error information is as follows. For details, refer to the
WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
• Initialization• Conditions under which the error occurred• Read error history• Write error history
Monitoring communication error information for each station, individually:
Select this check box to store the error information for each station number in device addresses.
Total number of station being monitored: Specifies the number of station numbers forexternal devices.
Status Device Address:

Specifies the word device that stores communication
error information for each station number. Only aninternal device can be configured for this option.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This error information utilizes a maximum of 256
device addresses. Use caution so that the usedaddress numbers do not overlap with otheraddresses.
The information stored as error information is asfollows. For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4
External Device Setup Manual.
• Connection settings• Conditions under which the error occurred• Read error history• Write error history

The station number varies based on the communication interface. The displayed settings are as follows:
Serial interface:
Slave Number
Ethernet interface: External Device ID

4-52

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
Communication drivers that cannot be simultaneously used
The following communication driver combinations can only be used in a single (Function). They cannot be configured
in multiple settings.
■ Communication drivers that cannot be simultaneously used (1)Manufacturer

Communication Driver
Modbus RTU Master

Modbus4

Modbus RTU Slave

Project Settings

S7-200(PPI)SIEMENS

S7-MPIYASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

MP920-RTU■ Communication drivers that cannot be simultaneously used (2)*1
Manufacturer

Communication Driver
Logix Controllers(Ethernet)

Allen-Bradley

Logix Native Tag(Ethernet)■ Communication drivers that cannot be simultaneously used (3)Manufacturer

Communication Driver
DM Link (1:1)

IDEC System

DM Link (1:N)
DM Link Ethernet(UDP)*1

ModbusModbus RTU Slave
Modbus TCP Server

Example: Communication Driver for External Device Communication 1 is set to Modbus RTU Slave
According to the communication drivers that cannot be simultaneously used (1), External Device

Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, and External Device Communication 4*2
cannot be set to Modbus RTU Master, S7-200(PPI), S7-MPI, or MP920-RTU.
According to the communication drivers that cannot be simultaneously used (3), External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, and External Device Communication 4*2

cannot be set to DM Link (1:1), DM Link (1:N), DM Link Ethernet(UDP)*1, or Modbus TCP Server.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-53

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● Communication Driver Extension Settings Dialog Box
The Communication Driver Extension Settings dialog box is used to configure the communication driver
extension settings. These settings vary based on the external device. For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External
Device Setup Manual.

4-54

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.4

Communication Driver Network Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Communication Driver Network tab is used to configure the information for external devices.

4
Project Settings■ Settings
Edits the settings for the external devices.
External Device ID:

Shows the number that the main unit uses to manage the external devices are displayed.
The number range varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J:
1 to 31
HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
0 to 31
External Device Name: Shows the name for the external device. The default is the External Device ID number.
Clicking the cell allows you to edit the name. The maximum number is 20 characters. Onlyalphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
You cannot use the following characters and name in the External Device Name.
• The following characters and a space"*/:;<>?\|• (blank)• The same name as another External Device ID

External Device Communication: Shows the function set for the serial interface or the Ethernet interface.
(Default: Disabled)
Clicking the cell allows you to select the function from the following items.
Disabled, External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, External Device
Communication 4*1
Function configured in communication drivers with a 1:1 connection in External Device Communication
cannot be set to multiple External Device ID.

*1 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-55

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Communication Driver: Shows the communication driver for use with the External Device Communication.
Slave Number:

Displays the slave number of the external device.
Clicking the cell allows you to change the slave number of the external device.
This option can only be configured when Serial Interface is selected for Interface
Configuration on Communication Interface tab. For details, refer to “Interface
Configuration” on page 4-37.

Leaving it blank or the same number as the other External Device IDs cannot be used for Slave Number.

IP Address:

Shows the IP address of the external device.
Clicking the cell allows you to specify the IP address of the external device.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure to assign each device a unique IP
address.
This option can only be configured when Ethernet is selected for Interface Configuration on
Communication Interface tab.

You can change the IP address of the external devices in the System Mode. Perform the following operationon the Main Menu screen.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: Press Initial Setting, Communication
I/F, Ext. Device IP Address in order.
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: Press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, Ext. IP Address in order.
Port Number: Shows the port number of external device. (Default: 2101)
Clicking the cell allows you to specify the port number of the external device (0 to 65535).
This option can only be configured when Ethernet is selected for Interface Configuration on
Communication Interface tab.
■ Clear
Returns the settings for the selected External Device ID to the defaults.
■ Specify Slave Number of Modbus RTU Master by Value of Device Address
Select this check box to specify the slave number with the value of a device address.
This option is only displayed when the Manufacturer of the external device is Modbus and Communication
Driver is Modbus RTU Master. For details, refer to WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
(Top Device Address):

Specifies a word device to write the Slave Number.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Expansion Settings
If extension settings are required for the communication driver set for the selected slave number, those settings are
displayed. For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
■ Tag File
Import the Allen-Bradley tag defined in the RSLogix5000 L5K file (*.L5K). Click the
dialog box.

button to display the OpenThis option is only displayed when the Manufacturer of the external device is Allen-Bradley and theCommunication Driver is Logix Native Tag(Ethernet). For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device
Setup Manual.
■ Configure Application Name
Configures name to an Application. Click this button to display the Configure Application Name dialog box.
This option is only displayed when the Manufacturer of the external device is ABB. For details, refer to the WindO/
I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
If you change the Communication Driver and then click OK on the Project Settings dialog box, aconfirmation message is displayed. Click Yes on the message to run the conversion for the external device
addresses. If there are no device addresses that correspond to the external device addresses in the current
project data after changing the communication driver, the items set with those device addresses are blank.

4-56

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
Number of external device limitations• The number of external devices that can be connected to External Device Communication 1 to External
Device Communication 4*1 is a total of 32 external devices.
• The number of external devices that can be set varies based on the communication interface.
Communication Interface

Number of External Devices

Serial Interface (Connection: 1:1 communication)

1

Serial Interface (Connection: 1:N communication)

31 max.

Ethernet Interface

32 max.

4
Project Settings*1 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-57

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.5

O/I Link Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The O/I Link tab is used to configure the slave stations to connect to when the main unit is used as the O/I Link
communication master. It configures the O/I link station when the main unit is used as a slave. For details, refer to
Chapter 3 “2 O/I Link Communication” on page 3-3. These options can only be configured when O/I Link Master or
O/I Link Slave is selected for Function under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab.

■ O/I Link Station
Selects the slave station (Slave1 to Slave15).
This option can only be configured when O/I Link Slave is selected for Function under Interface Settings on theCommunication Interface tab.
■ Slave Settings
Select the check boxes for the slave stations to connect to.
This option can only be configured when O/I Link Master is selected for Function under Interface Settings on
the Communication Interface tab.
The slave stations to connect to when the main unit is used as an O/I link communication master are
enabled after the project is downloaded. The slave station number when the main unit is used as a slave isalso enabled after the project is downloaded.

4-58

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.6

User Communication Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The User Communication tab is used to configure communication with external devices such as barcode readers.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “5 User Communication” on page 3-9. This option can only be configured when User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for Function underInterface Settings on the Communication Interface tab.

4
Project Settings(Protocol List)(Type)■ (Protocol List)
Displays the registered user communication protocol.
No.:

Displays the number for managing the user communication protocol.

Protocol Name:Enter the name of the user communication protocol. The maximum number for protocol name is 40
characters.

You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
"*,/:;<>?\|
Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec) :Specify the time out value (0 to 255) from when 1 frame of data has been received to when the next frame ofdata starts to be received. A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. If theReceiving Character Time Out is set to 0, it is not monitored. These setting items are used only with receive
command.
Example: The received data (1 frame) is 2 bytes, the While ON is selected as the Trigger Type in the Trigger
Condition and LM100 is set to the Device Address, LM101 is set to the Completed Device
Address, and LDR110 is set to the Status Device Address
The data of second byte starts to be received before exceeding the Receiving Character Time Out
duration after the data of first byte is received, and the values of the Completed Device Address andStatus Device Address when receiving of the data has been successfully completed are as follows.
• The value of the Completed Device Address LM101 changes to 1.
When the Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically check box is not selected, whenthe value of the Trigger Condition device address LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of theCompleted Device Address LM101 changes to 0.
When the Not Clear Completed Device Address automatically check box is selected, the valueof Completed Device Address LM101 remains 1, so set 0 if necessary.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-59

3 Project Settings Dialog Box• The value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address number+0, bit 15) of the Status Device
Address LDR110 remains 0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration

Receive command
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

First byte of receive data

Second byte of receive data

1
0
1
0

Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1(address number+0, bit 15)
of Status Device Address LDR110 0

When the Receiving Character Time Out duration exceeds until the data of second byte starts to bereceived after the data of first byte is received, the value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address
number+0, bit 15) of the Status Device Address LDR110 changes to 1 and the Completed Device
Address LM101 remains 0. In addition, when the value of the Trigger Condition device address LM100
changes from 0 to 1, the value of LDR110 (address number +0, bit 15) changes to 0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration

Receive command
Value of Device Address LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON

Value of Completed Device Address
LM101

First byte of receive data

Second byte of receive data

1
0
1
0

Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1(address number+0, bit 15)
of Status Device Address LDR110 0

Inching Function*1: Displays whether or not the inching function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
the Enable and the Disable. This can only be set for the User Communication 1.

By using the inching function, data is transmitted at the specified execution interval.
Inching refers to the inching operation of the drive section. It is a general term for drive operations that
repeatedly start and stop in small increments for each operation, such as starting and stopping the drive
section when a push button or switch is pushed and released.
Execution Interval (x10 msec)*1: Specifies the interval to send the commands for inching function as 40 to 1000 (20ms increments).

This option can only be set when the Enable is selected in the Inching Function.
The command cannot be sent at the specified execution interval if the following conditions occur:• The transmission processing for a command cannot be completed within the time set by the Execution
Interval.
⇒ Set the Execution Interval to a time longer than it takes to send the command.
• The inching function was used at the same time as user communication transmission or receive
processing.
⇒Do not use transmission commands, receive commands and commands for inching function at onetime.
One frame is transmitted with no character spacing.
*1 HG1P only

4-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Open Protocol Manager: Configures the user communication protocol registered in the Protocol Manager to the user
communication protocol selected in the (Protocol List).
Click this button to display Protocol Manager. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Configuring
registered user communication protocol to another user communication” on page 3-29.
Deletes the user communication protocol selected in the (Protocol List).

Delete Protocol:■ Command List
The command settings for the user communication protocol selected in the (Protocol List) are displayed.
(Type)*1:

4

Changes the items displayed in the list according to the type of command.
Select this check box to display transmission and receive commands.

Inching:

Select this check box to display commands for the inching function.

User communication protocol commands are displayed in the order they were created, but commands forinching function are always displayed above the transmission and receive commands in the list.
No.:

Shows the number for managing command settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.

Type:

Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Key:

Shows the function keys (F1 to F12) assigned to the command. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.
This option is displayed only when the Inching check box is selected.

Trigger Type:Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Condition:Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double
clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box. The displayed content varies based on
the Trigger Type.
Always Enabled:

Trigger conditions are not necessary, so nothing is displayed.

Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF:Shows the bit device or the bit of the word device as the condition.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy the condition:Shows the conditional expression.
Fixed Period:

Shows the period.

Completed:

Shows the device address for reporting when transmission or receiving of data is successfullycompleted. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Status:Shows the destination device address for the transmitted or received data size and error
information. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Comment:

Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.

Size:

Shows the command data size in bytes. The maximum is displayed if there is data that has the
Variable check box selected on the Data Settings dialog box. Double clicking the cell displays theCommand Settings dialog box.

*1 HG1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-61

Project Settings

TXD, RXD:

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Add:

Adds a command to the Command List. A maximum of 255 commands may be added.
Click this button, displays the Command Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 3“Command Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-37.

Edit:

Edits the command selected in the Command List.
Click this button, displays the Command Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 3“Command Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-37.

Copy:

Copies the command selected in the Command List.
Click this button to add a copy of the selected command to the end of the Command List. Inching
function commands are added above the transmission and receive commands.

Up:

Shifts the selected command upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected command downward in the list.

Delete:Deletes the selected command from the Command List.
Adding, copying, and shifting up and down happen within the range of the same type of command. There
are two types of commands: the TXD, the RXD and the Inching.

■ Data List
Displays the list of command data selected in the Command List.
No.:

Displays the number for managing the data. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-49.

Data:

Displays the data settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details,
refer to Chapter 3 “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-49.

Add:

Add: Adds a data to the Data List.
Click this button, displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Data Settings
Dialog Box” on page 3-49.

Edit:

Changes the selected data in the Data List.
Click this button, displays the Data Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Data Settings
Dialog Box” on page 3-49.

Copy:

Copies the selected data in the Data List.
Click this button to add a copy of the selected data to the end of the Data List.

Up:

Shifts the selected data upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected data downward in the list.

Delete:Deletes the selected data from the Data List.

■ Copy to Protocol Manager
Click this button to register the user communication protocol selected in the (Protocol List) to the Protocol Manager.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “5.3 Protocol Manager” on page 3-33.
■ Expand/Contract Command List
Shows or hides the Data List. By hiding the Data List, the number of commands displayed in the Command List
will increase.

4-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.7

Sub Host Communication Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Sub Host Communication tab is used to configure the sub host communication protocol and HMI Link Register(LLR) addresses to use. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “6 Sub Host Communication” on page 3-88. This option is
configured only when Sub Host Communication is selected for Function under Interface Settings on theCommunication Interface tab.

4
Project Settings■ Protocol
Selects the protocol to use in sub host communication as MicroSmart or Modbus RTU Master.
■ Allocate Address Number of HMI Link Register (LLR)
Settings:

Lists the device addresses allocated to HMI Link Registers.
Address Number: Shows the LLR address numbers (LLR 0 to LLR 63).
Device Address:

Shows the device addresses allocated to LLR address numbers.

B/W:

Shows the device type.
B:

Bit device

W:

Word device

BWORD: Bit device in word
Device Type:

Selects the device type of the device address to allocate to the HMI Link Register (LLR).
Only device types that can be used are shown.

Address Number:Specifies the address number of device address to allocate to the HMI Link Register (LLR).
The range that can be set varies based on the selected device type.

Bit Number:Specifies the bit number in a word device (0 to 15). This option can only be configured
when a word device is selected for Device Type.

Slave Number:Specifies the slave number of the external device for the device address to allocate to the
HMI Link Register (LLR). The range that can be specified varies based on the selected
communication driver.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-63

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Set:

Allocates the device address to the HMI Link Register (LLR). When a device address isalready allocated to an LLR address number, the allocated device address can be changed.
Select an LLR address number and click Set to allocate the settings configured by Device
Type, Address Number, Bit Number, and Slave Number to the HMI Link Register(LLR).

Set with Auto Increment: Allocates sequential device addresses from the device address configured by Device
Type, Address Number, Bit Number, and Slave Number to the HMI Link Registers(LLR) after the selected LLR address number.
Delete:Deletes the device address allocated to the HMI Link Register (LLR) from the list.
Select the LLR address on the list and click Delete.

Up:

Shifts the device address allocated to the selected HMI Link Register (LLR) up in the list.

Down:

Shifts the device address allocated to the selected HMI Link Register (LLR) down in the list.

Import:Displays the Open dialog box.
Select a file with exported device addresses (CSV file) and click Open to collectively
overwrite the LLR address numbers under Settings with the device addresses in theselected file.

Export:Displays the Save As dialog box.
Select the location to save the file, enter a file name, and then click Save to save thedevice address details as a CSV file.

■ Monitor the error information of all Slave Numbers
Select this check box to monitor the error information of all external devices that are being communicated with using
sub host communication.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Monitor the error information of all Slave Numbers” on page 3-93.
(Destination device address):Specifies the word device to write the error information to.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Monitor the error information of each Slave Number
Select this check box to monitor the error information for each external device that is being communicated with using
sub host communication.
The information for each slave is stored starting with the allocated internal device and utilizes 256 words of address
numbers.
The slave numbers are allocated with the starting address as number 0, up to number 255.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Monitor the error information of each Slave Number” on page 3-94.
(Top device address):

Specifies the word device to write the error information to. This option uses 64 words ofaddresses starting with the configured device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Keep running with skipping the Slave Number of Communication Error
Select this check box to temporarily stop communication with the slave number where the communication error
occurred and connect to the next slave number.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Keep running with skipping the Slave Number of communication error” on page 3-94.

4-64

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.8

Printer Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Printer tab is used to configure the printer that is connected to the main unit.

4
Project Settings■ FormSelects the paper size to output as A4 or Letter.
If the printer does not support the selected paper size, printing is performed with the paper size specified in theprinter's settings.
■ Reverse Mode
Select this check box to reverse only black or white when printing.
• The color cannot be configured. To print in monochrome, configure the print color on the printer that isused. When the edge of the data is not printed, enable No Trimming and Bordered in the printer's
settings.
• When connecting the main unit to a printer, an error may occur on the printer side as an unsupported
device. However, data is sent that satisfies the PictBridge standard when printing, so the data can be
printed correctly.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-65

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.9

External Memory Device Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The External Memory Device tab is used to configure the destination folder on the external memory device*1
inserted in the main unit.

■ External Memory Device Folder
Enter the folder name for the folder to use on the main unit within 8 alphanumeric characters using upper-casealphabetic characters (A to Z) and numbers (0 to 9). (Default: HGDATA01)
All the data sampled with the log functions is saved in this External Memory Device folder. For details on the external
memory device, refer to Chapter 33 “1 External Memory Devices” on page 33-1.
• You cannot use the following characters in the folder name.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: " # $ & ' ( ) * . / : ; < > ? \ ` | ~HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: " * . / : < > ? \ |• After operation starts, the folders created in the External Memory Device folder and the file names cannot
be changed.
■ Remove Files
Select this check box to erase the files saved in the External Memory Device folder.
All Screenshots:

Select this check box to erase all the screenshots in the “CAPTURE” folder.

All Alarm Log files:

Select this check box to erase all the Alarm Log data saved in the "ALARMLOG" folder.

All Data Log files:

Select this check box to erase all the Data Log data saved in the "DATALOG" folder.

All Operation Log files:

Select this check box to erase all the Operation Log data saved in the “OPERATIONLOG”
folder.

Trigger Device Address:

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition todelete the files.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

4-66

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.10 Autorun Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Autorun tab is used to configure the functions for a USB flash drive inserted in the main unit. For details, refer
to Chapter 33 “5 USB Autorun Function” on page 33-58.

4
Project Settings■ Enable USB Autorun
Select this check box to enable the USB Autorun function.
The USB Autorun function automatically displays a menu screen from which the user can execute predefinedcommands when a USB flash drive is inserted in the main unit.
■ Open Popup Screen when USB Flash Drive is inserted
Select this check box to display a popup screen when a USB flash drive is inserted in the main unit.
Screen Number:Specifies the popup screen number (1 to 3015) to display when a USB flash drive is inserted.

Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the coordinates to display the popup screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-leftcorner of the popup screen.
The units and range for the display coordinates are as follows.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-67

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.11 Expansion Module Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Expansion Module tab is used to configure input and output expansion modules attached to the main unit. For
details on expansion modules, refer to Chapter 2 "Expansion Modules" in the MICRO/I Hardware Manual.

■ Use Cyclic Script
A Cyclic Script is a script whose trigger condition can be set to a fixed interval (in increments of 10 milliseconds). Only
one Cyclic Script can be assigned to the project. When a script is specified as a Cyclic Script, it executes at the
specified fixed intervals independent of the scan time of the screen (processing time for parts on the screen).
Select this check box to use a Cyclic Script.
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID to use (1 to 32000) as the Cyclic Script.
Click
to display Script Manager. Select a script from the script list. For details, refer to Chapter 25 “2.2 Script
Manager” on page 25-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script specified with Script ID.
■ Execution IntervalSpecify the interval at which the script should execute from 10 to 1000 (10 milliseconds increments). The specified
script will execute at the specified intervals.
■ Module Configuration*1
Displays the Module Configuration dialog box. Configure the expansion modules to be connected to the main unit.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Module Configuration Dialog Box” on page 4-69.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only

4-68

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● Module Configuration Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons in the Module Configuration dialog box.
To use an expansion module, insert the expansion module to be connected to the main unit on the Module
Configuration dialog box. For details about the expansion module, refer to Chapter 2 "Expansion Modules" in the
MICRO/I Hardware Manual.

4
Project Settings

Module Configuration Area

Parameter Reference Area

Expansion Module List

Module Configuration Area: Displays the configuration of connected expansion modules.
Preview Module Configuration: Previews the image of the CPU module and expansion
module set in the module configuration area. Click thisbutton to display the Preview Module Configuration
dialog box.
You can copy the previewed image to the clipboard by clicking the Copy to clipboard button on thePreview Module Configuration dialog box.
Expansion Module List:

Displays a list of expansion modules that can be connected to the main unit.

Parameter Reference Area: Displays the parameters that are configured for the expansion modules.
Configure:Configure each parameter of the expansion module. Click this button todisplay the configuration dialog box that corresponds to the expansion
module.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-69

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● Inserting Expansion Modules

1 Select the expansion module to insert in the Expansion Module List, and then drag and drop it to the Module
Configuration Area.

Module Configuration Area

Expansion Module List

2 Click the inserted expansion module in the Module Configuration Area, and then click Configure.
The configuration dialog box that corresponds to the expansion module is displayed.

Inserted expansion module

4-70

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3 In the configuration dialog box, configure the parameters for the expansion module.

4
Project Settings

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-71

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● Deleting Expansion Module

1 Click the expansion module to remove in the Module Configuration Area.

Module Configuration Area

2 Right-click the expansion module to delete, and then click Remove.

Expansion module to delete
The selected expansion module is deleted and all of the extension modules placed on the right side of the deleted
extension module are automatically shifted to the left.

4-72

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box● Swapping Expansion Module

1 Select the expansion module to be moved, and then drag and drop it at the destination.

4
Project Settings

If you change the position of the digital I/O module, the device address is automatically reassigned.
However, the device addresses configured in the editing project are not changed.
Example: When swapping the digital input modules, reassign the device addresses as follows.
However, the device address of the part (Pilot Lamp) configured in the project is not changed.

Part (Pilot Lamp)

Main unit

Input Module (2)Input Module (1)Quantity of Inputs: 8 Quantity of Inputs: 16(#I0040 to #I0057)(#I0030 to #I0037)#I0030Main unit
Part (Pilot Lamp)#I0030

Input Module (2)Input Module (1)Quantity of Inputs: 16 Quantity of Inputs: 8(#I0030 to #I0047) (#I0050 to #I0057)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-73

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.12 Web Server Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Web Server tab is used to configure the Web Server function of the main unit. For details, refer to Chapter 27“Web Server Function” on page 27-1.

(Data Type)■ Use System Web Page
Select this check box to access the Remote Control page, Remote Monitor page or System Detailed Information pageof the main unit from a web browser terminal.
Select the functions allowed when accessing the main unit from a web browser terminal from the following. This
option can only be set when Use System Web Page is selected.
Enable Remote Control and Monitor: Displays a screenshot of the screen displayed on the main unit. You can also
control the main unit being monitored by clicking on the displayed screenshot.
Enable Remote Monitor only:

Displays a screenshot of the screen displayed on the main unit.

Disable:Displays only the detailed system information page.

Go back to System Information if operation is not performed for the following period:
Select this check box to automatically return to the homepage when no action is performed in the Remote Control
page or Remote Monitor page for a specified time. Specify the time until the page returns to the System
Information page following the last action performed in the Remote Control page or the Remote Monitor page.
This can only be set when Enable Remote Control and Monitor or Enable Remote Monitor only is
selected.
(Data Type):
Value:

Select the data type for which the System Information page return time is specified.
Units are minutes.
Use a constant value (1 to 60).

Device Address: Use a value of device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If Device Address is selected for (Data Type), note the following points:• If the value of device address is set to 61 or higher, it will be treated as 60 minutes.
• Once a network connection is established between the web browser and the main unit, the timeout
period cannot be changed. The timeout period needs to be set in Device Address before a web browser
access to the main unit.

4-74

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Display Goto Screen Tool on Remote Function Page:
Select this check box to place buttons for switching screens on the remote control page and remote monitoring
page. This option can only be configured when Enable Remote Control and Monitor or Enable Remote
Monitor only is selected.
■ Use Custom Web Page
Select this check box to access the Custom Web Page saved in the external memory device of the main unit from a
web browser terminal. For details, refer to Chapter 27 “6 Custom Web Page” on page 27-16.

■ Port Number
Specifies the TCP port number to use for the Web Server function (0 to 65,535).
Regarding TCP port number of the main unit, note the following points.
The numbers that cannot be used:• 2101: For FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass-through• 2538: For pass-through• 2539, 2541: For Maintenance communication (Data Transfer)• 2540: For Maintenance communication (Control function)• 44818: For EtherNet/IP communication

Duplicate numbers cannot be configured in the following functions:• Maintenance communication( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-43)• Web server function• FTP server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-76)• TCP Server is selected for the User Communication( refer to “Port No.” on page 4-45)• Modbus as Manufacture and Modbus TCP Server as
Communication Driver are selected on the Communication
Driver tab( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)■ Default Showing Page
Select the web page to display first when accessing the main unit from a web browser terminal from the following.
System Information, Remote Monitor, Remote Control
In (Custom Web Page), the Custom Web page file name is displayed in Web Page Editor of the Project window.
This option can only be set when Use System Web Page or Use Custom Web Page is selected.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-75

4Project Settings■ Execution Interval (msec)
Specifies the interval (0 to 5,000 ms) for the main unit to return data. The load that the remote control function andthe remote monitoring function place on the operation of the main unit can be reduced by increasing this value.
However, the display update speed in the web browser will become slower.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.13 FTP Server Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The FTP Server tab is used to configure the FTP Server function of the main unit. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “1
FTP Server Function” on page 21-1.

(Data Type)■ Enable FTP Server function
Select this box to enable FTP Server function.
This allows the FTP client to read or write the file contained in the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
■ Port Number
Specifies the TCP port number to use for the FTP server function (0 to 65535).
Regarding TCP port number of the main unit, note the following points.
The numbers that cannot be used:• 2101: For FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass-through• 2538: For pass-through• 2539, 2541: For Maintenance communication (Data Transfer)• 2540: For Maintenance communication (Control function)• 44818: For EtherNet/IP communication

Duplicate numbers cannot be configured in the following functions:• Maintenance communication( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-43)• Web server function ( refer to “Port Number” on page 4-75)• FTP server function• TCP Server is selected for the User Communication( refer to “Port No.” on page 4-45)• Modbus as Manufacture and Modbus TCP Server as
Communication Driver are selected on the Communication
Driver tab( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)

4-76

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Inactivity Timeout
Set the timeout period between the main unit and the FTP Client. After log in to the main unit, if there is nocommunication between the main unit and the FTP client for a specified set time, the main unit will automaticallydisconnect the communication.
(Data Type): Select the data type for the timeout period until the main unit disconnects the FTP client. Units areminutes.
Value:

Use a constant value (1 to 60).

Device Address:

Use a value of device address.

• The timeout period to login the main unit is 1 minute.
• If Device Address is selected for (Data Type), note the following points:- When the value of device address is 0, the Inactivity Timeout is 1 minute, and when the value of device
address is 61 or more, the Inactivity Timeout is regarded as 60 minutes.
- Once a network connection is established between the FTP client and the main unit, the timeout period
cannot be changed. The timeout period needs to be set in Device Address before connecting the FTP
client to the main unit.
■ Specify Target
Select the external memory device inserted in the main unit to be accessed by the FTP client from SD Memory
Card*1, USB Flash Drive*2, USB1*3 or USB2*3.

When you specify the target folder, you cannot access the higher level folders. For details about the hierarchy, refer to
Chapter 21 “1.3 Hierarchy of the FTP Server” on page 21-3.
Location:

Specify the location of the target folder path. The maximum number is 247 characters. Only alphanumericcharacters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters and characters that cannot be used vary based on
the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: Access the “RECIPE” folder under “HGDATA01” folder on the external memory device
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

HGDATA01/RECIPE

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:

HGDATA01\RECIPE

When the check box is cleared, the target folder is the root folder of the FTP server.
If the external memory device is not inserted in the main unit or the folder specified as the target does notexist, the target folder is the root folder of the FTP server.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-77

Project Settings

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

4

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.14 E-mail Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The E-mail tab is used to configure the outgoing mail server (SMTP) to be used for sending an e-mail from the main
unit. For details, refer to Chapter 19 “Email Function” on page 19-1.

■ General Setting
Outgoing mail server (SMTP):

Selects the Outgoing mail server (SMTP) setting method.
Host Name:

Specifies the Host Name of the outgoing mail server (SMTP).
The maximum number is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters,-(dash) and .(period) can be used.

IP Address:

Specifies the IP address of the outgoing mail server (SMTP).
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from0 to 255.

If Host Name is selected, the IP address of the outgoing mail server (SMTP) is looked up and obtained fromthe host name using the DNS server. In order to access a DNS server from the main unit, the IP address of
the DNS server must be specified. For details, refer to “ When Ethernet is selected under Interface
Configuration” on page 4-43.
Outgoing mail server (SMTP) port number:Specifies the port number for the outgoing mail server (SMTP) (0 to65535).

The outgoing mail server (SMTP) port number to use varies based on the server. For details, contact theadministrator of the network which the main unit is connected to.
Normally, port number 25 for SMTP, and port number 587 for SMTP-AUTH are used.

4-78

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Sender E-mail Address:

Enter an e-mail address of the sender. The maximum number is 40 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

For how to judge the validity of e-mail address format, refer to Chapter 2 “Error Check” on page 2-62.
Sender Name: Enter a name of the sender. The maximum number is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric charactersand symbols can be used.
Use secure connection (SSL/TLS):
The protocol to use varies based on the model and the port number.
ModelPort No.

Protocol or Command

465

SMTPS

587

STARTTLS

Other than 465 and 587

STARTTLS

Any number

SMTPS

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P■ Authentication Setting
Require authentication (LOGIN) to send E-mail: Select this check box to access the outgoing mail server (SMTP)
protected with an account name and a password.
Account Name:Enter a name of the account. The maximum
number is 40 characters. Only alphanumericcharacters and symbols can be used.

Password:

Enter a password. The maximum number is 40
characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

■ Advanced SettingSpecify General setting and Authentication setting by Value of Device Address:
Select this check box to set the General Setting and theAuthentication Setting using the value of the specified
device address.
Top Device Address: Specify the word device to use. It allocates the settings of the General Setting and theAuthentication Setting starting at the configured device address. You can only specify aninternal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Copy the settings as default value to Device Address: Select this check box to copy the settings in the General
Setting and the Authentication Setting to device
addresses as default.
(Device Address): Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that triggers the copy of thesettings.
When the value of device address changes from 0 to 1, the values configured in the General
Setting and the Authentication Setting are written, beginning from the device address
set by the Top Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the Specify General setting and Authentication setting by Value of Device Address checkbox is selected, an e-mail is not sent when the value of the device address allocated as the Sender E-mailAddress or the Sender Name is 0, and the value of LSD222 changes to 1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-79

Project Settings

Select this check box to use SSL/TLS communications with the outgoing mail server.

43 Project Settings Dialog Box
Device Addresses for General Setting and Authentication Setting
When the Specify General setting and Authentication setting by Value of Device Address check box isselected, it allocates the settings of the General Setting and the Authentication Setting starting at the device
address set in the Top Device Address. The details are shown below.
Settings
Outgoing mail server (SMTP)
Outgoing mail server (SMTP) port number
Sender E-mail Address
Sender Name
Require authentication (LOGIN) to send E-mail(0: Not require authentication,
1: Require authentication)
Account Name
Password
Use secure connection (SSL/TLS)(0: Disable, 1: Enable)

Address Number

Words

Data Format+0 to +20

21*1, *2

Host Name is selected: String
IP Address is selected: Decimal+21

1

Decimal+22 to +42*2, *321

String+43 to +63

21*2, *3

String+64

1

Decimal+64 to +85

21*2, *3

String+86 to +106

21*2, *3

String+107

1

DecimalString data is stored in the upper byte and lower byte according to the Storage Method of String Data
setting. For details, refer to “Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.

*1 When IP address is selected, use only four words from the beginning, and the remaining seventeen words are left as areserved area.
*2 The twenty-first word is recognized as a NULL terminating character (0x00) regardless of the value of device address.
*3 Add a NULL terminating character (0x00) as the end of the string data when the string length is less than twenty words.

4-80

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box
Example: The Authentication Setting and the General Setting are set as follows:
Settings

Preset Value

Outgoing mail server (SMTP), IP Address is selected.

192.168.0.44

Outgoing mail server (SMTP) port number

587

Sender E-mail Address

test@example.com

Sender Name

Test

Require authentication (LOGIN) to send E-mailSelected
test_accountPassword

test_password

Use secure connection (SSL/TLS)

Selected

Top Device Address

LKR 100

Storage Method of String Data

4
Project Settings

Account Namefrom Upper byte〜

（The address number of Top Device Address）+0 LKR 100
Outgoing mail server (SMTP)〜+20 LKR 120+21 LKR 121+22 LKR 122

Outgoing mail server (SMTP) port number
Sender E-mail Address〜+42 LKR 142+43 LKR 143
Sender Name〜

+63 LKR 163+64 LKR 164+65 LKR 165

Require authentication (LOGIN) to send E-mailAccount Name〜

+85 LKR 185+86 LKR 186
Password+106 LKR 206+107 LKR 207

Use secure connection (SSL/TLS)

The value of each device address is listed below.
Settings

Preset Value
Device Address LKR 100

Outgoing mailserver (SMTP) Value (Decimal)192

LKR 101

LKR 102

LKR 103

168

0

44

LKR 104 to LKR 120
Reserved

Outgoing mail Device Address
server (SMTP)
Value (Decimal)
port number

LKR 121587

Device Address LKR 122

Sender E-mailAddress

Sender Name

LKR 123

LKR 124

LKR 125

LKR 126

LKR 127

LKR 128

LKR 129

LKR 130

LKR 131to
LKR 142

String (ASCII)‘t’‘e’‘s’‘t’‘@’‘e’‘x’‘a’‘m’‘p’‘l’‘e’‘.’‘c’‘o’‘m’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’Value(Hexadecimal)

7465h

7374h

4065h

7861h

6D70h

6C65h

2E63h

6F6Dh

0000h

0000h

Device Address LKR 143

LKR 144

LKR 145

LKR 146 to LKR 163

String (ASCII)‘T’‘e’‘s’‘t’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’Value(Hexadecimal)

5465h

7374h

0000h

0000h

Device Address
Requireauthentication(LOGIN) to
Value (Decimal)
send E-mail

LKR 1641

Device Address LKR 165

Account
Name

LKR 166

LKR 167

LKR 168

LKR 169

LKR 170

LKR 171

LKR 172 to LKR 185

String (ASCII)‘t’‘e’‘s’‘t’‘_’‘a’‘c’‘c’‘o’‘u’‘n’‘t’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’Value(Hexadecimal)

7465h

7374h

5F61h

6363h

6F75h

6E74h

0000h

0000h

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-81

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Settings

Preset Value
Device Address LKR 186

Password
Use secureconnection(SSL/TLS)

4-82

LKR 187

LKR 188

LKR 189

LKR 190

LKR 191

LKR 192

LKR 193 to LKR 206

String (ASCII)‘t’‘e’‘s’‘t’‘_’‘p’‘a’‘s’‘s’‘w’‘o’‘r’‘d’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’Value(Hexadecimal)

7465h

7374h

5F70h

6173h

7377h

6F72h

6400h

0000h

Device Address

LKR 207

Value (Decimal)

1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.15 Project Details Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Project Details tab is used to display and configure project data information.

4
Project Settings■ Project Name
Shows the current project name.
■ Project Folder SizeShows the total size of the current project data.
■ Download Data SizeShows the total size of the data and the total size of only the image files when the current project data is downloaded.
■ Location
Shows the save location for the current project data.
■ Created
Shows the date and time the current project data was created.
■ Modified
Shows the date and time the current project data was last saved.
■ Accessed
Shows the date and time the current project data was opened.
■ UserEnter the name of the creator. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for the project data. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Language

Select the language used for outputting alarm log data to the printer*1, and when saving alarm log, data log, andoperation log data as CSV files:
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

The display type for dates and times varies based on the selected language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss
Western, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-83

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.16 Font/Kanji Dictionary Data Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Font/Kanji Dictionary Data tab is used to configure the optional fonts and the Kanji dictionary data when
downloading to the main unit.

■ Optional Fonts to be downloaded
Select the optional fonts for download to the main unit. Select the check boxes for the optional fonts when
downloading:Japanese Large Font (First standard), Japanese Large Font (Second Standard), Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Hangul, High-quality Western Font, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
• Optional fonts, if left cleared, will be removed from the main unit when the project data is downloaded.
• The check boxes for optional fonts used in drawings, parts, and Text Manager are automatically selected.
For details about optional fonts, refer to Chapter 2 “Installed Fonts in the Main Unit” on page 2-7.
■ Total font sizeShows the total size of the standard fonts and selected optional fonts.
If no optional fonts are selected for download to the main unit, shows the size of the standard fonts.
Standard font size:Shows the total size of the standard fonts.

Optional font size:Shows the total size of the selected optional fonts.

■ Use Kanji input mode*1
Select this check box to download the Kanji dictionary data to the main unit.
When Use Kanji input mode check box is cleared, Download Fonts and Kanji Dictionary Data checkbox on Download dialog box is selected and a project download is executed, deletes the Kanji dictionary
data stored in the main unit.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only

4-84

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.17 Compatible Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Compatible tab is used to configure the functions in previous versions of WindO/I-NV4 and older the main unit
series (HG1B).
This tab is displayed only when the Use Compatible functions for previous version check box or the Use HG1B
Compatible functions check box is selected in the WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box, on the General tab, underCompatibility.

4
Project Settings■ Compatible with previous version
This option is displayed only when the Use Compatible functions for previous version check box is selected in
the WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box, on the General tab, under Compatibility.
Script/Trigger Condition:
Calculate 16-bit data with 16-bit:
Select this check box to calculate arithmetic operations (+, -, *, /, modulo) as 16-bit data when
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), or BCD4(B) is selected for Data Type. Data that exceeds 16 bits is lost.
Clear this check box to calculate as 32 bits. No data will be lost.
Handle Logical operations as Bit operations:
Select this check box to process logical operations (||, &&) by replacing them with bit operations (|,&). The priority of the replaced bit operators is the same as the corresponding logical operators.
Communication:
Use the same O/I Link Communication as the HG4F/3F/2F/2S/1F:
Select this check box if you will connect the FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G or
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P to the O/I Link Communication of the HG4F/3F/2F/2S/1F.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-85

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

Parts:
Expand display area of text for parts placed on the Top Layer:
Select this check box to draw text even when a part of the text is located outside of the part.
However, if the text too far outside the outline of the part, it may not be drawn.
Align the text area (Character Input/Message Display/Numerical Input/Numerical Display):
For characters displayed in Numerical Input, Character Input, Message Display, and Numerical
Display, select this check box to align characters based on the area of maximum displayablecharacter length.
Write NULL terminating character (0x00) as the end of string when string which Digits is maximum is input(Character Input):
Select this check box to write a NULL character (0x00) at the end character when a string of the
maximum length has been input.
Show Arithmetic Error when the Minimum, Maximum or Limits is invalid (Bar Chart, Line Chart, Meter):
Select this check box to display the Processing error when the following values are invalid.
Bar Chart, Line Chart:

Minimum, Maximum

Meter:

Minimum, Maximum, Limits for the range

Use Windows-1252 as encoding when Character Set of Windows font is "European"
Select this check box to use Windows-1252 as encoding when the character set of the Windows Fontis "European".
Use Windows-1258 as encoding when Character Set of Windows font is “Vietnamese”
Select this check box to use Windows-1258 as encoding when the character set of the Windows Fontis "Vietnamese".
Display texts as "Center-Left" for "Center" with the Align Text, and as "Left-Right" for "Right" when using text
registered with Windows font in Text Manager:
When displaying multi-line text registered with Windows fonts, select this check box to display the
text aligned center-left when Center is selected, and the text with right-indented left-aligned when
Right is selected. When the check box is selected, the operation is the same as WindO/I-NV4 Ver.
1.11.4 or earlier. The follows show how text appears using the "Center-Left" and the "Left-Right".
Center-Left:

Centers the line containing the most number of characters, and thenaligns the other lines to the left end of that line.
Aligns to left end of line with most characters

Centers line with most characters

Left-Right:

Aligns the line containing the most number of characters along the rightedge, and then aligns the other lines to the left end of that line.
Aligns text to left end of line with most characters

Aligns text to right end of line with most characters

Data Log
Insert a blank row in header of CSV file: Select this check box to insert a blank row to the third line of the header.
For the data structure, refer to Chapter 13 “Data Structure and Output
Example” on page 13-45.

4-86

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Compatible with HG1B
These options are displayed only when the Use HG1B Compatible functions check box is selected in the
WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box, on the General tab, under Compatibility.
Word Button/Word Write Command:
Write the data as 2 words:

Clear this check box to write the result of arithmetic operations as
one word.
Numerical Input/Numerical Display:
Divide Floating data and Integer data:

Select this check box to read and display the decimal portion ofdata and the integer portion of data from different device
addresses when BCD4(B) or BCD8(EB) is selected for DataType.

Message Display:
Ignore LF code in the variable strings:

Select this check box to display messages by ignoring the linefeed
code LF (0Ah) when displaying text according to values of device
addresses.
Clear this check box to display messages with line breaks using thelinefeed code LF (0Ah).

Convert NULL code to Space code in the variable strings:
Select this check box to display messages by converting the NULL
terminating code (00h) to a space (20h) when displaying text
according to values of device addresses.
Clear this check box to terminate messages with the NULL
terminating code (00h).
Timer:
Keep Timer status after changing the screen: Select this check box to continue the timer count when switching
the base screen or when displaying a popup screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-87

4Project Settings

Select this check box to write the calculated result of arithmetic
operations (+, -, *, /) as two words when UBIN16(W) or
BIN16(I) is selected for Data Type. For +, -, *, /, the calculated
result is written in two words as a 32-bit numeric value.
For "/" (division), the quotient data is written in the first word, andthe remainder data is written in the second word.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.18 Internal Clock Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Internal Clock tab is used to configure the SNTP server, time zone, and daylight saving time to get date andtime data. The acquired date and time data is written to the internal clock of the main unit.

■ SNTP Server
Selects the SNTP server setting method.
Host Name:

Specifies the host name of the SNTP server.
The maximum number is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, -(dash) and .(period)
can be used.

IP Address:

Specifies the IP address of the SNTP server.
The format is "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". "xxx" stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.

• If Host Name is selected, the IP address of the SNTP server is looked up and obtained from the hostname using the DNS server. In order to access a DNS server from the main unit, the IP address of the
DNS server must be specified. For details, refer to “ When Ethernet is selected under Interface
Configuration” on page 4-43.
• The port number is 123.
Obtain the date and time automatically with the following condition or operation:
Set the conditions for acquiring date and time data from the SNTP server.
Fixed Time:

Select this check box to get date and time data from the SNTP server on a regular basis,and then select the period to get the data from the following.
Every 10 Minutes, Every 1 Hour, Every 1 Day, Every 1 Week, Every 30 Days

Turn on the power: Select this check box to get the date and time data from the SNTP server when the main unit
power is turned on.

4-88

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Project Settings Dialog Box■ Time Zone
Select the time zone to set. (Default: (UTC) Coordinated Universal Time)
Enable Daylight Saving Time:

Select this check box to correct the time to daylight saving time when it exists in theselected time zone.
Start: Displays the start date and time of daylight saving time.
End:

Displays the end date and time of daylight saving time.

• Date and time when output as a CSV file• Output date and time added to the CSV file name• Date and time displayed on the part
• The daylight saving time system is subject to change, therefore check the dates and times displayed inStart and End.
• IANA Time Zone Database version number 2019a is adopted.
● Checking the communication contents with the SNTP server
You can check the communication contents with the SNTP server through the values of the HMI Special Internal
Relays and the HMI Special Data Registers.
■ LSM57
When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, get the current time from the SNTP server. The acquired current timeis stored in the internal current time data (LSD13 to 19) of the main unit.
■ LSD29
The execution result of communication with the SNTP server is stored.
StatusCause

0: Successfully Completed

The SNTP server does not return a response after the timeout period (30 seconds) has
elapsed due to the following reasons.

2: Timeout error

4: Other error• An Ethernet cable is disconnected.
• Host Name of the SNTP server is incorrect.
• IP address of the SNTP server is incorrect.
• A connection cannot be made to the preferred DNS server and alternate DNS server.

The main unit cannot perform communication with SNTP server■ LSD30
The elapsed time (0 to 65535 minutes) from the time last obtained from the SNTP server to the current time is stored.
If the current time is successfully obtained, the value will be reset and the elapsed time will start counting. Even if it
fails to get the current time, the elapsed time counting continues without interruption until it succeeds.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-89

4Project Settings

When the Enable Daylight Saving Time check box is selected, the following date and time in the Alarm Log,
Data Log, and Operation Log functions may appear to log data at the same time twice, or to haveadvanced in time and no data has been logged. This is due to the daylight saving time correction.

3 Project Settings Dialog Box

3.19 Network Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Network tab is used to configure the BACnet/IP communication function, EtherNet/IP communication function,and MQTT communication function. For details, refer to the Network User's Manual.

■ Use BACnet/IP
Select this check box to use the functions of the BACnet/IP communication.
Settings:

Click this button to display the BACnet Settings dialog box.

■ Use EtherNet/IP*1
Select this check box to use the functions of the EtherNet/IP communication.
Settings:

Click this button to display the EtherNet/IP Settings dialog box.
Cannot be used the function of the EtherNet/IP communication when the Allen-Bradley as
Manufacturer, and Logix Controllers(Ethernet) or Logix Native Tag(Ethernet) as Communication
Driver are selected on the Communication Driver tab.

■ MQTT Settings*1
Configure the functions of the MQTT communication.
Settings:

Click this button to display the MQTT Settings dialog box.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

4-90

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Project Restrictions

4

Project Restrictions
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Download Restrictions■ Project Data Size
The size of the project data that can be downloaded to the main unit is as follows.
Project data size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Approx. 24 MB max

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V

Approx. 58 MB max (including additional fonts and Kanji Dictionary Data)

HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F, HG1G/1P

Approx. 12 MB max (including additional fonts)

HG2G-5T

Approx. 5 MB max (including additional fonts)• To check the project data size, on the Home tab, in the Project group, click Target Info. The Target
Information dialog box is displayed. The project data size can be checked with Memory Space (byte)
under Target Runtime Information.
• The project data size varies based on the fonts downloaded to the main unit. For details, refer to Chapter
2 “Optional Fonts” on page 2-8.
■ Number of Parts
The number of parts that can be downloaded to the main unit are as follows.

4.2

Parts

Number of parts

Total number of Bit Buttons, Word Buttons, and Multi-Buttons whose Action Mode is set to
Alternate2048 max.

Selector switches

200 max.

Maximum Number of Control Devices and External Device Addresses
If the same device address is used in multiple device address settings, the number of used device addresses
is counted as 1. It is not counted as 1 device address per device address setting.
■ Data Log Settings

The maximum number of control devices*1 and external device addresses that can be used in the Data Log settings is
a total of 128.

■ Global Script

The maximum number of control devices*1 and external device addresses that can be used as a trigger condition andin scripts executed as Global Script is a total of 256.

■ Scripts

The number of control devices*1 and external device addresses that can be used in the script are as follows:
Item

Number of devices

Destination control devices*1 and external device addresses

64 max.

Source control devices*1 and external device addresses

64 max.

■ E-mail Settings, Social Media Settings

The maximum number of control devices*1 and external device addresses that can be used in the E-mail settings andthe Social Media settings is a total of 255.

■ File Transfer Settings (FTP client function)

The maximum number of control devices*1 and external device addresses that can be used in the File Transfer
settings is a total of 240.

*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4-91

Project Settings

Main unit44 Project Restrictions■ BACnet/IP Settings, EtherNet/IP Settings, MQTT Settings

The maximum number of control devices*1 that can be used in the BACnet/IP settings, the EtherNet/IP settings andthe MQTT settings is a total of 512.

*1 FT2J/1J only

4-92

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualScreen

Chapter 5This chapter gives an overview of the main unit screen and describes how to create setup and operate the screen.

1

Screen Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

Screen Types
The types of screens offered by the main unit and screens that can be created with the WindO/I-NV4 are given below.

ScreenMain unit
Maintenance Screen
Maintenance
Maintenance

System Mode

System Mode

Base Screen

Device Monitor

1230

Device Monitor

Adjust Brightness

Adjust Brightness

1230

×
7

8

9

CLR

4

5

6

CAN

1

2

3

/

＋−

×
8

9

CLR

4

5

6

CAN

1

2

3

0

＋−

/

.

.
ENT

Screen TypeBase
ScreenPopup
ScreenThe screen
provided by themain unit

Maintenance
Screen

User

▲ ▼

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

BS

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

L CAN
ENT

Screen No.

Description

1 to 3000

The screen that is displayed when the main unit is in Run Mode. This screen
places drawing objects and parts on the base and creates a screen that isdisplayed on the main unit.

1 to 3015

Screens that canbe created with
the WindO/I-NV4
Password
Input
ScreenPassword********

ENT
0

Popup Screen Password Input Screen
7

The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the main unit
is in Run Mode. The size and coordinates of the screen can be specified andthis screen can also be moved on the Base Screen.

A Popup Screen for the standard Keypad*1 will automatically be created inscreen numbers 3001 to 3015.

3026 to3033

The Password Input Screen is used to enter the user name and password
required for switching user accounts when the main unit is in Run Mode.
This screen can only be created when the Use Security functions checkbox and the Customize Password Input Screens check box in the
Security dialog box are selected. If you are using the Password Input Screen
provided by the main unit, you do not need to create the screen. For details,
refer to Chapter 24 “4.1 Entering the Password on the Main Unit” on page 2447.
A standard Password Input Screens will automatically be created in screen
numbers 3026 to 3028.

–

Using the screen that is displayed when the main unit is in Run Mode, you
can switch from Run Mode to System Mode and load a screen to adjust
device monitor and screen brightness.For details, refer to Chapter 36 “1Maintenance Screen” on page 36-1.

*1 The Keypad that is displayed when operating Numerical and Character Input parts when Standard is selected under Typein the Keypad menu for Numerical and Character Input parts.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

55-1

1 Screen Overview

1.2

Screen Size
The screen size differs depending on the main unit model selected. The size of the main unit screen is equal the sizeof the Base Screen.
Model

5-2

Screen Size (W x H)

FT2J, HG2J

800 x 480 dots

FT1J, HG1J, HG1G/1P

480 x 272 dots

HG5G/4G/3G-V

1024 x 768 dots

HG4G/3G

800 x 600 dots

HG2G-V, HG2G-5F

640 x 480 dots

HG2G-5T

320 x 240 dots

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens2

Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

Creating Screens
The Password Input Screen is created only when the Use Security functions check box and theCustomize Password Input Screens check boxes in the Security dialog box are selected. For details,
refer to Chapter 24 “3 Security Dialog Box” on page 24-37.

Screen● Creating a screen

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click ▼ under New.
2 Click Base Screen, Popup Screen or Password Input Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.

• To edit the properties for a Base Screen, Popup Screen or Password Input Screen that has already beencreated, double click an area in the editing window with no objects.
• The default of the screen’s background color can be set on the Default Preferences tab in the WindO/
I-NV4 Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

3 Change the settings on each tab as necessary, and click the OK button.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual55-3

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2.2

Opening Screens● Opening a screen
You can open a single screen that has already been created.
Double click the screen to open in the Project window.

If you right click a screen in the Project window, and then click Open Screens, the selected screen opens.
● Opening specific screens
You can open multiple screens as a group.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click ▼ to the right of Open.
2 Click Base Screen, Popup Screen or Password Input Screen.
The Open Screens dialog box is displayed.

If you right click a screen folder in the Project window and then click Open Screens, the Open Screens
dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the screens to open in Screen List and then click the OK button.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to open from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen, Password Input Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.

5-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens● Opening the previous or next screen
You can open the screen with the previous screen number or the next screen number of the screen displayed in theactive editing window.
To open the screen with the previous screen number, click the(Open Previous Screen) button in the Screensgroup on the Home tab. To open the screen with the next screen number, click the(Open Next Screen) button.

5
ScreenWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-5

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2.3

Closing Screens● Closing the displayed screen
You can close the active editing window.
Clickin the upper-right of the editing window.

● Closing all screens
You can close all the editing windows.
On the View tab, in the Window group, click Close All.

● Closing a specific screen
You can close multiple editing windows as a group.

1 Right click a screen folder in the Project window and click Close Screens.
The Close Screens dialog box is displayed.

5-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2 Click the screens to close in Screen List and click the OK button.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

5
Screen■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to close from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen, Password Input Screen■ Screen List
This list shows the screens being edited.
■ Select All
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-7

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2.4

Duplicating Screens
You can copy a screen that has already been created to create a new screen.

1 Right click a screen folder or screen in the Project window and click Duplicate Screens.
The Duplicate Screens dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the screens to copy in Screen List.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

3 Specify Screen Number for the new screen and the Number of copies to duplicate and then click the OK button.

■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to duplicate from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
Base Screen, Popup Screen, Password Input Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
■ Screen Number
Specify the screen number (Base Screen: 1 to 3000, Popup Screen: 1 to 3015, Password Input Screen: 3026 to 3033)
for the new screen.
■ Number of copies
Specify the number of screens to copy (Base Screen: 1 to 2999, Popup Screen: 1 to 3014, Password Input Screen: 1to 7).

5-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens• If multiple screens are selected in Screen List or if the Number of copies is 2 or more, consecutive
screen numbers are added to the screens starting with the number specified in Screen Number.
Example: When a screen with screen number of 1 is selected in Screen List, the Number of copies is
3, and Screen Number is 100 is selected, then the screen numbers after duplication are“100”, “101”, “102”.
Number of copies: 3
Screen Number: 100
Screen List’s numbers: 1

Screen Number: 1
Screen Number: 100
99
99
Copy

Screen Number: 101

5

99

ScreenScreen Number: 102
99

Example: When screens with screen numbers 3 and 5 are selected in Screen List, the Number ofcopies is 2, and Screen Number is 100 is selected, then the screen numbers after
duplication are “100” and “102” for the screens duplicated from screen number 3 and “101” and“103” for the screens duplicated from screen number 5.
Screen Number: 3
Screen Number: 100
99
99
Copy
Number of copies: 2
Screen Number: 100
Screen List’s numbers: 3, 5

Screen Number: 5
Full

Screen Number: 101
Copy
Full

Screen Number: 102
99

Screen Number: 103
Full• If a screen number already exists after copying and you click the OK button on the Duplicate Screens
dialog box, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
- Click the Yes button to overwrite the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click the Yes To All button to overwrite all the screens.
- Click the No button to display the next confirmation message without copying the screen with thenumber displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click the Cancel button to stop copying screens and return to the editing window.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-9

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2.5

Deleting Screens● Deleting a screen
You can delete a single screen.

1 Right click the screen to delete in the Project window and click Delete Screens.
A delete confirmation message is displayed.

2 Click the Yes button.
The screen is deleted.
Click the No button to return to the editing window without deleting the screen.

● Deleting specific screens
You can delete multiple screens as a group.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click Delete.
The Delete Screens dialog box is displayed.

If you right click a screen folder in the Project window and click Delete Screens, the Delete Screens
dialog box is displayed.

5-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2 Click the screens to delete in Screen List and click the OK button.
A delete confirmation message is displayed.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

5
Screen■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to delete from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen, Password Input Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
■ Select All button
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.

3 Click the Yes button or the Yes To All button.
• Click the Yes button to delete the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message. When deleting
multiple screens, the next message to confirm deleting a screen is displayed.
• Click the Yes To All button to delete all the screens without displaying the confirmation message.
• Click the No button to display the next message to confirm deleting a screen without deleting the screen with thenumber displayed in the confirmation message. You will return to the editing window when finished confirming all
the screens.
• Click the Cancel button to stop deleting screens and return to the editing window.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-11

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2.6

Reusing Screens
You can copy screens from other project data.
The Password Input Screen is reused only when the Use Security functions check box and theCustomize Password Input Screens check boxes in the Security dialog box are selected. For details,
refer to Chapter 24 “3 Security Dialog Box” on page 24-37.

1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click Reuse.

If you right click a screen folder or screen in the Project window and click Reuse Screens, the Opendialog box is displayed.

2 Select project data that includes the screens to copy and click OK.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Password Screen will be displayed. Enter the
password for projects created with WindO/I-NV4 Ver. 1.11.4 or earlier using only 4 to 15 uppercase lettersand numbers.
The password to enter varies based on the check box setting of the Use Password to open a Project
found under the Options tab in the Security dialog box.
When this check box is checked, enter the password for Use Password to open a Project.
When this check box is unchecked, enter the password for the user account assigned to the Administrator
security group.
For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

5-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

3 Click the screens to copy in Screen List and click the OK button.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

5
Screen■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to copy from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen, Password Input Screen■ Screen List
This list shows screens included in the source project data.
If the screen number of the screen to copy, a picture included in the screen, a text ID, or a script ID alreadyexists in the project data being edited, an overwrite message is displayed.
• Click the Yes button to overwrite the item displayed in the confirmation message. If there are multiple
redundant items, a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items.
• Click the Yes To All button to overwrite all of the picture numbers, pictures, text IDs, and script IDs.
• Click the No and a dialog box opens for each setting. Change the item to a unique screen number or ID
and click the OK button.
• Click the Cancel button to stop overwriting the displayed in the confirmation message. If there are
multiple redundant items, a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-13

2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV4 Screens

2.7

Batch Editing of Multiple Screen Settings
You can modify the settings for multiple Base Screens, Popup Screens or Password Input Screens collectively.

1 Selects multiple screens of the same type on the Project window or in the Screen List window, right-click to open a
popup menu, and then click Properties.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.

To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

2 Configure only the items to modify collectively.

3 Click the OK button.

5-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Base Screen

3

Base Screen
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The screen that is displayed when the main unit is in Run Mode. This screen places drawing objects and parts on thebase and creates a screen that is displayed on the main unit.

3.1

Properties of Base Screen Dialog Box● General Tab

5
Screen■ Screen Type
Select Base Screen as the screen type.
You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen.
■ NumberEnter the Base Screen’s screen number (1 to 3000).
■ TitleEnter the Base Screen’s title. Maximum number is 40 characters.
■ SizeShows the screen size. You cannot change the size of Base Screens.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created. It is only displayed when creating a new screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-15

3 Base Screen● Options Tab■ Background Color
Select the screen’s background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades). Click this button to open the color
palette. Select color with the color palette.
When Overlay with Base Screen is configured, the background color for the Base Screen specified as the
background is displayed.
■ Overlay with Base Screen
Configure this section to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens.
1 to 5:

Select these to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens.

No.:

Enter the overlay screen’s screen number (1 to 3000).

Coordinates X, Y:

Specify the display location of the overlay screen in coordinates. The coordinates can be set
in the range (Screen size - 1 dot).
The origin is the upper-left corner of the screen and the X- and Y-coordinates correspond to
the upper-left corner of the overlay window.
X(0, 0)
Base screen
Y
Overlay screen

5-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Base Screen■ Display the Order of Overlapping Screens
You can select the display order of the Base Screen and the overlay screens.
Example: To display the Base Screen being edited as the background
Overlay screen(5 screens max)Base screen being edited

5

Example: To display the Base Screen being edited above overlay screen: 3

ScreenBase screen being edited
Overlay screen: 3■ FlashSelect one of the following items as the setting when the screen is flashing.
None:

Displays the screen.

Flash (1 sec cycle):

The screen display is flashed in one second intervals.

Flash (0.5 sec cycle):

The screen display is flashed in half second intervals.

Backlight OFF:Turns off the backlight until the screen is touched or until bit 0 or bit 7 is set to 1 in thesystem area 1’s address number + 1.

■ Focus Order
Sets the focus order for Numerical Input and Character Input. The focus order is the order the focus moves between
Numerical Input or Character Input when the user presses the ENT key. Text can be input in Numerical Input or
Character Input that has focus. The focus order number starts from 0.
Vertical:The focus moves vertically from top to bottom.

Horizontal:

The focus moves horizontally from left to right.

Custom:Sets the desired order for moving the focus.
On the View tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the parts in theorder to move the focus.
The focus moves in the following order when Numerical Input and Character Input on the screen is notaligned to the left or top.
Vertical1

Horizontal

1234
4

1

67
3

5
4

2

2

1234

67

890

5
Y-axis up to down

3890
X-axis left to right

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-17

3 Base Screen● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying the screen by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the screen. Only
Permitted security groups can open this screen. Double clicking the cell switches
between Permitted and Prohibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited from the right-click menu on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box,
you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page24-19.
For details about the security function, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” onpage 24-1.

5-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Base Screen

3.2

Displaying Layered Base Screens
It is possible to layer and display multiple Base Screens. The coordinates and display order for layered screens can be
set on the screen that will serve as the base. A maximum of 5 layered screens can be displayed.
■ Coordinates
Using the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left area of the layered screen become the X and Y
coordinates.
X(0, 0)
Base screen

5YOverlay screen

Screen■ Display Order
This allows you to select the order of display for the screen that will serve as the base and layered screens.
Example: Displaying a Base Screen that is currently being edited as the bottom most layer
Overlay screen(5 screens max)Base screen being edited

Example: Displaying a Base Screen currently being edited on the layered screen: 3.

Base screen being edited
Overlay screen: 3

For details about how to configure these settings, refer to “3.1 Properties of Base Screen Dialog Box” on page 5-15.
Example: When Base Screen: 100 which has a clock placed in it, is used as a layered screen, Base Screen:1 which isdisplayed as the base and Base Screen: 2 will be displayed as follows:
Layered Screen

Base Screen: 1
Displayed as
the base

Base Screen: 100

Base Screen: 2

130

110

100

Displayed as
the base

120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Layering

Layering

Display for Base Screen: 1
130

Display for Base Screen: 2

110

100
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

5-19

3 Base Screen• Layered screens that have been set as layered screens will not be displayed on the screen that isdisplayed as the base.
Example: Layering and displaying Base Screen: 100 on Base Screen: 1
Layering and displaying Base Screen: 101 on Base Screen: 100
Base Screen: 101
Layered Screen0

Layered Screen

Base Screen: 1
Displayed as
the base

Base Screen: 100

130
100
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Layering
Display for Base Screen: 100
0Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1

0

130

130

100

100

120

120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Layered Screen (Base Screen:101) is displayed.

11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00

Layered Screen (BaseScreen: 101) is not
displayed.

• Drawing objects and parts from layered screens may not display properly when placed outside of thedisplayed area.
Displayed as the baseLayered Screen

Outside of the display area

When layering and displaying base screens that have drawings and parts placed on the top layer, they aredisplayed in order of each top layer in front of each base screen.
Example: When layering Base Screen 2 on the of Base Screen 1
Top layer of Base Screen 2
Top layer ofBase Screen 2
Display for Base Screen: 1
14/07/22 12:00

130
100
120

130

Base Screen 2

100

Layering

Top layer ofBase Screen 1

120

Top layer of Base Screen 1
14/07/22 12:00

14/07/22 12:00

Base Screen 2

130
100
120

Base Screen 1

Base Screen 1

For displaying of drawings and parts placed on the top layer, refer to “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” onpage 5-33.

5-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Popup Screen

4

Popup Screen
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the main unit is in Run Mode. The size and coordinatesof the screen can be specified and this screen can also be moved on the Base Screen.

4.1

Properties of Popup Screen Dialog Box● General Tab

5
Screen■ Screen Type
Select Popup Screen for the screen type.
You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen.
■ NumberEnter the Popup Screen’s screen number (1 to 3015).
However, screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are Popup Screens for standard Keypads for Numerical Input and Character
Input.
■ FontSelect the font to use for the title from the following items:
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
This option can only be selected when Use Text Manager is cleared.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this to use text registered in the Text Manager for the screen title.
However, the text color is white, not the color set in the Text Manager.
If the characters displayed in the title contain a newline, the text after the newline will not be displayed.
However, if using a Windows font for the selected text ID, the text after the newline will still be displayed.
■ Text ID
Specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use text registered in the Text Manager. Click
Text Manager.

to display theThis option can only be set when Use Text Manager is selected.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-21

4 Popup Screen■ TitleEnter the Popup Screen’s title. Maximum number is 40 characters. This title is displayed in the Popup Screen’s title bar.
This option can only be entered when Use Text Manager is cleared.
■ SizeWidth, Height: Specify the width (40 dots to Base Screen width) and the height (40 dots to Base Screen height) of
the Popup Screen.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created. It is only displayed when creating a new screen.
● Options Tab■ Background Color
Select the screen’s background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades). Click this button to open the color
palette. Select the color with the color palette.
■ Screen Effects
Displays the Popup Screen’s background with the color specified in Background Color.

None:

Transparency: Displays the Popup Screen’s background as transparent. The amount of transparency can be selectedfrom 10% to 90% in 10% increments.
Superimpose:

Displays the Popup Screen’s background as completely transparent. The screen underneath the
Popup Screen can be seen.

For the Popup Screen set to Superimpose as Screen Effects, note the following points:• Magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) is treated as a transparent color. If you place pictures on the Popup Screen
set to superimpose that use this color, those areas are completely transparent.
• The buttons underneath the Popup Screen are active.

5-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Popup Screen■ Title Bar
Select this to display the title bar on the Popup Screen. The text set in Title on the General tab is displayed in thetitle bar.
The title bar is not displayed if superimpose is set.
Move Button:

Select this to display the(Move) button on the title bar.

Close Button:

Select this to display the(Close) button on the title bar.

■ Open with Fade In
When opening a Popup Screen, select this to gradually fade in the popup screen from nothing to the transparency
specified in Transparency.

■ Focus Order
Sets the focus order for Numerical Input and Character Input. The focus order is the order the focus moves between
Numerical Input or Character Input when the user presses the ENT key. Text can be input in Numerical Input or
Character Input that has focus. The focus order number starts from 0.
Vertical:The focus moves vertically from top to bottom.

Horizontal:

The focus moves horizontally from left to right.

Custom:Sets the desired order for moving the focus.
On the View tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the parts in the order tomove the focus.
The focus moves in the following order when Numerical Input and Character Input on the screen is notaligned to the left or top.
Vertical1

Horizontal

1234
4

1

67
3

5
4

2

2

1234

67

890

5
Y-axis up to down

3890
X-axis left to right

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-23

5
Screen■ Close while changing Base Screen
Select this to close the displayed popup screen when changing the Base Screen.

4 Popup Screen● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying the screen by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the screen. Only
Permitted security groups can open this screen. Double clicking the cell switches
between Permitted and Prohibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited from the right-click menu on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box,
you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page24-19.
For details about the security function, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” onpage 24-1.

5-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Popup Screen

4.2

Popup Screen Configuration
Title Bar
Move Button

Close Button

Screen Display Area

5
Screen■ Title Bar
Displays buttons and the title of the Popup Screen.
Pressing the title bar of the screen allows you to move the screen to the front.
Main unit

Main unit

Main unit

When there is a title bar on the popup screen, touch switches that are within 20 dots of the title bar will not
respond.
■(Move) Button
Moves the Popup Screen.

2 Touch the position where the

1 Press

screen will be moved toMain unit

Main unit

3 The screen will move the position
that was touched

Main unit

The location that was touched will
become the location of.

• The Popup Screen can be moved in the range where thebutton can be displayed.

• The Popup Screen will be moved in units of 1 dot.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-25

4 Popup Screen■(Close) Button
Closes the Popup Screen.

■ Screen Display Area
The area where drawing objects and parts are placed.

4.3

Standard Keypad Popup Screen
A Popup Screen that places a regular Keypad used for Numerical Input, Character Input, inputting for E-mail and clock
settings on screen numbers 3001 to 3015 with the WindO/I-NV4.
Example: HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V
Decimal (Number Value) Keypad

Uppercase (Alphabet) Keypad• The Keypad Popup Screen will differ depending on the model selected.
• The Keypad Popup Screen can also place drawing objects and parts in the same manner as Popup Screen
numbers 1 to 3000.
• Screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are screen numbers that are empty when a new project has been created
and are handled as normal Popup Screens.
• Deleting a Keypad Popup Screen and recreating a new Popup Screen of the same screen number willplace the same Keypad.

5-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Password Input Screen

5

Password Input Screen
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Password Input Screen is used to enter the user name and password required for switching user accounts whenthe main unit is in Run Mode. The size and coordinates of the screen can be specified and this screen can also be
moved on the Base Screen. This screen can only be created when the Use Security functions check box and theCustomize Password Input Screens check box in the Security dialog box are selected. If you are using the
Password Input Screen provided by the main unit, you do not need to create the screen. For details, refer to Chapter
24 “4.1 Entering the Password on the Main Unit” on page 24-47.

5.1

Properties of Password Input Screen Dialog Box

5
Screen● General Tab■ Screen Type
Select Password Input Screen for the screen type.
You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen.
■ NumberEnter the screen number (3026 to 3033) of the Password Input Screen.
■ FontSelect the font to use for the title from the following items:
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
This option can only be selected when Use Text Manager is cleared.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this to use text registered in the Text Manager for the screen title.
However, the text color is white, not the color set in the Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use text registered in the Text Manager. Click
Text Manager.

to display theThis option can only be set when Use Text Manager is selected.
■ TitleEnter the Password Input Screen’s title. Maximum number is 40 characters. This title is displayed in the Password Input
Screen’s title bar.
This option can only be entered when Use Text Manager is cleared.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-27

5 Password Input Screen■ SizeWidth, Height: Specify the width (40 dots to Base Screen width) and the height (40 dots to Base Screen height) of
the Password Input Screen.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created. It is only displayed when creating a new screen.
● Options Tab■ Background Color
Select the screen’s background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades). Click this button to open the color
palette. Select the color with the color palette.
■ Screen Effects
Displays the Password Input Screen’s background with the color specified in Background Color.

None:

Transparency: Displays the Password Input Screen’s background as transparent. The amount of transparency canbe selected from 10% to 90% in 10% increments.
Superimpose:

Displays the Password Input Screen’s background as completely transparent. The screen underneaththe Password Input Screen can be seen.

For the password input screen set to Superimpose as Screen Effects, note the following points:• Magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) is treated as a transparent color. If you place pictures on the Popup Screen
set to superimpose that use this color, those areas are completely transparent.
• The buttons underneath the Popup Screen are active.
■ Title Bar
Select this to display the title bar on the Password Input Screen. The text set in Title on the General tab is displayedin the title bar.
The title bar is not displayed if superimpose is set.
Move Button:

Select this to display the(Move) button on the title bar.

Close Button:

Select this to display the(Close) button on the title bar.

■ Open with Fade In
When opening a Password Input Screen, select this to gradually fade in the Password Input Screen from nothing to
the transparency specified in Transparency.

5-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Password Input Screen

5.2

Password Input Screen Configuration
Title Bar
Move Button

Close Button

Screen Display Area

5

When there is a title bar on the Password Input Screen, touch switches that are within 20 dots of the title
bar will not respond.
■(Move) Button
Moves the Password Input Screen.

2 Touch the position where the

1 Press

screen will be moved toMain unit

Main unit

3 The screen will move the position
that was touched

Main unit

The location that was touched will
become the location of.

• The Password Input Screen can be moved in the range where thebutton can be displayed.

• The Password Input Screen will be moved in units of 1 dot.
■

(Close) Button
Closes the Password Input Screen.

■ Screen Display Area
The area where drawing objects and parts are placed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-29

Screen■ Title Bar
Displays buttons and the title of the Password Input Screen.

5 Password Input Screen

5.3Standard Password Input Screen
WindO/I-NV4 provides standard Password Input Screens for screen numbers 3026 to 3028.
Example: HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V
Upper Case (Alphanumerical)

Lower Case (Alphanumerical)

Sign• The Standard Password Input Screen varies based on the model selected.
• Deleting a Standard Password Input Screen and recreating a new Password Input Screen of the same
screen number will place the same keypad.

5-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Screen Restrictions

6

Screen Restrictions
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

6.1

Screen Number
The number of screens and layered screens that can be created in a single project and the number of Popup Screensand Password Input Screens that can be displayed on the Base Screen are as follows:■ Base Screen
Item5

Number of screens
3,000 max.

Number of layered screens

ScreenNumber of screens that can be created

5 max.

■ Popup Screen
Item

Number of screens

Number of screens that can be created

3,015 max.

Number of screens that can be displayed on the Base Screen

3 max. (Including Password Input Screen, Alarm
Screen and Device Monitor*1)■ Password Input Screen
Item

6.2

Number of screens

Number of screens that can be created

8 max.

Number of screens that can be displayed on the Base Screen

1 max.

Maximum Number of Parts■ Number of Parts That Can be Placed on a Single Screen
ScreenNumber of Parts

Base Screen

960 max.

Popup Screen

960 max.

Password Input Screen

960 max.

Multiple commands added to a Multi-Button or Multi-Command are counted as one each.

■ Number of Parts That Can be Displayed on a Single Screen
In addition to the currently displayed Base Screen, this includes layered screens and currently displayed Popup
Screens and Password Input Screens.
Parts

Number of Parts

Potentiometer

32 max.

Numerical Input

256 max.

Character Input

256 max.

Numerical Inputs and Character Inputs in a constant state of input
Video Display

Limit to 1. Either one but can't be both.
1 max.

Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display

Limit to 1. Either one but can't be both.

Data Log Display

1 max.

*1 The maintenance screen is not included.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-31

6 Screen Restrictions

6.3

Maximum Number of Control Devices and External Device Addresses
A maximum of 512 Read/Write device addresses of control devices*1 and external devices can be used for basescreens (including overlay screens) or popup screens.
If the same device address is used in multiple device address settings, the used number of device addresses
will be counted as 1 device address. It will not be counted as 1 point per device address setting.

6.4

Text and Messages
Follow the rules below, otherwise text and messages on the main unit may not be displayed or may be partially
missing.

6.5

Popup screen title, Password Input Screen title:

Make shorter than the title bar

Text on drawings:

Make smaller than the text area

Text and messages used in parts:

Make smaller than the size of the parts

Vertical Installation
Even if you choose for them to be installed and displayed vertically, the screens in the System Mode will be the same
as horizontal installation and display.

*1 FT2J/1J only

5-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping

7

Drawings and Parts Overlapping
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes when drawing and parts overlap.

7.1

Overview
Place the drawings and parts on the top layer to have precedence when these objects overlap on base screens andpopup screens.

Display for Base Screen or Popup Screen
Top Layer

130
100
120

130
100
120

Base Screen or Popup Screen

Select behind objects
To select an object that is under other objects, press and hold CTRL while you click the stacked objects. To
select an object that is the front of the stacks, press and hold CTRL while you click the selected object thatis the back.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-33

5ScreenConfigure the Properties dialog box of the drawings or parts if they need to be placed on the top layer. For details,
refer to the settings for the drawings or part.

7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping

7.2

Displaying Overlapping Drawings and Parts
The display when drawings and parts overlap on base screens and popup screens varies based on the location where
they are placed.

● Display order of overlapping parts
If two parts overlap on a base screen or popup screen, the part last modified is displayed in the front.
Example: A Numerical Display is placed on the base screen and a Bit Button is placed in front of it.
Bit Button
Numerical Display

Display for Base Screen: 1

Object list
No.

1234

1234

Type

1

Numerical Display

2

Bit Button

Layer

Base Screen: 1

Changes the value

9999
Numerical Display is displayed in front

If two parts are overlapping each other on a base screen or popup screen, the part which is configured in theProperties dialog box as a top layer, will keep displaying in the front.
Example: A Numerical Display is placed on the base screen and a Bit Button is placed on the top layer.
Bit Button
Display for Base Screen: 1

Top Layer

Object list
No.

Numerical
Display

1234
567

1234

Type

1

Numerical Display

2

Bit Button

Layer
Top Layer

Base Screen: 1

Changes the value

9999
The display order of Numerical Display
and Bit Button is unchanged

If parts placed on the top layer overlap, the display order of the parts does not change.
Example: A Numerical Display is placed on the top layer and a Bit Button is placed in front of it.
Bit Button
Numerical
Display
Top Layer

1234

Display for Base Screen: 1

Object list
No.

1234
567

Type
Numerical Display

Top Layer

2

Bit Button

Top Layer

Base Screen: 1

Changes the value

9999
The display order of Numerical Display
and Bit Button is unchanged

5-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Layer

1

7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping● Display order of drawing and parts overlapping
If a drawing and part are overlapping with each other on a base screen or popup screen, the drawing or partconfigured in the Properties dialog box as a top layer, then it will be displayed in the front over the other.
Example: An equilateral hexagon is placed on the base screen and a Numerical Display is placed in front of it.
Numerical Display
Equilateral
Hexagon

Display for Base Screen: 1

Object list
No.
1

1234

1234

Type

Layer

Equilateral hexagon
Numerical Display

2

Base Screen: 1

5

Changes the value

Screen9999
The display order of the equilateral hexagon
and Numerical Display is unchanged

If a part placed on a base screen or popup screen and a drawing placed on the top layer overlap, the drawing placedon the top layer is always displayed in front.
Example: A Numerical Display is placed on the base screen and an equilateral hexagon is placed on the top layer.
Equilateral Hexagon
Display for Base Screen: 1

Top Layer

Object list
No.

Numerical Display

1234
567

1234

Type

Layer

1

Numerical Display

2

Equilateral hexagon Top Layer

Base Screen: 1

Changes the value

9999
The display order of the equilateral hexagon
and Numerical Display is unchanged

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-35

7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping● Drawing and Parts are hidden
In the following situations, the drawing and the part image type are hidden.
• When the drawing or part is flashing• When the hidden condition is satisfied in a part configured with display conditions• When a lamp is off that has its Not Display Image check box selected on the View tab• When an unregistered state or number is selected for the image type in a Multi-State Lamp or Picture Display• When moving a Picture Display
When a drawing and another drawing or part placed on a base screen or popup screen overlap, if the drawing or partin front becomes hidden, the portion of the background drawing that was overlapped remains missing.
Example: A rectangle is placed on the base screen and a Picture Display is placed in front of it.
Picture Display

Display for Base Screen: 1

Object list
No.

Rectangle

Type

1

Rectangle

2

Picture Display

Layer

Base Screen: 1

Picture Display
is hidden

Overlapping part for the rectangle and Picture Display is the
background for the screen and the rectangle remains missing.

When a drawing placed on a base screen or popup screen and a drawing or part placed on the top layer overlap, if thedrawing or part placed on the top layer becomes hidden, only the drawing that was placed on the base screen or
popup screen is displayed.
Example: A rectangle is placed on the base screen and a Picture Display is placed on the top layer.
Display for Base Screen: 1

Picture Display

Object list
No.

Top Layer
Rectangle

Type

1

Rectangle

2

Picture Display

Layer
Top Layer

Base Screen: 1
Picture Display
is hidden

Rectangle remains

When a drawing and another drawing or part placed on the top layer overlap, if the drawing or part in front becomes
hidden, only the background drawing is displayed.
Example: A rectangle is placed on the top layer and a Picture Display is placed in front of it.
Display for Base Screen: 1

Picture Display
Top Layer
Rectangle

No.

Base Screen: 1
Picture Display
is hidden

Rectangle remains

5-36

Object list

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Type

Layer

1

Rectangle

Top Layer

2

Picture Display

Top Layer

7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping● Display order of overlapping parts that have None selected for Image Type
When a drawing and a part that has None selected for Image Type placed on a base screen or popup screen
overlap, if the value for the part changes or if the picture for the part changes, the portion of the background drawingthat was overlapped remains missing.
Example: An equilateral hexagon is placed on the base screen and a Numerical Display is placed in front of it.
Numerical Display
Equilateral
Hexagon

Display for Base Screen: 1

Object list
No.

1234

1234

Type

1

Equilateral hexagon

2

Numerical Display

Layer

Base Screen: 1

5
ScreenChanges the value

9999
Overlapping part for the equilateral hexagon and Numerical Display is the
background for the screen and the equilateral hexagon remains missing.

When a drawing placed on a base screen or popup screen and a part that has None selected for Image Type placedon the top layer overlap, if the value for the part changes or if the picture for the part changes, no part of the drawing
on the base screen will be missing.
Example: An equilateral hexagon is placed on the base screen and a Numerical Display is placed on the top layer.
Numerical Display
Top Layer

Display for Base Screen: 1

1234

Object list
No.

Equilateral
Hexagon

1234

Type

1

Equilateral hexagon

2

Numerical Display

Layer
Top Layer

Base Screen: 1

Changes the value

9999
The equilateral hexagon remains

When a drawing and a part that has None selected for Image Type placed on the top layer overlap, if the value forthe top layer part changes or if the picture for the part changes, no part of the background drawing will be missing.
Example: An equilateral hexagon is placed on the top layer and a Numerical Display is placed in front of it.
Numerical Display
Top Layer
Equilateral
Hexagon

1234

Display for Base Screen: 1

Object list
No.

1234

Type

Layer

1

Equilateral hexagon Top Layer

2

Numerical Display

Top Layer

Base Screen: 1

Changes the value

9999
The equilateral hexagon remains

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5-37

7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping

7.3

Restrictions• To place overlapping drawings and parts on a screen, we recommend they be placed on the top layer. If thenumber of objects placed on the top layer exceeds the limit, only the objects that exceed the limit will be placed on
the base screen or popup screen. At this time, the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM33 is 1. For details, refer
to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
• When the Message Display, Message Switching Display, and Alarm List Display have their Scroll check box selectedon the Format tab in the Properties dialog box and they are placed on the top layer, the scrolling speed of thetext will be slower.
• On the Top Layer, magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) is treated as the transparent color. If you place magenta (R:255,
G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomes transparent.

5-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 6

Drawings

This chapter describes the procedures for drawing with shapes and the procedures for configuring pictures and text.

1
1.1

ShapesLine
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Line Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing lines.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click(pencil).

Drawings

The mouse cursor changes to

6(Line) under Basic Shapes.

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (start point) to start drawing the line on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location.
A line is drawn that connects the start point and stop point.

Drag
Start
point

Stop
point

To change the style of the drawn line, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the line to open the Properties dialog box• Select the line and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the line and open the right click menu

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-1

1 Shapes● Properties of Line Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the line from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the line (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the line flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Point1, Point2
X, Y:

Specifies the start point and stop point of the line in coordinates.
The upper-left corner of the screen is the origin.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
Y

Line
Start
point

Stop
point

Screen■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the line on the top layer. The line will have precedence when other drawings and parts
are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

6-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.2

Polyline
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Polyline Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing polylines.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Polyline) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
Drawings

2 Click at the location (start point) to start drawing the polyline on the edit screen.
3 Click the end point locations in order.
A line is drawn that connects the start point and the various end point locations in the order that they were created.

4 Double click at the stop point location.
A line is drawn that connects the last end point and the stop point.

Start
point

End
point

End
point

Stop
point

The maximum number of end points in a polyline, including the start point and the stop point, is 300
points.
• To change the style of the drawn polyline, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the polyline to open the Properties dialog box- Select the polyline and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the polyline and open the right click menu
• To change the start point, end points, or the stop point of the drawn polyline, select the polyline and rightclick on it, then click Reshape.
click the edit screen or press theis displayed on the polyline. Dragto the desired location. Double

key to finish changing the shape.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-3

1 Shapes● Properties of Polyline Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the polyline from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the polyline from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the polyline (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the polyline flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the polyline in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the polyline is the X and Y coordinates.
X:
0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:
0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Polyline
Screen■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the polyline in width and height.
W:
1 to (base screen horizontal size)H:
1 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

HeightPolyline
Screen6-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the polyline on the top layer. The polyline will have precedence when other drawings
and parts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

6
Drawings

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-5

1 Shapes

1.3

Polygon
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Polygon Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing polygons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Polygon) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

2 Click at the location (start point) to start drawing the polygon on the edit screen.
3 Click the end point locations in order.
A line is drawn that connects the start point and the various end point locations in the order that they were created.

4 Double click at the stop point location.
A polygon is drawn with the start point and stop point connected.

End
point

End
point

Start
point

Stop
point

The maximum number of end points in the polygon, including the start point and the stop point, is 300
points.
• To change the style of the drawn polygon, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the polygon to open the Properties dialog box- Select the polygon and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the polygon and open the right click menu
• To change the start point, end points, or the stop point of the drawn polygon, select the polygon and rightclick on it, then click Reshape.
click the edit screen or press the

6-6

is displayed on the polygon. Dragto the desired location. Double

key to finish changing the shape.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes● Properties of Polygon Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

6
Drawings■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the polygon from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the polygon from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the polygon (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16
shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the polygon.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the polygon flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the polygon in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that circumscribes
the polygon is the X and Y coordinates.
X:
0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:
0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenPolygonWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-7

1 Shapes■ SizeW, H: Specifies the size of the polygon in width and height.
W:
1 to (base screen horizontal size)H:
1 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightPolygon■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the polygon on the top layer. The polygon will have precedence when other drawings
and parts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

6-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.4

Rectangle
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Rectangle Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing rectangles.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Rectangle) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
Drawings

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (start point) to start drawing the rectangle on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A rectangle is drawn with the start point and stop point set to opposite angles.

Start
point

Drag

Stop
point

To change the style of the drawn rectangle, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the rectangle to open the Properties dialog box• Select the rectangle and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the rectangle and open the right click menu

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-9

1 Shapes● Properties of Rectangle Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the rectangle from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the rectangle from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the rectangle (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16
shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the rectangle.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the rectangle flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Round Type
Selects the style of the rectangle's corners from the following.
None, Curve, Straight
None

6-10

Curve

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Straight

1 Shapes■ Round RadiusSpecifies the rounding radius (1 to 200). However, the range that can be configured is where round radius x 2 is avalue smaller than Size W and Size H.
This option can only be configured when Curve or Straight is selected for Round Type.
For Curve

For StraightRound RadiusRound Radius■ Shadow
Selects the style of shadow attached to the rectangle from the following. This option draws the rectangle in a threedimensional manner.
None, Convex, Concave

None

ConvexConcave■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the rectangle in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle is the X
and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Rectangle■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the rectangle in width and height.
W:

1 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightRectangle■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the rectangle on the top layer. The rectangle will have precedence when other drawings
and parts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-11

Drawings

This option can only be configured when 1 dot is selected for Line Width and Solid is selected for Line Type.

6

1 Shapes

1.5

Circle/Ellipse
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Circle/Ellipse Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing circles and ellipses.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Circle/Ellipse) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (start point) to start drawing the circle or ellipse on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A circle or ellipse is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the start point and the stop
point.
Start
point

Drag

Stop
point

To change the style of the drawn circle or ellipse, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the circle or ellipse to open the Properties dialog box• Select the circle or ellipse and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the circle or ellipse and open the right click menu

6-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes● Properties of Circle/Ellipse Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

6
Drawings■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the circle or ellipse from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the circle or ellipse from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the circle or ellipse (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
16 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the circle or ellipse.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the circle or ellipse flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Shadow
Selects the style of shadow attached to the circle or ellipse from the following. This option draws the circle or ellipse
in a three-dimensional manner.
None, Convex, Concave
This option can only be configured when 1 dot is selected for Line Width and Solid is selected for Line Type.
None

ConvexWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Concave

6-13

1 Shapes■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the circle or ellipse in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the circle or ellipse is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Circle/ellipse■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the circle or ellipse in width and height.
W:

1 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightCircle/ellipse■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the circle or ellipse on the top layer. The circle or ellipse will have precedence whenother drawings and parts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping”
on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

6-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.6

Arc
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Arc Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing arcs.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Arc) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

6
Drawings

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (start point) to start drawing the arc on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
An arc is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the start point and the stop point.

Start
point

Drag

Stop
point

• To change the style of the drawn arc, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the arc to open the Properties dialog box- Select the arc and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the arc and open the right click menu
• To change the start point or the stop point of the drawn arc, select the arc and right click on it, then click
Reshape.
theis displayed on the arc. Dragto the desired location. Double click the edit screen or press

key to finish changing the shape.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-15

1 Shapes● Properties of Arc Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the arc from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the arc from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the arc (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the arc flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the arc in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the arc is the X and Y coordinates.
X:
0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:
0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenArcY■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the arc in width and height.
W:
1 to (base screen horizontal size)H:
1 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

Height

6-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

ScreenArc

1 Shapes■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the arc on the top layer. The arc will have precedence when other drawings and parts
are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

6
Drawings

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-17

1 Shapes

1.7

Pie
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Pie Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing pies.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Pie) under Basic Shapes.

(pencil).

2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (start point) to start drawing the pie on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A pie is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the start point and the stop point.

Start
point

Drag

Stop
point

• To change the style of the drawn pie, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the pie to open the Properties dialog box- Select the pie and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the pie and open the right click menu
• To change the central angle of the drawn pie, select the pie and right click on it, then click Reshape.
is displayed on the pie. Dragto the desired location. Double click the edit screen or press the
key to finish changing the shape.

6-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes● Properties of Pie Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

6
Drawings■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the pie from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the pie from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selectedfor Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the pie (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the pie.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the pie flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the pie in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the circle with the same center as the pie is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

ScreenPie

6-19

1 Shapes■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the pie in width and height.
W:

1 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

HeightScreenPie■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the pie on the top layer. The pie will have precedence when other drawings and parts
are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

6-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes

1.8

Equilateral Polygons
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Equilateral Polygons Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure to draw equilateral polygons (equilateral triangle, equilateral diamond,
equilateral pentagon, equilateral hexagon, equilateral octagon).

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
Diamond),
Polygons.

(Equilateral Pentagon),

The mouse cursor changes to(Equilateral Hexagon), or(Equilateral Triangle),(Equilateral(Equilateral Octagon) under Equilateral(pencil).

6
Drawings
2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (start point) on the edit screen to start drawing the square that will
circumscribe the equilateral polygon.

3 Drag the mouse to the stop point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the square.
An equilateral polygon is drawn that inscribes the square made from the opposite angles of the start point and thestop point.

Start
point

Drag

Stop
point

To change the style of the drawn square, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the square to open the Properties dialog box• Select the square and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab• Select the square and open the right click menu

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-21

1 Shapes● Properties of Equilateral Polygon Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the equilateral polygon from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the equilateral polygon from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the equilateral polygon (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern or tonal gradation for the equilateral polygon.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
■ FlashSelect this check box to make the equilateral polygon flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the equilateral polygon in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the square thatcircumscribes the equilateral polygon is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenEquilateral polygon

6-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes■ SizeW:

H:

Sets width to define the size of the equilateral polygon. The maxium size varies based on the item
selected for Installation.
Horizontal:

1 to (base screen vertical size)

Vertical:

1 to (base screen horizontal size)

Displays the same as the width.
Width

ScreenHeightEquilateral polygon

6

If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-23

Drawings■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the equilateral polygon on the top layer. The equilateral polygon will have precedence
when other drawings and parts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts
Overlapping” on page 5-33.

1 Shapes

1.9

Fill
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Fill Configuration Procedure
This section describes the fill configuration procedure.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click
The mouse cursor changes to(Fill) under Fill.

(pencil).

2 Click on a section where multiple shapes overlap on the edit screen.
The section where multiple shapes overlap is filled with the Foreground Color, Background Color, and Pattern of
the shape last drawn or the shape that last had its style changed. The clicked location is the fill start point.

Fill start point• To change the fill style, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the fill start point to open the Properties dialog box- Select the fill start point and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab- Select the fill start point and open the right click menu
• If you move the fill start point, the closed region where it was moved to is filled.

Fill start point

Fill start point• To select the fill start point, click

6-24

on the edit screen or select Fill on the Object List window.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Shapes● Properties of Fill Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to fill with (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

6Drawings■ Pattern
Selects the pattern to fill with.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Fill Start Point
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the fill start point in coordinates.
The upper-left corner of the screen is the origin.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Fill start point

The fill range is not affected by drawing objects placed on the top layer.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-25

2 Picture

2

Picture
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Loads drawing objects that are registered in the Picture Manager onto the edit screen.

2.1

Picture Configuration Procedure
This section describes the picture configuration procedure.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Picture.
The mouse cursor changes to(picture).

2 Click the location on the edit screen to place the picture.
Picture Manager is displayed.

3 Select a picture and click Select.
The selected picture is placed on the screen.

To change the picture that was placed on the screen, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the picture to open the Properties dialog box, then click Browse• Replace the picture in Picture Manager

6-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Picture

2.2

Properties of Picture Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

■ Browse
Changes the picture placed on the screen. Click this button to display Picture Manager.

6
Drawings■ FlashSelect this check box to make the picture flash.
The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the picture in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the picture is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Picture■ SizeW, H:

Specifies the size of the picture in width and height.
W:

1 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

1 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeightPicture■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the picture on the top layer. The picture will have precedence when other drawings
and parts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-27

3 Text

3

Text
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Draws text. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
Loads text that is registered in the Text Manager.

3.1

Text Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for text.

1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Text.
The mouse cursor changes to(text).

2 Click the location on the edit screen to place the text.
The Properties of Text dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter the text to display in Text and configure the options as necessary.
The maximum number is 3750 characters.

4 Click OK.
The text is placed on the screen.
To change the style of the text placed on the screen, perform one of the following operations. You canchange the entered text in the Properties dialog box.
• Double click the text to open the Properties dialog box• Select the text and select the style with Text Style on the Format tab• Select the text and open the right click menu

6-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Text

3.2

Properties of Text Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

6
Drawings■ FontSelects the font to use to display text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
This option can only be configured when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font and the Vertical Writing check box is cleared.
■ Character Spacing*2
Specifies the character spacing (-127 to 127) between displayed characters.
This option can only be configured when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font and the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
■ Style*1
Selects the style of text from the following.
Regular, Bold, Shadow
This option can only be configured when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
Top when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-29

3 Text■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box to display text vertically.
This option can only be configured when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows is selected for Font.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicablefor installations of Windows that support East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are leftaligned.
Aligned tole edge• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters■ Windows Font
Configures the font to use as the Windows Font.
Select Windows for Font to display the current settings. You can specify the character spacing (0 to 100) and theline spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing and line spacing, click Change todisplay the Font Settings dialog box.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
■ TextEnter the text to display. The maximum number is 3750 characters.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected by Font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-6.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
A newline is counted as two characters.
■ Text Color
Selects the color for the displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

6-30

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Text■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects the zoom factor for characters (0.5, 1 to 8).
This option can only be configured when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Background Color
Selects the background color for the text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Animation
Selects whether or not to make the text flash.
Normal:The text does not flash.

Flash:The text flashes.

6
Drawings■ Shadow Color*1
Selects the shadow color for the text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Shadow is selected for Style.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the display position of the text or the text area in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle thatcircumscribes the text or the upper-left corner of the text area is the X and Y coordinates.
When the Use Text Area check box is cleared, the coordinates are for the text. When the Use Text
Area check box is selected, the coordinates are for the text area.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
When Use Text Area is cleared

When Use Text Area is selectedXX(0, 0)
Y(0, 0)

IDEC

Y

Text

IDEC

ScreenText area

Screen■ Use Text Area
Select this check box to specify a text area and adjust the display position of the text with the specified text area.
W, H:

Specifies the size of the text area in width and height.
W:

5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

HeightIDEC

Text area

Screen■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the text on the top layer. The text will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.
*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6-31

3 Text

6-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 7

Buttons

This chapter describes the setup for the button parts and related main unit operations.

1

Bit Button
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Bit Button is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.
Main unit

External device

07
Buttons

1■ Set
Pressing the button writes a 1 to the
bit device.

Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Write

Write

1

1

■ ResetPressing the button writes a 0 to the
bit device.

Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Write

Write

0

0

7-1

1 Bit Button■ Momentary
Pressing the button writes a 1 to the
bit device.
Releasing the button writes a 0 to the
bit device.

Operation and
view

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

1

0

1

0

Initial image

ActionData written

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device.
■ Alternate
Each press of the button alternately
writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device.

Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Write

Write

1

0

■ Toggle
Pressing the button inverts the valueof the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 itchanges to 1, and vice versa.

Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionToggleToggle■ MovePressing the button writes the value
in the source bit device to the value inthe destination bit device.

Press

Operation and
view

Press

Initial image

Action7-2

ReleaseWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Move

Move

Release1 Bit Button

1.2

Bit Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Bit Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Bit Button.

7

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Bit Button.

Buttons

3 Double-click the placed Bit Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Bit Button on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-3

1 Bit Button

1.3

Properties of Bit Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:Set:

Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Press

Operation andview

Data written

Write

Write

1

1

ReleasePressing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.
Press

Operation andview

ActionData written

7-4

Press

Initial image

ActionReset:

Release

ReleasePress

Initial image

Write

Write

0

0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Release1 Bit Button

Momentary: Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Releasing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.

Operation and
view

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

1

0

1

0

Initial image

ActionData written

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device.

Alternate:

Each press of the button alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device.
Press

7

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Toggle:Press

Buttons

Operation andview

Release

Write

Write

1

0

Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.
Press

Operation and
view

Press

Release

Initial image

ActionMove:

ReleaseToggleTogglePressing the button writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device.
Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionMove

Move■ Destination Device Address
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-5

1 Bit Button■ Write*1
Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset.
Example: This fills a contiguous block of bit devices with the same value.
M0 1
M1 1

Action Mode: Set
Destination Device Address: M0
Write: 5

M2 1
M3 1
M4 1

If the bit number in a word device is specified, the same value is written to same bit number of contiguous
word devices.
bit
15

bit
0

D0 1

Action Mode: Set
Destination Device Address: D0-15
Write: 5

D1 1
D2 1
D3 1
D4 1

■ Source Data
Specifies the device address that stores the data to be written.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Device Address: Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to transfer.

Example: Starting from the destination device address, the values of consecutive bit device addresses are written forthe specified number of transfers.
Device Address: LM0
Destination Device Address: M0
Transfer: 4

LM0 1

M0 1

LM1 0

M1 0

LM2 0

M2 0

LM3 1

M3 1

If a bit number of a word device is specified, the bit values of the consecutive word devices are written to
the destination device addresses for the specified number of transfers.
In case the destination device address is a bit device.
bit
15

Device Address: LDR0-0
Destination Device Address: M0
Transfer: 4

bit
0

LDR0

1

M0 1

LDR1

0

M1 0

LDR2

0

M2 0

LDR3

1

M3 1

bit
0

bit
15

In case the destination device address is a bit of word device.
bit
15

Device Address: LDR0-7
Destination Device Address: D3-0
Transfer: 4

bit
0

LDR0

1

D3

1

LDR1

0

D4

0

LDR2

0

D5

0

LDR3

1

D6

1

*1 Advanced mode only

7-6

bit
7

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Button■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device Address: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of the device
address is 0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device address used to switch the drawing object
display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the main unit activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.

Main unit

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device Address): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-7

7
Buttons

The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example:When you set an external device address 'M0' as Device Address in View Switching
Method, if the value of M0 changes, the display image will switch according to the value ofM0 even if the button is not pressed.

1 Bit Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking ON or OFF switches the image displayed on the View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

7-8

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Button■ FlashSelect this check box if flashing is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
FlashON image

OFF image■ Coordinates
X, Y:

7

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

ButtonsX:

X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Parts

7-9

1 Bit Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device Address is selected for View Switching Method on
the General tab.

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:

Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.

Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

7-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Button■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
This option can only be configured when Left, Center, or Right is selected for Align Text Horizontal. If CenterLeft is selected for Align Text Horizontal, Center-Top is set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

7■ OFF, ON
Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in the Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing (0to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing andline spacing, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-11

Buttons

Text:

1 Bit Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Main unit

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

Trigger Type:

Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

ButtonOperates

Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always enable:The Button is always enabled.

Button state

Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Disabled

7-12

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

1 Bit Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

7

Buttonstate

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Button is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Button is hidden while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show• When Alternate is selected for Action Mode on the General tab, the button remains on when hiddenin the on state.
• When the ON delay check box is selected on the Options tab, if the button is hidden before the set time
elapses from when the button begins to be pressed, the on delay is reset and the button does notoperate.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-13

Buttons

Disabled

1 Bit Button

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Button from the following.
Always visible: The Button is always displayed.

Button state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Hide

While OFF:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

Button state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

7-14

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 ms).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Main unit

Main unit
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for 3 secs.

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-15

1 Bit Button● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

7-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Button
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

ButtonNo.

Group Name

DisplayNo.
番号Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited7

If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the partcannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

130

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate
For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

7-17

Buttons

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.

1 Bit Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

7-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Button2

Word Button
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

How the Word Button is Used
Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on
the written value.
• Pressing the button writes a fixed value to a word device.
Main unit

External device

0

Value

100
Write

100→D1

D1=

7

Destination word device

Buttons

D1=

100

100

• Pressing the button writes the value of device address to a word device.
Main unit

External device

D0=

123

Value in device address

D1=

0

Destination word device

D0=

123
Move

D0→D1

D1=

123

• Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device.
Main unit

D0+D1→D2

External device

D0=

100

Value to write

D1=

23

Operator value

D2=

0

Destination word device

D0=

100

D1=

23

D2=

123

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Add
Write

7-19

2 Word Button■ Set
Pressing the button writes a fixedvalue to a word device.

Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

Data written

Value

Value

■ MovePressing the button writes the value ofsource device address to thedestination word device.

Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Write

Write

Value indevice address

Value indevice address■ Momentary
Pressing the button writes the fixedvalue of ON Data to a word device.
Releasing the button writes the fixedvalue of OFF Data to a word device.

Operation and
view

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

ON data

OFF data

ON data

OFF data

Initial image

ActionData written

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be written to the word
device.
■ Alternate
Each press of the button alternately
writes the fixed value of ON data and
OFF data to the word device.

Press

Operation and
view

Press

Initial image

ActionData written

7-20

ReleaseWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Write

Write

ON data

OFF data

Release2 Word Button■ Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR
Pressing the button performs
arithmetic on the value of source
device address and a fixed value, or avalue of device address and writes theresult to a word device.

Press

Operation andview

Arithmetic
operation↓

Data written

Value in reference
device address
Data

Press

Release

Initial image

ActionExample: Add (Addition)
Pressing the button adds thevalue in the Source 1 to theSource 2 value and writes
the sum in the word device.

ReleaseArithmetic
operation
↓

Write

Write

ResultResult

100

200

300

400

500

50

40

30

20

10

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image
Addition

ActionValue in destination
device address

0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Addition

↓

↓

Write

Write

240

240

420

7
Buttons

Operation and
view

420

7-21

2 Word Button

2.2

Word Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Word Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Word Button.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Word Button.
3 Double-click the placed Word Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Word Button on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

7-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Button

2.3

Properties of Word Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:Set:

Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device.
Press

Operation and
view

Move:

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action

Write

Write

Data written

Value

Value

Pressing the button writes the value in the source device address to the destination word device.
Press

Operation andview

ActionData written

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Write

Write

Value indevice address

Value indevice address

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-23

2 Word Button

Momentary:

Pressing the button writes the constant value of ON data to a word device.
Releasing the button writes the constant value of OFF data to a word device.

Operation and
view

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

ON data

OFF data

ON data

OFF data

Initial image

ActionData written

Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be written to the word
device.
Alternate:

Each press of the button alternately writes the fixed value of ON data and OFF data to the word device.
Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Write

Write

ON data

OFF data

Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Pressing the button performs arithmetic on a value of source device address and a constant value or
the value of device address and writes the result to a word device.
Press

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ActionData written

Arithmetic
operation↓

Arithmetic
operation
↓

Write

Write

ResultResultExample: Add (Addition)
Pressing the button adds the value in the Source 1 to the Source 2 value and writes thesum in the word device.
Value in reference
device address
Data

100

200

300

400

500

50

40

30

20

10

Press

ReleasePress

ReleaseOperation andview
Initial image
Addition

ActionValue in destination
device address

7-24

0

Addition

↓

↓

Write

Write

240

240

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

420

420

2 Word Button■ Data Type
Select the data type to be handled by the operation selected for Action Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, Alternate, Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR,
AND, or XOR. UBIN16(W) and UBIN32(D) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
If BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible
in BCD, a 1 is written to the System Area 2 Processing error bit (address number+2, bit 5) and an error
message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” on page 4-34 and Chapter 37“Processing error” on page 37-3.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.

7

■ Source Data
Select the data to be handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Use a constant value.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, or Alternate.
If Action Mode is set to Momentary or Alternate, the value in the ON Data is written when the
button is ON, and the value in the OFF Data is written when the button is OFF.
Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values
in hexadecimal.

Hexadecimal:
Device Address: Use a value of device address.
Specify the device address.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Use Reference Device Address*1:Select this check box and specify a device address to change thesource word device according to the value of the specified device
address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.
Transfer*1 :Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Example: If Transfer is set to 2 and Write is set to 3, the samedata in 2 continuous word device addresses will be written
to the destination device address 3 times.
Device Address: LDR0
Transfer: 2
Destination Device: D100
Write: 3

LDR0

999

D100

999

LDR1

1000

D101

1000

D102

999

D103

1000

D104

999

D105

1000

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-25

Buttons

Value:

2 Word Button■ Destination Device Address
Destination Device Address:

Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word
device according to the value of the specified device address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page
2-5.
Write*1 :Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary,
Alternate, or Move.
Example: If Data Type is set to UBIN16(W) and Write is set to 5, the samedata will be written to 5 continuous word addresses.
Data Type: UBIN16(W)Source Data: 12345
Destination Device Address: LDR10
Write: 5

LDR10 12345
LDR11 12345
LDR12 12345

5 words

LDR13 12345
LDR14 12345

Example: If Data Type is set to UBIN32(D) and Write is set to 5, the same data
will be written to a total of 10 word addresses (2 words 5 times).
Data Type: UBIN32(D)Source Data: 987654
Destination Device Address: LDR10
Write: 5

LDR11

LDR10

987654
LDR13

LDR12

987654
LDR15

LDR14

987654
LDR17

LDR16

987654
LDR19

LDR18

987654*1 Advanced mode only

7-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10 words

2 Word Button■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device Address: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of the device
address is 0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device address used to switch the drawing object
display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the main unit activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.

Main unit

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device Address): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-27

7Buttons

The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example:When you set an external device address 'M0' as Device Address in View Switching
Method, if the value of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value ofM0 even if the button is not pressed.

2 Word Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking ON or OFF switches the image displayed on the View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

7-28

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Button■ FlashSelect this check box if flashing is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
FlashON image

OFF image■ Coordinates
X, Y:

7

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

ButtonsX:

X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Parts

7-29

2 Word Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device Address is selected for View Switching Method on
the General tab.

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:

Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.

Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

7-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Button■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in the Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing (0to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing andline spacing, click Change to display the Font Setting dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-31

7Buttons

The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

2 Word Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Main unit
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always enable: The Button is always enabled.

Button state

Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Disabled

7-32

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

2 Word Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Buttonstate

Disabled

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Button is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Button is hidden while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show• When Alternate is selected for Action Mode on the General tab, the button remains on when hiddenin the on state.
• When the ON delay check box is selected on the Options tab, if the button is hidden before the set time
elapses from when the button begins to be pressed, the on delay is reset and the button does notoperate.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-33

7
Buttons

Data Type:

Enabled2 Word Button

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Button from the following.
Always visible: The Button is always displayed.

Button state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Hide

While OFF:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

Button state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

7-34

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 ms).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Main unit

Main unit
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for 3 secs.

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-35

2 Word Button● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

7-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Button
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

ButtonNo.

Group Name

DisplayNo.
番号Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited7

If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the partcannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

130

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate
For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

7-37

Buttons

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.

2 Word Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

7-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button

3

Goto Screen Button
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

3.1

How the Goto Screen Button is Used
Switches to another screen or displays a window.
• Pressing the button switches between Base Screens.
Main unit

Main unit

7

Main unit

Main unit

Main unit

D51

123

D51

123

D52

456

D52

456

D53

0

D53

0

999

Main unit

999• Pressing the button switches to the System Mode.
Main unit

Main unit

OfflineMein Menu• Pressing the button resets the current screen.
Main unit

130

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Main unit

07-39

Buttons• Pressing the button opens and closes other windows (such as the Popup Screen, Device Monitor, Password Screen,
Adjust Brightness Screen, File Screen, and Open User Account Setting Screen).

3 Goto Screen Button

3.2

Goto Screen Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Goto Screen Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button.
3 Double-click the placed Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Goto Screen Button on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

7-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button

3.3

Properties of Goto Screen Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-41

3 Goto Screen Button■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:
Back to previous Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.

Switch to Base Screen:

Switches between Base Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “3 Base Screen”
on page 5-15.

Open Popup Screen:

Opens a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “4 Popup Screen” onpage 5-21.

Close Popup Screen:

Closes a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “4 Popup Screen” onpage 5-21.

Open Device Monitor Screen:

Opens the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 30-21.

Close Device Monitor Screen:

Closes the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 30-21.

Open Password Screen:

Opens the Password Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Main Unit” on page 24-47.

Close Password Screen:

Closes the Password Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Main Unit” on page 24-47.

Open Adjust Brightness Screen:

Opens the Adjust Brightness Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 36 “1.3
Adjusting Screen Brightness” on page 36-2.

Close Adjust Brightness Screen:

Closes the Adjust Brightness Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 36 “1.3
Adjusting Screen Brightness” on page 36-2.

Open File Screen for movie files*1:

Opens the File Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 9 “4.4 File Screen” onpage 9-92.

Close File Screen for movie files*1:

Closes the File Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 9 “4.4 File Screen” onpage 9-92.

Switch to System Mode:

Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 36“2 System Mode Overview” on page 36-3.

Reset current screen:

Resets the current Base Screen.
When the current screen is reset, the displayed Popup Screen is closed andthe following internal devices restart as if the Base Screen is switched.
• HMI Temporary Relay LBM0 to 127• HMI Special Internal Relay LSM1, 2, 3, 11• HMI Temporary Register LBR0 to 127

Open User Account Setting Screen:

Opens the User Account Setting Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “5Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit” on page 24-50.
When User Account Setting Screen is selected, the Configure
Processing Area of User Account Setting Screen dialog box will be
displayed. For details, refer to “ Configure Processing Area of User Account
Setting Screen Dialog Box” on page 7-44.
Specify the word device to use as the processing area of the User Account
Setting Screen and click OK. When you return to the properties dialog box,
Edit will be displayed.
Edit:

Click this button to display the Configure Processing Area of User
Account Setting Screen dialog box.

*1 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

7-42

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button■ Goto Screen
Screen Number:

If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device Address*2:

Select this check box and specify a device address to specify
the screen number using the value of the specified device
address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen or Close Popup Screen.

Use Reference Device Address*2:

Select this check box and specify a device address to specify
the coordinates using the value of the specified device
address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen.

■ View Switching Method*2
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device Address:

The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of the device
address is 0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the main unit activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address 'M0' as Device Address in View Switching Method, if
the value of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the
button is not pressed.
Main unit

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device Address): M01
M0*1 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*2 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-43

7Buttons

Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as theorigin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust Brightness Screen, or Open File
Screen for Movie Files*1.

3 Goto Screen Button
Configure Processing Area of User Account Setting Screen Dialog Box■ Top Device Address
Specifies a word device to use Processing Area of User Account Setting Screen. This option uses 152 words of address
numbers starting from the address number of the specified device address. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

7-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

7
Buttons■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking ON or OFF switches the image displayed on the View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-45

3 Goto Screen Button■ FlashSelect this check box if flashing is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
FlashON image

OFF image■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

7-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

3 Goto Screen Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device Address is selected for View Switching Method on
the General tab.

7
Buttons■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-47

3 Goto Screen Button■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
This option can only be configured when Left, Center, or Right is selected for Align Text Horizontal. If CenterLeft is selected for Align Text Horizontal, Center-Top is set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in the Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing (0to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing andline spacing, click Change to display the Font Setting dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

7-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Main unit
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always enable: The Button is always enabled.

Button state

Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Disabled

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

7-49

3 Goto Screen Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Buttonstate

Disabled

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Button is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Button is hidden while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show

When the ON delay check box is selected on the Options tab, if the button is hidden before the set time
elapses from when the button begins to be pressed, the on delay is reset and the button does not operate.

7-50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Button from the following.
Always visible: The Button is always displayed.

Button state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Hide

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

Button state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons

While OFF:

Show

7-51

3 Goto Screen Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 ms).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Main unit

Main unit
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for 3 secs.

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

7-52

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Button● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

7
Buttons■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-53

3 Goto Screen Button
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

ButtonNo.

Group Name

DisplayNo.
番号Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the partcannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

l CAN
ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate
For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

7-54

130

BS

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

3 Goto Screen Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

7
Buttons■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-55

4 Print Button

4

Print Button
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

How the Print Button is Used
Outputs a screenshot to a printer*1 or an external memory device*2.
• Pressing the Print Button outputs a screenshot of the current screen to the printer*1.
Printer

Main unit

2011/1/11

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

Refer to Chapter 34 “1.3 Connecting a Printer to a Main unit” on page 34-1 for compatible printers andinstructions on how to connect one to the main unit.
• Pressing the Print Button outputs a screenshot of the current screen to an external memory device*2.
External Memory Device
Main unit

SD memory card

USB flash drive
Image file

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

7-56

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Button

4.2

Print Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Print Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Print Button.

7

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Print Button.

Buttons

3 Double-click the placed Print Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Print Button on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-57

4 Print Button

4.3

Properties of Print Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, place a check in the Set by State check box
on the Registration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Output toSelect where to direct the screenshot to.
Printer*1:

Outputs the screenshot to the printer connected to the main unit.
Print Time Stamp: Adds the date and time of printing to the screenshot before
sending it to the printer.
The date and time format depends on the language selected in
Language. Language is available on the Project Details tab of
the Project Settings dialog box.
The display formats are shown below:• Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm• English: MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm
YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute

External Memory Device*2: Outputs the screenshot as a file to the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
Files are output as follows:
File format
JPEG

File name
CAP***.JPG (***: date and time when file was output)

Example: A file created at 18:50:25 on June 30, 2011
will be named “CAP110630_185025.JPG”.

File size
Depends on
image being
displayed.

The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screenshot may differ.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

7-58

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Button• For details about printers, refer to Chapter 34 “1 Printer” on page 34-1.
• For details about external memory devices, refer to Chapter 33 “External Memory Devices” on page 33-1.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following. This option is displayed only when Printer is selected in Output to.
Print Screen:

Outputs a screenshot of the current screen to the printer or the external memory device

Cancel Printing*1:

Cancels printout to the printer.

■ View Switching Method*3
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device Address: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of the device
address is 0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device address used to switch the drawing object
display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the main unit activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address 'M0' as Device Address in View Switching Method,
if the value of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if
the button is not pressed.
Main unit

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device Address): M01
M0• These operations cannot be performed simultaneously.
- Outputting to the external memory device by pressing the Print Button- Outputting to the printer by pressing the Print Button*1- Printing alarm logs*1• While the screenshot is being output to the external memory device, the Print Button or Print Commandcannot output to one. Also, during these situations, the value of HMI Special Relay LSM24 or LSM25 changes
to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
• It may take some time to output screenshots when copying files using the USB Autorun function or a Key
Button.
• The main unit cannot stop printing in the middle of a page, even when the print job is canceled. Print jobs
after the current print job are canceled after the current page finishes printing.
The maximum number of screenshots that can be captured (1 to 999) can be set in HMI Special Data Registers
LSD65. (Default: 99)*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-59

Buttons

No Image:7

4 Print Button

The methods to erase screenshot files saved on the external memory device are as follows.
• To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings
dialog box, select the Remove Files check box and the All Screenshot data check box, and then configure
the trigger device address. Assign that trigger device address to a part.
• To erase files with WindO/I-NV4, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data in External
Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Screenshot Data check box and click OK.
• To erase files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - File Manager.
In the File Manager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

7-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

7
Buttons■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking ON or OFF switches the image displayed on the View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-61

4 Print Button■ FlashSelect this check box if flashing is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
FlashON image

OFF image■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

7-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

4 Print Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device Address is selected for View Switching Method on
the General tab.

7
Buttons■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-63

4 Print Button■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
This option can only be configured when Left, Center, or Right is selected for Align Text Horizontal. If CenterLeft is selected for Align Text Horizontal, Center-Top is set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in the Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing(0 to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing
and line spacing, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

7-64

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Main unit
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always enable: The Button is always enabled.

Button state

Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Disabled

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

7-65

4 Print Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Buttonstate

Disabled

Data Type:Disabled

EnabledEnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Button is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Button is hidden while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show

When the ON delay check box is selected on the Options tab, if the button is hidden before the set time
elapses from when the button begins to be pressed, the on delay is reset and the button does not operate.

7-66

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Button

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Button from the following.
Always visible: The Button is always displayed.

Button state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Hide

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

Button state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons

While OFF:

Show

7-67

4 Print Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 ms).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Main unit

Main unit
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for 3 secs.

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

7-68

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Button● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

7
Buttons■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-69

4 Print Button
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

ButtonNo.

Group Name

DisplayNo.
番号Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the partcannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate
For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

7-70

130

BS

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

4 Print Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

7
Buttons■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-71

5 Key Button

5

Key Button
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

5.1

How the Key Button is Used
Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying files, and operating other parts.
• Entering numbers in the Numerical Input
Main unit

Numerical Input

999
999

Keypad• Entering characters in the Character Input
Main unit

Character Input

HG SERIES_HG SERIES_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

C

D

E

F

BS

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

P
V

KeypadENT
SP<Cur. Cur.>• Operating the Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, or Data Log Display
Show focus

Move focus

Display reference screen

Pump 1 fault
Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete ReferenceOccurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

Delete Reference

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete Reference

Message
Recovered Confirmed
Pump 1Motor
outputlow
fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50
Press HighStop,
check theair,pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 faultStart.
then press

Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

Select

Up

Down

Stop

Key Button

kg/m2

Reference screen• Operating the Line Chart
Main unit

Line Chart
Stop Strt

7-72

Air Press.
0000

Delete Reference

Start

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Key Button

5 Key Button• Switching the user
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

Password Screen
User1

User2

• Copying accumulated data on the external memory device*1, which is inserted in the main unit, to the USB flash drive*2.
Main unit

SD memory card7

USB flash drive

Buttons

Copy files

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J
USB flash drive

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F• Operating the Video Display*3
Main unit

SD memory card
Play

Play

Stop

Back

Next

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V

Movie Files(AVI format)*4(MP4 format)*5

Movie File List
(MOVIE.LST)

HG4G HG3G• Record images from a video camera and microphone audio*6 to an external memory device*3
Main unit
Video Camera

Saves

SD memory card

ImagesAudio*6
Recording

Microphone
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V

Movie Files(AVI format)*4(MP4 format)*5

HG4G HG3G*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only
*3 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*4 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*5 HG4G/3G only
*6 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-73

5 Key Button

5.2

Key Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Key Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Key Button.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Key Button.
3 Double-click the placed Key Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Key Button on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

7-74

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button

5.3

Properties of Key Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab(Key)

Displays settings
applicable to theselected key.

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Key Type
Select the function for the Key Button.
Language:

Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser. These
languages are available:
Western, Japanese, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

Browse:Opens the Key Browser when clicked. Select a key.
For details, refer to “5.5 Key Browser” on page 7-100.

(Key):

Displays the name of the key selected using the Key Browser.
• When you select a key, the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text.
• The Key button is executed in the scan following the scan in which the button is pressed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-75

5 Key Button
The settings explained below are displayed depending on the type of key selected.
■ Popup Screen Number
The Alt key switches the current Popup Screen used as a Keypad when this button is pressed.
Specify the Popup Screen number to open a Keypad for.
This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser.

■ Scroll Size
Specifies the number of lines (1 to 1023) to scroll the list or move the focus when the button is pressed. The
operation varies based on the key selected in the Key Browser. For details regarding the key, refer to “For Alarm
Displays” on page 7-97 and “For the Data Log Display” on page 7-98.
This setting is enabled only if Page Up, Page Down, Up, and Down are selected using the Key Browser.

■ Transfer Setting
Key buttons such as Download Project, Upload Project, Copy Files, Download PLC Program, and Upload
PLC Program, execute the respective data transfer functions when the button is pressed. Specify the source,transferring data, and destination.
This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser.
Download Project is selected.

Source:Select the external memory where the project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File) to be transferred

is stored: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.
File Type*1: Select the file format for the project data to be transferred.
ZNX (OS, System Software, Project):

The file contains the OS, system software, and project. The source file specified in
Location is the ZNX project file (.znx).
ZNV (System Software, Project):
The file contains the system software and project. The source file specified in Locationis the ZNV project file (.znv).

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

7-76

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button

Location:

Specify the location of the ZNX Project File (.znx)*1 or the ZNV Project File (.znv). The
maximum number is 247 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can beused. Path delimiters and characters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To set “HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV”, a ZNV Project File, to be saved on the root directoryof an external memory device:
HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV
Destination: Displays a download destination of the project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File).
Clear Keep Devices*3:
Select this check box to clear keep devices after the project data is downloaded.
Starts running without displaying the Result window:
Select this check box to start running the main unit without displaying the execution result
screen after the project data is downloaded.
After downloading, execute the ladder programs automatically*4:This option can only be set when ZNV (System Software, Project) is selected as theFile Type.
• When the source and destination system software versions or the Data Storage Area settings aredifferent, the keep devices are cleared regardless of the setting for Clear Keep Devices.
• When the ZNX Project File*1 or the ZNV Project File is downloaded, the alarm log data, data log data,and operation log data is deleted regardless of the state of the Clear Keep Devices check box.
If the versions of the source and destination system software match, the system software will not be
downloaded.
Upload Project is selected.

Destination: Specify where to save the project uploaded from the main unit. Select the location:
USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.
Location:

Specify the location where the uploaded project will be saved. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters andcharacters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To save project to the folder “Uploaded_Project” in an external memory device:
Uploaded_ProjectA uploaded project using the Data Transfer function is saved as a ZNV Project File(.znv).
*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*4 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-77

Buttons

Select this check box to start executing the ladder program after the project data is downloaded.

7

5 Key Button
Copy Files*5 is selected.

Source:Select the source external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*2.
Location:

Specify the location of the file to be transferred. The maximum number is 247 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters and characters thatcannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F\"*:;<>?|

Example: Copy a file “Error.wav” to the root directory of an external memory device:
Error.wav
Destination: Select the destination external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash
Drive*2.
Location:

Specify the location where the file will be transferred. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters andcharacters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F\"*:;<>?|

Example: Save file to the “SOUND” folder under “HGDATA01” folder in an external memory
device:FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:
HGDATA01/SOUND
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
HGDATA01\SOUND• If a file name is specified as the source location, the specified file is copied.
If a folder name is specified, all of the files and subfolders contained in the folder, and all of the files inthe subfolders, are copied.
• The subfolders can be copied up to five levels.
• To prevent copying the subfolders and the files contained in the subfolders, HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM30 must be set to 1 before executing the copy.
• To stop copying files during the copy operation, write 1 to HMI Special Internal Relay LSM31. However, it
will continue to copy the file until it is finished then it will stop copying.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*5 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only

7-78

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button
Download PLC Program is selected.

Source:Select the external memory where the PLC program (ZLD Project File) to be transferred is stored:
USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.

Location: Specify the location of the ZLD Project File(.zld). The maximum number is 247 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters and characters thatcannot be used vary based on the model.
Model

Characters that cannot be used/"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To set “LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD”, a ZLD Project File, to be saved in folder “LDRDATA”
of an external memory device:
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:
LDRDATA/LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: LDRDATA\LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD
Destination: Specify the destination PLC connected to the main unit. The PLC type is configured in the Project
Settings dialog box, on the Communication Driver Network tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4“3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Interface:

Select the communication interface in which the main unit is connecting to thedownload destination PLC from serial interface or Ethernet. For details, refer to
Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.

If serial interface is selected for Interface.
Slave Number:Specify the slave number of the download destination PLC (0 to 31).

External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

If Ethernet is selected for Interface.
Select from the following method:
Specify External Device ID: Specify the External Device ID (0 to 31) of the destination PLC. This is theExternal Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box, on
the Communication Driver Network tab.
External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

Specify IP Address:

Specify the IP address and port number of the destination PLC.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-79

Buttons

Delimiter

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

75 Key Button
Upload PLC Program is selected.

Source:Specify the source PLC connected to the main unit. The PLC type is configured in the Project Settings
dialog box, on the Communication Driver Network tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Interface:

Select the communication interface in which the main unit is connecting
to the upload source PLC from serial interface or Ethernet. For details,
refer to Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.

If serial interface is selected for Interface.
Slave Number:Specify the slave number of the upload source PLC (0 to 31).

External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

If Ethernet is selected for Interface.
Select from the following method:
Specify External Device ID: Specify the External Device ID (0 to 31) of the upload source PLC. This is
the External Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box,
on the Communication Driver Network tab.
External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

Specify IP Address:

Specify the IP address and port number of the upload source PLC.

Destination: Specify where to save the PLC program uploaded from the PLC connected to the main unit. Select thetype of external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.

Location:

Specify the location of the folder where the uploaded PLC program will be saved. The
maximum number is 247 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can beused. Path delimiters and characters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To save program to the folder “Uploaded_Program” in an external memory
device:Uploaded_Program
A uploaded PLC program using the Data Transfer function is saved as a ZLD Project File(.zld).

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

7-80

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button■ Recording Channel*6
The recording of images starts.
Selects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to record a video only (no audio) out of the signals input from the device. Thissetting is enabled only if Rec. was selected using the Key Browser.

■ Recording Target*7
The recording of images and sound starts.
Select the target to record out of the signals input from the device. This setting is enabled only if Rec. was selectedusing the Key Browser.
Video and Audio:

Records images and sound.

Video only (No Audio):

Records images only.

• Movie files cannot be recorded during playback.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while data is
being saved to the external memory device, recording cannot be executed with a Key Button, MultiButton, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function. Also, during these situations, thevalue of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special
Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

*6 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*7 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-81

7
Buttons• Movie files cannot be recorded during playback.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while data is
being saved to the external memory device, recording cannot be executed with a Key Button, MultiButton, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function. Also, during these situations, thevalue of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special
Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

5 Key Button■ View Switching Method*8
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device Address: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of the device
address is 0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device address used to switch the drawing object
display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the main unit activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address 'M0' as Device Address in View Switching Method,
if the value of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if
the button is not pressed.
Main unit

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device Address): M01
M0*8 Advanced mode only

7-82

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

7
Buttons■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking ON or OFF switches the image displayed on the View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-83

5 Key Button■ FlashSelect this check box if flashing is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
FlashON image

OFF image■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

7-84

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

5 Key Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device Address is selected for View Switching Method on
the General tab.

7
Buttons■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-85

5 Key Button■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
This option can only be configured when Left, Center, or Right is selected for Align Text Horizontal. If CenterLeft is selected for Align Text Horizontal, Center-Top is set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in the Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing (0to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing andline spacing, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

7-86

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Main unit
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always enable: The Button is always enabled.

Button state

Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Disabled

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

7-87

5 Key Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Buttonstate

Disabled

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Button is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Button is hidden while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show• When Alternate is selected for Action Mode on the General tab, the button remains on when hiddenin the on state.
• When the ON delay check box is selected on the Options tab, if the button is hidden before the set time
elapses from when the button begins to be pressed, the on delay is reset and the button does notoperate.

7-88

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Button from the following.
Always visible: The Button is always displayed.

Button state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Hide

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

Button state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons

While OFF:

Show

7-89

5 Key Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 ms).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Main unit

Main unit
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for 3 secs.

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

7-90

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

7
Buttons■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-91

5 Key Button
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

ButtonNo.

Group Name

DisplayNo.
番号Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the partcannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate
For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

7-92

130

BS

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

5 Key Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

7
Buttons■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-93

5 Key Button

5.4

Key Buttons● For Keypad(Half-Width Character)
These keys can be used for Numerical Input and Character Input:■ Numerical Input Keypad
Key

Operation.

Inputs a decimal point.

0 to 9Inputs a number from 0 to 9.

A to F

Inputs a character from A to F.

+/-

Toggles the sign.

CAN

Clears the data input thus far and cancels the input. Closes the Popup Screen that is opened as
the Keypad, if this key is placed on it.

CLR

Clears the data input thus far and stands by for further input.

BS

Deletes the character to the left of the character at the cursor position.

ENT

Writes the characters input as a numeric value to a device address. After the data is written, thefocus can be moved according to the Focus Order setting. Focus Order can be set on the
Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

< Fcs.

Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus
Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Fcs. >

Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus Ordercan be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Alt

The Alt key switches the Popup Screen opened as a Keypad. Closes the Popup Screen that is
opened as the Keypad and opens another Popup Screen as the Keypad.

The Alt key can be used, for instance, to switch between a decimal and a hexadecimal Keypad.

■ Character Input Keypad
Key

7-94

Operation!

Inputs a !.

"Inputs a ".

#Inputs a #.

$Inputs a $.

%Inputs a %.

&.

Inputs a &.

'Inputs a '.

(Inputs a (.

)

Inputs a ).

*Inputs a *.

+Inputs a +.

,Inputs a ,.

-Inputs a -.

.

Inputs a .

/Inputs a /.

0 to 9Inputs a number from 0 to 9.

:

Inputs a :.

;Inputs a ;.

<Inputs a <.

=Inputs a =.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button

Key

Operation>

Inputs a >.

?

Inputs a ?.

@Inputs a @.

A to Z

Inputs a character from A to Z.

[

Inputs a [.

\Inputs a \.

]Inputs a ].

^Inputs a ^.

_Inputs a _.

'Inputs a '.

a to zInputs a character from a to z.

{

Inputs a {.

|Inputs a |.

}Inputs a }.

˜

Inputs a ˜.

(Keys dependent on
Language setting)

Inputs the text displayed according to the language selected in the Language setting. For a listof the characters input using these keys, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

CAN

Clears the data input thus far and cancels the input. Closes the Popup Screen if it is opened asa Keypad.

CLR

Clears the data input thus far and stands by for further input.

DEL

Deletes the character at the cursor.

BS

Deletes the character to the left the cursor.

ENT

Writes the text input in ASCII code form to a device address. After the data is written, the focus
can be moved according to the Focus Order setting. Focus Order can be set on the Options
tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

SP

Inputs a space.

Cur. >

Moves the cursor right.

< Cur.

Moves the cursor left.

< Fcs.

Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus
Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Fcs. >

Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus Ordercan be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Alt

The Alt key switches the Popup Screen opened as a Keypad. Closes the Popup Screen that is
opened as the Keypad and opens another Popup Screen as the Keypad.

7

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-95

Buttons• Press and hold the < Cur. and Cur. > keys for more than one second to cause it to move repeatedly.
• The Alt key can be used, for instance, to switch between Keypads for lower case and upper case letters.

5 Key Button● For Keypad(Hiragana)*1
These keys to enter Hiragana and Kanji which can be used for Character Input are as follows.
■ Character Input Keypad
Key

Operation

あ to んInputs a character from あ to ん .

、Inputs a 、 .

。

Inputs a 。 .

ーInputs a ー .

small ゛ ゜Change the hiragana that you entered in order of lower case conversion, voiced sound input,
semi - voiced sound input.

Kanji

Toggles the Direct input mode and Kanji input mode. The default is the Direct input mode.
Direct input mode: Enter a Hiragana.
Kanji input mode: Enter the Kanji that converted the input Hiragana as a reading of Kanji.

UpWhen displaying conversion candidates for Kanji, select the conversion candidate one before.

Down

When displaying conversion candidates for Kanji, select the next conversion candidate.

CAN

Clears the data input thus far and cancels the input. Closes the Popup Screen if it is opened asa Keypad.

CLR

Clears the data input thus far and stands by for further input.

DEL

Deletes the character at the cursor.

BS

Deletes the character to the left the cursor.

ENT

Writes the text input in character code form to a device address. After the data is written, thefocus can be moved according to the Focus Order setting. Focus Order can be set on the
Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.
When displaying conversion candidates for Kanji in Kanji input mode, input the selected Kanji.

SP

Inputs a space.
When reading is entered in Kanji input mode, conversion candidates for Kanji are displayed.

Cur. >

Moves the cursor right.
However, you can not move the cursor when entering characters in Kanji input mode andwaiting for conversion.

< Cur.

Moves the cursor left.
However, you can not move the cursor when entering characters in Kanji input mode andwaiting for conversion.

< Fcs.

Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus
Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Fcs. >

Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus Ordercan be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.

Alt

The Alt key switches the Popup Screen opened as a Keypad. Closes the Popup Screen that is
opened as the Keypad and opens another Popup Screen as the Keypad.

Press and hold the < Cur. and Cur. > keys for more than one second to cause it to move repeatedly.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only

7-96

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button● For Data Transfer Keys
These keys can be used to execute Data Transfer functions. For details about Data Transfer functions, refer to Chapter
33 “2 Project Transfer Function” on page 33-20, Chapter 33 “3 PLC Program Transfer Function” on page 33-35 andChapter 33 “4 File Copy Function” on page 33-49.
Key
Download Project

Operation
Downloads a project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File) saved on an external memory

device to the main unit.

Upload Project

Uploads the project used for operation on the main unit and saves the ZNV Project File(.znv) toan external memory device.

Copy Files*2

Copy files between and within external memory inserted in main unit.

Download PLC Program

Downloads a PLC program (ZLD Project File) saved on an external memory device to a PLC
connected to the main unit.

Upload PLC Program

Uploads a PLC program from the PLC connected to the main unit and saves the ZLD ProjectFile(.zld) to an external memory device.

■ Alarm List Display
Key

Operation

SelectToggles the focus between show and hide.

Page Up

Scrolls up the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size.

Page Down

Scrolls down the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size.

Up

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing Select.

Down

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing Select.

Reference

The reference screen appears.

Press and hold the Page Up, Page Down, < Cur., and Cur. > keys for more than one second to move thefocus repeatedly.
■ Alarm Log Display
Key

Operation

SelectToggles the focus between show and hide.

Up

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing Select.

Down

Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point offocus can be shown by pressing Select.

Check

Shows the date and time the alarm that has focus was confirmed.

All Check

Shows the date and time that all alarms were confirmed.

DeleteClears the alarm that has focus.

Delete All

Clears all alarms.

ReferenceShows the reference screen for the alarm that has focus.

Stop Buzzer and Screen
Flashing

Stops the sound of the buzzer and screen flashing when an alarm occurs.

Press and hold the Up and Down keys for more than one second to move the focus repeatedly.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons● For Alarm Displays
These keys can be used for the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts.

7-97

5 Key Button● For the Data Log Display
The keys that can be used for the Data Log Display part are as follows.
■ Data Log Display
Key

Operation

OperateToggles the display updates between stop and resume.

Up

Scrolls the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size upward.

Down

Scrolls the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size downward.

Left

Scrolls data one column to the left.

Right

Scrolls data one column to the right.

Page Up

Scrolls data up one page.

Page Down

Scrolls data down one page.

Page Left

Scrolls data left one page.

Page Right

Scrolls data right one page.

Press and hold the Up, Down, Left and Right keys for more than one second to cause it to moverepeatedly.
● For the Multimedia Function*1■ Recording
Key

Operation

Stop

Stops recording images and sound*2.

Rec.

Records images and sound*2.

■ Video Display
The keys that can be used with the Video Display are given below.
Key

Operation

Play

Play movie file and display images from the video input.

Stop

Stops movie file playback.

Pause

Pauses playback of a movie file.

Next

When this button is pressed during playback, the next movie file is played.

Back

When this button is pressed during playback, the previous movie file is played.

REW

When this button is pressed during playback, the movie file rewinds while being played. Press
this button during rewind to return to normal playback. This button cannot be used during fast
forward, slow, or when paused.

FF

When this button is pressed during playback, the movie file fast forwards while being played.
Press this button during fast forward to return to normal playback. This button cannot be usedduring rewind, slow, or when paused.

Slow

Press this button for slow movie file playback. Press this button during slow playback to return
to normal playback. This button cannot be used during fast forward, rewind, or when paused.

Frame Fwd

Press this button to play the movie file one frame at a time. After frame forward, the movie fileis paused. This button cannot be used during fast forward, rewind, or slow playback.

Full Screen

Expand the display image to the maximum size of the main unit screen

RestoreReturns Full Screen to its original display.

Repeat ON

Repeats playback from the top of the list when the movie file list or playlist is played until the end.

Repeat OFF

Stops playback after the movie file list or playlist is played until the end.

*1 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*2 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only

7-98

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button● For the Line Chart

The keys can be used for the Line Chart*1 part are as follows.
Key

Operation

Stop

Pauses graph updates.

Start

Resumes graph updates.

Left Scroll

Scrolls the graph to the left by the number of points specified in Scroll Size.

Right Scroll

Scrolls the graph to the right by the number of points specified in Scroll Size.

Left Page

Scrolls the graph to the left by the number of points specified in Display Points.

Right Page

Scrolls the graph to the right by the number of points specified in Display Points.

Left Most Page

Scrolls the graph to the oldest data.

Right Most Page

Scrolls the graph to the newest data.

• Grouping a key for the Line Chart with a line chart allows you to control the line charts in the same group.
If you don't group, you can control all ungrouped line charts.
Can be operated with keys

Can be operated with keys

Buttons

Group keys and line chart
11/10/01
12:00:00

11/10/01
12:00:00

11/10/01
12:00:00

Stop Strt

Stop Strt

11/10/01
12:00:00

With groupingNo grouping• Press and hold the Left Scroll, Right Scroll, Left Page or Right Page key for more than one second
to move continuously.
● For Password Inputs
Key

Operation

Up

Switch to the previous user.

Down

Switch to the next user.

*1 These keys can be only applied to the Chart type of Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7

7-99

5 Key Button

5.5

Key Browser
Select the key using the Key Browser. The Key Browser closes when a key is selected. The name of the key is shownin Key Type. Settings that apply to the selected key are displayed.
When you select a key, the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text.
Select the key type from the following uses:
Keypad(Half-Width Character), Keypad(Hiragana)*1, Data Transfer, Alarm Display, Multimedia

Function*2, Line Chart, Password Input■ Keypad(Half-Width Character)
These buttons are used for Numerical Input and Character Input:■ Keypad(Hiragana)*1
These buttons are used for Character Input to enter Hiragana and Kanji:*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only
*2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

7-100

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button■ Data Transfer
These buttons are used to execute Data Transfer functions.

7
Buttons■ Alarm Display
These buttons are used to manipulate the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-101

5 Key Button■ Data Log Display
These keys operate the Data Log Display.

■ Multimedia Function*2
These buttons are used to start and stop recording and to operate the Video Display.

*2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

7-102

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button■ Line Chart
These buttons are used to manipulate the Line Chart part.

7
Buttons■ Password Input
These keys switch the user on the Password Input Screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-103

5 Key Button

5.6

Key Button Usage Examples● Recording Images and Sound *1
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes how to record using the Rec. and Stop key buttons.
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Key Button.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Key Button.
3 Double-click the placed Key Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

4 On the General tab, under Key Type, click Browse.
Key Browser is displayed.

*1 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only

7-104

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button

5 Select Multimedia Function and click Rec.
You are returned to the Properties of Key Button dialog box.

7
Buttons

6 Select a recording channel*2 or a recording target*3.
■ Recording Channel*2
Selects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to record a video only (no audio) out of the signals input from the device. Thissetting is enabled only if Rec. was selected using the Key Browser.

■ Recording Target*3
In the signals input from the device, select Video and Audio or Video only (No Audio) as the recording target.

7 Click OK.
Close the Properties of Key Button dialog box.

8 Repeat steps 1 through 4.

*2 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*3 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-105

5 Key Button

9 Select Multimedia Function and click Stop.
You are returned to the Properties of Key Button dialog box.

10 Click OK.
Close the Properties of Key Button dialog box.
This concludes configuring the record function and key buttons.
Operating Procedure
The main unit must be connected to a video camera and microphone*1.

1 Press the Rec. button.
The main unit starts recording images and sound*1.

2 Press the Stop button.
The main unit stops recording images and sound*1.
Recording stops when the maximum recording time (30 sec.) has elapsed, even if the Stop button is notpressed.
The recorded images and sound*1 are saved as a file*2 in the following folder on the external memory device.
\External Memory Device folder\RECORD\Year month day (format: YYYYMMDD)The External Memory Device folder name is configured in the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to
Chapter 33 “1.6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder” on page 33-13.
The “year month day” folder name is the date the file was recorded.
The file name for the recorded file is the time the file was saved.
• Movie files cannot be recorded during playback.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while recorded
data is being saved to the external memory device, recording cannot be executed with a Key Button,
Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function. Also, during these situations,the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMISpecial Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
The signal standard for the video camera connected to the main unit is configured in the Multimedia
Settings dialog box, on the Video Input tab. For details, refer to Chapter 23 “2.3 Configuring the Video
Input” on page 23-11.

*1 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only
*2 AVI format for HG5G/4G/3G-V, MP4 format for HG4G/3G

7-106

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button● Playing Recorded Images and Sound
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes how to select a movie file to play with the Movie File Screen and play it on a Video Display.
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Video Display.

7

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display.

Buttons

3 Double-click the placed Video Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

4 On the General tab, under Action, select Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen.
This option selects and plays movie files using the File Screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-107

5 Key Button

5 Click OK.
The Properties of Video Display dialog box closes.

6 Create a button to open the screen to select a recorded images.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

7 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button.
8 Double-click the placed Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

9 Select Open File Screen for Movie Files for Action Mode.

7-108

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual5 Key Button

10 Specify the display location in coordinates for the movie file screen to open above the base screen with Coordinates
X, Y.

With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

11 Click OK.

Close the Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box.
This concludes configuring playback of recorded images.

Operating Procedure
To play sound, the main unit must be connected to speakers.
This section describes the example of playing the movie file “123000.avi” located in the “20110313” folder under the“RECORD” folder when the External Memory Device folder is “HGDATA01”.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button set to Open File Screen for Movie Files.
The File Screen is displayed.
Main unit

Press the Goto Screen Button

Video Display

Full

Restore

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

RepeatON RepeatOFF
Next

FF
Play

2 Select the folder with the date of the recorded images.
Press  to select 20110313 and then press Select.
The contents of the “20110313” folder will be displayed.
File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card
\HGDATA01\RECORD

Page No.: 1File nameSize20110312

Folder20110313

Folder20110314

Folder20110315

FolderFolder Up

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

Select2

Once the File Screen is opened, the “RECORD” folder in the External Memory Device folder will be displayed.
If the “RECORD” folder does not exist, the External Memory Device folder will be displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons

Movie files that meet the following specifications can be played with the main unit:
HG5G/4G/3G-V: AVI file (.avi)
HG4G/3G:MP4 file (.mp4)
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.6 Available Movie Files” on page 2-37.

7-109

5 Key Button

3 Select a movie file.
Press  to select “123000.avi” and then press Select.
The movie file will be selected and the File Screen will close.
File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card
Page No.: 1\HGDATA01\RECORD\20110313
File name120000.avi

Folder Up

Size
512,000,000

121500.avi

512,000,000

123000.avi

512,000,000

124500.avi

512,000,000
512,000,000

130000.avi

123000.avi

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

Select2

4 Press Play on the Video Display.
The movie file is played.
Main unit

Video Display

Full

Restore RepeatON RepeatOFF

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

Press Play

Nest

FF
Play

While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function, while data is being
recorded with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function, or
while data is being saved to the external memory device, movie files cannot be played. While data isrecording after an event occurs and while data is being saved to the external memory device, the value of
HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

7-110

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button

6

Multi-Button
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

6.1

How the Multi-Button is Used
Executes multiple commands at once.
These commands can be assigned to a Multi-Button.
Command

Description

Bit Write

Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device when pressed.

Word Write

Writes a value to a word device when pressed. You can specify the destination address number indirectly,
and perform arithmetic on the value to be written.

Goto Screen

Switches screens and opens other windows when pressed.

Print

Outputs a screenshot to the printer or the external memory device*1 when pressed.

Key

Performs downloads, uploads, and file copying when pressed. Also used to manipulate other parts.

ScriptExecutes a script when pressed.

7
Buttons• Pressing the button writes a 1 to a bit device, and the value of word device to another device address.

0
Main unit

1

External device

D0=

123

D0=

123

Move

D1=

0

D1=

123

• Pressing the button outputs a screenshot of the current screen to an external memory device*1, and then switches
the Base Screen.
Main unit

External Memory Device
SD memory card

USB flash drive
Image file

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-111

6 Multi-Button■ Momentary
The button turns ON when pressed,
and OFF when released.
Operation and
view

Press

ReleasePress

Release

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Press

ReleasePress

Release

Initial image

Action■ Alternate
The button switches between ON and
OFF each time it is pressed.
Operation andview

Initial image

Action

7-112

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

ON

OFF

6 Multi-Button

6.2

Multi-Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-Buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Multi-Button.

7

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Multi-Button.

Buttons

3 Double-click the placed Multi-Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Multi-Button on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-113

6 Multi-Button

6.3

Properties of Multi-Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the Action Mode for the Multi-Button: Momentary or Alternate.
Momentary:

The button turns ON when pressed, and OFF when released.

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Initial image

ActionAlternate:

Press

The button switches between ON and OFF each time it is pressed.
Press

Operation andview

Action7-114

ReleasePress

Initial image

ON

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualOFF

Release6 Multi-Button■ Multi-Functions
Use this grid to add or edit commands to execute when the Multi-Button is pressed.
Function List:

Lists the commands to be executed.
Command Type:Shows the command type.

Command Name:

Shows the command name.

Device Address:

Shows the setting when one of the following Command Type is selected.
Shows the destination device address for the Bit Write and Word Writecommands.
Shows the screen number when Goto Screen is set to Switch to Base
Screen, Open Popup Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Shows the script ID for the Script command.

Command Type: Select the command to add.

Add:

Bit Write:

Writes a 0 or 1 to the bit device or the bit number of the word device. For details,
refer to “Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 7-117.

Word Write:

Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination
address or to perform operations on the written value. For details, refer to“Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 7-118.

Goto Screen:

Switches to another screen or displays a window. For details, refer to “Properties
of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 7-120.

Print:

Outputs a screenshot to a printer or an external memory device. For details, refer
to “Properties of Print for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 7-122.

Key:

Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying
files, and operating other parts. For details, refer to “Properties of Key for MultiFunctions Dialog Box” on page 7-124.

Script:Executes the script. For details, refer to “Properties of Script for Multi-Functions
Dialog Box” on page 7-131.

Adds a command to the list. A maximum of 32 commands may be added.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected from Command
Type.

Edit:

Changes a command in the list.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected in Function List.

Delete:Deletes a command from the list.
Select the command in the list and click this button.

Copy:

Copies a command in the list.
Select a command in the list and click this button. A copy of the selected command is added to theend of the list.

Up:

Shifts the selected command upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected command downward in the list.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-115

7
Buttons• Executes only the Goto Screen command at the end of the Function List when multiple Switch to Base
Screen type commands are set for Action Mode.
• Goto Screen commands are not executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List.
Rather, they are executed at the end of the scan when the Multi-Button is pressed.
• Key commands are executed in the scan following the scan in which the Multi-Button is pressed.
• If multiple Key commands are set, only the first and second Key commands in the Function List are
executed. The third and following Key commands are not executed. Also, only the first Key command thatspecifies a Data Transfer function in the Function List is executed if multiple Key commands are set.

6 Multi-Button■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button:Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.

Device Address: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of the device
address is 0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device address used to switch the drawing object
display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
No Image:

The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the main unit activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.

Selecting Device Address in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address 'M0' as Device Address in View Switching Method,
if the value of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if
the button is not pressed.
Main unit

External device0

OFF image:
M0

ON image:
View Switching Method (Device Address): M01
M0*1 Advanced mode only

7-116

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button
Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Bit Write command for the Multi-Button.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the Multi-Button from the following:

7

Pressing the Multi-Button writes a 1 to the bit device.

Reset:

Pressing the Multi-Button writes a 0 to the bit device.

Set & Reset:

Pressing the Multi-Button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Releasing the Multi-Button writes a 0 to the bit device.

Toggle:Pressing the Multi-Button inverts the value of the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.

Move:

Pressing the Multi-Button writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit
device.

Buttons

Set:

For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 7-4. However, Set & Reset for theMulti-Button has the same function as Momentary for the Bit Button.
■ Destination Device Address
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Write*1
Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.

This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset. For details, refer to “Write*1” on page 7-6.

■ Source Data
Specifies the device address that stores the data to be written.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move. For details, refer to “Source Data” on page 7-6.
Device Address: Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to transfer.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-117

6 Multi-Button
Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Word Write command for the Multi-Button.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the Multi-Button from the following:Set:

Pressing the button writes a fixed value to a word device.

Move:

Pressing the button writes a value in a source device address to a destination word device.

Set ON & OFF Data: Pressing the button writes a fixed value of ON Data to a word device.
Releasing the button writes a fixed value of OFF Data to a word device.
Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR: Pressing the button performs arithmetic on a value of source device
address and a fixed value or a value of device address and writes theresult to a word device.
For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 7-23. However, Set ON & OFF Data for
the Multi-Button has the same function as Momentary for the Word Button.
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the operation selected for Action Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Set ON & OFF Data, Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR,
AND, or XOR. UBIN16(W) and UBIN32(D) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
If BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible
in BCD, a 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address+2, bit 5) and an error message isdisplayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” on page 4-34 and Chapter 37 “Processing
error” on page 37-3.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.

7-118

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button■ Source Data
Select the data handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Value:

Use a constant value.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set or Set ON & OFF Data.
If Action Mode is set to Set ON & OFF Data, the value in the ON Data is written when the
button is ON, and the value in the OFF Data is written when the button is OFF.
Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data
values in hexadecimal.

Hexadecimal:
Device Address: Use a value of device address.
Specify the device.

Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change thesource word device according to the value of the specified device
address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to “Transfer*1” on page 7-25.

■ Destination Device Address
Destination Device Address:

Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word
device according to the value of the specified device address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.

Write*1:

For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page
2-5.
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Move, or Set ON & OFF
Data.
For details, refer to “Write*1” on page 7-26.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-119

7
Buttons

Transfer*1:

For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.

6 Multi-Button
Properties of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Goto Screen command for the Multi-Button.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the Multi-Button from the following:
Back to previous Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.

Switch to Base Screen:

Switches between Base Screen.

Open Popup Screen:

Opens a Popup Screen.

Close Popup Screen:

Closes a Popup Screen.

Open Device Monitor Screen:

Opens the Device Monitor Screen.

Close Device Monitor Screen:

Closes the Device Monitor Screen.

Open Password Screen:

Opens the Password Screen.

Close Password Screen:

Closes the Password Screen.

Open Adjust Brightness Screen:

Opens the Adjust Brightness Screen.

Close Adjust Brightness Screen:

Closes the Adjust Brightness Screen.

Open File Screen for movie files*2:

Opens the File Screen.

*2:

Close File Screen for movie files

Closes the File Screen.

Switch to System Mode:

Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode.

Reset current screen:

Resets the current Base Screen.
When the current screen is reset, the displayed Popup Screen is closed andthe following internal devices restart as if the Base Screen is switched.
• HMI Temporary Relay LBM0 to 127• HMI Special Internal Relay LSM1, 2, 3, 11• HMI Temporary Register LBR0 to 127

Open User Account Setting Screen:

Opens the User Account Setting Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “5Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit” on page 24-50.
When User Account Setting Screen is selected, the Configure
Processing Area of User Account Setting Screen dialog box will be
displayed. For details, refer to “ Configure Processing Area of User Account
Setting Screen Dialog Box” on page 7-44.
Specify the word device to use as the processing area of the User Account
Setting Screen and click OK. When you return to the properties dialog box,
Edit will be displayed.
Edit:

Click this button to display the Configure Processing Area of User
Account Setting Screen dialog box.

*2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

7-120

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button■ Goto Screen
Screen Number: If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen, specify
the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify thescreen number using the value of the specified device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen or Close Popup Screen.
Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as theorigin.

Screen for Movie Files*2.
Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify thecoordinates using the value of the specified device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen.

*1 Advanced mode only
*2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-121

7
Buttons

This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust Brightness Screen, or Open File

6 Multi-Button
Properties of Print for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Print command for the Multi-Button.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Output toSelect where to direct the screenshot to.
Printer*1:

Outputs the screenshot to the printer connected to the main unit.
Print Time Stamp:

Adds the date and time of printing to the screenshot before
sending it to the printer.
The date and time format depends on the language selected in
Language. Language is available on the Project Details tab of
the Project Settings dialog box.
The display formats are shown below:• Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm• English: MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm
YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute

External Memory Device*2: Outputs the screenshot as a file to the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
Files are output as follows:
File format
JPEG

File name

File size

CAP***.JPG (***: date and time when file was output)
Depends on image
Example: A file created at 18:50:25 on June 30, 2011
being displayed.
will be named “CAP110630_185025.JPG”.

The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screenshot may differ.
• For details about printers, refer to Chapter 34 “1 Printer” on page 34-1.
• For details about external memory devices, refer to Chapter 33 “External Memory Devices” on page 33-1.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following. This option is displayed only when Printer is selected in Output to.
Print Screen:

Outputs a screenshot of the current screen to the printer or the external memory device.
*1:

Cancel Printing

Cancels printout to the printer.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

7-122

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button• These operations cannot be performed simultaneously.
- Outputting to the external memory device by pressing the Multi-Button- Outputting to the printer by pressing the Multi-Button*1- Printing alarm logs*1• While the screenshot is being output to the external memory device, the Print Button or Print Commandcannot output to one. Also, during these situations, the value of HMI Special Relay LSM24 or LSM25
changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
• It may take some time to output screenshots when copying files using the USB Autorun function or a Key
Button.
• The main unit cannot stop printing in the middle of a page, even when the print job is canceled. Print
jobs after the current print job are canceled after the current page finishes printing.
The maximum number of screenshots that can be captured (1 to 999) can be set in HMI Special Data
Registers LSD65. (Default: 99)
The methods to erase screenshot files saved on the external memory device are as follows.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-123

7
Buttons• To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings
dialog box, select the Remove Files check box and the All Screenshot data check box, and thenconfigure the trigger device address. Assign that trigger device address to a part.
• To erase files with WindO/I-NV4, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data in External
Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Screenshot Data check box and click
OK.
• To erase files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - FileManager. In the File Manager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

6 Multi-Button
Properties of Key for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Key command for the Multi-Button.

(Key)

Displays settings
applicable to theselected key.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Key Type
Select the function for the Key command.
Language:

Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser. These
languages are available:
Western, Japanese, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

Browse:Opens the Key Browser when clicked. Select a key.
For details, refer to “5.5 Key Browser” on page 7-100.

(Key):

Displays the name of the key selected using the Key Browser.
• When you select a key for Multi-Button, the label for that key is not assigned as the Registration Text.
• Key commands are executed in the scan following the scan in which the button is pressed.

The settings explained below appear depending on the type of key selected.
■ Popup Screen Number
The Alt key switches the current Popup Screen used as a Keypad when this button is pressed.
Specify the Popup Screen number to open a Keypad for.
This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser.

7-124

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button■ Scroll Size
Specifies the number of lines (1 to 1023) to scroll the list or move the focus when the button is pressed. The
operation varies based on the key selected in the Key Browser. For details regarding the key, refer to “For Alarm
Displays” on page 7-97 and “For the Data Log Display” on page 7-98.
This setting is enabled only if Page Up, Page Down, Up, and Down are selected using the Key Browser.

■ Transfer Setting
The key commands such as Download Project, Upload Project, Copy File, Download PLC Program, andUpload PLC Program, execute the respective data transfer functions when the trigger conditions are satisfied.
Specify the source, transferring data, and destination.
This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser.

7

Download Project is selected.

Buttons

Source:Select the external memory where the project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File) to be transferred

is stored: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.
File Type*1: Select the file format for the project data to be transferred.
ZNX (OS, System Software, Project):

The file contains the OS, system software, and project. The source file specified in
Location is the ZNX project file (.znx).
ZNV (System Software, Project):
The file contains the system software and project. The source file specified in Locationis the ZNV project file (.znv).
Location:

Specify the location of the ZNX Project File (.znx)*1 or the ZNV Project File (.znv). The
maximum number is 247 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can beused. Path delimiters and characters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To set "HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV", a ZNV Project File, to be saved on the root
directory of an external memory device:
HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-125

6 Multi-Button

Destination: Displays a download destination of the project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File).
Clear Keep Devices*3:
Select this check box to clear keep devices after the project data is downloaded.
Starts running without displaying the Result window:
Select this check box to start running the main unit without displaying the execution result
screen after the project data is downloaded.
After downloading, execute the ladder programs automatically*4:
Select this check box to start executing the ladder program after the project data is
downloaded.
This option can only be set when ZNV (System Software, Project) is selected as theFile Type.
• When the source and destination system software versions or the Data Storage Area settings aredifferent, the keep devices are cleared regardless of the setting for Clear Keep Devices.
• When the ZNX Project File*1 or the ZNV Project File is downloaded, the alarm log data, data log data,and operation log data is deleted regardless of the state of the Clear Keep Devices check box.
If the versions of the source and destination system software match, the system software will not be
downloaded.
Upload Project is selected.

Destination: Specify where to save the project uploaded from the main unit. Select the location:
USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.
Location:

Specify the location where the uploaded project will be saved. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters andcharacters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To save project to the folder “Uploaded_Project” in an external memory device:
Uploaded_ProjectA uploaded project using the Data Transfer function is saved as a ZNV Project File(.znv).

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*4 FT2J/1J only

7-126

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button
Copy Files*5 is selected.

Source:Select the source external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*2.
Location: Specify the location of the file to be transferred. The maximum number is 247 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters and characters thatcannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J/"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F\"*:;<>?|

Example: Copy a file “Error.wav” to the root directory of an external memory device:
Error.wav
Destination: Select the destination external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash
Drive*2.
Location: Specify the location where the file will be transferred. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters andcharacters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F\"*:;<>?|

Example: Save file to the “SOUND” folder under “HGDATA01” folder in an external memory
device:FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:
HGDATA01/SOUND
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
HGDATA01\SOUND• If a file name is specified as the source location, the specified file is copied.
If a folder name is specified, all of the files and subfolders contained in the folder, and all of the files inthe subfolders, are copied.
• The subfolders can be copied up to five levels.
• To prevent copying the subfolders and the files contained in the subfolders, HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM30 must be set to 1 before executing the copy.
• To stop copying files during the copy operation, write 1 to HMI Special Internal Relay LSM31. However, it
will continue to copy the file until it is finished then it will stop copying.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*5 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-127

7
ButtonsModel6 Multi-Button
Download PLC Program is selected.

Source:Select the external memory where the PLC program (ZLD Project File) to be transferred is stored:
USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.

Location: Specify the location of the ZLD Project File(.zld). The maximum number is 247 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters and characters thatcannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To set “LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD”, a ZLD Project File, to be saved in folder “LDRDATA”
of an external memory device:
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:
LDRDATA/LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: LDRDATA\LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD
Destination: Specify the destination PLC connected to the main unit. The PLC type is configured in the Project
Settings dialog box, on the Communication Driver Network tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4“3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Interface:

Select the communication interface in which the main unit is connecting to thedownload destination PLC from serial interface or Ethernet. For details, refer to
Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.

If serial interface is selected for Interface.
Slave Number:Specify the slave number of the download destination PLC (0 to 31).

External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

If Ethernet is selected for Interface.
Select from the following method:
Specify External Device ID: Specify the External Device ID (0 to 31) of the destination PLC. This is theExternal Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box, on
the Communication Driver Network tab.
External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

Specify IP Address:

Specify the IP address and port number of the destination PLC.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

7-128

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button
Upload PLC Program is selected.

Source:Specify the source PLC connected to the main unit. The PLC type is configured in the Project Settings
dialog box, on the Communication Driver Network tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Interface:

Select the communication interface in which the main unit is connecting
to the upload source PLC from serial interface or Ethernet. For details,
refer to Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.

Slave Number:Specify the slave number of the upload source PLC (0 to 31).

External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

If Ethernet is selected for Interface.
Select from the following method:
Specify External Device ID: Specify the External Device ID (0 to 31) of the upload source PLC. This is
the External Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box,
on the Communication Driver Network tab.
External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

Specify IP Address:

Specify the IP address and port number of the upload source PLC.

Destination: Specify where to save the PLC program uploaded from the PLC connected to the main unit. Select thetype of external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.

Location: Specify the location of the folder where the uploaded PLC program will be saved. The
maximum number is 247 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can beused. Path delimiters and characters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Model

Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J/"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To save program to the folder “Uploaded_Program” in an external memory
device:Uploaded_Program
A uploaded PLC program using the Data Transfer function is saved as a ZLD Project File(.zld).

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons

If serial interface is selected for Interface.

7-129

6 Multi-Button■ Recording Channel*6
The recording of images starts.
Selects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to record a video only (no audio) out of the signals input from the device. Thissetting is enabled only if Rec. was selected using the Key Browser.

• Movie files cannot be recorded during playback.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while data is
being saved to the external memory device, recording cannot be executed with a Key Button, MultiButton, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function. Also, during these situations, thevalue of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special
Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
■ Recording Target*7
The recording of images and sound starts.
Select the target to record out of the signals input from the device. This setting is enabled only if Rec. was selectedusing the Key Browser.
Video and Audio:

Records images and sound.

Video only (No Audio):

Records images only.

• Movie files cannot be recorded during playback.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while data is
being saved to the external memory device, recording cannot be executed with a Key Button, MultiButton, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function. Also, during these situations, thevalue of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special
Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

*6 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*7 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

7-130

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button
Properties of Script for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the script command for the Multi-Button.

(Script)

7
Buttons■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32000) of the script to operate.
Script Manager will open whenis clicked. Select a script from the script list.

For details, refer to Chapter 25 “2.2 Script Manager” on page 25-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager.
■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager.
Once this area is double clicked, the Script Editor will open and editing can be done.
For details, refer to Chapter 25 “2.3 Script Editor” on page 25-12.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-131

6 Multi-Button● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved in the Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking ON or OFF switches the image displayed on the View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

7-132

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button■ FlashSelect this check box if flashing is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
FlashON image

OFF image■ Coordinates
X, Y:

7

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

ButtonsX:

X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Parts

7-133

6 Multi-Button● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device Address is selected for View Switching Method on
the General tab.

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

7-134

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
This option can only be configured when Left, Center, or Right is selected for Align Text Horizontal. If CenterLeft is selected for Align Text Horizontal, Center-Top is set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

7■ OFF, ON
Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in the Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing (0to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing andline spacing, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-135

Buttons

Text:6 Multi-Button● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Main unit
Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always enable: The Button is always enabled.

Button state

Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Disabled

7-136

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

6 Multi-Button

While OFF:

Enables the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Buttonstate

Disabled

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Button is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Button is hidden while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show• When Alternate is selected for Action Mode on the General tab, the button remains on when hiddenin the on state.
• When the ON delay check box is selected on the Options tab, if the button is hidden before the set time
elapses from when the button begins to be pressed, the on delay is reset and the button does notoperate.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-137

7
Buttons

Data Type:

Enabled6 Multi-Button

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Button from the following.
Always visible: The Button is always displayed.

Button state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Hide

While OFF:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

Displays the Button when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Button state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

Button state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

7-138

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting avalue from 0 to 600 (units of 10 ms).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Main unit

Main unit
Button
Does notoperateButtonOperates

Hold down for 3 secs.

This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.
Even if a Multi-Button is placed on the top layer, drawing objects that are drawn with scripts executed by theMulti-Button are not drawn on the top layer. They are drawn on the Base Screen. For details, refer to
Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-139

6 Multi-Button● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

7-140

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Button
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

ButtonNo.

Group Name

DisplayNo.
番号Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited7

If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the partcannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

130

BS

l CAN
ENT

ButtonButtonCannot operate
For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

7-141

Buttons

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.

6 Multi-Button● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen

7-142

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Keypad

7

KeypadFT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

7.1

How the Keypad is Used
A part comprised of Key Buttons. Enters numbers and characters into Numerical or Character Input parts.
• Entering numbers in the Numerical Input
Main unit

Numerical Input

1230

7

KeypadButtons• Entering characters in the Character Input
Main unit

Character Input

HG SERIES
A

B

C

D

E

F DEL

G

H

I

J

K

L CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

Keypad

ENT
SP

← →

Do not use the Keypad part with the Goto Screen Button or a combination of Goto Screen Commands. For
details, refer to “5 Key Button” on page 7-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-143

7 Keypad

7.2

Keypad Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Keypads.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Keypad.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Keypad.
3 Double-click the placed Keypad and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Keypad Properties dialog box is displayed until OK is clicked.
 Refer to “7.3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box” on page 7-145.
• After OK on the Keypad Properties dialog box is clicked, double clicking the Keypad thereafter calls up theProperties dialog box for the Key Buttons as a group.
This allows editing of settings common to each button.
View: “View Tab” on page 7-83
Registration Text: “Registration Text Tab” on page 7-85
Options: “Options Tab” on page 7-90
• You can set the default for the Keypad on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

7-144

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Keypad

7.3

Properties of Keypad Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

7
Buttons■ Browse
Select a prebuilt Keypad within WindO/I-NV4.
Displays the Standard Browser when clicked. Select numeric keys or character keys registered in the Standard
Browser.
■ Button
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Select the foreground and background color to use for the Keypad (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
16 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when Color is clicked. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Select a pattern to use or tonal gradation for the Keypad.
Displays the Pattern Palette when Pattern is clicked. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from thePattern Palette.

■ Registration Text
Font:

Select one of the following fonts to use for the text on the buttons.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European,
Baltic, Cyrillic, Stroke*1
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-6.

Style*1:

Select a character style: Regular or Bold.

Size:

Specifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128

Magnification*1: W, H: Select the zoom factor (0.5, 1 to 8) to use on the text.
This setting is only enabled when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese,
Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
Text Color:

Select the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when Color is clicked. Select a color from the Color Palette.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-145

7 Keypad■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specify the display coordinates of the Keypad.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the Keypad using the upper left corner of the screen as the origin.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Keypad■ SizeW, H: Specify the size of the Keypad by specifying width and height.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight7-146

KeypadWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Selector Switch

8

Selector Switch
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The parts library provides library parts similar to the Selector Switch. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “(Sample
Library)” on page 2-92.

8.1

How the Selector Switch is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device. This is an exclusive control that only writes a single value as 1 and all other values as 0.
• Switching between two Run Modes (Manual and Auto)
Knob

7

Automatic
ManualButtonsAuto

L-button

R-button

Ch1

Ch2

Automatic

Auto

ManualManualAuto

Press L-button toswitch to Auto.

Operatemanually

ManualPress R-button toswitch to Manual.

• Switching between three Run Modes (Filling - Stop - Discharge)
Knob

F

S D

L-button

R-button

Ch1

Ch2

F

S D

Press L-button toswitch to Filling.

F

S D

Switch to Stop(the operation differs according
to the switch type)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Ch3

F

S D

Press R-button toswitch to Discharge.

7-147

8 Selector Switch

8.2

Selector Switch Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Selector Switch buttons.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Selector Switch.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Selector Switch.
3 Double-click the placed Selector Switch and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
• You can set the default for the Selector Switch on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.
• To change the position or size of the switch, select the Selector Switch and right click on it, then click
Reshape. Double click the edit screen or press the

7-148

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

key to finish changing the shape.

8 Selector Switch

8.3

Properties of Selector Switch Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab

7
Buttons■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switch TypeThe 2-Notch action is as follows.
• When the knob is at Ch1 (left), pressing the right button switches the selector knob to Ch2 (right).
During this action, the device address for Ch1 is set to 0 and Ch2 is set to 1.
• When the knob is at Ch2 (right), pressing the left button switches the selector knob to Ch1 (left).
During this action, the device address for Ch1 is set to 1 and Ch2 is set to 0.
The 3-Notch action is as follows.
• The knob behaves as follows for 3-Notch No-return, 3-Notch R-return, and 3-Notch L-return button:- Press R-button: knob switches from Ch1 (left) -> Ch2 (middle) -> Ch3 (right), in that order.
- Press L-button: knob switches from Ch3 (right) -> Ch2 (middle) -> Ch1 (left), in that order.
• Switching the knob writes 1 to the device address for the new knob position, and 0 to the device addresses for theother two channels.
Whether the knob returns and the direction it returns depends on the switch type.
Select the switch type from the following.
2-Notch No-return:The knob does not return when the operator's finger is released.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleaseOperationand view
Default state

ActionData Ch1
written Ch2

Write

Write

0

1

1

0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-149

8 Selector Switch

2-Notch R-return:

After the knob switches from Ch1 to Ch2, it returns to Ch1 when the R-button is released.
Press

Release

Write

Write

0

1

1

0

Operationand view
Default state

ActionData Ch1
written Ch22-Notch L-return:

After the knob switches from Ch2 to Ch1, it returns to Ch2 when the L-button is released.
Press

Release

Write

Write

1

0

0

1

Operationand view
Default state

ActionData Ch1
written Ch23-Notch No-return:The knob does not return when the operator's finger is released.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleaseOperationand view
Default state

Action3-Notch R-return:

Write

Write

Write

Ch1
Data
written Ch2

0

0

1

0

1

0

Ch3

1

0

0

• If the knob is switched to Ch3, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
• If the knob is switched to Ch1, or from Ch1 to Ch2, it stays where it is even if the button isreleased.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleasePress R-button

Write

Write

Write

Write

Ch1
Data
written Ch2

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

Ch3

1

0

0

0

Operationand view
Default state

Action

7-150

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Release8 Selector Switch

3-Notch L-return:• If the knob is switched to Ch1, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
• If the knob is switched to Ch2, or from Ch3 to Ch2, it stays where it is even if the button isreleased.
Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleaseOperationand view
Default state

Action

Write

Write

Write

Write

1

0

Ch1
Data
written Ch2

0

0

0

1

0

1

Ch3

1

0

0

0

7

3-Notch Both-return: If the knob is switched to Ch1 or Ch3, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
ReleasePress L-button

Release

Write

Write

Write

Write

Ch1
Data
written Ch2

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

Ch3

1

0

0

0

Buttons

Press R-button

Operationand view
Default state

Action■ Always update the status
Select this check box to change the position of the knob with the values of device addresses.
The position of the knob will not be updated when the values of the device addresses set for the Selector
Switch are the following states.
• When values of multiple device addresses are 1• When values of all device addresses are 0• When the value of the device address of the return channel is 1
■ NotchRegister and edit the settings for each notch to each channel.
Use Text Manager:

Select this check box to use the text registered in the Text Manager as the Registration Text foreach channel.

(List of Notch settings): This list shows the notch settings for each channel.
No.:

Shows the channel to be output. The number of notches selected in the
Switch Type determines the number of channels.
Double clicking the cell displays the Notch Settings dialog box where youcan edit the notch settings. For details, refer to “Notch Settings Dialog Box”
on page 7-153.

Device Address: Shows the destination bit device or the bit number in the destination word
device.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor where you can edit the device
address. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Text:

Shows the Registration Text for the channel.
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the Registration Text.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-151

8 Selector Switch

Text ID:

Shows the Text ID.
Double clicking the cell displays the Text Manager where you can change theText ID.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

Color:

Shows the color of the Registration Text for the channel.
Double clicking the cell displays Color Palette where you can change the Text
Color

Set:

Registers or changes the notch settings. Selecting a number that has already been registeredchanges the existing notch settings.
Clicking Set displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can configure the notch. For
details, refer to “Notch Settings Dialog Box” on page 7-153.

Insert:Inserts a notch setting entry above the currently selected position.
Select the channel number from the list where you wish to insert the notch setting and click
Insert. This displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can configure the notch. The
notch settings at the point of insertion shift down one line. Notch settings cannot be inserted if
all channel numbers have a notch setting.

Remove:Deletes the registered notch setting from the list.
Select the channel number in the list and click Remove.

Default Position:

Selects the default position of the knob when the main unit starts operation and the Selector
Switch is first displayed on the screen.
This option can only be set when Always update the status is cleared.
Ch1:

Makes Ch1 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device address configured for Ch1,
writes 0 to the device addresses configured for the other channels.

Ch2:

Makes Ch2 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device address configured for Ch2,
writes 0 to the device addresses configured for the other channels.

Ch3:

Makes Ch3 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device address configured for Ch3,
writes 0 to the device addresses configured for the other channels.

Read from Destination Device Address: The position of the knob is determined by the valueof device address.
The default knob position is fixed for these two switch types because of the return functionality.
2-Notch R-return:
Ch1
2-Note L-return, 3-Notch Both-return: Ch2• If Default Position is Ch1, Ch2, or Ch3, the position of the knob does not change even if the value inthe device address configured for the channel changes, unless the change is caused by the buttons on
the Selector Switch. If Default Position is Read from Destination Device Address, the position of
the knob changes according to the value of the device address configured for the channel.
• When a Selector Switch is redisplayed immediately after switching the screen or when a hidden Selector
Switch is redisplayed, values are not written to the destination device addresses for the channels.
• If the value in the device address used to determine the default knob position contains an illegal value,
the knob will be shown as follows:- 2-Notch No-return:Ch1- 3-Notch:
Ch2

7-152

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Selector Switch
Notch Settings Dialog Box
This dialog configures a notch for a channel. If the channel has already been set with a notch, the setting isoverwritten.

■ Destination Device Address
Specify the destination bit device or the bit number in the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

The characters that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Text ID
To use the text registered in the Text Manager as the Registration Text for the channel, specify the ID number from 1
to 32000.
Click

to display Text Manager.

The text ID setting is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
■ Text Color
Select the Registration Text color for the channel (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when Color is clicked. Select a color from the Color Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-153

Buttons■ TextEnter the Registration Text for the channel.

78 Selector Switch● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Knob Color
Selects the knob color of the Selector Switch (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Knob■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
Flange■ Switch
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the button.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal
gradation from the Pattern Palette.
Buttons

7-154

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Selector Switch■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)

7
Buttons

W:

Width
ScreenHeight

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Parts

7-155

8 Selector Switch● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
StrokeCan only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page2-6.
■ StyleSelects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSets the character size (8 to 128).
Can only be set when Stroke is selected.
■ Magnification
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

7-156

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Selector Switch● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ Input Condition
The Selector Switch is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Selector Switch is disabled and notoperational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Selector Switch is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Selector Switch is operational.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0LM0: 1

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Selector Switch from the following.
Always enable: The Selector Switch is always enabled.

Selector Switch
state

EnabledWhile ON:

Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Selector
Switch state

Disabled

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

7-157

8 Selector Switch

While OFF:

Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Selector
Switch state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Selector Switch when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Selector
Switch state

Disabled

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Selector Switch is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Selector Switch is hidden while the condition is
not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Selector Switch is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Selector Switch is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show

If a hidden Selector Switch is redisplayed on the screen when Read from Destination Device Address isselected for Default Position on the General tab, the display position of the knob changes according to
the value of the device address configured for the channel. When Ch1, Ch2, or Ch3 is selected, the knob isdisplayed at the same position as before it was hidden, regardless of the value of device address configured
for the channel.

7-158

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Selector Switch

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Selector Switch from the following.
Always visible: The Selector Switch is always displayed.

Selector Switch
state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Selector Switch when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Selector
Switch state

Hide

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Displays the Selector Switch when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Selector
Switch state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Selector Switch when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Selector Switch
state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons

While OFF:

Show

7-159

8 Selector Switch● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

7-160

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Selector Switch● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

7
Buttons■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-161

8 Selector Switch
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Selector Switch

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
䠓՚

Group
Name
灉炄炕灰դ

Display
੮ॐ

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

User1

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to Prohibitedfor Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User2 for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the Selector
Switch cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Selector
SwitchCannot operate

For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

7-162

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Selector
SwitchCan operate

User3

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

8 Selector Switch● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

7
Buttons■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Selector Switch on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-163

9 Potentiometer

9

Potentiometer
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The parts library provides library parts similar to the Potentiometer. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “(Sample
Library)” on page 2-92.

9.1

How the Potentiometer is Used
Writes a value to a word device by pressing a slider button.
• The slider display position increases and decreases while the button is depressed. The value of the slider at thedisplayed position is written to the device address when the button is released.
Main unit

External device

Value of slider at
displayed position

0
D0 :

0

D0 :

0

Value of slider at
displayed position

105

Value of slider at
displayed position
Write to device address

127

D0 :

127

Default state

Press R-button

ReleasePress L-button

ReleaseStop

Moves right

Stop

Moves left

Stop

Operationand view

SliderValue
ActionIncreases

Decreases
Write

Write

The slider indicates the value written to the device address. When the value is increased or decreased, the slider
display position also changes.
The slider moves between a user-defined minimum and maximum value.
The input value increases and decreases while the button is depressed. The value of the slider at the displayed
position is written to the device address when the button is released.
The slider display position does not change when the destination device address value changes unless it
was changed by the Potentiometer buttons. However, immediately after the screen is switched and
immediately after the part is displayed on the screen, the slider is displayed at the position specified by thevalue of the destination device address.

7-164

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9 Potentiometer

9.2

Potentiometer Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Potentiometer parts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Potentiometer.

7

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Potentiometer.

Buttons

3 Double-click the placed Potentiometer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
• You can set the default for the Potentiometer on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.
• To change the position or size of the switch, select the Potentiometer and right click on it, then click
Reshape. Double click the edit screen or press the

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

key to finish changing the shape.

7-165

9 Potentiometer

9.3

Properties of Potentiometer Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Data Type
Select the data type to be handled by the Potentiometer.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ MinimumSpecify the minimum value that can be entered. The minimum value differs depending on the data type.
■ MaximumSpecify the maximum value that can be entered. The maximum value differs depending on the data type.
■ Destination Device Address
Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

7-166

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9 Potentiometer● View Tab

7
Buttons■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Slider Color
Selects the slider color of the Potentiometer (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Slider■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
FlangeWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-167

9 Potentiometer■ Switch
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the button.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal
gradation from the Pattern Palette.
Buttons■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

7-168

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

9 Potentiometer● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

7
Buttons■ Input Condition
The Potentiometer is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Potentiometer is disabled and notoperational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Potentiometer is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Potentiometer is operational.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

Button
Does notoperateLM0: 0LM0: 1

ButtonOperates

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Potentiometer from the following.
Always enable: The Potentiometer is always enabled.

Potentiometer
state

EnabledWhile ON:

Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Potentiometer
state

Disabled

EnabledWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Disabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

7-169

9 Potentiometer

While OFF:

Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Potentiometer
state

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Potentiometer when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Potentiometer
state

Disabled

Data Type:

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Potentiometer is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Potentiometer is hidden while the condition is notsatisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Potentiometer is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Potentiometer is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide

LM0: 1Show

When a hidden Potentiometer is redisplayed, the slider is displayed at the position specified by the value of
device address.

7-170

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9 Potentiometer

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Potentiometer from the following.
Always visible: The Potentiometer is always displayed.

Potentiometer
state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Potentiometer when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Potentiometer
state

Hide

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Displays the Potentiometer when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address0

Potentiometer
state

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Potentiometer when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Potentiometer
state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7
Buttons

While OFF:

Show

7-171

9 Potentiometer● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

7-172

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9 Potentiometer● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

7
Buttons■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-173

9 Potentiometer
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Potentiometer

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password



▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the
Potentiometer cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

Main unitPassword

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

PotentiometerCan operate

Potentiometer
Cannot operate

For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

7-174



BS

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

9 Potentiometer● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

7
Buttons■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Potentiometer on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7-175

9 Potentiometer

7-176

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 8

Lamps

This chapter describes the setup for the lamp parts and related main unit operations.

1

Pilot Lamp
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Pilot Lamp is Used
Pilot Lamp parts display drawing objects. The value of a bit device is used to switch the drawing object displayed.
• Switch and display pictures by values of device addresses

0Main unit
External device

8
Lamps

1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-1

1 Pilot Lamp

1.2

Pilot Lamp Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Pilot Lamps.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Lamps, and then click Pilot Lamp.

2 Click a point on the Edit screen where you wish to place the Pilot Lamp.
3 Double-click the placed Pilot Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Pilot Lamp on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

8-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamp

1.3

Properties of Pilot Lamp Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab

8
Lamps

■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the lamp is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on theRegistration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state isdisplayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the action when the part is ON.
No Flash (only ON): Displays the drawing object for the ON state when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Flash (ON + Flash): When the condition is satisfied and the value of the trigger device address is 1, the object flashes(alternates between the drawing object for the ON and OFF states at fixed intervals). The
flashing interval can be set with the Flashing Cycle setting on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Flash Trigger Device Address: Specify the bit device to cause the lamp to flash.
The lamp flashes when the value of the device address is 1. The
action for No Flash (only ON) applies when the value is 0.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-3

1 Pilot Lamp
Example: Action Mode is Flash (ON + Flash), Flash Trigger Device Address is M0, and on the Trigger
Condition tab, Trigger Type is While ON, Device Address is LM0.
Trigger Condition: Device Address LM0 value

0

1

1

0

Action Mode: Value of Flash Trigger Device Address M0

0

0

1

1

Displays OFF
drawing object

Displays ON
drawing object

Flashing

Displays OFF
drawing object

Displayed drawing object

ActionThe lamp will neither turn on or flash if the trigger conditions are not met. Lamp trigger conditions are
configured on the Trigger Condition tab.

8-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamp
● View Tab

8
Lamps

■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking ON or OFF switches the image displayed on the View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern
Palette.

■ Not Display Image*1
Select this check box to display no drawing object in the OFF state.
If the Not Display Image check box is selected, Text set as registration text for the OFF state will be
displayed.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-5

1 Pilot Lamp
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeSets width and height to define the size of parts. The minimum size varies based on the item selected for Image
Type.
Standard:

The minimum size varies based on the selected item and the maximum size is a base screen size.

Picture:W:

2 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

2 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight8-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

1 Pilot Lamp
● Registration Text Tab

8■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-7

Lamps

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-6.

1 Pilot Lamp
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
This option can only be configured when Left, Center, or Right is selected for Align Text Horizontal. If CenterLeft is selected for Align Text Horizontal, Center-Top is set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
■ OFF, ON
Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in the Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color:

Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Windows Font:

Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing (0to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing andline spacing, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

8-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamp
● Trigger Condition Tab

8

Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
When LM0 is 0, condition is not satisfied, so Lamp displays OFF graphic.
When LM0 is 1, condition is satisfied, so Lamp displays ON graphic.
Main unit

Condition
Not satisfied

Lamp
Displays OFF graphic

LM0: 1

Condition
Satisfied

Trigger Type:LM0: 0Lamp
Displays ON graphic

Selects the condition to turn on the Pilot Lamp from the following.
While ON: Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Pilot Lamp status
Off

On

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Off

On

On

Off

8-9

Lamps

■ Lightning
The Pilot Lamp is on while the condition is satisfied, and it is off while the condition is not satisfied. The Pilot Lamp
displays the ON graphic when on and it displays the OFF graphic when off.

1 Pilot Lamp

While OFF: Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Pilot Lamp status
On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

On

Off

While satisfying the condition:
Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Pilot Lamp status

Off

Data Type:

On

Off

On

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the ON condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the ON condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the ON condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the ON condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Pilot Lamp is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Pilot Lamp is hidden while the condition is notsatisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Pilot Lamp is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Pilot Lamp is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

8-10

LM0: 0LM0: 1WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Hide

Show

1 Pilot Lamp

Trigger Type:

Selects the condition to display the Pilot Lamp from the following.
Always visible: The Pilot Lamp is always displayed.

Pilot Lamp state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Pilot Lamp when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0

Pilot Lamp state
Hide

While OFF:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Displays the Pilot Lamp when the value of device address is 0.

8
Lamps

1
Value ofdevice address
0

Pilot Lamp state
Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Pilot Lamp when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Pilot Lamp state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-11

1 Pilot Lamp
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

8-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Pilot Lamp
● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

8
Lamps

■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-13

1 Pilot Lamp
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Pilot Lamp

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

8-14

Main unit

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

1 Pilot Lamp
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

8
Lamps

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Pilot Lamp on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-15

2 Multi-State Lamp

2

Multi-State Lamp
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

How the Multi-State Lamp is Used
Multi-state lamp parts display drawing objects. The value of a specified word device is used to switch the drawing
object to be displayed.
• Switch and display pictures by values of device addresses

External device

Main unit

bit15

bit3 bit0

D0

bit3 bit0

D0= 0100(None)

State: 2

bit3 bit0

D0= 0001

bit3 bit0

D0= 0010

bit3 bit0

D0= 0000

8-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualState: 1

State: 0OFF2 Multi-State Lamp
• Display a picture when in the OFF state.

External device

Main unit

bit3 bit0

D0

bit3 bit0

D0=

bit15

0100
State: 2

State: 1

State: 0

OFF

bit3 bit0

D0=

0001

bit3 bit0

D0=

8

0010

Lamps

bit3 bit0

D0=

0000

The conditions to display the picture set by the OFF state on the screen are as follows.
• Y is selected under Flash on the State tab and the trigger condition is not satisfied.
• Switching Method on the General tab is Bit Number, and the all bit in the device address are 0 or a
bit not allocated a picture is 1.
• Switching Method on the General tab is Value, and the value of device address is a number notallocated a picture.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-17

2 Multi-State Lamp

2.2

Multi-State Lamp Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-State Lamps.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Lamps, and then click Multi-State Lamp.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Multi-State Lamp.
3 Double-click the placed Multi-State Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Multi-State Lamp on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

8-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multi-State Lamp

2.3

Properties of Multi-State Lamp Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab

8
Lamps

■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switching Method
Specify the method to switch drawing objects from the following:
Bit Number: Switches the drawing object displayed, according to the status of the bits.
Example 1: Bit Number is selected. The bits triggered in device address D0 corresponds to thefollowing pictures and the OFF state is None.
bit15

bit3 bit0

Value ofTrigger Device Address D0(None)

PictureState: 2

State: 1

State: 0

OFF

Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1,
display the picture for thelowest order bit.
Bit state of
Trigger Device Address D0

0001

0010

0100

State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

Display picture
for bit 0

Display picture
for bit 1

Display picture
for bit 2

1000

1110

1100

State: 1

State: 2

Display picture
for bit 1

Display picture
for bit 2

Picture to display

ActionNo picture

If all bits in the device address are
0 or if a bit with no associatedpicture becomes 1, display nothing.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-19

2 Multi-State Lamp

Example 2: Bit Number is selected. The bits of trigger device address D0 and the OFF state areallocated to the following pictures.
bit15

bit3 bit0

Value ofTrigger Device Address D0
PictureState: 2

State: 1

State: 0

OFF

Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1,
display the picture for thelowest order bit.
Bit state of
Trigger Device Address D0

0001

0010

0100

1000

1110

1100

State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

OFF

State: 1

State: 2

Display picture
for bit 0

Display picture
for bit 1

Display picture
for bit 2

Display picture
for OFF state

Display picture
for bit 1

Display picture
for bit 2

Picture to display

ActionIf all bits in the device address are 0 or if
a bit with no associated picture becomes
1, display the picture for OFF state.

Value:

Switches the drawing object displayed, according to the value of the device address.
Example 3: Value is selected. The value assigned to the trigger device address D0 are allocated to thefollowing pictures and the OFF state is None.
Value ofTrigger Device Address D0
Picture012State: 0

State: 1

State: 2(None)
OFF

Switches the picture to display according to the value of the device address.
Value ofTrigger Device Address D0

0

1

2

State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

3

Picture to display

Action Display picture for 0 Display picture for 1 Display picture for 2

No picture

If the value of device
address has no pictureassociated with it, display
nothing.

Example 4: Value is selected. The values assigned in trigger device address D0 and the OFF state areallocated to the following pictures.
Value ofTrigger Device Address D0
Picture012State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

OFF

Switches the picture to display according to the value of the device address.
Value ofTrigger Device Address D0

0

1

2

3

State: 0

State: 1

State: 2

OFF

Display picturefor 1

Display picturefor 2

Display picture
for OFF state

Picture to display

Action Display picture
for 0

8-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

If the value of device
address has no pictureassociated with it, display
the picture for OFF state.

2 Multi-State Lamp
■ Trigger Device Address
Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching the drawing object.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

8
Lamps

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-21

2 Multi-State Lamp
● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
When switching the images for a part that has a registered picture used a transparent color, the pictures are
displayed overlapping, place the part on the front layer.

■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeSets width and height to define the size of parts. The minimum size varies based on the item selected for Image Type.
Standard:

The minimum size varies based on the selected item and the maximum size is a base screen size.

Picture:W:

2 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

2 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight8-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts2 Multi-State Lamp
● Registration Text Tab

8■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-23

Lamps

■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows, Stroke*1
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-6.

2 Multi-State Lamp
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the vertical text alignment from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom
This option can only be configured when Left, Center, or Right is selected for Align Text Horizontal. If CenterLeft is selected for Align Text Horizontal, Center-Top is set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.

8-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multi-State Lamp
● State Tab

8■ Settings
Lists the state settings. The list shows various settings such as the state number and file name for the drawing object.
State:

Shows the OFF state and state number.
Double clicking the cell displays the State Settings dialog box where you can edit the statesettings. For details, refer to “State Settings Dialog Box” on page 8-27.

Image:

Shows the name or a file name for a drawing object.
Double clicking the cell opens the View Browser if Standard is selected under Image Type on
the View tab, or Picture Manager if Picture is selected. This allows you to change the drawing
object to display.

Text:

Shows the registration text.
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the Registration Text.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.

Text ID:

Shows the Text ID.
Double clicking the cell displays the Text Manager where you can change the Text ID.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

Fg.Color, Bg.Color:

Shows the foreground and background colors for standard images.
Double clicking the cell opens the Color Palette where you can change the foreground andbackground colors. This setting can only be changed if Image Type is set to Standard on the
View tab.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-25

Lamps

■ Number of StatesSpecify the number of drawing objects (1 to 16) to display by switching.

2 Multi-State Lamp

Pattern:

Shows the pattern or tonal gradation for standard images.
Double clicking the cell opens the Pattern Palette where you can change the pattern or tonal
gradation of the image. This setting can only be changed if Image Type is set to Standard on
the View tab.

Text Color

Shows the color of the registration text. Double clicking the cell opens the Color Palette where
you can change the color of the text.

Flash:

Indicates whether to display the drawing object flashing or constantly lit. Double clicking the cell
toggles between Y for yes and N for no. If Y is selected, the picture which corresponds to a bit
state or value of device is alternately shown and hidden at a fixed time interval.
However, if the OFF state is set, the picture that corresponds to a bit state or value of device
and the picture set for the OFF state are alternately displayed at a fixed time interval.
When the OFF state is not set

When ONShows the picture that
corresponds to the bit
state or device value

Flash

When OFF

When the OFF state is set
Shows the picture that
corresponds to the bit
state or device valueFlashNo picture isshown.

Shows the picture set
for the OFF state

Windows Font:

Shows the currently set Windows Font. Double clicking the cell displays the Font Settings
dialog box where you can change the Windows Font. This setting can only be changed when
Windows is selected for Font on the Registration Text tab.

Line Spacing:Shows the line spacing for Windows Font. Double clicking the cell allows you to change the line
spacing (0 to 100). This setting can only be changed when Windows is selected for Font on
the Registration Text tab.

Character Pitch:Shows the character spacing for Windows Font. Double clicking the cell allows you to change
the character spacing (0 to 100). This setting can only be changed when Windows is selected
for Font on the Registration Text tab.

Set:

Registers the state settings to the list. If you select the OFF state or state number that is alreadyregistered, that number is overwritten with the new settings.
Click this button to display the State Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “State Settings
Dialog Box” on page 8-27.

Insert:Inserts the settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a state number in the list and click this button to display the State Settings dialog box.
The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if all state
numbers are configured.

Remove:Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select the OFF state or state number and click this button to delete the selected settings fromthe list.

■ Image
Shows the image for the OFF state or state number selected in the Settings list.
■ Copy to next State
Select this check box to register or change all state settings at once.
This option copies the current settings to all state numbers after the selected state number when the settings are set
or changed. This option can only be set when a state number is selected.

8-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multi-State Lamp
State Settings Dialog Box
This dialog box sets the drawing object and registration text to display.

■ Image
Select the drawing object to use for the lamp part. Clicking this button opens the View Browser
if Standard is selected under Image Type on the View tab, or Picture Manager if Picture isselected.

Image:

Shows the selected drawing object.

■ TextEnter the text to display. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Registration Text tab. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
This setting is only enabled when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared on the Registration Text tab.
■ Text ID
To use the text registered in the Text Manager, specify the ID number from 1 to 32000.
This setting is only enabled when the Use Text Manager check box is selected on the Registration Text tab.
■ Color
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Select the foreground and background color to use for standard images (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Clicking button opens the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Select the pattern or tonal gradation for a standard image.
Clicking this button opens the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from thePattern Palette.

Text Color:

Select the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) for the registration text.
Clicking this button opens the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Flash:

Select this check box to make the picture flash (alternately show and hide the picture that
corresponds to the bit state or device value at a fixed time interval).
The flashing interval can be set with the Flashing Cycle setting on the System tab of the
Project Settings dialog box. This option cannot be set for the OFF state.

■ Windows Font
Specify the Windows Font to use.
The current settings are displayed by selecting Windows in the Font property on the Registration Text tab. You
can specify the character spacing (0 to 100) and the line spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than thecharacter spacing and line spacing, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
The text ID setting is only enabled if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8
Lamps

Browse:8-27

2 Multi-State Lamp
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Visible Condition
The Multi-State Lamp is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Multi-State Lamp is hidden while the condition
is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Multi-State Lamp is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Multi-State Lamp is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

Trigger Type:

Hide

LM0: 0Show

LM0: 1

Selects the condition to display the Multi-State Lamp from the following.
Alwaysvisible:The Multi-State Lamp is always displayed.

Multi-State
Lamp state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Multi-State Lamp when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0Multi-State
Lamp state
Hide

8-28

Show

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

2 Multi-State Lamp

While OFF: Displays the Multi-State Lamp when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0Multi-State
Lamp state
Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

While satisfying the condition:
Displays the Multi-State Lamp when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Multi-State
Lamp state

Hide

Hide

Show

8

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-29

Lamps

Data Type:Show

2 Multi-State Lamp
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

8-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multi-State Lamp
● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

8
Lamps

■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-31

2 Multi-State Lamp
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Multi-State Lamp

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

8-32

Main unit

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

2 Multi-State Lamp
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

8
Lamps

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Multi-State Lamp on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8-33

2 Multi-State Lamp

8-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 9

Data Displays

This chapter describes how to configure the Data Display parts and their operation on the main unit.

1

Numerical Input
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Numerical Input is Used
The Numerical Input features a display mode that displays the current value of a device address and an entry modethat enters a value using the keypad or key buttons and writes that value to a device address. When the part isdisplayed on the screen, the Numerical Input is in display mode. To enter a value by pressing the keypad or key
buttons, touch the Numerical Input to switch it to entry mode. In entry mode, the value of device address is displayed
until a value is entered.
The Numerical Input can perform the following functions.
• Write a value entered with the keypad or key buttons to a device address
Main unit

External device

9

Numerical Input
999

D100：

999

999

Data Displays

Standard keypad• Display the current value of a device address
Main unit

External device

1234

D100: 1234

• Enter and display decimal numbers
Main unit

12.30

External device

12.30
45.6

• Display the entered value as * (asterisk)
Main unit
External device

****

****

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-1

1 Numerical Input

1.2

Numerical Input Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Numerical Inputs.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Input.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Input.
3 Double-click the placed Numerical Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Data Over tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Numerical Input on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

9-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

1.3

Properties of Numerical Input Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab

9
Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Methods of using the Numerical Input
Selects how to use the Numerical Input:
Use as Numerical Input:

Uses the Numerical Input to enter or display values.

Use as Display for Keypad:

Uses a part to display the value entered with a Keypad placedon the same screen as the Numerical Input.

Display the Minimum value specified with Data Over: Uses the Numerical Input as a part to display the minimum
value of a Numerical Input switched to input mode.
Display the Maximum value specified with Data Over:Uses the Numerical Input as a part to display the maximum
value of a Numerical Input switched to input mode.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-3

1 Numerical Input■ Keypad
Configures the keypad for entering values in the Numerical Input.
Type:

According to the location where the keypad is configured, selects the type from the following.
Standard:

Uses the standard keypad. The standard keypad is the keypad configured as the
popup screen for the standard keypad (screen number 3000 to 3015).
This is the keypad for the type configured by Display Type.

Popup:

Uses a keypad configured as a popup screen.

Current Screen: Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Numerical Input.
Screen Number: Specifies the screen number of the popup screen configured as the keypad (1 to 3015).
This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type.
Adjust location automatically:

Select this check box to display the popup screen configured as the keypad in alocation where it will not overlap the Numerical Input.
This option can only be configured if Standard or Popup is selected for Type.

Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the display location of the popup screen configured as the keypad.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are
the upper-left corner of the popup screen.
This option can only be configured when Standard or Popup is selected for Typeand the Adjust location automatically check box is cleared.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

■ Display Type
Selects the display type for the value as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the type of data for the value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data”
on page 2-1.

Digits:Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal
display

Display Floating Point:

Data Type

DigitsUBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to 5UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to 10

BCD4(B)

1 to 4

BCD8(EB)

1 to 8Float32(F)

1 to 10UBIN16(W)

1 to 4

UBIN32(D)1 to 8

Select this check box to display the decimal point.

If Data Type is UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), or BCD8(EB) and the
Display Floating Point check box is selected, a decimal value will be displayed on the Numerical Input
when a decimal value is entered on the keypad in entry mode, but an integer is written to the device
address. In display mode, source data is an integer, but the value is displayed with a decimal point added at
the number of floating digits configured for the Numerical Input.
However, if Float32(F) is selected for Data Type, both the destination data and the source data aredecimal values.
Example: Display Type is configured as Decimal, Data Type is UBIN16(W), the Display Floating Point
check box is selected, Digits is 5, Floating Digits is 3, and Destination Device Address is D100.
Main unit
External device
12.3459-4

12.345

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

D100:

12345

1 Numerical Input

Floating Digits:

Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of thenumber of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on the display typeand data type. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part is as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Floating Symbol*1:

Data Type

Floating Digits

UBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to Digits

UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to Digits

BCD4(B)

1 to Digits

BCD8(EB)

1 to Digits

Float32(F)

1 to Digits or 8

UBIN16(W)--UBIN32(D)--Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.
.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
Example:Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2.
Floating Symbol is .(dot):

12.34

Floating Symbol is /(slash):

12/34

9

Suppress Zeros:

Data Displays

Floating Symbol is not reflected on the standard keypad. To change the decimal point symbol on thestandard keypad, please change the keypad button.
Select this check box to hide “0” for the upper digits of the integer part.
Example:Do not display when the value is zero:

Suppress Zeros selected:

1234

Suppress Zeros cleared:

00001234

Select this check box to show a blank display if the value is "0".

• If the value is zero and it is not displayed, the unit set on the Format tab is also not displayed.
• Even if the Do not display when the value is zero check box is selected, "0" is displayed when thevalue is not 0.
Display the minus sign:

Select this check box to display the - (negative) sign when displaying negative values.
This option can only be configured when Decimal is selected for Display Type.

Display the plus sign:

Select this check box to display the + (positive) sign when displaying positive values.
This option can only be configured when Decimal is selected for Display Type.

Symbol to show when out of range or Error occurs:
Selects the following symbols to be displayed when a value exceeding the Data Type in
the General tab or the Range in the Data Over tab is entered, or an error occurs.
"? (question mark)", " (space)", "# (pound)", "% (percent)", "$ (dollar)", "- (minus)", "@ (atsign)", "\ (backslash)", "* (asterisk)", "! (exclamation mark)", "+ (plus)"
In the following cases, it is handled as an error and the symbol selected in Symbol to show when out ofrange or Error occurs is displayed.
• If the Data Type is BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) and the value entered in device address
doesn't comply with the data type.
• If a value entered in the Numerical Input exceeds the maximum or minimum of the Data Over.
• A value that exceeds the maximum numeric value that can be processed with the data type selected for
Data Format was entered with the input mode of the Numerical Input.
• If a value divided by zero operation was executed with Display with Arithmetic Operation on the
Options tab.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-5

1 Numerical Input

When input value is out of range, display value near maximum or minimum*1:
Select this check box to display the nearest value of the minimum or maximum when a value outof range is entered.
Example: The When input value is out of range, display value near maximum or minimum check box isselected, the Value under the Range on the Data Over tab is selected and the Minimum is 0 and theMaximum is 10000.
• Enter the value "99999" larger than the maximum
Press Numerical Input

Numerical Input

1234

Enter a value

Press ENT

Press ENT

1234

1234

1234

10000

1234

99999

10000

10000

10000

Keypad display
Operations and display

Display value of
device address(Display mode)(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Entry mode)

Corrects the value of device
address to maximum value(Entry mode)

Write value todevice address(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

Value of
Destination Device Address

1234

1234

1234

1234

10000

10000

Numerical Input display

1234

1234

1234

1234

10000

10000

-

1234

99999

10000

10000

-

Enter a value

Press ENT

1234

1234

0

1234

-1

0

ActionKeypad display

Display focus• Enter the value "-1" smaller than the minimum
Press Numerical Input

Numerical Input

1234

0

Keypad display
Operations and display

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Entry mode)

Write value todevice address(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

Value of
Destination Device Address

1234

1234

1234

0

0

Numerical Input display

1234

1234

1234

0

0

-

1234

-1

0

-

ActionKeypad display*1 Advanced mode only

9-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input■ Input Method
These options specify the destination for entered values.
Destination Device Address:

Specifies the word device to write the entered value to.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word
device by the value of this device address.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
For details on indirect writing, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.
■ Always Entry Mode*1
Select this check box to enter values by pressing the keypad and key buttons without touching the Numerical Input
displayed on the screen.
To display 0 on the Numerical Input until a value is entered, select the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of
Numerical Input check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. To display the value of device
address, clear the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of Numerical Input check box.
This option can only be configured if Current Screen is selected for Type.
Example: The Always Entry Mode check box is selected and the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of
Numerical Input check box is selected on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

999

Data Displays

0

9

Press ENTEnter a value

999

Operations and display

ActionValue of
Destination Device Address

Display 0(Entry mode)

Display value being entered(Entry mode)

Write value to device address(Entry mode)

1234

1234

999

Not displayed on Numerical Input.

If you use a Numerical Input or a Character Input set to Always Entry Mode, other Numerical Input andCharacter Input configured on the same screen will not work.
Example: The Always Entry Mode check box is cleared.
Press Numerical Input

1234

Enter a value

Press ENT

1234

999

1234

999

Operations and display

Enter 999

ActionValue of
Destination Device Address

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Entry mode)

Write value todevice address(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

1234

1234

1234

999

999

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-7

1 Numerical Input■ Focus is moved by ENT button*1
When multiple Numerical Inputs are configured on the screen, select this check box to continue entering values oneach of the Numerical Inputs.
Each time ENT is pressed, the focus moves between the Numerical Inputs according to Focus Order. On the Viewtab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the Numerical Inputs in the order to move the focus.
Example: Numerical Input A and B are configured and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Numerical
Input A is selected and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Numerical Input B is cleared.
Press Numerical Input A

Enter a value

Press ENTEnter a value

Press ENT

Press CAN

A

1234

1234

1234

999

999

999

999

999

B

567

567

567

567

567

567

333

333

1234

999

999

567

333

333

333

Operations
and display

Numerical Input A Display value of
device address
action(Display mode)
Numerical Input B Display value of
device address
action(Display mode)
Numerical Input A
Value of
1234
Destination Device Address
Numerical Input B
567
Value of
Destination Device Address

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Entry mode)

Write value todevice address(Entry mode)

Move focus from

Close Standard

Numerical Input A to B

KeypadDisplay value of
device address(Display mode)(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Entry mode)

Write value todevice address(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

Display focus

1234

1234

999

999

999

999

999

567

567

567

567

567

333

333

■ Update the display by ENT button*1
Select this check box to display the current value unchanged and update the display when a value is entered and ENT
is pressed.
When this check box is cleared, the display updates with each press of a number button to display the number being
entered.
Press Numerical Input

Numerical Input

1234

Enter a value

Press ENT

1234

1234

999

1234

999

999

999

Keypad display
Operations and display

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Entry mode)

Write value todevice address(Entry mode)

Display value of
device address(Display mode)

Value of
Destination Device Address

1234

1234

1234

999

999

Numerical Input display

1234

1234

1234

999

999

-

1234

999

999

-

ActionKeypad display

When a value outside the input range is entered and ENT is pressed, the symbol selected under Symbol toshow when out of range or Error occurs is displayed. The value is not written to the device address.

*1 Advanced mode only

9-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input● View Tab

9Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.

None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed. Only the text is displayed.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
FlangeWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-9Data Displays■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.

1 Numerical Input■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Screen999

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight9-10

999

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

1 Numerical Input● Format Tab

9
Western*1, Standard*2, Stroke*2, 7-Segment, Windows
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, 7-Segment

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Standard
Stroke, 7-Segment

Size
8 to 512
8x16, 16x16
8 to 128■ Style*2
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
■ Magnification*2
W, H:
Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode. However, for Entry Mode text color canbe set only when the Reverse check box is cleared.
*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-11

Data Displays■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.

1 Numerical Input■ Reverse
Select this check box to reverse the text color and plate color during display mode when in entry mode.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Image Type under the View tab.
■ Display Numerical Value with “*” *3
Select this check box to display the entered value as * (asterisks).
Nothing is displayed if the value of device address is 0 when this check box is selected and the Suppress Zeroscheck box is selected on the General tab. When this check box is selected in entry mode, nothing is displayed until avalue is entered from the key buttons or keypad. If ENT is pressed with nothing displayed, 0 is written to thedestination device address.
■ With Unit*3
Select this check box to display units or other characters at the end of a number. Displayed characters must be
registered in Text Manager. The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab.
Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000).

Text:

Displays the characters of the specified Text ID.

Click

to display Text Manager.

• The maximum number that can be displayed with this function is 4 characters. The fifth and subsequentcharacters of a character string are not displayed. However, if using a Windows font for the selected text
ID, the fifth and subsequent characters of a character string will still be displayed.
• If a carriage return (CR) is included the characters after the CR are not displayed.
■ Windows Font
Configures the font to use as the Windows Font.
Select Windows for Font to display the current settings. To change the settings, click Change to display the Fontdialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
■ Change Display Colors*3
To switch the text and plate colors, select this check box and select the method to the display colors from the following.
External device
Trigger Device Address

Main unit0

Text Color

1234

Trigger Device Address

1

Plate Color on the View tab

Text Color under Change Display Colors

1234

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to use as the trigger to switch
the text and plate colors.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the value of device address is 0, the color specified in Text Color or in Plate Coloron the View tab will be displayed.
When the value of device address is 1, the color displayed and specified in Text Color or
Plate Color under the Change Display Colors.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of the text when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View tab.

*3 Advanced mode only

9-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input■ Flash*3
Select this check box to make the text and plate colors flash.
The flashing will occur as follows:• The Change Display Colors check box is cleared, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on
the View tab and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device

Main unit
Text Color

1234
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing

Plate Color on
the View tab

1234
1234
Trigger device address
under Flash

1

1234

Text Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device address for Change
Display Colors is 0, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on the View tab and the colors
specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.

Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

0

Trigger device address
under Flash0

Data Displays

External device

Main unit
Text Color

1234

Plate Color on the View tab

Text Color

Flashing
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

0

Plate Color on
the View tab

1234
1234

Trigger device address
under Flash

1

1234

Text Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device address for Change
Display Colors is 1, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Change Display Colors
and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Trigger device address
under Flash0

Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Main unit
Text Color under Change Display Colors

1234

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Text Color under
Change Display Colors

Flashing

Plate Color under
Change Display Colors

1234
1234

Trigger device address
under Flash

1

1234

Text Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash*3 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9

9-13

1 Numerical Input

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that will be used to trigger
flash.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of text when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View
tab.

9-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9
Data Displays■ Range
Select data type.
Value:

Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.

Device Address:

Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.

Specifies the allowable range of values to enter or display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on thedata type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device Address is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

• Select UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), or BCD8(EB) for Data Typeunder the General tab, and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum andMaximum as an integer.
Example: To set a value of “1.25” for the upper limit, enter “125”.
• If the value of the device address to display exceeds the data range that can be processed for the data
type selected under Data Format on the General tab, the symbol selected under Symbol to show
when out of range or Error occurs on the General tab is displayed.
• If the entered value exceeds the allowable range or if it exceeds the data range that can be processed forthe data type selected under Data Format on the General tab, the symbol selected under Symbol toshow when out of range or Error occurs on the General tab is displayed and the value is not written
to the device. However, if the When input value is out of range, display value near maximum or
minimum check box is selected on the General tab and a value out of range is entered, the nearest
value of the minimum or maximum is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-15

1 Numerical Input■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the value entered with the keypad exceeds the allowable
range.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Report: Select this check box to write 1 in the Report Device Address when the entered value or the value of thedevice address to display exceeds the allowable range.
Report Device Address:

Specifies the Report Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Example: If you attempt to enter “140”, which is higher than the maximum of “100”, or “-10”, which is lower than theminimum of “0”, the value is not written and the symbol selected under Symbol to show when out ofrange or Error occurs on the General tab is displayed. 1 is written to the Report Device Address LM0
under When Data Over.
0
Range: Value

80

0

80

80

10

?????

10

10

?????

Minimum: 0
Operations

Maximum: 100

andWhen Data Overdisplay

Report: On
Report Device Address: LM0Entered data

80

Written data

80

Data over notification: LM0

0

140

10

-10

10
1

0

1

When the When input value is out of range, display value near maximum or minimum check box
is selected on the General tab and a value out of range is entered, 1 is written to the Report Device
Address under the When Data Over.

9-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Input is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Input is operational.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0123

LM0: 1

123

Not
operational

Operational

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Input from the following.
Always enable: The Numerical Input is always enabled.
123
Numerical
Input state
Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value of
Device Address
0

123

123

123

123

123

123

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Numerical
Input state

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-17

Data Displays■ Input Condition
The Numerical Input is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Numerical Input is disabled andnot operational while the condition is not satisfied.

1 Numerical Input

While OFF:

Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value of
Device Address
0

123

123

123

123

123

123

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledNumerical
Input state

While satisfying the condition: Enables the Numerical Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

123

123

123

123

123

123

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Numerical
Input state

Data Type:

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Numerical Input is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Numerical Input is hidden while the condition is
not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Input is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Input is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

Hide

LM0: 0LM0: 1

Show
123• If the Numerical Input is hidden while entering a value, the input is canceled. If a popup screen
configured as the standard keypad or a keypad is displayed, these screens are closed.
• When multiple Numerical Inputs are arranged on the screen and the Focus is moved by ENT button
check box is selected, entry mode is canceled if the Numerical Input is hidden while entering a value.

9-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Numerical Input from the following.
Always visible: The Numerical Input is always displayed.
123

Numerical
Input state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Numerical Input when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value of
Device Address
0

123

123

123

Numerical
Input state
Hide

While OFF:

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Show

Displays the Numerical Input when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value of9

Device Address
0

123

123

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Numerical Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied

123

123

123

Numerical
Input state
Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-19

Data Displays

123
Numerical
Input state1 Numerical Input● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values entered using a keypad and writing the results, select this check box andinput the arithmetic formula.
Example: To divide the value of device address when entered by 60
External device

Main unit

42000÷60

Numerical Input
Destination Device Address: D0
Input with Arithmetic Operation: @/60

42000

D0

700
Write value ofentered value
divided by 60■ Display with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values of device addresses and writing the results, select this check box and input
the arithmetic formula.
Example: To multiple the value of device address when displayed by 60
External device

Main unit

1234×60

Numerical Input
Destination Device Address: D0
Display with Arithmetic Operation: @•60

74040

D0

1234
Display value multipliedby 60 for the value of
device address

Arithmetic Formulas
Arithmetic formulas can be specified by freely combining multiple kinds of data and operators in the following format.
Data

Operator

Data

to
Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data...(up to 120 characters)• There is no limit on the number of data items or number of operators. However, the maximum number is 120
characters.
• Round brackets can be used.

9-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input
Data
Item

Description@

The device address on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic
formula. Only one device address can be set for an arithmetic operation.
The device address is as specified for Destination Device Address under the General tab.

Value

Sets the constant values for the arithmetic formula.
The values that can be set depend on the data type selected using Data Format under the Generaltab. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address

Specifies the bit device or the word device for the arithmetic formula.
Always enter the device address enclosed in square brackets, “[” and “]”.

Operators
Specify the type of arithmetic operation to be performed on the data. The operator priority is the same as for scripts.
For details, refer to Chapter 25 “6.5 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 25-61.
Item

Description
Sets the arithmetic operators.

Arithmetic
operators+

Addition

Adds-

Subtraction

Subtracts

from*Multiplication

Multiplies

and/Division

Divides%ModuloCalculates remainder after dividing

and

.

by

.
.
.
by

9

.

Bit
operator&

Logical AND

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of|

Logical OR

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of^

Logical XOR (exclusive OR)

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of<<Left shift

Shifts each bit of

to left bybit(s).

>>

Right shift

Shifts each bit of

to right bybit(s).

and
and

.
.
and

.

Examples of Arithmetic Formula Input
Input Examples@+1

To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 1 to the value of device address anddisplay the result.

[LDR 0] + @ + 100@&3

Description
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add 1 to the value entered using the
Keypad and write the result to the device address.

To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value enteredusing the Keypad and add 100, and write the result to the device address.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value of
device address and add 100, then display the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, write the logical product of the value
entered using the Keypad and 3 to the device address.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 3 to the value of device address anddisplay the result.

■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-21

Data Displays

Sets the bit operator.

1 Numerical Input● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

9-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
999

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Numerical Input

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
グループ名

Display
表示

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

Data Displays

Main unit

BS

p CLR

999

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the
Numerical Input cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130
999

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User3

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

999

BS

p CLR

999

999

l CAN
ENT

Numerical
Input
Can operate

Numerical
Input
Cannot operate

For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User3

9

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

9-23

1 Numerical Input● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Numerical Input on the editing screen

9-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Numerical Input

1.4

How to Enter Values
Use the keypad or key buttons to write a value to a device address with the Numerical Input. The input methods are
as follows.
■ Pressing the Numerical Input and Entering Values from the Standard Keypad
Arrange a Numerical Input on the screen and in its properties dialog box, on the General tab, under Keypad, selectStandard for Type.
Main unit

External device

Display value of device address(Display mode)

1234

D100:

1234

D100:

1234

Press Numerical Input

Display standard keypadDisplay value of device address(Entry mode)

1234
999

Enter "999"

Data Displays

Display value of device address(Entry mode)

9

Write value
to device address

999
999

D100:

999

D100:

999

Press ENT

Close standard keypadDisplay value of device address(Display mode)

999

When the following operations are performed, entry mode is canceled and the current value of device
address is displayed in the Numerical Input. To enter a value, press the Numerical Input again to set it toentry mode.
• CAN was pressed• When the Focus is moved by ENT button check box on the General tab is cleared and ENT waspressed and a value was written to the device address

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-25

1 Numerical Input■ Without Pressing the Numerical Input, Directly Entering Values from a Keypad on the Same Screen
Arrange a Numerical Input and a keypad on the same screen. In the properties dialog box for the Numerical Input, on
the General tab, under Keypad, select Current Screen for Type and select the Always Entry Mode check box.
Main unit
External device
Display value of device address(Entry mode)

1234

D100:

1234

Display the input value(Entry mode)

999

D100:

1234

D100:

999

Enter "999"

Display value of device address(Entry mode)

Write value
to device address
999

Press ENT

1.5

Advanced Usage● Using the System Area
• When finished entering a value by pressing ENT, 1 is written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input Setting
Complete bit (address number+3, bit 0).
If the System Area 2 Numerical Input Setting Complete Bit (address number+3, bit 0) is set to anotherfunction's execution condition, that function can be executed when ENT is pressed.
Example: To simultaneously close a popup screen when ENT is pressed
In the Properties of Goto Screen Command dialog box, on the General tab, select Close Popup
Screen for Action Mode. On the Trigger Condition tab, select Rising-edge for Trigger
Type, and configure Device Address as the System Area 2 Numerical Input Setting Complete bit(address number+3, bit 0).
• When CAN is pressed, entry mode is canceled and 1 is written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input Setting
Cancel bit (address number+3, bit 1). However, if the keypad is closed by pressing(close) on the popup

screen's title bar or another Numerical Input is pressed before finished entering the value by pressing ENT, entry
mode is canceled and 1 is not written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input Setting Cancel bit (address number+3,
bit 1).
• To clear the System Area 2 numerical input setting complete bit or the numerical input setting cancel bit, write 1 toSystem Area 1 Numerical Input Setting Clear bit (address number+1, bit 10). To automatically clear these bits
when the Numerical Input keypad is pressed in entry mode, select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area
automatically check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

9-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2

Character Input
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

How the Character Input is Used
The Character Input features a display mode that displays the character codes in current values of device addresses
as text and an entry mode that enters text using the keypad or key buttons and writes the character codes for theentered text to device addresses. When the part is displayed on the screen, the Character Input is in display mode. To
enter text by pressing the keypad or key buttons, touch the Character Input to switch it to entry mode.
The Character Input can perform the following functions.
• Write the character codes for text entered with the keypad or key buttons to device addresses
Main unit
External device
Character Input

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)

HG SERIES_Standard keypad

D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)_
HG SERIES_

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

C

D

V

E

F

BS

D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)ENT
SP<Cur. Cur.>D103 :

4945(Hex)

9

D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)

Data Displays• Display the character codes in current values of device addresses as text
Main unit
External device

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)

HG SERIES

D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)• Display entered text as * (asterisk)
Main unit
External device

****

****

_

****_
Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

C

D

E

F

BS

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

V

ENT
SP

<Cur. Cur.>• Enter Kanji characters
Main unit
External device
山田太郎

山田太郎 ̲
山田太郎＿ <Cur Cur>あ か さ た な は ま や ら わ BS
い き し ち に ひ み ゆ り を CLR
う く す つ ぬ ふ む よ る ん CAN
え け せ て ね へ め、 れ

お こ そ と の ほ も

。 ろ

SP

ー ↑

Kanji

ENT

Alphabet Num&Sign Small ゛゜ ↓WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-27

2 Character Input

2.2

Character Input Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Character Inputs.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Character Input.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Character Input.
3 Double-click the placed Character Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Character Input on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

9-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2.3

Properties of Character Input Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab

9■ Methods of using the Character Input
Selects how to use the Character Input:
Use as Character Input:

Uses the Character Input as a part to write the character code of the characters enteredwith a Keypad or a key button to the word device.

Use as Display for Keypad: Uses a part to display the characters entered with a Keypad placed on the same screen
as the Character Input.
Use as Display for User Name in Password Input Screen: Uses the Character Input as a part to display the username on the Password Input Screen.
Use as Display for Password in Password Input Screen:

Uses the Character Input as a part to display the password
on the Password Input Screen.

■ Keypad
Configures the keypad for entering text in the Character Input.
Use as Display for Keypad*1:
Select this check box to only use the Character Input as a part to display the text entered with the keypad.
Type: According to the location where the keypad is configured, selects the type from the following.
Standard(Half-Width Character): Uses the standard keypad for entering half-width characters. The standard
keypad is the keypad configured as the popup screen for the standard
keypad. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “4.3 Standard Keypad Popup Screen”
on page 5-26.
Standard(Hiragana):

Uses the standard keypad for entering full-width characters. The standard
keypad is the keypad configured as the popup screen for the standard
keypad. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “4.3 Standard Keypad Popup Screen”
on page 5-26.

Popup:

Uses a keypad configured as a popup screen.

Current Screen:

Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Character Input.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-29

Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

2 Character Input

Screen Number:Specifies the screen number of the popup screen configured as the keypad (1 to 3015).
This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type.

Adjust location automatically: Select this check box to display the popup screen configured as the keypad in a location
where it will not overlap the Character Input.
This option can only be configured when Standard(Half-Width Character),Standard(Hiragana) or Popup is selected for Type.
Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the display location of the popup screen configured as the keypad.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are theupper-left corner of the popup screen.
This option can only be configured when Standard(Half-Width Character),Standard(Hiragana) or Popup is selected for Type and the Adjust location
automatically check box is cleared.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

■ Data Format
Specifies the digits to display.
Input Digits:

Specifies the number of digits that can be entered with the Character Input (1 to 127). For eachcharacter to enter, one digit for half-width characters and two digits for full-width characters is
required.

Display Digits:

Specifies the number of digits that can be displayed in the Character Input display (1 to 100).
Regardless of half-width or full-width, one digit is required per character.

■ Input Method
These options configure the destination for the character codes for the entered text.
Destination Device Address:
Specifies the destination word device for the character codes for the entered text.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Use Reference Device Address*1:
Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word device by the value of thisdevice address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
For details on indirect writing, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-5.

*1 Advanced mode only

9-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

Write NULL (0x00) after the end of the string*1:
Select this check box to write NULL (0x00) to all device addresses from the end of the string to the address
number specified by Input Digits if the length of the input string is less than Input Digits.
Example: Input Digits is 10 and a string with a length of 5 was input.
Check box: Selected
Character Input
display

Check box: Cleared

HG SERIESHG SERIES‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)Value ofdestination
device address‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)

MICRO_

Enter MICRO(Length of the string is 5)

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

C

D

E

F

BS

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

V

MICRO_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

ENT

Character Input
displaySP<Cur. Cur.>

A

B

C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

destination

SP<Cur. Cur.>MICRO‘M’ ‘I’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)device address

BS

ENT

MICRO

Value ofV

F

Values updated
to 6th character
Values are not
updated‘M’ ‘I’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)(NULL)(NULL) 0000(Hex)NULL (0x00) is writtenfrom 7th characterand the values of
all 10 characters
are updated

9(NULL)(NULL) 0000(Hex)Check box: Selected
Character Input
display

Value ofdestination
device address

Check box: Cleared

HG SERIESHG SERIES‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)

MICROI_Enter MICROI(Length of the string is 6)

Character Input
display

Value ofdestination
device address

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

C

D

E

F

BS

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

V

MICROI_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

ENT
SP

Data Displays

Example: Input Digits is 10 and a string with a length of 6 was input.

<Cur. Cur.>MICROI

A

B

C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

V

F

BS

ENT
SP

<Cur. Cur.>MICROI‘M’ ‘I’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ ‘I’ 4F49(Hex)(NULL)(NULL) 0000(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)Values updated
to 8th character
Values are not
updated‘M’ ‘I’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ ‘I’ 4F49(Hex)(NULL)(NULL) 0000(Hex)NULL (0x00) is writtenfrom 9th characterand the values of
all 10 characters
are updated(NULL)(NULL) 0000(Hex)*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-31

2 Character Input■ Always Entry Mode*1
Select this check box to enter text by pressing the keypad and key buttons without touching the Character Input
displayed on the screen.
This option can only be configured if Current Screen is selected for Type.
Example: The Always Entry mode check box is selected.

HG_

Press CLR

Enter text

Press ENT

_

IDEC_

IDEC_

Deletes text

Enter IDEC

Operations
and display

ActionValue of
Destination Device Address

Display values ofdevice addresses as text
(Entry mode)

Display only focus

Display text being(Entry mode)

entered (Entry mode)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)Write character codes todevice addresses(Entry mode)‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)If you use a Numerical Input or a Character Input set to Always Entry Mode, other Numerical Input andCharacter Input configured on the same screen will not work.
Example: The Always Entry Mode check box is cleared.
Press Character Input

HG

HG_

Press CLR

Enter text

Press ENT

_

IDEC_

IDEC_

Deletes text

Enter IDECIDEC

Operations
and display

Action

Display values ofdevice addresses as text
(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display only focus(Entry mode)

Display text being
entered (Entry mode)

Write character codes todevice addresses(Entry mode)

Display values ofdevice addresses as text
(Display mode)

Value of
Destination Device Address‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)*1 Advanced mode only

9-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input■ Focus is moved by ENT button*1
When multiple Character Inputs are configured on the screen, select this check box to continue entering text on eachof the Character Inputs.
Each time ENT is pressed, the focus moves between the Character Inputs according to Focus Order. On the Viewtab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the Character Inputs in the order to move the focus.
Example: Character Input A and B are configured and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Character
Input A is selected and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Character Input B is cleared.
Enter text

Press ENTEnter text

Press ENT

Press CAN

A

HG

HG_

HG_

HG SERIES_HG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIES

B

MICRO

MICRO

MICRO

MICRO

MICRO_MICRO_MICRO SMART_MICRO SMART

Press Character Input A

HG_

Operations
and display

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

C

D

P

Q

E

R

F

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

BS

ENT
Y

Z

SP

HG SERIES_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

<Cur. Cur.>

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

C

D

P

Q

E

R

F

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

BS

ENT
Y

Z

SP

<Cur. Cur.>HG SERIES_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

C

D

P

Q

E

R

F

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

MICRO_

BS

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

ENT
Y

Z

SP

<Cur. Cur.>

C

D

E

F

MICRO SMART_

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

BS

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

ENT
Y

Z

SP

<Cur. Cur.>

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

C

D

P

Q

E

R

F

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

BS

ENT
Y

Z

SP

MICRO SMART_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

<Cur. Cur.>

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

C

D

P

Q

E

R

F

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

BS

ENT
Y

Z

SP

<Cur. Cur.>

Move focus from
Character Input A to B
Display values ofCharacter Input A
device addresses as text
action(Display mode)

Display focus(Entry mode)

Display text being
entered (Entry mode)

Num&
Sign

A

B

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

C

D

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

E

X

F

BS

ENT
Y

Z

SP

<Cur. Cur.>

Close Standard
KeypadWrite character codes to
Display values ofdevice addresses
device addresses as text
(Entry mode)(Display mode)

Display values ofCharacter Input B
device addresses as text
action(Display mode)(Entry mode)

Display text being
entered (Entry mode)

Display values ofWrite character codes todevice addresses as text
device addresses(Display mode)(Entry mode)

Display focus‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ (NULL) 4F00(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ ‘ ’ 4F20(Hex)‘S’ ‘M’ 534D(Hex)‘A’ ‘R’ 4152(Hex)‘T’ (NULL) 5400(Hex)‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)‘O’ ‘ ’ 4F20(Hex)‘S’ ‘M’ 534D(Hex)‘A’ ‘R’ 4152(Hex)‘T’ (NULL) 5400(Hex)■ Update the display by ENT button*1
Select this check box to display the current text unchanged and update the display when text is entered and ENT ispressed.
When this check box is cleared, the display updates with each press of a character button to display the character
being entered.
Press Character Input
HG_

HG

Operations anddisplay

HG_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

C

D

E

F

BS

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X
ENT

Y

Display values of
Action device addresses as text
(Display mode)

Z

SP<Cur. Cur.>

Display focus(Entry mode)Enter text

Press ENTHG_

HG SERIES_HGSERIES_
A
B
C
D

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

G

H

I

M

N

O

S

T

U

HG SERIES_

E

F

BS

K

L

CLR

P

Q

R

CAN

V

W

X

J

ENT
Y

Z

SP

HG SERIESHG SERIES_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

<Cur. Cur.>

A

B

C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

F

BS

ENT
Y

Z

SP

<Cur. Cur.>

Display values ofDisplay text being Write character codes todevice addresses
device addresses as text
entered (Entry mode)(Entry mode)(Display mode)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)Character Input
display

HG

HG

HG

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Keypad display

Hide

HG

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Hide

Value of
Destination Device Address*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-33

9Data Displays‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)Character Input A
destination
device address

Character Input B
destination
device address

MICRO SMART_

Lower
case

2 Character Input● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.

None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed. Only the text is displayed.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange

9-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Screen
HG SERIESParts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

9

Screen
HG SERIESWindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

Data Displays

Height9-35

2 Character Input● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Stroke*1
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Japanese

8x16, 16x16

Stroke8 to 128■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode. However, for Entry Mode text color canbe set only when the Reverse check box is cleared.
■ Reverse
Select this check box to reverse the text color and plate color during display mode when in entry mode.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Image Type under the View tab.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

9-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input■ Display Character with “*”*2
Select this check box to display the entered characters as * (asterisks).
If this check box is selected, nothing is displayed until a value is entered from the key buttons or keypad when the
Character Input is in entry mode. If ENT is pressed with nothing displayed, 0 is written to the destination device address.
■ Change Font with Device Address*2
Select this check box to change the font used to display the text with a value of device address.
The keypad (popup screen) can also be changed when Standard(Half-Width Character), Standard(Hiragana)or Popup is selected for Type under Keypad on the General tab.
Trigger Device Address: Specifies the word device (2 words) to use as the condition to change the font.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
1: Japanese
2: Western
1stword2ndword3rdword

Font number

6: Central European
7: Baltic

Font number

Popup screen No.

8: Cyrillic
Popup screen No.

1 to 3015

Example: With Trigger Device Address set to D100, to enter Central European text frompopup screen 100 using a Character Input for entering European text from thestandard keypad (popup screen 3003)
Write 6 to D100 and 100 to D101.

Data Displays■ Change Display Colors*2
Select this check box to switch the text and plate colors.
External device
Trigger Device Address

Main unit0

Text Color

HG SERIES

Trigger Device Address

1

Plate Color on the View tab

Text Color under Change Display Colors

HG SERIES

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to use as the trigger to switch
the text and plate colors.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the value of device address is 0, the color specified in Text Color or in Plate Coloron the View tab will be displayed.
When the value of device address is 1, the color displayed and specified in Text Color or
Plate Color
under the Change Display Colors.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of the text when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View
tab.

*2 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9

9-37

2 Character Input■ Flash*2
Select this check box to make the text and plate colors flash.
The flashing will occur as follows:• The Change Display Colors check box is cleared, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on
the View tab and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device

Main unit
Text Color

HG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing

Plate Color on
the View tab

HG SERIESHG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device address for Change
Display Colors is 0, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on the View tab and the colors
specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

Main unit0

Text Color

HG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

0

Plate Color on
the View tab

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device for Change Display
Colors is 1, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Change Display Colors and thecolors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Trigger device address
under Flash0

Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Main unit
Text Color under Change Display Colors

HG SERIES

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Text Color under
Change Display Colors

Flashing

Plate Color under
Change Display Colors

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash*2 Advanced mode only

9-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that will be used to trigger
flash.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of text when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View
tab.

9Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-39

2 Character Input● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Input Condition
The Character Input is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Character Input is disabled andnot operational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Character Input is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Character Input is operational.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0IDEC

LM0: 1

IDEC

Not
operational

Operational

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Character Input from the following.
Always enable: The Character Input is always enabled.
IDEC

Character Input
state

Always enabled

While ON:

Enables the Character Input when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value of
Device Address
0

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Character Input
state

9-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

While OFF:

Enables the Character Input when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value of
Device Address
0

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

EnabledDisabled

EnabledDisabled

Disabled

EnabledCharacter Input
state

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Character Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

EnabledEnabledDisabled

Character Input
state

Data Type:

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

■ Visible Condition
The Character Input is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Character Input is hidden while the condition is
not satisfied.
Example:Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Character Input is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Character Input is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

Hide

LM0: 0LM0: 1Show
IDEC• If the Character Input is hidden while entering a value, the input is canceled. If a popup screen
configured as the standard keypad or a keypad is displayed, these screens are closed.
• When multiple Character Inputs are arranged on the screen and the Focus is moved by ENT button
check box is selected, entry mode is canceled if the Character Input is hidden while entering a value.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-41

9Data Displays

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.

2 Character Input

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Character Input from the following.
Always visible: The Character Input is always displayed.

IDEC

Character Input
state

Always show

While ON:

Displays the Character Input when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value of
Device Address
0

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

Character Input
state
Hide

While OFF:

Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Show

Displays the Character Input when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value of
Device Address
0

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

Character Input
state
Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

While satisfying the condition: Displays the Character Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

IDEC

IDEC

IDEC

Character Input
state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Show

Show

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

9-42

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

9■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the main unit makes touch sounds.

To enable touch sounds on the main unit, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the Systemtab of the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-43

Data Displays

Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.

2 Character Input● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

9-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
HG SERIESLine Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Character Input

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

Data Displays

Main unit

BS

p CLR

999

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

User2

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so theCharacter Input cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130q

HG SERIES

130

▲ ▼

User3

1

Main unit

130

Password

2
w

3

4

5

6

7

8

e

r

t

y

u

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

9

0

_
MICRO_

BS
Lower
case

i
o p CLR
HG
SERIES
k

Num&
Sign

l CAN

A

B

C

G

H

I

M

N

O

S

T

U

Y

Z

D
J
P
V

E

F

BS

K

L

CLR

Q

R

CAN

W

X

HG SERIES_

ENTSP<Cur. Cur.>

ENT

Character
Input
Can operate

Character
Input
Cannot operate

For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User3

9

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

9-45

2 Character Input● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Character Input on the editing screen

9-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2.4

How to Enter Text
Use the keypad or key buttons to write character codes to device addresses with the Character Input. The input
methods are as follows.
■ Pressing the Character Input and Entering Text from the Standard Keypad
Arrange a Character Input on the screen and in its properties dialog box, on the General tab, under Keypad, selectStandard for Type.
Main unit
Display values of device addresses as text
(Display mode)

External device

HG

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)

Press Character Input

Display standard keypadDisplay values of device addresses as text
(Entry mode)

HG_
HG SERIES_

Lower
case

Num&
Sign

A

B

C

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

P

Q

R

F

CAN

S

T

U

V

W

X

BS

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)

ENT
Y

Z

SP

<Cur. Cur.>9Enter text as "HG SERIES"

Write text charactercodes to device addresses

HG SERIES_

Num&
Sign

A

B

C

D

E

F

BS

G

H

I

J

K

L

CLR

M

N

O

Q

R

CAN

S

T

U

W

X

Y

Z

P
V

D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)

ENT
SP

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)_
HG SERIES_

Lower
case

Data Displays

Display values of device addresses as text
(Entry mode)

D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)<Cur. Cur.>

Press ENT

D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)Close standard keypadDisplay values of device addresses as text
(Display mode)

HG SERIES

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)When the following operations are performed, entry mode is canceled and the current values of device
addresses are displayed as character codes on the Character Input. To enter text, press the Character Input
again to select it and set it to entry mode.
• CAN was pressed• When the Focus is moved by ENT button check box on the General tab is cleared and ENT waspressed and a value was written to the device address

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-47

2 Character Input■ Without Pressing the Character Input, Directly Entering Text from a Keypad on the Same Screen
Arrange a Character Input and a keypad on the same screen. In the properties dialog box for the Character Input, on
the General tab, under Keypad, select Current Screen for Type and select the Always Entry Mode check box.
Main unit
Display values of device addresses as text

External device

HG_(Entry mode)

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)Display the input text

HG SERIES_(Entry mode)

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)Enter text as "HG SERIES"

Display values of device addresses as text

HG SERIES_

Write text
character codes todevice addresses(Entry mode)

D100 : ‘H’ ‘G’ 4847(Hex)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)

Press ENT

D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)■ Changing the Language and Entering Text
Select the Change Font with Device Address check box on the Format tab in the properties dialog box.
It is convenient to use this setting together with the text group settings.
The font and popup screen with this setting will change simultaneously with the text group change and text can beentered with the same font as the text group.
Specify the same device address in the Change Text Group by Device Address on Text Manager as the Trigger
Device Address for this setting.

9-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2.5

Character Input Usage Examples● Enter Kanji characters
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Using the Standard Keypad Popup Screen (Screen number: 3008) for inputting Kanji characters, enter Kanjicharacters in the Character Input.
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Character Input.

9
Data Displays

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you place the Character Input.
3 Double-click the placed Character Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

4 Select the Standard(Hiragana) as the Type on the General tab.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-49

2 Character Input

5 Click the Format tab, select the Japanese as the Font, and then select the 16x16 as the Size.

6 Click OK.
The Properties of Character Input dialog box closes.

7 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

8 Click the Font/Kanji Dictionary Data tab, and then select the Use Kanji input mode check box.

9 Click OK.

9-50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

10 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.

If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.

11 Select the Download Fonts and Kanji Dictionary Data check box.

9
Data Displays

12 Verify Communication Settings and click Download.

Since the recipe files are downloaded to the external memory device inserted in the main unit, use the same settings
as when communicating with the main unit.

To change Communication Settings, click Change to display the Communication Settings dialog box. Change
Communicate with, Port, and Baud Rate. For details, refer to Chapter 29 “1 Overview” on page 29-1.
If security is enabled in the main unit project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name andenter the password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 241.

13 On the confirmation message, click Yes.

The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project files start downloading.

When finished downloading, an information message is displayed.

14 Click OK on the information message.

You are returned to the Download dialog box.

15 Click Close on the Download dialog box.
This concludes configuring the settings to enter Kanji characters to Character Input.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-51

2 Character Input
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example of entering the Kanji characters " 山田太郎 " to the Character Input.

1 Press the Character Input for entering the Kanji characters.
The popup screen for the standard keypad (screen number 3008) will be displayed.
Main unit

External device

2 Press the Kanji to switch it to Kanji input mode.
＿<Cur Cur>あ か さ た な は ま や ら わ BS
い き し ち に ひ み ゆ り を CLR
う く す つ ぬ ふ む よ る ん CAN
え け せ て ね へ め、 れ

お こ そ と の ほ も

。 ろ

SP

ー

ENT

↑

Alphabet Num&Sign Small ゛゜ ↓Kanji

3 Enter the reading of Kanji with Hiragana.
The maximum number is 32 characters.
Example: Press " や ", " ま ", " た " and then "Small ゛ ゜ " when you enter " や ま だ ".

やまだ<Cur Cur>あ か さ た な は ま や ら わ BS
い き し ち 3に ひ み 2 ゆ 1 り を CLR
う く す つ ぬ ふ む よ る ん CAN
え け せ て ね へ め、 れ

お こ そ と の ほ も

。 ろ

SP

ー ↑

Kanji

Alphabet Num&Sign Small ゛゜ ↓

4

9-52

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

ENT2 Character Input

4 Press SP to display conversion candidates.
As necessary, press SP, ↑ or ↓ to change the conversion candidates.

やまだ
山田
あ か さ
山だ
き し
い
やまだ
ヤマダ
く す
う
ヤマだ
え け せ

<Cur Cur>た な は ま や ら わ BS
ち に ひ み ゆ り を CLR
つ ぬ ふ む よ る ん CANて ね へ め、 れ

お こ そ と の ほ も

。 ろ

SP

ー ↑

ENT

Alphabet Num&Sign Small ゛゜ ↓Kanji

5 Press ENT to apply the entered characters.
山田 ＿<Cur Cur>あ か さ た な は ま や ら わ BS
い き し ち に ひ み ゆ り を CLR

9

う く す つ ぬ ふ む よ る ん CAN、 れ

お こ そ と の ほ も

。 ろ

SP

ー ↑

Kanji

Data Displays

え け せ て ね へ め

ENTAlphabet Num&Sign Small ゛゜ ↓Characters exceeding the number of Input Digits or the number of Display Digits are deleted.

6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to enter all the characters.
山田 たろう太郎
あ か さ た
足ろう
し ち
い き
たろう
タロウ
う く す つﾀﾛｳ
え け せ て<Cur Cur>な は ま や ら わ BSに ひ み ゆ り を CLR
ぬ ふ む よ る ん CAN
ね へ め

、 れ

お こ そ と の ほ も

。 ろ

SP

ー ↑

Kanji

ENT

Alphabet Num&Sign Small ゛゜ ↓WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-53

2 Character Input

7 Press ENT to enter characters to the Character Input.
The Shift_JIS code of the entering characters are written to the device address.

山田太郎＿<Cur Cur>あ か さ た な は ま や ら わ BS
い き し ち に ひ み ゆ り を CLR
う く す つ ぬ ふ む よ る ん CAN
え け せ て ね へ め、 れ

お こ そ と の ほ も

。 ろ

SP

ー ↑

Kanji

ENT

Alphabet Num&Sign Small ゛゜ ↓This concludes entering Kanji characters to the Character Input.
On the simulator, you can not enter Kanji characters with the Character Input.

9-54

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Character Input

2.6

String Data Storage Method
The entered text is stored in the upper byte and lower byte according to the Storage Method of String Data
setting. Storage Method of String Data is configured on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 System Tab” on page 4-26.
Example 1:The destination device address is “LDR100” and the entered text is “ABCDE”.
• from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data.
Device address
LDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'A' = 41 (Hex)'B' = 42 (Hex)'C' = 43 (Hex)'D' = 44 (Hex)'E' = 45 (Hex)0

NULL terminating character• from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data.
Device address
LDR100LDR101LDR102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
'B' = 42 (Hex)'A' = 41 (Hex)'D' = 44 (Hex)'C' = 43 (Hex)0'E' = 45 (Hex)NULL terminating character

9
Data Displays

Example 2:The destination device address is “LDR100” and the entered text is “ 完了 ”.
• from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data.
Device address

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte

LDR1008A (Hex)AE (Hex)'完'

LDR101

97 (Hex)

B9 (Hex)

LDR102

0'了'

NULL terminating character• from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data.
Device address

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte

LDR100AE (Hex)

8A (Hex)'完'

LDR101

B9 (Hex)

97 (Hex)'了'

LDR1020

NULL terminating character

When handling strings, 0 is written to the device as the NULL terminating character and treated as the endof the string.

2.7

Advanced Usage● Using the System Area
• When finished entering text by pressing ENT, 1 is written to the System Area 2 Character Input Setting Complete
bit (address number+3, bit 5).
• When CAN is pressed, entry mode is canceled and 1 is written to the System Area 2 Character Input Setting Cancel
bit (address number+3, bit 6). However, if the keypad is closed by pressing(close) on the popup screen's title
bar or another Character Input is pressed and selected before finished entering the text by pressing ENT, entry
mode is canceled and 1 is not written to the System Area 2 Character Input Setting Cancel bit (address number+3,
bit 5).
• To clear the System Area 2 character input setting complete bit or the character input setting cancel bit, write 1 toSystem Area 1 Character Input Setting Clear bit (address number+1, bit 11). To automatically clear these bits when
the Character Input keypad is pressed in entry mode, select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area
automatically check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-55

3 Picture Display

3

Picture Display
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

3.1

How the Picture Display is Used
The Picture Display displays pictures. It can change, move, or scale the displayed picture according to value of device
address.
• Switch and display pictures by value of device address

External device

Main unit

bit15

bit3 bit0

D0

bit3 bit0

D0=

0100

Pic2

bit3 bit0

D0=

0001

bit3 bit0

D0=

0010

bit3 bit0

D0=

9-56

0100

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Pic1

Pic0

3 Picture Display• Switch and display pictures at a regular interval
Main unit
Picture List
Pic0

Pic1
5 x 100 ms
Pic2

5 x 100 ms

9
Data Displays

5 x 100 ms• Move the picture position by values of device addresses
External device

X-coordinate D100=
Y-coordinate D101=

00X-coordinate D100=
Y-coordinate D101=

300
250

X-coordinate D100=
Y-coordinate D101=

600
500

Main unit
Display picture at X 0, Y 0

Move picture to X 300, Y 250

Move picture to X 600, Y 500

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-57

3 Picture Display• Scale the size of the picture by values of device addresses and display it
External device

Width D100=
Height D101=

360
240

Width D100=
Height D101=

720
480

Main unit

Scale picture to
W 360, H 240

Scale picture to
W 720, H 480

Width D100=
Height D101=

Shrink picture to
W 180, H 120

180
120

When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.
• Rotate the picture by values of device addresses and display itThis example shows a 0° start angle of rotation at the minimum value of 0 and a 90° end angle of rotation at the
maximum value of 100.
The pivot point of rotation is the position at X Point 0 and Y Point 500 from the center of picture.
External device

D100=

9-58

Main unit
Display picture
at same posion
as when not rotated

0

D100=

50

D100=

100

Display pictureat posion where it
has been rotated 45°

Display pictureat posion where it
has been rotated 90°

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

3.2

Picture Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Picture Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Picture Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Picture Display.
3 Double-click the placed Picture Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Picture Display on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-59

3 Picture Display

3.3

Properties of Picture Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switching Method
Specifies the method for switching pictures to display from the following. Register pictures in Picture List on the
View tab.
Bit Number:

Switches the picture to display according to the status of bits in a device address.
Example: Bit Number is selected and the bits of trigger device address D0 are allocated to thefollowing pictures.
bit15

bit3

bit0

Trigger device address D0

Picture

Pic2

Pic1

Pic0

Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display the
picture for the lowest order bit.
Trigger device address
D0 bit state

0001

0010

0100

Pic 0

Pic 1

Pic 2

Display picture

Display picture

Display picture

for bit 0

for bit 1

for bit 2

1000

1110

1100

Pic 1

Pic 2

Display picture

Display picture

for bit 1

for bit 2

Picture to display

ActionNo picture

If all bits in the device address are 0 or if a bit withno associated picture becomes 1, display nothing.

9-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

Value:

Switches the picture to display according to the value of the device address.
Example: Value is selected and the trigger device addresses D0 are allocated to the following
pictures.
Trigger device address D0 value

0

1

2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

PictureSwitches the picture to display according to the value of the device address.
0

1

2

Pic 0

Pic 1

Pic 2

Display picture for 1

Display picture for 2

Trigger device address

3

D0 value

Picture to display

Action Display picture for 0

If the value of device
address has no picture
No pictureassociated with it, display
nothing.

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching pictures.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Bit Number or Value isselected.

9

Fixed Period:

Switches the pictures to display at a regular interval in picture number order on the picture list.
Example: Fixed Period is selected and the following pictures are allocated to the picture list.
PicturePicture list number

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Switches the pictures to display at a regular interval in picture number order on the
picture list.

Interval

Regular interval

Regular interval

Regular interval

5 x 100 ms

5 x 100 ms

5 x 100 ms

Pic 0

Pic 1

Pic 2

Picture to display

Action Display picture Display picture Display picture
for bit 0
for bit 1
for bit 2

Interval:

If the Repeat check box is cleared,
stop switching the picture list.

Specifies the interval to switch pictures as 2 to 600 (100 ms units).
This option can only be configured when Fixed Period is selected.

Repeat:Select this check box to repeat displaying pictures from the start of the picture
list when the picture at the end of the list is displayed.
This option can only be configured when Fixed Period is selected.

When Fixed Period is selected, the picture may not be displayed when the interval is shorter than the scantime for the screen on the main unit. The maximum value for the main unit scan time can be checked by thevalue of HMI Special Data Register LSD4. Refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register (LSD)” on page35-13.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-61

Data Displays

When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.

3 Picture Display■ FlashSelect this check box to flash the displayed pictures. The picture is repeatedly shown and hidden.

■ Dynamic Position*1
Select this check box to move and display the picture by specifying the coordinates of the picture as values of device
addresses.
X Point: Specifies the word device that is the X-coordinate of the picture.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Y Point: Specifies the word device that is the Y-coordinate of the picture.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: A device address for the X-coordinate is D100 and a device address for the Y-coordinate is D101.
The picture is moved to the values of D100 and D101.
Value of the X-coordinate
device address D100

0

300

600

Value of the Y-coordinate
device address D101

0

250

500

0

600

300

0
250

Position of picture to display

500■ Dynamic Size*1
Select this check box to scale the picture by specifying the size of the picture as values of device addresses.
Width:

Specifies the word device that is the width of the picture.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Height: Specifies the word device that is the height of the picture.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: A device address for the width is D100 and a device address for the height is D101.
The picture is displayed with its size scaled to the values of D100 and D101.
Value of
Width Device Address D100
Value of
Height Device Address D101

180

360

720

120

240

480

180
120
Size of picture to display

360

720

240
480

The top layer cannot be set when the Dynamic Size check box is selected.
*1 Advanced mode only

9-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display■ Dynamic Rotation
Select this check box to rotate and display a picture.
Edit:

Configures details for rotating and displaying a picture.
Click this button to display the Dynamic Rotation dialog box. For details, refer to “Dynamic Rotation
Dialog Box” on page 9-64.
Only the top layer is valid if the picture is NMF (NV Metafile).

When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.
When moving and scaling pictures, set the values of device addresses so the picture is not moved or scaled
outside the screen's display area.

9
Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-63

3 Picture Display
Dynamic Rotation Dialog Box
Configures details for rotating and displaying a picture.

The center of picture

X

MinimumStart angle of rotation

Y

Rotation angle

Maximum
End angle of rotation

Center Point (X Point, Y Point)
Pivot point of rotation■ Source Device Address
Specifies the word device to be read that holds the value of the rotation angle of the picture.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Data Type
Selects the type of data that will be used to rotate the picture.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Use Custom Settings
Select this check box to configure the range of values to read from the Source Device Address, the range of therotation angle, the coordinate point of the center point that will serve as the pivot point for rotation.
When this check box is cleared, rotate the picture with the minimum value is 0, the maximum value is a fixed value
specified in the Maximum under the Range of Value, and the Range of Angle to rotate is 0 to 360 degrees.

9-64

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display■ Range of Value
Configures the range of values to read from the Source Device Address with a fixed value or a value of device
address.
Converts the read value to the specified angle range, and then rotate the picture.
This option can only be configured when the Use Custom Settings check box is selected. When the Use Custom
Settings check box is cleared. only the Maximum can be specified with a fixed value.
Value:

Specifies the range of values to read from the Source Device Address as a constant.

Device Address:

Specifies the range of values to read from the Source Device Address as a value of word device.

Specifies the range of values that corresponds to the range of angle.
Minimum, Maximum: Specifies the minimum and maximum values.
If Value is selected, the minimum and maximum values that can be specified will depend on
the data type selected by Data Type. For details about data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
If Device Address is selected, specify the word device to be read. Clickto display the Tag
Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
When the Minimum is bigger than the Maximum, the picture is not rotated.

Value:

Specifies the range of angle for rotation as a constant.

Device Address:

Specifies the range of angle for rotation as a value of word device.

Specifies the range of angle for rotation.
Start, End:

Specifies the start angle of rotation (-360° to 360°) and the end angle of rotation (-360° to360°).
If Value is selected, the start and end angles that can be specified will depend on the data
type selected by Data Type. For details about data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.
If Device Address is selected, specify the word device to be read. Clickto display the Tag
Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

The direction of rotation is as follows.
Start angle < End angle: Clockwise
Start angle > End angle: Counterclockwise

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-65

9Data Displays■ Range of Angle
Configures the range of the rotation angle with a fixed value or a value of device address. This option can only be
configured when the Use Custom Settings check box is selected.

3 Picture Display■ Center Point
Configures the coordinate point of the center point that will serve as the pivot point for rotation with a fixed value ora value of device address. This option can only be configured when the Use Custom Settings check box is selected.
Value:

Specifies the coordinate point of the center point that will serve as the pivot point for rotation
as a constant.
Specify from Picture: Click this button to display the Specify from Picture dialog box. You canspecify the coordinates of the center point using the preview that you
actually rotate a picture. For details, refer to “Specify from Picture dialog
box” on page 9-67. This option can only be configured when Value isselected.

Device Address:

Specifies the coordinate point of the center point that will serve as the pivot point for rotation
as a value of word device.

Specifies the coordinate point of the center point that will serve as the pivot point for rotation. The center point isrelative coordinate point with the center of picture as the origin.
X, Y:

Specifies the X Point (-32,768 to 32,767) and the Y Point (-32,768 to 32,767).
If Value is selected, the coordinate points that can be specified will depend on the data type selected by
Data Type. For details about data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
If Device Address is selected, specify the word device to be read. Clickto display the Tag Editor. For
the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
• Coordinate points outside the screen's display area can also be specified as the pivot point of rotation.
• If the size of both the width and height of the pictures is odd, the center of picture is the origin.
If the width is even, the left side of the center of picture is the origin. If the height is even, the top side of
the center of picture is the origin.
Center of pictureis origin

Width: Odd
Height: Odd

Left side ofcenter of
picture is origin

Width: Even
Height: Odd

Top side ofcenter of
picture is origin

Width: Odd
Height: Even

Top-left side ofcenter of
picture is origin

Width: Even
Height: Even

Example: The source device address is D100, the minimum value is 0, the maximum value is 100, the start angle ofrotation is 0°, the end angle of rotation is 90°, the X coordinate point of the center point is 0, and the Y
coordinate point of the center point is 500.
The picture will rotate according to the value of D100 as shown below.
Source Device Address

0

50

100

D100 value

0 (0˚)

0 (0˚)

0 (0˚)

Position of picture to display

100

(90˚)

100

(90˚)

100

(90˚)

( 0, 500)• When the picture is switched after being rotated, the picture after being switched will also be displayed withthe same settings and in the same rotated state.
• When a picture is rotated and displayed on a popup screen, the portion of the picture that extends past the
popup screen will not be displayed.
• If the drawing position of the picture changes due to changing the angle or pivot point, parts placed
underneath the picture will be displayed partially missing on the base screen and popup screen. Parts on the
top layer will be fully displayed.

9-66

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display
Specify from Picture dialog box

Center Point

Point

To specify the center point that will serve as the pivot point for rotation, perform one of the following operations. For
the coordinates, the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate of the center point are displayed with the center of the picture as
the origin.
• Double-click on the displayed picture.
• Select and drag the mark indicating the center point or move with the cursor key.

9
Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-67

3 Picture Display● View Tab(Pic number - File name)■ Settings
Registers the pictures to display on the Picture Display.
(Pic number - File name): Registers the pictures to display.
Double clicking the cell displays the Picture Manager where you can specify the picture.
The picture number (Pic number) and the file name of the registered picture are displayed.
Remove:Deletes the registered picture from the list.

Up:

Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
When switching between OFF and ON states of a part with a registration image that uses transparent color,the image may appear overlapped. To avoid this, please place the part in the top layer.

■ Image
Displays picture for the Pic number that has been selected in the Picture List.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
Y

9-68

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

ScreenParts

3 Picture Display■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

2 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

2 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeightParts

9
Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-69

3 Picture Display● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The Picture Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
Select the operation when the condition is not satisfied as Not update Picture data or Not show Picture Display
under While not satisfying the condition.
Example:Trigger Type is While ON, Device Address is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is
Not show Picture Display.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Picture Display does not display the picture.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Picture Display displays the picture.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide
pictureLM0: 1Show
picture■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Picture Display from the following.
Always visible: The Picture Display is always enabled.
Data

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateDisplay

9-70

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

While ON:

Enables the Picture Display when the value of device address is 1.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data.
Data

Value of
Device Address

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Do not update

UpdateDo not update

UpdateUpdateUpdateDo not update

10

Display

While OFF:

Enables the Picture Display when the value of device address is 0.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data.
Data

Value of
Device Address

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

UpdateDo not update

UpdateDo not update

Do not update

Do not update

Update10

Display

9
Data Displays

While satisfying the condition: Enables the Picture Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data.
Data

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Pic1

Pic2

Pic0

Do not update

UpdateDo not update

UpdateUpdateUpdateDo not update

Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Display■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. Maximum number is 80 characters.
■ While not satisfying the condition
Selects operation of parts when condition is not satisfied.
Not update Picture data: The last updated graphic is displayed. The graphic does not change.
Not show Picture Display: Graphic is not displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-71

3 Picture Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-72

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9
Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-73

3 Picture Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Picture Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

9-74

Main unit

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

3 Picture Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: when mousing over the Picture Display on the editing screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-75

3 Picture Display

3.4

Picture Display Usage Examples● Rotating and Displaying a PictureThis example shows rotating and displaying a picture by the values of device addresses.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Picture Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Picture Display.
3 Double-click the placed Picture Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

4 Click the View tab.

9-76

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

5 Registers the pictures to display on the Picture List.
Double click "pic0-Unregistered".
Picture Manager is displayed.

9
Data Displays

6 Click Import.
Open dialog box is displayed.

7 Specify the image file, and then click Open.
The picture is saved in Picture Manager.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-77

3 Picture Display

8 Specify the image file, and then click Select.
The picture is saved in Settings.

9 Repeat steps 5 through 8 and register all pictures for switching.

9-78

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Picture Display

10 Click the General tab.

9

11 Select the Dynamic Rotation check box, and then click Edit.

Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-79

3 Picture Display

12 In Source Device Address, specify the word device to be read that holds the value to rotate and display
the picture.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

13 With Data Type, select the data type of the value.

Select the type of data that will be used to rotate and display the picture.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

14 Specify the maximum of the value to read from the Source Device Address in the Maximum under theRange of Value.
Rotate the picture with the minimum value is 0 and the Range of Angle to rotate is 0 to 360 degrees.

15 Click OK.

The Dynamic Rotation dialog box closes.

16 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and click the OK button.

The Properties of Picture Display dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the settings to rotate and display the Picture Display.

9-80

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Video Display

4

Video Display
This function is only supported by models that are equipped with a video interface.
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

How the Video Display is Used
• Play movie files
Main unit
SD memory card
Play

Play

Stop

Back

Next

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V

Movie Files(AVI format)*1(MP4 format)*2

HG4G HG3G

Movie File List
(MOVIE.LST)

9
Data Displays• Display video camera images on the main unit and output microphone audio*3 from a connected speaker
Main unit
Video Camera
ImagesAudio*3
Play

Stop

Back

Next

Microphone
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V
HG4G HG3G• Display images of two video cameras on the main unit*1
Main unit
Video Camera
ImagesChannel 1
Play

Stop

Back

Next

CH1

Play

Stop

Back

Next

CH2

Audio
Channel 2
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V*1 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*2 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.
*3 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-81

4 Video Display• Using multiple Video Displays is as follows.
- HG5G/4G/3G-V
The maximum number of the Video Display that can be arranged on a single screen is two, you cannot
arrange three or more Video Displays on a single screen including overlay.
Two Video Displays can display image from video input at the same time, but can not display movie fileat the same time. However, even while playing a movie file on the Video Display, the video from thevideo input can be displayed on another Video Display.
- HG4G/3G
The maximum number of the Video Display that can be arranged on a single screen is 1. When two or
more Video Displays are displayed on the screen including overlay, only the Video Display that was
displayed first will operate.
Example: If the Popup Screen with a Video Display is opened from the Base Screen which also contains a Video Display, only the Video Display on the Base Screen will operate.
Main unit

Base screen
Video Display

Play

Operational

Play

Stop

Back

Stop

Popup screen
Video Display

Back

Next

Non-operational

Next

HG4G HG3G• If a portion of the Video Display is outside the display area of the screen, the Video Display will not
display anything. If a Video Display on a popup screen is moved outside the display area of the screen,
the movie playback and displayed video will stop.
• Depending on the size of the Video Display, the displayed image may be shrunk.
• When the frame size of the movie file to be played is less than or equal to half the size of the Video
Display, the movie file cannot be played.
• Images from the video input will not be displayed when the size of Video Display is smaller than thefollowing sizes:
Input Signal

HG5G/4G/3G-V

HG4G/3G

NTSC

368 x 240 dots

90 x 60 dots

PAL

368 x 288 dots

90 x 72 dots

• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function, while data is being
recorded with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function, or
while data is being saved to the external memory device, movie files cannot be played. While data isrecording after an event occurs and while data is being saved to the external memory device, the valueof HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
• Video Display can be operated using the Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, and Multi-Commands.
• The Volume adjustment and mute are configured in the Sound Settings dialog box. For details, refer to
Chapter 22 “Change Volume Level” on page 22-8 and Chapter 22 “Enable Mute” on page 22-8.

9-82

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Video Display

4.2

Video Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Video Display.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Video Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display.
3 Double-click the placed Video Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Options tab only appears in Advanced Mode.
You can set the default for the Video Display on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-83

4 Video Display

4.3

Properties of Video Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. Maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action
Select the content to execute on the Video Display from the following.
Display images from the Video Input:

Displays images from the video interface and outputs sound*1 from the audio
interface.
(Channel)*2:

Selects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to display one of the images
from the video interface.

Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen:
Selects and plays files using the File Screen. For details, refer to “4.4 File
Screen” on page 9-92.
Play the Movie File List:

Plays movie files in order of ID number on the movie file list.
It is a list of movie files that have been registered in the Multimedia Function
settings. You cannot change the order when you play files. For details, refer
to Chapter 23 “Multimedia Function” on page 23-1.
Default ID:

Pressing the play button specifies the ID number (1 to 64) of
the movie file to be played.
Clicking
displays the Multimedia Settings dialog box.
Select an ID number from the movie file list.

*1 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G-V only

9-84

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Video Display

Play the specified movie:

Plays movie files by the order of the ID number.
Selects files to be played from the movie file list and then creates a list of files
to be played.
This can be set only when Play the specified movie is selected.
ID:

Displays the movie file list ID.

File Path:

Displays the file path of the movie file.

Add:

Adds a movie file (1 to 8) to the list.
Clicking this button opens the movie file list. Specify files using
the movie file list.

Delete:Deletes files from the list.
Select a file from the list and then click this button. Movie files
deleted from the playlist will not be deleted from the movie file
list.

Up:

Shifts a selected file upward on this list.

Down:

Shifts a selected file downward on this list.

■ Show and Play
Set Video Display's display setting and playback setting.
Full Screen:

The entire screen of the main unit is used as the display area of images and movie files.
Select the check box to start with a display or playback on fullscreen when the Video Display is displayed.

Change by the value of Device Address: Select the check box and specify the bit number of a bit
device or word device if you want to switch between display
in full screen or not using the value of a device address.
Full screen is displayed when the value of a device address ischanged from 0 to 1. Full screen ends when the value ischanged from 1 to 0.
Full screen can be ended with a Key Button (Restore). When the full screen ends with the Key Button, thevalue of a device address set by the Change by the value of Device Address check box remains 1.
No Audio:

Select this to play movie files without sound.

Repeat:Select this to repeat playback of a movie file.
This can only be set when Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen, Play the Movie
File List, or Play the specified movie is selected in Action.

Autoplay:

Select this to automatically play movies when a Video Display is shown on the screen. When Display
images from the Video Input is selected for Action, movie files are always automatically played.
However, while data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function, whiledata is being recorded with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with therecording function, or while data is being saved to the external memory device, movie files are notautomatically played when the Video Display is shown on the screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-85

9Data Displays

Set Default to Full Screen:4 Video Display● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange

9-86

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Video Display■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the button.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.

Buttons

Buttons can be set only when Key Buttons are grouped together.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.

9

The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

Data Displays

X:

X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Display
Buttons

When grouped with a button, the coordinate of the top-left corner of the display part becomes the display
position.
■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeightDisplay
Buttons

The grouped parts size is calculated using the size and coordinate of each part that makes up the groupedparts.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-87

4 Video Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-88

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Video Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-89

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

4 Video Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Full

Restore

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Restore RepeatOFF
FF

Next
Play

Line Chart and Bar Chart

Video Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

Full

Restore

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

Restore RepeatOFF
FF

Next
Play

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the Video
Display cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Full

Restore

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

FF

130

Password

Next
Play

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

p CLR

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

l CAN

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m
Full

ENT
RestoreRestore RepeatOFF

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

FF

Next
Play

Full

Restore

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

Restore RepeatOFF
FF

Next
Play

Video Display

Video Display
Cannot operate
For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

9-90

130

▲ ▼

User3

Restore RepeatOFF

Main unit

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

4 Video Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Video Display on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-91

4 Video Display

4.4

File Screen
With the File Screen, movie files can be selected from an SD memory card and then played on a Video Display.
When Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen has been selected in Action for the Video Display,movie files can be selected with the File Screen and then played. Action is set in the General tab of the Video
Display properties dialog box.

● File Screen Configuration
Title Bar

Move Buon(Drive)(Folder)

File Screen
Page No.: 1
DRIVE: SD Card
\HGDATA01\RECORD\20110313
File Name
120000.avi(File List)(Modiﬁed Date)

Folder Up

Size
512,000,000

121500.avi

512,000,000

123000.avi

512,000,000

124500.avi

512,000,000
512,000,000

130000.avi(File Name)

Close Buon

123000.avi

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

Select■ Title Bar
Displays the Title,(Move) button, and(Close) button.

(Move) button: Moves the File Screen.
(Close) button: Closes the File Screen.
■ (Drive)
Displays the selected drive. Displays as SD Card.
■ (Folder)
Displays the folder path of the currently selected folder.
• When the folder path exceeds 36 characters, up to 35 characters will be displayed.
• Once the File Screen is opened, the “RECORD” folder in the External Memory Device folder will be
displayed. If the “RECORD” folder does not exist, the External Memory Device folder will be displayed.
■ Page No.
Displays the current page number.
■ Folder Up button
Moves to a folder that is 1 level higher in the hierarchy.

9-92

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Video Display■ (File List)
File Name: Displays a list of the files and folders in the currently selected folder.
Size:

For files, this displays the file size (bytes).
For folders, this is displayed as Folder.
File names should be alphanumeric characters only.
Movie files that meet the following specifications can be played with the main unit:
HG5G/4G/3G-V: AVI file (.avi)
HG4G/3G:MP4 file (.mp4)
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.6 Available Movie Files” on page 2-37.

■ (File Name)
Displays the file name of the selected file. The maximum number for the file name is 120 characters.
■ (Modified Date)
Displays the updated date and time.
■ Update
Updates to the newest file list state.
■Moves the focus up by one level.

9
Data Displays■Moves the focus down by one level.
■ Page Up
Moves up by one page.
■ Page Down
Moves down by one page.
■ Select
Selects the file or folder that is in focus.
If a folder has been selected, this will open the folder and display its contents.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-93

4 Video Display● Select a Movie File
Display the File Screen on the Base Screen and select a movie file from a Memory Card.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button or Multi-Button that has been set to Open File Screen or execute the Goto Screen
Command or Multi-Command.
The File Screen will be displayed.

2 Select the movie file to be played.

Example: The movie file “123000.avi” in the “20110313” folder of the “RECORD” folder located in the External
Memory Device folder “HGDATA01” is selected:
1. Press  to select “HGDATA01” and then press Select.
The contents of the “HGDATA01” folder will be displayed.
File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card

Page No.: 1File nameSize

HGDATA00

FolderHGDATA01

FolderHGDATA02

FolderFolder Up000

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

Select2

2. Press  to select “RECORD” and then press Select.
The contents of the “RECORD” folder will be displayed.
File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card
\HGDATA01

Page No.: 1File name

Size

MOVIE

Folder

NVDATA

FolderRECORD

FolderSOUND

FolderFolder Up

play.lst

3

ABC.mp4

300,000

DEF.mp4

7,654,321000Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

9-94

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Select2

4 Video Display
3. Press  to select “20110313” and then press Select.
The contents of the “20110313” folder will be displayed.
File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card
\HGDATA01\RECORD

Page No.: 1File nameSize20110312

Folder20110313

Folder20110314

Folder20110315

FolderFolder Up

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

Select2

4. Press  to select “123000.avi” and then press Select.
The movie file will be selected and the File Screen will close.
When you press a key button or a Multi-Button configured with the play key, or when you execute a MultiCommand, the movie file plays.

File name120000.avi

Data Displays

File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card
Page No.: 1\HGDATA01\RECORD\20110313

9

Folder Up

Size
512,000,000

121500.avi

512,000,000

123000.avi

512,000,000

124500.avi

512,000,000
512,000,000

130000.avi

123000.avi

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Select2

9-95

5 Message Display

5

Message Display
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

5.1

How the Message Display is Used
The Message Display is used to constantly display messages registered in advance and to display text read fromvalues of word devices as character codes.
The Message Display can perform the following functions.
• Display messages
Main unit

Goal reached• Display text according to values of device addresses
Main unit
External device
D100 : ‘1’ ‘2’ 3132(Hex)Message details

Goal 1234K

D101 : ‘3’ ‘4’ 3334(Hex)

Goal

\

Always show

D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)Show according tovalues of device addresses

D100 : ‘5’ ‘6’ 3536(Hex)

Goal 5678K

D101 : ‘7’ ‘8’ 3738(Hex)
D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)

D100 : (NULL) ‘1’ 0031(Hex)Goal

D101 : ‘2’ ‘3’ 3233(Hex)
D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)Value of
Source Device Address

D100‘1’ ‘2’3132(Hex)‘5’ ‘6’3536(Hex)(NULL) ‘1’0031(Hex)

D101‘3’ ‘4’3334(Hex)‘7’ ‘8’3738(Hex)‘2’ ‘3’3233(Hex)

D102‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)(NULL) 4B00(Hex)‘K’‘M’‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)

Goal

Goal 5678K

Goal

Display

Action

9-96

1234K

Display always shown text and text shown

Display always shown text and text shown

Display only always shown text

according to values of device addresses

according to values of device addresses

Do not show if upper byte of the source device
address starting address number is 00 (NULL)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display• Scroll messages
Main unit
Message details

Line ALine A : 1234K pcs.

Line B : 5678K pcs.

A : 1234K pcs.

pcs.

Line B

9
Data Displays

8K pcs.

• Change the message and plate color according to a value of device address
Main unit
External device
Upper byte Lower byte

Upper byte Lower byte

HG SERIES

D0：0 x F 7 0 x 0 0

D0：0 x F 7 0 x 0 0
Plate color Text color

Upper byte Lower byte
Upper byte Lower byte

HG SERIES

D0：0 x F 7 0 x 9 0

D0：0 x F 7 0 x 9 0
Plate color Text color

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-97

5 Message Display

5.2

Message Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Message Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Message Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Message Display.
3 Double-click the placed Message Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Message Display on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

9-98

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display

5.3

Properties of Message Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab

9
Data Displays■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
To read values of word devices as character codes with text registered in Text Manager and display it astext, enter “\@” (1 to 8) in Text for the Text ID at the position to display the value of device address as
text. The channels configured under Data are allocated in order from the first “\@”. The text is displayed
according to the values of device addresses in order from the first reference device address.
However, in the following situations “\@” is not handled as text to display according to values of device
addresses and is displayed unchanged.
• When Font is Windows for Text ID configured in Text Manager• When the number of “\@” configured in Text for Text ID is greater than the number of channels
configured with device addresses(Text for the character codes corresponding to the values of device addresses is only displayed for thenumber of channels in order from the beginning.)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-99

5 Message Display■ Message
Enter the text to display. The maximum number is 610 characters. You can enter multi-line messages by inserting a
newline. To configure text to display according to values of device addresses, enter “\@” (1 to 8) at the location toread the values of word devices as character codes and display them as text. The channels configured under Data
are allocated in order from the first “\@”. The text is displayed according to the values of device addresses in orderfrom the first reference device address.
Example: The device configured in Ch1 is allocated to the first “\@”. The device address configured in Ch2 is allocatedto the second “\@”.
Goal

\

Ch1

Now

\

Ch2

Always show Show according to values of device addresses

The characters that can be entered vary based on to the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer
to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
To display the backslash (\), enter a backslash (\) before the backslash (\).
Example:\\■ DataThese options are used to register or edit the device addresses with values to read as character codes.
(Settings):

Lists the settings for the text to display according to values of device addresses.
No.:
Device Address:

Shows the channel numbers (Ch1 to Ch8).
Specifies the word device that stores the values read as character codes.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Set the value of device address to the character codes for the language used. For
details, refer to Chapter 2 “Character Code Table” on page 2-16.

Words:

Specifies the number of words for the length of the text to display (1 to 64).
Double clicking the cell allows you to change the Words.
Values of device addresses for the configured amount of words are read as charactercodes starting from the device address set by Device Address. 2 single-bytecharacters can be displayed by 1 word.

Remove:Deletes the registered settings from the list.

Up:

Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
You can register the settings from arbitrary numbers, they are aligned filled from the beginning after clicking
OK on the dialog box. Therefore, when the Properties dialog box is closed and reopened, the list isdisplayed filled from the beginning.

9-100

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.

9

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.

None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed. Only the text is displayed.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
FlangeWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-101

Data Displays

Standard:

5 Message Display■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Screen
HG SERIESParts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight9-102

HG SERIESWindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

5 Message Display● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.

■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
This option can only be configured when the Vertical Writing check box and the Scroll check box are cleared.
■ Character Spacing*2
Specifies the character spacing (-127 to 127) between displayed characters.
This option can only be configured when the Vertical Writing check box is selected and the Scroll check box iscleared.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 150

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-103

9
Data Displays

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Stroke*1
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-6.

5 Message Display■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left, Left-Right
If Top, Center or Bottom is selected for Align Text Vertical, Center or Right can be set as this option.
If Center-Top is selected for Align Text Vertical, Center-Left or Left-Right can be set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom, Center-Top
Set to Center when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box when displaying text vertically.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicablefor Windows supports East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are leftaligned.
Aligned tole edge• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters• When using text displayed according to values of device addresses, the characters are counted as singlebyte characters and the display area for the characters is indicated by dotted lines. Therefore, when the
text to display according to values of device addresses is double-byte characters, the display area
actually required differs from the area indicated by the dotted lines.
Example: 1 word of text to display according to values of device addresses is set to vertical writing, thevertical size of the dotted lines is displayed as 2 single-byte characters.
2 single-byte chars. 1 double-byte char.
Dotted line frame is
2 chars. High

9-104

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display■ Align Text depending on the length of the displayed message*3
Select this check box to align text as standard to the number of characters that will be displayed.
This option is only displayed when the Align the text area (Character Input/Message Display/Numerical
Input/Numerical Display) check box is selected in the Project Settings dialog box, on the Compatible tab.
When cleared, the maximum number of characters (set number of words) is always aligned as standard.
Example: There are 2 characters of text to always display on the first line, 6 characters of text to always display on
the second line and 6 characters of text (3 words) to display according to values of device addresses, Align
Text Horizontal is set to Center, and the text to display according to values of device addresses is blank(when only 6 characters are always displayed on the second line).
Check box: Selected
1st line text :2nd line text :

AB

Blank

Check box: Cleared

AB
AB CDEF

AB CDEFAB
AB CDEF

Always show Show according tovalues of devices
Characters to show

Maximum characters■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

9■ Scroll*3
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.

Speed (1: Fastest):

Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.

Start scrolling after displaying message: Select this check box to start scrolling after a message is displayed for 2
seconds.
This check box is cleared.
Start scrollinga message.

This check box is selected.

Voltage abnormal

Display a message
and align left.

Vo

oltage abnormal

After 2 seconds,
start scrolling it.

Volltage abnormalV• When the Scroll check box is selected, the number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen
decreases. If the main unit displays an error message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the numberof parts on the screen.
• When the scan time for the screen becomes longer, and when the part that has its Scroll check box
selected is placed on the top layer, the scrolling speed may become slow.
• If you place other parts overlapping with data display that have the Scroll check box selected on thebase screen or popup screen, the overlapping parts' display remains when scrolling. When overlapping
other parts with data display that have the Scroll check box selected, please place the other parts in the
top layer.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the text displayed according to values of device addresses, the text color, or the displayed text
changes, the message is scrolled top the beginning.
*3 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-105

Data Displays

This option can only be configured when the Flash check box is cleared and Standard is selected for Image Typeon the View tab.

5 Message Display■ Change Display Colors*3
To switch the text and plate colors, select this check box and select the method to the display colors from thefollowing.
Specify Color:

Switches the text and plate to the specified colors.
External device

Trigger Device Address

Main unit0

Text Color

HG SERIES

Trigger Device Address

1

Plate Color on the View tab

Text Color under Specify Color

HG SERIES

Plate Color under Specify Color

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to use as the trigger to switch
the text and plate colors.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the value of device address is 0, the color specified in Text Color or in Plate Coloron the View tab will be displayed.
When the value of device address is 1, the color displayed and specified in Text Color or
Plate Color under the Specify Color.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of the text when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View
tab.

*3 Advanced mode only

9-106

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display

Specify Color by Device Address:

Specifies the text and plate colors by the value of the device address.
External device

Main unit

Device Address

Upper byte Lower byte

Upper byte Lower byte

HG SERIES

D0= 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0

D0 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0
Plate color Text color

Upper byte Lower byte
Upper byte Lower byte

HG SERIES

D0= 0 x 1 6 0 x 1 4

D0 0 x 1 6 0 x 1 4
Plate color Text color

Device Address:

Specify the word device that stores the color data for the text or plate.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This uses address number+1 to specify the text and plate colors when the Flash check box has
been selected.
Color data assignments that are stored to device addresses are given below.
bit15

Device Address

Upper byte

Device Address+1

9

bit
0

Lower byte

Data Displays

Plate color

bit bit
8 7

Text color

Plate color when flashing Text color when flashing

Upper byte Lower byte

0x16 0x14

Device Address

HG SERIES

Plate color Text color

Flashing

Upper byte Lower byte

HG SERIES

Device Address+1

0x23 0xF7

Plate color Text color
when flashing when flashing

For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number” on page A-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-107

5 Message Display■ Flash*3
Select this check box to make the text and plate colors flash.
The flashing will occur as follows:• The Change Display Colors check box is cleared, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on
the View tab and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device

Main unit
Text Color

HG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing

Plate Color on
the View tab

HG SERIESHG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected, Specify Color is selected and the value of the trigger device
address for Specify Color is 0, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on the View tab and thecolors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address underSpecify Color

Main unit0

Text Color

HG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing
Trigger device address underSpecify Color

0

Plate Color on
the View tab

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected, Specify Color is selected and the value of the trigger device
address for Specify Color is 1, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Specify Colorand the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address underSpecify Color

1

Trigger device address
under Flash0

Trigger device address underSpecify Color

1

Main unit
Text Color under Specify Color

HG SERIES

Plate Color under Specify Color

Text Color underSpecify Color

Flashing

Plate Color underSpecify Color

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash*3 Advanced mode only

9-108

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display• The Change Display Colors check box is selected, Specify Color by Device Address is selected, then thecolors that correspond to the values stored in the device addresses for Specify Color by Device Address andthis device address number+1 are alternately displayed.
Upper byte Lower byte

Device Address forSpecify Color by Device Address D0= 0 x 1 6 0 x 1 4
Device Address+1 D1= 0 x 2 3 0 x F 7External device

Main unit

Upper byte

Lower byte

D0 0 x 1 6 0 x 1 4
Trigger device
Trigger device address
under FlashHG SERIES

0

Plate color Text color

Flashing

HG SERIES

1
Trigger device address
under FlashHG SERIESHG SERIES
Upper byte

Lower byte

D1 0 x 2 3 0 x F 7

9Plate color Text color
when flashing when flashingClick
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of text when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when the Change Display Colors check box is clearedor selected and Specify Color is selected.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when the Change Display Colors check box is cleared,or the check box and Specify Color are selected, and Standard is selected for Image
Type on the View tab.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-109

Data Displays

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that will be used to trigger
flash.

5 Message Display● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The Message Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
Select the operation when disabled as Not display message or Not show Message Display under While notsatisfying the condition.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON, Device Address is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is Not
display message.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Message Display does not display the message.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Message Display displays the message.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

Hide

LM0: 0LM0: 1Show
HG SERIES■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Message Display from the following.
Always visible: The Message Display is always enabled.
HG SERIES

Message Display
state

Always show message

9-110

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display

While ON:

Enables the Message Display when the value of device address is 1.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
1
Value of
Device Address

0
HG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIES

Show
messageShow
messageShow
message

Message Display
state

While OFF:Hide
messageShow
messageHidemessageHidemessage

Enables the Message Display when the value of device address is 0.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
1
Value of
Device Address

0
HG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIES

Message
Switching Display
state

Show
messageHidemessageShow
messageHidemessageHidemessageHidemessageShow
message

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Message Display when the condition is satisfied.

9

Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.

Not satisfied
HG SERIES

Message Display
state

Hide
messageShow
message

HG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIES

Show
messageShow
messageShow
messageHidemessageHidemessage■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. Maximum number is 80 characters.
■ While not satisfying the condition
Selects the operation of the part when the condition is not satisfied.
Not display message:

The plate and flange are displayed, but the message is not displayed.

Not show Message Display:

Hides the Message Display.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-111

Data Displays

Satisfied

Condition

5 Message Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-112

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Message Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-113

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

5 Message Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
HG SERIESLine Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Message Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

9-114

Main unit

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR

HG SERIES

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

5 Message Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Message Display on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-115

5 Message Display

5.4

String Data Storage Method
The values of device addresses read as character codes are stored in the upper byte and lower byte of words
according to the Storage Method of String Data setting. Storage Method of String Data is configured on the
System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 System Tab” on page 4-26.
Example: Reference Device Addresses are D100 = 3132 (Hex), D101 = 3334 (Hex), and D102 = 3500 (Hex).
• from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data.
Device address
D100
D101
D102

Upper byte
31 (Hex)
33 (Hex)
35 (Hex)Stored value
Lower byte
32 (Hex)
34 (Hex)0

Displayed string
12
34
5

NULL terminating character• from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data.
Device address
D100
D101
D102

Stored value
Upper byte
Lower byte
32 (Hex)
31 (Hex)
34 (Hex)
33 (Hex)035 (Hex)
NULL terminating character

Displayed string
21
43

When handling values of device addresses as charactercodes, 0 is handled as the NULL terminating characterto end the string. Therefore, when the upper byte is 0,
nothing is displayed.

• When handling values of device addresses as character codes, 0 is handled as the NULL terminating
character to end the string. Therefore, when the upper byte is 0, nothing is displayed.
• To display only a single character, set the lower byte to 0.
Example: To display a single-byte 7
‘7’

9-116

3700(Hex)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display

6

Message Switching Display
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

6.1

How the Message Switching Display is Used
The Message Switching Display is used to switch the displayed message according to the value of a word device.
• Specifies the message number with values of device addresses.
External device

Main unit

Drying

D0=

No.

Message

Msg0

DryingMsg1 Heating

0

Msg2

CoolingHeating

1

D0=

2

9
Data Displays

D0=

Cooling• Specifies the message number with the bit number of the device address.
Main unit
External device
bit3

bit3

bit0

DryingNo.

Message

Msg0

Drying

Msg1

Heating

Msg2

Cooling

bit0

D0= 0010

bit3

bit3

D0

bit0

D0= 0001

bit15

Heating

bit0

D0= 0100

Cooling

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-117

6 Message Switching Display• Specifies the Text ID with values of device addresses.
External device

D0=

9-118

1

D0=

2

D0=

3

Main unit

DryingHeating

Cooling

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Text ID
1

Message2

Heating3

CoolingDrying

6 Message Switching Display

6.2

Message Switching Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Message Switching Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Message Switching Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Message Switching Display.
3 Double-click the placed Message Switching Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Message Switching Display on the Default Preferences tab of the
WindO/I-NV4 Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-119

6 Message Switching Display

6.3

Properties of Message Switching Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Message to Display
Selects the method for switching message to display from the following.
Specify by Msg Number:
Switches the message to display according to the value of a device address. Messages are registered in Settings
on the Message tab.
Example: When Specify by Msg Number is selected, the device address is D0, and the settings on the
Message tab are as follows:No.

Message

Msg0

Drying

Msg1

Heating

Msg2

Cooling

Switches the message to display according to the value of the device address.
Value of
Device Address D0

0

1

2

Message to display

DryingHeating

Cooling

Display Msg0

Display Msg1

Display Msg2

Action3

No message

If the value of device address is a Msg number forwhich no message is set, no message is displayed.

9-120

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display

Specify by Bit Number:
Switches the message to display according to the status of bits in a device address. Messages are registered in
Settings on the Message tab.
Example: Bit Number is selected and the bits of trigger device address D0 are allocated to the following
messages.
bit15

bit3

bit0

Device address D0
No.

Message

Msg0

Drying

Msg1

Heating

Msg2

Cooling

Switches the message to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display the message
for the lowest order bit that is set to 1.
Bit state of0000

Device Address D0

Message to display

ActionNo message

0001

0010

0100

0110

DryingHeating

CoolingHeating

Display Msg0

Display Msg1

Display Msg2

Display Msg1

9Specify by Text ID:
Displays a message according to the value of the device address that corresponds to the Text Manager ID number(1 to 32000). Messages are registered in Text Manager.
Example: When Specify by Text ID is selected, the device address is D0, and the settings on the Text Manager
are as follows:
Text ID

Message1

Drying2

Heating3

Cooling

Switches the message to display according to the value of the device address.
Value of
Device Address D00

Message to display

ActionNo message

1

2

3

DryingHeating

Cooling

Display Text ID: 1

Display Text ID: 2

Display Text ID: 3

If the value of device address isan out of range ID number, no
message is displayed.

4

No message

If the value of device address is an
ID number for which no message is set,no message is displayed.

■ Device Address
Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching messages.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-121

Data Displays

If all bits in the device address are 0 or if a
bit with no associated message becomes 1,
no message is displayed.

6 Message Switching Display● Message Tab
The Message tab is only displayed when Specify by Msg Number or Specify by Bit Number is selected for
Message to Display on the General tab.

■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Settings
Edits the message settings.
No.:

Shows the message number (Msg number).
The number of messages that can be registered varies based on Message to Display on the
General tab.
Specify by Msg Number: Msg0 to Msg999
Specify by Bit Number: Msg0 to Msg15

Message:Enter the text to display.
Double clicking the cell allows to edit the Message. The maximum number is 3750 characters. You
can enter multi-line messages by inserting a newline.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For
details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
• To display the backslash (\), enter a backslash (\) before the backslash (\).
• A line feed is added with pressing and holding ALT and ENTER keys.

Change:Selects whether or not to configure Text and Plate per Msg number. For N, the colors are
configured by Text Color on the Format tab and Plate Color on the View tab.
Double clicking the cell toggles between Y as Yes and N as No.

Text:

Selects the text color for the messages when configuring the text color per Msg number (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the Text Color.

Plate:

Selects the plate color for the messages when configuring the plate color per Msg number(color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the Plate Color.

9-122

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.

9
Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-123

6 Message Switching Display● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.

None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed. Only the text is displayed.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange

9-124

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Screen
HG SERIESParts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

9

Screen
HG SERIESWindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

Data Displays

Height9-125

6 Message Switching Display● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Stroke*1
This option can only be configured when Specify by Msg Number or Specify by Bit Number is selected for
Message to Display on the General tab.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
This option can only be configured when the Vertical Writing check box and the Scroll check box are cleared.
■ Character Spacing*2
Specifies the character spacing (-127 to 127) between displayed characters.
This option can only be configured when the Vertical Writing check box is selected and the Scroll check box iscleared.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic

8 to 150

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke8 to 128■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

9-126

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left, Left-Right
If Top, Center or Bottom is selected for Align Text Vertical, Center or Right can be set as this option.
If Center-Top is selected for Align Text Vertical, Center-Left or Left-Right can be set as this option.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom, Center-Top
Set to Center when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box when displaying text vertically.
Can only be set when Font is set to Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicablefor Windows supports East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are leftaligned.
Aligned tole edge

Horizontal
display
Next
characters■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-127

Data Displays• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.

96 Message Switching Display■ Scroll*3
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View tab and the Flashcheck box is cleared.
Speed (1: Fastest):

Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.

Start scrolling after displaying message: Select this check box to start scrolling after a message is displayed for 2
seconds.
This check box is cleared.
Start scrollinga message.

This check box is selected.

Voltage abnormal

Display a message
and align left.

Vo

oltage abnormal

After 2 seconds,
start scrolling it.

Volltage abnormalV• When the Scroll check box is selected, the number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen
decreases. If the main unit displays an error message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the numberof parts on the screen.
• When the scan time for the screen becomes longer, and when the part that has its Scroll check box
selected is placed on the top layer, the scrolling speed may become slow.
• If you place other parts overlapping with data display that have the Scroll check box selected on thebase screen or popup screen, the overlapping parts' display remains when scrolling. When overlapping
other parts with data display that have the Scroll check box selected, please place the other parts in the
top layer.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the message is switched, the message is scrolled from the beginning.

*3 Advanced mode only

9-128

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display■ Change Display Colors*3
Select this check box to switch the text and plate colors.
External device
Trigger Device Address

Main unit0

Text Color

HG SERIES

Trigger Device Address

1

Plate Color on the View tab

Text Color under Change Display Colors

HG SERIES

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to use as the trigger to switch
the text and plate colors.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the value of device address is 0, the color specified in Text Color or in Plate Coloron the View tab will be displayed.

under the Change Display Colors.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of the text when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View
tab.

*3 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-129

9
Data Displays

When the value of device address is 1, the color displayed and specified in Text Color or
Plate Color6 Message Switching Display■ Flash*3
Select this check box to make the text and plate colors flash.
The flashing will occur as follows:• The Change Display Colors check box is cleared, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on
the View tab and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device

Main unit
Text Color

HG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing

Plate Color on
the View tab

HG SERIESHG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device address for Change
Display Colors is 0, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on the View tab and the colors
specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

Main unit0

Text Color

HG SERIES
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

0

Plate Color on
the View tab

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device address for Change
Display Colors is 1, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Change Display Colors
and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Trigger device address
under Flash0

Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Main unit
Text Color under Change Display Colors

HG SERIES

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Text Color under
Change Display Colors

Flashing

Plate Color under
Change Display Colors

HG SERIESHG SERIES

Trigger device address
under Flash1

HG SERIESText Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash*3 Advanced mode only

9-130

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that will be used to trigger
flash.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of text when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View
tab.

9Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-131

6 Message Switching Display● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Visible Condition
The Message Switching Display is displayed while the condition is satisfied. The Message Switching Display is hidden
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Message Switching Display is hidden.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Message Switching Display is displayed.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

9-132

Hide

LM0: 0LM0: 1Show
HG SERIESWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display

Trigger Type: Selects the condition to display the Message Switching Display from the following.
Always visible: The Message Switching Display is always displayed.

HG SERIES

Message
Switching Display
state

While ON:

Always show

Displays the Message Switching Display when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value of
Device Address
0
HG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIES

Show

Show

Message
Switching
Display state
Hide

While OFF:

Show

Hide

Hide

Displays the Message Switching Display when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value of9

Device Address
0
HG SERIESHG SERIES

Message
Switching
Display state
Show

Hide

Show

Hide

Hide

Show

While satisfying the condition:
Displays the Message Switching Display when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied
HG SERIESHG SERIESHG SERIES

Show

Show

Message
Switching Display
state

Hide

Data Type:

Show

Hide

Hide

Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Specifies the conditional expression for the visible condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

Comment:

Used for entering a comment for the visible condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-133

Data Displays

HG SERIES6 Message Switching Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-134

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Message Switching Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9

No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-135

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

6 Message Switching Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
HG SERIESLine Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Message Switching Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

9-136

Main unit

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR

HG SERIES

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

6 Message Switching Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Message Switching Display on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-137

7 Alarm List Display

7

Alarm List Display
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

7.1

How the Alarm List Display is Used
The Alarm List Display works with the Alarm Log function to display messages for active alarms and to display
multiple messages according to values of device addresses in a list.
• List currently active alarms out of the alarms configured in the Alarm Log settings
Message

D0-0 :
D0-1 :
D0-2 :
D0-3 :

Main unit
External device
Current fault

ID1

Current fault

ID2

Pump fault

ID3High pressure

ID4

Low air pressure

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

0

1

0

1

D0-0
Alarm occurred

D0-0

D0-1

Pump fault
Low air pressure

Pg. UpD0-1
Alarm occurred

Pg. Dwn01

D0-3
Alarm occurred

D0-3• Display multiple messages according to values of device addresses
Main unit
External device
bit3

bit15

bit0
Setting 1 : 100

D0=

0001

Pg. Up

bit3

bit0

D0

Pg. Dwn

Message
ID1 Setting 1 : 100
ID2 Setting 2 : 200
ID3 Setting 3 : 300

bit3

D0=

bit0

0111

Setting 1 : 100
Setting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. UpPg. Dwn• Only one Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display can be configured on a single screen.
• When the active alarm is displayed on the Alarm List Display, the message disappears from the list when
the alarm is recovered from regardless of the Lock/Unlock setting. To display the alarm message until it
can be checked, use the Alarm Log Display. Lock/Unlock is configured on the Channel tab in the
Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
• For the key buttons used with the Alarm List Display, refer to Chapter 7 “Alarm List Display” on page 7-97.
• The number of the message (channel when using the Alarm function) that has focus on the Alarm List
Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD50.
• The information about where on the list the message that has focus is displayed, out of all the messages
displayed on the Alarm List Display, is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD56.

9-138

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display

7.2

Alarm List Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Alarm List Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm List Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm List Display.
3 Double-click the placed Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Alarm List Display on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-139

7 Alarm List Display

7.3

Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Message Settings
Selects the method for switching message to display.
Use Alarm Log Settings:

Displays messages for the active alarms. The alarms are configured by the Alarm Log
settings.

New Message List:

Displays the messages registered in Text Manager according to the state of bits in thetrigger device address configured on the List tab.

Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

Alarm Log Settings:

Example: Use Alarm Log Settings is selected, the source device address (device address to monitor) configured by
the Alarm Log function is D0, and the following messages are allocated to the channels.
Message

D0-0 : ID1 Current fault
Source device address

D0-1 : ID2 Pump fault
D0-2 : ID3 High pressure
D0-3 : ID4 Low air pressure

The active alarm messages are displayed.
D0-0

1

0

1

1

0

Bit state of Source device address D0-1

0

1

0

1

0

D0-2

0

1

1

1

0

D0-3

0

0

1

1

0

Current fault
Pg. UpHigh pressure
Low air pressure

Pg. Dwn

Current fault
Pg. UpPump fault
High pressure
Low air pressure Pg. Dwn

Display ID1, ID3,
ID4

Display ID1, ID2,
ID3, ID4

Current fault

Pg. UpMessage to display
Pg. Dwn

Action

Display ID1

Pump fault
High pressure

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Display ID2, ID3

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

No message

If all bits in the device address are 0 or if a bit with noassociated message becomes 1, display nothing.

9-140

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display

Example: New Message List is selected and the bits of trigger device address D0 are allocated to the following
messages.
bit15

bit3

bit0

Trigger device address D0
Message
ID1

Setting 1 : 100

ID2

Setting 2 : 200

ID3

Setting 3 : 300

The messages are displayed according to the state of the bits.
0001

Bit state of Trigger device address D0

Message to display

0110

Setting 1 : 100

Pg. UpSetting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. Dwn

Display ID1

Action0111

0101

Setting 1 : 100
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. UpPg. UpPg. Dwn

Pg. Dwn

Display ID2, ID3

Display ID1, ID3

Setting 1 : 100
Setting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

0000

Pg. UpPg. UpPg. Dwn

Pg. Dwn

Display ID1, ID2,
ID3

No message

If all bits in the device address are 0 or if a bit with noassociated message becomes 1, display nothing.

9

List:

Data Displays■ Display Type
Selects whether or not to simultaneously display multiple messages.
Simultaneously displays multiple messages.
Bit state of Trigger device address D0

Message to display

Action0111

Setting 1 : 100
Setting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Display ID1, ID2,
ID3

Sort: Selects the display order when displaying multiple messages.
Old and New can only be configured when the Use Alarm Log Settings check box is selected.

One Line:

Ascending:

Sort from the smallest block number to the largest block number, and then fromthe smallest channel number or message number to the largest number.

Descending:

Sort from the smallest block number to the largest block number, and then fromthe largest channel number or message number to the smallest number.

Old:

Sorts the list in order from oldest to newest.

New:

Sorts the list in order from newest to oldest.

Display only one message.
When multiple bits are 1, the message for the lowest order bit is displayed. To check the messages ofother bits whose value is 1, switch the displayed message with the Page Up or Page Down keys for
the Key Button or the Key command of the Multi-Button and Multi-Command.
Bit state of Trigger device address D0

Message to display

0111

Setting 1 : 100

Pg. UpPg. Dwn

Action

Display ID1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-141

7 Alarm List Display■ Monitor Number of Displayed messages
Select this check box to count the number of displayed messages.
This option can only be configured when the New Message List check box is selected.
(Destination Device Address): Specifies the word device to write the number of displayed messages to.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

9-142

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display● List Tab
The List tab is only displayed when New Message List is selected for Message Settings on the General tab.

(Block settings)■ Number of Blocks
Configures the device addresses that trigger messages to display and message switching as blocks (1 to 64).

■ Start Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) of the message to display. The text ID numbers are sequentiallyconfigured for all channels from the first block starting with the ID number configured here. Click
Manager.

to display Text

■ Device Address Setting Method
Selects the trigger device address setting method.
Serial:The trigger device addresses after the block number selected in the block settings are configured
with sequential addresses.

Random:Configures trigger device addresses for each block number.

■ (Block settings)
Registers and edits the messages to display for each block channel.
Block No.:Shows the block numbers in the amount specified by Number of Blocks.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to“Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-144.

Trigger Device Address: Shows the word device to use as the condition to display messages.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When Serial is selected for Device Address Setting Method, the trigger device
addresses for block numbers after the selected block number are automatically configured
with the configured trigger device address as the starting address.
No. of Reg. Text:

Shows the number of messages registered to the block.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to“Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-144.

Edit:

Changes the block settings in list.
Select a block number in the list and click this button to display the Individual Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-144.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-143

9
Data Displays

1 block is composed of 16 channels. 1 device address bit can be monitored for each channel. The maximum
number of device address bits that can be monitored is 16 for each block.

7 Alarm List Display

Insert:Inserts the block settings in the position selected on the list.
Select the block number at the position to insert the settings in the list and click this button
to display the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 9-144.
The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if all
block numbers are configured.

Delete:Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a block number on the list and click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.

Individual Settings Dialog Box
The Individual Settings dialog box is used to configure the conditions to display the messages.

(Settings)■ Trigger Device Address
Specifies the word device to use as the condition to display messages. The word device bits correspond to themessage numbers.
Example: The number of blocks is 1 and D0 is specified as the trigger device address.
The device address of the number(Block Number - Message Number) 1-0 is D0-0, the device address of thenumber 1-1 is D0-1, ... the device address of the number 1-15 is D0-15.
Number(Block Number - Message Number)
1-0
1-1
Block 1
1-2
16 channels
1-14
1-15

Device Address

D0-0
D0-1
D0-2
D0-14
D0-15

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When Serial is selected for Device Address Setting Method on the List tab, the trigger device addresses for blocknumbers after the block number being registered or edited are automatically changed with the configured trigger
device address as the starting address.
■ (Settings)
Msg. No.:

Displayed as (Block No.)-(Message No.).

Alarm function: Selects whether or not to use the alarm function. Double clicking the cell switches between Enable
and Disable.
Enable: Monitors the state of the device address bit configured for the channel and displays themessage.
Disable: The device address bit is not monitored and the message is not displayed.
NO/NC:

9-144

Selects the alarm detection condition. Double clicking the cell switches between NO and NC.
NO:

Displays the message when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1.

NC:

Displays the message when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.

Text ID:

Shows the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use for the message.
The text ID is sequentially configured starting with the text ID configured by Start Text ID on the
List tab.

Text:

Shows the text for the specified text ID.
Only shows the first line of text when the text registered to the text ID has multiple lines.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.

Data Displays■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Line Color
When lines are displayed, select this check box and select line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Lines

Select▲▼Ref.

■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
FlangeWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9

9-145

7 Alarm List Display■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the button.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
Current fault

Select▲▼Ref.

Buttons

Buttons can be set only when Key Buttons are grouped together.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenCurrent fault

Display
Select▲▼Ref.

Buttons

When grouped with a button, the coordinate of the top-left corner of the display part becomes the display
position.
■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenCurrent fault

Display

HeightSelect▲▼Ref.

Buttons

The grouped parts size is calculated using the size and coordinate of each part that makes up the groupedparts.

9-146

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display● Format Tab■ FontConfigures the format of the messages to display.
Style*1:

9Selects Regular or Bold for text style.

Line Spacing : Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
SizeThis option can only be configured when the Scroll check box is cleared.

*2:
*1:

Magnification

Specifies the character size (8 to 150).
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Display with Same Text Color*3
To set the text color for all messages to the same color, select this check box and select the text color to display(color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
When this check box is cleared, the color for messages is the text color configured in Text Manager.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*3 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-147

Data Displays*2

7 Alarm List Display■ Line Height*3
Selects the specification method for line height in the list and configures the line height.
Specify Number of Lines:
Specifies the number of lines for the message to display for one alarm line.
Enter the number of lines. The range that can be specified varies based on the vertical size of the base screen andthe character height. When you enter the number of lines, the line height is automatically calculated according to
the display area.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Number of Lines × Character Height + (Number of Lines - 1) × Line Spacing= Line Height (dots)
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
Number of Lines × Character Height = Line Height (dots)

Calculation formulaline height

The character height setting varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Size is 16 and Line Spacing is 4.
Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

1

×

24

+

( 1

- 1) ×

Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

2

×

24

+

( 2

- 1) ×

Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

3

×

24

+

( 3

- 1) ×Line SpacingLine Height4= 24 dots

Line SpacingLine Height4= 52 dots

Line SpacingLine Height4= 80 dots

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

Current fault
Pump fault
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: Magnification H is set to 16.
Number of Lines Magnification H

1

×

1

Number of Lines Magnification H

2

×

1

×

1

Line Height× 16 = 32 dots

Number of Lines Magnification H

3Line Height× 16 = 16 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.
Number of Lines Magnification H

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

3

×

2

Line Height× 16 = 48 dots

Line Height× 16 = 96 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Since the alarm line height is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed, this option isconvenient to use when displaying multi-line messages.

*3 Advanced mode only

9-148

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display

Specify Size:
Specifies the line height of a message, which will be displayed on a line of the alarm, in dots.
Enter the line height (8 to (base screen vertical size -3)). The range that can be specified varies based on thevertical size of the base screen and the character height. The character height setting varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Size is 16 and Line Spacing is 4.
To display a single-line message, 1 x 24 = 24 dots, a line height of 24 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

24 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 24 + 4 = 52 dots, a line height of 52 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

52 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurredLine Height

24 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

Magnification H is 1.

To display a single-line message, 1 x 16 x 1 = 16 dots, a line height of 16 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

16 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

9

To display a two-line message, 1 x 16 x 2 = 32 dots, a line height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

16 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:

Data Displays

Line Height

32 dots

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

Magnification H is 2.

To display a single-line message, 2 x 16 x 1 = 32 dots, a line height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

32 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 16 x 2 = 64 dots, a line height of 64 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

64 dots

Line Height

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

32 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-149

7 Alarm List Display■ Scroll*3
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
Can only be set when One Line is selected for Display Type under the General tab.
For Alarm List Display, this can only be set if One Line is selected for Display Type under the General tab.
Speed (1: Fastest):

Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.

Start scrolling after displaying message: Select this check box to start scrolling after a message is displayed for 2
seconds.
This check box is cleared.
Page Start scrolling
Up
Page
Down

This check box is selected.
Voltage abnormal

a message.

Page Display a message
Up and align left.
Page
Down

V Page
Up
Page
Down

Vo Page
Up
Page
Down

oltage abnormal

Vol Page
Up
Page
Down

ltage abnormal

Page After 2 seconds,Upstart scrolling it.
Page
Down

Page
Up
Page
Down

• When the Scroll check box is selected, the number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen
decreases. If the main unit displays an error message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the numberof parts on the screen.
• When the scan time for the screen becomes longer, and when the part that has its Scroll check box
selected is placed on the top layer, the scrolling speed may become slow.
• If you place other parts overlapping with data display that have the Scroll check box selected on thebase screen or popup screen, the overlapping parts' display remains when scrolling. When overlapping
other parts with data display that have the Scroll check box selected, please place the other parts in the
top layer.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the text displayed according to values of device addresses, the text color, the displayed text, or thealarm state changes, the message is scrolled from the beginning.

*3 Advanced mode only

9-150

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

(Reference screen list)

1. Select a message displayedon the Alarm List Display

2. Press the key button Ref.

Motor fault
Pump1 fault
High pressure
Pump1 fault
SelectUp

Pump 1 fault
Motor fault
Pump
1 output low
Pump1
fault
HighPress
pressure
Stop, check the air,
Pump1
fault
then
press Start.

Motor fault
Pump1 fault
High pressure
Pump1 fault
Down

Reference

SelectUp

Reference screen opens

Down

Reference

SelectUp

Stop

Key buttons Up and Dwn

Key button Ref.

Press.
Down AirReference
Start

0000
kg/m2

Reference screen

When displaying a reference screen, select either Base Screen or Popup Screen as the reference screen type.
When not displaying a reference, select Not Use.
This can only be set when New Message List has been selected in Message Settings on the General tab. When
Use Alarm Log Settings has been selected, the screen type will become the one selected in Reference Screen on
the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:Specifies the coordinates to display the reference screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-left corner of thereference screen.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for Reference Screen.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-151

9
Data Displays■ Reference Screen
The Options tab is used to configure the reference screen. The reference screen is a base screen or popup screen
associated with each individual message. The reference screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.

7 Alarm List Display■ Screen Number Setting Method
Selects the setting method for the screen numbers on the reference screen list.
Serial:Continuously and automatically specifies screen numbers (1 to 3000) that are at or below theselected message number.
Example 1: The screen number “100” has been entered for message number 1-0.

Screen numbers “100”, “101”, “102”....are automatically specified in order from message
number 1-0.
Example 2: The screen number “200” has been entered for message number 1-5.

Message numbers 1-0 to 1-4 are left unchanged and screen numbers “200”, “201”,“202”....are automatically specified in order from message number 1-5.
Random:Specifies a reference screen number (1 to 3000) for each message number.

■ (Reference Screen List)
Displays a list reference screen numbers and screen titles that have been set to messages.
Message No.:
Screen No.:

Displays the message number.
Displays the reference screen number.
Double clicking the cell allows you to change the screen number (1 to 3000).

When there is not screen for the specified screen number a message confirming the creation of a newscreen will appear.
If Yes is clicked, a screen will be created but if No is clicked, you will be returned to the Options screen
without creating a screen.
Title:

Displays the title of a reference screen.
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the title. The maximum number is 40 characters.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-152

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Alarm List Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-153

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

7 Alarm List Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
Page
Up
Page
Down

Voltage abnormal

Line Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Alarm List Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR

Voltage abnormal

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

Page
Up
Page
Down

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the Alarm
List Display cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130
Voltage abnormal

130

Password

1

2

q

w

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

Voltages df abnormal
g h
j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR

Page
l CAN
Up
ENT
Page
Down

Alarm List
Display
Cannot operate

For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

9-154

130

▲ ▼

User3

Page
Up
Page
Down

Main unit

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Voltage abnormal

Page
Up
Page
Down

Alarm List
Display
Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

7 Alarm List Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Alarm List Display on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-155

8 Alarm Log Display

8

Alarm Log Display
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

8.1

How the Alarm Log Display is Used
The Alarm Log Display displays Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area.
• List the message, the occurrence time, recovery time, and confirmation time for the alarms that have occurred
Main unit
External device01

Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

Recovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54

12 : 00
Select1

Up

Down Check Delete

0

12 : 00
Alarm occurred
12 : 53

Recovered

12 : 54

Confirmed

12 : 53

Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

Recovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54

Confirmation time

Occurrence time

Recovery time

Message
SelectUp

Down Check Delete• Display the reference screen for alarms that have occurredShow focus

Move focus

Display reference screen

Pump 1 fault
Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete ReferenceOccurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete ReferenceOccurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete Reference

Message
Recovered Confirmed
Pump 1Motor
outputlow
fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50
Press HighStop,
check theair,pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 faultStart.
then press

Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

Select

Up

Down

Stop

Key Button

Air Press.
0000

Delete Reference

Start

kg/m2

Reference screen

Only one Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display can be displayed in a screen.
• For the key buttons used with the Alarm Log Display, refer to Chapter 7 “Alarm Log Display” on page 797.
• When the Operate the Alarm on List directly check box on the General tab in the Properties of
Alarm Log Display dialog box is selected, a displayed alarm can be given focus by pressing it on the list.
• The number of lines from the start line to the selected line of the message displayed on the Alarm Log
Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD56.

9-156

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Alarm Log Display

8.2

Alarm Log Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Alarm Log Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm Log Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm Log Display.
3 Double-click the placed Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Alarm Log Display on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-157

8 Alarm Log Display

8.3

Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Alarm Log Settings
Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
■ Default Settings
These options configure the default settings when the Alarm Log Display is displayed.
Start Line Number:Specifies what number alarm to display when multiple alarms have occurred.
The range that can be specified varies based on the model type.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:

1 to 5520

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:

1 to 11660

Sort:

Selects the display order for alarms that have occurred from the following.
Old, New, New & Level

Focus:

Selects a style of the focus from the following.
Reverse: Performs the negative/positive conversion to the entire row that has the focus.
Occurrence
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00

Select9-158

Message
Recovered
Current fault
Current fault
Current fault

Up

Confirmed
12 : 50
12 : 54

Down Check Delete

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Occurrence
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00

SelectMessage
Recovered
Current fault
Current fault
Current fault

Up

Confirmed
12 : 50
12 : 54

Down Check Delete

8 Alarm Log Display

Border:

Displays a frame (perfomrs the negative/positive conversion to the inside 2 dots only)
on the row with focus.
Occurrence
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00

SelectMessage
Recovered
Current fault
Current fault
Current fault

Up

Confirmed

Occurrence
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00
12/01 12 : 00

12 : 50
12 : 54

Down Check Delete

SelectMessage
Recovered
Current fault
Current fault
Current fault

Up

Confirmed
12 : 50
12 : 54

Down Check Delete

With negative/positive conversion, the color data (RGB value) is inverted and displayed.
Example: The white color data 0xFFFFFF is inverted, it becomes 0x000000 and is displayed in black.
For details on the color data, refer to Appendix “Windows RGB Value Correspondence Table” on page A-2.
Example:Inverts Text Color and Background Color when a color is set to Background Color.
When the Background Color is Blue(0x0000FF) and the Text Color is Red(0xFF0000), inverts the
Background Color to Yellow(0xFFFF00) and the Text Color to Cyan(0x00FFFF).
Text Color : Red(0xFF0000)

Text Color : Cyan(0x00FFFF)

2019/09/06

2019/09/06

Current fault

Background Color : Blue(0x0000FF)

Current fault

9Background Color : Yellow(0xFFFF00)

Display Focus on List after changing Screens or occurring Alarms*1:

Display Reference Screen*1:

Select this check box to automatically display the focus at the first item in the list
after switching screens and when an alarm occurs.
Select this check box to automatically display the reference screen for the alarm thathas focus by the following events.
• The focus is displayed• The focus moves• A new alarm occurs■ Displaying Alarms*1
Select these check boxes for alarms to display on the Alarm Log Display.
Not Recovered and Unconfirmed Alarm:

Displays active alarms that have not been recovered and confirmed.

Not Recovered and Confirmed Alarm:

Displays alarms that have not been recovered but the key button CHECK
has been pressed.

Recovered and Unconfirmed Alarm:

Displays alarms that have been recovered but the key button CHECK has
not been pressed.

Recovered and Confirmed Alarm:

Displays alarms that have been recovered and the key button CHECK has
been pressed.

■ First Alarm*1
An alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred is called the first alarm. Select the check boxes for theoperations to execute when the first alarm occurs.
Display First Alarm to 1st line on List:

Always displays the first alarm on the first line of the list.

■ Operate the Alarm on List directly*1
Select this check box to display the focus by pressing an alarm displayed on the list.
When an alarm is pressed with no focus displayed, the focus is displayed on that alarm.
When an alarm is pressed that does not have focus when the focus is displayed, the focus is moved to that alarm. The
focus is no longer displayed when an alarm with focus is pressed.
*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-159

Data Displays

When Background Color is None, Text Color and Plate Color is inverted.

8 Alarm Log Display● Log Tab

(Show items detailed settings)■ Show Items
Select these check boxes for the items to display on the Alarm Log Display.
Title:

Shows the titles on the first line of the list.

Occurrence Time:

Shows the time the alarm occurred.

Recovery Time:

Shows the time the alarm was recovered from.

Confirmation Time: Shows the time the alarm was confirmed by pressing the key button CHECK.
Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

Recovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54

Title
Confirmation time

Occurrence time
Message

Recovery time
SelectUp

Down Check Delete

You can drag and drop the sub headings to change the order of items to be displayed on the Alarm Log
Display. This function is not applied to the order of the Alarm Log output data by batch or real time output
function.

Drag and drop

9-160

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Alarm Log Display■ (Show items detailed settings)
Each of the show items selected by the check boxes under Show Items can be configured in detail here.
Title:

Double click the cell, and then enter the titles for the items to display. The maximum number is
100 characters.

Width:

Specifies the number of characters to display (0 to 40). 1 is the width of a single-byte character,2 is the width of a double-byte character.

Date:

Selects the display type of the date from the following.
YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM, non-display

Time:

Selects the display type of the time from the following.
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, non-display• If the characters displayed in the title contain a newline, the text after the newline will not be displayed.
However, if using a Windows font for the selected text ID, the text after the newline will still be
displayed.
• If the title contains a language not supported as standard by the computer operating system, thecharacters may be garbled when displaying the (Show items detailed settings). However, thedownloaded data is correctly displayed.
• If you change the display format for Date or Time, the number for Width is automatically adjusted.
• The text color for Message changes according to the alarm state. The text color for Message isconfigured by Occurred Color, Recovered Color, and Confirmed Color on the Format tab.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click

to display Text Manager.

This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-161

9
Data Displays■ TitleSelect this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for Title in the (Show items detailed settings). The
Text ID message configured for Occurrence Time, Message, Recovery Time, and Confirmation Time isdisplayed in (Show Items detailed settings).

8 Alarm Log Display● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Line Color
When lines are displayed, select this check box and select line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Lines
Select▲ ▼ Check Delete■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-162

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Alarm Log Display■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the button.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

SelectRecovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54▲ ▼ Check Delete

Buttons

Buttons can be set only when Key Buttons are grouped together.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

9

X(0, 0)
Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

SelectRecovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54▲ ▼ Check Delete

Display
Buttons

When grouped with a button, the coordinate of the top-left corner of the display part becomes the display
position.
■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenOccurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

Recovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54

HeightSelect▲ ▼ Check Delete

Display
Buttons

The grouped parts size is calculated using the size and coordinate of each part that makes up the groupedparts.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-163

Data Displays

ScreenY

8 Alarm Log Display● Format Tab(Color setting listby level and status)■ Title Font
Select the font that will be used for the title from the following options.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Size*2
Specifies the character size (8 to 512).
■ Magnification*1
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

■ Title Color
Select the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of the text for titles.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

9-164

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Alarm Log Display■ (Color setting list by level and status)
Configures the text color, the background color and whether or not to flash according to the alarm level and status.
Level:
Displays the level of alarms.
Show:
Select the check boxes for the Level displayed on the Alarm Log Display.
Occurred, Recovered, Confirmed: Edit the settings for text color, background color, and flashing according to thestatus of alarm occurrence, recovery, and confirmation.
Text Color:
Selects the text color of alarms (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).

Background Color:

Flash:

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color fromthe Color Palette.
Selects the background color of alarms (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color fromthe Color Palette.
Selects whether or not to flash alarms. Double clicking thecell toggles between Y as Yes and N as No.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the
System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.

When the Key Button CHECK is pressed before recovering a triggered alarm, the alarm display will change
from the Occurred Color to the Confirmed Color. After this, the alarm that has changed to the Confirmed
Color will remain in that color and will not change to the Recovered Color even when recovered.

Select the line and click this button to display the Edit dialog box.
For details, refer to “Edit Dialog Box” on page 9-168.
■ Change Display Colors of First Alarm
Select this check box to change the color of the First Alarm.
Text Color:

Selects the text color of First Alarm (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).

Background Color:

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Selects the background color of First Alarm (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).

Flash:

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Selects whether or not to flash First Alarm. Double clicking the cell toggles between Y as Yes
and N as No.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9
Data Displays■ EditChanges the settings for the selected level.

9-165

8 Alarm Log Display■ Line Height*3
Selects the specification method for line height in the list and configures the line height.
Set with Number of Lines:
Specifies the number of lines for the message to display for one alarm line.
Enter the number of lines. The range that can be specified varies based on the vertical size of the base screen andthe character height. When you enter the number of lines, the line height is automatically calculated according to
the display area.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Number of Lines × Character Height + (Number of Lines - 1) × Line Spacing= Line Height (dots)
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
Number of Lines × Character Height = Line Height (dots)

Calculation formulaline height

The character height setting varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Size is 16 and Line Spacing is 4.
Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

1

×

24

+

( 1

- 1) ×

Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

2

×

24

+

( 2

- 1) ×

Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

3

×

24

+

( 3

- 1) ×Line SpacingLine Height4= 24 dots

Line SpacingLine Height4= 52 dots

Line SpacingLine Height4= 80 dots

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

Current fault
Pump fault
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Magnification H is set to 16.

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
Number of Lines Magnification H

1

×

1

Number of Lines Magnification H

2

×

1

×

1

Line Height× 16 = 32 dots

Number of Lines Magnification H

3Line Height× 16 = 16 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.
Number of Lines Magnification H

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

3

×

2

Line Height× 16 = 48 dots

Line Height× 16 = 96 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

Since the alarm line height is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed, this option isconvenient to use when displaying multi-line messages.

*3 Advanced mode only

9-166

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Alarm Log Display

Specify Size:
Specifies the line height of a message, which will be displayed on a line of the alarm, in dots.
Enter the line height (8 to (base screen vertical size -3)). The range that can be specified varies based on thevertical size of the base screen and the character height. The character height setting varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Size is 16 and Line Spacing is 4.
To display a single-line message, 1 x 24 = 24 dots, a line height of 24 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

24 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 24 + 4 = 52 dots, a line height of 52 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

52 dots

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurredLine Height

24 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

Magnification H is 1.

To display a single-line message, 1 x 16 x 1 = 16 dots, a line height of 16 dots or higher is required.

9Line Height

16 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurredLine Height

32 dots

Line Height

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

16 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:

Data Displays

To display a two-line message, 1 x 16 x 2 = 32 dots, a line height of 32 dots or higher is required.
When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

Magnification H is 2.

To display a single-line message, 2 x 16 x 1 = 32 dots, a line height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

32 dots

Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred

To display a two-line message, 2 x 16 x 2 = 64 dots, a line height of 64 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

64 dots

Line Height

Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
has occurred

32 dots

Current fault
Pump fault

When the message is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

Since only one line of the title is displayed, the title line height = 1 (number of lines) x the character height
regardless of the Line Height setting.
Example: Size*2 is 24, the title line height = 1 x 24 = 24 dots.
Magnification H*1 is 2, the title line height = 1 x 2 x 16 = 32 dots.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-167

8 Alarm Log Display
Edit Dialog Box
Edit the settings for text color, background color, and flashing according to the status of alarm occurrence, recovery,
and confirmation of the selected level.

■ Level
Displays the selected level in the (Color setting list by level and status) on the Format tab.
■ Display
Select this check box to display the alarm at the level displayed in the Level on the Alarm Log Display.
■ Occurred, Recovered, Confirmed
Edit the settings for text color, background color, and flashing according to the status of alarm occurrence, recovery,
and confirmation.
Text Color:

Selects the text color of alarms (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).

Background Color:

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Selects the Background color of alarms (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).

Flash:

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Selects whether or not to flash alarms.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project Settings
dialog box.

9-168

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Alarm Log Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

1. Select a message displayedon the Alarm Log Display

2. Press the key button Ref.

Reference screen opens

Pump 1 fault
Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete ReferenceOccurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete Reference

Message
Recovered Confirmed
Pump 1Motor
outputlow
fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50
Press HighStop,
check theair,pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 faultStart.
then press

Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectUp

Stop

Key buttons Up and Dwn

Reference Screen:

Key button Ref.

Down

Air Press.
0000

Delete Reference

Start

kg/m2

Reference screen

Displays the type of screen selected in Reference Screen on the Channel tab in the Alarm
Log Settings dialog box.
Click

to display the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

When displaying a reference screen, select either Base Screen or Popup Screen as thereference screen type.
When not displaying a reference, select Not Use.
Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the coordinates to display the reference screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-leftcorner of the reference screen.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for
Reference Screen.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

If you overlap the reference screen key button and the move focus key buttons, the reference screen can beswitched and checked while moving the focus.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-169

9
Data Displays■ Reference Screen Settings
The Options tab is used to configure the reference screen. The reference screen is a base screen or popup screen
associated with each individual message. The reference screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.

8 Alarm Log Display■ Display Block Number
Specifies the range of block numbers that will display the collected alarm log data.
All:

Displays the data for all blocks.

Block Number:

Displays only the data for the specified blocks in the Alarm Log Display. Alarms in unspecified blocks
are not displayed, even if active.
Individual block numbers can be specified by separating the numbers with “,”, continuous regions
can be specified with “-”.
Example:When the number of blocks is 6, enter the following.
To specify blocks 1 to 3:

1-3

To specify blocks 1, 3, 6:

1, 3, 6

To specify blocks 1, 4 to 6: 1, 4-6
Number of blocks

Specified numbers

6
No.

Device address

1-0

D100-01-1

D100-1

1-2

D100-2

1-13

D100-13

1-14

D100-14

1-15

D100-15

2-0

D101-02-1

D101-1

2-2

D101-2

2-13

D101-13

2-14

D101-14

2-15

D101-15

1-3

1, 3, 6

1, 4-6Block 1

Block 1

Block 1

Block 2Block 2Block 2Block 3Block 3Block 3Block 4Block 4Block 4Block 5Block 5Block 5Block 6Block 6Block 6Block 1

Block 25-0

D104-05-1

D104-1

5-2

D104-2

5-13

D104-13

5-14

D104-14

5-15

D104-15

6-0

D105-06-1

D105-1

6-2

D105-2

6-13

D105-13

6-14

D105-14

6-15

D105-15

Block 5Blocks to display

Blocks to display

Blocks to display

Block 6

• To display the alarms set in blocks 65 to 128 of the Alarm Log settings, select All under Display Block
Number. If Block Number is selected, only blocks 1 to 64 can be specified.
• For the number of blocks, refer to Chapter 12 “Number of Blocks” on page 12-16.
■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-170

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

8 Alarm Log Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-171

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

8 Alarm Log Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

SelectUp

Recovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Down Check Delete

Line Chart

Alarm Log Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR
Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

l CAN

SelectFor User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Recovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54

ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

User2

Up

Down Check Delete

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the Alarm
Log Display cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130
Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

Recovered
12 : 53

Up

1

2

q

w

123
a
ABC

Down Check Delete

3

4

e

r

5
t

6

7

y

u

Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

s

d

f

g

h

x

c

v

b

n

Select

Up

8

9

i

o

Recovered
12 : 53

j

m

k

0

BS

p CLR
Confirmed
12 : 54l CAN

Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

Recovered
12 : 53

Confirmed
12 : 54

ENT

Down Check Delete

Alarm Log
Display
Cannot operate

For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

9-172

130

▲ ▼

User3

!?# z

Select130

Password

Confirmed
12 : 54

Main unit

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

SelectUp

Down Check Delete

Alarm Log
Display
Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

8 Alarm Log Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Alarm Log Display on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-173

9 Data Log Display

9

Data Log Display
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

9.1

How the Data Log Display is Used
Displays the list of the Data Log data saved in the data storage area and the external memory device*1.
Main unit
External Device

12 : 00 : 30

Samplong Data and Time Data001

12 : 01 : 30

Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

Left
Operate12 : 02 : 30

Data001 Data002 Data003

Left

201

21

121

204

22

122

206

Samplong Data and Time Data001

Data Column
Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

Left

120

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

Samplong Data and TimeOperate20

Label Row

Data Log Data

Left

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

• Only one Data Log Display can be displayed per screen.
• One channel data is displayed per Data Log Display. You cannot switch channels and display otherchannel data.
For the Key Buttons used with the Data Log Display, refer to Chapter 7 “Data Log Display” on page 7-98.

*1 BIN file only

9-174

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual9 Data Log Display

9.2

Data Log Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Data Log Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Data Log Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Data Log Display.
3 Double-click the placed Data Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Data Log Display on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-175

9 Data Log Display

9.3

Properties of Data Log Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Display data from specified date
When stopping updating the display, to display the data from the Start
Date, select this check box and specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to control the display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Displays from the data of Start Date when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
Start Date and Time:

Specifies the Start Date for the display data as the values of word devices.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
For address number assignment, refer to Chapter 10 “Specifying Date and Time with Valuesof device addresses” on page 10-32.
This option can only be configured when Display data from specified date check box isselected.

9-176

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual9 Data Log Display● Log Tab

■ Channel No.
Specifies the channel number (1 to 20) of the Data Log data to be displayed.
Data Log Settings:

9

Displays the Data Log Settings dialog box.

■ SortSelects the display order for the Data Log data as Old or New.
■ Show Items
Select these check boxes for the items to display on the Data Log Display.
Label Row:

Shows the label row.

Sampling Time:

Shows the sampling time column.
Label:

Displays the label for the sampling time configured as the Output Items in the
Individual Settings dialog box of the Data Log Settings.

Date:

Selects the display type of the sampling date from the following.

Time:

Selects the display type of the sampling time from the following.

YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM, non-display
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, non-display

Samplong Data and Time Column
Samplong Data and Time Data001

Data Column
Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

Left
OperateLabel Row

Data Log Data

Left

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-177

Data Displays

The Data Log data is saved in the data storage area and the external memory device. To display the data inthe external memory device, select the channel for which the Save Data Log Data and Display in Line
Chart or Data Log Display check box is selected in the External Memory Device tab on the Individual
Settings dialog box opened from the Data Log Settings dialog box.

9 Data Log Display■ Display Data
Specifies data to display on the Data Log Display.
No.:

Displays the data number of the Data Log. The data number cannot be edited.

Label:

Displays the Label under the Output Data in the Individual Settings dialog box of the Data Log
Settings. The label cannot be edited.

Column Width:

Configures the column width (1 to 40) of the data columns.

Data:

Selects whether or not to display data of the data number on the Data Log Display. Double
clicking the cell switches between Show and Hide. All data of the number switched to Hidecannot be displayed.

■ Default
Returns the configured column width to their default values.

9-178

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual9 Data Log Display● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.

Data Displays■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Line Color
When lines are displayed, select this check box and select line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Lines■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
FlangeWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9

9-179

9 Data Log Display■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the button.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
Samplong Data and Time Data001

Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Buttons

Buttons can be set only when Key Buttons are grouped together.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenSamplong Data and Time Data001

Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Display
Buttons

When grouped with a button, the coordinate of the top-left corner of the display part becomes the display
position.
■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

20 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

20 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenSamplong Data and Time Data001

Height

Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Display
Buttons

The grouped parts size is calculated using the size and coordinate of each part that makes up the groupedparts.

9-180

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual9 Data Log Display● Format Tab■ FontSelect the font to use for displaying the label row and the Data Log data from the following items:■ Line Spacing*2
Specifies the line spacing (-127 to 127) of displayed characters.
■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Size*2
Specifies the character size (8 to 512).
■ Magnification*1
W, H:

Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-181

9
Data Displays

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page
2-6.

9 Data Log Display■ LabelConfigures the details of the label row.
Color:

Selects the color for the displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).

Align Text:

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right

For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
Line Height: Selects the specification method for height of the label row and configures the line height.
Specify Number of Rows:
Specifies the number of rows. The range that can be specified varies based on the vertical size ofthe base screen and the character height. When you enter the number of lines, the line height is
automatically calculated according to the display area.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Number of Lines × Character Height + (Number of Lines - 1) × Line Spacing= Line Height (dots)
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
Number of Lines × Character Height = Line Height (dots)
The character height setting varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Size is 16 and Line Spacing is 4.
Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

1

×

24

+

( 1

- 1) ×

Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

2

×

24

+

( 2

- 1) ×

Number of Lines Character height Number of Lines

3

×

24

+

( 3

- 1) ×Line SpacingLine Height4= 24 dots

LDR100 value

Line SpacingLine Height4= 52 dots

LDR100 value
Data001

Line SpacingLine Height4= 80 dots

LDR100 value
Data001

When the label is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: Magnification H is set to 16.
Number of Lines Magnification H

Line Height1 × 1 × 16 = 16 dots
Number of Lines Magnification H

Line Height2 × 1 × 16 = 32 dots
Number of Lines Magnification H

Line Height3 × 1 × 16 = 48 dots

Number of Lines Magnification H

Line Height3 × 2 × 16 = 96 dots

LDR100 value

When the label is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

LDR100 value
Data001

LDR100 value
Data001

LDR100 value
Data001

Since the line height is adjusted with the fixed number of the label rows, this option is convenient to use
when displaying multi-line labels.

9-182

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual9 Data Log Display

Specify Size:
Specifies the line height of label in dots.
Enter the line height (8 to (base screen vertical size -3)). The range that can be specified varies
based on the vertical size of the base screen and the character height. The character height
setting varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Size is 16 and Line Spacing is 4.
To display a single-line message, 1 x 24 = 24 dots, a line height of 24 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

24 dots

LDR100 value
Data001

To display a two-line message, 2 x 24 + 4 = 52 dots, a line height of 52 dots or higher isrequired.
Line Height

52 dots

LDR100 value
Data001

Line Height

24 dots

LDR100 value

When the label is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: Magnification H is 1.
To display a single-line message, 1 x 16 = 16 dots, a line height of 16 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

16 dots

LDR100 value
Data001

Line Height

32 dots

LDR100 value
Data001

Line Height

16 dots

LDR100 value

When the label is 2 lines,
2nd line is not shown.

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: Magnification H is 2.
To display a single-line message, 1 x 32 = 32 dots, a line height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

32 dots

LDR100 value
Data001

To display a two-line message, 2 x 32 = 64 dots, a line height of 64 dots or higher is required.
Line Height

64 dots

Line HeightLDR100 value
Data001

32 dots

the label is 2 lines,
LDR100 value When
2nd line is not shown.

■ DataConfigures the details of the Data Log data.
Color:

Selects the color for the displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).

Align Text:

Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Selects the horizontal text alignment from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-183

9
Data Displays

To display a two-line message, 2 x 16 = 32 dots, a line height of 32 dots or higher is required.

9 Data Log Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-184

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual9 Data Log Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9

No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-185

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

9 Data Log Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
Samplong Data and Time Data001

Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

Left
OperateNo.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Left

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page LeftLine Chart

Data Log Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR

Samplong Data and Time Data001
2019/09/06 12:00:30

l CAN

User2

Data003

120

201

121

204

122

206

23

123

206

24

124

210

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

Left

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

Data002

21
22

2019/09/06 12:04:30
2019/09/06 12:05:30

OperateFor User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed20

2019/09/06 12:01:30
2019/09/06 12:02:30
2019/09/06 12:03:30

ENT

Left

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the Data Log
Display cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

130
Samplong Data and Time Data001
2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

Data002

Data003

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

24

124

210

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

Left
Operate130

Password

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

e

r

123
a
ABC

s

d

f 2019/09/06
g 12:03:30
h

!?# z

x

c

v

8

9

0

BS

t Samplongy Data anduTime Data001
ioData002 p Data003
CLR
2019/09/06 12:00:30
2019/09/06 12:01:30
2019/09/06 12:02:30
2019/09/06 12:04:30
2019/09/06 12:05:30
2019/09/06 12:06:30

b

Left

OperatePage Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

20
21
22

j

23

120

201

121

204

122

206

k 123 l 206CAN

24

124

25

125

26

126

Up

Down

n

m

Left

Samplong Data and Time Data001
2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

Data002

Data003

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

23

123

206

210

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

218

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

ENT

Left

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

Data Log
Display
Cannot operate

For User2,
Open Password Screen,parts for which Display
enter password,
has been set to Permitted
and switch to User3
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

9-186

130

▲ ▼

User3

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30
2019/09/06 12:05:30

Main unit

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Left
OperateLeft

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

Data Log
Display
Can operate

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

9 Data Log Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Data Log Display on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-187

10 Numerical Display

10 Numerical Display
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

10.1 How the Numerical Display is Used
The Numerical Display is used to display the value of a word device in the specified format.
• Display the current value of a device address
Main unit
External device
65535

D100 : FFFF (Hex)Display Device Address : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : UBIN16(W)Digits : 5-1

Display Device Address : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BIN16(I)Digits : 5

Main unit

Display Device Address : D100
Display Type : Hexadecimal
Data Type : UBIN16(W)Digits : 4

External device
AD2

D100 : 1234 (Decimal)?

Display Device Address : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BCD4(B)Digits : 4• Display the decimal point
Main unit
External device
123.4

D100 : 1234

(Decimal)

Display Device Address : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BIN16(I)Digits : 4
Display Floating Point : On
Floating Digits : 1• Display the unit
Main unit
External device
1234 pcs.

D100 : 1234 (Decimal)

Display Device Address : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : UBIN16(W)Digits : 4
With Unit : On
Text ID : 1
Text : pcs.

• Flash a value that exceeds the minimum or the maximum
Main unit
External device
120

D100 :

9-188

120 (Decimal)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Display Device Address : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : UBIN16(W)Digits : 3
Range : Value
Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100
When Data Over
Flash : On

10 Numerical Display

10.2 Numerical Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Numerical Displays.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Display.
3 Double-click the placed Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Data Over tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Numerical Display on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4
Options dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-189

10 Numerical Display

10.3 Properties of Numerical Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type for the value as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the type of data for the value.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Digits:Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Display Floating Point:

Data Type

DigitsUBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to 5UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to 10

BCD4(B)

1 to 4

BCD8(EB)

1 to 8Float32(F)

1 to 10UBIN16(W)

1 to 4

UBIN32(D)1 to 8

Select this check box to display the decimal point.

When the Display Floating Point check box is selected and UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D),BIN32(L), BCD4(B), or BCD8(EB) is selected for Data Type, the source device is an integer, but thevalue is displayed with the decimal point added at the configured floating digits.
However, if Float32(F) is selected for Data Type, the source data is a decimal value.

9-190

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10 Numerical Display

Floating Digits:

Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of thenumber of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box isselected. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part is asfollows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Floating Symbol*1:

Data Type

Floating Digits

UBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to Digits

UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to Digits

BCD4(B)

1 to Digits

BCD8(EB)

1 to Digits

Float32(F)

1 to Digits or 8

UBIN16(W)--UBIN32(D)--Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.
.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box isselected.
Example:Floating Symbol is .(dot):

12.34

Floating Symbol is /(slash):

12/34

Select this check box to hide “0” for the upper digits of the integer part.
Example:Do not display when the value is zero:

Suppress Zeros selected:

1234

Suppress Zeros cleared:

00001234

Select this check box to show a blank display if the value is "0".

• If the value is zero and it is not displayed, the unit set on the Format tab is also not displayed.
• Even if the Do not display when the value is zero check box is selected, "0" is displayed when the value is
not 0.
Display the minus sign:

Select this check box to display the - (negative) sign when displaying negative values.
This option can only be configured when Decimal is selected for Display Type.

Display the plus sign:

Select this check box to display the + (positive) sign when displaying positive values.
This option can only be configured when Decimal is selected for Display Type.

Symbol to show when out of range or Error occurs:
Selects the following symbols to be displayed when a value exceeding the Data Type in
the General tab is entered, or an error occurs.
"? (question mark)", " (space)", "# (pound)", "% (percent)", "$ (dollar)", "- (minus)","@ (at sign)", "\ (backslash)", "* (asterisk)", "! (exclamation mark)", "+ (plus)"
In the following cases, it is handled as an error and the symbol selected in Symbol to show when out ofrange or Error occurs is displayed.
• If the Data Type is BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) and the value entered in device address
doesn't comply with the data type.
• If a value divided by zero operation was executed with Display with Arithmetic Operation on the
Options tab.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-191

9
Data Displays

Suppress Zeros:

Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2.

10 Numerical Display■ Display Method
Specifies the source of the value to display.
Display Device Address:

Specifies the word device that stores the value to display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change the source device
address by the value of this device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
For details on indirect reading, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.

*1 Advanced mode only

9-192

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10 Numerical Display● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.

9

For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed. Only the text is displayed.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
FlangeWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-193

Data Displays

Standard:10 Numerical Display■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Screen1234

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight

9-194

1234

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

10 Numerical Display● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western*1, Standard*2, Stroke*2, 7-Segment, Windows■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, 7-Segment

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Standard
Stroke, 7-Segment

Size
8 to 512
8x16, 16x16
8 to 128■ Style*2
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
■ Magnification*2
W, H:
Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-195

9
Data Displays

The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

10 Numerical Display■ With Unit*3
Select this check box to display units or other characters at the end of a number. Displayed characters must be
registered in Text Manager. The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab.
Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000).
Click

Text:

to display Text Manager.

Displays the characters of the specified Text ID.
• The maximum number that can be displayed with this function is 4 characters. The fifth and subsequentcharacters of a character string are not displayed. However, if using a Windows font for the selected text
ID, the fifth and subsequent characters of a character string will still be displayed.
• If a carriage return (CR) is included the characters after the CR are not displayed.

■ Windows Font
Configures the font to use as the Windows Font.
Select Windows for Font to display the current settings. To change the settings, click Change to display the Fontdialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
■ Change Display Colors
Select this check box to switch the text and plate colors.
External device
Trigger Device Address

Main unit0

Text Color

1234

Trigger Device Address

1

Plate Color on the View tab

Text Color under Change Display Colors

1234

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to use as the trigger to switch
the text and plate colors.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the value of device address is 0, the color specified in Text Color or in Plate Coloron the View tab will be displayed.
When the value of device address is 1, the color displayed and specified in Text Color or
Plate Color under the Change Display Colors.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of the text when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when switching.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the View
tab.

*3 Advanced mode only

9-196

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10 Numerical Display■ Flash*3
Select this check box to make the text and plate colors flash.
The flashing will occur as follows:• The Change Display Colors check box is cleared, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on
the View tab and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device

Main unit
Text Color

1234
Trigger device address
under Flash

Plate Color on the View tab

0

Text Color

Flashing

Plate Color on
the View tab

1234
1234
Trigger device address
under Flash

1

1234

Text Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device address for Change
Display Colors is 0, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color on the View tab and the colors
specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.

Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

0

Trigger device address
under Flash0

Data Displays

External device

Main unit
Text Color

1234

Plate Color on the View tab

Text Color

Flashing
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

0

Plate Color on
the View tab

1234
1234

Trigger device address
under Flash

1

1234

Text Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash• The Change Display Colors check box is selected and the value of the trigger device address for Change
Display Colors is 1, then the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Change Display Colors
and the colors specified by Text Color and Plate Color under Flash are alternately displayed.
External device
Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Trigger device address
under Flash0

Trigger device address under
Change Display Colors

1

Main unit
Text Color under Change Display Colors

1234

Plate Color under Change Display Colors

Text Color under
Change Display Colors

Flashing

Plate Color under
Change Display Colors

1234
1234

Trigger device address
under Flash

1

1234

Text Color under Flash
Plate Color under Flash*3 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9

9-197

10 Numerical Display

Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that will be used to trigger
flash.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Flash intervals are specified in the Flashing Cycle on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Text Color:

Selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) of text when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Plate Color:

Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades) when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Image Type on the Viewtab.

If the Flash check box is selected and the Flash check box under When Data Over on the Data Over tab
is also selected, the Data Over display is blinking will be given precedence when both conditions are
satisfied.

9-198

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10 Numerical Display● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Range
Select data type.

9
Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.

Device Address:

Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.

Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on thedata type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device Address is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

• Select UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), or BCD8(EB) for Data Typeunder the General tab, and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum andMaximum as an integer.
Example: To set a value of “1.25” for the upper limit, enter “125”.
• If the value of the device address to display exceeds the data range that can be processed for the data
type selected under Data Format on the General tab, the symbol selected under Symbol to show
when out of range or Error occurs on the General tab is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-199

Data Displays

Value:

10 Numerical Display■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the allowable range is exceeded.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Flash:

Select this check box to make the value flash when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range.

Report:Select this check box to write 1 in the Report Device Address when the displayed data exceeds theallowable range.
Report Device Address:

Specifies the Report Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Example: If the value of word device of the reading source is “120,” which is higher than the upper limit of “100,” or“­10,” which is below the lower limit of “0,” a value of 1 will be written to LM0 and the displayed numericalvalue will flash.
Range: Value
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 100
When Data Over• Flash• Report
Destination Device Address: LM0

9-200

Read data50

Display

90

120

50

120

90

Flashing
Data over
notification: LM00

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1

-10

-10
Flashing

01

10 Numerical Display● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The Numerical Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
Select the operation when the condition is not satisfied as Not display Numerical data, Not update Numerical
data, or Not show Numerical Display under While not satisfying the condition.

Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide
numberLM0: 1Show
number1234

Data over does not operate for hidden Numerical Displays. Data over is reported if the minimum or
maximum is exceeded when the Numerical Display changes from hidden to displayed.
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Display from the following.
Always visible: The Numerical Display is always enabled.
Data

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

Display

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-201

Data Displays

Example: Trigger Type is While ON, Device Address is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is Not
display Numerical data.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Display does not display the number.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Display displays the number.

910 Numerical Display

While ON:

Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device address is 1.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data.
Data

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

100

100

102

103

103

103

UpdateDo not update

UpdateUpdateDo not update

Do not update

1
Value of
Device Address0

Display0
Do not update

While OFF:

Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device address is 0.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data.
Data

99

100

101

103

102

104

105

1
Value of
Device Address0

Display99
Update99
Do not update

101

101

101

104

105

UpdateDo not update

Do not update

UpdateUpdateWhile satisfying the condition: Enables the Numerical Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data.
Data

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

99

99

101

101

101

104

105

Do not update

UpdateDo not update

Do not update

UpdateUpdateSatisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Display

Update■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. Maximum number is 80 characters.
■ While not satisfying the condition
Selects the operation of the Numerical Display when the condition is not satisfied.
Not display Numerical data:
The plate and flange are displayed, but number is not displayed.

9-202

Not update Numerical data:

The last updated number is displayed. The number does not change.

Not show Numerical Display:

Hides the Numerical Display.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10 Numerical Display● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Display with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values of device addresses and writing the results, select this check box and input
the arithmetic formula.

Data Displays

Example: To multiple the value of device address when displayed by 60
External device

Main unit

1234×6074040

D0

Numerical Input
Destination Device Address: D0

1234

Display with Arithmetic Operation: @*60

Display value multipliedby 60 for the value of
device address

Arithmetic Formulas
Arithmetic formulas can be specified by freely combining multiple kinds of data and operators in the following format.
Data

Operator

Data

to
Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data

Operator

Data...(up to 120 characters)• There is no limit on the number of data items or number of operators. However, the maximum number is 120
characters.
• Round brackets can be used.
Data
Item

Description@

The device address on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic
formula. Only one device address can be set for an arithmetic operation.
The device address is as specified for Display Device Address under the General tab.

Value

Sets the constant values for the arithmetic formula.
The values that can be set depend on the data type selected using Data Format under the Generaltab. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address

Specifies the bit device or the word device for the arithmetic formula.
Always enter the device address enclosed in square brackets, “[” and “]”.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9

9-203

10 Numerical Display
Operators
Specify the type of arithmetic operation to be performed on the data. The operator priority is the same as for scripts.
For details, refer to Chapter 25 “6.5 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 25-61.
Item

Description
Sets the arithmetic operators.

Arithmetic
operators+

Addition

Adds-

Subtraction

Subtracts

from*Multiplication

Multiplies

and/Division

Divides%ModuloCalculates remainder after dividing

and

.

by

.
.
.
by

.

Sets the bit operator.

Bit operator&

Logical AND

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of|

Logical OR

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of^

Logical XOR(exclusive OR)

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of<<Left shift

Shifts each bit of

to left bybit(s).

>>

Right shift

Shifts each bit of

to right bybit(s).

and
and

.
.
and

.

Examples of Arithmetic Formula Input
Input Examples

To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add 1 to the value enteredusing the Keypad and write the result to the device address.

@+1

To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 1 to the value of device
address and display the result.

[LDR 0] + @ + 100@&3

Description

To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add the value of LDR0 to thevalue entered using the Keypad and add 100, and write the result to the device address.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add the value of LDR0 to thevalue of device address and add 100, then display the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, write the logical product of thevalue entered using the Keypad and 3 to the device address.
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 3 to the value of device
address and display the result.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-204

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10 Numerical Display● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9

No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-205

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

10 Numerical Display
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
123.4

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Numerical Display

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

9-206

Main unit

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

BS

123.4

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed10 Numerical Display● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Numerical Display on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-207

11 Calendar

11 Calendar
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

11.1 How the Calendar is Used
The Calendar can be used to display the date and time using the main unit's clock data.
• Display the date and time
Main unit

12/07 13:45• Write 0 or 1 to a device address at the configured times
Main unit
External device
ON Time : 10:00
OFF Time : 11:00

Report Device Address M0
0

09:00

09:00

10:00

0

1

1

0

10:00

11:00

11:00

ON Time
Time

09:00

09:30

ActionReport Device Address
M0 value

10:00

OFF Time
10:30

Write

Write
0

0

1

11:00

1

0

When Alarm is selected for Calendar Type, you can use just the alarm function without displaying theclock on the screen.

9-208

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11 Calendar

11.2 Calendar Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Calendars.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Calendar.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Calendar.
3 Double-click the placed Calendar and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

9
Data Displays

The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Calendar on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-209

11 Calendar

11.3 Properties of Calendar Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Calendar Type
Selects the type of Calendar from the following.
Clock:

Displays the date and time.

Alarm:

Notifies by writing 1 (ON Time) or 0 (OFF Time) to a device address at the configured times without
displaying the date and time.

Clock & Alarm: Displays the date and time, and notifies by writing 1 (ON Time) or 0 (OFF Time) to a device address
at the configured times.
Elapsed Time:

Display the values of device addresses as elapsed seconds.

■ Use Value of Device Address (UNIX Time):

To consider a value of device address as UNIX time*1 and display it converted to date and time data, select this checkbox and specify the source data to display. It handles as a value whose data type is UBIN32(D). This option can only
be configured when Clock is selected for Calendar Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Use Value of Device Address:
Specifies the source of elapsed time data to display. It handles as a value whose data type is UBIN32(D). This option
can only be configured when Elapsed Time is selected for Calendar Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

*1 The number of seconds elapsed since 0:00:00 on January 1, 1970 in UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). A leap second anda time zone is not considered.

9-210

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11 Calendar■ Clock Type:
Configures the display items on Calendar. This option can only be configured when Clock, Clock & Alarm or
Elapsed Time is selected for Calendar Type.
An example of the selected Clock Type is displayed on the right.
When Clock or Clock & Alarm is selected for Calendar Type, select the content to be displayed on Calendar fromthe following.
Date & Day of the Week & Time, Date & Day of the Week, Date & Time, Date,
Time & Date & Day of the Week, Time & Date, Time & Day of the Week, Time, Day of the Week & Time,Day of the Week
When Elapsed Time is selected for Calendar Type, Time is configured.
■ Time Settings
Configures the content to be displayed as time. These options can only be configured when Clock, Clock & Alarm or
Elapsed Time is selected for Calendar Type.
Display Format: Configures the time display format.
When Clock or Clock & Alarm is selected for Calendar Type, selects the time display format fromthe following:
hh:mm, hh:mm tt, tt hh:mm, hh:mm:ss, hh:mm:ss tt, tt hh:mm:ss(h: hour, m: minute, s: second t: A.M. or P.M.)
When Elapsed Time is selected for Calendar Type, selects the time display format from thefollowing:
dd:hh:mm:ss, h:mm:ss, hh:mm:ss, hhh:mm:ss, hhhh:mm:ss, dd:hh:mm, h:mm, hh:mm,
hhh:mm, hhhh:mm (d: day, h: hour, m: minute, s: second)
Configures the symbol that separates the hour, minute, and second data. The maximum number is
10 characters.
When Font on View tab is 7-segment, 0 to 9 (number), (space), *(asterisk), +(plus), -(hyphen),.(Period), /(slash) and :(colon) can be used.
AM Symbol:

Configures the symbol to indicate the morning. The maximum number is 10 characters. This option
can only be configured when an item that includes t is selected for Display Format.
When Font on View tab is 7-segment, 0 to 9 (number), (space), *(asterisk), +(plus), -(hyphen),.(Period), /(slash) and :(colon) can be used.

PM Symbol:

Configures the symbol to indicate the afternoon. The maximum number is 10 characters. This option
can only be configured when an item that includes t is selected for Display Format.
When Font on View tab is 7-segment, 0 to 9 (number), (space), *(asterisk), +(plus), -(hyphen),.(Period), /(slash) and :(colon) can be used.

■ Date Settings
Configures the content to be displayed as a date. These options can only be configured when Clock or Clock &Alarm is selected for Calendar Type and Date & Day of the Week & Time, Date & Day of the Week, Date &Time, Date, Time & Date & Day of the Week or Time & Date is selected for Clock Type.
Display Format: Select the date display format from the following:yyyy/MM/dd, MM/dd/yyyy, dd/MM/yyyy, yy/MM/dd, MM/dd/yy, dd/MM/yy, MM/dd,
dd/MM (y: year, M: month, d: day)Separator:

Configures the symbol that separates the year, month, and day data. The maximum number is 10
characters.
When Font on View tab is 7-segment, 0 to 9 (number), (space), *(asterisk), +(plus), -(hyphen),.(Period), /(slash) and :(colon) can be used.

Type:

Selects the string to indicate month from the following:
01, 02, ..., 12, Jan., Feb., ..., Dec., January, February, ..., December, Customize
When Customize is selected, configures the string to indicate month. The maximum number is 10
characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-211

Data Displays

Separator:

911 Calendar■ Day of the Week Settings
Configures the content to be displayed as the day of the week. These options can only be configured when Clock or
Clock & Alarm is selected for Calendar Type and Date & Day of the Week & Time, Date & Day of the Week,
Time & Date & Day of the Week, Time & Day of the Week, Day of the Week & Time or Day of the Week isselected for Clock Type.
Type:

Selects the string to indicate the day of the week from the following:( 日 ), ( 月 ), ..., ( 土 ), Sun., Mon., ..., Sat., Sunday, Monday, ..., Saturday,
星期日 , 星期一 , ..., 星期六 , Customize
When Customize is selected, configures the string to indicate the day of the week. The maximum
number is 10 characters.

● Alarm Tab
These options can only be configured when Alarm or Clock & Alarm is selected for Calendar Type on the
General tab.

(Alarm conditions)■ Alarm Time
Selects the type of data for the alarm time.
Value:

Specifies the alarm time as values and the day of the week.

Device Address:

Year:

Enter the year (0 to 99).

Month:

Enter the month (1 to 12).

Day:

Enter the day (1 to 31).

Day of the Week:

Select the day of the week.

Hour:

Enter the hour (0 to 23).

Minute:Enter the minute (0 to 59).

Second:Enter the second (0 to 59).

Configures the alarm time as values of word devices.
It handles as a value whose data type is BCD4(B). Configures the year, month, day, hour, minute, andsecond values in the same range as Value. Specifies the day of the week with the following values.
0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

If the data of the alarm time is invalid, 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address
number+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” onpage 4-34 and Chapter 37 “Processing error” on page 37-3.
An error occurs in the following states:• Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute or Second are set to values outside the range of Value.
• A value outside the range of BCD4(B) is entered.

9-212

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11 Calendar■ (Alarm conditions)
Select the check boxes for the conditions to use as the alarm time.
The Day of the Week check box can only be configured when the Year check box is cleared.
■ ON Time
Configures the time to write 1 to the Report Device Address according to the type of data.
• After 1 is written to the Report Device Address with ON Time, that value is retained.
Value of device address retained after ON Time elapses
Report Device Address 1
M0 value

0
Time

09:00

09:30

10:00

10:30

11:00

ON Time• After a screen configured with the Calendar is displayed, if the time is in between ON Time and OFF
Time, 1 is written to the Report Device Address.
Writes 1 to notify that ON Time has already elapsed
Report Device Address 1
M0 value

9

0
09:00

09:30
ON Time

10:00

10:30

Turn on the main unit power
Open screen

Data Displays

Time

11:00
OFF Time■ OFF Time
Select this check box to configure the time to write 0 to the Report Device Address.
The time is configured according to the type of data.
• The value of Report Device Address is retained even when the current time exceeds OFF Time.
Report Device Address 1
M0 value

Value of device address retained after OFF Time elapses

0
Time

10:00

10:30

11:00

11:30

12:00

OFF Time• After a screen configured with the Calendar is displayed, if the time exceeds OFF Time, 0 is written to
the Report Device Address.
Writes 0 to notify that OFF Time has already elapsed
Report Device Address 1
M0 value

0
Time

10:00
ON Time

10:30

11:00
OFF Time

11:30

12:00

Turn on the main unit power
Open screen■ Report Device Address
Specifies the bit device to write the value to at ON Time and OFF Time.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-213

11 Calendar● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

Picture:Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.

None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed. Only the text is displayed.

■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange9-214

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11 Calendar■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

Screen12/07 13:45

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

9

Screen12/07 13:45

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

Data Displays

Height9-215

11 Calendar● Format Tab■ FontSelects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Stroke*1, 7-Segment
7-Segment can only be configured when Date & Time, Date, Time & Date or Time is selected for Clock Typeon the General tab. The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-6.
■ SizeSpecifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary based on the model.
Model
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Font

Size

Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, 7-Segment

8 to 512

Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul
Stroke, 7-Segment

8x16, 16x16
8 to 128

When Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul is selected for Font, regardless of
the Size setting, the single-byte characters in the following text boxes are displayed with 8x16 and the
double-byte characters are displayed with 16x16.
• Time Settings: Separator, AM Symbol, PM Symbol• Date Settings: Separator, Type• Day of the Week Settings: Type■ Style*1
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Magnification*1
W, H:
Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
Can only be set when Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic is selected for Font.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

9-216

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11 Calendar■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “5 Text Alignment” on page A-7.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

9
Data Displays

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-217

11 Calendar● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The Calendar is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. Whendisabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the time is not displayed. However, if the Not show Calendar checkbox under While not satisfying the condition is selected, the plate and flange are also hidden and the part image
is not displayed.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON, Device Address is LM0, and the Not show Calendar check box under
While not satisfying the condition is cleared.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Calendar does not display the time.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Calendar displays the time.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Hide
time

LM0: 1Showtime
12/07 13:45■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Calendar from the following.
Always visible: The Calendar is always enabled.
12/07 13:45

Calendar state

Always show time

9-218

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11 Calendar

While ON:

Enables the Calendar when the value of device address is 1.
Example: The Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying thecondition.
1
Value of
Device Address

0
12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

Show time

Show time

Show time

Calendar state
Hide time

While OFF:Show time

Hide time

Hide time

Enables the Calendar when the value of device address is 0.
Example: The Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying thecondition.
1
Value of
Device Address

0
12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

Calendar stateShow time

Hide time

Show time

Hide time

Hide time

Hide time

Show time

9

While satisfying the condition:

Data Displays

Enables the Calendar when the condition is satisfied.
Example: The Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying thecondition.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied
12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

12/07 13:45

Show time

Show time

Show time

Calendar state
Hide time

Show time

Show time

Hide time■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. Maximum number is 80 characters.
■ Not show Calendar
When this check box is cleared, the part image is not displayed when the condition is not satisfied.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-219

11 Calendar● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to place the parts on the top layer. When drawings and parts overlap, those place on the top
layer are displayed in preference. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

9-220

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11 Calendar● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)

9No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-221

Data Displays■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

11 Calendar
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130
12/07 13:45

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Calendar

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

130

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

9-222

Main unit

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

BS

p CLR

12/07 13:45

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

11 Calendar● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

9
Data Displays■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Calendar on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

9-223

11 Calendar

9-224

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 10

ChartsThis chapter describes how to configure charts and meters and their operation on the main unit.

1

Bar Chart
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Bar Chart is Used
Bar charts and peak charts can be used to display word device values.
• Display word device values in a bar chart
External device
D100 :-50

D200 :

120

D300 :

40

Main unit• Display word device values in a peak chart
External device-50

D200 :

120

D300 :

40

ChartsD100 :

10

Main unit• Make the chart flash when the displayed data exceeds the maximum or minimum
External device
D100 :

20

D200 :

80

D300 :

40

D100 :-50

D200 :

90

D300 :

120

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Main unit
Range: Value
Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100
When Data Over
Flash: Selected

10-1

1 Bar Chart

1.2

Bar Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for bar charts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Bar Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Bar Chart.
3 Double-click the placed Bar Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Data Over tab, Scale tab, Label tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in
Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Bar Chart on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

10-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart

1.3

Properties of Bar Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab

10
Charts■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Selects the type of chart from the following items.
Horizontal Bar, Vertical Bar, Horizontal Peak, Vertical Peak
Peak charts only display the tip of the bar chart.
Horizontal Bar

Vercal Bar

Horizontal Peak

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualVercal Peak

10-3

1 Bar Chart■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the data type handled by the chart from the following.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F)For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Origin, Minimum, Maximum:Specifies the origin, minimum, and maximum for the chart.
(Data Type)*1: Selects the data type to use for the Origin, Minimum, and Maximum.
Value:

Uses a constant value.

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
The origin, minimum, and maximum that can be specified during Basic mode and when
Value is selected vary based on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device Address is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If the data displayed in the chart is invalid, 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address
number+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” onpage 4-34 and Chapter 37 “Processing error” on page 37-3.
An error occurs in the following states:• The setting of Origin, Minimum, or Maximum are invalid, or the Minimum and Maximum are thesame values.
• Data Type is BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) and the value cannot be expressed with the data
type selected for the read data
The chart cannot be displayed when an error has occurred.
Even if the value of device address is changed while the trigger condition is not satisfied, the minimum andmaximum are not updated.
■ Reverse axis
Select this check box to flip the axis of the graph.
Horizontal chart (Horizontal Bar, Horizontal Peak):Check box:

ClearedCheck box:

Selected

Direction of graph:

From left to right

Direction of graph:

From right to left

100

100

0

50

50

0

Vertical chart (Vertical Bar, Vertical Peak):Check box:

ClearedCheck box:

Selected

Direction of graph:

From bottom to top

Direction of graph:

From top to bottom

100

0

50

50

0

100

*1 Advanced mode only

10-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● Data Tab■ Number of Data
Specifies the number of data to be displayed in the chart(1 to 10).

10

No.:

Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch10).
For Horizontal Bar and Horizontal Peak, the numbers are listed in order from top. For Vertical
Bar and Vertical Peak, the numbers are listed in order from the left.
Vercal Bar

Horizontal Bar

Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3

Device Address: Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the chart.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor where you can edit the device address. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72
Fg. Normal:

Selects the foreground color of the chart when normal. (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades)
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the foreground color of thechart when normal.

Fg. Over*1:

Selects the foreground color of the chart when data over. (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades)
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the foreground color of thechart when data over.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-5

Charts■ Settings
Lists the chart settings. The list shows the numbers, source device addresses, and colors for the chart.

1 Bar Chart

Bg. Normal:

Selects the background color of the chart when normal. (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades)
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the background color of thechart when normal.

Bg. Over*1:

Selects the background color of the chart when data over. (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades)
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the background color of thechart when data over.

Pattern:

Selects the chart pattern or tonal gradation.
Double clicking the cell displays the Pattern Palette where you can change the chart pattern or tonal
gradation.

■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.

*1 Advanced mode only

10-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed.

10■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
0

50

100

■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color
Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange050

100

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-7

Charts■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.

1 Bar Chart■ Space between Bars*1
Specifies the spacing for the bar chart (0 to 100 dots).
Scale not shown

Show scale

Chart spacing

Chart spacing
Chart spacing

Chart spacing

Chart spacing
0

Chart spacing

Example:Space between Bars is 10.

100

200

Space between Bars is 0.

10 dots

10 dots

10 dots■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X（0, 0）
Screen

Y

Parts
0

50

100

■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight050

100*1 Advanced mode only

10-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

1 Bar Chart● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Range
Select data type.
Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.

Device Address:

Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a word device value.

10
ChartsValue:

Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on thedata type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device Address is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-9

1 Bar Chart■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the allowable range is exceeded.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Flash:

Select this check box to make the chart flash when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range.

Report:Select this check box to write 1 in the Report Device Address when the displayed data exceeds theallowable range.
Report Device Address: Specifies the Report Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Example: If the word device value of the reading source is “110” which is higher than the upper limit of “100” ,or“-10” which is below the lower limit of “0”, a value of 1 will be written to LM0 and the displayed bar will
flash.
Range: Value
Minimum: 0

Ch1 data

60

110

80

10

Ch2 data

20

50

10

-10

Maximum: 100
When Data Over
Ch1
Ch2Flash: Selected
Display

Report: Selected

050

Report Device Address: LM0

0

50

100

0

50

Flashing

Data over notification: LM0

10-10

100

0

1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

100

0

50

100

Flashing
01

1 Bar Chart● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The options on the Scale tab vary based on the type selected with Chart Type on the General tab.
Horizontal Bar, Horizontal Peak: X-Axis
Vertical Bar, Vertical Peak:Y-Axis10

Major Division count: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).
Minor Division count: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).
Color:
Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale.
Digits:
Sets the number of digits to be displayed (1 to 10).
Can only be set when Float32(F) is selected for Data Type under the
General tab.
Display Floating Point: Select this check box to display a floating point along the scale.
Can only be set when Float32(F) is selected for Data Type under the
General tab.
Floating Digits:
Sets the number of digits for the fractional parts of numbers (1 to 8)
from the number of digits specified for Digits.
Can only be set when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
Font:
Selects the font used for displayed text from the following.
Western*1, Standard*2, Stroke*2, 7-Segment
Style*2:
Size:

The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
Selects Regular or Bold for the character style to be displayed.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
Specifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be
set vary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, 7-Segment

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke, 7-Segment

8 to 128*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-11

Charts■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a chart.

1 Bar Chart

Magnification*2:
Color:

W, H: Selects magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for the displayed text.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.

■ Show Gridline
Select this check box to display grid lines on the chart. Grid lines are displayed above the chart. Can only be set when
the Show Ticks check box is selected.
Display Position: Select from Scale and Data Over to specify the grid line display position.
Scale:

Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale divisions.
Grid line

Data Over: Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for Maximum andMinimum under the Data Over tab.
Minimum

Maximum

Line Type:

Selects the type of grid lines from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot

Color:

Specifies grid line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

10-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● Label Tab
The Label tab is only displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Show Label for X-Axis, Show Label for Y-Axis
Select this check box to display a label on X-axis and Y-axis scales.
The options on the Label tab vary based on the type selected with Chart Type on the General tab.
Horizontal Bar, Horizontal Peak: Show Label for X-Axis
Vertical Bar, Vertical Peak:Show Label for Y-Axis

10

Selects the font for text used in labels from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic,
Cyrillic
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available
Text” on page 2-6.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when text registered in the Text Manager are used forlabels.
Clickto display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.

Text:

Inputs characters to be displayed for labels. Maximum number is 40 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to Chapter 2“1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.

Color:

Selects the color of the text used for labels (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to open the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
If the area for displaying the label is too small, the label will not be displayed properly.

■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for labels. Can only be set when the Show Labelfor X-Axis or Show Label for Y-Axis check box is selected.
If a carriage return (CR) is included, the characters after the CR are not displayed. However, if Windows
Font is set for the specified Text ID, all the characters are displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-13

ChartsFont:

1 Bar Chart● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The bar chart is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. Selectthe operation when the condition is not satisfied as Not display Chart data or Not update Chart data under
While not satisfying the condition.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON, Device Address is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is Not display
Chart data.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the bar chart is not displayed.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the bar chart is displayed.
Main unit
Hide chart

LM0: 0CondionNotsasﬁed

0

50

100

Show chart

LM0: 1

CondionSasﬁed

0

50

100

Data over does not operate for hidden bar charts. Data over is reported if the minimum or maximum isexceeded when the bar chart changes from hidden to displayed.
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the bar chart from the following.
Always visible:

The bar chart is always enabled.
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

Display050

Update

10-14

100

0

50

100

UpdateWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

050

Update100

050Update100

050Update100

1 Bar Chart

While ON:

Enables the bar chart when the value of device address is 1.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data.
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

1
Value ofdevice address0

Display
0

50

100

0

While OFF:

50

100

UpdateDo not update

0

50

100

0

50

100

0

UpdateDo not update

50

100

UpdateEnables the bar chart when the value of device address is 0.
Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data.
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

1
Value ofdevice address0

Display050

100

Update

0

50

100

0

50

100

0

UpdateDo not update

50

100

Update050

100

Do not update

Example: While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data.
Ch1 data

50

60

70

80

90

Ch2 data

10

30

50

70

90

SasﬁedCondion
Not sasﬁed

Display050

Update

100

0

50

100

Do not update

0

50

100

Update050Update

100

0

50

100

Do not update■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10
Charts

While satisfying the condition: Enables the bar chart when the condition is satisfied.

10-15

1 Bar Chart■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. Maximum number is 80 characters.
■ While not satisfying the condition
Select the operation when Bar Chart is disabled.

10-16

Not display Chart data:

The plate and flange are displayed, but Bar Chart is not displayed.

Not update Chart data:

The last updated Bar Chart is displayed. The Bar Chart does not change.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-17

ChartsIf you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

10

1 Bar Chart● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

10-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bar Chart
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

ButtonNo.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

10
Charts130

Main unit

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

10-19

1 Bar Chart● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the bar chart on the editing screen

10-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart2

Line Chart
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

How the Line Chart is Used
The line chart can be used to display values of device addresses sampled with the Data Log function and the values ofmultiple word devices.
• Display the values of device addresses sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart
Main unit

External device
100

D100

D101

D102

60

30

10

80
60
40
20
0
-20

Stop Strt

80

40

10

70

40

20

70

50

10

100
80
60
40
20
0

90

70

10

-20

Stop Strt

10
Charts• There are two types of trend charts, a normal trend chart and a pen recorder trend chart.
• If the Data Log data displayed in the chart is deleted, the chart display is erased.
• Display cursor on Log Trend and control it by touching screen
Main unit

External device

Cursor

11/10/01
12:00:00

Stop Strt

Date and timeat the cursor

11/10/01
12:10:00

Stop Strt• Display the values of multiple, continuous device addresses in a single line chart
Main unit

External device
D100 :

1

D101 :

5

D102 :

10

100
80
60
40
20

D103 :

50

D104 :

20

D105 :

60

D106 :

10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

0
-20

10-21

2 Line Chart

2.2

Line Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Line Charts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Line Chart.
3 Double-click the placed Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

You can set the default for the Line Chart on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

10-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

2.3

Properties of Line Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab

10
Charts■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Selects the type of chart from the following.
Log Trend (Normal):Shows values of device addresses sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart.
The displayed chart is updated each time the latest data is sampled and the latest data is
charted from the left edge. If the sampled data exceeds the number of display points, theentire chart is shifted to the left by the configured scroll size and the display is updated.
Example: Display Points on the X-Axis tab is 5 and Number of automatic scrolls
when updating display is 1:
Ch1 data

5

30

80

90

110

Ch2 data

0

10

30

40

40

Display

110
30

120

120

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Display point 2

Display point 3

Display point 4

Display point 5

20

Scroll,Operaon Display point 1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

display point 6

10-23

2 Line Chart

Log Trend (Pen Recorder): Shows values of device addresses sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart.
The displayed chart is updated each time the latest data is sampled and the latest data isalways displayed at the right edge. The entire chart shifts to the left point by point andthe display is updated.
Example: Display Points on the X-Axis tab is 5:
Ch1 data

5

30

80

90

110

Ch2 data

0

10

30

40

40

110
30

120

120

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Display point 2

Display point 3

Display point 4

Display point 5

Scroll,display point 6

Display

Operaon Display point 1

20

To display multiple items of data, set the sampling conditions and data size for the data to display to thesame settings. The data cannot be displayed if its sampling conditions or data size is different.
The chart can display a maximum of 20 lines.

Device Address Display:

Display the values of multiple, continuous device addresses as a single line chart.
Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the start address
number value (control status). The value of the starting address number is automaticallychanges to 0 after updating and clearing the display.
The number of values of device addresses to display is specified by the value of start
address number + 1.
The values of device addresses from start address number + 2 are displayed on the chart.
The data size of the start address number and the start address number + 1 is 16 bits,
and that of the start address number + 2 and later varies based on the data type selectedwith Data Format on the Y-Axis tab. For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.

Example: Data Type under Data Format on the Y-Axis tab is "UBIN32(D)" and Reference Device Address
under Data is D100.
The display updates when the value of D100 changes from 0 to 1. The display is erased when the valuechanges to 2. The display is first erased and then updated when the value changes to 3. The value of D100
is automatically changes to 0 after updating and clearing the display.
0→1

0

0→1

0→1

0→1

D100-1 value Erase

0

0→1

0

0

0→1

(Start address number +1) D101 value
Number of device addresses to display values

5

5

3

5

5

(Start address number +2) D102 value
The first plotted point

10

10

70

10

20

(Start address number +4) D103 value
The second plotted point

50

50

100

50

80

(Start address number +6) D104 value
The third plotted point

20

20

90

20

30

(Start address number +8) D105 value
The forth plotted point

60

60

110

60

90

(Start address number) D100-0 value Update(Start address number +10) D106 value
The fifth plotted point

Display

Operation

10

10

80

10

20

120

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

20

UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateUpdateDo not erase

Erase

Do not erase

Do not erase

Erase

Number of display

Number of display

points changed

points changed

If there are many items of data to display, it may take some time to update the display.

10-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ Restart Chart
Select this check box to display the chart from the beginning when switching screens.
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for Chart
Type.
Main unit
100

Main unit

Main unit
100

1234

80

80

60

60

40

40

20

20

0

0

-20

-20

Stop Strt

Stop Strt

Base screen 1

Display chartfrom beginning

Switch screen

Base screen 2

Switch screen

Base screen 1

10ChartsWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-25

2 Line Chart● View Tab■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
10080Plate color

60
40
20
0
-20

■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
100
80
60
40

Flange

20
0
-20

10-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:

Selects a pattern or tonal gradation for the button.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern or tonal gradation from the Pattern Palette.
100
80
60
40
20
0

Buttons-20

Stop Strt

Buttons can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons.
■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X（0, 0）Y

Screen

10

100
80
60

Display

40
20
0
-20

Stop Strt

Buttons

ChartsWhen grouped with a button, the Coordinates is the upper left coordinate of the display.
■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
Screen100
80
60Height40
20

Display0-20

Stop Strt

Buttons

It is the size of the grouped parts as one part.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-27

2 Line Chart● X-Axis Tab■ Display Points
Specifies the maximum number of points of data to display on the chart (2 to 65535).
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for Chart
Type.
(Data Type):

Selects the data type to use with the display points.
Value:

Uses a constant value.

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
(Display points): Specifies the maximum number of points (2 to 65535) for the data to be displayed on the chart.
The handled data type is UBIN16(W) only.
When Device Address is selected for (Data Type), the display points can be specified in the word
device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
• The maximum number of data that can be displayed is the number of dots on the X-axis of the graph(the horizontal size of the area displaying the graph). When setting the value exceeding the number ofdots on the X-axis as the Display Points, thinned out data is displayed.
Number of dots on X-axis
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20

• If a value larger than the number of dots on the X-axis (Width of the area where the graph is displayed)is written to the device address, the value of the device address will be the number of dots on the X-axis.
And, if the value is less than 2 (minimum value), the value of the device address will be 2.
• When the value of device address changes, the chart display is updated. At this time, chart data notsaved to the data storage area is not displayed.
• Even if the value of device address is changed while the trigger condition is not satisfied, the chart
display is not updated.

10-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ Number of automatic scrolls when updating display

Specifies the number of points of data to scroll when updating the chart display (1 to Screen size (Horizontal)).
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) is selected for Chart Type.
(Data Type): Selects the data type to use with the scroll size.
Value:

Uses a constant value.

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
(Scroll size): Specifies the number of points of data to scroll (1 to Screen size (Horizontal)). The handled data type is
UBIN16(W) only.
When Device Address is selected for (Data Type), the scroll size can be specified in the word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
• If the value of the device address is smaller than 1 (minimum value), then the Number of automatic
scrolls remains at 1. If the value is larger than Display Points, then Scroll Size is the value of Display
Points.
• When the value of Display Points is larger than the number of dots on the X-axis (the horizontal size ofthe area displaying the graph), scroll the chart by the number of dots specified in Number of
automatic scrolls when updating display.
Example: Display Points is 5 and Scroll Size is 3.
2. Shi data 3 points le

120

120

120

100

100

100

80

80

80

60

60

60

40

40

40

20

20

20

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Charts

1. Reached maximum amountof data to display

10

3. Display next data

10-29

2 Line Chart■ Display of the saved data

This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected from
Chart Type on the General tab.
Number of Scroll:Specifies the number of points of data to scroll the chart left or right (1 to the Screen
size (Horizontal)) when stopping the chart display.

Specify by Device Address:

Select this check box and specify a source word device to specify the Number of
Scroll using the value of the specified device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the main unit starts operation, it copies the value of Number of Scroll as
the initial value to the device address.

Display data from specified date: When stopping the chart display, to display the chart with the specified Start
Date as the left end, select this check box and specify the bit device or the bit
number of the word device to control the display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Displays the chart for Display Points with Start Date as the left end when thevalue of device address changes from 0 to 1.
Start Date and Time:

Specifies the Start Date as the values of word devices for the data to display in thechart. It handles as a value whose data type is BCD4(B).
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
For address number assignment, refer to “Specifying Date and Time with Values ofdevice addresses” on page 10-32.
This option can only be configured when Display data from specified date check box
is selected.

Specify displaying period:

To specify the range of data displayed on the chart, select this check box andspecify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to control the display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Displays the chart from Start Date as the left end to End Date when the value of
device address changes from 0 to 1.
This option can only be configured when Display data from specified datecheck box is selected.

End Date and Time: Specifies the End Date as the values of word devices for the data to display in the chart.
It handles as a value whose data type is BCD4(B).
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
For address number assignment, refer to “Specifying Date and Time with Values ofdevice addresses” on page 10-32.

10-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart• The maximum number of data that can be displayed is the number of dots on the X-axis of the graph(the horizontal size of the area displaying the graph). When the number of data from Start Date to End
Date exceeds the number of dots on the X-axis, thinned out data is displayed.
Number of dots on X-axis
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20

• If Start Date and End Date are the same or End Date is earlier than Start Date, the chart display
will not be updated.
Display data of specified date and time at the center of chart
To display the data of the specified date and time at the center of the chart, specify the bit device or the bit
number of the word device to control the display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Date and time at the center: Specify the date and time of the data to display the center of the chart. It handles

10

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Charts

Display the chart with the data of the specified date and time as the center when the value of device addresschanges from 0 to 1.
as a value whose data type is BCD4(B).

For address number assignment, refer to “Specifying Date and Time with Values ofdevice addresses” on page 10-32.
• Even if you move the data displayed on the graph by using Display data of specified date and timeat the center of chart, the cursor does not move.
• If there is not enough data to center the data for the specified date and time, the oldest or latest data isdisplayed.
• When the specified date and time is older than the oldest data, the oldest data is displayed on the left
side of the chart.
• When the specified date and time is newer than the newest data, the newest data is displayed on theright side of the chart.
• In the following situations, the cursor does not move to the specified date and time even if the value of
device address configured in Display data of specified date and time at the center of chart
becomes 1,- Trigger Condition is not satisfied.
- The specified date and time are invalid.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-31

2 Line Chart

Control graph display by value of Device Address:
To scroll the chart to display past data and to display the cursor, the chart display updating must be stopped. To
control updating the display, select this check box and specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device
to control the display.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Display updating stops when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1. Display updating restarts when thevalue of device address changes from 1 to 0.
When displaying a line graph using a file (.BIN) saved in external memory, the data on a channel that does
not have a BIN file will not be displayed. For details about the BIN file, refer to Chapter 13 “Save Data Log
Data and Display in Line Chart or Data Log Display” on page 13-23.
Right Scroll Device Address, Left Scroll Device Address:
The chart can be scrolled to the right or to the left when display updating is stopped. This option specifies
the bit device or the bit number of the word device to scroll the chart left or right.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The chart scrolls right or left one point of data each time the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
These options can only be configured when the Control graph display by value of Device Address
check box is selected.
Value of Device
Address for
Right scroll LM0 120
Display

0

0

0→1

0→1

0→1

0

120

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Operation Stop updating

Scroll right 1
data point

20

Stop updating, thenscroll right 3 data
pointsScroll right 1
data point

Scroll right 1
data point

When the value of Display Points is larger than the number of dots on the X-axis (the horizontal size ofthe area displaying the graph), scroll the chart by the number of dots specified in Number of Scroll.
Specifying Date and Time with Values of device addresses
Using this option requires the sequential address number of 6 words starting from the specified device
address. The data is handled as BCD4(B) values ​​in the order of year, month, day, hour, minute, and second.
Example: Top Device Address is LDR100, and the date and time is October 1 2018 12:01:30.
Read source

10-32

Date and time data(the address number of Top Device Address)

LDR 1002018(Year)+1

LDR 101

10(Month)+2

LDR 102

1

(Day)

+3

LDR 10312(Hour)+4

LDR 1041(Minute)+5

LDR 105

30(Second)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ ScaleIf the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.

Show Ticks:

10

Select this check box to display a scale on a X-axis.

Major Division count: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).

Color:

Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Select the scale type from Outward or Inward.
Displays the X-axis ticks outwards.
Y-axisOutward:X-axisInward:Displays the X-axis ticks inwards.
Y-axisScale Type:X-axisWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-33

ChartsMinor Division count: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20). This option can only be set whenShow Date and Time data check box is cleared.

2 Line Chart

Show Date and Time data:

To show the date and time data on the X-axis, select this check box andspecify the font, display type, and display position. This option can only
be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen
Recorder) is selected for Chart Type on the General tab.

Display Number:

The number of date and time data displayed according to the scale of the X-axis. The
displayed number is Major Division count +1.

Font:

Configures the format to display the date and time data.
Font:

Selects the font for displayed characters from the following.
Western*1, Standard*2, Stroke*2, 7-Segment

The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

Style*2:

Selects the character style as Regular or Bold.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Font.

Size:

Specifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be setvary based on the model.
Model

Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, 7-Segment

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke, 7-Segment

8 to 128

Magnification*2: W, H: Selects the zoom factor for characters (0.5, 1 to 4, 8).
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for
Font.
Text Color:

Display Type:

Selects the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color
Palette.

Configures the display type for the date and time data.
Display items:

Selects the items to display for the date and time data from the following.
Time, Date, Date & Time
If Date & Time is selected, the date is displayed centered on the firstline and the time is displayed centered on the second line.

Date Type:

Selects the display type of the date from the following.
YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM
This option can only be configured when Date or Date & Time isselected for Display items.

Year:

Selects the display type for the year as Double Figures or Four
Figures.
This option can only be configured when Date or Date & Time isselected for Display items.

Month:

Selects the display type for the month as 1/2/3/... or
Jan/Feb/Mar/....
This option can only be configured when Date or Date & Time isselected for Display items.

Time:

Selects the display type for the time from the following.
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, MM:SS
HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds

Example: Display items is configured as Date & Time, Date Type is YY/MM/DD,
Month is 1/2/3/..., Year is Double Figures, Time is HH:MM:SS.
23/03/01
12:01:30*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

10-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

Display Position:

Select the display position of the date and time data from Above X-axis or Below Xaxis.
Displays the date and time data above the X-axis.
Example: Scale Type is set to Outward.
Y-axisAbove X-axis:

23/03/01 23/03/01
12:01:30 12:08:30

23/03/01
12:15:30

23/03/01
12:22:30

X-axisY-axisScale Type is set to Inward.

23/03/01 23/03/01
12:01:30 12:08:30

23/03/01
12:15:30

23/03/01
12:22:30

X-axis

Displays the date and time data below the X-axis.
Example: Scale Type is set to Outward.
Y-axisBelow X-axis:

23/03/01 23/03/01
12:01:30 12:08:30

23/03/01
12:15:30

10

23/03/01
12:22:30

ChartsX-axisY-axisScale Type is set to Inward.

23/03/01 23/03/01
12:01:30 12:08:30

23/03/01
12:15:30

23/03/01
12:22:30

X-axisY2

Y1

If Display Position is set to Above X-axis and Scale Type of Y-axis is set to Inward, the date and time
data where the scale is displayed will not be displayed.

23/03/01
12:08:30

The date and time
data is not displayed.

23/03/01
12:15:30

The date and time
data is not displayed.

X-axisShow Gridline:

Select this check box to display grid lines on the chart. The grid lines are displayed on thechart. Can only be set when the Show Ticks check box is selected.
Line Type:

Selects the type of grid lines from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot

Color:

Specifies grid line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color
Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-35

2 Line Chart■ Cursor
This option can only be displayed when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for Chart
Type on the General tab.

Display cursor:

Select this check box and specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device todisplay the cursor.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Displays the cursor when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1. The cursor isdisplayed at the position counted from the left side of the chart. The initial position of the
cursor is the position where Display Points is 1.

Control cursor by touching screen:
Select this check box to operate the cursor by touch.
When the cursor is touched and selected, it begins to flash. During this moment, by
touching the area to display the graph line, you can move the cursor to the touched
point, terminate the selection, and halt the flashing effect.
To move the cursor one point at a time, press and hold the range of 33% from both endsof the area to display the graph line for more than 1 second.
Example: The number of X-axis dots is 100 dots.
The valid range for operation of pressing and holding for more than 1 second is
33 dots from both ends.
Area to display the graph line

Cursor33dots33dotsValid range for operationof pressing and holding
for more than 1 second(Move left by one point)

Valid range for operationof pressing and holding
for more than 1 second(Move right by one point)

100dots

The flash interval is specified with Flashing Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

10-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

Specify Cursor Display Position by value of Device Address:
This value of device address is the cursor's display position. Specifies the word device
that is the display position of the cursor.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If the value of the device address configured here is outside the range of points
configured by Display Points, the cursor is displayed at the minimum or the maximum
value of the display points.
Example: When Display Points is 50 and the value of the device address configured bySpecify Cursor Display Position by value of Device Address is 100, thecursor is displayed at the 50 (maximum) position.
CursorMaximum number of display points• The display position of the cursor specified in Specify Cursor Display Position by value of Device Address
has priority over the touch operation.
• When the display position of the cursor is changed by touch operation, the value of the device address
set in Specify Cursor Display Position by value of Device Address is also changed.

Store numerical data:

To store the numerical data at the position indicated by the cursor in internal devices,
select this check box and specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The data is stored in continuous device addresses starting from the specified device
address in order from Ch1 in the amount of charts displayed. The number of useddevice addresses varies based on the data size. If there is no data at the cursor
position, 0 is stored in the device address.
Example: Specifies LDR10 in Store numeric data.
Ch1 to Ch3 (Data Type: UBIN16(W)) on the Y-axis (No. 1)
Ch1 and Ch2 (Data Type: UBIN32(D)) on the Y-axis (No. 2)
Destination Device
Addresses

Data Type

Destination Data

LDR10

UBIN16(W)Ch1 numerical data of Y-axis (No.1)

LDR11

UBIN16(W)Ch1 numerical data of Y-axis (No.1)

LDR12

UBIN16(W)Ch1 numerical data of Y-axis (No.1)

UBIN32(D)Ch2 numerical data of Y-axis (No.1)

UBIN32(D)Ch2 numerical data of Y-axis (No.1)

LDR13
LDR14
LDR15
LDR16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-37

ChartsCursor Position data:10

2 Line Chart

Store date and time data: To store the date and time data at the position indicated by the cursor in internal
devices, select this check box and specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Stores the value of data type BCD4(B) in the order of year, month, day, hour, minute,and second in consecutive address numbers starting with the specified device
address. If there is no data at the cursor position, 0 is stored in the device address.
Destination Device Addresses

Data Type

Destination Data

Address Number+0

BCD4(B)“Year” of the date and time data

Address Number+1

BCD4(B)“Month” of the date and time data

Address Number+2

BCD4(B)“Day” of the date and time data

Address Number+3

BCD4(B)“Hour” of the date and time data

Address Number+4

BCD4(B)“Minute” of the date and time data

Address Number+5

BCD4(B)“Second” of the date and time data

Example: The date and time data for October 1, 2011 12:01:30 are stored in LDR50.
Destination Device Addresses

Destination Data

LDR50

2021

LDR51

10

LDR52

1

LDR53

12

LDR54

1

LDR55

30

Cursor Style: Configures the cursor style.
Line Type:Selects the cursor line type from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be
configured when 1 dot or 2 dots is selected for Line Width.
Line Size: Selects the cursor line size from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
Line Color:Selects the line color for the cursor (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Show date and time data at the cursor position:
To show the date and time data at the position indicated by the cursor, select this check box andspecify the font and display type.
Font:

Configures the format to display the date and time data.
Font:

Selects the font for displayed characters from the following.
Western*1, Standard*2, Stroke*2, 7-Segment

The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

Style*2:

Selects the character style as Regular or Bold.
This option can only be configured when Standard is selected for Font.

Size:

Specifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes that can be set vary
based on the model.
Model

Size

Western, 7-Segment

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Stroke, 7-Segment

8 to 128*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

10-38

Font

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

Magnification*2:

W, H: Selects the zoom factor for characters (0.5, 1 to 4, 8).
This option can only be configured when Standard isselected for Font.

Text Color:

Selects the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16
shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color fromthe Color Palette.

Background Color: Selects the background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16
shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color fromthe Color Palette.
Display Type: Configures the display type for the date and time data at the position indicated by the
cursor.
Selects the items to display for the date and time data from thefollowing.
Time, Date, Date & Time
If Date & Time is selected, the date is displayed centered on thefirst line and the time is displayed centered on the second line.

Date Type:

Selects the display type of the date from the following.
YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM
This option can only be configured when Date or Date & Time isselected for Display items.

Year:

Selects the display type for the year as Double Figures or Four
Figures.
This option can only be configured when Date or Date & Time isselected for Display items.

Month:

Selects the display type for the month as 1/2/3/... or
Jan/Feb/Mar/....
This option can only be configured when Date or Date & Time isselected for Display items.

Time:

Selects the display type for the time from the following.
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, MM:SS
HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds

Example: Display items is configured as Date & Time, Date Type is
YY/MM/DD, Month is 1/2/3/..., Year is Double Figures, Time is
HH:MM:SS.
Cursor

11/10/01
12:01:30

Cursor position
date and time data

*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-39

10
Charts

Display items:

2 Line Chart

Display Position:

Select the display position of the date and time data at the cursor position fromAbove X-axis or Below X-axis.

Y-axisAbove X-axis: Displays the date and time data at the cursor position above the Xaxis.
Example: Scale Type is set to Outward.

23/03/01
12:08:30

X-axisY-axisScale Type is set to Inward.

23/03/01
12:08:30

X-axisY-axisBelow X-axis: Displays the date and time data at the cursor position below the Xaxis.
Example: Scale Type is set to Outward.

23/03/01
12:08:30

X-axisY-axisScale Type is set to Inward.

23/03/01
12:08:30

X-axisWhen both the date and time data on the scale and the date and time data at the cursor position aredisplayed, the date and time data at the cursor position is displayed in front.
If there is no data at the cursor position, the date and time is displayed as "*".
Cursor**/:**/:**** ** **

10-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ LabelShow Label: Select this check box to display a label on X-axis scales.
Use Text Manager: Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for labels. Can
only be set when the Show Label check box is selected.
If a carriage return (CR) is included in the character displayed on the label, the characters after the CR are
not displayed.
Font:

Selects the font for text used in labels from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-6.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when text registered in the Text Manager
are used for labels.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text:

Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
Color:

Selects the color of the text used for labels (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to open the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

If the area for displaying the label is too small, the label will not be displayed properly.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-41

10
Charts

Inputs characters to be displayed for labels. Maximum number is 40 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

2 Line Chart● Y-Axis Tab■ Number of Axes

Specifies the number of Y-axis (1 to 4*1).

Example: Display sample when Number of Axes is configured to 4 and the Scale and Label are enabled

50
40
30
20
10
0

100

50000

80

40000

60

30000

40

20000

20

10000

0
-20

0

Y-axis(No. 4)
55
50
45
40
35
30

Label for Y-axis (No. 4)

120

60

Y-axis(No. 2)
Label for Y-axis (No. 2)

70

Label for Y-axis (No. 1)

Y-axis(No. 1)

Label for Y-axis (No. 3)

Y-axis(No. 3)■ Scale Type
Select the scale type from Outward or Inward.
Inward:Displays the X-axis ticks inwards.

Y-axisY-axisOutward: Displays the X-axis ticks outwards.

X-axisX-axis*1 When Chart Type is configured to Device Address Display on the General tab, 1 is configured.

10-42

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ Numerical Position
Select the display position of the numerical value from Outward or Inward.
Outward: Displays the numerical value outward on the Y-axis.

60

30

300

40

20

20

10

0

0

-20

50
45

200

40

100

35

0

30

55

400

50

60

300

45

40

200

40

100

35

0

30

120

60

100

50

80

40
30
20

20

10

0

0

-20

X-axis

Y4

40

400

500

70

Y2

80

55

Y1

50

500

Y3

100

Y4

120

60

Scale Type is set to Inward.

Y2

70

Y1

Y3

Example: Scale Type is set to Outward.

X-axisInward: Displays the numerical value inward on the Y-axis.

300

60

30

40

20

20

10
0

0
-20

200

45
40

100

35

0

30

100

50

80

500

55

400

50
45

60

300

30

40

200

40

20

20

10
0

0
-20

100

35

0

30

40

X-axis

Y4

40

50

400

120

60

Y2

80

70

Y1

50

55

500

Y3

100

Y4

120

60

Scale Type is set to Inward.

Y2

70

Y1

Y3

Example: Scale Type is set to Outward.

10

X-axisaxis with Data Format, Channel Settings*2, Data*3, Data Over, Scale, Label.

No.:

Displays the number of Y-axis (1 to 4*1).

Name:

Enter the name of Y-axis. The maximum number is 40 characters.

Up:

Shifts the selected Y-axis setting upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected Y-axis setting downward in the list.

*1 When Chart Type is configured to Device Address Display on the General tab, 1 is configured.
*2 This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected from Chart
Type on the General tab.
*3 This option can only be configured when Device Address Display is selected from Chart Type on the General tab.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-43

Charts■ (Y-Axis)
The number of Y-axis specified by Number of Axes is displayed. Configures the graph displayed on the selected Y-

2 Line Chart■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the data type handled by the chart from the following.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F)For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Minimum, Maximum: Specifies the minimum and maximum for the chart.
(Data Type):

Selects the data type to use for the minimum and the maximum.
Value:

Uses a constant value.

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type. For details, refer to Chapter
2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device Address is selected for (Data Type), the minimum and maximum can be
specified in the word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If the data displayed in the chart is invalid, 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address
number+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. If Chart Type is Device Address Display, aprocessing error occurs when the chart is initially displayed, when the display is updated, and when it iserased. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” on page 4-34 and Chapter 37 “Processing error”
on page 37-3.
An error occurs in the following states:• The setting of Origin, Minimum, or Maximum are invalid, or the Minimum and Maximum are thesame values.
• Data Type is BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) and the value cannot be expressed with the data
type selected for the read data
The chart cannot be displayed when an error has occurred.
• If the Chart Type is selected as Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder), the chart
display is updated when a value of device address is changed. At this time, chart data not saved to thedata storage area is not displayed.
• If the Chart Type is selected as Device Address Display, the minimum and maximum are updated
when the display is updated or erased.
• Even if the value of device address is changed while the trigger condition is not satisfied, the minimum
and maximum are not updated.
■ Channel Settings*2

No.:

Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch20).

Channel No.: Specifies the Data Log channel number to display on the chart (1 to 20).
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the channel number.
• If the Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area or the amount of log data saved in the data storage area
is different from other channels, the chart cannot be displayed. Use the channel data which have thesame settings of other channels.
• Different sampling conditions may not result in the expected line chart.
*2 This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected from Chart
Type on the General tab.

10-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

Data No.:Out of the data contained in the selected Data Log channel number, specifies the data number todisplay on the chart (1 to 128).
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the data number.

Line Type:

Selects the type of line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1
dot or 2 dots is selected for Line Width.
Double clicking the cell allows you to change the chart line type.

Line Size:

Selects the line size from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
Double clicking the cell allows you to change the chart line size.

Line Color:

Selects the line color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the chart line color.

You can register the settings from arbitrary numbers, they are aligned filled from the beginning after clicking
OK on the dialog box. Therefore, when the Properties dialog box is closed and reopened, the list isdisplayed filled from the beginning.
Trigger Type: Always visible: Always display the graph.
100
80
60

Chart state

40

10

20
0
-20

Always show chart

Charts

While ON:

The graph is displayed when the value of device address is 1.
Value ofdevice address

10Chart state

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Hide chart

Device Address:

Show chart

Hide chart

Show chart

Show chart

60
40
20

Hide chart

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Add:

Adds a channel to the list. Up to 20 channels total for all Y-axis.

Up:

Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.

Remove:Deletes the selected contents from the list.

Data Log Settings:

Displays the Data Log Settings dialog box where you can configure the channel
while checking the data to display.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-45

2 Line Chart■ Data*3

Reference Device Address:
Specifies the start address number of the data to display on the chart.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The data size for the device addresses is 16 bits.
Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the start address number value(control status).
Bit 15

Bit 2 Bit 0

0 : Do not update
1 : Update

Reserved

0 : Do not erase
1 : Erase

The number of values of device addresses to display is specified by the value of start address number + 1.
The values of device addresses from start address number + 2 are displayed on the chart.
Example: When Reference Device Address is set to D100, continuous device addresses are used
starting from D100. The used device addresses are as follows.
(Start address number)
+1
+2
+3
+4

Control status (display operation)

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104

Number of data to display values of device addresses on chart

Data to display values of device addresses on chart

Values of device addresses
D100

1

D101

5

D102

10

D103

50

D104

20

D105

60

Displayed chart
120
100
80
60

D105

D103

40
20

D106

10

0

D102

D104

D106

-20

*3 This option can only be configured when Device Address Display is selected from Chart Type on the General tab.

10-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

Line Type: Specifies the type of line. You can also specify it using the value of device address.
Value:

Selects the type of line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot

Device Address: Specifies the line type using the value of device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Line type is as follows:
Preset Value

1

2Line Type

Solid

Dot

3

4

Dash Long Dash

5
6
Long Dash Long Dash
Dot
Dot Dot

The line will be displayed with Solid when the value of device address is not 1 to 6 orwhen the line width is not 1 (1 dot).
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be displayed when 1 dot or
2 dots is selected for Line Width.
Line Size: Specifies the line size. You can also specify it using the value of device address.
Value:

Selects the line size from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots

Device Address: Specifies the line size using the value of device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Line width is as follows:
1
1 dot

2
2 dots3
3 dots5
5 dotsThe line will be displayed with 1 dot when the value of device address is not 1 to 3 or 5.
3 dots and 5 dots can only be displayed when Solid is selected for Line Type.

Line Type: Specifies the color of line. You can also specify it using the value of device address.
Value:

Selects the line color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Device Address: Specifies the line color using the value of device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Line color is specified by the color data. When the value of device address is other thanthe color number, the graph is displayed in 255 (white).
For color data, refer to Appendix “Color Data Correspondence Table” on page A-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-47

ChartsPreset ValueLine Width

10

2 Line Chart■ Data OverSpecifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum:

Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified differ according to the data type selectedwith Data Format. For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page
2-1.

When grid lines are displayed for the minimum and maximum, select the Show Gridline check box on the
Scale and then select Data Over.
Ch1 data
Range : Value
Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100

60

Ch2 data

Display

20

70

80

50

30

-10

120

120

120

120

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

20

10-48

110

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Ch1
Ch2

2 Line Chart■ Scale Tab

Style*2:
Size:

The characters that can be displayed depend on the font.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page2-6.
Selects Regular or Bold for the character style to be
displayed.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
Specifies the text size to be displayed. The fonts and sizes
that can be set vary based on the model.
Model

Magnification*2:
Color:Font

Size

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Western, 7-Segment

8 to 512

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T,
HG1G/1P

Stroke, 7-Segment

8 to 128

W, H: Selects magnification (0.5, 1 to 4, 8) for the
displayed text.
Can only be set when Standard is selected for Font.
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors,monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from theColor Palette.

If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-49

10
ChartsShow Ticks: Select this check box to display a scale on a chart.
Major Division count: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).
Minor Division count: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).
Color:
Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale. Can only be set for Y-Axis.
Digits:
Sets the number of digits to be displayed (1 to 10).
Can only be set when Float32(F) is selected for Data
Type under the General tab.
Display Floating Point: Select this check box to display a floating point along thescale.
Can only be set when Float32(F) is selected for Data
Type under the General tab.
Floating Digits:
Sets the number of digits for the fractional parts ofnumbers (1 to 8) from the number of digits specified for
Digits.
Can only be set when the Display Floating Point checkbox is selected.
Font:
Selects the font used for displayed text from the following.
Western*1, Standard*2, Stroke*2, 7-Segment

2 Line Chart

Show Gridline:

Select this check box to display grid lines on the chart. The grid lines are displayed on the chart.
Can only be set when the Show Ticks check box is selected.
Display Position: Select from Scale and Data Over to specify the grid line display position.
Scale:

Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale
divisions.

Grid lines

Data Over: Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for
Maximum and Minimum under the Data Over tab.
Maximum

Minimum

10-50

Line Type:

Selects the type of grid lines from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot

Color:

Specifies grid line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart■ Label Tab

Show Label: Select this check box to display a label on Y-axis scales.
Use Text Manager:

Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for labels. Can
only be set when the Show Label check box is selected.

If a carriage return (CR) is included in the character displayed on the label, the characters after the CR are
not displayed.
Font:

Selects the font for text used in labels from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central
European, Baltic, Cyrillic
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Text” on page 2-6.

Text ID:

Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when text registered in the Text Manager areused for labels.
Click

to display Text Manager.

Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text:

Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
Color:

Selects the color of the text used for labels (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to open the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

If the area for displaying the label is too small, the label will not be displayed properly.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-51

10
Charts

Inputs characters to be displayed for labels. Maximum number is 40 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.

2 Line Chart● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

The line chart is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. Whendisabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the chart is not displayed.
Example: Trigger Type is While ON and Device Address is LM0.
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the line chart is not displayed.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the line chart is displayed.
Main unit

CondionNotsasﬁedCondionSasﬁedLM0: 0Hide chart
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20

LM0: 1

Show chart
100
80
60
40
20
0
-20

■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the line chart from the following.
Always visible: The line chart is always enabled.
100
80
60

Chart state

40
20
0
-20

Always show chart

10-52

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart

While ON:

Enables the line chart when the value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address

0Chart state

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Show chart

Show chart

Show chart

Hide chart

Hide chart

While OFF:

60

40
20

Show chart

Hide chart

40
20

Enables the line chart when the value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address

0Chart state

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Show chart

Hide chart

Show chart

Hide chart

Hide chart

Hide chart

40
20

Show chart

While satisfying the condition:
Enables the line chart when the condition is satisfied.
SasﬁedCondion10

Not sasﬁed
100

100

100

100

100

100

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

-20

Show chart

Show chart

Show chart

Hide chart

Show chart

Hide chart

Hide chart■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. Maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-53

ChartsChart state100

2 Line Chart● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.
If you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

10-54

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Line Chart● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

10

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

Input:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the part. Only Permitted security groups
can use this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part can be used even if nouser account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
• You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display or Input cell.
• Restricting the display and use of the part by switching between Permitted and Prohibited in Display
and Input cells is similar to using the Trigger Condition tab.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-55

ChartsNo.:

2 Line Chart
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

User3

ReaderOperator

Administrator

Main unit

100

130

80
60
40
20
0

Numerical Display
No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted-20

Stop Strt

Line Chart

Pilot Lamp

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display

Input

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Prohibited2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

Prohibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

130

Main unit

130

Password

100

130

80

▲ ▼

User2

60
40
20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

0
-20

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

q

w

x

c

v

b

n

m

p CLR
Stop Strt

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

User2

For User2 in Operator, Display has been set to Permitted for Operator, but Input is Prohibited, so the Alarm
List Display cannot be used.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in the Administrator security group, the parts forwhich Display has been set to Permitted for Administrator will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has
been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

100
80
60

130

100
80

130

Password

60 User3

40

40

20

20

Main unit

▲ ▼

80
60

130

40
20

1

0

0

-20

-20

Stop Strt

Stop Strt

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

0
-20

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

q

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

p CLR

Stop Strt

l CAN
ENT

Line Chart
Display
Can operateLine Chart
Display
Cannot operate

Open Password Screen,
For User2,
enter password,parts for which Display
and switch to User3
has been set to Permitted
User2 for Operator are displayed,
but parts for which Input
has been set to Prohibited cannot be used

10-56

100

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

For User3,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
User3 for Administrator are displayed,and parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted can be used

2 Line Chart● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

10
Charts■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the line chart on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-57

3 Pie Chart

3

Pie Chart
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

3.1

How the Pie Chart is Used
The stacked bar chart and pie chart are used to show the proportion of individual data to the sum of the data.
They can be used to check the relative change in multiple values of device addresses in real-time.
• Display the proportion of the sum of multiple values of device addresses in a stacked bar chart or a pie chart
External device
D100 :

10

D200 :

10

D300 :

10

D100 :

120

D200 :

60

D300 :

30

Main unit

1:1:1

4:2:1

If the source data is all 0, the chart shows the same proportion for all the data.

10-58

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart

3.2

Pie Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for pie charts.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Pie Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Pie Chart.
3 Double-click the placed Pie Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

10
ChartsThe Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Pie Chart on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-59

3 Pie Chart

3.3

Properties of Pie Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Select the type of chart from the following items.
Horizontal Bar:

Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a horizontal stacked bar chart.
Example: The values for three device addresses are displayed.
Ch1 data

0

100

120

150

Ch2 data

0

100

60

50

Ch3 data

0

50

30

10

1:1:1

2:2:1

4:2:1

15 : 5 : 1

Horizontal bar
display

Proporon

Vertical Bar:

Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a vertical stacked bar chart.
Example: The values for three device addresses are displayed.
Ch1 data

0

100

120

150

Ch2 data

0

100

60

50

Ch3 data

0

50

30

10

1:1:1

2:2:1

4:2:1

15 : 5 : 1

Vercal bar display

Proporon

10-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart

Pie:

Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a pie chart.
Example: The values for three device addresses are displayed.
Ch1 data

0

100

120

300

Ch2 data

0

100

60

50

Ch3 data

0

50

30

10

1:1:1

2:2:1

4:2:1

30 : 5 : 1

Pie chart display

Proporon■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the chart from the following.
UBIN16(W), UBIN32(D), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F)For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When the BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) is selected as Data Type and the value cannot be
expressed with the data type selected for the data that was read, 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing
Error bit (address number+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4“Processing error” on page 4-34 and Chapter 37 “Processing error” on page 37-3.
■ Number of Data
Specifies the number of items of data to chart (1 to 10).

10

No.:

Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch10).
For Horizontal Bar, the numbers are listed in order from the left. For Vertical Bar, the numbers
are listed in order from the top.
Horizontal bar

Vercal bar

Ch1
Ch1

Ch2 Ch3

Ch2
Ch3

For Pie, the numbers are listed clockwise.
Pie chart

Ch3

Ch1

Ch2
Device Address: Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the chart.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor where you can edit the device address. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Fg. Color:

Selects the foreground color of the chart. (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades)
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the foreground color of the chart.

Bg. Color:

Selects the background color of the chart. (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades)
Double clicking the cell displays the Color Palette where you can change the background color of the chart.

Pattern:

Selects the chart pattern.
Double clicking the cell displays the Pattern Palette where you can change the chart pattern.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-61

Charts■ Settings
Lists the chart settings. The list shows the numbers, source device addresses, and colors for the chart.

3 Pie Chart■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.

10-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.

None:

The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed.

10■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:

Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color
Palette.

Pattern:

Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
FlangeFlange■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)Y

ScreenParts

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-63

Charts■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.

3 Pie Chart■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (base screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width

ScreenHeight

10-64

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

3 Pie Chart● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-65

ChartsIf you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

10

3 Pie Chart● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

10-66

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Pie Chart
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Pie Chart

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

w

4

5

6

7

8

9

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

0

10
Charts130

Main unit

BS

p CLR
l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

10-67

3 Pie Chart● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the pie chart on the editing screen

10-68

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Meter

4

Meter
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

How the Meter is Used
The meter displays the value of a word device as the movement of a needle.
• Display the value of a word device in a meter
Main unit

External device

40

D100 :

60

20

0

80

0

100

40

D100 :

20

75
0

60
80

100

10
ChartsWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-69

4 Meter

4.2

Meter Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for meters.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Meter.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Meter.
3 Double-click the placed Meter and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

The Range tab, Scale tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
You can set the default for the Meter on the Default Preferences tab of the WindO/I-NV4 Options
dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Default Preferences Tab” on page 2-62.

10-70

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Meter

4.3

Properties of Meter Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab

10
Charts■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Meter Type
Select the type of meter from the following items.
90 Degree Meter, 180 Degree Meter, 270 Degree Meter
90-degree meter

180-degree meter

270-degree meter

Example: 180 Degree Meter
Data

0

10

40

75

180 Degree Meter display

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-71

4 Meter■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the data type handled by the meter from the following.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F)For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Minimum, Maximum: Specifies the minimum and maximum for the data.
(Data Type):

Selects the data type to use for the minimum and the maximum.
Value:

Uses a constant value.

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type. For details, refer to Chapter
2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
The needle does not move past the left edge when the data value is the minimum or lower.
The needle stops at the right edge when the data value is the maximum or higher.
When Device Address is selected for (Data Type), the minimum and maximum can be
specified in the word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If the data displayed in the meter is invalid, 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address
number+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” onpage 4-34 and Chapter 37 “Processing error” on page 37-3.
An error occurs in the following states:• The setting of Minimum, Maximum, or ranges are invalid, or the Minimum and Maximum are thesame values.
• Data Type is BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) and the value cannot be expressed with the data
type selected for the read data
If an error occurs, only the flange is initially displayed. Then once the meter is displayed, it doesn't show an
update.
■ Reference Device Address
Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the meter.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

10-72

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Meter● View Tab■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard:
Picture:■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ Needle Color
Selects the needle color of the Meter (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Needle color■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard
graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern:
Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click Pattern to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.

FlangeWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-73

10
Charts

None:

Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV4.
Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
The plate and the flange of the part are not displayed.

4 Meter■ Coordinates
X, Y:

Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)
X(0, 0)
ScreenY

Parts■ SizeW, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W:

5 to (base screen horizontal size)H:

5 to (base screen vertical size)
Width
ScreenHeight10-74

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualParts

4 Meter● Range Tab
The Range tab is only displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Show Range
Select this check box to show ranges on the meter and configure the number of ranges, range colors, and limits.
Ranges can only be configured when Standard or None is selected under Image Type on the View tab.
Specifies the number of ranges (1 to 5).

Range Color:

Selects the range color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Limits:Specifies the limit for the range.
(Data Type):

ChartsNumber of Ranges:

Selects the data type to use for the limit.
Value:

Uses a constant value.

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
The limit varies based on the data type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For
details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
When Device Address is selected for (Data Type), the minimum and maximum can be
specified in the word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If the data displayed in the meter is invalid, 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address
number+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” onpage 4-34 and Chapter 37 “Processing error” on page 37-3.
An error occurs in the following states:• The setting of Minimum, Maximum, or ranges are invalid, or the Minimum and Maximum are thesame values.
• Data Type is BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) and the value cannot be expressed with the data
type selected for the read data
If an error occurs, only the flange is initially displayed. Then once the meter is displayed, it doesn't show an
update.
Example:180 Degree Meter, data minimum is 0, maximum is 100, the number of ranges is set to 5.
The limit between range 1 and 2: 20
The limit between range 2 and 3: 40
The limit between range 3 and 4: 60
The limit between range 4 and 5: 80

Range 3Range 220

40

60

Range 480

Range 1

Range 50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10

100

10-75

4 Meter● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a or meter.
Scales can only be configured when Standard or None is selected under Image Type on the View tab.
Major Division count: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).
Minor Division count: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).
Color:

Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale.
Digits:

Sets the number of digits to be displayed (1 to 10).
Can only be set when Float32(F) is selected for Data Type under the
General tab.

Display Floating Point:

Select this check box to display a floating point along the scale.
Can only be set when Float32(F) is selected for Data Type under the
General tab.

Floating Digits:

Sets the number of digits for the fractional parts of numbers (1 to 8)
from the number of digits specified for Digits.
Can only be set when the Display Floating Point check box isselected.

Color:

Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16
shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color
Palette.

• If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.
• When the standard graphic F0001, F0101, or F0201 (no flange) are selected, the scale cannot be
configured.

10-76

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Meter● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.

■ Place on the Top Layer
Select this check box to display the parts on the top layer. The parts will have precedence when other drawings andparts are overlapping with it. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “7 Drawings and Parts Overlapping” on page 5-33.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

10-77

ChartsIf you place magenta (R:255, G:4, B:255) drawings or parts on a Top layer, the colored area becomestransparent.

10

4 Meter● Security Tab
This tab is used to restrict displaying and using the part by security groups.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the Security dialog box.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.
No.:

Displays the security group numbers (1 to 15).

Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Display:

Displays whether or not there is permission to display the part. Only Permitted security groups
can display this part. If all security groups are set to Permitted, this part will be displayed even
if no user account has been selected. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.
You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Display cell.

■ Security Settings
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed. If you create a security group in the Security Settings dialog box, you
can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups” on page 2419.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
24-1.

10-78

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Meter
Example: The user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User1

User2

ReaderOperator

Main unit

Numerical Display

130

Line Chart and Bar Chart

No.

Group Name

Display1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Meter

No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
Group Name

Display
Display1

Administrator

Permitted

1

Administrator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

3

ReaderProhibited

3

ReaderProhibited

For User1 in the Reader security group, the parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for Reader will not
be displayed.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in the Operator security group, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for Operator will be displayed.
Main unit

For User1,
parts for which Display
has been set to ProhibitedUser1
for Reader are not displayed

Main unit

130

Password

130

▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

p CLR

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

10
Charts130

Main unit

BS

l CAN
ENT

Open Password Screen,enter password,and switch to User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

User2

For User2,
parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted
for Operator are displayed

10-79

4 Meter● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. Maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the meter on the editing screen

10-80

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 11

Commands

This chapter describes how to setup commands and their operation on the main unit.

1

Bit Write Command
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Bit Write Command is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.
Main unit

External device0
Not satisfied

Condition

1
Satisfied

Condition■ Set
Writes a 1 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition issatisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

11

State of condition

Write

Write

1

1

Data written

Commands

Action■ ResetWrites a 0 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition issatisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Action

Write

Write

0

0

Data written■ Momentary
Writes a 1 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition issatisfied.
When the trigger condition is nolonger satisfied, a 0 is written to thespecified bit device.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

0

1

0

1

State of condition

ActionData written

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual11-1

1 Bit Write Command■ Toggle
Toggles the value of the specified bit
device when the trigger condition isState of condition
satisfied.
If the value of the bit device is 0 itchanges to 1, and vice versa.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

ActionToggleToggle■ MoveThis function writes the value in thesource bit device to the value in thedestination bit device when thetrigger condition is satisfied.

Action11-2

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Move

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualMove1 Bit Write Command

1.2

Bit Write Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Bit Write Command.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Bit Write Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Bit Write Command.
3 Double-click the placed Bit Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11
Commands

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual11-3

1 Bit Write Command

1.3

Properties of Bit Write Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:Set:

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Reset:

Write

Write

1

1

Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Momentary:

Write

Write

0

0

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger condition is no longer satisfied, a 0 is written to the specified bit device.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

0

1

0

1

State of condition

ActionData written

11-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Write Command

Toggle:Toggles the value of the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionMove:

ToggleToggleThis function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device when
the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionMove

Move■ Destination Device Address
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Write*1
Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset.
Example:This fills a contiguous block of bit devices with the same value.
M0 1
Satisfied

11

M1 1
M2 1

Condition

M3 1
M4 1

If the bit number in a word device is specified, the same value is written to same bit of contiguous word
devices.
bit
15

Action Mode: Set
Destination Device Address: D0-15
Write: 5

bit
0

D0 1
Satisfied

Condition

D1 1
D2 1
D3 1
D4 1

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-5

Commands

Action Mode: Set
Destination Device Address: M0
Write: 5

1 Bit Write Command■ Source Data
Specifies the device address where the data to be written is stored.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Device Address: Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to move.

Example: Starting from the destination device address, the values of consecutive bit device addresses are written forthe specified number of transfers.
Device Address: LM0
Destination Device Address: M0
Transfer: 4

Satisfied

Condition

LM0 1

M0 1

LM1 0

M1 0

LM2 0

M2 0

LM3 1

M3 1

If a bit number of a word device is specified, the bit values of the consecutive word devices are written to
the destination device addresses for the specified number of transfers.
In case the destination device address is a bit device.
bit
15

Device Address: LDR0-0
Destination Device Address: M0
Transfer: 4

Satisfied

Condition

bit
0

LDR0

1

M0 1

LDR1

0

M1 0

LDR2

0

M2 0

LDR3

1

M3 1

bit
0

bit
15

In case the destination device address is a bit of word device.
bit
15

Device Address: LDR0-7
Destination Device Address: D3-0
Transfer: 4

11-6

Satisfied

Condition

bit
7

bit
0

LDR0

1

D3

1

LDR1

0

D4

0

LDR2

0

D5

0

LDR3

1

D6

1

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Write Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example:Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM0.
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.

11

Main unit

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedCommands

ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value ofdevice address

0
ActionExecution

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Execution

11-7

1 Bit Write Command

Satisfy the condition:

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression.
This option can only be configured when Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected for
Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Write Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

11
Commands■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Bit Write Command on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-9

2 Word Write Command2

Word Write Command
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

How the Word Write Command is Used
Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address number or to perform
operations on the written value.
• Writes a fixed value to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

External device

Not satisfied

Condition

D1=

0

Value

100

Destination word device

Satisfied

Write
Condition

D1=

100

100

• Writes the value of device address to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

External device

D0=

123

Value in device address

D1=

0

Destination word device

D0=

123

Not satisfied

Condition

SatisfiedMoveCondition

D1=

123

• Performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

External device

D0=

100

Value to write

D1=

23

Operator value

D2=

0

Destination word device

D0=

100

D1=

23

D2=

123

Not satisfied

Condition

Satisfied

Add

Condition

11-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualWrite2 Word Write Command■ Set
Writes a fixed value to a word device when thetrigger condition is satisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Action

Write

Write

Data written

Value

Value

■ MoveWrites the value of source device address to thedestination word device when the trigger
condition is satisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Write

Write

Value indevice address

Value indevice address■ Momentary
Writes a fixed value of ON Data to a word device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Writes a fixed value of OFF Data to a word device
when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

OFF Data

ON Data

OFF Data

ON DataState of condition

ActionData written■ Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR

11
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

ActionData written

Arithmetic operation↓
Write

Arithmetic operation↓
Write

ResultResultCommands

Performs arithmetic on the value of source device
address and a fixed value, or a value of device
State of condition
address and writes the result to a word device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Example: Add (Addition)
When the trigger condition is satisfied,State of condition
the value in the Source 1 is added to
the value in Source 2 and the result iswritten to the word device.

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

ActionAddition↓
Write

Addition↓
Write

Data written

ResultResult

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-11

2 Word Write Command

2.2

Word Write Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Word Write Command.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Word Write Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Word Write Command.
3 Double-click the placed Word Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Write Command

2.3

Properties of Word Write Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

11

Set:

Commands■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:
Writes a fixed value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

Move:

Action

Write

Write

Data written

Value

Value

Writes the value in the source device address to the destination word device when the trigger condition issatisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Write

Write

Value indevice address

Value indevice address

Momentary: Writes the fixed ON Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Writes the fixed OFF Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is no longer
satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

Write

Write

Write

Write

OFF Data

ON Data

OFF Data

ON DataState of condition

ActionData written

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-13

2 Word Write Command

Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device address and a fixed value, or the value at adevice address and writes the result to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionData written

Example:Arithmetic operation↓
Write

Arithmetic operation↓
Write

ResultResultAdd (Addition)
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value in the Source 1 is added to the value inSource 2 and the result is written to the word device.
Not satisfied

Satisfied

Not satisfied

Satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

Condition

State of condition

ActionAddition↓
Write

Addition↓
Write

Data written

ResultResult■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the operation selected for Action Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or
XOR. UBIN16(W) and UBIN32(D) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
If BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible
in BCD, a 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address number+2, bit 5) and an error
message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” on page 4-34 and Chapter 37“Processing error” on page 37-3.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.
■ Source Data
Select the data handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Value:

Use a constant value.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set or Momentary.
If Action Mode is set to Momentary, the value in the ON Data is written when the trigger
condition is satisfied, and the value in the OFF Data when the trigger condition is no longer
satisfied.
Hexadecimal:

11-14

Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values as ahexadecimal.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Write Command

Device Address: Use a value of device address.
Specify the device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change thesource word device according to the value of the specified device
address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.
Transfer*1 :Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Example:If Transfer is set to 2 and Write is set to 3, thesame data in 2 continuous word device addresses will
be written to the destination device address 3 times.
Source Data (Device Address): LDR0

LDR0

999

D100

999

LDR1

1000

D101

1000

Satisfied

Transfer: 2
Destination Device Address: D100

Condition

Write: 3

D102

999

D103

1000

D104

999

D105

1000

■ Destination Device Address
Destination Device Address:

Specify the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Write*1 :Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Move, or Momentary.
Example:If Data Type is set to UBIN16(W) and Write is set to 5, the samedata will be written to 5 continuous word addresses.
Data Type: UBIN16(W)Source Data (Value): 12345

SatisfiedDestination Device Address: LDR10
Write: 5

Condition

LDR10

12345

LDR11

12345

LDR12

12345

LDR13

12345

LDR14

12345

5 words

If Data Type is set to UBIN32(D) and Write is set to 5, the samedata will be written to a total of 10 word addresses (2 words 5 times).
LDR11

Data Type: UBIN32(D)Destination Device Address: LDR10
Write: 5LDR10987654

Source Data (Value): 987654
Satisfied

LDR13
Condition

LDR12987654
LDR15

LDR14

987654
LDR17

2 words x 5

LDR16

987654
LDR19

LDR18

987654*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-15

11
Commands

Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word
device according to the value of the specified device address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page
2-5.

2 Word Write Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example:Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM0.
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value ofdevice address

0
Action11-16

Execution

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Execution

2 Word Write Command

Satisfy the condition:

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression.

Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-17

11
Commands

This option can only be configured when Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected for
Trigger Type.

2 Word Write Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Word Write Command on the editing screen

11-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Command

3

Goto Screen Command
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

3.1

How the Goto Screen Command is Used
Switches to another screen or displays a window.
• Switches between Base Screens when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

Satisfied

Condition• Opens and closes other windows (such as the Popup Screen, Device Monitor, Password Screen, Adjust Brightness
Screen, File Screen, and Open User Account Setting Screen) when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

Satisfied

Condition

D51

123

D52

456

D53

0

11

999

Commands

Main unit

Satisfied

Condition

D51

123

D52

456

D53

0
999

• Switches to the System Mode when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

Satisfied

Run

OfflineMain Menu

Condition• Resets the current screen when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

13000

Satisfied

Condition

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-19

3 Goto Screen Command

3.2

Goto Screen Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Goto Screen Command.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Goto Screen Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Command.
3 Double-click the placed Goto Screen Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Command

3.3

Properties of Goto Screen Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

11

Back to previous Screen:
Switch to Base Screen:
Open Popup Screen:
Close Popup Screen:
Open Device Monitor Screen:
Close Device Monitor Screen:
Open Password Screen:
Close Password Screen:
Open Adjust Brightness Screen:
Close Adjust Brightness Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.
Switches between Base Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “3 Base Screen”
on page 5-15.
Opens a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “4 Popup Screen” on page
5-21.
Closes a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “4 Popup Screen” on page
5-21.
Opens the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 30-21.
Closes the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 30-21.
Opens the Password Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Main Unit” on page 24-47.
Closes the Password Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Main Unit” on page 24-47.
Opens the Adjust Brightness Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 36 “1.3
Adjusting Screen Brightness” on page 36-2.
Closes the Adjust Brightness Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 36 “1.3
Adjusting Screen Brightness” on page 36-2.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-21

Commands■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is met from the following:3 Goto Screen Command

Open File Screen for movie files*1:

Opens the File Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 9 “4.4 File Screen” on page 992.

Close File Screen for movie files*1:

Closes the File Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 9 “4.4 File Screen” on page 992.
Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 36“2 System Mode Overview” on page 36-3.
Resets the current Base Screen.

Switch to System Mode:
Reset current screen:

When the current screen is reset, the displayed Popup Screen is closed andthe following internal devices restart as if the Base Screen is switched.

Open User Account Setting Screen:• HMI Temporary Relay LBM0 to 127• HMI Special Internal Relay LSM1, 2, 3, 11• HMI Temporary Register LBR0 to 127
Opens the User Account Setting Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “5Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit” on page 24-50.
When User Account Setting Screen is selected, the Configure
Processing Area of User Account Setting Screen dialog box will be
displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 7 “Configure Processing Area of User
Account Setting Screen Dialog Box” on page 7-44.
Specify the word device to use as the processing area of the User Account
Setting Screen and click OK. When you return to the properties dialog box,
Edit will be displayed.
Edit: Click this button to display the Configure Processing Area of User
Account Setting Screen dialog box.

■ Goto Screen
Screen Number:

If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device Address*2: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify thescreen number using the value of the specified device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen or Close Popup Screen.

Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as theorigin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust Brightness Screen, or Open File

Screen for Movie Files*1.

Use Reference Device Address*2: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify thecoordinates using the value of the specified device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen.

*1 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*2 Advanced mode only

11-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example:Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM0.
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.

11

Main unit

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedCommands

ConditionNotsatisfied

LM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value ofdevice address

0
ActionExecution

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Execution

11-23

3 Goto Screen Command

Satisfy the condition:

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression.
This option can only be configured when Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected for
Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Goto Screen Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

11
Commands■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Goto Screen Command on the editing screen

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-25

4 Print Command4

Print Command
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

How the Print Command is Used
Outputs a screenshot to a printer*1 or an external memory device*2.
• Outputs a screenshot of the current screen to the printer*1 when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

Printer

Satisfied

Condition
2011/1/11

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

Refer to Chapter 34 “1.2 Functions Available with the Printer” on page 34-1 for compatible printers andinstructions on how to connect one to the main unit.
• Outputs a screenshot of the current screen to the external memory device*2 when the trigger condition is satisfied.
External Memory Device
Main unit
SD memory card

Satisfied

USB flash drive
Condition

Image file

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

11-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Command

4.2

Print Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Print Command.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Print Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Print Command.
3 Double-click the placed Print Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11
Commands

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-27

4 Print Command

4.3

Properties of Print Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Output toSelect where to direct the screenshot to.
Printer*1:

Outputs the screenshot to the printer connected to the main unit.
Print Time Stamp:

Adds the date and time of printing to the screenshot before
sending it to the printer.
The date and time format depends on the language selected in
Language. Language is available on the Project Details tab of
the Project Settings dialog box.
The display formats are shown below:• Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm• English: MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm
YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute

External Memory Device*2: Outputs the screenshot as a file to the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
Files are output as follows:
File format
JPEG

File name

File size

CAP***.JPG (***: date and time when file was output)
Example: A file created at 18:50:25 on June 30, 2011 will
be named “CAP110630_185025.JPG”.

Depends on image
being displayed.

The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screenshot may differ.
• For details about printers, refer to Chapter 34 “Printer” on page 34-1.
• For details about external memory devices, refer to Chapter 33 “External Memory Devices” on page 33-1.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

11-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Print Command■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following. This option is displayed only
when Printer is selected in Output to.
Print Screen:

Outputs a screenshot of the current screen to the printer or the external memory device.

Cancel Printing*1:

Cancels printout to the printer.

• These operations cannot be performed simultaneously.
- Outputting to the external memory device using the Print Command- Outputting to the printer using the Print Command*1- Printing alarm logs*1• While the screenshot is being output to the external memory device, the Print Button or Print Commandcannot output to one. Also, during these situations, the value of HMI Special Relay LSM24 or LSM25 changes
to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
• It may take some time to output screenshots when copying files using the USB Autorun function or a Key
Button.
• The main unit cannot stop printing in the middle of a page, even when the print job is canceled. Print jobs
after the current print job are canceled after the current page finishes printing.
The maximum number of screenshots that can be captured (1 to 999) can be set in HMI Special Data Register
LSD65. (Default: 99)
The methods to erase screenshot files saved on the external memory device are as follows.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-29

11
Commands• To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings
dialog box, select the Remove Files check box and the All Screenshot data check box, and then configure
the trigger device address. Assign that trigger device address to a part.
• To erase files with WindO/I-NV4, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data in External
Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Screenshot Data check box and click OK.
• To erase files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - File Manager.
In the File Manager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

4 Print Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example:Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM0.
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value ofdevice address

0
Action11-30

Execution

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Execution

4 Print Command

Satisfy the condition:

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression.

Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-31

11
Commands

This option can only be configured when Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected for
Trigger Type.

4 Print Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Print Command on the editing screen

11-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Command

5

Script Command
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

5.1

How the Script Command is Used
Executes a script when certain conditions are satisfied.
Executes Script// Script A
Main unit[D 100] = [D 100] + 1;
if ([D 100] >= 50){

Satisfied[D 100] = 0;}Start Condition

Complex processes such as conditional branching, logical operation, arithmetic operation, function, etc., canbe programmed in a text format using Scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 25 “Script” on page 25-1.

11
Commands

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual11-33

5 Script Command

5.2

Script Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Script Commands.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Script Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Script Command.
3 Double-click the placed Script Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Command

5.3

Properties of Script Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab(Script)■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1-32000) of the script to operate.
The Script Manager will open whenis clicked. Select a script from the script list.

11

For details, refer to Chapter 25 “2.2 Script Manager” on page 25-7.

Commands■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in the Script Manager.
■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in the Script Manager.
Once this area is double clicked, the Script Editor will open and editing can be done.
For details, refer to Chapter 25 “2.3 Script Editor” on page 25-12.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-35

5 Script Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example:Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM0.
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value ofdevice address

0
ActionExecution

Execution

Satisfy the condition: Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Action11-36

Execution

Execution

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Execution

5 Script Command

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionPeriod:Execution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution

Command executes within a fixed time interval.
Fixed time interval

ActionExecution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Fixed time interval

Execution

Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression.

Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Minimum Time
Specify the minimum cycle time (0 to 3,600,000 milliseconds) for executing a command.
Can only be set if Period is selected as Trigger Type.
When Period is selected, the script will be executed with the scan time of the screen if the cycle time isshorter than the scan time for the screen on the main unit. The maximum value for the screen scan time
can be checked by the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD4. For details about the HMI Special Data
Register, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-37

11
Commands

This option can only be configured when Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected for
Trigger Type.

5 Script Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Script Command on the editing screen

11-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command

6

Multi-Command
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

6.1

How the Multi-Command is Used
Executes multiple commands at once.
These commands can be assigned to a Multi-Command.
Command

Description

Bit Write

Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device.

Word Write

Writes a value to a word device. You can specify the destination address number indirectly, and perform
arithmetic on the value to be written.

Goto Screen

Switches screens and opens other windows.

Print

Outputs a screenshot to the printer or the external memory device*1.

Key

Performs downloads, uploads, and file copying. Also used to manipulate other parts.

ScriptExecutes a script.

• Writes a 1 to a bit device, and the value in a word device to another device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
0
Main unit

1

External device

11

Satisfied

D0=

123

D0=

123

Condition

D1=

0

D1=

123

• Outputs a screenshot of the current screen to an external memory device*1, and then switches the Base Screen
when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Main unit

Satisfied

Condition

External Memory Device
SD memory card

USB flash drive
Image file

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-39

CommandsMove6 Multi-Command

6.2

Multi-Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-Commands.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Multi-Command.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Multi-Command.
3 Double-click the placed Multi-Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command

6.3

Properties of Multi-Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.

11

Function List:

Lists the commands to be executed.
Command Type:Shows the command type.

Command Name:

Shows the command name.

Device Address:

Shows the setting when one of the following Command Type is selected.
Shows the destination device address for the Bit Write and Word Writecommands.
Shows the screen number when Goto Screen is set to Switch to Base
Screen, Open Popup Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Shows the script ID for the Script command.

• Executes only the Goto Screen command at the end of the Function List when multiple Switch to Base
Screen type commands are set for Action Mode.
• Goto Screen commands are not executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List.
Rather, they are executed at the end of the scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.
• Key commands are executed in the scan that follows a scan that satisfies the trigger condition.
• If multiple Key commands are set, only the first and second Key commands in the Function List are
executed. The third and following Key commands are not executed. Also, only the first Key command thatspecifies a Data Transfer function in the Function List is executed if multiple Key commands are set.
Command Type:

Select the command to add.
Bit Write:

Writes a 0 or 1 to the bit device or the bit number of the word device. For details,
refer to “Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 11-43.

Word Write:

Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination
address number or to perform operations on the written value. For details, refer
to “Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 11-44.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-41

Commands■ Multi-Functions
Add and edit commands to be executed when the trigger condition is satisfied.

6 Multi-Command

Goto Screen:

Switches to another screen or displays a window. For details, refer to “Properties
of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 11-46.

Print:

Outputs a screenshot to a printer or an external memory device. For details, refer
to “Properties of Print for Multi-Functions Dialog Box” on page 11-48.

Key:

Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying
files, and operating other parts. For details, refer to “Properties of Key for MultiFunctions Dialog Box” on page 11-50.

Script:Add:

Executes a script. For details, refer to “Properties of Script for Multi-Functions
Dialog Box” on page 11-57.

Adds a command to the list. A maximum of 32 commands may be added.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected from Command
Type.

Edit:

Changes a command in the list.
Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected in Function List.

Delete:Deletes a command from the list.
Select the command in the list and click this button.

Copy:

Copies a command in the list.
Select a command in the list and click this button. A copy of the selected command is added tothe end of the list.

11-42

Up:

Shifts the selected command upward in the list.

Down:

Shifts the selected command downward in the list.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command
Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Bit Write command for the Multi-Command.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:Set:

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Reset:

Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Set & Reset:

Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger condition is no longer satisfied, a 0 is written to the specified bit device.

Toggle:Toggles the value of the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.

Move:This function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.

■ Destination Device Address
Specify the destination bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Write*1
Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset. For details, refer to “Write*1” on page 11-5.
■ Source Data
Specifies the device address where the data to be written is stored.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move. For details, refer to “Source Data” on page 11-6.
Device Address: Specify the source bit device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Transfer:

Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to move.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-43

Commands

For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 11-4. However, Set & Reset for theMulti-Command has the same function as Momentary for the Bit Write Command.

11

6 Multi-Command
Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Word Write command for the Multi-Command.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:Set:

Writes a fixed value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Move:

Writes the value in the source device address to the destination word device when the trigger
condition is satisfied.

Set ON & OFF Data:

Writes a fixed value of ON Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition issatisfied.
Writes a fixed value of OFF Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition is
no longer satisfied.

Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:

Performs arithmetic on the value of source device address and a fixedvalue or a value of device address and writes the result to a word device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.

For details about the Action Mode, refer to “Action Mode” on page 11-13. However, Set ON & OFF Datafor the Multi-Command has the same function as Momentary for the Word Write Command.
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the operation selected for Action Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Set ON & OFF Data, Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR,
AND, or XOR. UBIN16(W) and UBIN32(D) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
If BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F) is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible
in BCD, a 1 is written to System Area 2 Processing error bit (address number+2, bit 5) and an error
message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Processing error” on page 4-34 and Chapter 37“Processing error” on page 37-3.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.

11-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command■ Source Data
Select the data handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Value:

Use a constant value.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set or Set ON & OFF Data.
If Action Mode is set to Set ON & OFF Data, the value in the ON Data is written when thetrigger condition is satisfied, and the value in the OFF Data when the trigger condition is no longer
satisfied.
Hexadecimal:

Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values as ahexadecimal.

Device Address: Use a value of device address.
Specify the device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Use Reference Device Address*1:

Select this check box and specify a device address to change
the source word device according to the value of the specified
device address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect
Write Settings” on page 2-5.

Transfer*1:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to “Transfer*1” on page 11-15.

■ Destination Device Address
Destination Device Address:

11

Specify the destination word device.

Use Reference Device Address*1: Select this check box and specify a device address to change the destination word
device according to the value of the specified device address.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page
2-5.
Write*1:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Move, or Set ON & OFF
Data.
For details, refer to “Write*1” on page 11-15.

*1 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-45

Commands

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

6 Multi-Command
Properties of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Goto Screen command for the Multi-Command.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is met from the following:
Back to previous Screen:

Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.

Switch to Base Screen:

Switches between Base Screen.

Open Popup Screen:

Opens a Popup Screen.

Close Popup Screen:

Closes a Popup Screen.

Open Device Monitor Screen:

Opens the Device Monitor Screen.

Close Device Monitor Screen:

Closes the Device Monitor Screen.

Open Password Screen:

Opens the Password Screen.

Close Password Screen:

Closes the Password Screen.

Open Adjust Brightness Screen:

Opens the Adjust Brightness Screen.

Close Adjust Brightness Screen:

Closes the Adjust Brightness Screen.

Open File Screen for movie files*1:

Opens the File Screen.

Close File Screen for movie files*1:

Closes the File Screen.

Switch to System Mode:

Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode.

Reset current screen:

Resets the current Base Screen.
When the current screen is reset, the displayed Popup Screen is closed andthe following internal devices restart as if the Base Screen is switched.
• HMI Temporary Relay LBM0 to 127• HMI Special Internal Relay LSM1, 2, 3, 11• HMI Temporary Register LBR0 to 127

Open User Account Setting Screen:

Opens the User Account Setting Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “5Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit” on page 24-50.
When User Account Setting Screen is selected, the Configure
Processing Area of User Account Setting Screen dialog box will be
displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 7 “Configure Processing Area of User
Account Setting Screen Dialog Box” on page 7-44.
Specify the word device to use as the processing area of the User Account
Setting Screen and click OK. When you return to the properties dialog box,
Edit will be displayed.
Edit:

Click this button to display the Configure Processing Area of User
Account Setting Screen dialog box.

*1 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

11-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command■ Goto Screen
Screen Number:

If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to(from 1 to 3000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device Address*2: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify
the screen number using the value of the specified device
address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen or Close Popup Screen.

Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as
the origin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust Brightness Screen, or Open File

Screen for Movie Files*1.

Use Reference Device Address*2: Select this check box and specify a device address to specify
the coordinates using the value of the specified device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

*1 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*2 Advanced mode only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-47

11
Commands

This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to OpenPopup Screen.

6 Multi-Command
Properties of Print for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Print command for the Multi-Command.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Output toSelect where to direct the screenshot to.
Printer*1:

Outputs the screenshot to the printer connected to the main unit.
Print Time Stamp:

Adds the date and time of printing to the screenshot before
sending it to the printer.
The date and time format depends on the language selected in
Language. Language is available on the Project Details tab of
the Project Settings dialog box.
The display formats are shown below:• Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm• English: MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm
YYYY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute

External Memory Device*2: Outputs the screenshot as a file to the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
Files are output as follows:
File format
JPEG

File name

File size

CAP***.JPG (***: date and time when file was output)
Depends on image
Example: A file created at 18:50:25 on June 30, 2011
being displayed.
will be named “CAP110630_185025.JPG”.

The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screenshot may differ.
• For details about printers, refer to Chapter 34 “Printer” on page 34-1.
• For details about external memory devices, refer to Chapter 33 “External Memory Devices” on page 33-1.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following. This option is displayed only when Printer is selected in Output to.
Print Screen:

Outputs a screenshot of the current screen to the printer or the external memory device.

Cancel Printing*1: Cancels printout to the printer.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

11-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command• These operations cannot be performed simultaneously.
- Outputting to the external memory device by pressing the Multi-Command.
- Outputting to the printer by pressing the Multi-Command.*1- Printing alarm logs*1• It may take some time to output screenshots when copying files using the USB Autorun function or a Key
Button.
• The main unit cannot stop printing in the middle of a page, even when the print job is canceled. Print jobs
after the current print job are canceled after the current page finishes printing.
The maximum number of screenshots that can be captured (1 to 999) can be set in HMI Special Data Register
LSD65. (Default: 99)
The methods to erase screenshot files saved on the external memory device are as follows.
• To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory Device tab on the Project Settings
dialog box, select the Remove Files check box and the All Screenshot data check box, and then configure
the trigger device address. Assign that trigger device address to a part.
• To erase files with WindO/I-NV4, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data in External
Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Screenshot Data check box and click OK.
• To erase files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - File Manager.
In the File Manager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

11
Commands*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-49

6 Multi-Command
Properties of Key for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the Key command for the Multi-Command.

(Key)

Displays settings
applicable to theselected key.

■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Key Type
Select the function for the Key command.
Language:

Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser. These
languages are available:
Western, Japanese, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.

Browse:Opens the Key Browser when clicked. Select a key.
For details, refer to Chapter 7 “5.5 Key Browser” on page 7-100.

(Key):

Displays the name of the key selected using the Key Browser.
The function of Key command will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.

The settings explained below appear depending on the type of key selected.
■ Popup Screen Number
The Alt key switches the current Popup Screen used as a Keypad when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Specify the Popup Screen number to open a Keypad for.
This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser.

11-50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command■ Scroll Size
Specifies the number of lines (1 to 1023) to scroll the list or move the focus when the trigger condition is satisfied.
The operation varies based on the key selected in the Key Browser. For details regarding the key, refer to Chapter 7“For Alarm Displays” on page 7-97 and Chapter 7 “For the Data Log Display” on page 7-98.
This setting is enabled only if Page Up, Page Down, Up, and Down are selected using the Key Browser.

■ Transfer Setting
The key commands such as Download Project, Upload Project, Copy File, Download PLC Program, andUpload PLC Program, execute the respective data transfer functions when the trigger conditions are satisfied.
Specify the source, transferring data, and destination.
This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser.
Download Project is selected.

11
Select the external memory where the project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File) to be transferred

is stored: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.
File Type*1: Select the file format for the project data to be transferred.
ZNX (OS, System Software, Project):

The file contains the OS, system software, and project. The source file specified in
Location is the ZNX project file (.znx).
ZNV (System Software, Project):
The file contains the system software and project. The source file specified in Locationis the ZNV project file (.znv).
Location:

Specify the location of the ZNX Project File (.znx)*1 or the ZNV Project File (.znv). The
maximum number is 247 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can beused. Path delimiters and characters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To set "HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV", a ZNV Project File, to be saved on the root
directory of an external memory device:
HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-51

Commands

Source:6 Multi-Command

Destination: Displays a download destination of the project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File).
Clear Keep Devices*3:
Select this check box to clear keep devices after the project data is downloaded.
Starts running without displaying the Result window:
Select this check box to start running the main unit without displaying the execution result
screen after the project data is downloaded.
After downloading, execute the ladder programs automatically*4:
Select this check box to start executing the ladder program after the project data is
downloaded.
This option can only be set when ZNV (System Software, Project) is selected as theFile Type.
• When the source and destination system software versions or the Data Storage Area settings aredifferent, the keep devices are cleared regardless of the setting for Clear Keep Devices.
• When the ZNX Project File*1 or the ZNV Project File is downloaded, the alarm log data, data log data,and operation log data is deleted regardless of the state of the Clear Keep Devices check box.
If the versions of the source and destination system software match, the system software will not be
downloaded.
Upload Project is selected.

Destination: Specify where to save the project uploaded from the main unit. Select the location:
USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.
Location:

Specify the location where the uploaded project will be saved. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters andcharacters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To save a project to the folder “Uploaded_Project” in an external memory device:
Uploaded_ProjectA uploaded project using the Data Transfer function is saved as a ZNV Project File(.znv).

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*4 FT2J/1J only

11-52

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command
Copy Files*5 is selected.

Source:Select the source external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*2.
Location: Specify the location of the file to be transferred. The maximum number is 247 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters and characters thatcannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F\"*:;<>?|

Example: Copy a file “Error.wav” to the root directory of an external memory device:
Error.wav
Destination: Select the destination external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash
Drive*2.

Location: Specify the location where the file will be transferred. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters andcharacters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Model

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J/"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F\"*:;<>?|

Example: Save a file to the “SOUND” folder under “HGDATA01” folder in an external
memory device:
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

HGDATA01/SOUND

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:

HGDATA01\SOUND• If a file name is specified as the source location, the specified file is copied.
If a folder name is specified, all of the files and subfolders contained in the folder, and all of the files inthe subfolders, are copied.
• The subfolders can be copied up to five levels.
• To prevent copying the subfolders and the files contained in the subfolders, HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM30 must be set to 1 before executing the copy.
• To stop copying files during the copy operation, write 1 to HMI Special Internal Relay LSM31. However, it
will continue to copy the file until it is finished then it will stop copying.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*5 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-53

11
Commands

Delimiter6 Multi-Command
Download PLC Program is selected.

Source:Select the external memory where the PLC program (ZLD Project File) to be transferred is stored:
USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.

Location: Specify the location of the ZLD Project File(.zld). The maximum number is 247 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters and characters thatcannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To set “LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD”, a ZLD Project File, to be saved in folder “LDRDATA”
of an external memory device:
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

LDRDATA/LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: LDRDATA\LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD
Destination: Specify the destination PLC connected to the main unit. The PLC type is configured in the Project
Settings dialog box, on the Communication Driver Network tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Interface:

Select the communication interface in which the main unit is connecting to thedownload destination PLC from serial interface or Ethernet. For details, refer to
Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.

If serial interface is selected for Interface.
Slave Number:Specify the slave number of the download destination PLC (0 to 31).

External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

If Ethernet is selected for Interface.
Select from the following method:
Specify External Device ID: Specify the External Device ID (0 to 31) of the destination PLC. This is
the External Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog box,
on the Communication Driver Network tab.
External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

Specify IP Address:

Specify the IP address and port number of the destination PLC.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

11-54

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command
Upload PLC Program is selected.

Source:Specify the source PLC connected to the main unit. The PLC type is configured in the Project Settings
dialog box, on the Communication Driver Network tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4Communication Driver Network Tab” on page 4-55.
Interface:

Select the communication interface in which the main unit is connecting
to the upload source PLC from serial interface or Ethernet. For details,
refer to Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.

If serial interface is selected for Interface.
Slave Number:Specify the slave number of the upload source PLC (0 to 31).

External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

If Ethernet is selected for Interface.
Select from the following method:
Specify External Device ID: Specify the External Device ID (0 to 31) of the upload source PLC. Thisis the External Device ID number set in the Project Settings dialog
box, on the Communication Driver Network tab.
External Device Name:

The name of the specified PLC is displayed here.

Specify IP Address:

Specify the IP address and port number of the upload source PLC.

type of external memory: USB1*1, USB2*1, SD Memory Card*2 or USB Flash Drive*3.

Location: Specify the location of the folder where the uploaded PLC program will be saved. The
maximum number is 247 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can beused. Path delimiters and characters that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|

Example: To save a program to the folder “Uploaded_Program” in an external memory
device:Uploaded_Program
A uploaded PLC program using the Data Transfer function is saved as a ZLD Project File(.zld).

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-55

Commands

Destination: Specify where to save the PLC program uploaded from the PLC connected to the main unit. Select the116 Multi-Command■ Recording Channel*6
The recording of images starts.
Selects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to record a video only (no audio) out of the signals input from the device. Thissetting is enabled only if Rec. was selected using the Key Browser.

• Movie files cannot be recorded during playback.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while data is
being saved to the external memory device, recording cannot be executed with a Key Button, MultiButton, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function. Also, during these situations, thevalue of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special
Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
■ Recording Target*7
The recording of images and sound starts.
Select the target to record out of the signals input from the device. This setting is enabled only if Rec. was selectedusing the Key Browser.
Video and Audio:

Records images and sound.

Video only (No Audio):

Records images only.

• Movie files cannot be recorded during playback.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while data is
being saved to the external memory device, recording cannot be executed with a Key Button, MultiButton, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function. Also, during these situations, thevalue of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special
Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

*6 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*7 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

11-56

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Multi-Command
Properties of Script for Multi-Functions Dialog Box
Sets the script for the Multi-Command.

(Script)■ Command NameEnter a name for the command. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32000) of the script to operate.
Script Manager will open whenis clicked. Select a script from the script list.

For details, refer to Chapter 25 “2.2 Script Manager” on page 25-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager.

11■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager.

Commands

Once this area is double clicked, the Script Editor will open and editing can be done.
For details, refer to Chapter 25 “2.3 Script Editor” on page 25-12.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-57

6 Multi-Command● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example:Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM0.
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge:

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value ofdevice address

0
Action11-58

Execution

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Execution

6 Multi-Command

Satisfy the condition:

Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution Execution

Execution Execution■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression.

Click
to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-59

11
Commands

This option can only be configured when Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected for
Trigger Type.

6 Multi-Command● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Multi-Command on the editing screen

11-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Timer

7

Timer
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

7.1

How the Timer is Used
Starts a countdown when the trigger condition is satisfied, and writes 1 to an internal device (HMI Timer Relay LTC)
once the set time has elapsed.
Main unit
0
LTC0:

0

Satisfied1
Condition

LTC0:
LTD0

1

LTD0

1999

1998

999

1

Start countdown

0
Set mehas elapsed

Not satisfied

SatisfiedSatisfied

Not satisfied

Condition

Condition

Condition

ConditionStart
countdown

Writes 1
to LTC0

Writes thepreset value
to LTD0 and 0
to LTC0State of condition

Action

1999

1999

HMI Timer Relay
LTC0 value

0

0

1998

999

1

0
1

11

1999
0

• The HMI Timer Relay LTC is an internal device (bit device) that changes to 1 once the time set for thetimer has elapsed.
• The HMI Timer Current Value LTD is an internal device (word device) that stores current values for thetimer.
• Once switched to the screen that the timer has been placed in, the following values will be given
regardless of the whether the trigger condition is satisfied or not satisfied.
- HMI Timer Relay LTC: 0- HMI Timer Current Value LTD: Preset ValueWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-61

Commands

HMI Timer Current Value
LTD0 value

7 Timer

7.2

Timer Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Timers.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Timer.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Timer.
3 Double-click the placed Timer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

11-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

7 Timer

7.3

Properties of Timer Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.

● General Tab■ Part NameEnter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Timer Address Number
Specifies the HMI timer address number (0 to 31).
The device type for the HMI timer relay is LTC. The device type where the current value is stored is LTD.
Example: 0 is specified for Timer Address Number.
HMI Timer Relay:

LTC0

HMI Timer Current Value: LTD011

■ UnitSelect the unit of time from sec or 100 msec.

The preset value is the time from when the timer starts its countdown until 1 is written to the HMI Timer Relay LTC.
Value:

When selecting sec in Unit, the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 (second units) up to a
maximum of 1092 minutes 15 seconds.
When selecting 100 msec in Unit, the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 (100 msec units).

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
Specify the device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-63

Commands■ Preset Value
Select the data type to use and the enter the preset value.

7 Timer● Trigger Condition Tab

When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example:Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device Address is LM0.
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Main unit

ConditionNotsatisfied

Condition
Satisfied

LM0: 0Not
executedLM0: 1
Executed■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
While ON:

Command is executed when a value of device address is 1.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionWhile OFF:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Command is executed when a value of device address is 0.
1
Value ofdevice address
0
ActionExecution

Execution

While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

Action11-64

Execution

Execution Execution

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Execution Execution

7 Timer■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
■ Comment
Used for entering comments about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.

11
Commands

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

11-65

7 Timer● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts placed on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when themouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible todistinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.

■ Description
Used for entering comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Timer on the editing screen

11-66

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 12

Alarm Log Function

This chapter describes how to configure the Alarm Log function and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Alarm Log Function is Used
The Alarm Log function samples the occurrence of alarms and recovery information by monitoring and evaluating thestate of device addresses.
The Alarm Log function can perform the following functions.
• Monitor states of device addresses and create Alarm Log data
Main unit
External device0

12:00
Alarm occurred

1

12:00
1

0

12:53

Recovered

12:54

Confirmed

12:53
Alarm Log data
No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:00

12/01 12:53:10

12/01 12:54:30• Monitor states of device addresses and detect alarms

12

Main unit
External device

Alarm Log Function

0

Alarm occurred1• Display an alarm screen when an alarm occurs
Main unit
External device

0

Voltagedrop

1

Alarm occurred
Alarm screen• Make a sound of the buzzer and screen flashing the screen when an alarm occurs
Main unit
External device

Beep
0

1
Alarm occurred

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-1

1 Overview• Output Alarm Log data to the external memory device*1
External Memory Device
Main unit

SD memory card
Output toExternal memory device
USB flash drive

Alarm Log data (CSV)• Output Alarm Log data to the printer
Main unit

Printer

Output to printer

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

For compatible printers and instructions on how to connect one to the main unit, refer to Chapter 34 “1.3Connecting a Printer to a Main unit” on page 34-1.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

12-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.2

Alarm States
Alarms have three states: occurred, recovered, and confirmed.
Alarm state

Details

Occurred

Indicates that an alarm has occurred. There are two types of alarms that occur.
First Alarm: The first alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred.
Second and later: An alarm that has occurred while another alarm is active.

Recovered

Indicates that the alarm that occurred has been recovered from.
However, for channels set to lock, the alarm is not recovered from until a key button is pressed(CHECK or All Chk.).

Confirmed

Indicates the key button CHECK or All Chk. was pressed.

Example: The source device address (the device address to monitor) is D100-0, the error state (when an alarm has
occurred) is ON, the channel is set to Unlock, and the used key button is CHECK.
When the source device address is ON, the alarm changes to the “Occurred” state. When the source device
is OFF, the alarm changes to the “Recovered” state. When CHECK is pressed, the alarm changes to the“Confirmed” state.
Alarm state
Source device address state
D100-0 : OFF

No alarm
occurring state

Alarm Log data
Record occurrence time

Occurred

D100-0 : ON

NO/NC is NO, so the state is“Occurred”

D100-0 : OFF

12

Record recovery time

Recovered

Lock/Unlock is Unlock, so thestate is “Recovered”

Press CHECK

Alarm Log Function

Record confirmation time

Confirmed

When CHECK is pressed before the source device address changes to OFF, the alarm changes to the“Confirmed” state regardless of the state of the source device address.
Alarm state
Source device address state
D100-0 : OFF

No alarm
occurring state

Alarm Log data
Record occurrence time

Occurred

D100-0 : ON

NO/NC is NO, so the state is

Press CHECK

D100-0 : OFF“Occurred”

Confirmed

Record confirmation time

Recovered

Record recovery time
Lock/Unlock is Unlock, so thestate is “Recovered”

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual12-3

1 Overview

1.3

Sampling Data
Data is sampled each time the alarm occurs, is recovered from, or confirmed.
Example: The message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the message for channel number 1-2 is“Abnormal temperature”.
Channel No. 1-1: Alarm occurred1(12:50:00)

Ch.No.

1-1

MessageOccurrence Time

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00

Recovery Time Confirmation Time‒‒

Channel No. 1-2: No alarm

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm2(12:50:00)
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm occurred(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1: Recovered from alarm3(12:50:20)
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1: CHECK pressed4(12:50:30)
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm occurred5(12:51:00)
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm(12:50:10)

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm6(12:51:00)
Channel No. 1-2: CHECK pressed(12:52:10)

Channel No. 1-1: Alarm7(12:51:00)
Channel No. 1-2: Recovered from alarm(12:52:10)

12-4

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00

‒

‒

1-2

Abnormaltemperature

12/01/2011 12:50:10‒‒

MessageOccurrence Time

Ch.No.

1-1

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00

1-2

Abnormaltemperature

12/01/2011 12:50:10

MessageOccurrence Time

Ch.No.

1-1

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00

1-2

Abnormaltemperature

12/01/2011 12:50:10

Ch.No.

MessageOccurrence Time

1-1

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00

1-2

Abnormaltemperature

1-1
Ch.No.

12/01 12:50:20

‒

‒

‒

Recovery Time Confirmation Time
12/01 12:50:20

12/01 12:50:30‒‒

Recovery Time Confirmation Time
12/01 12:50:20

12/01 12:50:30

12/01/2011 12:50:10‒‒

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:51:00‒‒

MessageOccurrence Time

1-1

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00

1-2

Abnormaltemperature

1-1
Ch.No.

Recovery Time Confirmation Time

Recovery Time Confirmation Time
12/01 12:50:20

12/01 12:50:30

12/01/2011 12:50:10‒

12/01 12:52:10

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:51:00‒‒

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00

12/01 12:50:20

12/01 12:50:30

1-2

Abnormaltemperature

12/01 12:53:00

12/01 12:52:10

1-1

Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:51:00‒‒

12/01/2011 12:50:10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.4

Data Configuration
The sampled data is composed of the channel number, level, message, alarm state, time, and label.
The relationship between the Alarm Log function settings and the sampled data is as follows.

Alarm Log settings

2. Channel No. 3. Level 4. Message

Sampled data

1. Data storage amount

5. Alarm state and time

Level

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Level 8Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:05

12/01 12:01:10

12/01 12:01:30

1-2

Level 4

Abnormal temperature 12/01/2011 12:01:09

12/01 12:02:21

12/01 12:02:55

1-1

Level 8Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:02:00

12/01 12:03:11

12/01 12:05:12

1-3

Level 1

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:30:21

12/01 12:55:15

12/01 13:00:00

1-1

Level 8Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:45:36

12/01 12:53:12

12/01 12:57:41

6. Label

12

1. Data storage amount: The amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area. For details, refer to “DataStorage Amount” on page 12-8.
2. Channel No.:

Composed of (Block No.)-(Channel No.). The device addresses to monitor and theconditions for alarm occurrence and recovery are configured in the channels. When thesampled data is output as a CSV file, the displayed label is “Ch.No.”.

3. Level:

It is the level of alarm.
Can only output when the Output Alarm Level check box in the External Memory
Device tab on the Alarm Log Settings dialog box is selected.

4. Message:

The message displayed when an alarm has occurred.

5. Alarm state and time: The alarm state (occurred, recovered, confirmed) and the time the alarm occurred, wasrecovered from, and confirmed. When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, thedisplayed label varies based on the output method.
6. Label:

When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed in the label row.
This cannot be changed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-5

Alarm Log Function

Ch.No.

1 Overview
For sampled data, the format for displayed items varies based on the output method.
■ Batch
Batch output shows the recovery and confirmation time for an alarm that has occurred on a single line.
The labels displayed in the label row are “Ch.No.”, “Level”, “Message”, “Occurrence Time”, “Recovery Time”, and“Confirmation Time”.
Can only output the Level when the Output Alarm Level check box in the External Memory Device tab on the
Alarm Log Settings dialog box is selected.
Example: The message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the Level is 8, and the message for channel
number 1-2 is “Abnormal temperature” and the Level is 4.
Ch.No.

Level

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Level 8Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:00

12/01 12:50:20

12/01 12:50:30

1-2

Level 4

Abnormal temperature

12/01/2011 12:50:10--

12/01 12:52:10

1-1

Level 8Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:51:00----■ Real Time
Real time output displays the alarm state and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an
alarm occurs, is recovered from, or is confirmed.
The labels displayed in the label row are “Time”, “State”, “Ch.No.”, “Level”, and “Message”.
Can only output the Level when the Output Alarm Level check box in the External Memory Device tab on the
Alarm Log Settings dialog box is selected.
Example: The message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the Level is 8, and the message for channel
number 1-2 is “Abnormal temperature” and the Level is 4.

12-6

Time

State

Ch.No.

Level

Message

12/01/2011 12:50:00

Occurred

1-1

Level 8Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:50:10

Occurred

1-2

Level 4

Abnormal temperature

12/01/2011 12:50:20

Recovered

1-1

Level 8Voltage drop

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.5

Saving and Deleting Data

● Saving Data
You can select whether or not to save the sampled data in the data storage area. The method to save data is
configured on the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
When Saving Data to the Data Storage Area
Select Store under Data in the Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box.
Main unit
External device0

12:00
Alarm occurred

1

12:00
1

0

12:53

Recovered

12:54

Confirmed

12:53
Alarm Log data
No.

MessageOccurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:00

12/01 12:53:10

12/01 12:54:30

If the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount set for the data storage area, the data isprocessed with either of the following methods.
■ FixedIf the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the new data is not saved.
New data

12■ Rotate
If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Alarm Log data storage amount

When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Alarm Log is erased when the main unit is turned off.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-7

Alarm Log Function

Alarm Log data storage amount1 Overview
Data Storage AmountThe maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is as follows.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
5,520
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 11,660
When Not Saving Data to the Data Storage Area
Select No Store under Data in the Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box.
Use this option to monitor a state of device address and display only detected active alarms on the Alarm List Display.
Main unit
External device
Voltage drop

0

Page
Up
Page
Down

1

Alarm occurred

Alarm List Display● Deleting Data
The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the Online tab in WindO/I-NV4, click the arrow under Clear, and click All or Alarm Log Data. For details,
refer to Chapter 29 “4 Clear” on page 29-26.
• In the System Mode, on the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting, Initialize, Alarm Log in order.

12-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.6

Using Data and Detected Alarms
The saved data and detected alarms can be used in the following ways.

● Using Saved Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Alarm Log data
Ch.No.

Message

1-1

Voltage drop

1-2

Abnormal temperature 12/01/2011 12:01:09 12/01 12:02:21 12/01 12:02:55

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:02:00 12/01 12:03:11 12/01 12:05:12

1-3

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:30:21 12/01 12:55:15 12/01 13:00:00

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:45:36 12/01 12:53:12 12/01 12:57:41

To use with the main unit

• Display data with the Alarm
Log Display
Display Alarm Log data with theAlarm Log Display.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “8Alarm Log Display” on page 9156.

Occurrence Time

Recovery Time Conﬁrmaon Time

12/01/2011 12:00:05 12/01 12:01:10 12/01 12:01:30

To use with devices other than the main unit

• Save to and read from anexternal memory device*1
Output data from the main unit to
the external memory device as a
CSV file and use it on a computer.
For details, refer to “4.4 Saving theData as a CSV File” on page 12-38.

External
Memory Device

Book1

No.

Occurrence Time

Sheet1

Sheet2

Recovery TimeConﬁrmaon Time

Message
Pressure sensor fault
Hydraulic pressure low
Pressure sensor fault
Pressure sensor fault
Hydraulic pressure low
Pressure sensor fault

Sheet3

Alarm Log data (CSV)
Occurrence
Message
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault

SelectUp

Recovered
12 : 53• Print data with the printer*2
Print Alarm Log data with the printerconnected to the main unit.
For details, refer to Chapter 34“Printer” on page 34-1

Confirmed
12 : 54

Down Check Delete

12

Main unit
External device
Voltage drop

0

Page
Up
Page
Down

1

Alarm occurred

Alarm List Display*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-9

Alarm Log Function● Using Detected Alarms• Display alarms with the Alarm List Display
Display detected alarms with the Alarm List Display.
For details, refer to “4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm”
on page 12-33.

2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure

2

Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Alarm Log function.

2.1

Configuring the Device Addresses to Monitor and the Alarm Detection Condition

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device address to monitor under Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab.
If you select Word, device addresses are configured per block.
If you select Bit, device addresses are configured per channel.

3 Set the number of blocks to manage in Number of Blocks.
1 channel is used for 1 device address to monitor. 1 block is 16 channels.
The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source Device Address Type setting and the model.

4 Select the reference screen type in Reference Screen.
The reference screen is associated with the channel. This screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.
If a reference screen is not displayed, select Not Use.

5 To batch register all channels, click Auto. To individually register each channel, click Edit.
An example when Auto is clicked is described here.
The Auto-Setup dialog box is displayed.

12-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure

6 Specify the device address to monitor in Source.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
For the Auto-Setup dialog box, the device addresses are sequentially set starting with the specified device addressfrom the highlighted row in Settings.

7 Under Data, select whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
To display Alarm Log data on the main unit or to output the data to a file, select Store.
If you select No Store, Alarm Log data is not created, but states of device addresses are monitored.

8 Under Alarm function, select whether or not to use the alarm function.
For channels with Disable selected, states of device addresses are not monitored and Alarm Log data is not created.

9 Specifies the level (1 to 8) of the alarm in the Level.
10 Under NO/NC, select the alarm detection condition.
If you select NO, the alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1. If you select NC, the alarm occurs
when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.

11 Under Lock/Unlock, select whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
If you select Unlock, the alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when the monitored bit
becomes the normal state.
If you select Lock, even if the monitored bit becomes the normal state, the alarm remains active until the key button
CHECK is pressed.

12 Select the Text ID check box and specify the message to display when the alarm occurs as a Text Manager ID
number (1 to 32000).

Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) text IDs are used starting from the set ID number.

13 Specify the screen number (1 to 3000) to display when the key button Ref. is pressed in Reference Screen
Number.

Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) screens are used starting from the screen number.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in Reference Screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-11

Alarm Log Function

Severity of the alarms is in ascending order (lowest to highest). Default is set to “1”.

12

2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure

14 Click OK.
The device addresses to monitor and the messages are batch configured and displayed in Settings.

15 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the device addresses to monitor and the alarm detection condition.
Next, configure the functions to execute using saved data and detected alarms.
 “4.1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display” on page 12-31
 “4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm” on page 12-33
 “4.3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred” on page 12-36
 “4.4 Saving the Data as a CSV File” on page 12-38
To use the Alarm Log settings configured on the project on another project, save it as a file, and then import
it to a project. Right-click the Alarm Log Settings on the Project window to export or import the file.

12-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box

3

Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

3.1

Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure what kind of data to sample when an alarm occurs and the methods for savingand deleting the sampled data.

Fixed:

When saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the new data is not saved.
New data

Alarm Log data storage amountRotate: When saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Alarm Log data storage amount

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-13

12
Alarm Log Function■ Storage Method
Selects the data processing method when the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amountset for the data storage area.

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Monitoring Period (x 100 msec)
Specifies the period to write the state of the monitored device address to the main unit (6 to 500 (100 ms units)).
■ Monitor Number of Active Alarms
Select this check box to count the number of active alarms.
(Destination Device Address): Specifies a word device to write the number of active alarms.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Monitor How Many Times Each Alarm has occurred
Select this check box to count the number of alarms that has occurred per channel.
(Top Device Address): Specifies a word device to write the number of alarms that has occurred. Number of blocks x
16 (number of channels) address numbers are used starting from the set device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: The number of blocks is 2 and LKR100 is specified as the start device address.
The number of alarms that has occurred for channel number 1-0 is saved in
LKR100. The number of alarms that has occurred for channel 1-1 is saved in
LKR101, and this pattern continues up to LKR131 where the number of alarms thathas occurred for channel number 2-15 is saved.
Channel No.
1-0
LKR100
1-1
LKR101
1-2
LKR102Block 116 channels

Block 2

1-14
1-15
2-0
2-1
2-2

LKR114
LKR115
LKR116
LKR117
LKR118

2-14
2-15

LKR130
LKR131

Top Device Address

16 channels• If you specify HMI Keep Registers (LKR) as the destination word device, the number of alarms that has
occurred is retained even when the main unit power is turned off.
• The amount of Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area with the Alarm Log function is stored in
HMI Special Data Register LSD57.
• To monitor the number of alarms that has occurred, number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) device
addresses are required from the set start device address. If the destination device address does notexist, “Device range error” occurs on the main unit.
• If the values of the device addresses that are counting the number of alarms that has occurred are
overwritten by another process, the alarms cannot be accurately counted.
■ Clear Log Data for Recovered Alarms
Select this check box to delete recovered data out of the saved Alarm Log data.
(Trigger Device Address): Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition to delete
data. The recovered data is deleted when the value of the configured device address changes
from 0 to 1. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

12-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Monitor the State of Each Alarm
Select this check box to check the alarm state per channel.
(Top Device Address): Specifies a word device to write the alarm state. Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels)
address numbers are used starting from the set device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
The following values are written to the bits depending on the alarm state.
Bit 15

Bit 3 Bit 0

Reserved

0: Before alarm/aer recovery
1: Aer alarm
0: Second and later alarm (Alarm that has occurred again while an alarm is acve)
1: First alarm (First alarm that occurred)
0: Aer conﬁrm
1: Before conﬁrm■ Call Popup Screen
These settings configure the popup screen to display when an alarm occurs. The popup screen displayed when an
alarm occurs is called the alarm screen.
Call Popup Screen:

Select this check box to display the alarm screen when an alarm occurs.

Screen Number:Specifies the alarm screen number (1 to 3015) to display when an alarm occurs.

Coordinates X, Y:

Specifies the coordinates to display the alarm screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the alarm screen
is the X and Y coordinates.
The units and range for the display coordinates is as follows.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
5,520
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 11,660
Clickto open the Data Storage Area Management dialog box. You can change the allocation of data storage area
memory in the Data Storage Area Management dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 15 “Data Storage Area” onpage 15-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-15

12
Alarm Log Function■ Number of Stored Data
Specifies the maximum amount of Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area. Data is saved up to the set amount.
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is as follows.

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● Channel Tab
The Channel tab is used to configure the device addresses to monitor and the alarm detection condition.

■ Source Device Address Type
Selects the type of device address to monitor.
Word: Uses a word device. Device Addresses are configured per block.
Bit:

Uses a bit device. Device Addresses are configured per channel.

■ Number of Blocks
Configures the Alarm Log data in block units. The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source
Device Address Type setting.
Word: 0 to 128
Bit:

0 to 8
1 block is composed of 16 channels. 1 device address can be monitored for each channel. The maximum
number of device addresses that can be monitored is 16 for each block.

■ Reference Screen
Select the type of reference screen from the following items.
Base Screen, Popup Screen, Not Use
The reference screen is displayed when a message is selected on the Alarm List Display or the Alarm Log Display andthe key button Ref. is pressed. It is the base screen or popup screen associated with each channel.
2. Press the key button Ref.

1. Select a message displayedon the Alarm List Display
or the Alarm Log Display

Pump 1 fault
Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectMessage
Recovered Confirmed
Motor fault
Pump1 fault
12 : 50High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 fault

Up

Down

Delete Reference

Message
Recovered Confirmed
Pump 1Motor
output
low
fault
fault
12 : 50
Press Pump1
Stop,
check theair,High pressure
12 : 54
Pump1 faultStart.
then press

Occurrence
12/01 09 : 15
12/01 10 : 02
12/01 10 : 28
12/01 13 : 02

SelectUp

Stop

Key button Ref.

12-16

Reference screen opens

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Down

Air Press.
0000

Delete Reference

Start

kg/m2

Reference screen

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Settings
The Alarm Log settings for each channel are edited here.
No.:

Displayed as (Block No.)-(Channel No.). Double clicking the cell opens the Individual Settings
dialog box.

Source:Shows the bit device or the bit number of the word device to monitor. Double clicking the cell
opens the Tag Editor.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

Data:

Shows whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
Double clicking the cell switches between Store and No Store.
Setting to Store makes the buzzer sound when the value of bit for the channel changes to 1.

Alarm function:Shows whether or not the alarm function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable. Channels switched to Disable cannot be configured. States of device
addresses are not monitored and Alarm Log data is not created.

Level:

Displays the alarm level. Double clicking the cell allows you to change the level (1 to 8).

NO/NC:

Shows the alarm detection condition. Double clicking the cell switches between NO and NC.

Lock/Unlock:Shows whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
Double clicking the cell switches between Lock and Unlock.

Text ID:

Shows the Text Manager ID number to use for the message displayed when an alarm occurs.
Double clicking the cell allows you to change the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32,000).

Text Manager:

Shows the text for the specified text ID. Double clicking the cell opens the Text Manager.
Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the Text Manager ID number.

Reference Screen No.: Shows the screen number to display when the key button Ref. is pressed. Double clicking thecell opens the Individual Settings dialog box.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in
Reference Screen.

Click this button to open the Auto-Setup dialog box. The Auto-Setup dialog box settings are reflected in all thechannels.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 12-18.
■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected channel.
Select a channel and click this button to open the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for the selected channel
are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 12-18.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-17

12
Alarm Log Function■ AutoBatch registers or changes the settings for all the channels.

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box
With the Auto-Setup dialog box, the Alarm Log settings for all channels are batch registered or changed.
With the Individual Settings dialog box, the Alarm Log settings for the selected channel are registered or changed.

■ Channel*1
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block Number:Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.

Channel Number: Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.
■ Block Settings
Configures Source and Data in block units.
Source:For the Auto-Setup dialog box, the device addresses are sequentially set from block number 1-channel
number 1, starting with the specified device address.
For the Individual Settings dialog box, if Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab is Word,
the 16 channels for the block selected at the start of the specified device address are batch configured.
For Bit, the selected channel is individually configured.
Click
to open the Tag Editor where you can edit the device address. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Data:

Selects whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
For the Auto-Setup dialog box, all the channels are batch configured.
For the Individual Settings dialog box, the 16 channels for the selected block are batch configured.
Store:

Alarm Log data can be displayed on the main unit or output to file.

No Store: Alarm Log data is not created, but states of device addresses are monitored.

*1 Individual Settings dialog box only

12-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Channel Settings
The trigger condition for the channel is configured here.
Alarm function:

Level:

Selects whether or not to use the alarm function.
Enable:Monitors the state of the device address configured for the channel and samples
the alarm information.

Disable:Does not monitor the state of the device address. No Alarm Log data is created.

Specifies the level (1 to 8) of the alarm.
Displays the alarm level. Double clicking the cell allows you to change the level (1 to 8).

NO/NC:

Selects the alarm detection condition.

Lock/Unlock:NO:

The alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1.

NC:

The alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.

Selects whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
Lock:

Even if the monitored bit returns the normal state, the alarm remains active until
the key button CHECK is pressed.

Unlock:The alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when themonitored bit returns the normal state.

Example: NO/NC is NO.
Monitored bit0
Alarm occurred

0

UnlockLock

Record occurrence me

Record occurrence me

Record recovery me

No operaon

Record conﬁrmaon me

Record conﬁrmaon me
Record recovery me

1

1

The display on the Alarm List Display disappears when the alarm is recovered from, regardless of the Lock/
Unlock setting. To keep displaying the alarm until CHECK is pressed, use the Alarm Log Display.
Text ID:

To use text registered in Text Manager as the message to display when an alarm occurs,
select this check box and specify the Text Manager ID number to use as the message.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) text IDs are used starting from the set ID
number.
Click

Text:

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

Shows the text for the specified text ID.

Reference Screen Number: Specifies the screen number (1 to 3000) to display when the key button Ref. is pressed.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) screens are used starting from the screen
number.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in
Reference Screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-19

Alarm Log Function

Press CHECK

12

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● External Memory Device Tab
The External Memory Device tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory
device*1.

The output data is stored in the "ALARMLOG" folder of the External Memory Device folder.
The default External Memory Device folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 33 “1.4 File structure”
on page 33-3 and Chapter 33 “1.6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder” on page 33-13.
Sampled data after starting output to the external memory device is not included in the output data.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

12-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ BatchSelect this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory device*1.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit
Output to

Alarm Log data
Ch.No.

Message

External memory device
Occurrence Time

Recovery Time

Confirmation Time
12/01 12:01:30

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:05

12/01 12:01:10

1-2

Abnormal temperature

12/01/2011 12:01:09

12/01 12:02:21

12/01 12:02:55

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:02:00

12/01 12:03:11

12/01 12:05:12

1-3

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:30:21

12/01 12:55:15

12/01 13:00:00

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:45:36

12/01 12:53:12

12/01 12:57:41

Data to be output (all)USB flash drive

Trigger Device Address
0

Alarm Log data (CSV)

1

All the data is saved on the external memory device*1 when the value of the Trigger Device Address changes from 0

to 1. If a file with the same name already exists on the external memory device*1, that file is overwritten. The
maximum amount of output data is the amount configured by the data storage area.

The storing of data stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory device. The error
information is stored in the following HMI Special Data Registers. For details about the error information,refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: LSD42
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD33
Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition for batch
output. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Data is output to file when the value of the Trigger Device Address changes from 0 to 1.
File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.

Specify File Name by Value of Device Address: Select this check box to assign a file namefor the output data using a value of device
address specified in the File Name Device
Address.
(File Name Device Address):

Specifies a word device to create a file name. The filename is set by reading the values sequentially fromthe starting device specified with the File Name
Device Address and handling those values ascharacter data up to the character before NULL (00).
The maximum number of device addresses is 40 (2characters per word device, maximum of 80 singlebyte characters). You can only specify an internal
device. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

Example: The device address specified by (File Name Device Address) is LDR100 andthe text to set is "IDEC":(File Name Device Address) LDR100

LDR101LDR102‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)(NULL)

0000(Hex)

The file name at this time becomes "IDEC.CSV".
*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-21

Alarm Log Function

The default is “ALMHTO.CSV”. To change the file name, enter a new file name. The
maximum number is 120 characters (including the extension).

12

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box

Add Device Address data to File Name:

Select this check box to add the bottom three digits ofthe value of the device address configured by (FileName Device Address) to the end of the file name forthe output data.

(File Name Device Address): Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to
add to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-72. This option can only be configured when the Add
Device Address data to File Name check box is selected.
Example: File Name is "ALMHTO01" and the value of device address in (File Name Device
Address) is 123, the file name is "ALMHTO01123.CSV".
Add Time Stamp:

Select from the following format for date and time to be added to the filename when data is output:
None, YY, YY+MM, YY+MM+DD, YY+MM+DD+HH,
YY+MM+DD+HH+MM, YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS
The format is YYMMDD_hhmmss (YY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour,
mm: minute, ss: second).

Example: File Name is "ALMHTO01" on September 15 2013 at 23:30:50.

Set limit on files:

YY:

ALMHTO01_13

YY+MM:

ALMHTO01_1309

YY+MM+DD:

ALMHTO01_130915

YY+MM+DD+HH:

ALMHTO01_130915_23

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM:

ALMHTO01_130915_2330

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS:

ALMHTO01_130915_233050

Specifies the upper limit (1 to 100) when limiting the number of files to be output.

Output Alarm Level: Select this check box to output the level settings.
When the Set limit on files check box is selected, note the following points.
• If the number of data files saved on the external memory device increases, it may take some time forthe data output processing, or the output of the next data may not be processed normally.
• When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both
occur simultaneously, the pictures may not be displayed.
• When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device, the blinking period may
slow down when data output processing occurs.
• The following single-byte characters cannot be used in the file name configured by File Name orSpecify File Name by Value of Device Address.
"*/:;<>?\|• File names that exceed the limits in Specify File Name by Value of Device Address and file names
configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the file name exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL), the text
stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
- When the first character is a character that cannot beused, the text is that set for File Name.
• The operation when the Set limit on files check box is selected is as follows.
- The files are output up to the set limit, and then for additional files, the new files are saved bydiscarding the old files in order of the oldest first.
- If the number of files saved on the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation
starts, the number of files at that time is the limit. From there the data is discarded in order from theoldest data and replaced with new data with each file output.

12-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box■ Real Time

Select this check box to output data to the external memory device*1 in real time.
External Memory Device
SD memory card
Main unit
Alarm Log data
Time

State

Ch.No.

Message

12/01/2011 12:00:05

Occurred

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:01:09

Occurred

1-2

Abnormal temperature

12/01/2011 12:01:10

Recovered

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:03:30

Confirmed

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:03:09

Occurred

1-3

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:04:33

Recovered

1-2

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:05:15

Confirmed

1-2

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:08:41

Recovered

1-3Overcurrent

Output toExternal memory device USB flash drive

Data to be output
3 minutes after
operation starts

Data to be output
3 minutes after that
Data to be output after
another 3 minutes

3 minute interval
after operation starts

Alarm Log data (CSV)With real time output, data is saved to the external memory device*1 in three minute intervals after the main unit
starts running. If the accumulated data reaches 819th item, then the data is forcibly saved to the external memory
device*1. When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory device*1, data is appended tothat file. If there was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of
output data varies based on the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and the labels.
If the interval to update the Alarm Log is shorter than real time output (the interval for writing to the external memory
device), that Alarm Log is recorded up to the 1023rd item, and then afterwards, old data is discarded in order andreplaced with new data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Alarm Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there isinsufficient space on the external memory device. The error information is stored in the following HMISpecial Data Registers. For details about the error information, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSD42
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD33• The amount of free space on the external memory device is saved to the following HMI Special Data
Registers. For details about the free space on the External Memory Devices, refer to Chapter 35 “HMISpecial Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSD43, 44
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD34, 35
Trigger Condition:

Select the check boxes for the items that will trigger the output of Alarm Log data to theexternal memory device.
Occurrence:

Alarm Log data is output to the external memory device when an alarm has
occurred.
Recovery:
Alarm Log data is output to the external memory device when the alarm isrecovered from.
Confirmation: Alarm Log data is output to the external memory device when the key button CHECK
was pressed.
Month/day/year hour:minute:second is output for the trigger condition occurrence time, recovery time, andconfirmation time.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-23

Alarm Log Function• When the value of the following HMI Special Internal Relays changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time isfirst output in real time to the external memory device, and then access to the external memory device isstopped. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSM20
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSM18

12

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box

File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “ALMHTA.CSV”. To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum
number is 120 characters (including the extension).
Specify File Name by Value of Device Address:
Select this check box to specify the name of the file for the output data with the value of thedevice address configured by (File Name Device Address).
(File Name Device Address): Specifies the word device that is the source of the data to use
as the file name. The file name is set by reading the values
sequentially from the starting device address specified with
the File Name Device Address and handling those values ascharacter data up to the character before NULL (00).
The maximum number of device addresses is 40 (80 singlebyte characters). You can only specify an internal device. For
the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: The device address specified by (File Name Device Address) is LDR100 and thetext to set is "IDEC":(File Name Device Address) LDR100

LDR101LDR102‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)(NULL)

0000(Hex)

The file name at this time becomes "IDEC.CSV".
Add Device Address data to File Name:
Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the value of the device addressconfigured by (File Name Device Address) to the end of the file name for the output data.
(File Name Device Address): Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to
add to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-72. This option can only be configured when the
Add Device Address data to File Name check box isselected.
Example: File Name is "ALMHTA" and the value of the device address configured by (FileName Device Address) is 123, the file name is "ALMHTA123.CSV".
Add Time Stamp:

Selects the format of the output date and time to add to the filename for the output data.
None, YY, YY+MM, YY+MM+DD
The format is YYMMDD (YY: year, MM: month, DD: day).

Example: File Name is "ALMHTA" on September 15 2013
YY:

ALMHTA_13

YY+MM:

ALMHTA_1309

YY+MM+DD:

ALMHTA_130915

Realtime Output:

Select this check box to forcibly output the data and save it to file atthe desired timing.

(Trigger Device Address):

Set limit on files:

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device
to serve as the condition to forcibly output the data. You can
only specify an internal device. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Data is output to file when the value of Trigger Device Addresschanges from 0 to 1.

Specifies the upper limit (1 to 100) when limiting the number of files to be output.

Output Alarm Level: Select this check box to output the level settings.

12-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box

When the Set limit on files check box is selected, note the following points.
• If the number of data files saved on the external memory device increases, it may take some time forthe data output processing, or the output of the next data may not be processed normally.
• When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both
occur simultaneously, the pictures may not be displayed.
• When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device, the blinking period may
slow down when data output processing occurs.
• The following single-byte characters cannot be used in the file name configured by File Name orSpecify File Name by Value of Device Address.
"*/:;<>?\|• File names that exceed the limits in Specify File Name by Value of Device Address and file names
configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the file name exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL), the text
stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
- When the first character is a character that cannot be used, the text is that set for File Name.
• The operation when the Set limit on files check box is selected is as follows.
- The files are output up to the set limit, and then for additional files, the new files are saved bydiscarding the old files in order of the oldest first.
- If the number of files saved on the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation
starts, the number of files at that time is the limit. From there the data is discarded in order from theoldest data and replaced with new data with each file output.
• The following operations are as follows if the Realtime Output check box is selected.
- Even if the data is outputted forcibly, the real time output period (3 minute interval) is not reset.
- While data is being output with the real time output function, the file is not output when the value of
the Realtime Output device address is 1.
- Even when output has finished, the value of device does not automatically change to 0.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-25

12
Alarm Log Function• The function to sample data operates when Alarm Log data is being saved to the external memory device.
• The batch output or real time output status of the Alarm Log data can be checked with the value of HMI
Special Internal Relay LSM36. When the data starts to be written to the external memory device, thevalue of device address is 1. When writing is complete, the value is 0.
• The methods to erase Alarm Log files saved on the external memory device are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory Device tab on the Project
Settings dialog box, select the Remove Files check box and the All Alarm Log data check box, andthen configure the trigger device address. Assign that trigger device address to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV4, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data inExternal Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Alarm Log Data check box
and click OK.
- To erase files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - FileManager. In the File Manager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
Output Data File Name
The file name format is as follows.
File Name Value of Device Address_YYMMDD_hhmmss.CSV
File Name:

The text entered in File Name or the text entered according to the value of thedevice address set by Specify File Name by Value of Device Address

Value of Device Address:

The lower 3 digits of the value of the device address configured by Add Device
Address data to File NameYYMMDD:

The year, month, and day of the month set on Add Time Stamphhmmss:

The hour, minute, and second of the time configured on Add Time Stamp■ Example 1
Item

Setting

File Name

ALMHTO

Add value of Device Address to File
Name

(File Name Device Address) is LDR200

LDR200 value: 123

Add Time Stamp

YY+MM

Date when data was output:
September 2013

Result: The file name is "ALMHTO123_1309.CSV".
■ Example 2
Item

SettingSpecify File Name by Value of Device
Address(File Name Device Address) is LDR100
Text to set is "IDEC"LDR100 value: 4944 (Hex)LDR101 value: 4543 (Hex)LDR102 value: 0000 (Hex)Add value of Device Address to File
Name

(File Name Device Address) is LDR200

LDR200 value: 123

Add Time Stamp

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS

Date and time when data was output:
September 15 2013 at 23:30:50

Result: The file name is "IDEC123_130915_233050.CSV".

12-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● Printing Tab
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Printing tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the printer connected to the main unit.

■ BatchSelect this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the printer.
Main unit
Printer

Ch.No.

Message

12Output to printer

Alarm Log data
Recovery Time

Confirmation Time
12/01 12:01:30

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:00:05

12/01 12:01:10

1-2

Abnormal temperature

12/01/2011 12:01:09

12/01 12:02:21

12/01 12:02:55

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:02:00

12/01 12:03:11

12/01 12:05:12

1-3

Overcurrent

12/01/2011 12:30:21

12/01 12:55:15

12/01 13:00:00

1-1

Voltage drop

12/01/2011 12:45:36

12/01 12:53:12

12/01 12:57:41

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

Data to be output (all)Trigger Device Address
01

Printing of all the data starts when the value of the Trigger Device Address changes from 0 to 1. Alarm Log data that
occurs after the start of printing is not printed.
Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition to print.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
The data prints when the value of the Trigger Device Address changes from 0 to 1.
Batch output example (printing)
No.
01-00
01-01
01-00

Occurrence Time
12/31/11 12:00:00
12/31/11 12:10:15
12/31/11 13:00:30

Recovery Time
12/31 12:20:20
12/31 14:00:40-

Conﬁrmaon Time Message
12/31 12:30:45
Pressure sensor fault
12/31 14:30:50
Hydraulic pressure low
Pressure sensor fault

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-27

Alarm Log Function

Occurrence Time

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box

Print with Second:

Select this check box to print the time including seconds.

Paper Feed Direction:

Selects the paper feed direction as either Vertical or Horizontal.
Vertical:Horizontal:

ABC

ABC

• For A4 size paper, up to 40 items of Alarm Log data are printed on a single sheet.
• The year is not printed for recovery times and confirmation times.
The function to sample data operates when Alarm Log data is printing.

12-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box● Options Tab
The Options tab is used to configure whether or not the internal buzzer of the main unit operates and the screen
flashing.

■ Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs
Select this check box to sound a beep when an alarm has occurred.
■ Screen flashing when Alarm occurs
Select this check box to have the screen flash when an alarm occurs.

All Alarms:

The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing each time an alarm occur.

Alarms with the specified Level or upper: Specifies the level (2 to 8). Each time alarm with the specified level orupper sets off, the buzzer gets triggered and screen starts flashing.
Only First Alarm:

The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing only when the first alarm*1
occurs.
No beeps will sound and no screen will flash when another alarm isalready active.

■ Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing
Select the check box for the items that will trigger the sound of the buzzer and screen flashing to stop.
When touch everywhere on the screen:

The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch
anywhere on the screen.

When press CHECK or All Chk. button:

The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch the key
buttons CHECK or All Chk. on the Alarm Log Display.

When all Alarms are recovered:

The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when all the alarms arerecovered from.

*1 The first alarm that has occurred in a state where no alarms are active

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-29

12
Alarm Log Function■ Buzzer and Screen FlashingThis item selects the condition for the alarm to sound the buzzer or to flash the screen. This item can only be
configured when the Buzzer when Alarm occurs or the Screen flashing when Alarms occurs is selected.

3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box• While the beep is sounding, System Area 1 (address number+1, bit 6) is 1.
• While the screen is flashing, System Area 1 (address number+1, bit 2) is 1.
• To stop the sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has occurred, use the following
methods.
- Press the key button Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing- When a condition selected with the Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing checkboxes is satisfied- To stop the sound of the buzzer, set System Area 1 (address number+1, bit 6) to 0
- To stop the screen flashing, set System Area 1 (address number+1, bit 1 to 4) to 0
However, when System Area 1 (address number+1, bit 6) is 1 for a reason other than the occurrence ofan alarm, the sound of the buzzer does not stop until 0 is written. When System Area 1 (address
number+1, bit 1 to 4) are 1, the alarm is triggered, however, the screen flashing doesn't stop until 0 is
written into it.
• If you stop the screen flashing, the backlight turns off when System Area 1 (address number+1, bit 0),
and the backlight turns on when it is 1.

12-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4

Using Data and Detected Alarms
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device address to monitor under Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab and specify
Number of Blocks.

3 Select the channel number to register and click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

12
Alarm Log Function

4 Specify the device address to monitor in Source and select Store under Data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-31

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

5 Select Enable under Alarm function, configure Level, NO/NC and Lock/Unlock, and click OK.
You are returned to the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to register all the channels.
7 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.

8 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm Log Display.

9 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm Log Display.
10 Double-click the placed Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

11 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “8.3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box” on page 9-158.

12 Click OK.
The Properties of Alarm Log Display dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the main unit to display saved data with the Alarm Log Display.

12-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4.2

Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device address to monitor under Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab and specify
Number of Blocks.

3 Select the channel number to register a message to and click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

12
Alarm Log Function

4 Specify the device address to monitor in Source and select No Store under Data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-33

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

5 Select Enable under Alarm function and configure Level, NO/NC and Lock/Unlock.
6 Select the Text ID check box and click.

Text Manager opens.

7 Double click the (Text) and enter the message.

(Text)

8 Click OK.
You are returned to the Individual Settings dialog box.

9 Click OK.
The registered message is displayed in Settings.

12-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 to register messages for all the channels.
The messages to use can be registered in advance in Text Manager.

11 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.

12 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm List Display.

13 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Alarm List Display.
14 Double-click the placed Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

15 On the General tab, under Message Settings, select Use Alarm Log Settings.

12
Alarm Log Function

16 Configure the other settings and the settings on each tab as necessary.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “7.3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box” on page 9-140.

17 Click OK.
The Properties of Alarm List Display dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the main unit to display registered messages with the Alarm List Display according to theactive alarm.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-35

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4.3

Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the type of device address to monitor under Source Device Address Type on the Channel tab and specify
Number of Blocks.

3 Select the channel number to register a message to and click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 Specify the device address to monitor in Source and select Store under Data.

5 Select Enable under Alarm function, configure Level, NO/NC and Lock/Unlock, and click OK.
You are returned to the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

12-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

6 Click the Options tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

7 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box to make a sound of the buzzer when an alarm has
occurred.

8 Select the Screen flashing when Alarm occurs check box to have the screen flashing when an alarm has
occurred.

9 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-37

12
Alarm Log Function

This concludes configuring the settings to make a sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has
occurred.

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

4.4

Saving the Data as a CSV File

● Saving the Data as a CSV File

The Alarm Log data can be saved to the external memory device*1 as a CSV file or uploaded to a computer.

The procedure to save the data is as follows.
• To save the data to an external memory device, click Alarm Log on the WindO/I-NV4 Configuration tab to open
the Alarm Log Settings dialog box. Select an output method check box on the External Memory Device tab andconfigure the items. The data can be saved to the External Memory Device folder on the external memory device.
For details, refer to “External Memory Device Tab” on page 12-20.
• To upload the data to a computer, click on ▼ to the right of(Upload) on the toolbar in Data File Manager, andthen click the Upload All Log Data or Upload Alarm Log Data to open the Browser For Folder dialog box.
Specify the location to save the file and click OK to save the file to the specified folder. For details, refer to the Data
File Manager User's Manual.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure for files output with batch output and real time output is different.
■ Batch
Batch output shows the recovery and confirmation time for an alarm that has occurred on a single line.
The data structure of files output with batch output is as follows. Bold items are replaced by the Alarm Log settings,
the sampled data, the running project name, and WindO/I-NV4 version number.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number"
Headers"File Type","Log type"
Blank row

Title row

Data row"Ch.No.","Level","Message","Occurrence Time","Recovery Time","Confirmation Time""Channel number","Level","Message","MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss","MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss","MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss"···

Output example

Data size of each row"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V4.50"... 41 bytes"File Type","Alarm Log Data"... 30 bytes... 2 bytes"Ch.No.","Level","Message","Occurrence Time","Recovery Time","Confirmation Time"... 82 bytes"1-0","Level 8","Voltage drop","08/11/2011 14:46:12","08/11 14:46:13","08/11 14:46:16"... 88 bytes"1-1","Level 4","Abnormal temperature","08/11/2011 14:47:18","08/11 14:47:19","08/11 14:47:20"... 96 bytes···*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

12-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms■ Real Time
Real time output displays the alarm state and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an
alarm occurs, is recovered from, or is confirmed.
The data structure of files output with real time output is as follows. Bold items are replaced by the Alarm Log
settings, the sampled data, the running project name, and WindO/I-NV4 version number.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number"
Headers"File Type","Log type"
Blank row

Title row

"Time","State","Ch.No.","Level","Message"" MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss","State","Channel number","Level","Message"···

Data row

Output example

Data size of each row"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V4.50"... 41 bytes"File Type","Alarm Log Data"... 30 bytes... 2 bytes"Time","State","Ch.No.","Level","Message"... 43 bytes"08/11/2011 14:46:12","Occurred","1-0","Level 8","Voltage drop"... 65 bytes"08/11/2011 14:46:13","Recovered","1-0","Level 8","Voltage drop"... 66 bytes"08/11/2011 14:46:16","Confirmed","1-0","Level 8","Voltage drop"... 66 bytes"08/11/2011 14:47:18","Occurred","1-1","Level 4","Abnormal temperature"... 73 bytes···

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

12-39

12
Alarm Log Function• The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full-width characters, 1 byte for half-width characters,and 2 bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• Can only output the Level when the Output Alarm Level check box in the External Memory Device
tab on the Alarm Log Settings dialog box is selected.
• A space is inserted before the date in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project Settings, on
the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss
Western, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic:
MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss

4 Using Data and Detected Alarms

12-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 13

Data Log Function

This chapter describes how to configure the Data Log function and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Data Log Function is Used
The Data Log function samples values of device addresses with the main unit using the configured sampling condition
and Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area. The sampled values of device addresses are saved in internal memory
or external memory device along with the sampling time.
The Data Log function can perform the following functions.
• Sample values of device addresses at a fixed interval
Main unit
External device
12 : 00

D100 : 0

12 : 05

D100 : 55

12 : 10

D100 : 123• Sample values of device addresses when a value of device address changes
Main unit
External device

0

D100 : 123

1

13
Data Log Function• Output Data Log data to the external memory device*1
Main unit

External Memory Device
Output toExternal memory device

SD memory card

USB flash drive

Data Log data (CSV)*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-1

1 Overview• Copy Data Log data to internal devices
Data Log data

Main unit
External device

126

Sampling Time

Data001

01/01/2011 12:00:30

120

01/01/2011 12:01:30

121

01/01/2011 12:02:30

122

01/01/2011 12:03:30

123

01/01/2011 12:04:30

124

01/01/2011 12:05:30

125

01/01/2011 12:06:30

126

125
124

Copy
LDR10 : 126
LDR11 : 125
LDR12 : 124(Internal device)

13-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.2

Sampling Values of Device Addresses
The main unit samples values of target device addresses at a regular interval or when a value of device addresschanges.

● Sampling Value of Device Addresses at a Regular Interval
When sampling values of device addresses (D100 to D102) at a 5 minute interval (Time: 300 seconds) with the data
storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the main unit samples Data Log data as follows.
Main unit
External device
12 : 05 : 00

D100

D101

D102

20

80

2

10

70

3

30

90

1

12 : 10 : 00
12 : 15 : 00

1 5 minutes after data sampling starts, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.
2 10 minutes after data sampling starts, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.
3 15 minutes after data sampling starts, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.
Data stored on the main unit

Values of Device Addresses
Time

Value
D100 D101 D102
10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:02:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:03:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:04:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:06:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:07:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:08:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:09:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:11:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:12:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:14:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:16:00

10

70

3

1
2

3

Value
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3

01/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

13
Data Log Function

01/01/2011 12:01:00

Sampling Time

4 20 minutes after data sampling starts, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.
Since the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the oldest data is deleted in order to save thenewest data to the main unit.
Data stored on the main unit

Values of Device Addresses
Time

Value

Sampling Time

D100 D101 D102

·
··

·
··

·
··

·
··

01/01/2011 12:17:00

40

60

2

01/01/2011 12:18:00

30

60

1

01/01/2011 12:19:00

10

90

3

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

Value
Data 1

Data 2

Data 301/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

Deleted

4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-3

1 Overview● Sampling Values of Device Addresses when a Value of Device Address Changes
If sample values of device addresses (D100 to D102), when the bit device or the bit number of the word device
configured as the Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area switches from 0 to 1 and the data storage amount in thedata storage area is set to 3, the main unit samples Data Log data as follows. (When Sampling Method is Whilesatisfying the condition of writing to data storage area)
Main unit
External device
D100
20

D101
80

D102
2

1

0

1 When data sampling starts and the value of device address configured as the Condition of Writing to Data Storage
Area switches from 0 to 1, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.

2 When the value of device address configured as the Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area switches from 0 to 1
the second time, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.

3 When the value of device address configured as the Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area switches from 0 to 1
the third time, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.
Values of Device Addresses
Time

0

0

0

1

1

1

Data stored on the main unit
Value

Sampling Time

D100 D101 D102

01/01/2011 12:01:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:02:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:03:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:04:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:06:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:07:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:08:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:09:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:10:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:11:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:12:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:14:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:16:00

10

70

3

1
2
3

Value
Data 1

Data 2

Data 301/01/2011 12:05:00

20

80

2

01/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

4 When the value of device address configured as the Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area switches from 0 to 1
the fourth time, the main unit stores the values for device addresses D100 to D102.

Since the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the oldest data is deleted in order to save thenewest data to the main unit.
Data stored on the main unit

Values of Device Addresses
Time

0

13-4

1

Value

Sampling Time

D100 D101 D102

··
·

·
·
·

·
·
·

·
·
·

01/01/2011 12:17:00

40

60

2

01/01/2011 12:18:00

30

60

1

01/01/2011 12:19:00

10

90

3

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

Value
Data 1

Data 2

Data 301/01/2011 12:13:00

10

70

3

01/01/2011 12:15:00

30

90

1

01/01/2011 12:20:00

20

80

2

Deleted

4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3

Data Configuration
The sampled data is composed of the sampling time, values of device addresses, and labels.
The relationship between the Data Log function settings and the sampled data is as follows.

Data Log settings

Data No. 1 settings
Data No. 2 settings
Data No. 3 settings

4. Sampling time label

Sampled data

Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:00

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:10:00

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:20:00

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:30:00

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:40:00

24

124

210

5. Data label

13
Data Log Function

2. Data storage amount

3. Amount of data

1. Channel 1 to 20
Data No. 3 Value of Device AddressTime the value of device address was sampled

Data No. 2 Value of Device Address
Data No. 1 Value of Device Address

1. Channel

The sampled data is in channel units. A maximum of 20 channels can be configured.

2. Data storage amount:

The amount of sampled data to save. The maximum amount that can be configured per
device address differs according to the model. For details, refer to “Data Storage
Amount” on page 13-6.

3. Amount of data:

The amount of data registered to a channel. The maximum amount of data that can be
set will depend on the Sampling Method setting. For details, refer to “Sampling
Method” on page 13-14.

4. Sampling time label:

When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this label is displayed in the label row
for the sampling time column.

5. Data label:

When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this label is displayed in the label row
for the data number columns.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-5

1 Overview

1.4

Saving and Deleting Data

● Saving Data
The sampled values of device addresses along with the sampling time are all saved in the data storage area.
Data Log data

Main unit
External device
Sample values ofdevice addresses

Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:00

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:10:00

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:20:00

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:30:00

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:40:00

24

124

210

01/01/2011 12:50:00

25

125

218

If the saved data exceeds the Data Log data storage amount per device address, the old data is deleted and the new data
is saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Data Log data storage amount per device address

When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Data Log is erased when the main unit is turned off.
Data Storage Amount
When saving the sampled data to the data storage area, set the data storage amount per device address. The amountof data that can be saved in the data storage area is calculated from the configured data storage amount per device
address and data amount for each channel.
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is as follows.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
13,808
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 29,165● Deleting Data
The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the Online tab in WindO/I-NV4, click the arrow under Clear, and click All or Data Log Data. For details, refer
to Chapter 29 “4 Clear” on page 29-26.
• In the System Mode, on the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting, Initialize, Data Log in order.

13-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.5

Using the Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:00

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:10:00

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:20:00

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:30:00

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:40:00

24

124

210

To use with the main unit

• Display the data in the Line Chart
Configure the data channel numbers and data
numbers and display the data in the Line Chart.
For details, refer to “4.1 Displaying the Data in theLine Chart” on page 13-33.

To use with devices other than the main unit

• Save to and read from an external memory
device*1
Output data from the main unit to the an external
memory device as a CSV file and use it on acomputer.
For details, refer to “4.4 Saving the Data as a CSVFile” on page 13-45.
External Memory Device
Book1

Sampling Time

Data002

Data003

2019/09/06 12:00:30

20

120

201

2019/09/06 12:01:30

21

121

204

2019/09/06 12:02:30

22

122

206

2019/09/06 12:03:30

Samplong Data and Time Data001

23

123

206

2019/09/06 12:04:30

24

124

210

2019/09/06 12:05:30

25

125

210

2019/09/06 12:06:30

26

126

218

Up

Down

Left
OperateData002

Data003

Data004

13

Data Log data
(CSV)

Data Log Function• Display the data with the Data Log Display
Lists the Data Log data saved in the data storage
area and the external memory device.
For details, refer to “4.2 Displaying Data on the
Data Log Display” on page 13-35.

Data001

Left

Page Left Page Up Page Down Page Left

• Display the data with the Numerical Input
or the Numerical Display
Copy the data to an internal device and display itwith the Numerical Input or the Numerical Display.
For details, refer to “4.3 Displaying Data as
Numerical Values” on page 13-36.

Data001
Data002
Data003

24
124
210

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-7

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

2

Data Log Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Data Log function.

2.1

Configuring the Device Addresses to Collect Data and the Sampling Condition

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Log.
The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Under Sampling Method, select the method that will be used by the main unit to read data.
■ Always
The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are always read. When the condition of writing to
the data storage area is satisfied, the values that were read at that point in time are written to the data storage area.
■ While satisfying the condition of writing to data storage area
The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are read when the condition of writing to the data
storage area is satisfied, and those values are written to the data storage area.

3 Select the channel number to register the Data Log settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

13-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

4 On the General tab, under Log function, select Enable.

The channel number selected on the Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed in Channel No.

5 Enter the name of the channel in Channel Name.
6 Under Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area, select the condition that will be used to write the values of thesampled device addresses to the data storage area.

■ Fixed Period
Writes the value of source device address at a fixed interval. If Fixed Period is selected, specify Time in seconds.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Event Word
Writes the value of source device address each time the value of monitored word device changes. If Event Word isselected, select the data size for the word device to monitor in Data Size, and specify the device address to monitor
as the condition for Writing data in Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-9

13
Data Log Function■ Event Bit
Writes the value of source device address each time the monitored bit device or the bit number of the word devicechanges from 0 to 1. If Event Bit is selected, specify the device address to monitor as the condition for writing data
in Device Address.

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

7 Click the Data tab.

8 Under Output Items, select the items that will be output when data is output as CSV.
Select the check boxes of the items to output.
If the Label check box is selected, enter the label to display in the sampling time column when the data is output as
CSV.
To use text registered in Text Manager, select the Use Text Manager check box and specify the ID number of thetext to use as the label.
Click

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

9 Click Add in the Output Data.
The Add Data dialog box is displayed.

10 In Number of Data, specify the amount of data to add to the channel.
The configured number of sequential device addresses from the start device address are displayed in Output Data.

13-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

11 In Label, enter the text to display for the label of the data.
The label is used for the label row of the data number columns when the data is output as CSV.
• When Number of Data is 2 or higher, "Data+Number" is automatically entered.
Example: Data001, Data002, Data003• If the Use Text Manager check box is selected on the Data tab, specify a text ID to use for the label inLabel(Start Text ID).

12 In Top Device Address, specify the starting device address of the word devices that will be read for sampling data.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

13 Select the data type of the sampled device value in Data Type.
The data type selected here is the data type for the numerical values when the data is output as CSV.
When String(S) is selected, use Words to specify the number of words of device addresses to read starting from theset device address and proceed to step 15. The set number of words of consecutive device addresses from thestarting device address will be output as CSV.

14 Under Display Type, set the display type for numerical values when data is output as CSV.
■ Counting Method
Select the display type as Decimal or Hexadecimal for numerical values.
■ Digits
Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on the display type and data type.
■ Display Floating Point
Select this check box to display the decimal point.
■ Floating Digits
Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of the number of digits specified byDigits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
■ Floating Symbol
Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.

13.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Data Log Function

This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.

13-11

2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure

15 Click OK to close the Add Data dialog box.
You are returned to the Individual Settings dialog box.

To individually register Data Log settings, repeat steps 9 through 14.

16 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
You are returned to the Data Log Settings dialog box.

17 Repeat steps 3 through 16 to register Data Log settings for all of the channel numbers to use.
18 Click OK.
The Data Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the sampling conditions and device addresses for sampling data.
Next, configure the functions to execute using sampled data.
 “4.1 Displaying the Data in the Line Chart” on page 13-33
 “4.3 Displaying Data as Numerical Values” on page 13-36
 “4.4 Saving the Data as a CSV File” on page 13-45

13-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

3

Data Log Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the items and buttons on the Data Log Settings dialog box and the Individual Settings dialog box.

3.1

Data Log Settings Dialog Box
All the device addresses to sample values from and their sampling conditions and Condition of Writing to Data Storage
Area are collectively managed in the Data Log Settings dialog box.

13

■ Settings
Edits the Data Log settings for each channel.
Shows the channel number. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box
where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page
13-15.

Log function:Shows whether or not the Data Log function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable. If switched to Disable, that channel’s settings all return to the default
settings.

Channel Name:

Shows the channel name. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box
where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page
13-15. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.

Condition of Writing: Shows the condition for writing to data storage area. Double clicking the cell switches between
Fixed Period, Event Bit, and Event Word. This option can only be set when Enable isselected in Log Function.
Data Size:Shows the data size for the device address that is the Condition of Writing to Data Storage
Area. Double clicking the cell switches between 16-bit and 32-bit. This option can only be set
when Event Word is selected in Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area.

Range:

Shows the time in seconds (1 to 9999) to sample data in a fixed interval when Fixed Period isselected in Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area. Double clicking the cell displays theIndividual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2
Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-15.
Shows the device address that is the condition of writing to Data Storage Area when Event Bit
or Event Word is selected in Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area. Double clicking
the cell displays the Tag Editor where you can edit the device address. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-13

Data Log Function

Channel No.:

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

Monitor:Shows the write destination device address when monitor count of writings to Data Storage
Area. Shows No when not monitoring. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog
Box” on page 13-15. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.

Batch:

Shows the trigger device address that triggers batch output when batch outputting all the data
saved in the data storage area to the external memory device. Shows No when there is no batch
output. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit
the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-15.

Real Time:

Shows whether or not to perform real time output. Double clicking the cell switches between
Yes and No. Data is output to the external memory device in 3 minute intervals for Yes
channels. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.

Words:

Shows the total number of words of the device addresses that will be sampled by the channel.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit thesettings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-15. This option can
only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.

■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected channel number.
Select a channel number and click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for theselected channel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-15.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
■ Clear All Log Data
Select this check box to erase the all log data saved in the data storage area.
(Trigger Device Address): Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that triggers the erasure of
the data. The data for all channels is erased when the value of the configured device
address changes from 0 to 1. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device Address
Shows the maximum amount of data storage per device address for Data Log data saved in the data storage area. If
data is saved up the maximum amount and then the maximum is exceeded, the old data is deleted and the new data
is saved.
The default is 1024.
Click
to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog box where you can change the allocation of data
storage area memory. For details, refer to Chapter 15 “Data Storage Area” on page 15-1.
■ Sampling Method
Sets the method that will be used by the main unit to read the values of device addresses.
Always:The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are always read. When the condition ofwriting to the data storage area is satisfied, the values that were read at that point in time are written to
the data storage area.

While satisfying the condition of writing to data storage area:
The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are read when the condition of writing
to the data storage area is satisfied, and those values are written to the data storage area.
The total number of words of data that can be registered to the data log settings will depend on Sampling
Method.
• If Sampling Method is Always, the total number of words in all channels is 128 words or less.
• If Sampling Method is While satisfying the condition of writing to data storage area, the total
number of words per channel is 128 words or less.

13-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

3.2

Individual Settings Dialog Box
Use the Individual Settings dialog box to register or edit the Data Log settings for the selected channel.

13■ Channel Number
Shows the channel number selected in Settings in the Data Log Settings dialog box.

Data Log Function● General Tab
Sets the channel name and device address values to write to the data storage area.
■ Log function
Selects whether or not to use the Data Log function.
Enable:Samples values of device addresses and saves the data along with the sampling time.

Disable:Does not sample values of device addresses.

■ Channel NameEnter a name of the channel. The maximum number is 40 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-15

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area
Sets the condition to write to the sampled address values to the data storage area.
Fixed Period:

Writes the value of source device address at a fixed interval. If Fixed Period is selected, specify
Time in seconds.
Time:

Specifies the time in seconds (1 to 9999).
This option can only be set when Fixed Period is selected.

Event Bit:

Writes the value of source device address each time the monitored bit device or the bit number of theword device changes from 0 to 1.

Event Word:

Writes the value of source device address each time the value of monitored word device changes.
Data Size:

Selects the data size of the monitored device address as 16-bit or 32-bit.
This option can only be set when Event Word is selected.

Device Address: Specifies the device address to monitor as the condition for Writing data.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be set when Event Bit or Event Word is selected.
If this setting is different from other channels, it cannot be displayed in the Line Chart.

■ Monitor Count of Writings to Data Storage Area
Select this check box to monitor count of writings to Data Storage Area. The count of writings to Data Storage Area iswritten to the specified device address.
(Destination Device Address): Specifies the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Report when Count of Writings to Data Storage Area has reached or exceeded Threshold:Writes 1 in the Report Device Address when the current count of writings
to Data Storage Area reaches or exceeds the set threshold.
Threshold:Specifies the count of writings to Data Storage Area that is the basis forreporting (1 to 65535).

Report Device Address:

Specifies the destination bit device or the bit number of the destination
word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Monitor % Space Used in Data Storage Area
Select this check box to monitor the usage of the allocated data storage area as the save destination for Data Log
data. The usage is calculated from the data storage amount allocated to the data storage area and the amount ofsaved data, and then written to the specified device address.
Usage = Current amount of Data Log data ÷ Data Log data storage amount per device address (omits values after thedecimal point)(Destination Device Address): Specifies the destination word device to write the current usage of the amount of Data Log
data storage.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Report when % Space Used has reached or exceeded Threshold:Writes 1 in the Report Device Address when the current usage reaches orexceeds the set threshold.

13-16

Threshold:Specifies the usage (1 to 100) that is the basis for reporting.

Report Device Address:

Specifies the destination bit device or the bit number of the destination
word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Clear Log Data
Select this check box to erase the Data Log data for the selected channel from the Data Storage Area.
(Trigger Device Address): Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that triggers the erasure of
the data. The data for selected channels is erased when the value of the configured device
address changes from 0 to 1. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If the amount of log data for the channel differs, the Line Chart cannot be displayed.
If differing channels of data were displayed in the same chart, the chart can no longer be displayed if theData Log data is erased by channel units.
■ Store Status of Sampling
Select this check box to check the reading status of data.
(Status Device Address):
Bit

Specify the word device that will store the reading status. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Function

Description

0

Reading

This bit is 1 while reading the data from the external device and 0 when reading
has completed.

1

Read error

This bit is 1 when the condition of writing to the data storage area was satisfied
again while reading data from the external device and data was lost. To clear
this bit, write 1 to the Clear error bit (bit 15).

2 to 14

Reserved-

15

Clear error

Write 1 to this bit to clear the read error (bit 1). This bit automatically changes
to 0 when processing is finished.

13
Data Log Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-17

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box● External Memory Device Tab
The External Memory Device tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory
device*1.

The output data is stored in the "DATALOG" folder of the External Memory Device folder.
The default External Memory Device folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 33 “1.4 File structure”
on page 33-3 and Chapter 33 “1.6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder” on page 33-13.
Data that is sampled after starting output to the external memory device is not included in the output data.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

13-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ BatchSelect this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory device*1.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit

Output toExternal memory device USB flash drive

Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:30

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:01:30

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:02:30

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:03:30

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:04:30

24

124

210

01/01/2011 12:05:30

25

125

210

01/01/2011 12:06:30

26

126

218

Data to be output(all)

Trigger Device Address
01Data Log data (CSV)

All the data is saved on the external memory device*1 when the trigger device addresses changes from 0 to 1. If a filewith the same name already exists on the external memory device*1, that file is overwritten. The maximum amount of
output data is the amount configured by the data storage area.
The storing of data stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory device. The error
information is stored in the following HMI Special Data Registers. For details about the error information,refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSD42
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD33
Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition for batch
output. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Data is output to file when the value of the Trigger Device Address changes from 0 to 1.
File Name:Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “LOGOn.CSV”. (n: Data log channel number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters(including the extension).

(File Name Device Address): Specifies a word device to create a file name. The filename is set by reading the values sequentially from thestarting device address specified with the File Name
Device Address and handling those values as character
data up to the character before NULL(00h).
The maximum number of device addresses is 40(2 characters per word device, maximum of 80 singlebyte characters). You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: from Upper byte is selected as the Storage Method of String Data on
the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box, and the device address
specified by (File Name Device Address) is LDR100 and the text to set is"IDEC":(File Name Device Address) LDR100‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)LDR101(NULL)LDR1020000(Hex)
The file name at this time becomes "IDEC.CSV".
*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-19

Data Log Function

Specify File Name by Value of Device Address: Select this check box to assign a file namefor the output data using a value of device
address specified in the File Name Device
Address.

13

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

Add Device Address data to File Name:
Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the value of the device addressconfigured by (File Name Device Address) to the end of the file name for the output data.
(File Name Device Address): Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to
add to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-72. This option can only be configured when the Add
Device Address data to File Name check box is selected.
Example: When File Name is "LOGO01" and the value of device address in (File Name
Device Address) is 123, the file name is "LOGO01123.CSV".
Add Time Stamp: Select from the following format for date and time to be added to the filename when data is output:
None, YY, YY+MM, YY+MM+DD, YY+MM+DD+HH,
YY+MM+DD+HH+MM, YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS
The format is YYMMDD_hhmmss (YY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh: hour,
mm: minute, ss: second).
Example: File Name is "LOGO01" on September 15 2013 at 23:30:50.
YY:

LOGO01_13

YY+MM:

LOGO01_1309

YY+MM+DD:

LOGO01_130915

YY+MM+DD+HH:

LOGO01_130915_23

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM:

LOGO01_130915_2330

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS: LOGO01_130915_233050
Store File Path:

Select this check box to store the file path of the output data in device
addresses.

(Destination Device Address): Specifies the file path destination of word device. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Set limit on files: Specifies the upper limit (1 to 100) when limiting the number of files to be
output.
When the Set limit on files check box is selected, note the following points.
• If the number of data files saved on the external memory device increases, it may take some time forthe data output processing, or the output of the next data may not be processed normally.
• When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both
occur simultaneously, the pictures may not be displayed.
• When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device, the blinking period may
slow down when data output processing occurs.
• The following single-byte character cannot be used in the file name configured by File Name or Specify
File Name by Value of Device Address.
"*/:;<>?\|• File names that exceed the limits in Specify File Name by Value of Device Address and file names
configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the file name exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL(00h)), the text
stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start is configured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
- When the first character is a character that cannot be used, the text is that set for File Name.
• The operation when the Set limit on files check box is selected is as follows.
- The files are output up to the set limit, and then for additional files, the new files are saved bydiscarding the old files in order of the oldest first.
- If the number of files saved on the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation
starts, the number of files at that time is the limit. From there the data is discarded in order from theoldest data and replaced with new data with each file output.

13-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Real Time

Select this check box to output data to the external memory device*1 in real time.
External Memory Device
SD memory card
Main unit
Output toExternal memory device USB flash drive

Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data001

Data002

Data003

01/01/2011 12:00:30

20

120

201

01/01/2011 12:01:30

21

121

204

01/01/2011 12:02:30

22

122

206

01/01/2011 12:03:30

23

123

206

01/01/2011 12:04:30

24

124

210

01/01/2011 12:05:30

25

125

210

01/01/2011 12:06:30

26

126

218

Data to be output
3 minutes after
operation starts
Data to be output
3 minutes after that
Data to be output
after another3 minutes

3 minute interval
after operation
startsData Log data (CSV)With real time output, data is saved to the external memory device*1 in three minute intervals after the main unit starts
running. If the accumulated data reaches 80% of the amount set in the Data Storage Area, then the data is forcibly
saved to the external memory device*1. When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory

device*1, data is appended to that file. If there was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of
output data differs according to the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and thelabels.

If the sampling interval is shorter than real time output (the interval for writing to the external memory device*1), that Data
Log is recorded up to the data storage amount - 1, and then afterwards, old data is discarded in order and replaced with new
data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Data Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficientspace on the external memory device. The error information is stored in the following HMI Special Data
Registers. For details about the error information, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register (LSD)” on
page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: LSD42
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD33• The amount of free space on the external memory device is saved to the following HMI Special Data
Registers. For details about the free space on the External Memory Devices, refer to Chapter 35 “HMISpecial Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: LSD43, 44
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD34, 35*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-21

Data Log Function• When the value of the following HMI Special Internal Relays changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time isfirst output in real time to the external memory device, and then access to the external memory device isstopped. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: LSM20
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSM18

13

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “LOGOn.CSV”. (n: Data log channel number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including
the extension).
Specify File Name by Value of Device Address:
Select this check box to specify the name of the file for the output data with the value of the device
address configured by (File Name Device Address).
(File Name Device Address):

Specifies the word device that is the source of the data to use as thefile name. The file name is set by reading the values sequentially fromthe starting device address specified with the File Name Device Addressand handling those values as character data up to the character before
NULL (00).
The maximum number of device addresses is 40 (80 single-bytecharacters). You can only specify an internal device. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Example: The device address specified by (File Name Device Address) is LDR100 and the text to set is"IDEC":(File Name Device Address) LDR100

LDR101LDR102‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)(NULL)

0000(Hex)

The file name at this time becomes "IDEC.CSV".
Add Device Address data to File Name:
Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the value of the device address configured by(File Name Device Address) to the end of the file name for the output data.
(File Name Device Address):

Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add to thefile name. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72. This option can
only be configured when the Add Device Address data to File
Name check box is selected.

Example: When File Name is "LOGA01" and the value of the device address configured by (FileName Device Address) is 123, the file name is "LOGA01123.CSV".
Add Time Stamp:

Selects the format of the output date and time to add to the file namefor the output data.
None, YY, YY+MM, YY+MM+DD
The format is YYMMDD (YY: year, MM: month, DD: day).

Example: File Name is "LOGA01" on September 15 2013
YY:

LOGO01_13

YY+MM:

LOGO01_1309

YY+MM+DD:

LOGO01_130915

Store File Path:

Select this check box to store the file path of the output data in device addresses.

(Destination Device Address): Specifies the file path destination of word device. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Set limit on files: Specifies the upper limit (1 to 100) when limiting the number of files to be output.

13-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

Realtime Output: Select this check box to forcibly output the data and save it to file at the desired timing.
(Trigger device address):

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as
the condition to forcibly output the data. You can only specify aninternal device. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72. Data is output
to file when the trigger device address changes from 0 to 1.

Save Data Log Data and Display in Line Chart or Data Log Display :Select this check box to display data saved in external memory device on the Line Chart or Data Log
Display. A file (.BIN) is created in external memory that these parts use to display log data.
Writes the data to the file (.BIN) at the same timing as the real time output. The maximum file size is
256 MB. If the file size exceeds 256 MB at writing, the data will be deleted in order from the oldest
data and replaced with new data.
Creates a "DATA" folder in the "DATALOG" folder of the external memory folder and save files for eachchannel.
Configures the Display of the saved data in the X-Axis tab of the Properties of Line Chart dialog
box to display the data in the saved file on the Line Chart.For details, refer to Chapter 10 “Display ofthe saved data” on page 10-30.
File Name:This is the name (except extension) set in the File Name.
However, the settings of Specify File Name by Value of Device Address, Add Device
Address data to File Name and Add Time Stamp are not applied.
The default is “LOGAn.BIN”. (n: Data log channel number)
When the Set limit on files check box is selected, note the following points.
• If the number of data files saved on the external memory device increases, it may take some time forthe data output processing, or the output of the next data may not be processed normally.
• When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both
occur simultaneously, the pictures may not be displayed.
• When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device, the blinking period may
slow down when data output processing occurs.

13
Data Log Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-23

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box• The following single-byte characters cannot be used in the file name configured by File Name orSpecify File Name by Value of Device Address.
"*/:;<>?\|• File names that exceed the limits in Specify File Name by Value of Device Address and file names
configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the file name exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL(00h)), thetext stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
- When the first character is a character that cannot be used, the text is that set for File Name.
• The operation when the Set limit on files check box is selected is as follows.
- The files are output up to the set limit, and then for additional files, the new files are saved bydiscarding the old files in order of the oldest first.
- If the number of files saved on the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation
starts, the number of files at that time is the limit. From there the data is discarded in order from theoldest data and replaced with new data with each file output.
• The following operations are as follows if the Realtime Output check box is selected.
- Even if the data is outputted forcibly, the real time output period (3 minute interval) is not reset.
- While data is being output with the real time output function, the file is not output when the value of
the Realtime Output device address is 1.
- Even when output has finished, the value of device address does not automatically change to 0.
• Deleting the Data Log data in the data storage area deletes the file (.BIN) saved in the external memory.
For details about the BIN file, refer to “Save Data Log Data and Display in Line Chart or Data Log Display”.
- Operations to delete all files (.BIN)• Click Clear on the Online tab, and then click All or Data Log Data.
• Executes Clear All Log Data configured in the Data Log Settings.
• Clears the Data Log data when the project data is downloaded.
- Operations to delete target files (.BIN)• Executes Clear Log Data configured in the Individual Settings of the Data Log Settings.
• The function to sample data operates when Data Log data is being saved to the external memory device.
• The batch output or real time output status of the Data Log data can be checked with the value of HMI
Special Internal Relay LSM35. When the data starts to be written to the external memory device, thevalue of device address is 1. When writing is complete, the value is 0.
• The methods to erase Data Log files saved on the external memory device are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory Device tab on the Project
Settings dialog box, select the Remove Files check box and the All Data Log data check boxes,
and then configure the trigger device address. Assign that trigger device address to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV4, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data inExternal Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Data Log Data check box
and click OK.
- To erase files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - File Manager.
In the File Manager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

13-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
Output Data File Name
The file name format is as follows.
File Name Value of Device Address_YYMMDD_hhmmss.CSV
File Name:

The text entered in File Name or the text entered according to the value of the device
address set by Specify File Name by Value of Device Address

Value of Device Address:

The lower 3 digits of the value of the device address configured by Add Device
Address data to File NameYYMMDD:

The year, month, and day of the month set on Add Time Stamphhmmss:

The hour, minute, and second of the time configured on Add Time Stamp■ Example 1
Item

Setting

File NameLOGO01

Add value of Device Address to File
Name

(File Name Device Address) is LDR200

LDR200 value: 123

Add Time Stamp

YY+MM

Date when data was output:
September 2013

Result: The file name is "LOGO01123_1309.CSV".
■ Example 2
Item

SettingSpecify File Name by Value of Device
Address(File Name Device Address) is LDR100
Text to set is "IDEC"LDR100 value: 4944 (Hex)LDR101 value: 4543 (Hex)LDR102 value: 0000 (Hex)Add value of Device Address to File
Name

(File Name Device Address) is LDR200

LDR200 value: 123

Add Time Stamp

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS

Date and time when data was output:
September 15 2013 at 23:30:50

Result: The file name is "IDEC123_130915_233050.CSV".

13
Data Log Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-25

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box● Data Tab
The Data tab is used to configure the data to sample.

■ Display Data stored in External Memory Device on Custom Web Page
Select this check box to display the data stored in external memory device on Custom Web Page.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in the Text Manager for labels when outputting data as CSV.
■ Output Items
Select the output items when data is output as CSV. Select the check boxes of the items to output.
Header, Label, Sampling Time
When Label is selected, specifies the label to display in the sampling time column when outputting data as CSV.
Label(Text ID):

Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when text registered in Text Manager areused for labels.
Click

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
Label:

Enter the text to display in the label. The maximum number is 40 characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared. The registered text
is displayed when a text ID is specified.

■ Output Data
Output Data is used to configure the details of the data to sample for each data number in the selected channel.
No.:

13-26

Shows the data numbers for the registered data. Double clicking the cell displays the Edit Datadialog box. The data number cannot be edited. For details, refer to “Add Data Dialog Box andEdit Data Dialog Box” on page 13-28.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box

Text ID:

Shows the Text Manager ID number when text registered in Text Manager is used for labels.
Double clicking the cell allows you to edit the text.
Text ID is only displayed when you select the Use Text Manager check box.

Label:

Shows the text to display as labels when data is output as CSV.
When the Use Text Manager check box is cleared, double clicking the cell allows you to edit
the label. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The default label is “Data” and the data number.
Example: Data001
If the Use Text Manager check box is selected, the text of the specified text ID is displayed.
Double clicking the cell displays Text Manager where you can edit the text.

Top Device Address: Shows the starting device address of the word devices that will be read for sampling data. Double
clicking the cell displays the Edit Data dialog box where the device address can be edited. For
details, refer to “Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data Dialog Box” on page 13-28.
Data Type:Shows the data type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell
displays the Edit Data dialog box where you can edit the data settings. For details, refer to“Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data Dialog Box” on page 13-28.

Words:

Shows the number of words of word devices that will be read (1 to 128). Double clicking the cell
displays the Edit Data dialog box. For details, refer to “Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data
Dialog Box” on page 13-28.

Output Example:

Shows an output example of the data when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell
displays the Edit Data dialog box. For details, refer to “Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data
Dialog Box” on page 13-28.

■ Add
Registers the data settings to the selected channel.
Click this button to display the Add Data dialog box. The details configured on the Add Data dialog box are
registered for all the data.
For details, refer to “Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data Dialog Box” on page 13-28.
■ EditChanges the settings for the selected data.

For details, refer to “Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data Dialog Box” on page 13-28.
To edit multiple numbers at one time, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items to
select multiple lines and click Edit. The content configured in the Edit Data dialog box is applied to all
selected data settings.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected data.
Select a data and click this button.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
■ Total: n words (128 words max.)
Shows the total number of words of data that will be sampled. (n: Total number of words)
The maximum number of words that can be configured for one channel is 128 words. However, if Sampling
Method is Always, the total number of words in all channels is 128 words or less. For details, refer to“Sampling Method” on page 13-14.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-27

13
Data Log Function

Select the data and click this button to display the Edit Data dialog box. Change the data with the content set in the
Edit Data dialog box.

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
Add Data Dialog Box and Edit Data Dialog Box
With the Add Data dialog box, the data is registered to the selected channel.
With the Edit Data dialog box, the selected data for the selected channel is registered or changed.

■ Number of Data*1
Specifies the number of items of data to add to the channel (1 to 128).
■ Data Number*2
Displays the data number for the selected data.
■ Label(Text ID)
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when text registered in Text Manager are used for labels. For the
Add Data dialog box, Text ID is automatically configured sequentially starting with the specified text ID.
Click

to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.

Text ID can only be configured when you select the Use Text Manager check box.
■ LabelEnter the text to display as the label when data is output as CSV. The maximum number is 40 characters.
This is displayed only when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
When Number of Data is 2 or higher, "Data+Number" is automatically entered.*1
Example: Data001, Data002, Data003
Automatically entered labels cannot be edited here. Those labels can be edited by double clicking the cell toopen the Individual Settings dialog box.
■ Data Type
Select the data type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.
When Float32(F) is selected, the maximum number of digits is 10 for the integer part and 5 for the decimal part.
■ Top Device Address
Specify the starting device address of the word devices that will be read for sampling data.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
You can only specify the bit device when Bit is selected for Data Type. Words for the bit device is counted as one.

*1 Add Data dialog box only
*2 Edit Data dialog box only

13-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Words
Reads the value of specified number of word device address from Top Device Address and output as CSV. Specifies
the number of word devices to read (1 to 128).
This is displayed only when String(S) is selected for Data Type.
Example: Number of Data is 2, Top Device Address of the data to register to Data Number 1 is LDR0000, andWords is 3.
Device addresses used in Data Number 1: LDR0000, LDR0001, LDR0002
Device addresses used in Data Number 2: LDR0003, LDR0004, LDR0005
LDR0003 is registered as the starting device address of Data Number 2.
■ Display Type
Sets the display type for numerical values when data is output as CSV.
This is displayed only when UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or
Float32(F) is selected for Data Type.
Counting Method:

Select the display type as Decimal or Hexadecimal for numerical values.

Digits:Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Display Floating Point:

Data Type

DigitsUBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to 5UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to 10

BCD4(B)

1 to 4

BCD8(EB)

1 to 8Float32(F)

1 to 10UBIN16(W)

1 to 4

UBIN32(D)1 to 8

Select this check box to display the decimal point.

When the Display Floating Point check box is selected and UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D),BIN32(L), BCD4(B), or BCD8(EB) is selected for Data Type, the source device is an integer, but thevalue is output with the decimal point added at the configured floating digits.
However, if Float32(F) is selected for Data Type, the source data is a decimal value.
Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of thenumber of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on the display type anddata type. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part is as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Floating Symbol:

Data Type

Floating Digits

UBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to Digits

UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to Digits

BCD4(B)

1 to Digits

BCD8(EB)

1 to Digits

Float32(F)

1 to Digits or 8

UBIN16(W)--UBIN32(D)--Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.
.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
Example:Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2.
Floating Symbol is .(dot):

12.34

Floating Symbol is /(slash):

12/34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-29

Data Log Function

Floating Digits:

13

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box● Options Tab
To display the data saved in the data storage area as numerical values on the main unit, copy this data to thespecified internal device.

■ Copy Data Log Data
Select this check box to copy data to a device address.
Destination Device Address: Specifies the destination device address for copied data. You can only specify aninternal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

13-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Starting Point
Selects the starting point of the data to copy.
Newest Data:

Sets the starting point as the newest data.

Oldest Data:

Sets the starting point as the oldest data.

Specify by Value of Device Address: Specifies which data from the oldest data to set as the starting point by thevalue of device address.
Specifies the source device address. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: 1. For Newest Data, the starting point is the newest sampling time data.
2. For Oldest Data, the starting point is the oldest sampling time data.
3. For Specify by Value of Device Address and source device address: 3, the starting point is the third
item of data from the oldest sampling time data.
Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

2. Oldest Data read starting point → 12/18/2011 17:44:10
12/18/2011 18:34:10

20

3. Specify by Value of Device Address read starting point (source device address: 3) → 12/19/2011 19:24:43
12/19/2011 20:01:54
12/19/2011 21:39:21

22

1. Newest Data read starting point → 12/20/2011 05:57:06

28

21
24
26

■ Number of Data
Selects the specification method for the amount of data to copy.
Value:

Uses a constant value.
Specifies the amount to copy (1 to 64).

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
Specifies the source device address. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-72.

■ Stored Order of Data
Selects the order to copy data.
From Newest to Oldest:

Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the newest data first.

From Oldest to Newest:

Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the oldest data first.

Example: When Starting Point is Newest Data and Number of Data is 3, data is copied in the following order
starting from device address LDR10 configured in Destination Device Address.
Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

12/18/2011 17:44:10:

20:

12/19/2011 19:24:43
12/19/2011 20:01:54
12/19/2011 21:39:21
Newest dataread starting point→ 12/20/2011 05:57:06

22
24
26
28

Amount of data: 3

Destination Device Address Value
Configured
device address →LDR10
28 ←Copy fromnewest data
LDR11
26

LDR12

24

Destination Device Address Value
Configured
LDR10
24 ←Copy fromdevice address →oldest data
LDR11
26

LDR12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28

13-31

13
Data Log Function

The maximum amount of data that can be copied to the internal device is 64.

3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box■ Target Data
Selects the data to copy from the Data Log data.
Sampling Time:

Select this check box to copy the sampling time data from the Data Log data. When thischeck box is selected, values of device addresses are copied in order from the data fordata number 1.

Value of Device Address:

Select this check box to copy the value of device address from the Data Log data.
Data Number: Selects the specification method for the data number of the value to copy.
Value:

Uses a constant value.

Device Address: Uses a value of device address.
Start Number:Of the data to copy, specifies the data number of thedata to start copying.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device Address, specify the source device
address. You can only specify an internal device. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the Sampling Time check box is selected, thedata number is 1. This cannot be changed.

End Number:Of the data to copy, specifies the data number of thedata to end copying.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device Address, specify the source device
address. You can only specify an internal device. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Example: When Start Number is 2 and End Number is 4, data 2 to 4 is the copy target.
Start No.
Data No.:

1

2

End No.
3

4

5

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

Sampling Time

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3

Data 4

Data 5

10/01/2011 12:34:56

100

60

240

60

240

10/02/2011 03:45:12

200

80

450

80

450

Copy target■ Trigger Condition
Selects the condition to start copying.
Always:Copies each time the data is updated.

Device Address:

Specifies the device address that triggers the start of copying the data. Copies the data whenthe value of the specified device address changes from 0 to 1.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-72.

13-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4

Using the Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Displaying the Data in the Line Chart
You can display the sampled data in the Line Chart.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Line Chart.
3 Double-click the placed Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

13
Data Log Function

4 On the General tab, select Chart Type as Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-33

4 Using the Data

5 Click the Y-Axis tab.

6 Specify the number (1 to 4) of Y-axis in Number of Axes.
7 Selects the Y-axis for to configure in the (Y-Axis) and enters the name of the Y-axis.
The maximum number is 40 characters.

8 Click Add to add a channel to the list.
The total of all the Y-axis is 20 channels maximum.

9 Configures Channel No., Data No., Line Type, Line Size, Line Color and Trigger Type for the data to display on
the chart.

The channel number and the data number can be checked on the Data Log Settings dialog box.
When While ON is selected as Trigger Type, displays the graph when the value of device address is 1. Specifies the
bit device or the bit number of the word device in Device Address to serve as condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The data to display in the chart is registered in the channel number (Ch1 to Ch20) for the chart selected in Channel
Settings.

10 Repeat steps 7 and 9 to register the data to display in the chart.
11 Click OK.
The Properties dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Line Chart.

13-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4.2

Displaying Data on the Data Log Display
Lists the Data Log data saved in the data storage area and the external memory device.

1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Data Log Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Data Log Display.
3 Double-click the placed Data Log Display, and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

13

4 Click the Log tab.

Data Log Function

5 Configures the Channel Number for the data to display on the Data Log Display.
The channel number can be checked on the Data Log Settings dialog box.

6 Click OK.
The Properties dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Data Log Display.
WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-35

4 Using the Data

4.3

Displaying Data as Numerical Values
You can display data in the Numerical Display by copying data saved in the data storage area to an internal device
according to the conditions configured with the Options tab on the Individual Settings dialog box.

● Copying Data to Internal Devices
Copying Sampling Time Data
Sampling time data is copied as a BCD value to the six sequential device addresses starting with the device addressconfigured by Destination Device Address.
The sampling time data is copied in year, month, day, hour, minute, second order regardless of the Stored Order ofData setting.
■ Example
The sampling time 10/01/2011 12:01:30 is copied to the destination device address.
Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

10/01/2011 12:01:30

20

Destination Device Address Value
Configured
LDR102011 ←Year
device address →

LDR11

10

LDR12

1

LDR13

12

LDR14

1

LDR15

30

←Month←Day←Hour←Minute←Second

Data Read Start Position and Copy Order of Data to the Destination Device Address
The data to copy and the order differs according to the Starting Point and the Stored Order for Data settings.
■ Example 1
Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log to the destination device address
Item

Setting

Destination Device Address

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

3

Stored Order of Data

From Newest to Oldest

Data log data
Sampling TimeValue

12/18/2011 17:44:10

20:
12/19/2011 19:24:43:
22

12/19/2011 20:01:54

24

Newest data
12/19/2011 21:39:21
read starting point → 12/20/2011 05:57:06

26
28

Destination Device Address Value
Configured
LDR10
28 ←Copy fromdevice address →newest data
26
LDR11

Amount of data: 3

13-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

LDR12

24

4 Using the Data

■ Example 2
Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log in order from the oldest to the destination device address
Item

Setting

Destination Device Address

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

3

Stored Order of Data

From Oldest to Newest

Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

12/18/2011 17:44:10

20

:

:

12/19/2011 19:24:43
12/19/2011 20:01:54

22
24

12/19/2011 21:39:21
Newest dataread starting point→ 12/20/2011 05:57:06

26

Configured
device address →Destination Device Address Value

LDR10

24

←Copy from

LDR11
LDR12

26

oldest data

28

28

Amount of data:■ Example 3
Setting the starting point to the fourth item of the oldest data in the Data Log and copying three items of data fromthe newest to the destination device address
Item

Setting

Destination Device Address

LDR10

Starting Point

Specify by Value of Device Address (value is 4)

Number of Data

3

Stored Order of Data

From Newest to Oldest

Data Log data

12/19/2011 21:39:21

26

12/20/2011 05:57:06
12/20/2011 15:26:17

28
29

12/21/2011 06:46:57

31

Destination Device Address Value
Configured
device address →LDR10
28 ←Copy fromnewest data
26
LDR11

LDR12

24

Amount of data: 3

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-37

13
Data Log Function

Sampling Time
Value
Specify by Value of 12/18/2011 17:44:10 20
Device Address
12/19/2011 07:24:09 21
read starting point
12/19/2011 19:24:43 22(Sourcedevice address: 4) → 12/19/2011 20:01:54 24

4 Using the Data
Copying Data when UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB) or Float32(F) is Selected as the Data Type
When one of UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB) or Float32(F) is selected for Data Type on the Data tab in the
Individual Settings dialog box, two destination device addresses are required for a single item of data.
■ Example
Copying the newest data in the Data Log with the Data Type selected as UBIN32(D) to the destination device
address LDR10.
Item

Setting

Destination Device Address

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

2

Stored Order of Data

From Newest to Oldest
Data Log data
Sampling TimeValue

87654321
12/18/2011 17:44:10(Hex):

Destination Device Address Value
Configured
device address→
LDR103344 ←Copy fromnewest data:

12345678
12/19/2011 19:24:43(Hex)
12/19/2011 20:01:54

LDR11

1122

LDR12

7788

LDR13

5566

55667788(Hex)

Newest data
11223344
12/19/2011 21:39:21(Hex)
read starting point →Amount of data: 2

The data copy order of the device address selected from UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or
Float32(F) as the Data type can be configured in the Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data for
the Internal Devices on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box or Storage Method of 32bit Numerical Data on the Communication Driver tab. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Storage Methodof 32-bit Numerical Data for HMI Devices” on page 4-31, Chapter 4 “Storage Method of 32-bit NumericalData” on page 4-51.

13-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data
Copying Multiple Items of Data
When copying multiple items of data, first all the sampling times for the data are copied in order starting with thedevice address configured as the destination device address, then the values of device addresses for all the data arecopied in order.
For example, data is copied in this order: first sampling time → second sampling time → ... → first data 1 value of
device address → first data 2 value of device address → second data 1 value of device address → second data 2 valueof device address and so on.
■ Example
The sampling time and values of device addresses from data start number 1 to end number 3 are copied to thedestination device address as two items of data.
Item

Setting

Destination Device Address

LDR10

Starting Point

Newest Data

Number of Data

2

Stored Order of Data

From Oldest to Newest
Sampling Time, Value of Device Address

Target Data

Data No.: Start No. 1, End No. 3

Data Log data
Sampling Time

Data 1

Data 2

Data 3

Data 410/01/2011 12:00:30

10

40

100

20

120

1.

10/01/2011 12:34:56

100

60

240

30

200

2.

10/02/2011 03:45:12

200

80

450

70

400

3.

4.

5.

Configured device address →

1.

3.
4.
5.

←Newest Data read starting point

Destination Device Address

Value

LDR10

2011

LDR11

10

LDR12

01

LDR13

12

LDR14

34

LDR15

56

LDR16

2011

LDR17

10

LDR18

02

LDR19

03

LDR20

45

LDR21

12

LDR22

100

LDR23

200

LDR24

60

LDR25

80

LDR26

240

LDR27

450

←Copy from oldest data

←First sampling time

←Second sampling time←First data 1 value←Second data 1 value←First data 2 value←Second data 2 value←First data 3 value←Second data 3 value

When writing with the following settings, “Device range error” is displayed.
• Starting Point is 0 or a value larger than the amount of saved data
• Start Number is 0 or a value larger than Data Number• End Number is 0 or a value larger than Data Number• Start Number is a value larger than End Number

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-39

13
Data Log Function

2.

Data 5

4 Using the Data
● Displaying Data on the Numerical Display
You can copy sampled data to an internal device and display it with the Numerical Display.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Log.
The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Under Sampling Method, select the condition that will be used by the main unit to read data.
■ Always
The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are always read. When the condition of writing to
the data storage area is satisfied, the values that were read at that point in time are written to the data storage area.
■ While satisfying the condition of writing to data storage area
The values of the device addresses set for the data of each channel are read when the condition of writing to the data
storage area is satisfied, and those values are written to the data storage area.

3 Under Settings, select the channel number for the data to display numerical values of on the Numerical Display, thenclick Edit.

The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 Select Enable for Log function on the General tab and configure Channel Name, and Condition of Writing toData Storage Area.

5 Under Output Data on the Data tab, set Top Device Address, Data Type, and the other settings for each item of
data.

13-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

6 Click the Options tab.

7 Select the Copy Data Log Data check box.
8 Specify the destination device address for the copied data in Destination Device Address.
You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

9 Select the data that is the start point for copying data in Starting Point.
■ Newest Data
Set the starting point to read as the newest data.

13■ Specify by Value of Device Address
Specifies which data from the oldest data to set as the starting point to read by value of device address, and sets thatdata as the starting point to read.
Specifies the source device address. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-41

Data Log Function■ Oldest Data
Set the starting point to read as the oldest data.

4 Using the Data

10 Select the specification method for the amount of data to copy in Number of Data.
■ Value
Use a constant.
Specifies the amount to copy (1 to 64).
■ Device Address
Use a word device.
Specifies the source device address. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The maximum amount of data that can be copied to the internal device is 64.

11 Select the order to copy data in Stored Order of Data.
■ From Newest to Oldest
Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the newest data first.
■ From Oldest to Newest
Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the oldest data first.

12 Select the data to copy from the data in Target Data.
Select the Sampling Time check box to copy the sampling time data from the data.
Select the Value of Device Address check box to copy the value of device address from the data. When not copying
the value of device address, proceed to step 16.

13 Select the specification method for the data number to copy the value in Data Number.
■ Value
Use a constant.
■ Device Address
Use a word device.

14 Specify the data number of the data to start copying out of the data to copy with Start Number.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device Address, specify the source device address. You can only specify an internal device. Clickdisplay the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

toWhen the Sampling Time check box is selected, the data number is 1. This cannot be changed.

15 Specify the data number of the data to end copying out of the data to copy with End Number.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device Address, specify the source device address. You can only specify an internal device. Clickdisplay the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

to

16 Select the condition to start copying in Trigger Condition.
■ Always
Copies each time the data is updated.
■ Device Address
Specifies the device address that triggers the start of copying the data. Copies the data when the value of thespecified device address changes from 0 to 1. Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

17 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
You are returned to the Data Log Settings dialog box.

13-42

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

18 Click OK.
The Data Log Settings dialog box closes.

19 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.

20 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Display.
21 Double-click the placed Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

22 Select the display type for the copied data with Display Type on the General tab.

13
Data Log Function

23 Select the data type for the copied data in Data Type under Data Format.
24 Specify the number of digits to display in Digits under Data Format.
The range of digits that can be set differs according to the display type and data type.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-43

4 Using the Data

25 Specify the source device address for the copied data in Display Device Address under Display Method.
For sequential device addresses of the amount of data to copy starting with Destination Device Addressconfigured on the Options tab on the Data Log Settings Individual Settings dialog box, set Display Device
Address for each Numerical Display to those device addresses.
Example: Destination Device Address is LDR10, Number of Data is 3.
Set three Numerical Displays with Display Device Address specified as LDR10, LDR11, LDR12
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

26 Click OK.
The Properties dialog box closes.

27 Repeat step 19 through 26 to configure the Numerical Displays for the amount of data to copy.
This concludes configuring the Numerical Display.
Data Log data

Main unit
External device

126

Sampling Time

Data001

01/01/2011 12:00:30

120

01/01/2011 12:01:30

121

01/01/2011 12:02:30

122

01/01/2011 12:03:30

123

01/01/2011 12:04:30

124

01/01/2011 12:05:30

125

01/01/2011 12:06:30

126

125
124

Copy
LDR10 : 126
LDR11 : 125
LDR12 : 124(Internal device)

13-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4.4

Saving the Data as a CSV File

● Saving the Data as a CSV FileThe Data Log data can be saved to the external memory device*1 as a CSV file or uploaded to a computer.

The procedure to save the data is as follows.
• To save the data to an external memory device, click Data Log on the WindO/I-NV4 Configuration tab to display
the Data Log Settings dialog box. Select a channel number to save to the external memory device and click Edit
to display the Individual Settings dialog box. Select an output method check box on the External Memory
Device tab and configure the items. The data can be saved to the External Memory Device folder on the external
memory device. For details, refer to “External Memory Device Tab” on page 13-18.
• To upload the data to a computer, click on ▼ to the right of(Upload) on the toolbar in Data File Manager, andthen click the Upload All Log Data or Upload Data Log Data to open the Browser For Folder dialog box. Specify
the location to save the file and click OK to save the file to the specified folder. For details, refer to the Data FileManager User's Manual.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure of the output file is as follows. The data structure for files output with batch output and real time
output is the same.
Bold items are replaced by the Data Log settings, the sampled data, the running project name, and WindO/I-NV4
version number.

Headers*2“Project Name”,”Project name”,”Version number”“File Type”,”Log type”“Channel No.”,”Channel number”“Source”,”Top Device Address (data number 1)”“Sampling Method”,”Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area (type)”“Condition of Writing to Data Storage Area (label)”,”Condition of Writing to Data Storage
Area (configuration details)”
Blank row

Label row*3“Label (sampling time)*4”,”Label (data number 1)”,”Label (data number 2)”... times the amountof data

Output example···“Project Name”,”Dimmer Console”,”1.7.0.0”“File Type”,”Data Log Data”“Channel No.”,”1”“Source”,”LDR100”“Sampling Method”,”Fixed Period”“Time[Sec]”,”1”“Sampling Time”,”Data001”,”Data002”“08/23/2011 18:32:04”,171,234···

Data size of each row... 41 bytes... 29 bytes... 19 bytes... 20 bytes... 34 bytes... 17 bytes... 2 bytes... 37 bytes... 32 bytes*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 Only when the Header check box is selected on the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box*3 Only when the Label check box is selected on the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box*4 Only when the Sampling Time check box is selected on the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

13-45

13
Data Log Function

Data row“MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss*4”,Data number 1 data value,Data number 2 data value... times theamount of data

4 Using the Data

• The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full-width characters, 1 byte for half-width characters,and 2 bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the year in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time differs according to the language configured in Project Settings,
on the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss
Western, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic:
MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss• The output values of the data row will depend on Data Type of the data.
- When Data Type of the data is String(S)The values of the set amount of words of device addresses stored from Top Device Address areconverted to a string and output.
However, if NULL(00h) appears in the string, the characters after NULL(00h) are not output.
The order of characters output to the CSV file is set according to Storage Method of String Data on
the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
Example: Starting device address: LDR0, number of words: 3
Stored values: LDR0=0x3132, LDR1=0x3334, LDR2=0x3536 => Output value: 123456
Stored values: LDR0=0x3132, LDR1=0x3300, LDR2=0x3435 => Output value: 123
If the string contains the following codes, the entire string will be enclosed with double quotation
marks (") and output.
Comma (,)
Newline codes (CR, LF, and CR+LF)
Double quotation mark (")
If the string contains a double quotation mark ("), a double quotation mark (") will be added in front of
it.
Example: Starting device address: LDR0, number of words: 3
Stored values: LDR0=0x312C, LDR1=0x3334, LDR2=0x0000 => Output value: "1,34"
Stored values: LDR0=0x310D, LDR1=0x3334, LDR2=0x0000 => Output value: "1[CR]34"
Stored values: LDR0=0x3122, LDR1=0x3334, LDR2=0x0000 => Output value: "1""34"- When Data Type is UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or
Float32(F)The value is output according to the setting of Display Type.
The zeros in the value are suppressed.
If the stored value exceeds the number of display digits, the upper portion of the value is cut and only
the lower portion of the value is output for data types other than Float32(F) (source data: integer
value). For Float32(F) (source data: decimal value), the upper value of the integer part and lower
value of the decimal part are cut and the value is output in the number of display digits.
If an invalid number has been stored, #N/A is output.
If a comma (,) is used as the decimal point, the entire string is enclosed with double quotation marks(") and output.
Example 1: Starting device address: LDR0, number of words: 1
Stored value: LDR0=0x04D2
Data Type is UBIN16(W), Display Digits is 5 => Output value: 1234
Data Type is UBIN16(W), Display Digits is 2 => Output value: 34
Data Type is UBIN16(W), Display Digits is 2, Floating Digits is 1, Floating
Symbol is . (dot) => Output value: 3.4
Data Type is UBIN16(W), Display Digits is 2, Floating Digits is 1, Floating
Symbol is , (comma) => Output value: "3,4"
Data Type is BCD4(B), Display Digits is 4 => Output value: #N/A
Example 2: Starting device address: LDR0, number of words: 2
Stored values: LDR0=0xA000, LDR1=0x0000
Data Type is BIN16(I), Display Digits is 5 => Output value: -24576
Data Type is BIN16(I), Display Digits is 2 => Output value: -76
Data Type is BIN16(I), Display Digits is 2, Floating Digits is 1, Floating Symbol is. (dot) => Output value: -7.6
Data Type is Float32(F), Display Digits is 10 => Output value: #N/A

13-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 14

Operation Log Function

This chapter describes how to configure the Operation Log function and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Operation Log Function is Used
The Operation Log function records events that have occurred on the main unit, including user operations such aspressing a button or changing the operation mode.
You can perform the following actions using the Operation Log function.
• Record turning on the main unit power
Main unit

Main unit

130

Power ON

12:00
Run Mode• Record switching the base screen
Main unit

Main unit

130

Switch to Base Screen

Tank 1
Full

12:01
Base screen 2

Base screen 1

14• Record changing the user

Operation Log Function

Main unit

Main unit

130

130

Change Users

12:02
User2

User1

Group parts not displayed on User2 screen• Record changing the operation mode
Main unit

130

Main unit

Change Operation Modes
Run

OfflineMain Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

12:03
Run Mode

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

System Mode

14-1

1 Overview• Record pressing a touch switch
Main unit

130
12:04
Press touch switch• Record writing a value to a device address by pressing a touch switch
Main unit
External device

Value

100

100
Write

100

D1=

12:05
Press touch switch
100

100

100

D1

• Output Operation Log data to the external memory device*1
Main unit

External memory device
Output toExternal memory device

SD memory card

USB flash drive
Operation Log data
(CSV)

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

14-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.2

Recorded Events
The recorded events are as follows.
■ Power ON
This operation is recorded when the main unit power is turned on.
■ Switch to Base Screen
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched the base screen by pressing the Goto Screen Button or a Multi-Button• Switched the base screen by pressing the key button Ref. on the Alarm List Display or the Alarm Log Display• Switched the base screen by executing the Goto Screen Command or a Multi-Command• Switched the base screen by writing a screen number to System Area 1 address number + 0 (displayed screen
number)■ Change Users
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched the user by entering a password on the Password Screen• Switched the user by writing a value of device address• Switched to the default user
• If User is selected in Default User in the Security dialog box, a Change Users event occurs when the
power is turned on and when the operation mode is changed.
• If the Switch to Base Screen check box is selected, a Switch to Base Screen event also occurs whena Change Users event occurs.
■ Change Operation Modes
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched to System Mode by pressing the Goto Screen Button or a Multi-Button• Switched to System Mode by executing the Goto Screen Command or a Multi-Command• Switched to System Mode by pressing System Mode on the Maintenance screen• Switched to Run Mode from System Mode by pressing Run on the Top Page in the System Mode
• Switched to Monitor Mode from Run Mode by clicking Start Monitor on the WindO/I-NV4 Online tab• Switched to Run Mode from Monitor Mode by clicking Stop Monitor on the WindO/I-NV4 Online tab• Switched to Offline Mode from Monitor Mode by clicking Go Offline on the WindO/I-NV4 Online tab• Switched to Monitor Mode from Offline Mode by clicking Go Online on the WindO/I-NV4 Online tab■ Press buttons
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Pressing a Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Multi-Button, Selector Switch, Potentiometer, Numerical
Input, Character Input• Pressing the key buttons ENT, Download Project, Upload Project, Copy Files, Download PLC Program,
Upload PLC Program, All Chk., Del. All, Ref., Stop Buzzer and Screen Flashing, Record
The Operation Log only records button presses for parts created in WindO/I-NV4.
Operations for the buttons displayed in the System Mode, the Password Screen, the System Error Message
and the title bar of Popup Screen are not recorded.
■ Write Data to any Device Addresses
This operation is recorded by the following event.
Writing a value to a device address by pressing a Bit Button, Word Button, Multi-Button, Selector Switch,
Potentiometer, Numerical Input, Character Input

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-3

14
Operation Log Function

The Operation Log is only recorded during Run Mode.
Switching from Run Mode to System Mode and switching from System Mode to Run Mode is recorded.
Switching from System Mode to Data Transfer Mode and switching from Data Transfer Mode to System
Mode is not recorded.

1 Overview

1.3

Data Configuration
The recorded data is composed of a label, time, user name, screen number, event name, part name, device address,and content after the change.
The relationship between the Operation Log function settings and the recorded data is as follows.

Operation Log settings

1. Event

Recorded data
4. Sampling Time
3. Labels

2. Data storage amount

5. User Name

6. Screen No.

7. Event Name

8. Part Name 9. Device Address 10. Changed toSampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10

-

Base1

Power ON--

Changed to-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Device Addresses

-

LDR0

55

1. Event:

Events that occur on the main unit due to operations including user operations. Only thechecked events are recorded.
2. Data storage amount: The amount of data to record. For details, refer to “Data Storage Amount” on page 14-6.
3. Label:
When the recorded data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed in the label row.
4. Sampling Time:The time the event occurred.

5. User Name:

6. Screen No.:

The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project
Settings, on the Project Details tab, in Language.
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss: Japanese
MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss: Western, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul,
Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The user name when the event occurred.
The user name is only recorded when the Use Security functions check box is selected on
the General tab in the Security dialog box.
The screen type and number that was displayed when the event occurred.
Base n: Base screen (n: screen number)
Example: Base 1
Popup n:Popup screen (n: screen number)
Example: Popup 10

14-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

7. Event Name:
8. Part Name:
9. Device Address:

When the recorded data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed as a label todescribe the event that occurred. This item is configured in the Data Labels dialog box.
The part name for the pressed touch switch when the Press buttons event occurs.
The destination device address when the Write Data to any Device Addresses event
occurs.
When an indirect write is used, the device address specified by the indirect value is recorded.
Example: The device address configured as the destination for the value 100 is LDR100 and
the indirect value is 3.
Event Name
Part Name
Details
Press buttons
WordButton1‒
Write Data to any Device Addresses‒
LDR103

10. Changed to:Changed to‒100

The result produced from the event that occurred. The recorded content varies based on theevent that occurred.
Switch to Base Screen: The screen type and number after switching.
Base n:Base screen (n: screen number)
Example: Base 1
Change Users:
The user name after the change.
Change Operation Modes: The operation mode after the change.
Run Mode:
Run Mode
System Mode: System Mode
Monitor Mode: Monitor Mode
Offline Mode: Offline Mode
Write Data to any Device Addresses:
The value written to the device address by pressing the touch
switch. This value is handled as UBIN16(W). For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
The value written to the device address is recorded as UBIN16(W)regardless of the data type.
Example: 10 (0xFFF6) is written to device address D0.
Event Name
Part Name Details Changed to‒‒
WordButton1
Press buttons
Write Data to‒
D0 65526 (0xFFF6)
any Device Addresses

Example: The from Lower word is selected as the Storage
Method of 32-bit Numerical Data in theCommunication Driver tab on the Project Settings
dialog box and 12345678 (0xBC614E) is written to device
address D0 with the data type UBIN32(D).
Event Name
Press buttons

Part Name Details‒
WordButton1

Changed to‒Write Data to
any Device Addresses‒

D024910 (0x614E)

Write Data to
any Device Addresses‒

D1

188 (0xBC)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-5

Operation Log Function

If the written value is 2 words (32 bits), each word is recorded (16bits). For the storage order for 32-bit device address data, theupper word and lower word are stored following the Storage
Method of 32-bit Numerical Data for Internal Devices or the
Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data setting. For details,
refer to Chapter 4 “Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data for
HMI Devices” on page 4-31 and Chapter 4 “Storage Method of 32bit Numerical Data” on page 4-51.

14

1 Overview

1.4

Saving and Deleting Data

● Saving Data
The recorded data is saved in the data storage area.
Operation Log data
Main unit

130

Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10

-

Base1

Power ON--

Changed to-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Device Addresses

-

LDR0

55

If the saved data exceeds the Operation Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is
saved.
New data

Oldest data(delete)Operaon Log data storage amount

When there is no remaining battery power, the data in the Operation Log is erased when the main unit isturned off.
Data Storage AmountThe maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is as follows.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:

3,945
8,330

The maximum amount of data that can be recorded by a single operation is 150 items. When writing tomultiple device addresses in a single operation using the Multi-Button or other part, data over 150 items
cannot be recorded. If the data to be recorded in a single operation exceeds 150 items, HMI Special Internal
Relay LSM22 is set to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
● Deleting Data
The method to delete recorded data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the Online tab in WindO/I-NV4, click the arrow under Clear, and click All or Operation Log Data. For details,
refer to Chapter 29 “4 Clear” on page 29-26.
• In the System Mode, on the Main Menu screen, perform the following operation;
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2F-5F: Press Initial Setting, Initialize, Operation
Log in order.
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: Press Initial Setting, Initialize, Op. Log in order.

14-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.5

Using the Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Operation Log data
Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10

-

Base1

Power ON---

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Device Addresses

-

LDR0

55

• Save to and read from an external
memory device *1
Output data from the main unit to theexternal memory device as a CSV file anduse it on a computer.
For details, refer to “4.1 Saving the Data asa CSV File” on page 14-22.

External
memory device

Changed to

Book1

Sampling Time
12/01/2011 12:00:10
12/01/2011 12:01:23

User
User1

Screen No.
Base1
Base1

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Event NamePower ON
Switch to Base Screen
Change Users

Part Name-

Details-

Changed to
Base2

-

User2

-

System Mode

Change Operation Modes-

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Devices

-

LDR0

55

Sheet1

Sheet3

Sheet2

Operation Log data
(CSV)

14
Operation Log Function*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-7

2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure2

Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Operation Log function.

2.1

Configuring the Events and the Condition for Recording

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Operation Log.
The Operation Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Enable Operation Log Settings check box.

3 Select the check boxes for the events to record under Target Events to record.
Power ON:

The following items are recorded when the main unit power is turned on.

Switch to Base Screen:

Time, Screen Number, Event Name
The following items are recorded when the base screen is switched.

Change Users:

Time, User Name, Screen Number, Event Name, Changed to
The following items are recorded when the user is changed.

Change Operation Modes:

Press buttons:

Time, User Name, Screen Number, Event Name, Changed to
The following items are recorded when the operation mode of the main unit ischanged.
Time, User Name, Screen Number, Event Name, Changed to
The following items are recorded when a touch switch is pressed.

Time, User Name, Screen Number, Event Name, Part Name
Write Data to any Device Addresses: The following items are recorded when a value is written to a device addressby pressing a touch switch.
Time, User Name, Screen Number, Event Name, Device Address, Changed to

14-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure

4 Configure the Operation Log data storage amount in Number of Stored Data.
Click

to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.

Specify the Operation Log data storage amount in Number of Stored Data for Operation Log and click OK.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes.

5 Select the condition to record events in Trigger condition.
■ Always
Always records events.
■ Device Address
Records events when the specified device address is 1. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

6 Click OK.
The Operation Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the events and the condition for recording.

14
Operation Log Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-9

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

3

Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Operation Log Settings dialog box.

3.1

Operation Log Settings Dialog Box● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure the events and the condition for recording.

■ Enable Operation Log Settings
Select this check box to use the Operation Log function.
■ Target Events to record
Selects the events to record. Select the check boxes for the events to record.
Power ON:

The following items are recorded when the main unit power is turned on.

Switch to Base Screen:

Time, screen number, event name
The following items are recorded when the base screen is switched.

Change Users:

Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when the user is changed.

Change Operation Modes:

Press buttons:

Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when the operation mode of the main unit ischanged.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
The following items are recorded when a touch switch is pressed.

Time, user name, screen number, event name, part nameWrite Data to any Device Addresses: The following items are recorded when a value is written to a device addressby pressing a touch switch.
Edit Data Labels:

Time, user name, screen number, event name, device address, changed to
Displays the Data Labels dialog box.
The Data Labels dialog box is used to edit the text displayed in the label row
and the event names displayed in the data rows when the recorded data is
output as a CSV file.
For details, refer to “Data Labels Dialog Box” on page 14-12.

14-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box■ Monitor Count of Records
Select this check box to count the number of stored data. The number of stored data is written to the specified device
address.
(Destination Device Address): Specifies the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
Report when Count of Records has reached or exceeded Threshold:Writes 1 to the Report Device Address when the number ofrecord count reaches or exceeds the set threshold.
Threshold:Specifies the number of stored data (1 to 65535) that is thebasis for reporting.
Report Device Address: Specifies the destination bit device or the bit number of thedestination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Monitor % Space Used in Data Storage Area
Select this check box to monitor the usage of the data storage area allocated as the save destination for Operation
Log data. The usage is calculated from the data storage amount allocated to the data storage area and the amount ofsaved data, and then written to the specified device address.
Usage = Current amount of Operation Log data ÷ Operation Log data storage amount (omits values after the decimal point)(Destination Device Address): Specifies the destination word device to write the current usage of the amount of
Operation Log data storage.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
Report when % Space Used has reached or exceeded Threshold:Writes 1 in the Report Device Address when the current usage
reaches or exceeds the set threshold.
Threshold:Specifies the usage (1 to 100) that is the basis for reporting.
Report Device Address: Specifies the destination bit device or the bit number of thedestination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Clear Log Data
Select this check box to erase the Operation Log data saved in the data storage area.

■ Number of Stored Data
Shows the maximum amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area. Data is saved up to the set
amount. The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is listed next.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:

3,945
8,330

Click
to open the Data Storage Area Management dialog box where you can change the allocation of data storage
area memory. For details, refer to Chapter 15 “Data Storage Area” on page 15-1.
■ Trigger Condition
Selects the trigger condition for the Operation Log function.
Always:Device Address:

Always records events.
Records events when the value of the specified device address is 1.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-11

14
Operation Log Function(Trigger Device Address): Specifies the bit device that triggers the erasure of the data. The saved data is erased
when the value of the configured device address changes from 0 to 1. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page2-72.

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
Data Labels Dialog Box
The Data Labels dialog box is where you can edit labels for recorded data and event names when saving data as a
CSV file.

Label of Recorded Data
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for recorded data labels when saving data as a CSV file.
■ Label of Recorded Data
Specifies the text to display in the label row in Text or Text ID.
Text:

Double click the cell to enter the text to display as the label. The maximum number is 40
characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.

Text ID:

Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registeredin Text Manager as the label.
This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.

The details for each label row label is as follows.
Sampling Time: The label for the column to display the time the event occurred.
User Name:

The label for the column to display the user name when the event occurred.

Screen No.:

The label for the column to display the screen type and number that was displayed when the event
occurred.

Event Name:

The label for the column to display the name of the event that occurred on the main unit by anoperation including a user operation.

Part Name:

The label for the column to display the part name for the pressed touch switch when the Press
buttons event occurs.

Device Address: The label for the column to display the destination device address when the Write Data to any
Device Addresses event occurs.
Changed to:

14-12

The label for the column to display the result produced from the event that occurred. The recorded
content varies based on the event that occurred.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

Event Name
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for the event names when saving data as a CSV file.
■ Event Name
Specifies the text to display in Event Name in Text or Text ID.
Text:

Double click the cell to enter the text to display as the event name. The maximum number is 40
characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.

Text ID:

Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in
Text Manager as the event name.
This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.

Event name details are as follows.
Power ON:

The event name when the main unit power is turned on.

Switch to Base Screens:

The event name when the base screen is switched.

Change Users:

The event name when the user is changed.

Change Operation Modes:

The event name when the main unit operation mode is changed.

Press buttons:

The event name when a touch switch is pressed.

Write Data to any Device Addresses: The event name when a value is written to a device address by pressing atouch switch.

14
Operation Log Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-13

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box● External Memory Device Tab
The External Memory Device tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory
device*1.

The output data is stored in the "OPERATIONLOG" folder of the External Memory Device folder.
The default External Memory Device folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 33 “1.4 File structure”
on page 33-3 and Chapter 33 “1.6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder” on page 33-13.
Data recorded after starting output to the external memory device is not included in the output data.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

14-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box■ BatchSelect this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory device*1.
External memory device

Main unit

SD memory card
Output toExternal memory device

Trigger Device Address
0

1

USB flash drive

Operation Log data
Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10

-

Base1

Power ON--

Changed to-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Device Addresses

-

LDR0

55

12/01/2011 12:07:30

User2

Base2

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base3

Data to be output(all)Operation Log data
(CSV)

All the data is saved on the external memory device*1 when the value of the trigger device address changes from 0 to

1. If a file with the same name already exists on the external memory device*1, that file is overwritten. The maximum
amount of output data is the amount configured by the data storage area.
The storing of data stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory device. The error
information is stored in the following HMI Special Data Registers. For details about the error information,refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSD42
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD33
Trigger Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition for batch
output. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Data is output to file when the value of the trigger device address changes from 0 to 1.
File Name:

Specify File Name by Value of Device Address: Select this check box to assign a file namefor the output data using a value of device
address specified in the File Name Device
Address.
(File Name Device Address): Specifies a word device to create a file name. The filename is set by reading the values sequentially from thestarting device address specified with the File Name
Device Address and handling those values as character
data up to the character before NULL (00).
The maximum number of device addresses is 40(2 characters per word device, maximum of 80 singlebyte characters). You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-15

14
Operation Log Function

Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “OPLOGO.CSV”.
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters(including the extension).

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

Example: The device address specified by (File Name Device Address) is LDR100 andthe text to set is "IDEC":(File Name Device Address) LDR100

LDR101LDR102‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4844(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)(NULL)

0000(Hex)

The file name at this time becomes "IDEC.CSV".
Add Device Address data to File Name: Select this check box to add the bottom three
digits of the value of the device addressconfigured by (File Name Device Address) to theend of the file name for the output data.
(File Name Device Address): Specifies the word device that is the source for the value
to add to the file name. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72. This option can only be
configured when the Add Device Address data to File
Name check box is selected.
Example: File Name is "OPLOGO" and the value of device address in (File Name Device
Address) is 123, the file name is "OPLOGO123.CSV".
Add Time Stamp: Select from the following format for date and time to be added to thefile name when data is output:
None, YY, YY+MM, YY+MM+DD, YY+MM+DD+HH,
YY+MM+DD+HH+MM, YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS
The format is YYMMDD_hhmmss (YY: year, MM: month, DD: day, hh:hour, mm: minute, ss: second).
Example: File Name is "OPLOGO" on September 15 2013 at 23:30:50
YY:

OPLOGO_13

YY+MM:OPLOGO_1309

YY+MM+DD:

OPLOGO_130915

YY+MM+DD+HH:

OPLOGO_130915_23

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM:

OPLOGO_130915_2330

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS:

OPLOGO_130915_233050

Set limit on files:

Specifies the upper limit (1 to 100) when limiting the number of files tobe output.

When the Set limit on files check box is selected, note the following points.
• If the number of data files saved on the external memory device increases, it may take some time forthe data output processing, or the output of the next data may not be processed normally.
• When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both
occur simultaneously, the pictures may not be displayed.
• When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device, the blinking period may
slow down when data output processing occurs.

14-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box• The following single-byte characters cannot be used in the file name configured by File Name orSpecify File Name by Value of Device Address.
"*/:;<>?\|• File names that exceed the limits in Specify File Name by Value of Device Address and file names
configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the file name exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL), the text
stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
- When the first character is a character that cannot be used, the text is that set for File Name.
• The operation when the Set limit on files check box is selected is as follows.
- The files are output up to the set limit, and then for additional files, the new files are saved bydiscarding the old files in order of the oldest first.
- If the number of files saved on the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation
starts, the number of files at that time is the limit. From there the data is discarded in order from theoldest data and replaced with new data with each file output.

14
Operation Log Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-17

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box■ Real Time

Select this check box to output data to the external memory device*1 in real time.
External memory device
SD memory card
Main unit
Output toExternal memory device

3 minute interval

USB flash drive

after operation starts

Operation Log data
Sampling Time

User

Screen No.

Event Name

Part Name

Details

12/01/2011 12:00:10-

12/01/2011 12:01:23

User1

Base1

Power ON

-

-

-

Base1

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base2

Operation Log data
(CSV)

Changed to

12/01/2011 12:02:45

User1

Base2

Change Users

-

-

User2

12/01/2011 12:03:06

User2

Base2

Change Operation Modes--

System Mode

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Press buttons

BitSwitch--

12/01/2011 12:04:11

User2

Base2

Write Data to any Device Addresses

-

LDR0

55

12/01/2011 12:07:30

User2

Base2

Switch to Base Screen

-

-

Base3

Data to be output
3 minutes after
operation starts
Data to be output
3 minutes
after that
Data to be output
after another3 minutes

With real time output, data is saved to the external memory device*1 in three minute intervals after the main unit starts
running. If the accumulated data reaches 80% of the amount set in the Data Storage Area, then the data is forcibly
saved to the external memory device*1. When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory
device*1, data is appended to that file. If there was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.

Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of
output data varies based on the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and the labels.
If the interval events occur more quickly than the time it takes to accomplish the real time output (the interval for writing

to the external memory device*1), the Operation Log is recorded up to the data storage amount - 1, and thenafterwards, old data is discarded in order and replaced with new data.

Real time output stops when the file size of the Operation Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there isinsufficient space on the external memory device. The error information is stored in the following HMISpecial Data Registers. For details about the error information, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSD42
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD33• When the value of the following HMI Special Internal Relays changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time isfirst output in real time to the external memory device, and then access to the external memory device isstopped. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSM20
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSM18• The amount of free space on the external memory device is saved to the following HMI Special Data
Registers. For details about the free space on the External Memory Devices, refer to Chapter 35 “HMISpecial Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
LSD43, 44
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
LSD34, 35*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

14-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “OPLOGA.CSV”.
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including theextension).
Specify File Name by Value of Device Address: Select this check box to specify the name of the file forthe output data with the value of the device addressconfigured by (File Name Device Address).
(File Name Device Address): Specifies the word device that is the source of the data to use as thefile name. The file name is set by reading the values sequentially fromthe starting device address specified with the File Name Device
Address and handling those values as character data up to thecharacter before NULL (00).
The maximum number of device addresses is 40 (80 single-bytecharacters). You can only specify an internal device. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: The device address specified by (File Name Device Address) is LDR100 and the text to set
is "IDEC":(File Name Device Address) LDR100‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4844(Hex)‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)LDR101(NULL)LDR1020000(Hex)
The file name at this time becomes "IDEC.CSV".

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-19

14
Operation Log Function

Add Device Address data to File Name: Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the valueof the device address configured by (File Name Device Address)
to the end of the file name for the output data.
(File Name Device Address): Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add to thefile name. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72. This option can
only be configured when the Add Device Address data to File
Name check box is selected.
Example: When File Name is "OPLOGA" and the value of the device address configured by (FileName Device Address) is 123, the file name is "OPLOGA123.CSV".
Add Time Stamp: Selects the format of the output date and time to add to the file name for the output
data.
None, YY, YY+MM, YY+MM+DD
The format is YYMMDD (YY: year, MM: month, DD: day).
Example: File Name is "OPLOGA" on September 15 2013.
YY:
OPLOGA_13
YY+MM:OPLOGA_1309
YY+MM+DD:
OPLOGA_130915
Realtime Output: Select this check box to forcibly output the data and save it to file at the desired
timing.
(Trigger device address):
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serveas the condition to forcibly output the data. You can only specify aninternal device. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Data is output to file when the trigger device address changes from 0
to 1.
Set limit on files: Specifies the upper limit (1 to 100) when limiting the number of files to be output.

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box

When the Set limit on files check box is selected, note the following points.
• If the number of data files saved on the external memory device increases, it may take some time forthe data output processing, or the output of the next data may not be processed normally.
• When displaying pictures saved on the external memory device and processing the output of data both
occur simultaneously, the pictures may not be displayed.
• When parts that blink overlap pictures saved to the external memory device, the blinking period may
slow down when data output processing occurs.
• The following single-byte characters cannot be used in the file name configured by File Name orSpecify File Name by Value of Device Address.
"*/:;<>?\|• File names that exceed the limits in Specify File Name by Value of Device Address and file names
configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the file name exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL), the text
stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
- When the first character is a character that cannot be used, the text is that set for File Name.
• The operation when the Set limit on files check box is selected is as follows.
- The files are output up to the set limit, and then for additional files, the new files are saved bydiscarding the old files in order of the oldest first.
- If the number of files saved on the external memory device already exceeds the limit when operation
starts, the number of files at that time is the limit. From there the data is discarded in order from theoldest data and replaced with new data with each file output.
• The following operations are as follows if the Realtime Output check box is selected.
- Even if the data is outputted forcibly, the real time output period (3 minute interval) is not reset.
- While data is being output with the real time output function, the file is not output when the value of
the Realtime Output device address is 1.
- Even when output has finished, the value of device address does not automatically change to 0.
• The function to record data operates when Operation Log data is being saved to the external memory
device.
• The batch output or real time output status of the Operation Log data can be checked with the value of
HMI Special Internal Relay LSM37. When the data starts to be written to the external memory device, thevalue of device is 1. When writing is complete, the value is 0.
• The methods to erase Operation Log files saved on the external memory device are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory Device tab in the Project
Settings dialog box, select the Remove Files stored in External Memory Device check box and the
All Operation Log data check box, and then configure the trigger device address. Assign that trigger
device address to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV4, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data inExternal Memory Device to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Operation Log Data checkbox and click OK.
- To erase files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - File Manager.
In the File Manager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

14-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
Output Data File Name
The file name format is as follows.
File Name Value of Device Address_YYMMDD_hhmmss.CSV
File Name:

The text entered in File Name or the text entered according to the value of the device
address set by Specify File Name by Value of Device Address

Value of Device Address:

The lower 3 digits of the value of the device address configured by Add Device
Address data to File NameYYMMDD:

The year, month, and day of the month set on Add Time Stamphhmmss:

The hour, minute, and second of the time configured on Add Time Stamp■ Example 1
Item
File Name

Setting
OPLOGA

Add value of Device Address to File Name (File Name Device Address) is LDR200 LDR200 value: 123
Add Time Stamp

YY+MM

Date when data was output:
September 2013

Result: The file name is "OPLOGA123_1309.CSV".
■ Example 2
ItemSpecify File Name by Value of Device
Address

Setting
LDR100 value: 4944 (Hex)(File Name Device Address) is LDR100
LDR101 value: 4543 (Hex)
Text to set is "IDEC"LDR102 value: 0000 (Hex)Add value of Device Address to File Name (File Name Device Address) is LDR200 LDR200 value: 123
Add Time Stamp

YY+MM+DD+HH+MM+SS

Date and time when data was output:
September 15 2013 at 23:30:50

Result: The file name is "IDEC123_130915_233050.CSV".

14
Operation Log Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

14-21

4 Using the Data

4

Using the Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Saving the Data as a CSV File

● Saving the Data as a CSV FileThe Operation Log data can be saved to the external memory device*1 as a CSV file or uploaded to a computer.
The procedure to save the data is as follows.
• To save the data to an external memory device, click Operation Log on the WindO/I-NV4 Configuration tab toopen the Operation Log Settings dialog box. Select an output method check box on the External Memory Device
tab and configure the items. The Operation Log data is saved to the External Memory Device folder on the external
memory device according to the External Memory Device tab settings. For details, refer to “External Memory
Device Tab” on page 14-14.
• To upload the data to a computer, click on ▼ to the right of(Upload) on the toolbar in Data File Manager, andthen click the Upload All Log Data or Upload Data Operation Log Data to open the Browser For Folder dialog
box. Specify the location to save the file and click OK to save the file to the specified folder. For details, refer to the
Data File Manager User's Manual.

● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure of the output file is as follows. The data structure for files output with batch output and real time
output is the same.
Bold items are replaced by the Operation Log settings, the recorded data, the running project name, and WindO/INV4 version number.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number""File Type","Log type"

Headers

Blank row
Label row

Data row"Sampling Time","User Name","Screen No.","Event Name","Part Name","Device
Address","Changed to"" MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss","User Name","Screen Type & No.","Event","PartName","Device Address","Changed to"···

Output example

Data size of each row"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V4.50"... 41 bytes"File Type","Operation Log Data"... 34 bytes... 2 bytes"Sampling Time","User","Screen No.","Operation","Part Name","Details","Changed to"... 85 bytes" 12/01/2011 12:00:10","-","Base 1","Power ON","-","-","-"... 60 bytes" 12/01/2011 12:01:23","User1","Base 1","Switch to Base Screen","-","-","Base2"... 81 bytes···• The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full-width characters, 1 byte for half-width characters,and 2 bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the date in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project Settings, on
the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss
Western, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic:
MM/DD/YYYY hh:mm:ss*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

14-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 15

Data Storage Area

This chapter describes how to configure the data storage area and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

What is the Data Storage Area?
The data storage area is the area in the internal memory of the main unit where saved data is not erased even when
the power is turned off.
The following data can be saved in the data storage area.
• Alarm Log data
 Chapter 12 “Alarm Log Function” on page 12-1
• Data Log data
 Chapter 13 “Data Log Function” on page 13-1
• Operation Log data
 Chapter 14 “Operation Log Function” on page 14-1
• With the following models, the data in the data storage area is erased when the main unit is turned off.
- HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G*1- HG1P• If you download the project data from WindO/I-NV4, Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log
data is erased. The data saved in the HMI Keep Register (LKR) and the HMI Keep Relay (LK) is saved.

15
Data Storage Area

*1 Only when there is no remaining battery power

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

15-1

1 Overview

1.2

Data Storage Area
The capacity of the data storage area and the types and sizes of data that can be saved there differ according to themain unit model.

● Data Storage Area Capacity and Types of Storable Data
You can allocate areas to save Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log data, as well as areas to use as HMI
Keep Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK). The unallocated leftover area is free space.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P

Data storage area (112,640 bytes)

Alarm Log data

Operation Log
data

Data Log data

HMI Keep Registers HMI Keep Relays
(LKR)
(LK)

Free space

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F

Data storage area (235,520 bytes)

Alarm Log data

Operation Log
data

Data Log data HMI Keep Registers HMI Keep Relays
(LKR)
(LK)

Free space● Minimum and Maximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses
The minimum and maximum amount of data storage and the minimum and maximum number of addresses that canbe configured for the data storage area is as follows.
Data type15-2

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J,
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log

0

5520

0

11660

Number of Stored Data for Operation Log

0

3945

0

8330

Number of Stored Data for Data Log per
Device Address

0

13808

0

29165

Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR)

1024

8192

1024

8192

Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK)

1024

8192

1024

8192

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure

2

Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the data storage area.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Storage Area.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the amount of Alarm Log data to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log(FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: 0 to 5520, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 0 to 11660).

3 Specify the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for

Operation Log (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: 0 to 3945, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 0 to8330).

4 Specify the amount of Data Log data per device address to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Datafor Data Log per Device Address (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: 0 to 13808, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 0 to 29165).

5 Specify the number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) addresses in Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) (1024 to8192).

7 Click OK.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the data storage area.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

15
Data Storage Area

6 Specify the number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) addresses in Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) (1024 to 8192).

15-3

3 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box

3

Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.

■ Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log
Specifies the amount of Alarm Log data to save in the data storage area (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: 0 to
5520, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 0 to 1166).
Alarm Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Store is selected under Block Settings, Data in the
Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box for Alarm Log Settings.
■ Number of Stored Data for Operation Log
Specifies the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
0 to 3945, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 0 to 8330).
■ Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device Address
Specifies the amount of Data Log data per device address to save in the data storage area (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T,
HG1G/1P: 0 to 13808, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 0 to 29165).
Data Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Enable is selected under Log function on the General
Tab in the Individual Settings dialog box for Data Log Settings.
■ Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR)
Specifies the number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) addresses (1024 to 8192).
■ Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK)Specifies the number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) addresses (1024 to 8192).
■ Free SpaceShows the amount of free space in the data storage area (in bytes).
■ Default
Returns the configured values to their default values.

15-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Recipe Function

Chapter 16

16

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Recipe Function is Used
The Recipe function writes values prepared in advance to specified device addresses and reads the values for specified
device addresses according to the state of a device address in a batch. Use this function for situations such asconfiguring the initial values of an external device when the main unit starts running. The data used by the Recipe
function is called recipe data for the data saved in internal memory, a recipe file for data saved to the external memory
device, and recipe values for the values written to device addresses that were saved in recipe data and recipe files.
The Recipe function can perform the following functions.
• Batch write the recipe values saved in internal memory to device addresses when a value of device addresschanges from 0 to 1
Main unit

External device

1

0

Write
Internal Memory

D100=

0

100

D101=

0

150

D102=

0

200

Recipe Data
100
150
200

• Batch write the recipe values saved on the external memory device*1 to device addresses when a value of device addresschanges from 0 to 1
External Memory Device
Main unit

External device

1

0

SD memory card

Write
Recipe FileUSB flash drive

D100=

0

100

D101=

0

150

D102=

0

200

100,
150,
200,

• Batch read values of device addresses and save them to the external memory device*1 as a recipe file when a value of
device address changes from 0 to 1
Main unit

External device

10

Output toExternal memory device

External Memory Device
SD memory card
Recipe FileUSB flash drive

D100=

100

D101=

150

D102=

200

100,
150,
200,

The values of device addresses can be retained when the power is turned off by reading values of device
addresses to the external memory device and saving them as a recipe file and then writing those values thenext time the power is turned on.
*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-1

Recipe Function

This chapter describes how to configure the Recipe function and its operation on the main unit.

1 Overview

1.2

Data for Recipes
The data handled by the Recipe function is based on the top device address and the amount of data selected.
Example: The top device address is D100 and the amount of data is 10.

16-2

Device Address

Value

D100

1111

D101

2222

D102

3333

D103

4444

D104

5555

D105

6666

D106

7777

D107

8888

D108

9999

D109

11111

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3

16

Data Configuration

Recipe Function

The relationship between the Recipe function settings and the data for recipes is as follows.

Recipe settings

4. Top Device Address 5. Data

Data for recipes

3. Amount of data

D100

1111

100

101

D101

2222

200

102

D102

3333

300

103

D103

4444

400

104

D104

5555

500

105

D105

6666

600

106

D106

7777

700

107

D107

8888

800

108

D108

9999

900

109

D109

11111

1000

110

2. Channel 0 to 15
1. Number of blocks

1. Number of blocks:

The operation using the data for recipes is configured in blocks (0 to 64). 1 block is 16 channels.

2. Channels:

Destination device addresses and recipe values are configured in channels. 1 channel is used
for 1 item of data for the recipe.

3. Amount of data:

The amount of data configured for one channel. The maximum amount of data that can be
configured is 8192.

4. Top Device Address: The start address of the destination device addresses for recipe values and the source device
addresses for values of device addresses.
5. Data:

The values to write to the device addresses.
If there are many word devices for the data for the recipe, it will take time to read and write them. For
example, when using the Recipe function to configure initial values, if other processes are executed before
the function is finished writing all the settings, you may experience unexpected results. Monitor System
Area 2 Transferring recipe bit (address number+3, bit4) while the recipe is transferring and wait until
reading and writing the data for the recipe is finished before executing other processes. For details, refer to
Chapter 4 “System Area” on page 4-32.
If Float32(F) is selected for Data Type on the Channel tab, the values of device addresses that wereread are saved to the recipe file in the floating point type. However, when a value that was read is 8 digits orlarger, it is saved in the exponential type.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual16-3

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure

2

Recipe Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Recipe function.

2.1

Configuring Recipe Function Operations and Device Addresses

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of blocks to use as data for the recipe in Number of Blocks.
The operation using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks (0 to 64). 1 channel is used for 1 item of data forthe recipe. 1 block is 16 channels.
The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks. The maximum number of device addresses thatcan be configured for 1 channel is 8192 devices.

3 Select the number of the data for the recipe to configure in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

16-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure16

4 On the Channel tab, under Recipe function, select Enable.

Recipe Function

The channel for the block number displayed in Channel is enabled.

5 Enter the name for the Recipe function in Recipe Name.
The maximum number is 40 characters.

6 Specify the destination device address for the Recipe values in Top Device Address.
To read values of device addresses and save them as a recipe file, specify the source device address of the values.
Clickto display the Tag Editor.

For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The specified device addresses are configured sequentially from the number 1 in Data List on the Data tab.

7 Select the data type for the values to write with Data Type.
To read values of device addresses and save them as a recipe file, specify the type of data for the read values.

8 With Number of Data, specify the number of destination device addresses starting with the device addressconfigured by Top Device Address.

To read values of device addresses and save them as a recipe file, specify the number of source device addresses.
The sequential device addresses from the start address for the number of configured device addresses are displayedin Settings on the Data tab.
The amount of data that can be set varies based on the data type. When UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), or BCD4(B) is
selected for Data Type, up to 8192 items of data can be configured. When UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or
Float32(F) is selected, up to 4096 items of data can be configured.

9 With Display Type, select the display type for Data to configure in Data List on the Data tab.
To save data to a recipe file, the display type is decimal for all.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual16-5

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure

10 Click the Data tab.

The data for the recipe in the amount specified by Number of Data on the Channel tab is configured in Data List.
In Device Address, the devices are sequentially configured starting from the device address specified by Top
Device Address.

11 Double click the data cell for each number in Data List to enter the value to write to the device address.
The value for the device address that can be configured varies based on Data Type and Display Type configured on
the Channel tab.
When Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting on the Block tab, entering values of device addresses is
unnecessary.

12 Click the Block tab.

13 Select the destination to save recipe data to under Access to.
This option is set by block.
■ External Memory Device*1
Use a recipe file saved to the external memory device.
■ Internal Memory
Use recipe data saved to internal memory.
If you selected Internal Memory, proceed to step 17.
*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

16-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure

16

14 Enter the file name for the recipe file in File Name.
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including the extension).
The file is overwritten when there is a recipe file with the same name on the external memory device.

15 Select the operation using the data for the recipe under Trigger Setting.
This option is set by block.
■ Read/Write
Save batch read values of device addresses to the external memory device as a recipe file or write them to device
addresses as recipe values.
This option can only be configured when External Memory Device is selected under Access to.
■ Read-only
Save batch read values of device addresses to the external memory device as a recipe file.
This option can only be configured when External Memory Device is selected under Access to.
■ Write-only
Write recipe values to device addresses.
If you select Write-only, proceed to step 17.

16 Specify the device address that triggers batch reading values of device addresses and saving them to the external
memory device as a recipe file in Read Trigger.
This option is set by block.
Click

to display the Tag Editor.

For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
If you selected Read-only, proceed to step 18.

17 Specify the device address that triggers batch writing recipe values to device addresses in Write Trigger.
This option is set by block.
Click

to display the Tag Editor.

For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under Trigger Setting.

18 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
You are returned to the Recipe Settings dialog box.

19 Repeat steps 3 through 18 to register data for the recipe to all the used channels.
20 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
For details on how to create and edit the data for recipes, refer to “4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes” on page
16-14.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-7

Recipe Function

The default file name is “RCPn.CSV”. (n: 4 digit sequential number)3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

3

Recipe Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the items and buttons on the Recipe Settings dialog box and the Individual Settings dialog
box.

3.1

Recipe Settings Dialog Box
Use the Recipe Settings dialog box to collectively manage the save destination of data for recipes, the device
addresses for writing recipe values and reading values of device addresses, and those execution conditions.

■ Number of Blocks
The operation using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks (0 to 64). 1 channel is used for 1 item of data forthe recipe. 1 block is 16 channels.
The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks. The maximum number of device addresses thatcan be configured for 1 channel is 8192 devices.
■ Settings
Edits the recipe settings for each channel.
No.:

Displayed as (Block No.)-(Channel No.). Double clicking the cell displays the Individual
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 16-10.

Access to:Shows the save destination for the data for the recipe. Double clicking the cell switches between
Internal Memory and External Memory Device.

Trigger Setting:Shows the operation using the data for the recipe. When External Memory Device is selected
for Access to, double clicking the cell switches between Write-only, Read/Write, and Readonly. Shows Write-only when Internal Memory is selected for Access to.

Read Trigger:

Shows the device address that triggers saving the recipe file. Double clicking the cell displays
the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger
Setting.

Write Trigger:

Shows the device address that triggers writing recipe values to device addresses. Double
clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under
Trigger Setting.

Recipe function:

16-8

Shows whether or not to use the Recipe function. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

Recipe Name:Top Device Address: Shows the start device of the destination device addresses for recipe values and the source
device addresses for values of device addresses. Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Recipe function is Enable.
Data Type:Shows the data type of the values of source or destination device addresses. Double clicking thecell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 16-10.

No. of Data:

Shows the number of source or destination device addresses starting with the device addressconfigured by Top Device Address. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 16-10.

Display Type:Shows the display type of Data in Data List configured on the Data tab in the Individual
Settings dialog box. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For
details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 16-10.

■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number in Settings and click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for theselected channel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 16-10.
To register or edit multiple numbers as a group, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specificitems to select multiple lines and click Edit. The details configured on the Individual Settings dialog box
are collectively configured.
■ Save Recipe Files to External Memory Device
Saves all the settings in every channel on the Recipe Settings dialog box to the external memory device as a recipe
file.
Click this button to display the Select Drive dialog box.
Only saves channels configured with Access to set to External Memory Device and Recipe Function set toEnable.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-9

16
Recipe Function

Shows the name of the Recipe function for each channel. Double clicking the cell displays theIndividual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” onpage 16-10.

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

3.2

Individual Settings Dialog Box
Use the Individual Settings dialog box to register or edit the recipe settings for the selected channel.

● Block Tab
The Block tab is used to configure settings that are managed by blocks such as the save destination for the data forthe recipe to use, the Recipe function operation, and the operation trigger.

■ Access to
Selects the save destination for data for the recipe to use when writing values to device addresses.
External Memory Device*1: Uses a recipe file saved to the external memory device.
Requires an external memory device with a saved recipe file. For details, refer to “4.2
Creating Recipe Files” on page 16-17.
Internal Memory:

Uses recipe data saved to internal memory.
Since recipe data is handled as a portion of project data, it may put pressure on thevolume of project data that can be downloaded. One item of recipe data uses 2 bytes
when the top device address data type is 16 bits and it uses 4 bytes when the top device
address data type is 32 bits.
Example: The top device address data type is 16 bits and using 1 block of 16 channels ofrecipe data with a data amount of 10.
2 x 10 x 1 x 16 = 320 bytes
When the top device address data type is 32 bits and using 64 blocks of 16
channels of recipe data with a data amount of 100
4 x 100 x 64 x 16 = 409.6 kilobytes■ File NameEnter the file name of the recipe file to save on the external memory device.
The default file name is “RCPn.CSV”. (n: 4 digit sequential number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including the extension).
The file is overwritten when there is a recipe file with the same name on the external memory device.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

16-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

16■ Trigger Setting
Selects the operation using the data for the recipe.
Saves batch read values of device addresses to the external memory device as a recipe file andwrites them to device addresses as recipe values.
This option can only be configured when External Memory Device is selected under Access to.

Read-only:

Saves batch read values of device addresses to the external memory device as a recipe file.
This option can only be configured when External Memory Device is selected under Access to.

Write-only:

Writes recipe values to device addresses.

If Float32(F) is selected for Data Type on the Channel tab, the values of device addresses that wereread are saved to the recipe file in the floating point type. However, when a value that was read is 8 digits orlarger, it is saved in the exponential type.
■ Read Trigger
Specifies the device address that triggers batch reading values of device addresses and saving them to the external
memory device as a recipe file.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
Each bit of the word device configured by the read trigger device address corresponds to a channel.
When a bit changes from 0 to 1, a read to the device address is executed.
Example: The block 1 read trigger device address is specified as LDR0000.
LDR0000-0 corresponds to channel 1-0, LDR0000-1 to channel 1-1, through to LDR0000-15 whichcorresponds to channel 1-15.
bit
15

bit
0

Channel 1-15

Channel 1-0

LDR0000■ Write Trigger
Specifies the device address that triggers batch writing recipe values to device addresses by block.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
Each bit of the word device configured by the write trigger device address and the read trigger device
address corresponds to a channel.
When a bit changes from 0 to 1, a write to the device address is executed.
Example: The block 1 write trigger device address is specified as LDR0000.
LDR0000-0 corresponds to channel 1-0, LDR0000-1 to channel 1-1, through to LDR0000-15 whichcorresponds to channel 1-15.
bit
15

bit
0

Channel 1-15

Channel 1-0

LDR0000■ Monitoring Period
Shows the period to monitor the write trigger device address and the read trigger device address. This period is for
detecting alarms so it is the same as the period to monitor states of device addresses. This option is configured on the
General tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
• If Access to is set to External Memory Device and no recipe file exists in the "RECIPE" folder located in
the External Memory Device folder on the external memory device, the recipe values are not written to thedevice addresses.
• If value of device address reads and recipe value writes occur simultaneously, first the values of device
addresses are read, then the recipe values are written.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-11

Recipe Function

Read/Write:3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box● Channel Tab
The Channel tab is used to configure the recipe name for the selected channel and the device addresses to read andwrite values to.

■ Channel
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block Number:Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.

Channel Number:Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.

■ Recipe function
Selects whether or not to use the Recipe function.
Enable:Writes recipe values to device addresses, reads values of device addresses and saves them tothe external memory device as a recipe file.

Disable:The Recipe function is not used.

■ Recipe NameEnter the name for the Recipe function to differentiate the channel. The maximum number is 40 characters. The
default is “Recipen”. (n: 4 digit sequential number)■ Top Device Address
Specifies the start device address of the destination device addresses for recipe values and the source device
addresses for values of device addresses.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The specified device addresses are configured sequentially from the number 1 in Data List on the Data tab.
■ Data Type
Selects the type of data for recipe values to write and values of device addresses that are read. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Number of Data
Specifies the number of source or destination device addresses starting with the device address configured by Top
Device Address.
The sequential device addresses from the start address for the number of configured device addresses is displayed in
Settings on the Data tab.
The amount of data that can be set varies based on the data type. When UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), or BCD4(B) is
selected for Data Type, up to 8192 items of data can be configured. When UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or
Float32(F) is selected, up to 4096 items of data can be configured.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type for Data in Data List configured on the Data tab as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
Values when saving data to a recipe file are decimal.

16-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box

16
Recipe Function● Data Tab
The Data tab is used to configure recipe values written to device addresses.

■ Channel
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block Number:Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.

Channel Number:Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.

■ Data List
Enter the recipe values to write to device addresses for each number in the selected channel.
No.:

Shows the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data.

Device Address:

Devices are sequentially configured starting from the device address specified by Top Device
Address on the Channel tab.

Data:

Double click a cell to enter a recipe value. The value that can be configured varies based on
Data Type and Display Type configured on the Channel tab.
When Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting on the Block tab, entering recipe values
is unnecessary.

■ Import
Displays the Open dialog box.
Select a recipe file and click Open to overwrite the data in Data List with the selected recipe file.
■ Export
Displays the Save As dialog box.
Select the location to save the recipe file, enter a file name, and then click Save to save the recipe file for the selectedchannel.
The saved recipe file can be edited using Notepad, commercially available text editors, and spreadsheet software.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-13

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Editing Recipe Data
You can export recipe data for the selected channel, edit the recipe values in a saved file, and import a recipe file backinto WindO/I-NV4.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the channel number to export its recipe data in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Data tab, then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

16-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

16

4 Specify the save location and click Save.

Recipe Function

The file name specified on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box is entered in File name.

5 Open the exported recipe data file.
Use Notepad, a commercially available text editor, or spreadsheet software.

6 Edit the values and save the file.

7 Return to the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box and click Import.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-15

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

8 Specify the file and click Open.

The recipe data is imported.

9 Click OK.
The Individual Settings dialog box closes.

10 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes editing recipe data.

16-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4.2

16

Creating Recipe Files

Recipe Function

Recipe files can be created on the external memory device*1 with the following procedure. The recipe values
configured on the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box are saved in recipe files.
 “Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box”
 “Creating Recipe Files when Downloading Project Data” on page 16-19
 “Creating Recipe Files with a Text Editor” on page 16-20● Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box

1 Insert an external memory device in the computer.
Insert an external memory device*1 into the USB port or memory card slot of your computer, or via a docking station,etc.
SD memory card
Into SD memory card slot

USB flash drive

SD memory card

ComputerUSB flash drive

Into USB port

Via a docking station etc.

2 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click Save Recipe Files to External Memory Device.
The Select Drive dialog box is displayed.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-17

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4 Specify the drive for the external memory device, then click OK.

■ Drive
Specifies the drive assigned to the external memory device.
■ Network
Displays the Map Network Drive dialog box. This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Device Folder
Specifies the folder to save the created recipe file.
Click
to display the Project Settings dialog box. You can specify the External Memory Device folder used as the
save destination.

5 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
The “RECIPE” folder is created in the External Memory Device folder used as the save destination, and the recipe files
for the channels configured with Access to set to External Memory Device and Recipe Function set to Enable
in the Recipe Settings dialog box are created.

16-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit and the recipe files are created. The recipe files are only createdfor channels configured with Access to set to External Memory Device and Recipe Function set to Enable in
the Recipe Settings dialog box.
The External Memory Device folder is configured in the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to
Chapter 33 “1.6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder” on page 33-13.

1 Insert an external memory device into the main unit.
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.

If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.

3 Select the Recipe Files check box under Download following files to External Memory Device.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-19

16
Recipe Function● Creating Recipe Files when Downloading Project Data
When a project download is executed, the “RECIPE” folder is created in the External Memory Device folder on the4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4 Verify Communication Settings and click Download.
Since the recipe files are downloaded to the external memory device inserted in the main unit, use the same settings
as when communicating with the main unit.
To change Communication Settings, click Change to display the Communication Settings dialog box. Change
Communicate with, Port, and Baud Rate. For details, refer to Chapter 29 “1 Overview” on page 29-1.
If security is enabled in the main unit project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name andenter the password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

5 Click Yes.
The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project files start downloading.
When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.

6 Click OK.
You are returned to the Download Project dialog box.

7 Click Close.
● Creating Recipe Files with a Text Editor
You can edit recipe files using Notepad, commercially available text editors, or spreadsheet software.

1 Write the data for the amount of data in “value of device address” comma (,) new line order.
If the amount of data in the recipe file is lower than the amount of data for the top device address configured on the
Channel tab in the Individual Settings dialog box, 0 is written in the rest of the device addresses.

2 Save the file with the “.csv” extension.
Give the file the file name configured on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box. If the file name isdifferent, 0 is written to all the device addresses.

3 Copy the edited recipe files to the “RECIPE” folder in the External Memory Device folder on the external memory device.

16-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4.3

16

Editing Recipe Files

Recipe Function

Book1

External Memory Device

100
150
200

You can read and display the data saved from the main unit to theexternal memory device*1 as a recipe file on a computer.

Recipe File

The recipe file that was read can be edited using Notepad, commercially available text editors, or spreadsheet
software.
You can upload recipe files from the external memory device using WindO/I-NV4.
On the Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and click Stored Data in External Memory Device todisplay the Upload Data from External Memory Device dialog box. Select the Recipe Files check box,
specify the location to save the recipe files in Location, and click OK to be able to save the recipe files inthe specified folder.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

16-21

4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes

4.4

Deleting Recipe Files
The methods to delete recipe files saved on the external memory device*1 are as follows.
• To delete files with WindO/I-NV4, on the Online tab, in the MICRO/I group, click Clear, and then click Stored
Data in External Memory Device to display the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Recipe Files check box andclick OK.
• To delete files on the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, go to the System Mode - File Manager. In the FileManager, select the files to be deleted by pressing DEL.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

16-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 17

Data Copy Function

This chapter describes how to configure the data copy function.

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

What Can Be Done with the Data Copy Function
You can copy values from source device addresses to destination device addresses when a specified trigger conditionis satisfied.
•Copy values between internal devices.
Condition Satisfied
0

Main unit

1

Copy contents
LDR100 192
Source:LDR100LDR101 168
Destination: LKR100
LDR102 0
Copies:4
LDR103 44

LKR100 192
LKR101 168
LKR1020

LKR103 44

FT2J FT1J
HG2J HG1J•Copy values between internal devices and external device addresses.
Condition Satisfied
0

Main unit

Copy contents

1
Source:
M100
Destination: LM100
Copies:128

External device

M100

1

LM100

1

M101

0

LM101

0

M257

1

LM227

1

FT2J FT1J
HG2J HG1J•Copy values between external device addresses.
Condition Satisfied
0

Main unit

Copy contents

1
Source:
M100
Destination: M500
Copies:128

External device

M100

1

M500

1

M101

0

M501

0

M257

1

M657

1

FT2J FT1J
HG2J HG1J•Copying between bit devices and word devices is not supported.
•The bit number of the word device is not supported.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

17-1

Data Copy Function

117

1 Overview

1.2

Data Copy Function Operation
The main unit will copy the value of the device address when a specified trigger condition is satisfied. For details, refer
to “Trigger Condition” on page 17-7.
However, when there are multiple settings, such as multiple trigger conditions to copy are the same or multiple trigger
conditions are satisfied at the same time, an error occurs.
■ Multiple trigger conditions for the Copy Function are the same or the different trigger conditions are
satisfied at the same time.
When multiple trigger conditions for the Copy Function are satisfied at the same time, the Copy Function with thesmaller number is executed. Copy functions with other numbers will not be executed and will result in an error.
For example, if the trigger conditions for the Copy Function number 1 and the Copy Function number 2 are the same,once the trigger conditions are satisfied, the Copy Function number 1 will start executing, and the Copy Function
number 2 will result in an error.
Trigger Condition(No.: 1, 2)

Satisfied
Not satisfied
Copy Function(No.: 1）

Executing

Copy Function(No.: 2）

Execution error■ The trigger condition is satisfied while the other number of Copy Function is executing.
Even if the trigger condition is satisfied while the other Copy Function is executing, the Copy Function will not executeand will result in an error.
For example, if the trigger condition for the Copy Function number 2 is satisfied while the Copy Function number 1 is
executing, the Copy Function number 2 will result in an error.
Trigger Condition(No.: 1)

Trigger Condition(No.: 2)

Satisfied
Not satisfied
Satisfied
Not satisfied
Copy Function(No.: 1）

Executing

Copy Function(No.: 2）

Execution error■ The trigger condition is satisfied again while copying.
Even if the trigger condition is satisfied again while the Copy Function is executing, the Copy Function will not executeand will result in an error.
For example, if the trigger condition for the Copy Function number 1 is satisfied again while the Copy Function
number 1 is executing, the same Copy Function is not going to be executed twice.
Trigger Condition(No.: 1)

Satisfied
Not satisfied
Copy Function(No.: 1）

Copy Function(No.: 1）

ExecutingExecution error

You can check the status of the Copy Function with the value of the Status Device Address. For details, refer
to “Status Device Address” on page 17-6.

17-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Data Copy Function Configuration Procedure

2

Data Copy Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Data Copy Function

This section describes the configuration procedure for copying values between device addresses.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Copy.
The Data Copy Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the number to use the Data Copy function in (Settings).
The settings for the selected number are displayed in to the right of the list.

(Settings)

3 Enter the name for the Data Copy Settings.
The maximum number is 20 characters.

4 Select the condition to copy in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Rising-edge
Copies values between device addresses when the value of the device address changes from 0 to 1.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Falling-edge
Copies values between device addresses when the value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

17

17-3

2 Data Copy Function Configuration Procedure■ Satisfy the condition
Copies values between device addresses when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

5 Specifies the device address to copy from in Copy From under Copy content.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

6 Specifies the destination device address to copy in To under Copy content.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

7 Specifies the number of device addresses (1 to 128) to copy in Copies under Copy content.
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 to configure the necessary Copy content.
A maximum of 32 lines can be configured, however, the total number can be set Copies from the number of Data
Copy Settings -1 to the number of Data Copy Settings -32 is up to 256 points.

9 Repeat steps 2 through 8 to configure the necessary Copy Function.
10 Click OK to close the Data Copy Settings dialog box.
This concludes configuring the settings of Data Copy.

17-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Copy Settings Dialog Box

3

Data Copy Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

3.1

Data Copy Settings Dialog Box
The source and destination device addresses for copying values between device addresses and its trigger conditions
are collectively managed in the Data Copy Settings dialog box.

(Settings)■(Copy)
Select a number and click this button to copy the contents of that row to the clipboard.

■(Paste)Select a number and click this button to paste the contents of the clipboard to that row.

■

(Delete)Select a number and click this button to delete the contents of that row.

■ (Settings)
Displays a list of the Data Copy Function settings.
No.:

Displays the number (1 to 32) of the Data Copy Settings. You can add up to 256 Total Copies
maximum x 32 lines maximum = 8192 points.

Copy Function:

Displays whether or not the Data Copy Function is used.

Name:

Displays the name of the Data Copy Settings.

Trigger Type:

Displays the trigger type for copying values between device addresses.

Trigger Condition: Displays the trigger condition of trigger type for copying values between device addresses. The
displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.

Total Copies:

Rising-edge, Falling-edge:

Displays the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serveas condition.

Satisfy the condition:

Displays the conditional expression.

Displays the total number of Copies of the Copy content.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

17-5

Data Copy Function

This section describes items and buttons on the Data Copy Settings dialog box.

17

3 Data Copy Settings Dialog Box■ Copy Function
Configure each items of the number selected from (Settings).
Enable:The Data Copy Function is used. Copies values between device addresses when the trigger condition issatisfied.

Disable:The Data Copy Function is not used.

Name:

Enter the name for the Data Copy Settings. The maximum number is 20 characters.

Notify when Data Copy Complete:

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting whenthe values between device addresses have been copied.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Example: The No. of the Data Copy Settings is 1, Rising-edge is selected as Trigger Type in Trigger Condition
and LM100 is set to Device Address, LM101 is set to the device address for Notify when Data Copy
Complete.
When the value of the device address LM100 set as the trigger condition changes to 1, starts copying thevalue. The value of the device address for Notify when Data Copy Complete LM101 changes to 0 when
the copy process starts, and the value of the device address for Notify when Data Copy Complete
LM101 changes to 1 when the copy process completes.
Trigger Condition is satisfied

Value of Device Address LM100
when Trigger Condition is Rising-edge

10

Value of Device Address LM101 for 1
Notify when Data Copy Complete0

Data Copy Settings(No.1)

Start
copying

Copying

Copyingcomplete

Even when an error occurs during copying, the main unit regards the copying is completed, and the value ofthe device address for Notify when Data Copy Complete changes to 1.
Status Device Address : To check the execution result of the Copy Function, select this check box, and then specifies
a word device to write the execution result. When an error occurs, the value does not
become 0 until the main unit is reset or 0 is written.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
StatusCause

0: Successfully completed

17-6

-

1: Duplicate execution error

While copying is being executed, the trigger condition issatisfied again.

2: Execution error due to other number being executed

The trigger condition has been satisfied while copying ofanother number is being executed.

3: Read error

Failed to read a value from the source device address.

4: Write error

Failed to write the value to the destination device address.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Data Copy Settings Dialog Box■ Trigger Condition
Set the trigger conditions for copying values between device addresses.
Trigger Type:17

A condition for copying values between device addresses is selected from the following.

1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

Falling-edge: Copies values between device addresses when the value of device address changes
from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Satisfy the condition:
Copies values between device addresses when condition changes from not satisfied tosatisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionData Type:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display
the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Condition:

Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display the
Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

■ Copy content
Set the source and destination device addresses, and the number of copies.
No.:

A number (the number of Data Copy Settings -1 to the number of Data Copy Settings -32) isdisplayed for each device address to be copied. A maximum of 32 lines can be configured, however,
the total number can be set Copies from the number of Data Copy Settings -1 to the number of Data
Copy Settings -32 is up to 256 points.

Copy From:Specifies the device address to copy from. A bit number of a word device is not supported.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

To:

Specifies the destination device address to copy. Only device addresses of the same type as thedevice address specified in Copy From can be specified. A bit number of a word device is notsupported.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter
2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Copies:Specifies the number of device addresses (1 to 128) to copy.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

17-7

Data Copy Function

Rising-edge: Copies values between device addresses when the value of the device addresschanges from 0 to 1.

3 Data Copy Settings Dialog Box

17-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 18

Preventive Maintenance Function

This chapter describes how to configure the Preventive Maintenance function and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview

18

1.1

How the Preventive Maintenance Function is Used
The Preventive Maintenance function monitors the state of device addresses and counts the time the monitored
device addresses are 1, as well as the number of times the values of monitored device addresses change to 1.
The Preventive Maintenance function can perform the following functions.
• Monitor device addresses that turn on lighting or warning lights and count the operation time
Main unit
Lighting

External device
Lighting

1230 hours

Warninglight

360 hours

Warning light• Report the replacement time for lighting and warning lights by the counted operation time
Main unit
Lighting
External device
Please replace

Lighting

Warninglight

Replace soon

Warning light• Monitor device addresses connected to buttons and relays and count the operation count
Main unit
External device
ButtonButton

123 times

Relay

1000 times

Relay• Report the inspection time for buttons and relays by the counted operation count
Main unit
External device
ButtonButtonRelay

Inspect soon

Please inspect

Relay

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-1

Preventive Maintenance Function

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1 Overview

1.2Counting the Operation Time and Operation CountThe operation time and operation count are counted up to the set maximum value. The counted operation time andoperation count are saved in HMI Keep Registers (LKR) and the values are retained until they are reset. To reset a
counted value, set the value of the configured HMI Keep Register (LKR) to 0.
The maximum value that can be configured varies based on the data type of the destination device address for theoperation time and operation count.

● Counting the Operation Time
While the value of the monitored device address is 1, 1 is added to the value of the device address (Operation Time
Device Address) configured in Measure Operation Time for each second that elapses. The operation time is notcounted when it is less than one second.
The counted operation time is written to the device address configured in Measure Operation Time.
Example: When the value of monitored device address M0 is 1, 1 is added to the value of Operation Time Device
Address LKR0.
Not counted

Not counted

0.5 sec.

3 sec.

0.5 sec.

3.4 sec.

Operation time
1 sec.

1 sec.

1 sec.

1 sec.

1 sec.

1 sec.

0.4 sec.

Monitored device address 1
M0 value0

Operation Time Device Address0

LKR value

1

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

4

5

6

6

● Counting the Operation Count
When the value of the monitored device address changes from 0 to 1, 1 is added to the value of the device address(operation count device address) configured in Measure Operation Count.
The counted operation count is written to the device address configured in Measure Operation Count.
Example: When the value of monitored device address M0 changes from 0 to 1, 1 is added to the value of operation
count device address LKR0.

1

Operation count

2

3

4

Monitored device address1
M0 value0

Operation count device address
LKR value

0

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

If the value of monitored device addresses changes from 0 to 1 in an interval shorter than the main unit
scan time and the communication cycle with external devices, the operation time and operation count is
not counted normally. You can check the maximum scan time (x1 ms) of the main unit with the value of
HMI Special Data Register LSD4. You can check the communication cycle with external devices (x 1 ms)
with the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD6. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

18-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3

Thresholds
The threshold is a value that is the criterion for reporting to a configured device address (Report Device Address)
when the value counted for the operation time or operation count (a value of Operation Time Device Address or
Operation Count Device Address) has reached the threshold value. 1 is written to the configured device address when
the operation time and operation count reach the threshold.

Level

ThresholdReport Device Address

Level 1

10LM1Level 215

LM2

Level 320

LM3Level 1 threshold
Operation Time Device Address

9

LKR0 value

Level 1 Report Device Address
LM1 value
Level 2 Report Device Address
LM2 value
Level 3 Report Device Address
LM3 value

10

11

12

Level 2 threshold
13

14

15

16

17

Level 3 threshold
18

19

20

21

22

1
0
1
0
1
0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-3

18
Preventive Maintenance Function

Example: When the value of Operation Time Device Address LKR0 reaches the threshold set for level 1 through level3, 1 is written to the Report Device Address configured for each level, LM1 through LM3.

2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure

2

Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Preventive Maintenance function.

2.1

Counting Operation Time and Operation Count

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of device addresses to monitor in Number of Items.

3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options.

Select Operation Time + Operation Count.
The Operation Time and Operation Count settings are displayed in Settings.

4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

5 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

18-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure

6 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab.
If you are not counting the operation time, leave the Measure Operation Time check box cleared and proceed tostep 9.

7 Specify the destination device address for the counted operation time.
You can only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).

8 Select the data type for the value of Measure Operation Time device address with Data Type.
This concludes configuring operation time counting.

9 Click the Operation Count tab.

10 Select the Measure Operation Count check box.
If you are not counting the operation count, leave the Measure Operation Count check box cleared and proceed tostep 13.

11 Specify the destination device address for the counted operation count.
You can only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

12 Select the data type for the value of Measure Operation Count device address with Data Type.
This concludes configuring operation count counting.

13 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
You are returned to the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box.

14 Repeat steps 2 to 13 to register settings to count the operation time and operation count in all the used numbers.
This concludes configuring operation time and operation count counting.
Next, configure the functions to execute using counted data.
 “4.1 Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display” on page 18-11
 “4.2 Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold” on page 18-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-5

18
Preventive Maintenance Function

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

3

Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the items and buttons on the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box and theIndividual Settings dialog box.

3.1

Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is used to manage the preventive maintenance settings for eachmonitored device address.

■ Number of Items
Specifies the number of device addresses (1 to 256) to monitor. The numbers for the amount of configured devices isdisplayed in Settings.
■ Display Options
Select the item to display in Settings from the following:
Operation Time:Operation time settings are displayed in Settings.

Operation Count:

Operation count settings are displayed in Settings.

Operation Time + Operation Count: Operation time and operation count settings are displayed in Settings.
■ Settings
Edits the settings for each number.

18-6

No.:

Shows the number of the preventive maintenance settings to manage. Double
clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer
to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-8.

Monitor Device Address:

Shows the bit device or the bit number of the word device to count the operation timeor operation count.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Operation Time Device Address:

Shows the destination device address for the counted operation time. You can
only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option is displayed only when Operation Time or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.

Data Type:Shows the date type of the Operation Time Device Address. Double clicking the cell
displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-8.
This option is displayed only when Operation Time or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

Level 1 to 3 Threshold:

Level 1 to 3 Report Device Address: Shows the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when
the operation time reaches or exceeds the level 1 through level 3 thresholds.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-72.
This option is displayed only when Operation Time or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.
Operation Count Device Address:

Shows the destination device address for the counted operation count. You can
only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-72.
This option is displayed only when Operation Count or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.

Data Type:Shows the date type of the operation count device address. Double clicking thecell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2
Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-8.
This option is displayed only when Operation Count or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.

Level 1 to 3 Threshold:Shows the count as a constant or a device address that is the criterion forreporting at level 1 through level 3. For a constant, double clicking the cell displays
the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 18-8. For a device address, the Tag Editor is displayed. For
the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option is displayed only when Operation Count or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.

Level 1 to 3 Report Device Address: Shows the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when
the operation count reaches or exceeds the level 1 through level 3 thresholds.
Double clicking the cell displays the Tag Editor. For the device addressconfiguration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” onpage 2-72.
This option is displayed only when Operation Count or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.
■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number and click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The configured content for theselected number is reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 18-8.
■ Remove
Deletes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number and click this button.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-7

18
Preventive Maintenance Function

Shows the time as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reportingat level 1 through level 3. For a constant, double clicking the cell displays theIndividual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 18-8. For a device address, the Tag Editor is displayed. For
the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
This option is displayed only when Operation Time or Operation Time +Operation Count is selected as Display Options.

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

3.2

Individual Settings Dialog Box
The Individual Settings dialog box is used to configure the operation time and operation count settings for eachmonitored device address.

Shows the number selected in Settings in the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog
box. To change the set number, specify a number (1 to 256).
You can only specify a number of the amount of devices configured by Number of Items
in the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box.
Monitor Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to count the operation time oroperation count.

Number:Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
● Operation Time Tab
The Operation Time tab is used to configure the destination device address for the counted operation time and thereport conditions when the threshold is reached or exceeded.
■ Measure Operation Time
Select this check box to count the operation time.
(Operation Time Device Address): Specifies the destination device address for the counted operation time. You can
only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If you specify the same device address as the Operation Time Device Address for multiple numbers, thecounted operation time is added in total by all the monitored device addresses for each number and thefunction will not be able to count normally.
■ Data Type
Select the data type for the Operation Time Device Address as UBIN16(W) or UBIN32(D). For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Report when Operation Time has reached or exceeded Threshold level
Select this check box to report when the counted operation time reaches or exceeds the threshold.
■ (Data Type)
Selects the type of data for the threshold.
Value:
Device Address:

Uses a constant as the threshold.
Uses a value of device address as the threshold.

■ Level 1
Configures the level 1 threshold and Report Device Address.
ThresholdSpecifies the time as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at
level 1. For a constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device
address, click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

18-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box

Report Device Address:

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when theoperation time reaches or exceeds the level 1 threshold.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Level 2
Select this check box to configure the level 2 threshold and Report Device Address.

Report Device Address:

Specifies the time as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at
level 2. For a constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device
address, click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when theoperation time reaches or exceeds the level 2 threshold.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Level 3
Select this check box to configure the level 3 threshold and Report Device Address.
ThresholdReport Device Address:

Specifies the time as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at
level 3. For a constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device
address, click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when theoperation time reaches or exceeds the level 3 threshold.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

● Operation Count Tab
The Operation Count tab is used to configure the destination device address for the counted operation count andthe report conditions when the threshold is reached or exceeded.

■ Measure Operation Count
Select this check box to count the operation count.
(Operation Count Device Address): Specifies the destination device address for the counted operation count. You can
only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
If you specify the same device address as the operation count device address for multiple numbers, thecounted operation count is added in total by all the monitored device addresses for each number and thefunction will not be able to count normally.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-9

Preventive Maintenance Function

Threshold18

3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box■ Data Type
Select the data type for the operation count device address as UBIN16(W) or UBIN32(D). For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Report when Operation Count has reached or exceeded Threshold level
Select this check box to report when the counted operation count reaches or exceeds the threshold.
■ (Data Type)
Selects the type of data for the threshold.
Value:

Uses a constant as the threshold.

Device Address:

Uses a value of device address as the threshold.

■ Level 1
Configures the level 1 threshold and Report Device Address.
ThresholdSpecifies the count as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at
level 1. For a constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device
address, click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Report Device Address:

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when theoperation count reaches or exceeds the level 1 threshold.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Level 2
Select this check box to configure the level 2 threshold and Report Device Address.
ThresholdSpecifies the count as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at
level 2. For a constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device
address, click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Report Device Address:

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when theoperation count reaches or exceeds the level 2 threshold.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Level 3
Select this check box to configure the level 3 threshold and Report Device Address.
ThresholdSpecifies the count as a constant or a device address that is the criterion for reporting at
level 3. For a constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device
address, click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Report Device Address:

Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when theoperation count reaches or exceeds the level 3 threshold.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

18-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

4

Using the Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

18

Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display

Preventive Maintenance Function

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of device addresses to monitor in Number of Items.

3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options.
Select Operation Count.
Operation count settings are displayed in Settings.

4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

5 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device Address.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual18-11

4 Using the Data

6 Click the Operation Count tab.

7 Select the Measure Operation Count check box and specify the destination device address for the counted
operation count.

8 Select the data type for the value of Measure Operation Count device address with Data Type.
9 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.

10 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Display.
11 Double-click the placed Numerical Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

18-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

12 On the General tab, under Display Type, click Decimal.

18

Select the same data type as the data type selected on the Operation Count tab in the Preventive Maintenancesettings Individual Settings dialog box.

14 Specify Digits for the value to display.
The digits that can be set varies based on the display type or data type.

15 Under Display Method, in Display Device Address, specify the destination device address for the counted
operation count.

Select the same device address as the device configured with Measure Operation Count on the Operation Counttab in the Preventive Maintenance settings Individual Settings dialog box.

16 Click OK.
The properties dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to display the counted operation count on a Numerical Display.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-13

Preventive Maintenance Function

13 Under Data Format, in Data Type, select the data type for the value to display.

4 Using the Data

4.2

Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the number of device addresses to monitor in Number of Items.

3 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

4 Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device Address.

5 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab and specify the destination device
address for the counted operation time.

6 Select the data type for the value of Measure Operation Time device address with Data Type.

18-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

7 Select the Report when Operation Time has reached or exceeded Threshold level check box.

18

If you select Value, specify the threshold as a constant.
If you select Device Address, specify the threshold as a value of device address.

9 Configure Threshold for level 1.
When you select Value as the threshold data type, specify the threshold as a constant. The range for the constantthat can be set varies based on the data type.
When you select Device Address as the threshold data type, specify the threshold as a value of device address. Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

10 Configure Report Device Address for level 1.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device for reporting when the threshold is reached or exceeded.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
You can only specify an internal device.

11 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
You are returned to the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box.

12 Click OK.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box closes.

13 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-15

Preventive Maintenance Function

8 Select the type of data for the threshold.

4 Using the Data

14 On the Channel tab, under Source Device Address Type, select Bit and specify Number of Blocks.

15 Select the channel number to register the level 1 Report Device Address to and click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

16 Specify the level 1 Report Device Address in Source and select Store under Data.
Set Source to the level 1 Report Device Address configured on the Operation Time tab in the Preventive
Maintenance settings Individual Settings dialog box.

17 Select Enable under Alarm function, select NO under NO/NC, and click OK.

18-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Using the Data

18 On the Alarm Log Settings dialog box, switch the alarm function for all the unused channel numbers to Disable.
Select all the unused channels with the

key + click or the

key + click and click Edit.

The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.

18
Preventive Maintenance Function

Under Channel Settings - Alarm function, select Disable and click OK.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

18-17

4 Using the Data

19 Click the Options tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.

20 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box.
21 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to notify with a beep when the counted operation time reaches the threshold.

18-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 19

Email Function

This chapter describes how to configure the E-mail function and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

What Can Be Done with the E-mail Function

1.2

System Composition
An example system configuration for using the E-mail function is shown below.
Configure the main unit Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway) and connect to a local network.
Configure the main unit with the outgoing mail server (SMTP).
Incoming Mail Server

Outgoing mail server(SMTP)

Receive

E-mailSmartphone,
Mobile device(3)

Receive(2)

Send

External Network

E-mailE-mailLocal Network

Remote Network(1)

Ethernet Communication (TCP/IP)

Main unit
External device
Computer(1) When the trigger condition for the E-mail function is satisfied, the main unit connected to the local network sends
the e-mail to the outgoing mail server (SMTP).
(2) The outgoing mail server (SMTP) sends the e-mail received from the main unit to the incoming mail server of thedestination address.
(3) The e-mail is received by a smartphone, mobile device and computer etc.
For the outgoing mail server (SMTP) and the local network settings, contact the administrator of the
network which the main unit is connected to.

1.3

Supported Protocols and Authentication methods• Protocols defined by RFC2821 and RFC2822• LOGIN for the SMTP Authentication• SMTPs (SSL communications)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-1

Email Function

The E-mail function enables sending e-mail from the main unit to smartphone, mobile device, computer, etc when aspecified trigger condition is satisfied. The host name of the outgoing mail server (SMTP) can also be specified.

19

1 Overview

1.4

Verified SMTP Servers
The e-mail function has been verified to work with the following SMTP servers. (As of October 2017)
Mail Server

1.5

Host NameGmail

smtp.gmail.com

Yahoo mail (USA)plus.smtp.mail.yahoo.com

Yahoo mail (JAPAN)

smtp.mail.yahoo.co.jp

E-mail Sending Operation
The e-mail will be sent when a specified trigger condition is satisfied. For details, refer to “Trigger Condition” on page
19-17.
The main unit cannot simultaneously send multiple e-mails. Accordingly, when there are multiple e-mail sending
events, such as multiple trigger conditions to send an e-mail are the same or multiple trigger conditions are satisfied
at the same time, the e-mails are sent in the order described below.
■ Multiple trigger conditions to send an e-mail are the same or the different trigger conditions are
satisfied at the same time
When multiple trigger conditions to send an e-mail are the same or when the different trigger conditions are satisfied
at the same time (the values of multiple trigger device addresses change to 1 at the same time), e-mails are sent in
the order of smaller number. Triggered e-mails will be in "Waiting" status while sending another e-mail is in progress.
For example, if the trigger conditions for e-mail number 1 and e-mail number 2 are the same, once the trigger
conditions are satisfied, e-mail number 1 starts to be sent, and e-mail number 2 is in "Waiting" status. After the e-mailnumber 1 has been sent, the e-mail number 2 starts to be sent.
Satisfied

Trigger Condition(No.1, 2)

Not satisfied

E-mailSending(No.1)

E-mailWaiting(No.2)

Sending■ When the trigger condition is satisfied during the other e-mail is being sent
When sending an e-mail is in progress and the trigger condition to send another e-mail is satisfied, triggered e-mailwill be in "Waiting" status. Such e-mail is sent after all the e-mails in sending or waiting status have been sent.
For example, if the trigger condition for the e-mail number 2 is satisfied during the e-mail number 1 is sending,number 2 is in "Waiting" status. After the e-mail number 1 has been sent, the e-mail number 2 starts to be sent.
Satisfied

Trigger Condition(No.1)

Not satisfied

E-mailSending(No.1)

E-mailWaiting(No.2)

Sending

Satisfied

Condition(No.2)

Not satisfied■ When the trigger condition is satisfied again during the e-mail is being sent
While sending an e-mail is in progress or an e-mail is in "Waiting" status, if the trigger condition to send such e-mailis satisfied, such trigger condition is disregarded.
For example, if the trigger condition for the e-mail number 1 is satisfied again during which it is being sent, the e-mailwill be not "Waiting" status so the same e-mail is not going to be sent twice.
Satisfied

Trigger Condition(No.1)

Not satisfied

E-mail(No.1)

19-2

Sending

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.6

Operating E-mail function and checking sending status● Operating E-mail function
Enables to cancel or pause the e-mail sending by the HMI Special Internal Relay.
■ LSM55: Cancelling the e-mail sending
When a value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, the main unit cancels sending of all the e-mails in "Waiting" status. If
sending an e-mail is in progress, the send process will be cancelled after such e-mail has been sent.

● Checking the e-mail sending state
You can check the e-mail sending state through the values of the HMI Special Data Register.
■ LSD221: Number of e-mail in "Waiting" status
The number of e-mail that are waiting to be sent is stored.
■ LSD222: Result of e-mail sending
The sending result of the e-mail last sent is stored.
StatusCause

0: Successfully Completed-

1: Parameter error• The value of the device address allocated to the following setting is 0
- IP address of the Outgoing mail server (SMTP)- Sender E-mail Address- Sender Name
- Account Name and Password (When the Required authentication (LOGIN) to send Email check box is selected)• The preferred DNS server and alternate DNS server settings remain the default settings.

2:Timeout error

There is no response from the outgoing mail server even after the timeout period (30seconds) due to the following causes.
• An Ethernet cable is disconnected.
• Host Name of the Outgoing mail server (SMTP) is incorrect.
• IP address of the Outgoing mail server (SMTP) is incorrect.
• Port number of the Outgoing mail server (SMTP) is incorrect.
• A connection cannot be made to the preferred DNS server and alternate DNS server.

3: Authentication error• The authenticating account name is incorrect.
• The authenticating account password is incorrect.

4: Other error

The connection is disconnected from the outgoing mail server (SMTP).

After the value of the device address specified in the Report when E-mail has been sent on the E-mailSettings dialog box changes to 1, the result of the e-mail sending is stored in LSD222.
■ LSD223: E-mail Number which has been sent
The e-mail number which has been sent is stored. Only the latest e-mail number is stored.
Even when an error occurs during sending, the main unit handles the send process is completed and the email number is stored in LSD223.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-3

19
Email Function■ LSM56: Pausing the e-mail sending
While a value of this bit is 1, the main unit pauses sending of all the e-mails in "Waiting" status. If sending an e-mailis in progress, the send process will be paused after such e-mail has been sent.

1 Overview

1.7

Restrictions of each E-mail■ Number of destination addresses
The total number of To, Cc and Bcc data is 100 maximum.
• When an E-mail Group is set, the number of e-mail addresses in the E-mail Group is counted.
• If the same e-mail address is used in multiple destination, the number of destination addresses will becounted for each destination.
■ Data size*1
Subject: 256 bytes
Body:

4,096 bytes■ Attachment
The maximum number of attachments is 23 total for Screenshot, Alarm Log files, Data Log files, and Operation Log
files.
However, the number of files that can be attached varies based on the file.
Screenshot:

1 max.

Alarm Log file:

1 max.

Data Log file:

20 max.

Operation Log file: 1 max.
• If a period of time or the maximum number of items are not set in the Attach Files dialog box, the entire
history data stored in the internal memory will be attached.
• The attachment size limit varies based on the mail server. For details, contact the administrator of the
mail server that is used.

*1 Data size before encoding by Base64

19-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure2

E-mail Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the outgoing mail server (SMTP) and the e-mail.

2.1

Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP) Settings

19
Email Function

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Configure the items on the E-mail tab.

■ General Setting
Outgoing mail server (SMTP):

Selects the Outgoing mail server (SMTP) setting method.
Host Name:

Specifies the Host Name of the outgoing mail server(SMTP).
The maximum number is 40 characters. Onlyalphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

IP Address:

Specifies the IP address of the outgoing mail server(SMTP).
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for anumeric value from 0 to 255.

Outgoing mail server (SMTP) port number:Specifies the port number for the outgoing mail server (SMTP) (0 to65535).

Sender E-mail Address:

Enter an e-mail address of the sender. The maximum number is 40
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual19-5

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure

Sender Name:Enter a name of the sender. The maximum number is 40 characters.
Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

Use secure connection (SSL/TLS):

Select this check box to use SSL/TLS communications with the outgoing
mail server.

■ Authentication Setting
When the outgoing mail server (SMTP) is protected by the account authentication, enter the account information. For
details, refer to Chapter 4 “Authentication Setting” on page 4-79.
■ Advanced SettingSpecifies the General Setting and the Authentication Setting by the values of the device addresses. The settings
for both the General Setting and the Authentication Setting can be used as initial values. For details, refer to
Chapter 4 “Advanced Setting” on page 4-79.

3 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the outgoing mail server (SMTP).

19-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure

2.2

Configuring the E-mail1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click E-mail.
The E-mail Settings dialog box is displayed.

19
Email Function

2 Select the number to use the E-mail function in (Settings).
The settings for the selected number are displayed in to the right of the list.

(Settings)(Body)

3 Selects the character code to use with the Subject and the (Body) under the E-mail content as the Subject andBody under the Character Code from the following.

ASCII, Japanese(Shift-JIS), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Western (ISO 8859-1), Unicode(UTF-8)
When Unicode(UTF-8) is selected, encodes the value of device address with the Character selected as the
Display Type from the source character code to the UTF-8, and displays it in the body of the e-mail. Selects thesource character code from the following.
ASCII, Japanese(Shift-JIS), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Western (ISO 8859-1), Unicode(UTF-8)
Japanese(Shift-JIS), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Western (ISO 8859-1), and Unicode(UTF-8)
are encoded by Base64.

4 Select the condition to send an e-mail in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Rising-edge
An e-mail is sent when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Falling-edge
An e-mail is sent when the value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual19-7

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure■ Satisfy the condition
An e-mail is sent when the condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

5 Click To under the E-mail content.
The E-mail Address Book dialog box is displayed.

6 Configures an e-mail address. Click(New E-mail Address).

The E-mail Address dialog box is displayed.
If you will not configure an e-mail address, proceed to step 11.

(E-mail Address List)

7 Enter an e-mail address in the E-mail Address.
The maximum number is 60 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
Select the Use Reference Device Address check box to specify the e-mail address with the value of the device
address, and then specifies the word device to use it. The e-mail addresses are sequentially configured starting fromthe specified device address. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

8 Enter a comment for the e-mail address in the Comment.
The maximum number is 80 characters.

9 Click OK to close the E-mail Address dialog box.
The created e-mail address is added to the (E-mail Address List) on the E-mail Address Book dialog box.

10 Repeat steps 6 through 9 to register the necessary e-mail addresses.
You can register multiple e-mail addresses as an E-mail Group which can be used as a contact. For details,
refer to “Creating an E-mail Group” on page 19-10.

19-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure

11 Select the e-mail address or the E-mail Group as the destination, and then click >> under the To.
Set Cc and Bcc in the same procedure with To as necessary.
To select multiple e-mail addresses or E-mail Groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the
specific items.

12 Click OK to close the E-mail Address Book dialog box.
You are returned to the E-mail Settings dialog box.

19

13 Enter Subject.

Email Function

14 Enter (Body).
• To attach the screenshots, the Alarm Log files, the Data Log files and the Operation Log files to an e-mail, configure
them in the Attach Files dialog box displayed by clicking Attach Files. For details, refer to “Attach Files Dialog Box”
on page 19-23.
• To insert the value of the device address in the body text of the e-mail, configure it in the Insert Value of Device
Address dialog box displayed by clicking Insert Value of Device Address. For details, refer to “Insert Value ofDevice Address Dialog Box” on page 19-25.

15 Repeat steps 2 through 14 to configure the necessary e-mails.
16 Click OK to close the E-mail Settings dialog box.
This concludes configuring the e-mail.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual19-9

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure

2.3

Creating an E-mail GroupYou can register multiple e-mail addresses together into one contact as an E-mail Group.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click E-mail Address Book.
The E-mail Address Book dialog box is displayed.

2 click the arrow to the right of(New E-mail Address), then click New E-mail Group.

The New E-mail Group dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter the name for the E-mail Group in the Group Name.
The maximum number is 60 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

4 Enter the comment for the E-mail Group in the Comment.
The maximum number is 80 characters.

5 Select the e-mail address as the member from the E-mail address list, and then click >>.
To select multiple e-mail addresses, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

19-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure

6 Click OK to close the E-mail Group dialog box.
The created E-mail Group is added to the (E-mail Address List) on the E-mail Address Book dialog box.

7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create the necessary E-mail Groups.
8 Click OK to close the E-mail Address Book dialog box.

19
Email Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-11

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure

2.4

How to use the E-mail Address Book in another project
To use the e-mail addresses and the comments registered to the E-mail Address Book in another project, save thesettings of the E-mail Address Book as a file, and then import it to a project. Note, the E-mail Groups and the device
addresses to specify the e-mail address are not supported.

● Save the E-mail Address Book settings as a file

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click E-mail Address Book.
The E-mail Address Book dialog box is displayed.

2 Click(Export).

The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the save location, enter a File name, and then click Save.

19-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure● Importing the E-mail Address Book settings

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click E-mail Address Book.
The E-mail Address Book dialog box is displayed.

2 Click

19(Import).

Email Function

The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Select a file for the E-mail Address Book, and then click Open.
The e-mail addresses are added to the E-mail Address Book dialog box.
The e-mail address is overwritten when there is the same one.

• When the e-mail address exceeds 60 characters, it is not imported.
• When the comment exceeds 80 characters, it is not imported and only the e-mail address is imported.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-13

2 E-mail Function Configuration Procedure

2.5

Creating an E-mail Address Book file with a Text Editor
You can edit the E-mail Address Book files using Notepad, Microsoft Excel, commercially available text editors, or
spreadsheet software.

1 Defines the E-mail Address settings in the following formats.
NotepadMicrosoft Excel
E-mail Address

Comment

Tab

E-mail Address

Comment

Line Feed• The maximum number for the e-mail address is 60 characters.
• The maximum number for the comment is 80 characters.

2 Saves the file with a new name.
The save options are as follows.
Notepad:Microsoft Excel:

Save as type:

Text Documents (*.txt)

Encoding:

UnicodeSave as type:

Unicode Text (*.txt)

The format of the text file (.txt) that can be imported by the E-mail Address Book is UTF-16 (Little Endianwith BOM).
Saving the file in the above-mentioned setting by using a Notepad or Microsoft Excel saves the file in theformat of UTF-16 (Little Endian with BOM).

19-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box

3

E-mail Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the E-mail Settings dialog box.

3.1

E-mail Settings Dialog Box(Settings)(Body)■(Copy)
Select a number and click this button to copy the contents of that row to the clipboard.

■(Paste)Select a number and click this button to paste the contents of the clipboard to that row.

■

(Delete)Select a number and click this button to delete the contents of that row.

■ (Settings)
Displays a list of the E-mail settings.
No.:

Displays the number of the E-mail.

E-mail Function:

Displays whether or not the e-mail function is used.

Subject:

Displays the subject of the e-mail.

Trigger Type:

Displays the trigger type for sending an e-mail.

Trigger Condition: Displays the trigger condition of trigger type for sending an e-mail. The displayed content varies
based on Trigger Type.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge:

Displays the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serveas condition.

Satisfy the condition:

Displays the conditional expression.

■ Number
Displays the number of the e-mail selected from (Settings).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-15

19
Email Function

The e-mail sent from the main unit and its trigger conditions are collectively managed in the E-mail Setting dialog box.

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box■ E-mail Function
Selects whether or not to use the e-mail function.
Enable:Sends an e-mail when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Disable:E-mail is not sent.

Report when E-mail has been sent: Select this check box to report when the e-mail has been sent.
(Report Device Address): Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word
device for reporting when the e-mail has been sent.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: The Number of the e-mail is 1, Rising-edge is selected as Trigger Type in Trigger Condition andLM100 is set to Device Address, LM101 is set to (Report Device Address).
When the value of the device address LM100 set as the trigger condition changes to 1, the e-mail number 1
is in "Waiting" status. The value of the Report Device Address LM101 changes to 0 when the send process
starts, and the value of the Report Device Address LM101 changes to 1 when the send process completes.
E-mails cannot be sent

E-mails can be sent

Trigger Condition is satisfied

Value of Device Address LM100
when Trigger Condition is Rising-edge
Value of Report Device Address
LM101

E-mail(No.1)

1
0

Waiting for sending

1
Waiting for sending error check
Waiting for sending/sending completion

0
Sending
start

Sending

Sendingcompletion

Even when an error occurs during sending, the system regards the sending is completed, and the value of
the Report Device Address changes to 1.
■ Character Code
Subject and Body: Selects the character code to use with the Subject and the (Body) under the E-mail content
from the following.
ASCII, Japanese(Shift-JIS), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Western (ISO 8859-1),
Unicode(UTF-8)
Japanese(Shift-JIS), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Western (ISO 8859-1), and Unicode(UTF-8)
are encoded by Base64.
Value of Device Address with the "Character" selected in the "Display Type":
When Unicode(UTF-8) is selected as the Subject and Body, encodes the value of device
address with the Character selected as the Display Type from the source character code to the
UTF-8, and displays it in the body of the e-mail. Selects the source character code from thefollowing.
ASCII, Japanese(Shift-JIS), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Western (ISO 8859-1),
Unicode(UTF-8)

19-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box■ Trigger Condition
Set the trigger conditions for sending e-mail.
Trigger Type:A condition for sending e-mail is selected from the following.
Rising-edge: An e-mail is sent when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Satisfy the condition:
An e-mail is sent when the condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionData Type:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.

For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition. You can only
specify the internal device.

Condition:

Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display
the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display the
Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19
Email Function

Falling-edge: An e-mail is sent when the value of device address changes from 1 to 0.

19-17

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box■ E-mail content
Specify the e-mail sending destination, and enter the title and the message.
To:

Specify the original sending destination of the e-mail. Click this button todisplay the E-mail Address Book dialog box. For details, refer to “E-mail Address
Book Dialog Box” on page 19-19.
(E-mail address for To): Displays the e-mail addresses and the E-mail Groups
assigned to the To in the E-mail Address Book dialog box.
When multiple e-mail addresses and E-mail Groups areallocated, they are separated by semicolons (;).

Cc:

Specify the sending destination to which the duplication needs to be sent
other than the original sending destination specified by To. Click this button

to display the E-mail Address Book dialog box. For details, refer to “E-mail Address
Book Dialog Box” on page 19-19.
(E-mail address for Cc):

Bcc:

Displays the e-mail addresses and the E-mail Groups
assigned to the Cc in the E-mail Address Book dialog box.
When multiple e-mail addresses and E-mail Groups areallocated, they are separated by semicolons (;).

Specify the sending destination which is not to be known by the destinations
specified as To and Cc. Click this button to display the E-mail Address Book dialog

box. For details, refer to “E-mail Address Book Dialog Box” on page 19-19.

(E-mail address for Bcc): Displays the e-mail addresses and the E-mail Groups
assigned to the Bcc in the E-mail Address Book dialog
box. When multiple e-mail addresses and E-mail Groups
are allocated, they are separated by semicolons (;).
Subject:

Enter a subject of an e-mail. The maximum size is 256 bytes.

(Body):

Enter a body text of an e-mail. The maximum size is 4,096 bytes.

Attach Files:

Attach files to an e-mail. Click this button to display the Attach Files dialog box. For
details, refer to “Attach Files Dialog Box” on page 19-23.

Insert Value of Device Address: Insert a device address in the body text of an e-mail. Click this button to display theInsert Value of Device Address dialog box. For details, refer to “Insert Value ofDevice Address Dialog Box” on page 19-25.

19-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box

3.2

E-mail Address Book Dialog Box
The e-mail addresses used by the E-mail function are collectively managed in the E-mail Address Book dialog box.

19
Email Function(People List)■(Destination Address)(New E-mail Address)
Adds an e-mail address or an E-mail Group.
Click this button to display the E-mail Address dialog box. For details, refer to “E-mail Address Dialog Box” on page
19-21.
To create an E-mail Group, click the arrow to the right of this button and then click New E-mail Group.

■(Edit)
Changes the selected e-mail address or E-mail Group.
Select an e-mail address in People, and then click this button to display the E-mail Address dialog box. For details,
refer to “E-mail Address Dialog Box” on page 19-21.
Select an E-mail Group in People, and then click this button to display the E-mail Group dialog box. For details, refer
to “E-mail Group Dialog Box” on page 19-22.

■(Delete)Deletes the selected e-mail address and E-mail Group in People.

■(Import)Imports the file in the E-mail Address Book saved by the Unicode text format (*.txt). Click this button to display theOpen dialog box. For details, refer to “Importing the E-mail Address Book settings” on page 19-13.

■(Export)Export and saves the E-mail Address Book settings as an Unicode Text (*.txt) file.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Save the E-mail Address Book settings as afile” on page 19-12.
The saved E-mail Address Book file can be imported with

(Import).

■ FindThe entered text is searched for in the People in the (People List).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual19-19

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box■ (People List)
The registered e-mail addresses are displayed in a list.
People:Displays the registered e-mail addresses and E-mail Groups.
Double clicking the cell of the e-mail address displays the E-mail Address dialog box. For details, refer
to “E-mail Address Dialog Box” on page 19-21.
Double clicking the cell of the E-mail Group displays the E-mail Group dialog box. For details, refer to“E-mail Group Dialog Box” on page 19-22.
To select multiple e-mail addresses and E-mail Groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the
specific items.

Comment:

Displays the comment for the e-mail address or E-mail Group.
Double clicking the cell of the e-mail address displays the E-mail Address dialog box. For details, refer
to “E-mail Address Dialog Box” on page 19-21.
Double clicking the cell of the E-mail Group displays the E-mail Group dialog box. For details, refer to“E-mail Group Dialog Box” on page 19-22.

■ (Destination Address)*1
Configures a destination address for an e-mail.
>>:Assigns e-mail address and the E-mail Group displayed in the (People List) to the To, the Cc or the Bcc.

<<:

Deletes the e-mail addresses and the E-mail Groups assigned to the To, the Cc or the Bcc.

To:

Displays the e-mail addresses and the E-mail Groups assigned to the To. Specify the original sending

Cc:

Displays e-mail addresses and the E-mail Groups assigned to the Cc. Specify the sending destination to

Bcc:

destination of the e-mail.

which the duplication needs to be sent other than the original sending destination specified by To.
Displays e-mail addresses and the E-mail Groups assigned to the Bcc. Specify the sending destination
which is not to be known by the destinations specified as To and Cc. The sending destination
specified as Bcc is not displayed to the destinations set as To and Cc.

*1 Destination Address is only displayed when this dialog box is opened from E-mail Setting dialog box

19-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box● E-mail Address Dialog Box
Registers an e-mail address or edits an existing e-mail address.

19
Use Reference Device Address:
Top Device Address:

Select this check box to specify the e-mail address with the value of the device
address.
Specifies a word device to use an e-mail address. The e-mail address is set byreading the values sequentially from the starting device address specified with the
Top Device Address and handling those values as character data up to thecharacter before NULL (0x00). The maximum number of device addresses is 30(maximum of 60 characters). You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Comment
Enter a comment for the e-mail address. The maximum number is 80 characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-21

Email Function■ E-mail AddressEnter a destination e-mail address. The maximum number is 60 characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box● E-mail Group Dialog Box
Creates an E-mail Group or edits an existing E-mail Group.

■ Group NameEnter a name of the E-mail Group. The maximum number is 60 characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for the E-mail Group. The maximum number is 80 characters.
■ E-mail address list
Find:

The text entered is searched for People in the E-mail address list.

People:

The e-mail addresses registered in the E-mail Address Book dialog box are displayed in this list.
To select multiple e-mail addresses, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

Comment:

Displays the comment for the e-mail address.

■ >>Assigns the e-mail address displayed in the E-mail address list to the Members.
■ <<Deletes the e-mail addresses assigned to the Members.
■ Members
Find:

The text entered is searched for People in the Members.

People:

The e-mail addresses assigned to a member of E-mail Group are displayed in this list.
To select multiple e-mail addresses, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

Comment:

19-22

Displays the comment for the e-mail address.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box

3.3

Attach Files Dialog Box
Files attached to an e-mail is configured in the Attach Files dialog box.

19
Email Function■ Screenshot
Select this check box to attach a screenshot of the current screen to an e-mail.
The file format is JPEG and the file name becomes "Image.JPG".
The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screenshot may differ.
■ Alarm Log Files
Select this check box to attach a specified alarm log data to an e-mail.
The file format is CSV and the file name becomes "ALMLOG.CSV".
Specifies the output format and the range of the alarm log data.
Output Format:

Specifies the items of the alarm log data attached to an e-mail.
Output Channel Number, Message, Occurrence Time, Recovery Time and Confirmaton Time:
The output data is the same format as the Alarm Log function batch outputs to theexternal memory device. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “Batch” on page 12-38.
Output Channel Number, Message, State and Time:
The output data is the same format as the Alarm Log function outputs to the external
memory device in real time. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “Real Time” on page 12-39.

Range of Blocks:

Specifies the range of block numbers that will output in the collected alarm log data.
All:

Outputs the data for all blocks.

Specify block number: Outputs only the data for the specified blocks.
Individual block numbers can be specified by separating the numbers with “,”, continuous regions can be specified with “-”.
Example: When the number of blocks is 6, enter the following.
To specify blocks 1 to 3:

1-3

To specify blocks 1, 3, 6:

1, 3, 6

To specify blocks 1, 4 to 6:

1, 4-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-23

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box

Specify a period of time: Select this check box to specify the period of alarm log output data. Outputs the specified
period of the alarm log data after the Trigger Condition is satisfied.
Specify the maximum number of items:
Select this check box to specify the maximum amount of alarm log output data. Outputs the
specified number of the alarm log data after the Trigger Condition is satisfied.
When the Specify a period of time check box and the Specify the maximum number of items checkbox are selected, the output range is until either is satisfied.
■ Data Log Files
Select this check box to attach a specified data log data to an e-mail.
The file format is CSV and the file name becomes "DATALOG**.CSV (**: Channel Number)".
Specifies the range of the data log data.
Channel Number:Specifies the range of channel numbers that will output in the collected datalog data.
Individual channel numbers can be specified by separating the numberswith “,”, continuous regions can be specified with “-”.
Example: When the channel number is 1 to 6, enter the following.
To specify channel numbers 1 to 3:

1-3

To specify channel numbers 1, 3, 6:

1, 3, 6

To specify channel numbers 1, 4 to 6: 1, 4-6
Specify a period of time:

Select this check box to specify the period of data log output data. Outputs
the specified period of the data log data after the Trigger Condition issatisfied.

Specify the maximum number of items: Select this check box to specify the maximum amount of data log output
data. Outputs the specified number of the data log data after the Trigger
Condition is satisfied.
When the Specify a period of time check box and the Specify the maximum number of items checkbox are selected, the output range is until either is satisfied.
■ Operation Log Files
Select this check box to attach a specified operation log data to an e-mail.
The file format is CSV and the file name becomes "OPLOG.CSV".
Specifies the range of the operation log data.
Specify a period of time:

Select this check box to specify the period of operation log output data.
Outputs the specified period of the operation log data after the Trigger
Condition is satisfied.

Specify the maximum number of items: Select this check box to specify the maximum amount of operation log
output data. Outputs the specified number of the operation log data after
the Trigger Condition is satisfied.
When the Specify a period of time check box and the Specify the maximum number of items checkbox are selected, the output range is until either is satisfied.

19-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box

3.4

Insert Value of Device Address Dialog Box
To enter a value of device address in the body text of the e-mail, configures the settings om the Insert Value of Device
Address dialog box.

19
Email Function■ Reference Device Address
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type of the value from the following.
Decimal, Hexadecimal, Character■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the type of data for the value.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
This setting can only be configured when Decimal or Hexadecimal is selected for
Display Type.

Digits:Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Display Floating Point:

Data Type

DigitsUBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to 5UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to 10

BCD4(B)

1 to 4

BCD8(EB)

1 to 8Float32(F)

1 to 10UBIN16(W)

1 to 4

UBIN32(D)1 to 8

Select this check box to display the decimal point.
This setting can only be configured when Decimal is selected for Display Type.

When the Display Floating Point check box is selected and UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D),BIN32(L), BCD4(B), or BCD8(EB) is selected for Data Type, the source device is an integer, but thevalue is displayed with the decimal point added at the configured floating digits.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

19-25

3 E-mail Settings Dialog Box

Floating Digits:

Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of thenumber of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on the display type anddata type. The range of digits that can be set is as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Data TypeUBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to Digits

UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to Digits

BCD4(B)

1 to Digits

BCD8(EB)

1 to Digits

Float32(F)

1 to Digits or 8

UBIN16(W)--UBIN32(D)--■ Words
Specify the number of source word devices (1 to 64).
This setting can only be configured when Character is selected for Display Type.

19-26

Floating Digits

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 20

SNS Function

This chapter describes how to configure the social media function and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

What Can Be Done with the Social Media Function

Twitter API v1.1 is used to send social media messages, and it may not work due to changes in thespecifications of Twitter.
For Twitter API restrictions and how to use Twitter, please check the Twitter website. (December 2021)

1.2

System Composition
An example system configuration for using the social media function is shown below.
Configure the main unit Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway) and connect to a local network.

Twitter server on the internet(3)
Smartphone,
Mobile device(2)

External Network(2)

Remote Network

Local Network
Ethernet Communication (TCP/IP)

Main unit
External device
Computer(1)(1) Configure the main unit with the social media information (Twitter account, social media message, sending
conditions, etc.).
(2) When the trigger condition for the social media function is satisfied, the main unit connected to the local network
sends the social media message to the Twitter server.
(3) Twitter tweets are received by a smartphone and computer etc. (If you install the Twitter client in advance, you
can receive push notifications.)
For the local network settings, contact the administrator of the network which the main unit is connected to.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

20-1

20
SNS Function

The social media function enables sending social media message such as text, screenshots of the main unit, etc.
(tweets), from the main unit to the specified account (Twitter account) when a specified trigger condition is satisfied.

1 Overview

1.3

Social media message Sending Operation
Social media messages will be sent when a specified trigger condition is satisfied. For details, refer to “Trigger
Condition” on page 20-10.
The main unit cannot simultaneously send multiple social media messages. Accordingly, when there are multiplesocial media message sending events, such as multiple trigger conditions to send an social media message are thesame or multiple trigger conditions are satisfied at the same time, the social media messages are sent in the order
described below.
■ Multiple trigger conditions to send a social media message are the same or the different trigger
conditions are satisfied at the same time
When multiple trigger conditions to send a social media message are the same or when the different trigger
conditions are satisfied at the same time (the values of multiple trigger device addresses change to 1 at the sametime), social media messages are sent in the order of smaller number. Triggered social media messages will be in"Waiting" status while sending another social media message is in progress.
For example, if the trigger conditions for social media message number 1 and social media message number 2 are thesame, once the trigger conditions are satisfied, social media message number 1 starts to be sent, and social media
message number 2 is in "Waiting" status. After the social media message number 1 has been sent, the social media
message number 2 starts to be sent.
Trigger Condition(No.1, 2)Satisfied
Not satisfied

Social media message(No.1)

Social media message(No.2)

Sending

Waiting

Sending■ When the trigger condition is satisfied during the other social media message is being sent
When sending a social media message is in progress and the trigger condition to send another social media message
is satisfied, triggered social media message will be in "Waiting" status. Such social media message is sent after all thesocial media messages in sending or waiting status have been sent.
For example, if the trigger condition for the social media message number 2 is satisfied during the social media
message number 1 is sending, number 2 is in "Waiting" status. After the social media message number 1 has beensent, the social media message number 2 starts to be sent.
Trigger Condition(No.1)

Satisfied
Not satisfied

Social media message(No.1)

Social media message(No.2)

Condition(No.2)

Sending

Waiting

Sending

Satisfied
Not satisfied■ When the trigger condition is satisfied again during the social media message is being sent
While sending a social media message is in progress or a social media message is in "Waiting" status, if the trigger
condition to send such social media message is satisfied, such trigger condition is disregarded.
For example, if the trigger condition for the social media message number 1 is satisfied again during which it is being
sent, the social media message will be not "Waiting" status so the same social media message is not going to be sent
twice.
Trigger Condition(No.1)

Satisfied
Not satisfied

Social media message(No.1)

20-2

Sending

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.4

Operating Social media function and checking sending status● Operating Social media function
Enables to cancel or pause the social media message sending by the HMI Special Internal Relay.
■ LSM75: Cancelling the social media message sending
When a value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, the main unit cancels sending of all the social media messages in"Waiting" status. If sending a social media message is in progress, the send process will be cancelled after such social
media message has been sent. Even if the value of LSM76 is 1, this function can be executed.

● Checking the social media message sending state
You can check the social media message sending state through the values of the HMI Special Data Register.
■ LSD368: Number of social media message in "Waiting" status
The number of social media message that are waiting to be sent is stored.
■ LSD369: Result of social media message sending
The sending result of the social media message last sent is stored.
StatusCause

0: Successfully Completed-

1: Parameter error

The character code set in the message cannot be used.

2:Timeout error• An Ethernet cable is disconnected.
• Network is not configured correctly (IP address, DNS settings).

3: Authentication error• The time on the main unit is not set correctly.
• Twitter account does not exist.

4: User error• The same message has been sent.
• The maximum number of transmissions has been reached.
• Twitter account is suspended and cannot be used.

5: Other error

Cannot connect to the Twitter server due to a failure etc.

After the value of the device address specified in the Report when sending has been done on theSocial Media Settings dialog box changes to 1, the result of the social media message sending is storedin LSD369.
■ LSD370: Social media message Number which has been sent
The social media message number which has been sent is stored. Only the latest social media message number isstored.
Even when an error occurs during sending, the main unit handles the send process is completed and thesocial media message number is stored in LSD370.

1.5

Restrictions of each Tweet■ Message
The maximum number is 140 characters.
Please note that due to Twitter restrictions, you cannot tweet virtually the same content.
■ Screenshot
The maximum number of screenshots that can be attached is one, and the file format is JPEG.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

20-3

20
SNS Function■ LSM76: Pausing the social media message sending
While a value of this bit is 1, the main unit pauses sending of all the social media messages in "Waiting" status. If
sending a social media message is in progress, the send process will be paused after such social media message has
been sent.

2 Social Media Function Configuration Procedure

2

Social Media Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Twitter account and the social media message.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Social Media.
The Social Media Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the number to use the Social media function in (Settings).
The settings for the selected number are displayed in to the right of the list.

(Settings)(Message)

3 Select the condition to send a social media message in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Rising-edge
A social media message is sent when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Falling-edge
A social media message is sent when the value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device as the condition.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Satisfy the condition
A social media message is sent when the condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Clickto display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

20-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Social Media Function Configuration Procedure

4 Click Account under the Social Media content.
The Social Media Account Manager is displayed.

5 Configures a Twitter account. Click(New Twitter Account).

The Twitter Account dialog box is displayed.

(Account list)

20
SNS Function

6 Click Log in to the Account.
A web browser starts and the login screen for your Twitter account is displayed.

In order to display the login screen for your Twitter account, your computer must be connected to theInternet.

7 Log in to the Twitter account to which you want to send social media messages, and then click Authorize app.
The PIN code (7-digit number) used for authentication is displayed.

8 Copy the PIN code displayed on the screen, and then return to the Twitter Account dialog box.
9 Enter the obtained PIN code, and click Authenticate.
Once the PIN code is authenticated, your Twitter account and the social media function will be linked.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

20-5

2 Social Media Function Configuration Procedure

10 Confirm the account name and enter the comment for the Twitter account in the Comment.
The maximum number is 80 characters.

11 Click OK.
You are returned to the Social Media Account Manager.

12 Select the Twitter account as the destination, and then click OK.
You are returned to the Social Media Settings dialog box.

20-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Social Media Function Configuration Procedure

13 Enter (Message).
• Select this check box to attach a screenshot of the current screen to a social media message.
• To insert the value of the device address in the social media message, configure it in the Insert Value of Device
Address dialog box displayed by clicking Insert Value of Device Address. For details, refer to “Insert Value of Device
Address Dialog Box” on page 20-13.

20
SNS Function(Message)

14 Repeat steps 2 through 13 to configure the necessary social media messages.
15 Click OK to close the Social Media Settings dialog box.
This concludes configuring the social media.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

20-7

3 Social Media Settings Dialog Box

3

Social Media Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Social Media Settings dialog box.

3.1

Social Media Settings Dialog Box
The social media message sent from the main unit and its trigger conditions are collectively managed in the Social
Media Settings dialog box.

(Settings)(Message)■(Copy)
Select a number and click this button to copy the contents of that row to the clipboard.

■(Paste)Select a number and click this button to paste the contents of the clipboard to that row.

■

(Delete)Select a number and click this button to delete the contents of that row.

■ (Settings)
Displays a list of the Social Media Function.
No.:

Displays the number of the social media message.

Social Media Function:

Displays whether or not the social media function is used.

Message:

Displays the social media message.

Trigger Type:

Displays the trigger type for sending a social media message.

Trigger Condition:

Displays the trigger condition of trigger type for sending a social media message. The
displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge:

Displays the bit device or the bit number of the word device toserve as condition.

Satisfy the condition:

Displays the conditional expression.

■ Number
Displays the number of the social media message selected from (Settings).

20-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Social Media Settings Dialog Box■ Social Media Function
Selects whether or not to use the social media function.
Enable:Sends a social media message when the trigger condition is satisfied.

Disable:Social media message is not sent.

Report when sending has been done: Select this check box to report when the social media message has been sent.
(Report Device Address): Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word
device for reporting when the social media message
has been sent.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

20

Example: The Number of the social media message is 1, Rising-edge is selected as Trigger Type in Trigger
Condition and LM100 is set to Device Address, LM101 is set to (Report Device Address).
When the value of the device address LM100 set as the trigger condition changes to 1, the social media
message number 1 is in "Waiting" status. The value of the Report Device Address LM101 changes to 0 when
the send process starts, and the value of the Report Device Address LM101 changes to 1 when the send
process completes.

SNS Function

Social media message cannot be sent

Social media message can be sent

Trigger Condition is satisfied

Value of Device Address LM100
when Trigger Condition is Rising-edge
Value of Report Device Address
LM101

1
0

Waiting for sending error check
Waiting for sending/sending completion

0Social media message(No.1)

Waiting for sending

1

Sending
start

Sending

Sendingcompletion

Even when an error occurs during sending, the system regards the sending is completed, and the value of
the Report Device Address changes to 1.
■ Character Code
Message:

The character code used in (Message) of Social Media content is fixed to Unicode (UTF-8).

Value of Device Address with the "Character" selected in the "Display Type":
The main unit encodes the value of device address with the Character selected as the Display
Type from the source character code to the UTF-8, and displays it in the body of the social media
message. Selects the source character code from the following.
ASCII, Japanese(Shift-JIS), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Western (ISO 8859-1),
Unicode(UTF-8)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

20-9

3 Social Media Settings Dialog Box■ Trigger Condition
Set the trigger conditions for sending social media message.
Trigger Type:A condition for sending social media message is selected from the following.
Rising-edge: A social media message is sent when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

Falling-edge: A social media message is sent when the value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Satisfy the condition: A social media message is sent when the condition changes from notsatisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution

Data Type:

Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Device Address: Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition. You can only
specify the internal device.

Condition:

Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display
the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display the
Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

■ Social Media content
Specify the Twitter account sending destination, and enter the social media message.
Account:

Specify the Twitter account sending destination of the social media message. Clickthis button to display the Social Media Account Manager. For details, refer to “Social
Media Account Manager” on page 20-11.
(Twitter account):

Displays the Twitter account assigned to the Account in
the Social Media Account Manager.

(Message):Enter a social media message. The maximum number is 140 characters.

Attach Screenshot:

Select this check box to attach a screenshot of the current screen to a social media
message. The file format is JPEG.

The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screenshot may differ.

Insert Value of Device Address: Insert a device address in the body text of a social media message. Click this button
to display the Insert Value of Device Address dialog box. For details, refer to “Insert
Value of Device Address Dialog Box” on page 20-13.

20-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Social Media Settings Dialog Box

3.2

Social Media Account Manager
The Twitter account used by the social media function are collectively managed in the Social Media Account Manager.

(Account list)

20
SNS Function■(New Twitter Account)
Adds a Twitter account. The maximum number of Twitter accounts that can be registered is 16.
Click this button to display the Twitter Account dialog box. For details, refer to “Twitter Account Dialog Box (New)” on
page 20-12.

■(Edit)
Changes the comment of the selected Twitter account.
Select a Twitter account in Account, and then click this button to display the Twitter Account dialog box. For
details, refer to “Twitter Account Dialog Box (Edit)” on page 20-12.

■(Delete)Deletes the selected Twitter account in Account.

■ (Account List)
The registered Twitter accounts are displayed in a list.
Account:

Displays the registered Twitter accounts.
Double clicking the cell displays the Account dialog box. For details, refer to “Twitter Account Dialog
Box (New)” on page 20-12.

Comment:

Displays the comment for the Twitter account.
Double clicking the cell displays the Account dialog box. For details, refer to “Twitter Account Dialog
Box (Edit)” on page 20-12.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

20-11

3 Social Media Settings Dialog Box● Twitter Account Dialog Box (New)To register a Twitter account, click(New) in Social Media Account Manager. In the displayed Twitter Accountdialog box, authenticate your Twitter account and link it with the social media function.

■ Log in to the AccountClick this button to start a web browser and display the login screen for your Twitter account.
When you log in to the Twitter account to which you want to send social media messages, the PIN code (7-digit
number) used for authentication is displayed.
■ (Please enter your PIN code)
Enter the PIN code that you obtained by logging in to your Twitter account.
■ Authenticate
Authenticate your Twitter account and PIN code. Once authenticated, your Twitter account and the social media
function will be linked and you can send social media messages.

● Twitter Account Dialog Box (Edit)
To change the comments of a registered Twitter account, click
click a cell of the account.

(Edit) in Social Media Account Manager or double-■ Account Name
Displays the comment for the linked Twitter account name.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for the Twitter account. The maximum number is 80 characters.

20-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Social Media Settings Dialog Box

3.3

Insert Value of Device Address Dialog Box
To enter a value of device address in the body text of the social media message, configures the settings om the Insert
Value of Device Address dialog box.

20
SNS Function■ Reference Device Address
Specify the source word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type of the value from the following.
Decimal, Hexadecimal, Character■ Data Format
Data Type:

Selects the type of data for the value.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
This setting can only be configured when Decimal or Hexadecimal is selected for
Display Type.

Digits:Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on thedisplay type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Display Floating Point:

Data Type

DigitsUBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to 5UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to 10

BCD4(B)

1 to 4

BCD8(EB)

1 to 8Float32(F)

1 to 10UBIN16(W)

1 to 4

UBIN32(D)1 to 8

Select this check box to display the decimal point.
This setting can only be configured when Decimal is selected for Display Type.

When the Display Floating Point check box is selected and UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D),BIN32(L), BCD4(B), or BCD8(EB) is selected for Data Type, the source device is an integer, but thevalue is displayed with the decimal point added at the configured floating digits.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

20-13

3 Social Media Settings Dialog Box

Floating Digits:

Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of thenumber of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is selected.
The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on the display type anddata type. The range of digits that can be set is as follows.
Display Type

Decimal display

Hexadecimal display

Data TypeUBIN16(W), BIN16(I)

1 to Digits

UBIN32(D), BIN32(L)

1 to Digits

BCD4(B)

1 to Digits

BCD8(EB)

1 to Digits

Float32(F)

1 to Digits or 8

UBIN16(W)--UBIN32(D)--■ Words
Specify the number of source word devices (1 to 64).
This setting can only be configured when Character is selected for Display Type.

20-14

Floating Digits

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 21

FTP Function

This chapter describes how to configure the FTP function and its operation on the main unit.

1

FTP Server Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

What Can Be Done with the FTP Server Function
The FTP server function enables communication from the main unit (FTP server) to a computer (FTP client). From the
FTP client, the followings are enabled.

• An “Administrator” or “Operator” user account is required to login the main unit.
• Connection from anonymous user is not accepted.
• The main unit can be accessed simultaneously from one FTP client only.
• For the available file paths and file names, follow the specification of the external memory device. For
details, refer to Chapter 33 “1.3 Specifications of External Memory Devices” on page 33-2.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-1

21
FTP Function• Reading files from the external memory device inserted in the main unit
• Writing files to the external memory device inserted in the main unit

1 FTP Server Function

1.2

System Composition
An example system configuration for using the FTP server function is shown below.
Configure the main unit Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway) and connect to a local network.
FTP Client(Computer)
FTP Client(Computer)
Remote Network(2)

External Network
File

File

(1)
Local Network

Ethernet Communication (TCP/IP)
Main unit

External Memory Device*1

External device

SD memory card

USB flash drive
FTP Server(1) Access the main unit from a FTP client connected to the local network to use the FTP server function, and read or
write the file contained in the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
(2) When the local network is connected to an external network, configure the FTP client connected to the remote
network with the local network’s gateway, router, and other settings. Access the main unit from the remote FTP
client to read or write the files contained in the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
For gateway, router, and other settings, contact the administrator of the network which the main unit isconnected to.

*1 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

21-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 FTP Server Function

1.3

Hierarchy of the FTP Server
The hierarchy of the FTP server is as follows:
Example:/(The root folder of hte FTP server)

A*1 (The root folder of the External Memory Device*2)
HGDATA01
RECIPE
B (The root folder of the USB flash drive*3)
When no external memory device is inserted in the main unit or when no folder is specified to Target, theroot folder of the FTP server is displayed.

FTP Function

1.4

Supported Commands and Transfer modes• Commands defined by RFC959• Active mode and Passive mode
SFTP and FTPS are not supported.

Can be deleted with the DELE command when the folder is empty. *4

1.5

Verified FTP Client
With the FTP server function, the operation has been checked by using the following FTP client.*5• FFFTP• FileZilla• Core FTP Lite
• FT2J/1J (FTP client function)• MICRO/I (FTP client function)• IDEC PLC (FTP client function)
To use FileZilla, select the Limit number of simultaneous connections check box on Transfer
Settings tab in Site Manager and set Maximum number of connections to "1" in advance.
• For the settings and how to use the FTP client software, please check the help and manual of eachsoftware.
• Depending on the FTP client software, including subfolders may not be able to write in batch. In thiscase, please write data each one level.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F*3 USB flash drive inserted in USB2 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J*4 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G only
*5 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J as of May 2024, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P type as of January 2019

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21

21-3

1 FTP Server Function

1.6

FTP Server Function Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Configure the items on the FTP Server tab.

(Data Type)■ Enable FTP Server function
When the Enable FTP Server function check box is not selected, you cannot access the folder of the external
memory device inserted in the main unit even when the connection from the FTP client to the IP address of the main
unit has been established.
■ Port Number
Specifies the port number to use for the FTP server function. (Default: 21)■ Connection Timeout
Set the timeout period. After logging in to the main unit, the main unit will keep monitoring for its traffic. If there is no
traffic at all for a specified period of time, the main unit will disconnect the FTP client.
• The timeout period to login the main unit is 1 minute.
• If Device Address is selected for (Data Type), note the following points:- When the value of device address is 0, the Connection Timeout is 1 minute, and when the value of
device address is 61 or more, the Connection Timeout is regarded as 60 minutes.
- Once a network connection is established between the FTP client and the main unit, the timeout period
cannot be changed. The timeout period needs to be set in Device Address before connecting the FTP
client to the main unit.
■ Specify Target
Specify the folder and the external memory device inserted in the main unit to be accessed from the FTP client. When
the Target is specified, you cannot access the level higher than the specified folder. For details about the hierarchy,
refer to “1.3 Hierarchy of the FTP Server” on page 21-3.
When this check box is cleared, the target will be the root folder of the FTP server.
If the external memory device is not inserted in the main unit or the folder specified as the target does notexist, the target will be the root folder of the FTP server.

3 Click the OK button.
When you access a file during its reading or writing operation, the reading or writing operation for the fileaccessed is performed after the first processing is completed.

21-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function

2

FTP Client Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

What Can Be Done with the FTP Client Function
The FTP client function enables copy or move files between FTP servers with external memory device inserted in themain unit (FTP client). The host name of the FTP server can also be specified.
When the main unit operates as the FTP client, the followings are enabled.
• Copying or moving files from the external memory device inserted in the main unit to the FTP server• Copying files from the FTP server to the external memory device inserted in the main unit

21

System Composition
An example system configuration for using the FTP client function is shown below.
Main unit
FTP Server

External device

External Memory Device*1
SD memory card

USB flash drive

FTP Server

Remote Network

FTP Server

External Network
File

File

File

Ethernet Communication (TCP/IP)

Local Network
Main unit
External device

External Memory Device*1
SD memory card

USB flash drive
FTP Client

Configure the main unit Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway) and connect to a local network.
Configures the target FTP server to the main unit.
For gateway, router, and other settings, contact the administrator of the network which the main unit isconnected to.
When the trigger condition for the FTP client function (File Transfer Settings) is satisfied, the following prosess is
executed.
• Copying or moving files from the external memory device inserted in the main unit to the FTP server• Copying files from the FTP server to the external memory device inserted in the main unit
Files can be copied or moved from external memory inserted in the main unit to external memory inserted
in the main unit.
*1 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-5

FTP Function

2.2

2 FTP Client Function

2.3

Supported Commands and Transfer modes• Commands defined by RFC959• Active mode and Passive mode
SFTP and FTPS are not supported.

2.4

Verified FTP ServerWith the FTP client function, the operation has been checked by using the following FTP server. *1• Microsoft Internet Information Services• FileZilla Server• Very Secure FTP Daemon• FT2J/1J (FTP server function)• MICRO/I (FTP server function)• IDEC PLC (FTP server function)

2.5

FTP Client Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the FTP server and the FTP client function.

● Configure the FTP Server
Configures the target FTP server.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click FTP Server Manager.
The FTP Server Manager is displayed.

2 Select the number to configure the FTP server in (FTP Server List), then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box for the selected number is displayed.

FTP Server List

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J as of May 2024, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P type as of May 2018

21-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function

3 Configure each items of the FTP server.

21

Server Name:Enter a name of the FTP server. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The default is "FTPServern". (n: The number in the FTP Server Manager)

Host Name:

Select this option and enter the host name when specifying the FTP server with a host name.
The maximum number is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

IP Address:

Select this option and enter the IP address when specifying the FTP server with an IP
address.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.

User Name:Enter the name of the user account for the FTP server.
The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

Password:

Enter the password for the FTP server.
The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

Port Number:Specifies the port number for the FTP server (0 to 65535).

Transfer Mode:

Selects the transfer mode of the FTP server.
Pasv:

Uses passive mode for the data connection.

Active: Uses active mode for the data connection.
Connection Timeout*1:

Specifies the timeout period (10 to 300 seconds) until the connection to server is automatically aborted.
After the Trigger Condition in the File Transfer Settings is satisfied, if there is no response from the
FTP server which is tried to connect, the main unit will automatically cancel to connect.

The Connection Timeout for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J is 10 seconds.
Transfer Timeout: Specifies the timeout period until the process of transferring files is automatically canceled. Afterthe Trigger Condition in the File Transfer Settings is satisfied and the data connection isavailable, if there is no response from the FTP server, the main unit will automatically cancel totransfer files.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:
1 to 60 minutes
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
10 to 300 seconds■ Advanced SettingSpecifies the FTP server settings by the values of the device addresses. The settings for the FTP server settings canbe used as initial values. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 21-13.

4 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
You are returned to the FTP Server Manager.

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to configure the necessary FTP server.
6 Click OK.
This concludes the FTP server configuration.
*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-7

FTP Function■ FTP server settings

2 FTP Client Function● Configuring the Files to copy or move and the Trigger Condition

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click File Transfer.
The File Transfer Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the number to configure the File Transfer Settings in (Settings), then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box for the selected number is displayed.

(Settings)

3 Configure the items on the General tab.

21-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function■ Source
Select the source external memory device or the FTP server where the files to be copied or moved are stored from thefollowing items.
SD Memory Card*1, USB Flash Drive*2, USB1*3, USB2*3, (FTP server)
The No.+.(period)+Server Name of the FTP server specified in the FTP Server Manager is displayed.
Example: No. is 1 and Server Name is TestServer1.
1.TestServer1
Location: Selects the method to specify the save location of source files to copy or move.
Fixed:

Specify the save location of the target folder or file path as a string. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters vary based on
the model.

Click on the External Memory Device Folder button or click on ▼ to the right on it, and thenselect the item on the list.
Specify the Location by Value of Device Address:
Specifies a word device to specify a folder or file path of the files to copy or move. The path is set
by reading the values sequentially from the starting device specified and handling those values ascharacter data up to the character before NULL (0x00). The maximum number of device
addresses is 124 (2 characters per word device, maximum of 247 singlebyte characters). Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
• Files cannot be copied or moved from the FTP server to the FTP server.
• When transferring files from external memory to external memory and HMI special internal relay LSM67 is0, subfolders can be copied and moved up to five folders deep. When HMI special internal relay LSM67 ischanged from 0 to 1, subfolders cannot be copied or moved.
• Path delimiters and characters in the folder or file path configured by Fixed or Specify the Location by
Value of Device Address that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|• Folder or File path that exceed the limits in Specify the Location by Value of Device Address andfolder or file path configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the folder or file path exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL),
the text stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
• If the transfer source is a main unit configured as an FTP server, "A + delimiter" or "B + delimiter" mustbe specified at the beginning of the path for each type of external memory. Path delimiters vary based on
the model.
Example 1: If the transfer source is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder on the USB flash
drive inserted in USB2 for HG2J/1J:
B/HGDATA01/ALARMLOG
Example 2: For HG5G-V, if the transfer source is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder on
the SD memory card:
A\HGDATA01\ALARMLOG*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-9

21
FTP Function

Example: Copy or move files to the “ALARMLOG” folder under “HGDATA01” folder on the external
memory device
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: HGDATA01/ALARMLOG
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: HGDATA01\ALARMLOG

2 FTP Client Function■ Destination
Select the target external memory device or the FTP server where the files to be copied or moved are stored from thefollowing items.
SD Memory Card*1, USB Flash Drive*2, USB1*3, USB2*3, (FTP server)
The No.+.(period)+Server Name of the FTP server specified in the FTP Server Manager is displayed.
Example: No. is 1 and Server Name is TestServer1
1.TestServer1
Location: Selects the method to specify the target save location of files to copy or move.
Fixed:

Specify the save location of the target folder path as a string. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters vary basedon the model.
Example: Save the copied or moved files to the “ALARMLOG” folder under “HGDATA01” folder
on the external memory device
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: HGDATA01/ALARMLOG
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: HGDATA01\ALARMLOG
Click on the External Memory Device Folder button or click on ▼ to the right on it, and thenselect the item on the list.

Specify the Location by Value of Device Address:
Specifies a word device to specify a folder path of the copied or moved files. The path is set byreading the values sequentially from the starting device specified and handling those values ascharacter data up to the character before NULL (0x00). The maximum number of device
addresses is 124 (2 characters per word device, maximum of 247 singlebyte characters). Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
• Files cannot be copied or moved from the FTP server to the FTP server.
• When transferring files from external memory to external memory and HMI special internal relay LSM67 is0, subfolders can be copied and moved up to five folders deep. When HMI special internal relay LSM67 ischanged from 0 to 1, subfolders cannot be copied or moved.
• Path delimiters and characters in the folder path configured by Fixed or Specify the Location by
Value of Device Address that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|• Folder path that exceed the limits in Specify the Location by Value of Device Address and folder orfile path configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the folder or file path exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL), thetext stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start is configured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
• If the transfer destination is a main unit configured as an FTP server, "A + delimiter" or "B + delimiter"
must be specified at the beginning of the path for each type of external memory. Path delimiters vary
based on the model.
Example 1: If the transfer destination is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder on the USB
flash drive inserted in USB2 for HG2J/1J:
B/HGDATA01/ALARMLOG
Example 2: For HG5G-V, if the transfer destination is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder
on the SD memory card:
A\HGDATA01\ALARMLOG■ Operation
Selects Copy or Move for the procedure to transfer the files. Can only be set Copy when Source is set to (FTP server).
If the destination file exists: Selects Skip or Overwrite for the processing method when there is the same filename in the destination.
*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

21-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function■ Store the Error Information when the Transfer is failed
Select this check box to store the error information in device addresses when an error occurs during file copying or
moving and specifies the word device to write the error information to.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Report when the Transfer ends
Select this check box to report when files have been copied or moved and specifies the destination bit device or the
bit number in the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

4 Configures the trigger condition on the Trigger Condition tab.

21
FTP Function■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to copy or move the files from the following.
Rising-edge:

Copy or move the files when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.

Falling-edge:

Copy or move the files when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.

Satisfy the condition: Copy or move the files when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display the Tag Editor. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display the Trigger
Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting
Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

5 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
You are returned to the File Transfer Settings dialog box.

6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to configure the necessary File Transfer settings.
7 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the files to copy or move and the trigger condition.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-11

2 FTP Client Function

2.6

FTP Server Manager
This section describes items and buttons on the FTP Server Manager.

● FTP Server Manager
The FTP server settings are collectively managed in FTP Server Manager.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays a list of the FTP server settings for each number. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 21-13.
No.:

Displays the number (1 to 16) for managing the FTP server settings.

Server Name:

Displays the name of the FTP server.

Host Name/IP Address: Displays the Host Name or IP address of the FTP server.
User Name:

Displays the user name of the FTP server.

Password:

Displays the password of the FTP server with * (asterisks).

Port Number:

Displays the port number of the FTP server.

Transfer Mode:

Displays the transfer mode of the FTP server.

Connection Timeout*1: Displays the timeout period until the connection to server is automatically aborted. After the
Trigger Condition in the File Transfer Settings is satisfied, if there is no response fromthe FTP server which is tried to connect, the main unit will automatically cancel to connect.

The Connection Timeout for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J is 10 seconds.
Transfer Timeout:

Displays the timeout period until the process of transferring files is automatically canceled.
After the Trigger Condition in the File Transfer Settings is satisfied and the data connection is available, if there is no response from the FTP server, the main unit will automaticallycancel to transfer files.

Top Device Address:

Displays the top device address when the settings of FTP servers are specified with the valueof the device address.

Copy the settings as default value to Device Address:
Displays the bit device or the bit number of the word device that triggers the copy of thesettings for FTP servers to device addresses as default.
■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number from the (Settings) and click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The
configured content for the selected number is reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 21-13.
■ Delete
Deletes the settings for the selected number from the (Settings).
■ Select*2
Returned to the File Transfer Settings dialog box, and then configures the selected FTP server from the (Settings)*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 Select is only displayed when this dialog box is opened from File Transfer Settings dialog box

21-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function● Individual Settings Dialog Box
Use the Individual Settings dialog box to register or edit the FTP server settings for the selected number.

21
Server Name:Enter a name of the FTP server. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The default is "FTPServern". (n: The number in the FTP Server Manager)

Host Name:

Select this option and enter the host name when specifying the FTP server with a host name.
The maximum number is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.

IP Address:

Select this option and enter the IP address when specifying the FTP server with an IP address.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.

If Host Name is selected, the IP address of the FTP server is looked up and obtained from the host nameusing the DNS server. In order to access a DNS server from the main unit, the IP address of the DNS servermust be specified. For details, refer to “When Ethernet is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 443.
User Name:Enter the name of the user account for the FTP server.
The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

Password:

Enter the password for the FTP server.
The maximum number for the user name is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

Port Number:Specifies the port number for the FTP server (0 to 65535).

Transfer Mode:

Selects the transfer mode of the FTP server.
Pasv:

Uses passive mode for the data connection.

Active:Uses active mode for the data connection.

Connection Timeout*1: Specifies the timeout period (10 to 300 seconds) until the connection to server is

automatically aborted. After the Trigger Condition in the File Transfer Settings is
satisfied, if there is no response from the FTP server which is tried to connect, the main unit
will automatically cancel to connect.

The Connection Timeout for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J is 10 seconds.

Transfer Timeout:

Specifies the timeout period until the process of transferring files is automatically canceled.
After the Trigger Condition in the File Transfer Settings is satisfied and the data
connection is available, if there is no response from the FTP server, the main unit willautomatically cancel to transfer files.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: 1 to 60 minutes
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: 10 to 300 seconds*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-13

FTP Function■ FTP Server Settings

2 FTP Client Function■ Advanced SettingSpecify FTP Server Settings by Value of Device Address: Select this check box to set the FTP Server Settings
using the value of the specified device address.
Top Device Address: Specify the word device to use. It allocates the settings of the FTP Server Settings startingat the configured device address. You can only specify an internal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Copy the settings as default value to Device Address: Select this check box to copy the settings in the FTP
Server Settings to device addresses as default.
(Device Address): Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device that triggers the copy of thesettings.
When the value of device address changes from 0 to 1, the values configured in the FTP
Server Settings are written, beginning from the device address set by the Top Device
Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Allocation of Address Number when the FTP Server Settings are specified by Value of Device Address
When the Specify FTP Server Settings by Value of Device Address check box is selected, it allocates thesettings of the FTP Server Settings starting at the device address set in the Top Device Address. The details areshown below.
Settings

Address Number

Words

Data Format

FTP Server+0 to +20

21*1,*2

Host Name is selected: String
IP Address is selected: DecimalUser Name+21 to +41

21*2, *3

StringPassword+42 to +62

21*2, *3

String

Port Number+63

1

DecimalTransfer Mode+64

1

DecimalConnection Timeout (second units)+65

1

DecimalTransfer Timeout (second units)+66

1

DecimalString data is stored in the upper byte and lower byte according to the Storage Method of String Data
setting. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.

*1 When IP address is selected, use only four words from the beginning, and the remaining seventeen words are left as areserved area.
*2 The twenty-first word is recognized as a NULL terminating character (0x00) regardless of the value of device address.
*3 Add a NULL terminating character (0x00) as the end of the string data when the string length is less than twenty words.

21-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function
Example: The FTP Server Settings are set as follows:
Settings

Preset Value

Outgoing FTP Server, IP Address is selected.

192.168.0.44

User Name

test_user001

Password

test password

Port Number

587

Transfer Mode (0: Pasv, 1: Active)

Pasv

Connection Timeout

30

Transfer Timeout

60

Top Device Address

LKR 100

Storage Method of String Data

from Upper byte

21〜

(The address number of Top Device Address) +0 LKR 100
FTP Server〜

FTP Function+20 LKR 120+21 LKR 121
User Name〜+41 LKR 141+42 LKR 142
+62
+63
+64
+65
+66

Password

LKR 162
LKR 163
LKR 164
LKR 165
LKR 166

Port Number
Transfer Mode
Connection Timeout
Transfer Timeout

The value of each device address is listed below.
Settings
FTP Server

User Name

Password

Port Number

Transfer Mode

Connection Timeout

Transfer Timeout

Preset Value
DeviceAddress

LKR 100

LKR 101

LKR 102

LKR 103

LKR 104 to LKR 120

Value(Decimal)

192

168

0

44

Reserved

DeviceAddress

LKR 122

LKR 123

LKR 124

LKR 125

LKR 126

LKR 127

LKR 128

LKR 129 to LKR 141

String (ASCII)‘t’‘e’‘s’‘t’‘_’‘u’‘s’‘e’‘r’‘0’‘0’‘1’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’Value(Hexadecimal)

7465h

7374h

5F75h

7365h

7230h

3031h

0000h

0000h

DeviceAddress

LKR 142

LKR 143

LKR 144

LKR 145

LKR 146

LKR 147

LKR 148

LKR 149 to LKR162

String (ASCII)‘t’‘e’‘s’‘t’‘_’‘p’‘a’‘s’‘s’‘w’‘o’‘r’‘d’‘\0’‘\0’‘\0’Value(Hexadecimal)

7465h

7374h

5F70h

6173h

7377h

6F72h

6400h

0000h

DeviceAddress

LKR 163

Value(Decimal)

587

DeviceAddress

LKR 164

Value(Decimal)

0

DeviceAddress

LKR 165

Value(Decimal)

30

DeviceAddress

LKR 166

Value(Decimal)60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-15

2 FTP Client Function

2.7

File Transfer Settings Dialog Box
This section describes the items and buttons on the File Transfer Settings dialog box.

● File Transfer Settings Dialog Box
Use the File Transfer Settings dialog box to collectively manage the trigger condition for copying or moving files
between the FTP server and an external memory device inserted in the main unit.

(Settings)■ (Settings)
Displays a list of the settings of the File Transfer function. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 21-17.
No.:

Displays the number for managing File Transfer Settings.

Source:Displays the source external memory device or the FTP server where the files to be copied or
moved are stored.

Destination:

Displays the target external memory device or the FTP server where the files to be copied or
moved are stored.

Trigger Type:

Displays the trigger type for copying or moving files.

Trigger Condition: Displays the trigger condition of trigger type for copying or moving files. The displayed content
varies based on Trigger Type.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge:

Displays the bit device or the bit number of the word device toserve as condition.

Satisfy the condition:

Displays the conditional expression.

■ EditRegisters or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number from the (Settings) and click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The
configured content for the selected number is reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 21-17.
■ Delete
Deletes the settings for the selected number from the (Settings).
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.

21-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function● Individual Settings Dialog Box
Registers or changes the settings for the selected number.
General Tab

21

SD Memory Card*1, USB Flash Drive*2, USB1*3, USB2*3, (FTP server)
The No.+.(period)+Server Name of the FTP server specified in the FTP Server Manager is displayed.
Example: No. is 1 and Server Name is TestServer1
1.TestServer1
FTP Server Manager: The settings of FTP server can be added or changed. Click this button to display the FTP
Server Manager. For details, refer to “FTP Server Manager” on page 21-12.
Location: Selects the method to specify the save location of source files to copy or move.
Fixed:

Specify the save location of the target folder or file path as a string. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters vary based on
the model.
Example: Copy or move files to the “ALARMLOG” folder under “HGDATA01” folder on the external
memory device
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

HGDATA01/ALARMLOG

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
External Memory Device Folder:

HGDATA01\ALARMLOG

Click this button to enter the configured content of theExternal Memory Device Folder in the External Memory
Device tab on the Project Settings dialog box.
Click on ▼ to the right on the External Memory Device
Folder button, and then select the item on the list to enter
the subfolder.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-17

FTP Function■ Source
Select the source external memory device or the FTP server where the files to be copied or moved are stored from thefollowing items.

2 FTP Client Function

Example: For HG5G-V, the External Memory Device
Folder in the External Memory Device tab on
the Project Settings dialog box is "HGDATA01"
Selection

Entered Text

Alarm Log Files

HGDATA01\ALARMLOG

Data Log Files

HGDATA01\DATALOG

Operation Log Files

HGDATA01\OPERATIONLOG

Screenshots

HGDATA01\CAPTURE

Recipe Files

HGDATA01\RECIPE

Picture Files used by
the main unit

HGDATA01\PICTURE

Sound Files used by
the main unit

HGDATA01\SOUNDZNV Project Files

HGDATA01\NVDATAZLD Project Files

HGDATA01\LDRDATA

Movie Files

HGDATA01\MOVIE

Recorded Movie Files

HGDATA01\RECORD

Specify the Location by Value of Device Address:
Specifies a word device to specify a folder or file path of the files to copy or move. The path is set byreading the values sequentially from the starting device specified and handling those values ascharacter data up to the character before NULL (0x00). The maximum number of device addresses
is 124 (2 characters per word device, maximum of 247 singlebyte characters). Clickto display
the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
• Files cannot be copied or moved from the FTP server to the FTP server.
• When transferring files from external memory to external memory and HMI special internal relay LSM67 is0, subfolders can be copied and moved up to five folders deep. When HMI special internal relay LSM67 ischanged from 0 to 1, subfolders cannot be copied or moved.
• Path delimiters and characters in the folder or file path configured by Fixed or Specify the Location by
Value of Device Address that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|• Folder or File path that exceed the limits in Specify the Location by Value of Device Address andfolder or file path configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the folder or file path exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL),
the text stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
• If the transfer source is a main unit configured as an FTP server, "A + delimiter" or "B + delimiter" mustbe specified at the beginning of the path for each type of external memory. Path delimiters vary based on
the model.
Example 1: If the transfer source is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder on the USB flash
drive inserted in USB2 for HG2J/1J:
B/HGDATA01/ALARMLOG
Example 2: For HG5G-V, if the transfer source is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder on
the SD memory card:
A\HGDATA01\ALARMLOG

21-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function■ Destination
Select the target external memory device or the FTP server where the files to be copied or moved are stored from thefollowing items.
SD Memory Card*1, USB Flash Drive*2, USB1*3, USB2*3, (FTP server)
The No.+.(period)+Server Name of the FTP server specified in the FTP Server Manager is displayed.
Example: No. is 1 and Server Name is TestServer1
1.TestServer1
FTP Server Manager: The settings of FTP server can be added or changed. Click this button to display the FTP
Server Manager. For details, refer to “FTP Server Manager” on page 21-12.
Location: Selects the method to specify the target save location of files to copy or move.
Fixed: Specify the save location of the target folder path as a string. The maximum number is 247
characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used. Path delimiters vary based on
the model.

External Memory Device Folder:

Click this button to enter the configured content of the External
Memory Device Folder in the External Memory Device tabon the Project Settings dialog box.
Click on ▼ to the right on the External Memory Device
Folder button, and then select the item on the list to enter the
subfolder.
Example: For HG5G-V, the External Memory Device
Folder in the External Memory Device tab on
the Project Settings dialog box is "HGDATA01"
Selection

Entered Text

Alarm Log Files

HGDATA01\ALARMLOG

Data Log Files

HGDATA01\DATALOG

Operation Log Files

HGDATA01\OPERATIONLOG

Screenshots

HGDATA01\CAPTURE

Recipe Files

HGDATA01\RECIPE

Picture Files used by
the main unit

HGDATA01\PICTURE

Sound Files used by
the main unit

HGDATA01\SOUNDZNV Project Files

HGDATA01\NVDATAZLD Project Files

HGDATA01\LDRDATA

Movie Files

HGDATA01\MOVIE

Recorded Movie Files

HGDATA01\RECORD

Specify the Location by Value of Device Address:
Specifies a word device to specify a folder path of the copied or moved files. The path is set byreading the values sequentially from the starting device specified and handling those values ascharacter data up to the character before NULL (0x00). The maximum number of device addresses
is 124 (2 characters per word device, maximum of 247 singlebyte characters). Clickto display
the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-19

21
FTP Function

Example: Save the copied or moved files to the “ALARMLOG” folder under “20170123” folder on
the FTP server
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: 20170123/ALARMLOG
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: 20170123\ALARMLOG

2 FTP Client Function• Files cannot be copied or moved from the FTP server to the FTP server.
• When transferring files from external memory to external memory and HMI special internal relay LSM67 is0, subfolders can be copied and moved up to five folders deep. When HMI special internal relay LSM67 ischanged from 0 to 1, subfolders cannot be copied or moved.
• Path delimiters and characters in the folder path configured by Fixed or Specify the Location by
Value of Device Address that cannot be used vary based on the model.
Delimiter

Characters that cannot be used

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

Model

/

"#$&'()*:;<>?\`|~

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P\"*:;<>?|• Folder path that exceed the limits in Specify the Location by Value of Device Address and folder orfile path configured with characters that cannot be used are as follows.
- When the text of the folder or file path exceeds the maximum number of device addresses (no NULL),
the text stored in device addresses up to the maximum number of device addresses from the start isconfigured.
- When a character that cannot be used is set, the text is up to that character.
• If the transfer destination is a main unit configured as an FTP server, "A + delimiter" or "B + delimiter"
must be specified at the beginning of the path for each type of external memory. Path delimiters vary
based on the model.
Example 1: If the transfer destination is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder on the USB
flash drive inserted in USB2 for HG2J/1J:
B/HGDATA01/ALARMLOG
Example 2: For HG5G-V, if the transfer destination is the “ALARMLOG” folder in the “HGDATA01” folder
on the SD memory card:
A\HGDATA01\ALARMLOG

21-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 FTP Client Function■ Operation
Selects Copy or Move for the procedure to transfer the files. Can only be set Copy when Source is set to (FTP
server).
If the destination file exists: Selects Skip or Overwrite for the processing method when there is the same filename in the destination.
■ Store the Error Information when the Transfer is failed
Select this check box to store the error information in device addresses when an error occurs during file copying or
moving and specifies the word device to write the error information to.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
0 is written to the device address when the copy or move process starts, 1 is written to the corresponding bit when anerror occurs.
Function

Cause

Solution

External Memory Device
Access Error• No external memory device specified
as the source or the destination isinserted.
• The external memory device specified
as the source or the destination
cannot be accessed.

•Insert an accessible external memory
device.
•Mount the external memory device.

External Memory Device
Reading or Writing Error• The folders and files in the external
memory device specified as thesource or the destination cannot be
read.
• Creating folders, writing to files anddeleting files in the external memory
device specified as the source or thedestination cannot be executed.

• Insert an external memory device
read or write.
• Insert an external memory device
which has sufficient space.

2

FTP Server Connection
Error• The FTP server specified as thesource or the destination cannot be
accessed when the interval specified
in Connection Timeout elapses.
• When Host Name is selected with theradio button in the FTP server
settings, the Preferred DNS Server
or Alternate DNS Server setting isincorrect.
• The host name of the FTP server
could not be resolved.

• Connect a LAN cable.
• Change the network settings
configured on the main unit.
• Change the IP address or the port
number of the FTP server.
• Change the Preferred DNS Server,
Alternate DNS Server settings.
• Change the Host Name of the FTP
server.

3

FTP Server Authentication
Error

The user name or the password isincorrect.

Change the user name or the password.

4

FTP Server CommandError

An error for the command transmitted
to the FTP server was returned.

Contact the administrator of the FTP
server.

5

FTP Server Transfer Error

The FTP server does not return a
response when the interval specified inTransfer Timeout elapses.

Contact the administrator of the FTP
server.

6

FTP Server Force
Terminate

The process of the file transfer stopped
by using the HMI Special Relay LSM65.

-

-

-

0

1

7 to 15

Reserved■ Report when the Transfer ends
Select this check box to report when files have been copied or moved and specifies the destination bit device or the
bit number in the destination word device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

21-21

21
FTP Function

Bitnumber

2 FTP Client Function
Trigger Condition Tab■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to copy or move the files from the following.
Rising-edge:

Copy or move the files when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionFalling-edge:

Execution

Execution

Execution

Copy or move the files when a value of device address changes from 1 to 0.
1

Value of Device Address
0

ActionExecution

Execution

Satisfy the condition: Copy or move the files when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied

Condition
Not satisfied

ActionExecution

Execution

Execution■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1
Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Device Address
Specifies the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as condition. You can only specify the internal
device.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display the Tag Editor. For thedevice address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type. Clickto display the Trigger
Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting
Conditional Expressions” on page 2-75.

21-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 22Sound Function

This chapter describes how to configure the sound function and its operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Sound Function is Used
The following functions can be used by connecting FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J to a USB speaker or the main unit equippedwith an audio interface (AUDIO OUT) to a speaker that supports AUDIO OUT.

Check the IDEC web site for more information about compatible USB speakers.
• Play a sound file when an arbitrary Device Address changes to 1
Main unit

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V
HG4G HG3G• Play a sound file when the screen is pressed instead of a beep
Main unit

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V
HG4G HG3G

1.2

Supported Sound FilesSound files that meet the following specifications can be played with the main unit:
Item

Description

File format

WAVE file (*.WAV)

Data format

PCM

Sampling rate

8000, 11025, 12000, 16000, 24000, 22050, 32000, 44100, 48000*1 Hz

Quantization bit rate

16-bitAudio type

Mono or stereo

File size

Max. 512 kB*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

22-1

22
Sound Function

When using the FT2J/1J or HG2J/1J, note the following points:• To use the speaker, USB port must be configured. Select the USB1(USB-A) or the USB2(USB-A) in theInterface under the Interface Configuration on the Communication Interface tab in the Project
Settings dialog box, and then select the Speaker in the Function.
• To play a sound file saved in an external memory device, configure the Speaker to the USB2(USB-A) in
the Interface under the Interface Configuration on the Communication Interface tab in the
Project Settings dialog box.

2 Sound Function Configuration Procedure

2

Sound Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Sound function.

2.1

Configuring Sound Files & Trigger Conditions● To play a sound file when a value of device address changes from 0 to 1

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Sound.
The Sound Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Double-click the cell in the File Name column to register a sound file.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify the sound file to register and click Open.
Only sound files with file names that use alphanumeric characters are supported. However, if Save To is set
to Internal Memory, file names with double-byte characters and symbols are also supported.

22-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Sound Function Configuration Procedure

4 Double click the cell under Save To and select the save destination for the sound file.
■ Internal Memory
Saves the sound file to internal memory.
■ External Memory Device

Saves the sound file to external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit.
The procedures to save the sound file to the external memory device are as follows.
• On the Home tab, click the arrow under Download, and click Project Data to display the Download
dialog box. Select the Sound Files check box of Download following files to External Memory
Device, and click OK.
• On the Home tab, click the arrow under Download, and click Files to External Memory Device todisplay the Open dialog box. Specify a sound file and click Open.

5 Double click the cell under Trigger Condition and select Device Address.
6 Specify the device address that will trigger playing the sound file in Trigger Device Address.

7 Configure Repeat, Change Volume Level*2, and any other options, and then click OK.
The Sound Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to play a sound file when a value of device address changes to 1.
● To play a sound file as a touch sound instead of a beep.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Sound.
The Sound Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Double-click the cell in the File Name column to register a sound file.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G-V and HG4G/3G*2 HG5G/4G/3G-V, HG4G/3G only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

22-3

22
Sound Function

Double-click the cell or click the cell and then clickin the Trigger Device Address column to select a device
address from the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

2 Sound Function Configuration Procedure

3 Specify the sound file to register and click Open.
Only sound files with file names that use alphanumeric characters are supported. However, if Save To is set
to Internal Memory, file names with double-byte characters and symbols are also supported.

4 Double click the cell under Save To and select the save destination for the sound file.
■ Internal Memory
Saves the sound file to internal memory.
■ External Memory Device

Saves the sound file to external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit.
The procedures to save the sound file to the external memory device are as follows.
• On the Home tab, click the arrow under Download, and click Project Data to display the Download
dialog box. Select the Sound Files check box of Download following files to External Memory
Device, and click OK.
• On the Home tab, click the arrow under Download, and click Files to External Memory Device todisplay the Open dialog box. Specify a sound file and click Open.

5 Double click the cell under Trigger Condition and select None.
6 Click OK.
The Sound Settings dialog box closes.

7 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G-V and HG4G/3G

22-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Sound Function Configuration Procedure

8 Select the Enable Touch Sound check box.
9 Select Sound File and specify the ID of the sound file to play in Sound ID.
Enter a sound ID number or clickto specify the sound ID number with the displayed Sound Settings dialog box.

22
Sound Function

10 Click the OK button.
The Sound Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to play a sound file as the touch sound.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

22-5

3 Sound Settings Dialog Box

3

Sound Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons in the Sound Settings dialog box.

3.1

Sound Settings Dialog Box
All the sound files used with the main unit and their trigger conditions are managed in the Sound Settings dialog box.
For HMI Special Data Register and HMI Special Internal Relay related to the sound function, refer to Chapter
35 “Internal Devices” on page 35-1.

(Settings)■(Copy)
Select an ID and click the■

button to copy the contents of that row to the clipboard.

(Paste)Select an ID and click the

button to paste the contents of the clipboard to that row.

If the contents of multiple IDs are on the clipboard, the contents are pasted in ascending order from theinitially selected ID.
Pasting stops when the ID reaches 1024.
■(Delete)Select an ID and click the■

button to delete the contents of that row.

(Sound file play)
Select an ID and click the

button to play that row's sound file.

If you select multiple IDs, only the sound file of the first selected ID will play. The sound files will not playcontinuously.
■

22-6(Sound file stop)
Stops playing the sound file.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Sound Settings Dialog Box■ (Settings)
Displays a list of the settings for sound files used by the main unit.
You can edit the (Settings) cell by using the right click menu.
ID:

Shows the sound ID (1 to 1024) of the sound file to play.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-8.
To select multiple IDs, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
Multiple IDs cannot be selected when the Sound Settings dialog box has been displayed by clicking
Sound ID on the Project Settings dialog box.

File Name:inShows the sound file name that was set.
Double clicking the cell displays the Open dialog box. Then specify a sound file with the Open dialog box.

Select the location to save the sound file to as Internal Memory or External Memory

Save To:

Device*1.

Double click the cell to change.
Trigger Condition:

Select Device Address or None for the condition to play the sound file.
Double click the cell to change.
Device Address:

Plays the sound file according to the value of device address.

None:

Select when playing a sound file as a touch sound.

Trigger Device Address: When Trigger Condition is Device Address, specify the Device Address that will be usedas the condition to play the sound file.
Double-click the cell or click the cell and then clickin the Trigger Device Addresscolumn to select a device address from the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
The address cannot be specified when Trigger Condition is None.
The maximum number of external device addresses that can be used as trigger device addresses is 128.
However, when the bit numbers of a word device are specified, if those bits are in the same word device, itcounts as one device even when multiple bits are used.
Repeat:Select this check box to play the sound file repeatedly. The file will play repeatedly until the Trigger
Condition is no longer met.
When this check box is cleared, the file only plays once.

■ EditEdit the settings of the selected ID.
Select an ID and click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings that configure in the
Individual Settings dialog box are applied to the selected ID only. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box”
on page 22-8.
To edit the settings of multiple IDs at once, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific rows,
and then click Edit. The settings configured in the Individual Settings dialog box are applied to all
selected IDs.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G-V and HG4G/3G

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

22-7

22
Sound Function• If the specified sound file does not exist, the file name will appear in red.
• Only sound files with file names that use alphanumeric characters are supported. However, if Save To is
set to Internal Memory, file names with double-byte characters and symbols are also supported.

3 Sound Settings Dialog Box■ Change Volume Level *2
Adjust the volume (0 to 31) of sound files and movie files played by the main unit.
The volume changes according to the value of the specified Device Address.
The sound is muted when the Device Address value is 0, and the volume is maximum when the value is 31 or out of range.
Enter the Device Address in the text box or clickto specify the address in the displayed Tag Editor. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
When the Change Volume Level check box is cleared, the main unit plays sound files and movie files at
maximum volume.
■ Enable Mute *2
Mute the volume of sound files and movie files played by the main unit.
When the value of the specified Device Address is 1, the sound is muted.
When the sound is muted while a sound file is playing, it continues playing without making a sound.
Enter the Device Address in the text box or clickto specify the address in the displayed Tag Editor. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
● Individual Settings Dialog Box
Register or change the settings of the selected ID.

■ ID
Shows the Sound ID (1 to 1024) of the sound file to be played.
If the Individual Settings dialog box is opened with multiple IDs selected in Settings, ID number will not be
displayed.
■ File Name
Specify the sound file.
Click thebutton to display the Open dialog box. Then specify a sound file with the Open dialog box.

If the Individual Settings dialog box is opened with multiple IDs selected in Settings, File Name will not be
displayed.
■ Save To

Select the location to save the sound file to as Internal Memory or External Memory Device*1.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G-V and HG4G/3G*2 HG5G/4G/3G-V, HG4G/3G only

22-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Sound Settings Dialog Box■ Trigger Condition
Select None or Device Address for the condition for playing the sound file.
None:

Select to play the sound file as a touch sound.

Device Address:

Play the sound file according to the value of device address.
(Trigger Device Address):

Specify the device address that will be the condition for playing thesound file. Clickto display Tag Editor and specify the device
address. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Repeat:Select this check box to play the sound file repeatedly. The file willplay repeatedly until the Trigger Condition is no longer met.
When this check box is cleared, the file only plays once.

The maximum number of external device addresses that can be used as trigger device addresses is 128.
However, when the bit numbers of a word device are specified, if those bits are in the same word device, itcounts as one device even when multiple bits are used.

Sound Function● Exporting sound files
The sound file can be exported by the steps below.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Sound.
The Sound Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select and right-click the ID of the sound file to be exported, and click Export Sound Files.
The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

3 Specify a save location and click OK.

The sound file is exported using the current file name.

This concludes exporting sound files.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

22

22-9

3 Sound Settings Dialog Box● Importing sound files
Import a sound file into the project being edited.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Sound.
The Sound Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select and right-click the ID of the sound file to register, and then click Import Sound Files.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Select a sound file to register, and then click Open.
The imported sound file is displayed on the Sound Settings dialog box.
This concludes importing sound files.

22-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Operation

4

Operation
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The main unit only plays a single sound file at a time. It cannot simultaneously play multiple sound files. Therefore, if
multiple trigger device addresses simultaneously change to 1 or if a sound file is set as the touch sound, the soundfile played changes according to the trigger conditions.
■ Touch sound (beep) and sound file by trigger device addresses
The touch sound’s beep and a sound file can be played simultaneously.

ON

Touch PanelOFF

Touch Sound

22

Beep

Sound Function

Sound

Sound
1

Trigger Device Address0■ When touch panel is touched twice (before sound from first touch has finished playing)
For the same touch sound file, the one played later has priority.
If the touch panel is pressed twice (before the sound has finished playing from the first touch), playback of the soundfile stops and the same sound file plays again from the beginning.

ON

Touch PanelOFF

Touch Sound

Sound

Sound

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

22-11

4 Operation■ Touch sound (sound file) and sound file by trigger device address
When both a touch sound file and sound file set by the trigger device address are programmed, the sound file set by
the trigger device address is given priority.
• As soon as the touch panel is pressed the sound file is played. However, if the trigger device address changes to 1,
the touch sound file stops and the trigger device address sound file plays.

ON

Touch PanelOFF

Touch Sound

Sound

Sound

Sound
1

Trigger Device Address0• If a sound file is playing because it was turned on by a trigger device address, the touch sound file will not playeven if the touch panel is pressed.

ON

Touch PanelOFF

Touch Sound

Sound

Sound

Sound
1

Trigger Device Address0■ Sound file set by 2 triggering device addresses
For sound files set by trigger device addresses, the one played first has priority. If both change to 1 simultaneously,
the smaller sound ID has priority.
• When multiple trigger device addresses change to 1 simultaneously, the smaller sound ID has priority and thesound files play in order.
For example, when playing sound ID1 when trigger device address 1 is 1 and sound ID2 when trigger device
address 2 is 1, if trigger device address 1 and trigger device address 2 change to 1 simultaneously, sound ID1
playback starts and after it finishes, if trigger device address 2 is 1, sound ID2 playback starts.

1

Trigger Device Address 1
0

Sound

Sound ID1

Sound

Sound ID2
1

Trigger Device Address 2
0

22-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Operation• While a sound file is playing, the sound ID for the trigger device address that changed to 1 is put into a queue forplayback.
For example, when playing sound ID1 when trigger device address 1 is 1 and sound ID2 when trigger device
address 2 is 1, if trigger device address 2 changes to 1 while sound ID1 is playing, then sound ID2 playback starts
if trigger device address 2 is 1 when sound ID1 finishes playing.

1

Trigger Device Address 1
0

Sound

Sound ID1

Sound

Sound ID2Sound ID2

22

1

Trigger Device Address 2
0

1

Trigger Device Address 1
0

Sound

Sound ID1

Sound

Sound ID2Sound ID2

1

Trigger Device Address 20• When the sound ID currently playing is set to Repeat: Enabled, no other sound IDs will play until the trigger
condition for this sound ID is no longer satisfied.
For example, when playing sound ID1 when trigger device address 1 is 1 and sound ID2 when trigger device
address 2 is 1, even if sound ID2’s trigger device address changes to 1 while sound ID1 is set to Repeat: Enabled
and repeatedly playing, sound ID1 playback continues. When sound ID1's trigger device address changes to 0,
sound ID2 playback starts if trigger device address 2 is 1.

1

Trigger Device Address 10

Repeat: Enabled
Sound

Sound ID1

Sound

Sound ID2Sound ID1

Sound ID1

Sound ID2

1

Trigger Device Address 2
0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

22-13

Sound Function

However, if the trigger device address for sound ID2 is 0 when sound ID1 finishes playing, sound ID2 does not play.

4 Operation

22-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 23

Multimedia Function

This chapter describes how to register and play movie files played on the Video Display, how to save video and audio
to the external memory device before and after an event occurs, how to play saved video and audio, and how to
configure the video input.
This function is only supported by models that are equipped with a video interface.

1

Function and Settings
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Multimedia Function is Used
With its built-in video interface (VIDEO IN/OUT) and audio interface (AUDIO IN*1/OUT), a video camera or

microphone*1 can be connected to the main unit and used in the following ways. Multimedia function uses the SD
memory card as the external memory device.

23• Register movie files to play with the main unit and play the movie files on the Video Display
Main unit

Multimedia Function

SD memory card
Play

Play

Stop

Back

Next

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V
HG4G HG3G

Movie Files(avi format)*2(mp4 format)*3

Movie File List
(MOVIE.LST)• Save video camera images and microphone audio*1 to the external memory device before and after an event occurs.
Event Occurs

10Video and audio since theBefore event occurs

After event occurs

Retained video and audio

Record from here

recording time before the event
has passed is discarded

Images and sound to save to the SD memory card

Main unit
Saves

ImagesVideo
CameraSD memory card

Audio*1

Microphone

Movie Files

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V
HG4G HG3G(avi format)*2(mp4 format)*3*1 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*3 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

23-1

1 Function and Settings• Configure the video input for the device connected to the main unit
Main unit
Video Camera
Images

Play

Stop

Back

Next

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V
HG4G HG3G• Input images from two video cameras*2
Main unit
Video Camera
ImagesChannel 1
Play

Stop

Back

Next

CH1

Play

Stop

Back

Next

CH2

ImagesChannel 2
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V• The main unit can play movie files, display video, and output audio using the Video Display.
 Chapter 9 “4 Video Display” on page 9-81
• The main unit can record and play video and audio using the key buttons.
 Chapter 7 “Recording Images and Sound” on page 7-104
 Chapter 7 “Playing Recorded Images and Sound” on page 7-107

1.2

Supported Movie Files
Movie files that meet the following specifications can be played with the main unit:
Item
File format
Movie
Audio

Description
HG5G/4G/3G-V:

AVI file (.avi)

HG4G/3G:MP4 file (.mp4)

HG5G/4G/3G-V:

Motion JPEG

HG4G/3G:

MPEG-4 Simple Profile

HG5G/4G/3G-V:

PMC (Sampling rate 8000, 11025, 12000, 16000, 24000, 22050, 32000, 44100Hz)

HG4G/3G:

AAC-LC (Bit rate 32 kbps or less recommended)

Frame rate

30 fps or less (15 fps or less recommended)

Resolution

720 x 480 dots or less (640 x 480 dots or less recommended)

File size

64 Mbyte or less (32 Mbyte or less recommended)

The main unit may not be able to play the formats above correctly depending on the minimum system requirements.
In this situation, shrink the size of the file by lowering the frame rate or the resolution of the file or by lowering the bit
rate of the audio. If audio is unnecessary, set to a file without sound.

*2 HG5G/4G/3G-V only

23-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure

2

Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Multimedia function.

2.1

Registering Movie Files

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Multimedia.
The Multimedia Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the ID to be used to register the movie file in Movie File List on the Movie tab. Click the File Path cell andenter the file path of the movie file.

The maximum number is 250 alphanumeric characters.

To specify in the Open dialog box, double-click the cell or click the cell and click
dialog box.

to open the Open

3 Repeat steps 2 to add all the movie files to play (1 to 64).
4 Click OK.
The Multimedia Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to register movie files.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

23-3

23
Multimedia Function

Example: Specify the movie file “sample01.mp4” that has been saved to the “MOVIE” folder in the External Memory
Device folder “HGDATA01”.
Enter "sample01".

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure● Playing a Movie File List on the Video Display

1 Following the procedure in “2.1 Registering Movie Files” on page 23-3, register the movie files to play on the Video
Display.

2 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Video Display.

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display.
4 Double-click the placed Video Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

5 On the General tab, under Action, select Play the Movie File List.
This option plays all the movies registered in Movie File List in the Multimedia Settings dialog box.

23-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure

6 In Default ID, specify the ID number (1 to 64) of the movie file to play when the Play button is pressed.
Click
to display the Multimedia Settings dialog box. Select the ID number from the movie file list. The movie
files registered in the movie file list are played in order from the specified ID number.

7 Click OK.
The Properties of Video Display dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to play a movie file list on the Video Display.

23
Multimedia Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual23-5

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure

2.2

Configuring the Event Recording Function

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Multimedia.
The Multimedia Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Record tab.

3 Select the Use Event Recording check box.
4 Select a recording channel*1 or a recording target*2.
■ Recording Channel*1
Selects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to record a video only (no audio) out of the signals input from the device.
■ Recording Target*2
In the signals input from the device, select Video and Audio or Video only (No Audio) as the recording target.

5 Specify the bit device that will trigger the start of recording in Trigger Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

6 Specify the recording time before and after the event occurs.
■ Recording Time Before Event
With the point in time when the value of device address changes from 0 to 1 as the start point, this setting specifies
how many seconds to record before the start point (1 to 15 sec.).
■ Recording Time After Event
Specifies the time (1 to 15 sec.) until recording stops from when the value of device address changed from 0 to 1.

7 Click OK.
The Multimedia Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Record function.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*2 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

23-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure● Playing Images Recorded with the Event Recording Function
Play the recorded movie file on the Video Display.
Configuration Procedure

1 Create the Video Display to play the recorded images.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Video Display.

2 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Video Display.
3 Double-click the placed Video Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

23
Multimedia Function

4 On the General tab, under Action, select Play a movie or recorded file from the File Screen.
This option selects and plays movie files using the File Screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual23-7

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure

5 Click OK.
The Properties of Video Display dialog box closes.

6 Create a button to open the screen to select a recorded images.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

7 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button.
8 Double-click the placed Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.

9 On the General tab, select Open File Screen for Movie Files for Action Mode.

10 Specify the display location in coordinates for the movie file screen to open above the base screen with Coordinates
X, Y.

With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.

23-8

X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure

11 Click OK.
Close the Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box.
This concludes configuring playback of recorded images.
Operating Procedure
To play sound, the main unit must be connected to speakers.
This section describes the example of playing the movie file “123000.avi” located in the “20110313” folder under the“RECORD” folder when the External Memory Device folder is “HGDATA01”.
Movie files that meet the following specifications can be played with the main unit:
HG5G/4G/3G-V:
AVI file (.avi)
HG4G/3G:MP4 file (.mp4)
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.6 Available Movie Files” on page 2-37.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button set to Open File Screen for Movie Files.
The File Screen is displayed.
Main unit

23

Press the Goto Screen Button

Video Display

Restore RepeatON RepeatOFF
REW
Stop

Multimedia Function

Full
Back
Pause

Next

FF
Play

2 Select the folder with the date of the recorded images.
Press  to select “20110313” and then press Select.
The contents of the “20110313” folder will be displayed.
File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card
\HGDATA01\RECORD

Page No.: 1File nameSize20110312

Folder20110313

Folder20110314

Folder20110315

FolderFolder Up

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

Select2

Once the File Screen is opened, the “RECORD” folder in the External Memory Device folder will be displayed.
If the “RECORD” folder does not exist, the External Memory Device folder will be displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

23-9

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure

3 Select a movie file.
Press  to select “123000.avi” and then press Select.
The movie file will be selected and the File Screen will close.
File Screen
DRIVE: SD Card
Page No.: 1\HGDATA01\RECORD\20110313
File name120000.avi

Folder Up

Size
512,000,000

121500.avi

512,000,000

123000.avi

512,000,000

124500.avi

512,000,000
512,000,000

130000.avi

123000.avi

Modified Date: 2011/3/13 13:00:30

UpdatePage Up

Page Down

1

Select2

4 Press Play on the Video Display.
The movie file is played.
Main unit

Video Display

Full

Restore

Back

REW

Pause

Stop

RepeatON RepeatOFF

Press Play

Next

FF
Play

While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function, while data is being
recorded with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function, or
while data is being saved to the external memory device, movie files cannot be played. While data isrecording after an event occurs and while data is being saved to the external memory device, the value of
HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

23-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Multimedia Function Configuration Procedure

2.3

Configuring the Video Input

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Multimedia.
The Multimedia Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Video Input tab.

23
Multimedia Function

3 Select NTSC or PAL for the signal standard of the device connected to the main unit.
The adopted format for the signal standard differs according to the country or region.
NTSC:
Japan, Korea, Taiwan, North America, Central America, South America, others
PAL:
Europe, China, the Middle East, South East Asia, others

4 Click OK.
The Multimedia Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the video input.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

23-11

3 Multimedia Settings Dialog Box

3

Multimedia Settings Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Multimedia Settings dialog box.

3.1

Multimedia Settings Dialog Box● Movie Tab
Create and edit a list of movie files to be used with project data.
Based on the contents that have been set a movie file list, “MOVIE.LST”, is automatically created in the root folder ofthe External Memory Device folder in the external memory device.

■ Movie File List:
Displays a list of movie files to be used with project data.
ID:

Displays the movie file list ID.

File Path:

Displays the file path of the movie file.
Click the cell, and then enter the file path of a movie file. The maximum number is 250 characters. Onlyalphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
To specify a movie file saved in the "MOVIE" folder in the External Memory Device folder configured on
the External Memory Device tab in the Project Settings dialog box, only enter the file name.
Example: The name of the External Memory Device folder is "HGDATA01" .
Enter "sample01" and the file name is:
A:\HGDATA01\MOVIE\sample01.file extension*1

Click the cell, and then click
Open dialog box.

to display the Open dialog box. Then specify a movie file with the

You cannot use the following characters in the file path.
"*,/:;<>?|
However, a colon (:) can be used to indicate a drive letter, such as "A:".

*1 avi for HG5G/4G/3G-V, mp4 for HG4G/3G

23-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Multimedia Settings Dialog Box■ Delete
Deletes movie files from the movie file list.
Select a movie file from the movie file list and then click this button.
Even if the file path of a movie file is deleted from the movie file list, the movie file itself will not be deleted.
■ Up
Shifts the selected movie file upward on this list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected movie file downward on this list.
■ Import
Imports an exported movie file list.
Existing movie file lists will be overwritten.
■ Export
Exports a movie file list with the file name “MOVIE.LST”.

23
Multimedia Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

23-13

3 Multimedia Settings Dialog Box● Record Tab■ Use Event Recording
Select this check box to use the event recording function.
The event recording function has the main unit monitor the state of a trigger device address. When the value of
device address changes from 0 to 1 (when an event occurs), the function records the video and audio before andafter the event.
■ Recording Channel*1
Selects Channel 1 or Channel 2 to record a video only (no audio) out of the signals input from the device.
■ Recording Target*2
Select the target to record out of the signals input from the device.
Video and Audio:

Records images and sound.

Video only (No Audio):

Records images only.

■ Trigger Device Address
Specifies the bit device that will trigger the start of recording. This option can only be set when Use Event
Recording is selected.
Click

to display the Tag Editor. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Recording Time Before Event
Specifies the amount of time (1 to 15 sec.) to record before the value of trigger device address changes from 0 to 1.
This option can only be set when Use Event Recording is selected.
■ Recording Time After Event
Specifies the amount of time (1 to 15 sec.) to record after the value of trigger device address changes from 0 to 1.
This option can only be set when Use Event Recording is selected.
While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while recorded
data is being saved to the external memory device, data cannot be recorded with a Key Button, MultiButton, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function and movie files cannot be played. Also,
during these situations, the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to
Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*2 This is applicable for HG4G/3G with a video interface only.

23-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Multimedia Settings Dialog Box● Video Input Tab
Set the signal standard for the device that will connect to the main unit.

23
Multimedia Function■ Input Signal
Select from NTSC or PAL for the signal standard of the device connected with the main unit.
The adopted format for the signal standard differs according to the country or region.
NTSC:
Japan, Korea, Taiwan, North America, Central America, South America, others
PAL:
Europe, China, the Middle East, South East Asia, others

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

23-15

4 Checking the Status of the Function

4

Checking the Status of the Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

You can check various kinds of information for the multimedia function through the values of the HMI Special Data
Register. Details on HMI Special Data Register are given below:■ LSD 155: Event Recording Function Status Information
Bit number
0
1 to 15

Description
While data is recording after an event occurs and while recorded data is being saved to the external
memory device, the value changes to 1.
Reserved■ LSD 165: Error Information
Function nameMultimedia Function Error Information

23-16

Description
Stores error information for themultimedia function.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Status0:1:2:3:NormalSpecified file does not exist
File format is incorrect
Specified parameter value is outof range5 Restrictions

5

Restrictions
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The time to save data to the external memory device varies based on the write speed of the external
memory device used.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

23-17

23
Multimedia Function• When you have a movie file (.mp4) and a sound file (.WAV), you cannot play both of them at the same time.
• Movie files and sound files cannot be played while recording.
Sound files cannot be played if the event recording function is enabled.
• Movie files cannot be played and video cannot be displayed while the Maintenance Screen is being displayed.
• If the zoom magnification for the movie file is greater than 2x, the zoom magnification is adjusted to 2x and themovie is centered and displayed.
• If SIEMENS S7-MPI is selected in Communication Driver, the speed of the scan process on the main unit
decreases by playing movie files and by displaying or recording video from video input.
• If writing to an external memory device occurs while playing a movie file, the image and sound of the video may be
disturbed.
• When using the Cyclic Script, movie file playback and displaying or recording video from video input may beinterrupted.
• If the Installation of the main unit is set to Vertical installation, movie file playback and displayed video is
performed in the same direction as the Horizontal installation.
To play movie files on the main unit set to Vertical installation, use movie files with the display orientation rotatedto match the installation direction.
• When using the event recording function, the event recording function is paused if you record with a Key Button,
Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the recording function or play movie files, so take note of thefollowing.
- While recording with parts and while playing movie files, nothing is recorded if an event occurs.
- When data was recorded with a part, it takes approximately 1 second after the data is finished being saved to theexternal memory device until the event recording function resumes operating.
- When a movie file was played, it takes approximately 1 second from stopping playback until the event recording
function resumes operating.
• While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event recording function and while recorded data is
being saved to the external memory device, data cannot be recorded with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or MultiCommand configured with the recording function and movie files cannot be played. Also, during these situations,the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD155-0 changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.
• Movie files which allow to use the FF key and the REW key in the Video Display are as follows- If the playback time is 10 minutes or less, files with 1 or more I-frames every 2 seconds- If the playback time is 10 minutes or more, files with 1 or more I-frames every 5 seconds• If a popup screen is moved that has a Video Display showing a video or playing a movie file, the display may briefly
remain in the position before being moved.
• If it takes a long time to recognize the SD memory card, movie files cannot be played directly after starting
operation. In this case, play the movie file after HMI Special Internal Relay LSM21 changes to 1. For details, refer to
Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.

5 Restrictions

23-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 24User Accounts and the Security Function

This chapter outlines user accounts and the Security function, how to configure them, and their operation on the main
unit and in WindO/I-NV4.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

User Accounts
The Security function protects access to data and displays and operations on the main unit using accounts. Accounts
are the privileges to use the main unit and data. By assigning accounts to users, you can protect the main unit frombeing inappropriately operated and protect project data from alterations and misuse.
Accounts assigned to users are called user accounts.
User account
Account
User
Privileges to operate the main unit
Assign24

Privileges to access data

There are two types of security groups: provided security groups (Administrator, Operator, and Reader) and usercreated security groups. One or more of these security groups can be assigned to users.
One or more users must always be assigned to Administrator.
Administrator

Providedsecurity groups

User-createdsecurity groups(12 max)

Operator
ReaderGroupA

Administrator

GroupB

GroupB

AssignUser account:

AssignUser account:

AssignUser account:

A user name and password are associated with a user account and up to 15 user accounts can be created.
Password:

11111111

22222222

33333333

44444444

EEEEEEEE

User1

User2

User3

User4

User15User account:
User name:

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-1

User Accounts and the Security

In WindO/I-NV4, security groups are used as accounts.

1 Overview
When a password is set for a user account assigned to a security group, access to data, display and operation on themain unit are password protected.
For password protected operations, users are prompted to enter their user name and password as necessary on themain unit Password screen or the WindO/I-NV4 Enter Password dialog box.
Enter Password dialog box

Password screen

Password

▲ ▼

User

********
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

ENT

• You can set a dedicated password when opening the project. In the Security dialog box, on the Options
tab, select the Use Password to open a Project check box, and then set the password.
• If a password is not configured for a user account, access to data and displays and operations on themain unit cannot be protected.
• The Password Input Screen can only be created when the Use Security functions check box and theCustomize Password Input Screens check box in the Security dialog box are selected. If you areusing the Password Input Screen provided by the main unit, you do not need to create the screen.

24-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.2

Protecting Data

● Protecting Access to Data
Security groups that protect access to data can perform the following functions.
• Protect from changes by editing project data

The Enter Password dialog box is displayed

Opening project data

• Protect from alterations or misuse by downloading data

24
External memory device*1
SD memory card

Computer

Main unit
USB flash drive
Download
Download
The Enter Password dialog box is displayed

Recipe files
Picture files
Sound files*2
Custom Web Page files
Movie files*3
Movie file list*3

Main unit
External memory device*1
SD memory card

External device
Password
Enter the appropriate password
for Data Transfer Function

▲ ▼

User

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

K

E

R

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

BS

L CAN

Download

ENT

USB flash drive
The Password screen is displayed

PLC programs*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*3 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-3

User Accounts and the Security

Project data

1 Overview• Protect from the loss of data by upload
Project data

External memory device*1
SD memory card

Computer

Main unit
USB flash drive
UploadUploadThe Enter Password dialog box is displayed
Screenshot data
Alarm Log data
Data Log data
Operation Log data
Recipe files
Picture files
Sound files*2
Movie files*3
Movie file list*3

Main unit
External device

External memory device*1
Password
Enter the appropriate password
for Data Transfer Function

SD memory card

▲ ▼

User

1

2

3

Q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

UploadENT

USB flash drive
The Password screen is displayed

PLC programs• Protect from data erasures and formatting*5 external memory device*4 by unauthorized access
External memory device*4
SD memory card
Computer

Deleting data
Formatting*5
external memory
device*4

Main unit
USB flash drive

The Enter Password dialog box is displayed*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*3 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*4 SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*5 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

24-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview• Protect from alterations and misuse by operating the main unit under the System Mode
Main unit

Main unit

Maintenance

Password

▲ ▼

User

System Mode********

Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

1

2

3

Q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

ENT

The Password screen is displayed• Protect from unauthorized browsing by displaying Device Monitor
Main unit

Main unit

Maintenance

Password

▲ ▼

User

System Mode********

Device Monitor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Adjust Brightness

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

BS

L CAN
ENT

The Password screen is displayed

24• Protect from the loss of data by copying*7 files between external memory devices*6

User Accounts and the Security

SD memory card USB flash drive

Main unit
Password

▲ ▼

User

********

Copy

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

K

E

R

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

BS

L CAN
ENT

File
USB flash drive
The Password screen is displayed• Protect from the loss of data or alterations by the execution of the USB Autorun function
Main unit

Main unit
PasswordPassword

▲ ▼

User

********
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

K

E

R

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

BS

L CAN
ENT

The Password screen is displayed
USB ﬂash drive*6 Between USB flash drives inserted in USB1 and USB2 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, between SD memory card and USB flash
drive for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F*7 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual24-5

1 Overview• Protect from remote unauthorized browsing and unauthorized operations using a web browser terminal on acomputer or smartphone.

Web Browser Terminal(computer, smartphone, etc.)

Ethernet Communication (TCP/IP)

The Password screen is displayed

Local Network● Provided security groups
There are three types of provided security groups with different security levels: Administrator, Operator, and Reader.
■ Administrator
The Administrator group possesses complete access rights to project data. This security group can execute allnecessary operations including editing project data and changing project data in the main unit. One or more users
must be assigned to this group.
■ Operator
The Operator group can partially change project data by changing values of device addresses. This security group
download data to external memory device and copy files between or within external memory device.
■ ReaderThe Reader group can read data stored on external memory device, copy files from external memory devices*1 toUSB flash drive inserted in USB2, and read values of device addresses with the Web Server function.
The provided user account has the security groups Administrator, Operator, and Reader allocated to it.
Passwords have not been configured for this user account. To protect access to data, a password must be
configured for the user account.

User1
Administrator

Provided security groups

Operator
Reader*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F

24-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview● Operations Subject to Password Protection
If you configure a password for a user account assigned to a security group to protect access to data, access to datais password protected. The operations that are subject to password protection and the security group that the
password is valid for are as follows.
Security group that the password is valid forOperations subject to password protection
Data editing

Administrator

Operator

ReaderUser-createdOpening projects

YES

NO

NO

YES*1

Downloading a project data

YES

NO

NO

YES*1

Uploading a project data

YES

NO

NO

YES*1

Delete data stored in the internal memory

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

Uploading files from an external memory device*2

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

Downloading PLC programs from an external
memory device to external devices

YES

NO

NO

NO

Uploading PLC programs from external devices to an
external memory device

YES

NO

NO

NO

Deleting files in external memory device*2

YES

NO

NO

NO

Formatting*4 external memory device*3

YES

NO

NO

NO

Copying files to a USB1*5

YES

YES

NO

NO

Copying files to a USB2*5

YES

YES

YES

NO

Copying files to an SD memory card*6

YES

YES

NO

NO

Copying files to a USB flash drive*6

YES

YES

YES

NO

Switching to the System Mode

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

Remotely monitoring the MICRO/I state from a
web browser terminal

YES

YES

YES

NO

Remotely operating the MICRO/I state from a web
browser terminal

YES

YES

NO

NO

Displaying and operating the Custom Web page ofthe MICRO/I from a web browser terminal

*8

*8

*8

*8

Downloading files to an external memory device

Downloading files to an external memory device*2

while the main unit is running

Modifyingdata

Use Monitor Function in WindO/I-NV4 andWindLDR*7 or Device Monitor

24• You can set a dedicated password. In the Security dialog box, on the Options tab, select the Use
Password to open a Project check box, and then set the password. The dedicated password isapplicable to the following operations:- Opening projects- Reusing screens- Opening projects after uploading project data
• To password protect operations, the lowest level security group out of the security groups enabled with apassword must be assigned to a user account.
The security levels, from highest to lowest, are Administrator > Operator > Reader.
Example: To password protect the operation to display Device Monitor, assign the Operator security
group to a user account. If a user account assigned to the Operator security group does notexist, the operation is not password protected.
• The commands that the USB Autorun function can execute vary based on the enabled security group. For
details, refer to Chapter 33 “5.4 USB Autorun Function Security” on page 33-74.
*1 Switch between Permitted and Prohibited in the Security Settings dialog box.
*2 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*3 SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*4 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*5 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*6 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*7 FT2J/1J only
*8 It depends on the settings in Security Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Web Page Tab” on page 24-42.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-7

User Accounts and the Security

YES*2

1 Overview

1.3

Protecting Displays and Operations● Displays and Operations that can be Protected with the Security Function
Security groups can be assigned to users to protect displays and operations on the main unit. These groups arecapable of the following actions.
• Protecting the display of screens
Main unit

Main unit
Base screen 1

Main unit

Password

▲ ▼

User2

Tank 1********The Password
screen is displayed

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

BS

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

Full

Base screen 2 isdisplayed

ENT

Switch user account

Goto Screen Button(Switch to base screen 2)

Base screen 2
Can be displayed

User2

Base screen 2
Cannot be
displayed

User2

No user• Protecting the display of parts
Line Chart that can only be displayed with User2
Main unit

Main unit

Main unit

Password

▲ ▼

User2

********The Password
screen is displayed

1

2

3

Q

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

Line Chart isdisplayed

ENT

Switch user account

Goto Screen Button(Open password screen)Line Chart
Can be displayed

User2

Line Chart
Cannot be
displayed

User2

No user• Protecting the operation of parts
Numerical Input that can only be operated by User2
Main unit

Main unit

Main unit

Password

▲ ▼

User2

999

********

999

The Password
screen is displayed
Goto Screen Button(Open password screen)
Numerical
Input Can be
operated

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

BS

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

999

ENT

The Numerical Input
can be operated

Switch user accountNumerical Input
Can be operated

User2
User2

No user

24-8

999

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview● Protect Displays and Operations on the Main Unit
The user accounts that can display and operation screens and parts are only those assigned to the same security
group as the security group to which Permitted privileges have been set for the display and operation of screens andparts.
Privileges to display and operation screens and parts are configured on the Security tab in the properties dialog boxof those screens and parts.
Usage privileges can be configured only for parts with an input function.
Example: The user and security group for the part are set as follows:
User Name
Security Group

User2

User3

User4

GroupA

Administrator, GroupA

Administrator

Goto Screen Button (Open password screen)

Main unit

No.

Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Permitted

4GroupA

Permitted

Permitted

Numerical Input

999

Group Name

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Permitted

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Permitted

4GroupA

Permitted

Prohibited

24

ButtonLine Chart and Bar Chart
No.

Group Name

Display

No.
番号

Group
Name
グループ名

Display

Input

1

Administrator

Prohibited

1

Administrator

Prohibited

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

2

Operator

Permitted

Permitted

3

ReaderPermitted

3

ReaderPermitted

Permitted

4GroupA

Permitted

4GroupA

Permitted

Prohibited

If no user account has been selected, the parts that can be displayed and used are only those for which all security
groups have been set to Permitted.
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in GroupA, the parts for which Display has been set
to Permitted for GroupA are displayed. The parts for which Input has been set to Prohibited for GroupA cannot be
used.
Main unit

Main unit

Not
displayed

Main unit
Displayed

Password

▲ ▼

User2

********

999

Cannot be
operated

If no user is selected, only partsfor which Display has been set
to Permitted for all security
groups are displayed and only
parts for which Input has been
set to Permitted for all security
groups can be used

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

BS

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

999

ENT

Open the password screen with
the Goto Screen Button, enter
the password, and switch to
User2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

999

Cannot be
operated

For User2, parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted forGroupA are displayed, but parts for
User2
which Input has been set toProhibited for GroupA cannot be
used

24-9

User Accounts and the Security

Default user: NoneNo.

1 Overview
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in Administrator and GroupA, the parts for which
Display has been set to Permitted for GroupA will be displayed, and the parts for which Input has been set toPermitted for Administrator can be used.
Main unit

Main unit

Not
displayed

Main unit
Displayed

Password

▲ ▼

User3

********

999

Cannot be
operated

If no user is selected, only partsfor which Display has been set toPermitted for all security groups
are displayed and only parts forwhich Input has been set toPermitted for all security groups
can be used

999

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

BS

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

999

999

Can beoperated

ENT

Open the password screen with
the Goto Screen Button, enter the
password, and switch to User3

For User3, parts for which Display
has been set to Permitted forGroupA are displayed, and parts
User3
for which Input has been set toPermitted for Administrator canbe usedParts that are not displayed on the screen cannot be operated regardless of the input security group.

If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User4 in Administrator, the displayed parts for which Input
has been set to Permitted for Administrator can be used. Parts for which Display has been set to Prohibited for
Administrator are not displayed.
Main unit

Main unit

Not
displayed

Main unit
Not
displayed

Password

▲ ▼

User4

********

999

Cannot be
operated

If no user is selected, only partsfor which Display has been set
to Permitted for all security
groups are displayed and only
parts for which Input has been
set to Permitted for all security
groups can be used

999

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

BS

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

999

ENT

Open the password screen with
the Goto Screen Button, enter
the password, and switch to
User4

999

Can beoperated

For User4, parts for which Display
has been set to Prohibited for
Administrator are not displayed,
User4
and displayed parts for which
Input has been set to Permitted
for Administrator can be used

GroupA is not configured for User4, so the button in the lower right of the screen is not displayed. Parts thatare not displayed on the screen cannot be used, even by users in a security group for which Input has been
set to Permitted.

24-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2

Security Function Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for the Security function.

2.1

Creating and Editing User Accounts● Creating a User Account1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The Security dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Use Security functions check box.

24
User Accounts and the Security

The settings related to user accounts are displayed.
The user account already provided with WindO/I-NV4 is as follows.
No.:
User Name:
Password:
Security Group:

1
User(blank)Administrator, Operator, Reader

3 Click Add.

The New User Account dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual24-11

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

4 Specify the user number (1 to 15) in NumberThis number is used when switching the user account via the value of device address.

5 Enter the name for the new user in User Name.

The maximum number for the user name is 16 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
"*./:<>?\|• For the FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, do not set # at the beginning of the user name. User names start with #will prevent access to the FTP server of the main unit.

6 Enter the password in New Password.

The number for the password is 4 to 15. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.
To display the content of the password for New Password and Confirm Password, select the Show
Passwords check box in the Security dialog box.

7 Enter the password in Confirm Password that was entered in step 6.
8 Click the Group Membership tab.

Assign the security groups to the user being created.
Administrator, Operator, and Reader have already been provided in Security Group.

User1

User2

User3

Administrator

Operator

Administrator

Operator
Reader

If you will not add a new security group, proceed to step 17.
If you will not assign a security group, proceed to step 18.

24-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

9 Click Add.

The Security Settings dialog box is displayed.

10 Click Add.

The New Security Group dialog box is displayed.

11 Specify the Security Group number (4 to 15) in Number.

24
User Accounts and the Security

12 Enter the name for the new group in Group Name.

The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
“” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual24-13

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

13 Under Permission, set whether or not to permit the operations subject to password protection in No. 1 to 3.
Double clicking the Permission cells switches between Permitted and Prohibited.

Permitted and Prohibited cannot be changed for the operations subject to password protection in No. 4
to 15.

14 Click OK.

The group added is displayed in Security Group.

15 Repeat steps 10 to 14 and create all of the necessary user accounts.
16 Click OK.
The group added is displayed in Security Group.

24-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

17 Select the security groups in Security Group on the New User Account dialog box to assign to the user being
created, and then click << Copy.
The security groups are copied to To.

The security groups that you create can be used in multiple user accounts.

Created security
groups (12 max)

User1

User2

User3

User4

GroupAGroupB

GroupB

GroupCGroupB

GroupCGroupC

Multiple user accounts can use the same security groups

To delete the security groups assigned to the user, select the security groups to delete in To, and then click Delete.
• To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Select the security groups in Security Group and click Delete to delete the security groups. However,security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.

24

If you will not continue creating a user account, proceed to step 20.

19 Repeat steps 3 to 18 and create all of the necessary user accounts.
You can configure a user account to be enabled when the power of the main unit is turned on and whenswitching the operation mode in Default User.

20 Click OK.

The Security dialog box closes.
This concludes creating a user account.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-15

User Accounts and the Security

18 Click OK.

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Editing a User Account1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The Security dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the user account to edit and click Edit.

The Change User Account dialog box is displayed.

3 On the General tab, change User Name and New Password.

To display the content of the password for New Password and Confirm Password, select the Show
Passwords check box in the Security dialog box.

4 Enter the password in Confirm Password that was entered in step 3.

24-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

5 Click the Group Membership tab.

Change the security groups assigned to the user.
If you will not assign a security group or you will not delete a security group, proceed to step 7.

6 Select the security groups in Security Group to assign to the user being edited and click << Copy.
The security groups are copied to To.

If you will not delete a security group, proceed to step 8.
To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

24

The security groups are deleted from To.

• To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Select the security groups in Security Group and click Delete to delete the security groups. However,security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-17

User Accounts and the Security

7 Select the security groups assigned to the user to delete in To and click Delete.

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

8 Click OK.

9 Click OK to close the Security dialog box.
This concludes editing a user account.

● Deleting a User Account1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The Security dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the user account to delete and click Remove.
The user account is deleted.

3 Click OK.

The Security dialog box closes.
This concludes deleting a user account.

24-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2.2

Adding and Editing Security Groups● Adding a Security Group

1 On the Project window, double click Security Settings.
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click Add.

The New Security Group dialog box is displayed.

24
User Accounts and the Security

3 Specify the Security Group number (4 to 15) in Number.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-19

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

4 Enter the name for the new group in Group Name.

The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
“” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

5 Under Permission, set whether or not to permit the operations subject to password protection in No. 1 to 3.
Double clicking the Permission cells switches between Permitted and Prohibited.

Permitted and Prohibited cannot be changed for the operations subject to password protection in No. 4
to 15.

24-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

6 Click OK.

The group added is displayed in Security Group.

7 Click OK.

The Security Settings dialog box closes.

This concludes adding a security group.

24
User Accounts and the Security

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual24-21

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Changing the Name of a Security Group

1 On the Project window, double click Security Settings.
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the security group in Security Group to change the name of and click Rename.
The Change Security Group Name dialog box is displayed.

The group name for Administrator, Operator, and Reader cannot be changed.

3 Change the name of the security group to the new group name in New Name.
The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
“” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

4 Click OK.

The Change Security Group Name dialog box closes.

5 Click OK.

The Security Settings dialog box closes.

This concludes changing the name of a security group.

24-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Changing the Operation Privileges of a Security Group

1 On the Project window, double click Security Settings.
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Under Security Group, select the security group for which the operation privileges will be changed, and under
Permission, set whether or not to permit the operations subject to password protection in No. 1 to 3.
Double clicking the Permission cells switches between Permitted and Prohibited.

Permitted and Prohibited cannot be changed for the operations subject to password protection in No. 4
to 15.

24
User Accounts and the Security

3 Click OK.

The Security Settings dialog box closes.

This concludes creating a user account.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-23

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Deleting a Security Group

1 On the Project window, double click Security Settings.
The Security Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the security group in Security Group to delete and click Delete.
The security group is deleted.

To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

• Security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.
• Administrator, Operator, and Reader cannot be deleted.

3 Click OK.

The Security Settings dialog box closes.

This concludes deleting a security group.

24-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2.3

Protecting the Display and Operation of Screens and Parts● Protecting the Display of Screens
Here you will configure the security group for a screen to protect the display of that screen.
This section describes an example where the display of base screen 2 is protected when switching to base screen 2 bypressing the Goto Screen Button.
Main unit

Main unit
Base screen 1

Base screen 2

Goto Screen Button(Switch to base screen 2)

Tank 1
Full

Base screen 2

Base screen 2

Cannot be

Can be displayed

displayed

User2

No user

To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.

24

1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 24-11, create the following user account.
User Name
User2

Security Group

GroupATo automatically display the Password screen when the user attempts to switch to a base screen they cannot accesswith the current user account using the Goto Screen button, select the Change Screen check box and the Change
Screen automatically after entering Password check box in Open Password Screen automatically by thefollowing operations on the Options tab of the Security dialog box. For displaying the Password screen, refer to“4.1 Entering the Password on the Main Unit” on page 24-47.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-25

User Accounts and the Security

Configuration Procedure2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

2 Place a Goto Screen Button on base screen 1.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button.
4 Double-click the placed Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

5 Select Switch to Base Screen for Action Mode.

6 Specify the screen number of the base screen to switch to with Screen Number under Goto Screen.
2 is specified here.

7 Click OK.

Close the Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box.

24-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

8 Create the base screen to switch to and configure the security group.

On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow under New, and then click Base Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.

9 Specify the screen number of the base screen to switch to with Number on the General tab.
This is the same screen number as the screen number specified in step 6. 2 is specified here.

24
User Accounts and the Security

10 Click the Security tab.

11 Change Display to Permitted for the security group that will be permitted to display the base screen.
Set Display to Permitted for GroupA.

12 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and click OK.
The Screen Properties dialog box closes.

This concludes configuring the project to protect the display of screens.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-27

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Switch to Base Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Main unit
Base screen 1
Press the Goto Screen Button

No user

2 Press ▼ and select User2.

Password
▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

ENT

▲ and ▼ buttons are displayed only after you select the Use Security functions check box in the Security
dialog box.

3 Enter the password and press ENT.

Password
▲ ▼

User2

********
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

BS

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

1

ENT

2

If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 and the Password screen closes.
Base screen 2 is displayed.
Main unit
Base screen 2
Tank 1
Full

User2

24-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Protecting the Display of Parts
Here you will configure the security group for a part to protect the display of that part.
This section describes an example where the display of the Line Chart is protected.
Goto Screen Button(Open password screen)

Main unit

Main unit

Line Chart

Line Chart

CannotCan be displayed

be displayed

User2

No user

To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.

24

Configuration Procedure

User Accounts and the Security

1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 24-11, create the following user account.
User Name
User2

Security Group

GroupA

2 Create a Line Chart and configure the display security group.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Line Chart.
4 Double-click the placed Line Chart and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual24-29

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

5 Click the Security tab.

6 Change Display to Permitted for the security group that will be permitted to display the Line Chart.
Set Display to Permitted for GroupA.

7 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and click OK.
The Properties of Line Chart dialog box closes.

8 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the base screen.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

9 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button.

24-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

10 Double-click the placed Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

11 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode.

24
User Accounts and the Security
12 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the base screen with Coordinates

X, Y.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

13 Click OK.

The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the display of a part.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual24-31

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Open Password Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Main unit

Press the Goto Screen Button
No user

2 Press ▼ and select User2.

Password
▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

ENT

▲ and ▼ buttons are displayed only after you select the Use Security functions check box in the Security
dialog box.

3 Enter the password and press ENT.

Password
▲ ▼

User2

********
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

BS

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

1

ENT

2

If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen
closes.
The Line Chart is displayed.
Main unit

User2

24-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure● Protecting the Operation of Parts
Here you will configure the security group for a part to protect the operation of that part.
This section describes an example where the operation of the Numerical Input is protected.
Goto Screen Button(Open password screen)

Main unit

Main unit

999

999

Numerical Input
Cannot be

999

The keypad is not displayed,

Numerical Input

nothing can be operated

Can be operated

operated

User2

No user

To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.

24

Configuration Procedure

User Accounts and the Security

1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 24-11, create the following user account.
User Name
User2

Security Group

GroupA

2 Create a Numerical Input and configure the input security group.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Input.

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Numerical Input.
4 Double-click the placed Numerical Input and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual24-33

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

5 Click the Security tab.

6 Change Input to Permitted for the security group that will be permitted to use the Numerical Input.
Set Input to Permitted for GroupA.

7 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and click OK.
The Properties of Numerical Input dialog box closes.

8 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the base screen.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.

9 Click a point on the edit screen where you wish to place the Goto Screen Button.

24-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure

10 Double-click the placed Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.

11 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode.

24
User Accounts and the Security
12 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the base screen with Coordinates

X, Y.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.
X:

0 to (base screen horizontal size - 1)Y:

0 to (base screen vertical size - 1)

13 Click OK.

The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the operation of a part.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-35

2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Open Password Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Main unit

999

Press the Goto Screen Button
No user

2 Press ▼ and select User2.

Password
▲ ▼

User2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

ENT

▲ and ▼ buttons are displayed only after you select the Use Security functions check box in the Security
dialog box.

3 Enter the password and press ENT.

Password
▲ ▼

User2

********
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

Q

BS

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

1

ENT

2

If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen
closes.
Main unit

999

999

User2

24-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Security Dialog Box

3

Security Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Security dialog box.

3.1

Security Dialog Box
The passwords and security groups assigned to user accounts are collectively managed in the Security dialog box.

24

● General Tab■ Use Security functions
Select this check box to protect access to data and to protect displays and operations on the main unit by accounts.
The settings related to user accounts are displayed.
When this check box is cleared, the switching to the System Mode, monitor display, or downloading or uploading data
are protected by a single password. Note, the main unit is not password protected if Password is left blank.

User Name:Enter the name for the user account.
The maximum number for the user name is 16 characters. Only alphanumeric characters andsymbols can be used.

• You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
"*./:<>?\|• For the FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, do not set # at the beginning of the user name. User names start with #will prevent access to the FTP server of the main unit.
Password:

Enter the password.
The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only uppercase alphabetic charactersand numbers can be used.

Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-37

User Accounts and the Security■ Show Passwords
Select this check box to display the characters entered in Password under Users for this project. When this checkbox is cleared, the passwords are displayed with * (asterisk).

3 Security Dialog Box

Confirm Password:

Re-enter the same password.
This option is only displayed when the Show Passwords check box is cleared.

■ Users for this projectNo.:

Displays the number (1 to 15) used when switching the user account via the value of device
address. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User Account dialog box. For details,
refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 24-39.

User Name:

Displays the name for the user account. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User
Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User
Account Dialog Box” on page 24-39.

Password:

Displays the password of the user account with *(asterisk). Double clicking the cell displays the
Change User Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box andChange User Account Dialog Box” on page 24-39.
To display the password characters, select the Show Passwords check box.

Security Group:

Displays all of the security groups for user accounts. Double clicking the cell displays the
Change User Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box andChange User Account Dialog Box” on page 24-39.

■ Add
This button adds a user account. You can create a maximum of 15. Click this button to display the New User
Account dialog box. In the New User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are
assigned to the user account. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog
Box” on page 24-39.
■ EditSelect a number in Users for this project and click this button to display the Change User Account dialog box. In
the Change User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are changed. For details, refer
to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 24-39.
■ RemoveThis button deletes the user account with the selected number. Select a number and click this button.
■ Default User
Select the user account to be enabled when the power of the main unit is turned on and when switching theoperation mode.
If None is selected, no user account is selected when the power of the main unit is turned on and when the operation
mode is changed. Screens and parts cannot be displayed or operated that are protected by a security group.

24-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Security Dialog Box
New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box
In the New User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are assigned to an account andthat user account is added.
In the Change User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups for the selected user
account are changed.
General Tab

When Edit was clicked and the Change User Account dialog box was displayed, this item displays the selected user
account number.
■ User NameEnter the name for the user account.
The maximum number is 16 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
"*./:<>?\|• For the FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, do not set # at the beginning of the user name. User names start with #will prevent access to the FTP server of the main unit.
■ New Password
Enter the password.
The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.
To display the content of the password for New Password and Confirm Password, select the Show
Passwords check box in the Security dialog box.
■ Confirm Password
Re-enter the same password.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-39

24
User Accounts and the Security■ NumberIn the New User Account dialog box, this setting specifies the number (1 to 15) when switching the account via thevalue of device address.

3 Security Dialog Box
Group Membership Tab■ To: (user name being configured)
Displays the user name and the list of security groups assigned to the user.
■ << Copy
This button assigns the security groups to the user displayed in To.
Select the security groups in Security Group and click this button to add them to To.
■ Delete
This button deletes the security groups assigned to the user.
Select the security groups in To and click this button.
■ Security Group
This item displays a list of all the security groups. The provided security groups (Administrator, Operator, and Reader)are grayed out if assigned to another user account.
■ Add
This button adds a security group. You can create a maximum of 12.
Click this button to display the Security Settings dialog box. New security groups are added in the Security
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Adding a Security Group” on page 24-19.
■ Rename
Select a security group in Security Group and click this button to display the Change Security Group Namedialog box. Change the name of the security group in the Change Security Group Name dialog box. The maximum
number for the group name is 15 characters.
“

24-40

” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Security Dialog Box
Security Settings Dialog Box
On the Group tab in the Security Settings dialog box, the security group can be managed collectively including
configuring for the parts and adding or deleting security groups. Access permission for Custom Web Page can be set
for each Security Group in the Web Page tab.
Group Tab

24

Number:

Displays the number (1 to 15) of the Security Group.

Security Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

■ Operation Authority Setting
Displays a list of privilege settings for operations subject to password protection in the security group selected under
Security Group.
No.:

Displays the number of the operations subject to password protection (1 to 17).

Operation:

Displays details about the operations subject to password protection.

Permission:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the operation. Only operations set to Permitted
can be used with the selected security group.
Only operation privilege settings (1 to 3) can be changed for user-created security groups (4 to 15).
Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted and Prohibited.

You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Permission cell.
■ Add
This button adds a security group. You can create a maximum of 12.
Click this button to display the New Security Group dialog box. Set the details of the security group in the New
Security Group dialog box. For details, refer to “Adding a Security Group” on page 24-19.
■ Delete
Deletes the security groups selected for Security Group. For details, refer to “Deleting a Security Group” on page
24-24.
■ Rename
Select a security group in Security Group and click this button to display the Change Security Group Namedialog box. Change the name of the security group in the Change Security Group Name dialog box. For details,
refer to “Changing the Name of a Security Group” on page 24-22.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-41

User Accounts and the Security■ Security Group
Displays the list of security groups used on the main unit.

3 Security Dialog Box
Web Page Tab(Security Group Name)(Access Permission)■ Custom Web Page Access Management
Permissions for display and operation of Custom Web Page are set for each Security Group.

24-42

File Name:

Displays the file name of the Custom Web Page created by the Web Page Editor. For details
about the Web Page Editor, refer to Chapter 27 “6.1 Web Page Editor” on page 27-16.

Security Group Name:

Displays the name of the security group.

Access Permission:

Displays whether or not to permit the display and operation of the Custom Web Page of themain unit from the web browser. Double clicking the cell switches between Permitted andProhibited.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Security Dialog Box
New Security Group Dialog Box■ NumberSpecify the number (4 to 15) for the Security Group.

24■ Group NameEnter the name of the new group. The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.

■ (Operation Authority Setting)
Displays a list of privilege settings for operations subject to password protection in the security group selected under
Security Group.
No.:

Displays the number of the operations subject to password protection (1 to 17).

Operation:

Displays details about the operations subject to password protection.

Permission:

Displays whether or not there is permission to use the operation. Only operations set to Permitted
can be used.
Only operation privilege settings (1 to 3) can be changed. Double clicking the cell switches between
Permitted and Prohibited.

You can also switch between Permitted and Prohibited by right-clicking on a Permission cell.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-43

User Accounts and the Security“

3 Security Dialog Box● Options Tab■ Use Password to open a Project
Select this check box and enter a password to protect the project with a dedicated password when opening it.
The number for the password is 4 to 15 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
The operations subject to password protection are as follows.
• Opening projects• Reusing screens• Opening projects after uploading project data
Re-enter the password that was entered in Use Password to open Project.

Confirm Password:

Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.
■ Change User by Device Address
Select this check box to switch the user account according to the value of device address.
The user account is specified by using the number on the General tab.
(Trigger Device Address): Specifies the word device to write the number.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.
Example: The trigger device address is D0 and the default user is selected as User1.
No.

User Name

1

2

3

User1

User2

User3

(Default user)

The user account switches according to the value of device address.
Trigger device address
D0 value

1

2

3

4

0

User1

User2

User3

User3

User1

Switch to user
account no. 1

Switch to user
account no. 2

Switch to user
account no. 3

None

Switch to default
user accountUser accountAction24-44

The user account is not switched when the value of

If the value of device address isdevice address is a number not configured to a user

0, the user is switched to theaccount or an invalid number.

default user.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Security Dialog Box■ Store current logging-in User Name to Device Address
Select this check box to store the user name to Device Address currently logged in to the main unit.
(Top Device Address):

Specify the word device to use. This option uses 9 words of address numbers startingfrom the address number of the specified device address. You can only specify aninternal device.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

■ Back to Default User
Select this check box to automatically switch to the default user when the main unit is unused for an extended periodof time.
After: Specify the time (0 to 60 minutes) to switch to the default user after the main unit is last used.
If 0 is set, the main unit switches back to the default user immediately, even if the user account was changed.
■ Check the Status of Password Entry
Select this check box to check the entry status of the password on the Password screen.
(Destination Device Address): Specifies a word device to write the password entry status.
Clickto display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure,refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

Bit number

Function

Status0This bit stores the information when the correct password wasentered on the Password screen and ENT was pressed.

0: Password being entered
1: Correct password entered1

This bit stores the information when an incorrect password wasentered on the Password screen and ENT was pressed.

0: Password being entered
1: Incorrect password entered2

This bit stores the information when CAN was pressed on the
Password screen.

0: Password being entered
1: Password entry canceled

3 to 7

Reserved-■ Customize Password Input Screens
Select this check box to customize the Password Input Screens.
When this check box is selected, the Password Input Screen folder gets displayed in the Project window and theStandard Password Input Screen gets created automatically in screen numbers 3026 to 3028.
This option can only be set when the Use Security functions on the General tab is selected.
Default Screen:

Specifies the screen number (3026 to 3033) to display first when the Password Input
Screen opens.

■ Open Password Screen automatically by the following operations
Operate Part Object:

Select this check box to automatically display the Password screen when an unauthorizeduser presses the password protected object.

Change Screen:

Select this check box to automatically display the Password screen when an unauthorizeduser attempts to change a screen that is password protected.

Change Screen automatically after entering Password:

Select this check box to close the Password screen
and automatically change the screen when theentered password is correct.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-45

24
User Accounts and the Security

The following bits change to 1 depending on the password input status. These bits become 0 when the Password
screen opens or when a button other than ENT or CAN is pressed on the Password screen.

3 Security Dialog Box■ Report when Not Authorized User operates
Select this check box to write 1 in the Report Device Address when one of the following actions is performed.
• Switching to a base screen that the current user account is not allowed to display.
• Opening a popup that the current user account is not allowed to display.
• Manipulating a part set to a security group that the current user account is not allowed to manipulate.
(Report Device Address):

Specifies the report device address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer
to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-72.

24-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Password Input

4

Password Input
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

When a password is configured for a user account, the user is prompted to enter their password with the following
operations.
• Accessing password protected data
• Executing password protected displays and operations

4.1

Entering the Password on the Main Unit
To execute password protected operations, the user must open the Password screen and switch the user account.
The Password screen is opened with a Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command configured with Password
Screen. The Password screen is also automatically displayed on the main unit when the following operations are
executed.
• When the Change Screen check box is selected under Open Password Screen automatically by thefollowing operations on the Options tab in the Security dialog box• Switching to the System Mode or displaying the Device Monitor with the Maintenance screen, Goto Screen Button,
Multi-Button, Goto Screen Command, or Multi-Command• Downloading or uploading project data or PLC programs with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command• Executing the USB Autorun function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-47

User Accounts and the Security• Operations where the Password screen is not displayed are as follows.
- Switching the base screen using the System Area
- Displaying the alarm screen for the alarm log- Opening the keypad with the Numerical Input or Character Input- Opening the Ref. screen with the Alarm Log Display- For screens that are already open when the user account was switched by opening the Password
screen with the Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command• When the user account is switched, the displayed base screen is reset. When the current screen is reset,
the displayed Popup Screen is closed and the internal devices restart as if the Base Screen is switched.
The behavior of the internal devices varies based on the internal devices. For details, refer to Chapter 35“Internal Devices” on page 35-1.
• Enter the password for projects created with WindO/I-NV4 Ver. 1.11.4 or earlier using only 4 to 15
uppercase letters and numbers.

24

4 Password Input● Password Input Screens provided by the Main Unit Configuration

Keypad for Upper Case and Number Input

Password▲ ▼User Name

User

Password********
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

ENT

Keypad for Lower Case and Number Input

Keypad for Sign Input

Password

Password▲ ▼User********

▲ ▼

User

********

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

@

#

$

_

&

-

+

(

)

/

q

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

p CLR

*

“

‘

:

;

!

?

,

.

~ CLR

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

l CAN

123
`
ABC

|

^

=

{

}

\

<

> CAN

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

123
%
abc

[

]

ENT

BS

ENT

■ User Name
Displays the selected user name.
■ ▲, ▼
Switches the user name. This option is displayed only when the Use Security functions is selected.
■ Password
The password entered gets displayed as *(asterisks).
■ A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, @ to ]Enters alphanumeric characters and symbols in Password.
■*1,*1, !?#*1, A1*2, a1*2, ?#*2

Switches to the Keypad for Upper Case and Number Input, the Keypad for Lower Case and Number Input or the
Keypad for Sign Input.

■ CAN
Clears the entered password and cancels input. The Password screen closes.
■ CLR
Clears the entered password and continues input.
■ ENT
Confirms the entered password and starts verifying the user name and password.
If the entered password is correct, the Password screen closes.
If the entered password was incorrect, the password entered on the Password screen is deleted and the screen
returns to input mode.
*1 FT2J, HG2J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 FT1J, HG1J, HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P only

24-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Password Input

4.2

Entering the Password in WindO/I-NV4
When a user account assigned with Administrator is configured with a password, or when a dedicated password for
opening the project has been set, the Enter Password dialog box is displayed in WindO/I-NV4 as required and theuser is prompted to enter their password.
Enter the password for projects created with WindO/I-NV4 Ver. 1.11.4 or earlier using only 4 to 15
uppercase letters and numbers.
The operations that display the Enter Password dialog box are as follows.
• Opening projects• Reusing screens• Downloading a project data
• Downloading data to an external memory device*1• Downloading data to an external memory device*1 while the main unit is running• Uploading a project data
• Uploading data from an external memory device*1• Delete data stored in the internal memory• Deleting data in external memory device*1• Formatting*2 external memory device*3

24● Enter Password Dialog Box
When dedicated password for opening project isrequired, the following dialog box appears.

User Accounts and the Security

When Administrator or Other Operation password isrequired, the following dialog box appears.

■ User Name
Selects the user name. This item can only be selected when multiple user accounts are registered.
■ Password
Enter the password. The password entered gets displayed as *(asterisks).

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-49

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit

5

Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

On the main unit, you can open the User Account Setting Screen. Use this screen to edit, add, and delete user
accounts.

5.1

Opening the User Account Setting Screen
To open the User Account Setting Screen, use the Goto Screen Button, Multi-Button, Goto Screen Command, or MultiCommand that has been set to Open User Account Setting Screen.
Main unit
User Account Setting Screen

User ID

X

1

User Name

User1

Password******

Security
Group

Admin
Operator
Reader

Edit

X

User ID

1

User Name

User1

Password******

Security
Group

Admin
Operator
ReaderEdit

DetailAdd Delete

DetailAdd Delete• Set a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the Open User Account Setting
Screen on the screen.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “3 Goto Screen Button” on page 7-39.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “6 Multi-Button” on page 7-111.
 For details, refer to Chapter 11 “3 Goto Screen Command” on page 11-19.
 For details, refer to Chapter 11 “6 Multi-Command” on page 11-39.
• An Administrator user account is required to open the User Account Setting Screen.
• When opening the User Account Setting Screen, all other Popup Screens are closed.

24-50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit

5.2

Editing a User Account● Checking User Account Information
You can load user accounts configured in the project data and edit their information.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button or Multi-Button that has been set to Open User Account Setting Screen or execute
the Goto Screen Command or Multi-Command.

The User Account Setting Screen will be displayed.

2 Press ▲ or ▼ to change the user number of the user account to edit.
X

User ID

1

User Name

User1

Password******

Security
Group

Admin
Operator
ReaderEdit

DetailAdd Delete

24

3 Press Edit.

User Accounts and the Security

X

User ID

2

User Name

User2

Password******
GroupA

SecurityGroup

DetailEdit

Add Delete

4 Change the user name.

If you will not change the user name, proceed to step 5.
1. Press the User Name input frame.

User ID

2

User Name

User2

Password******X

GroupA
Security
Group
Edit
User.

Change削除
編集
OK 追加CANCELWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-51

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit
2. Enter the user name and press ENT.

Test02_
0

1

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

BS

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

CLR

!

“

#

+

,

-

.

/

:

;

<

=

> CAN

?

@

[

\

]

^

_

`

{

|

}

~

Alpha
bet

ENT
SP

<Cur. Cur.>2
5 Changes the password.

If you will not change the password, proceed to step 6.

1. Press the Password input frame.

X

User ID

2

User Name

Test02

Password******
GroupA

SecurityGroup

Change

Edit
User.

編集
削除
OK 追加CANCEL

2. Enter the password and press ENT.

1

2

Password02_

Hide

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

p CLR

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

l CAN

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

1
q

ENT
2

Press Hide to display the password with *(asterisks). Press Show to display the password with characters.

24-52

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit

6 Change the security group assignments.

If you will not change the security group assignments, proceed to step 7.

1. Press Change.

X

User ID

2

User Name

Test02

Password

Password02
GroupA

Security
Group
Edit
User.

Change編集
OK 追加CANCEL
削除

2. Select security groups to assign and clear security groups to remove.
• Security groups are selected and cleared each time the names are pressed.
• Press Gr. 1~5, Gr. 6~10, and Gr. 11~15 to switch between the different sets of five security groups.

Gr.
6~10

Gr.
11~15

Gr. 1

Administrator

Gr. 2

Operator

Gr. 3

ReaderGr. 4

GroupA

Gr. 5

GroupB

Gr.
1~5

Gr.
6~10

Gr. 1

Administrator

Gr. 2

Operator

Gr. 3

ReaderGr. 4

GroupA

Gr. 5

GroupB

Close

24
User Accounts and the Security

Gr.
1~5

3. Press Close.

Gr.
11~15

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Close

24-53

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit

7 Press OK.
X

User ID

2

User Name

Test02

Password

Password02

Security
Group

Admin
GroupA

Change

Edit
User.

編集
削除
OK 追加CANCEL

User ID

2

User Name

Test02

Password

Password02

8 Press OK.
X

Admin
GroupA
セキュリティ Succeed
グループ
OK
編集

変更

追加

削除

The user name, password, and security group assignments will be changed.

X

User ID

2

User Name

Test02

Password**********

Security
Group

Admin
GroupA

Edit

DetailAdd Delete

This concludes editing a user account.

24-54

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit
● Adding a user accounts
Adding a user accounts.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button or Multi-Button that has been set to Open User Account Setting Screen or execute
the Goto Screen Command or Multi-Command.

The User Account Setting Screen will be displayed.

2 Press Add.
X

User ID

1

User Name

User1

Password******

Security
Group

Admin
Operator
ReaderEdit

DetailAdd Delete

3 Enter the User Name.

24

1. Press the User Name input frame.

User Accounts and the Security

User ID

X

5

User Name
Password
SecurityGroup

ChangeAdd
User.

OK 追加CANCEL
編集
削除

User ID displays the lowest user number (1 to 15) of all free numbers.

2. Enter the user name and press ENT.

User5_
0

1

2

3

4

5

1

6

7

8

9

BS

‘

(

)

*

CLR

!

“

#

$

%

&

+

,

-

.

/

:

;

<

=

> CAN

?

@

[

\

]

^

_

`

{

|

}

~

Alpha
bet

ENT
SP

<Cur. Cur.>

2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-55

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit

4 Enter the password.
1. Press the Password input frame.

X

User ID

5

User Name

User5

Password
SecurityGroup

Change

Add
User.

編集
削除
OK 追加CANCEL

2. Enter the password and press ENT.

1

2

3

4

5

Pass05_

Hide

6

7

8

9

0

BS

1
q

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

p CLR

123
a
ABC

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

l CAN

!?# z

x

c

v

b

n

m

ENT
2

Press Hide to display the password with *(asterisks). Press Show to display the password with characters.

5 Assign the security groups.
1. Press Change.

User ID

5

User Name

User5

Password

Pass05

Security
Group
Add
User.

24-56

X

Change編集
削除
OK 追加CANCELWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit
2. Select security groups to assign and clear security groups to remove.
• Security groups are selected and cleared each time the names are pressed.
• Press Gr. 1~5, Gr. 6~10, and Gr. 11~15 to switch between the different sets of five security groups.

Gr.
1~5

Gr.
6~10

Gr.
11~15

Gr. 1

Administrator

Gr. 2

Operator

Gr. 3

ReaderGr. 4

GroupA

Gr. 5

GroupB

Gr.
1~5

Gr.
6~10

Gr. 1

Administrator

Gr. 2

Operator

Gr. 3

ReaderGr. 4

GroupA

Gr. 5

GroupB

User ID

5

User Name

User5

Password

Pass05Close

3. Press Close.

Gr.
11~15

Close

24
User Accounts and the Security

6 Press OK.
XGroupB
SecurityGroup

ChangeAdd
User.

OK 追加CANCEL
編集
削除

User ID

5

User Name

User5

Password

Pass05

7 Press OK.
X

Admin
GroupA
セキュリティ Succeed
グループ
OK
編集

変更

追加

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

削除

24-57

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit
The user account will be added.

X

User ID

5

User Name

User5

Password******
GroupB

SecurityGroup

DetailEdit

Add Delete

This concludes adding the User Account.

● Deleting a User Account
The loaded user account can be deleted.

1 Press the Goto Screen Button or Multi-Button that has been set to Open User Account Setting Screen or execute
the Goto Screen Command or Multi-Command.

The User Account Setting Screen will be displayed.

2 Press ▲ or ▼ to change the user number of the user account to delete.
X

User ID

1

User Name

User1

Password******

Security
Group

Admin
Operator
ReaderEdit

DetailAdd Delete

3 Press Delete.
X

User ID

5

User Name

User5

Password******
GroupB

SecurityGroup

Detail

Edit

24-58

Add Delete

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit

4 Press OK.
X

User ID

5

User Name

User5

Password******
GroupB

SecurityGroup

ChangeDeleteUser.

OK 追加CANCEL
編集
削除

User ID

5

5 Press OK.
X

User Name
Password
Admin
GroupA
セキュリティ Succeed
グループ

追加

User Accounts and the Security

OK
編集

24

変更

削除

The user account will be deleted.

User ID

X

5

User Name
Password
SecurityGroup

DetailEdit

Add Delete

This concludes deleting the User Account.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

24-59

5 Editing User Accounts on the Main Unit

5.3

User Account Setting Screen Configuration

X

User ID

1

User Name

User1

Password******

Security
Group

Admin
Operator
ReaderEdit

DetailAdd Delete■ User ID
Displays the user number of the user account configured in the running project.
■ User Name
Displays the user name of the user account configured in the running project.
When editing or adding a user account, press the user name input field, and then enter the user name with thedisplayed keyboard.
■ Password
Displays the password of the displayed user account with * (asterisk).
When editing or adding a user account, press the password input field, and then enter the password with thedisplayed keyboard.
You can hide or show password in the Password Input Screen. Press Hide to display the password with*(asterisks).
■ Security Group
Displays the security group assigned to the displayed user account.
■ Detail / Change
Detail is displayed when the user account is loaded. Press Detail to display the security group details screen
where you can check details about the assigned security groups.
Change is displayed when the user account is edited or added. Press Change to display the change security
groups screen. You can change the security group assignments.
■ , 
Changes the user number and loads the corresponding user account.
■ EditUsed to change the user name, password, and security group assignments of the displayed user account.
■ Add
Adds a user account.
■ Delete
Deletes a displayed user account.
■X
Closes User Account Setting Screen.

24-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 25

ScriptThis chapter describes the script function, editing and management of the script, definition method, and description

sample in HMI functions. For details about the script function in Control functions*1, refer to Chapter 26 “Script
Instructions” in the Ladder Programming Manual.

1

About the Script Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

Overview of the Script Function● What is the script function?
Complex processes such as conditional branching, logical operation, arithmetic operation, functions, etc., can be
programmed in a text format using Script Function in HMI functions.
The scripts can be executed in a Script Command, a Global Script, or a Cyclic Script*2.

■ Description and management of the script
The script is programmed by WindO/I-NV4 script editor, and managed by Script Manager.

■ Example of using the script
As an example, when reading the data from the external device and displaying and editing on the main unit, the loadon the external device can be reduced for processes such as conditional branching or function calculation, which
apply a heavy load on the external device, by processing it with a script on the main unit.
// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D10
if ([D 10] <= 9){[D 10] = [D 10] + 10;}
else{[D 10] = [D 10] + 20;}// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D11
if ([D 11] <= 19){[D 11] = [D 11] + 20;}
else{[D 11] = [D 11] + 40;}// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D12
if ([D 12] <= 29){[D 12] = [D 12] + 30;}
else{[D 12] = [D 12] + 60;}// Change the additional value// depending on the value of D13
if ([D 13] <= 39){[D 13] = [D 13] + 40;}
else{[D 13] = [D 13] + 80;}

D10
Read the data not processed0

D11 10
D12 30
D13 50Main unit

External device

Process with script to decrease
the load of external device.

D10

0 → 10

D11 10 → 30
D12 30 → 90

Write the result

D13 50 → 130

D10

10

D11

30

D12

90

D13 130

Get the result by processing with script*1 FT2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-1

25
Script• By using the Script Editor, conditional expressions, operators, and functions can be inserted by selecting
them from a list, and an error in the script can be checked as well. The script can also be exported as a text
file, so the script can be edited by a text editor such as Notepad, and the edited script can be imported backinto the Script Editor by saving it as a text file. For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 25-12.
• Script Manager can manage the script collectively by adding, deleting, organizing, importing, exporting,etc., the script created by the Script Editor. For details, refer to “2.2 Script Manager” on page 25-7.

1 About the Script Function

1.2

Types and Trigger Conditions of the Script in HMI Functions● Types of scripts
There are 3 types of scripts used.
■ Script Command
This is a script that executes in accordance with trigger conditions in the same way as other parts, such as switches orlamps, for each screen.
• It is executed only in the screens where it is placed.
• Multiple scripts can be set for each screen.
For details about setup, refer to Chapter 11 “5 Script Command” on page 11-33.
■ Global Script
This is a script that operates within the whole project. This script is executed at the end of the scan process in HMI
functions in accordance with the trigger condition. The amount of Global Scripts which can be used in a project ismaximum of 16 scripts. For details about setup, refer to “3 Global Script” on page 25-16.
■ Cyclic Script*1
This is a script that can be repeated in fixed intervals independent of the scan process of the main unit. Input delay
and output delay of the expansion module can be kept to a minimum by this script.
Only one cyclic script can be set to a project. For details about setup, refer to Chapter 4 “3.11 Expansion Module Tab”
on page 4-68.
● Trigger condition of the script
Trigger conditions that can be set for the script are as follows:
Trigger Condition
Rising-edge

Falling-edge

Satisfy thecondition

Whilesatisfying thecondition

Fixed Period

PeriodScript Command

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Global Script

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

Cyclic Script*1

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Script■ Rising-edge
Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 0 to 1.
■ Falling-edge
Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 1 to 0.
■ Satisfy the condition
Script is executed when the set condition is met.
This can only be set for the Script Command.
■ While satisfying the condition
Script is executed while the set condition is met.
This can only be set for the Script Command.
■ Fixed Period
Script is executed as an interrupt process at set intervals.
This can only be set for the Cyclic Script.
■ Period
Script is executed with the set time as the minimum cycle time.
This can only be set for the Script Command and the Global Script.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

25-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 About the Script Function

1.3

Data Type of the Script
It is required to set the data type appropriate for the range of data to be used, such as the maximum and minimum
values of the data used in the script, negative numbers or real numbers required, etc., considering what is to beprocessed with the script. Data type is set by the Script Editor. For the setting method, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” onpage 25-12.

● Data Types
There are 7 types of data that can be processed by the script function.
For details about the data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
Types of the data type

Required word countRange that can be processed

UBIN16(W)

1

0

to

65,535

BIN16(I)1-32,768

to

32,767UBIN32(D)

2

0

to

4,294,967,295

BIN32(L)2-2,147,483,648

to2,147,483,647

BCD4(B)

1

-999

to

9,999

BCD8(EB)2-9,999,999

to99,999,999-3.4×1038

to-1.18×10-38

Float32(F)02
1.18×10-38

to

3.4×1038

25

Function that can be used is based on the selected data type. For details, refer to “4 Script Definition
Method” on page 25-21.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25-3

ScriptWindLDR data types are displayed as follows: BIN16(W) as Word(W), BIN16(I) as Integer(I), BIN32(D) as
Double(D), BIN32(L) as Long(L), and Float32(F) as Float(F).

1 About the Script Function

1.4

Script Error in HMI Functions
This section describes the types, cause, and information of script errors.

● Error information
Script error information is stored in the following locations. An error message is displayed on the screen when a script
error has occurred.
Category

Storage location

Stored value

Bit 10 of the System Area address
number +2

Existence of a script error

No error

1

Error

1 to
32,000Script ID of the script with an error HMI Special Data Register LSD52

Types of script errors

0

HMI Special Data Register LSD53

Script ID

1

Processing error

2

Execution time over error

3

Writing count error

4

Indirect device error

5

Parameter error

6

Cyclic Script execution time over7

Fixed interval execution error

If there is a script error in HMI functions, bit 10 (11th bit) of the beginning device address +2 (third wordfrom the beginning) of the System Area will be 1.
System Area 1

System Area 2

System Area 3

System Area 4

Beginningdevice address

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

+6

+7

+8

+9

1st word

2nd word

3rd word

4th word

5th word

6th word

7th word

8th word

9th word

10th word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

11th bit

Beginning device address of the System Area is set in the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
For details about the System Area, refer to Chapter 4 “System Area” on page 4-32.
● Types and causes of script errors
Script will stop running when an error occurs.
Types of script error
Processing error

Cause
Dividend was divided by 0 for division and residue calculation.
Data types are BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F) and value out of range is specified.

Execution time over error
Cyclic Script execution
time overWriting count error

Indirect device error

Parameter error

The execution time for one script exceeded 3,000 milliseconds.
The total number of data written to the control devices*1 and the external device address in
one script has exceeded 64.
During the indirect read of control device*1 or external device address, the value of external
device address was read.
Indirect read or indirect write of control device*1 or external device address is performed with
the Global Script.
Value out of range was specified as argument for LINE function, RECTANGLE function, or
CIRCLE function.
Executed the LINE function, RECTANGLE function, and CIRCLE function in a Cyclic Script.

Fixed interval execution
error

Execution interval is automatically adjusted since the execution of the Cyclic Script has taken
more time than half of the execution interval specified in the Cyclic Script.

*1 FT2J/1J only

25-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script2

Editing and Management of the Script
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

Script Registration Procedure
This section describes the procedure to create a script and register it in the project.
The registered script can be used in a Multi-Button, Script Command, Multi-Command, Global Script, and Cyclic Script.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Script Manager.
Script Manager opens.

2 Click Add.
Script Editor opens.

25
Script3 Specify Script ID.
When creating a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 32000).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25-5

2 Editing and Management of the Script

4 Enter Script Name.
Maximum number for the script name is 40 characters.

5 Select Data Type.
Be sure to match the Data Type of the script with the types of data being used within the script.
For example, if a fractional value is contained in a script, select Float32(F) for the Data Type of the script.
If there are only integer values from 0 to 65,535, select UBIN16(W).

6 Code a program in Script.
To create a script using the samples provided by WindO/I-NV4, under Function List, select Category andFunction, and then click Insert Format. The sample shown in Format is inserted at the cursor position in
Script.

7 When the script is finished, click OK.
The created script is shown in Script List.

8 Click Close.
The scripts are saved in the project data and Script Manager closes.

When you are in the following dialog boxes, clicking
will open the Script Manager. When you close the
Script Manager, you will be taken back to the original dialog box.
• Global Script General tab• Script Command properties General tab• Multi-function script properties for Multi-Buttons and Multi-Commands• Project Settings Expansion Module tab

25-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script

2.2

Script Manager
Script Manager can add, delete and manage the script created by Script Editor.

■ Script List
Displays a list of registered scripts.

25

Displays the script ID (1-32000) of the registered scripts.

Error:

OK is displayed when there is no error in the registered script and NG is displayed when there is an error.

Script Name:

Displays the script name of the registered scripts.

Used:

Displays how many times the registered script has used. Double clicking the usage count displayed in
Script List allows you to check where it is used.

■ Script
Displays the contents of the script selected in the script list.
■ Add
Displays the Script Editor dialog box to add a script.
For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 25-12.
■ EditDisplays the Script Editor dialog box to allow editing of the selected script. For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” onpage 25-12.
■ Delete
Deletes the script selected in the script list.
If a script is used in a project or parts, it cannot be deleted.
■ Reduce
Deletes the scripts that are registered in the script list but are not used in the project.
■ Import
Imports a saved script file with Export. Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer to“Importing script” on page 25-10.
■ Export
Saves a selected script in Script List as a file.
Click this button to display the Browse For Folder dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving registered script as a file”
on page 25-8.
The saved script file can be imported using Import.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25-7

ScriptScript ID:

2 Editing and Management of the Script■ Select
The highlighted script in the script list is selected and the Script Manager is closed.
The contents executed by the script used in the project can be checked with the debug function of thesimulator. For details, refer to Chapter 31 “3.5 Script Debugger” on page 31-17.
● Using registered script on another project
To use the script registered in Script Manager on another project, save it as a file, and then import it to a project.
Saving registered script as a file

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Script Manager.
Script Manager opens.

2 Select the script in Script List, and then click Export.
The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed.

To export multiple scripts, select all scripts to export. To select multiple scripts, press and hold SHIFT or
CTRL while you click the specific items.

25-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script

3 Specify a save location and click OK.
The script file is output.

The file name of the exported script is“Script”(fixed text) + “{Script ID}” + “_”(underscore) + “{Script Name}” + “.txt”(file extension).
If the number of the script ID is less than 5 digits, 0 is written in the rest of the digits. It is omitted if the script nameis not configured.
Example 1: In Script List on the Script Manager dialog box, {Script ID} is "12345" and {Script Name} is "sample".
Script12345_sample.txt

4 Click OK.
This concludes exporting script.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25
ScriptExample 2: In Script List on the Script Manager dialog box, {Script ID} is "6" and {Script Name} is blank.
Script00006_.txt

25-9

2 Editing and Management of the Script
Importing script

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Script Manager.
Script Manager opens.

2 Click Import.
Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Select a file for the Script, and then click Open.
The script is added to the Script Manager.

If there is a script with a script ID already registered on the Script Manager, an overwrite confirmation
message is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the script displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all the scripts.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the script displayed in theconfirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop importing scripts.
To import multiple scripts, select all of the script files to import. To select multiple script files, press and hold
SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

25-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script

4 Click OK.
The imported script is displayed on the Script Manager.

This concludes importing script.

25
Script

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-11

2 Editing and Management of the Script

2.3

Script Editor
A new script can be created or the script selected in the Script Manager can be edited using Script Editor.

(Description)■ Script ID
To create a new script, enter the script ID (1-32000).
To edit an existing script, the set script ID is displayed.
■ Script NameEnter the script name. Maximum number for script name is 40 characters.
■ Data Type
Selects the default for the data type used in the script.
For details about the data type, refer to “1.3 Data Type of the Script” on page 25-3.
You can change the data type in the script. For details, refer to “Data Type Designations” on page 25-30.
■ ScriptEnter the script.
Single script limitation is 240 characters per line with up to 1024 lines.
When you add a descriptive text to the written script or invalidate it, add "//" at the beginning of the line tocomment out it.
To select multiple lines in Script, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items, or dragthem.
The keyboard shortcuts are as follows.
• Ctrl+.(period):• Ctrl+,(comma):

Comment out the selected line.
Uncomment the cursor position.

■ Error Check
The script being edited is checked for errors.

25-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script■ Import
The Open dialog box is displayed.
By selecting a script saved (exported) in a text format (*.txt) and clicking on the Open button, the imported script isinserted at the cursor position of the script being edited.

■ Export
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
By selecting a save location and clicking on the Save button, the script being edited is saved in text format (*.txt). A
saved script can be inserted in the script using the Import button.

25
Script■ Options
The Options dialog box is displayed.
The fonts and color of the text, tab indents, etc., used in the Script text box are set in the Options dialog box. For
details, refer to “Options Dialog Box” on page 25-15.
■ FindThe Find dialog box is displayed.
Enter the text to be searched for in the Find What box.

When the Find button is clicked after selecting a range in the Script text box, it will only search within theselected range.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-13

2 Editing and Management of the Script■ Replace
The Replace dialog box is displayed.
Text entered in Find what will be replaced with the text entered in Replace with.

• This is useful when replacing device addresses.
• When the Replace button is clicked after selecting a range in the Script text box, it will only search andreplace within the selected range.
■ Show/Hide Function List
Switches between showing and not showing the Function List and Script Compilation Output.
The size of the script edit box can be changed by dragging the right bottom corner of the Script Editor. By
hiding the Function List and Script Compilation Output, the script editing area (text box) will becomelarger, making the editing of script easier.
■ Cursor
Displays the current position of the cursor in the Script text box by line number and column number.
■ Function List
Category:

Lists the categories of the functions.

Function:

Lists the functions of the selected category.

Format:Displays the definition example of the selected function.

(description):

Displays the description of the selected function.

Insert Format:

Contents displayed in the selected Format are inserted at the cursor position.

Insert Device Address:

The Tag Editor is displayed.
By specifying the device address and clicking on the OK button, specified device address isinserted at the cursor position.

■ Script Compilation Output
The contents of any errors found when using error check are displayed.
By double-clicking on the comment displayed in the Script Compilation Output, the part corresponding to the error
is highlighted in the Script text box.
Depending on the error, there may be an error in the line that is different from the line displayed in the
Script Compilation Output, or multiple errors may be displayed.

25-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Editing and Management of the Script● Options Dialog Box
Font, Size, and Color used in the Script text box of the Script Editor can be specified.

■ Font
The font name for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected.

25■ Size
The font size (dots) for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected.

Script■ Sample
Displays a sample of the text with the Font and Size as specified in the Script text box.
■ Color
Displays each of the text colors for Comment, Keyword, and Device Address.
To change the text color, click  on the right of the color to display the Color Palette and select the color.

Text other than comment, keyword, or device address is displayed in black.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-15

3 Global Script3

Global Script
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

A Global Script operates for the entire project. The scripts are executed in order on the list and in accordance with thetrigger conditions after the parts on the screen of the main unit are processed. A maximum of 16 Global Scripts canbe set to a project.

3.1

Setting procedures for Global Script
Global Script is setup using the following procedures.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Global Script.
The Global Script Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Under Settings, select the script ID to configure, and then click Edit.
The Global Script dialog box is displayed.

3 On the General tab, select the Use Global Script check box.

With Global Script, you cannot do indirect read and indirect write of the external device address.
For details about the indirect read and indirect write, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.

25-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual3 Global Script

4 Specify the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the script to execute.
The Script Manager is displayed when the
button is clicked. The script can be selected from the script list of the
Script Manager. For details, refer to “2.2 Script Manager” on page 25-7.

5 Click Trigger Condition tab.

25
■ Rising-edge
Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 0 to 1. Specify the bit device or the bit number of theword device for Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Falling-edge
Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 1 to 0. Specify the bit device or the bit number of theword device for Device Address.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
■ Period
Script is executed with the set time as the minimum cycle time. Specify the cycle time (1 to 3600000 milliseconds).
When Period is selected, the script will be executed with the scan time of the screen if the cycle time isshorter than the scan time for the screen on the main unit. The maximum value for the screen scan time
can be checked by the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD4. Refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data
Register (LSD)” on page 35-13.

7 Click OK to close the Global Script dialog box.
8 Click Close on the Global Script Settings dialog box.
This concludes the Global Script configuration.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-17

Script

6 With Trigger Type, select the condition to execute the script.

3 Global Script

3.2

Global Script Settings Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Global Script Settings dialog box.
Global Script is managed as a group in the Global Script Settings dialog box.

■ Settings
This area is for editing the Global Script settings.
Order:

Displays the number (1 to 16) for the order to execute the Global Script.

Script:Displays whether or not to use the Global Script. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable.

Script ID:

Specify the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the script to execute.

Script Name:

Displays the name of the script specified by the script ID.

Trigger Type:Specify the condition to execute the script.

Trigger Condition:

Displays details about the condition to execute the script. The displayed content varies based on
Trigger Type.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge: Displays the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serveas condition.
Period: Displays the minimum cycle time set.

■ EditRegisters or changes the Global Script settings for the selected line.
Click this button to display the Global Script dialog box.
The Global Script dialog box settings are reflected on the selected line.
For details, refer to “3.3 Global Script Dialog Box” on page 25-19.
■ Up
Shifts the selected Global Script settings up the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected Global Script settings down the list.
■ Delete
Deletes the registered settings from the list.

25-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual3 Global Script

3.3

Global Script Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Global Script dialog box.

● General Tab

25
Script■ Use Global Script n
To use the Global Script, select the Use Global Script n (n : Order number) check box.
With Global Script, you cannot do indirect read and indirect write of the control device*1 and external
device address.
For details about the indirect read and indirect write, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the script to execute.
The Script Manager is displayed when the
button is clicked. The script can be selected from the script list of the
Script Manager. For details, refer to “2.2 Script Manager” on page 25-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script specified by the script ID.
■ Script
Displays the contents of the script specified by the script ID.

*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-19

3 Global Script● Trigger Condition Tab■ Trigger TypeSpecify the condition to execute the script.
Rising-edge:

Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 0 to 1.

Falling-edge:

Script is executed when trigger device address changes from 1 to 0.

Period:Script is executed with the set time as the minimum cycle time.

■ Device Address
Specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device.
This is enabled only when Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected in Trigger Type.
■ Minimum Time [msec]
Specify the cycle time (0 to 3600000 milliseconds).
This is enabled only when Period is selected in Trigger Type.

25-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method

4

Script Definition Method
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Format List
This section describes the format and operation of control statements, operators, functions, data type designations,etc.
Enter everything except comments in single-byte. For specific definition examples, refer to “5 Script Coding Examples”
on page 25-32.

● Control statements
Conditional expressions are described as Cond. expr. , Cond. expr. 1 , Cond. expr. 2 here. Execution lines are described as
Exe. line , Exe. line 1 , Exe. line 2 ...

■ Conditional branching
FormatDescriptionif ( Cond. expr. ){Exe. line ;}

else
else ifswitchcasedefault

if ( Cond. expr. ){Exe. line 1 ;}else{
Exe. line 2 ;}Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.
Execution line 2 is executed if it is not satisfied.

if ( Cond. expr. 1 ){Exe. line 1 ;}else if ( Cond. expr. 2 ){Exe. line 2 ;}else{
Exe. line 3 ;}Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
Conditional expression 2 is determined if conditional expression 1 is notsatisfied, and execution line 2 is executed if conditional expression 2 issatisfied.
Execution line 3 is executed if conditional expression 2 is not satisfied too.

switch ( Cond. expr. ){case constant 1:
Exe. line 1 ;break;
case constant2:
Exe. line 2 ;break;
default:
Exe. line 3 :break;}

Execution line 1 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches
constant 1.
Execution line 2 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches
constant 2.
Execution line 3 is executed if the value of conditional expression does notmatch constant 1 nor constant 2.

25

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Scriptif

Execution line is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.

25-21

4 Script Definition Method■ Repeat
Formatwhile

Description
Execution line is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression issatisfied.
• It will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is always
satisfied, so do not set fixed values or device addresses that do not change as
the conditional expression.
• Do not write a value to the external device address in the while definition.

while ( Cond. expr. ){Exe. line ;}■ Halt and exit
Formatbreak

return25-22

Description

while ( Cond. expr. 1 ){if ( Cond. expr. 2 ){Exe. line 1 ;break;}
Exe. line 2 ;}Exe. line 3 ;Process will be as follows while the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
• Execution line 2 is continuously executed while the conditional expression 2 is
not satisfied.
• Once the conditional expression is satisfied, it will go out of the loop by break(not executing execution line 2), and execution line 3 is executed.

switch ( Cond. expr. ){case constant 1:
Exe. line 1 ;break;
case constant 2:
Exe. line 2 ;break;}
Exe. line 3 ;When the conditional expression 2 matches the constant 1, it will halt thedetermination of constant 2 by break after executing execution line 1, andprocess will move to execution line 3.

return;It will exit the script, and execute the next parts or script.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method● Operator
Device address, constant, and Temporary Variable are described as,ahere, and expression is described asbExpr. , Expr. 1 , Expr. 2 .

■ Relational operator
OperatorFormatDescription

==

a

==

b

Compares ifais equal to

b

.

!=

a

!=

b

Compares ifais not equal to

b

<

a

<

b

Compares if

ais less than

<=

a

<=

b

Compares ifais equal or less than

>

a

>

b

Compares if

>=

a

>=

b

Compares if

b

.

.

b

.

a

is greater thanais equal or greater than

b

b

.
.

■ Logical operator
OperatorFormatDescription&&( Expr. 1 ) && ( Expr. 2 )Calculates the logical product (AND) of Expr. 1 and Expr. 2 .

||( Expr. 1 ) || ( Expr. 2 )Calculates the logical sum (OR) of Expr. 1 and Expr. 2 .

!

!( Expr. )Reverses the logic of Expr. .

■ Arithmetic operator
OperatorFormat25

Description

+

a

+

b

Adds

-

a

-

b

*

a

*

/

a

%
=

b

Subtracts

b

from

a

b

Multiplies

a

and

b

/

b

Dividesa%b

Calculates remainder after dividing

a

=

b

Assigns

a

b

by

to

b

a

.

Script

and

a

.
.

.

a

by

b

.

.

■ Bit operator
OperatorFormatDescription

&

a

&

b

Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of

a

and

|

a

|

b

Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of

and

b

.

^

a

^

b

Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of

a

and

~

~ a

<<

a

<<

b

Shifts each bit ofato left for

>>

a

>>

b

Shifts each bit ofato right for

a

b

.

b

.

Reverses the logic of each bits of a .
For word device and fixed values, 0 will be 65535, and 65535 will be 0.
For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manualbit(s).

bb

bit(s).

25-23

4 Script Definition Method● Function
Device address, constant, and Temporary Variable are described as

,

a

b

,

,

c

d

... here.

Function that can be used is based on the selected data type.
■ Bit function
Function

FormatBit set

SET( a );Bit reset

RST( a );Bit reverse

REV( a );Description
Turns bit device

a

to 1.

It will be same result as
Turns bit device

a

a

= 1;.

to 0.

It will be same result as

a

= 0;.

Reverses the 1 and 0 of bit devicea

It will be same result as

a

a

=~

.

;.

■ Word function
Arithmetic operation
Function

FormatDescription

Maximum valueMAX( a , b , c )Maximum value out of argument a
Up to 15 arguments can be defined.

,

b

,

c

is returned.

Minimum value

MIN( a , b , c )Minimum value out of argument a
Up to 15 arguments can be defined.

,

b

,

c

is returned.

Exponentialfunction

EXP( a )Natural logarithm(Base: e)Exponential function of argument

LOGE( a )Common logarithm
LOG10((Base: 10)a)POW( a , b )Square root

ROOT( a )Common logarithm (base is 10) for argument
Set a value larger than 0 for argument.

COS( a )TAN( a )to thepower is returned.

b

Square root ofais returned.

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.
(-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula toarepresent angle (units in radian) for argumenta.

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.
(-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula toarepresent angle (units in radian) for argumenta.

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.
a(-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula torepresent angle (units in radian) for argumenta.

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

(Continued to next page)25-24

is returned.

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

Tangent ofTangentaThis function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

Cosine of
Cosineis returned.

aThis function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

Sine of

SIN( a )is returned.

Natural logarithm (base is e) for argument
Set a value larger than 0 for argument.

aExponentiation

Sine

a

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method
Arithmetic operation (Continued)
Function

FormatDescription
Arcsine of

ArcsineSpecify arbitrary formula for argument

ASIN( a )Conversion from
Angle to RadianConversion from
Radian to Anglea.

(-1 - +1) in radian value (0 - π) is returned.

Specify arbitrary formula for argument

ACOS( a )a.

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.
Arctangent of

ArctangentaThis function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.
Arccosine of

Arccosine(-1 - +1) in radian value (-π/2 - +π/2) is returned.

aa(-1 - +1) in radian value (-π/2 - +π/2) is returned.

Specify arbitrary formula for argument

ATAN( a );a.

This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

RAD( a );Value of a
returned.

is converted from degree (°) to radian, and the value is

Value of a
returned.

is converted from radian to degree (°), and the value isThis function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

DEG( a );This function can only be configured when the Float32(F) is
specified as the Data Type.

25

Data type conversion
Function

FormatDescription

BCD2BIN( a )BCD value of a is returned in binary value.
This function can only be configured when UBIN16(W), BIN16(I),UBIN32(D) or BIN32(L) is specified as the Data Type.

Conversion from
Binary to BCD

BIN2BCD(

Binary value of a is returned in BCD value.
This function can only be configured when UBIN16(W), BIN16(I),UBIN32(D) or BIN32(L) is specified as the Data Type.

a)Conversion from
Floating point toBinaryFLOAT2BIN( a )Float32 value of a is returned in floating point value.
Values under the decimal point is truncated.
This function can only be configured when UBIN32(D) or
BIN32(L) is specified as the Data Type.

Conversion from
Binary to Floating
point

BIN2FLOAT( a )Binary value of a is returned in floating point value.
This function can only be configured when UBIN32(D) or
BIN32(L) is specified as the Data Type.

DEC2ASCII( a , b )Decimal number value b is converted to a character string, andstore in order with a as a beginning device address.
This function can only be configured when UBIN16(W), BIN16(I),UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B) or BCD8(EB) is specified as theData Type.

ASCII2DEC( a )Character string a is returned as decimal number value.
This function can only be configured when UBIN16(W), BIN16(I),UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B) or BCD8(EB) is specified as theData Type.

Conversion from
Decimal to String
character

Conversion from
String character to
DecimalWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-25

ScriptConversion from
BCD to Binary

4 Script Definition Method
Data comparison and copy
Function

Data comparison

Data copy

Format

MEMCMP(a,b

Description

,

c

)

MEMCPY( a , b , c )a: Beginning device address of comparison target 1b: Beginning device address of comparison target 2c: Range of comparison (in words)

Values of device address

for

a

c

words and values ofdevice address b for c words are compared.
1 is returned if all the values of device addresses match, and 0 is
returned if any of the value does not match.
Specified range is compared in word unit, and result is returned.

a: Beginning device address of copy targetb: Beginning device address of copy sourcec: Range of copy (in words)

Values of device address fromaforwords are copiedcto b for c words respectively.
Specified range is copied in word unit.

Character string operation
Only HMI devices can be specified as an argument for character string operation function.
Termination character NULL (0x00) is treated as end of character string when character string is handled. Also,
termination character NULL is not included in the length of the character string.
Function

FormatDescriptionaCharacter string
copy

STRCUT( a , b , c , d ): Beginning device address of copy targetb : Beginning device address containing copy source
character stringc : Start location of copy (0-127)d: Number of characters to copy (1-128)

From the character string starting fromstring fromcbytes forward forstored into

a

for

d

characters arecharacters.

STRLEN( a )Character string
concatenation

STRCAT( a , b )To the character string starting fromstring starting fromreturned to beginning.

b

STRSTR( a , b )a, the characteris concatenated, andFrom the character string starting from25-26

, character

Number of characters for character string starting froma is returned.

Character number
countCharacter string
search

b
d

a

a

is

, character

string starting from b is searched, and location found(number of characters from beginning -1) is returned.
Maximum number for character string to search is 128
characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method
Draw• This is a function to draw an object on the screen. Top left corner of the screen is coordinates X=0 and Y=0.
• When a device address is used as an argument, an object is drawn with the changed value when the value ischanged. However, the object that is already drawn is not erased. To erase the drawn object, overwrite it with thebackground color.
• When an out-of-range value is used as an argument, 5 is stored in the HMI Special Data Register LSD53 and script
is halted.
• Objects that are drawn with scripts for parts placed on the top layer are not drawn on the top layer.
Example: The Multi-Button is placed on the top layer of a base screen and the script CIRCLE is executed to draw acircle or ellipse by pressing the Multi-Button
The settings of the script CIRCLE: center coordinate X is 80, center coordinate Y is 120, X-axis radius is60, Y-axis radius is 60, line width is 1, line type is 1, foreground color is 20, background color is 0, and thepattern is 2
Display for Base Screen: 1

Multi-Button

Object List
No.

Top Layer

1

Type

Layer
Top Layer

Multi-Button

Execute script// Script A
CIRCLE(80, 120, 60, 60, 1, 1, 20, 0, 2);Base Screen: 1

No.

Draws a circle

Top Layer

Type

1

Circle2

Multi-Button

Layer
Top Layer

25

Draws a circle on the base screen

ScriptCircleBase Screen: 1

Function

FormatDescription

LINE( a , b , c , d ,e , f , g )Straight line connecting the start coordinate and end coordinate is drawn.
a : Start coordinate X, b : Start coordinate Y, c : Endcoordinate X, d : End coordinate Y, e : Line width, f :Line type, g : Line color• e : Line width, f : Line type, g : Line color can beomitted.
• Specification of e : Line width is as follows:
Preset ValueLine Width

Drawing ofstraight line

1
1 dot

2
2 dots3
3 dots5
5 dotsIt will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification of f : Line type is as follows.
Preset Value

LINE( a , b , c , d )(Continued to next page)

5
6
Long Dash Long DashLine Type Solid
Dot Dash Long Dash
Dot
Dot Dot
It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width isset to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
• g : Line color is specified by the color data. It will be set to247 (white: Color No. 255) when omitted.
For color number and color data, refer to Appendix “Color Data
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1

2

3

4

25-27

4 Script Definition Method
Draw (Continued)
Function

FormatRECTANGLE( a ,
d ,
g ,
j ,

b
e
h
k

, c ,
, f ,
, i ,
)

Description
Rectangle with left top corner as start coordinate and bottom rightcorner as end coordinate is drawn.
a : Start coordinate X, b : Start coordinate Y, c : Endcoordinate X, d : End coordinate Y, e : Line width, f : Linetype, g : Foreground color, h : Background color, i :Pattern, j : Rounded corner type, k : Rounded corner radius• e : Line width, f : Line type, g : Foreground color,h : Background color, i : Pattern, j : Rounded
corner type, k : Rounded corner radius can be omitted.
• Specification of e : Line width is as follows:
Preset Value
1
2
3Line Width
1 dot
2 dots3 dotsIt will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification of f : Line type is as follows.
Preset Value

1

2Line Type

Solid

Dot

3

5
5 dots4

5
6Long Dash Long Dash
Dash Long Dash
Dot
Dot Dot

It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width isset to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
• g : Foreground color, h : Background color is specified
by the color data. It will be set to 247 (white: Color No. 255)
when omitted.
For color number and color data, refer to Appendix “Color Data
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
• Specification of i : Pattern is as follows.

Drawing of
Rectangle

RECTANGLE( a , b , c ,d )Preset Value

0

Line Type

None

2
3
4
7
8
Foreground Foreground Foreground Background Horizontal
100%
25%
50%
100%
lines

Preset Value

9
10
11
12
Slant
Line Type Vertical Slantlines Upwards Down-wards Cross-hatch

13
Tint

It will be set to 0 (None) when omitted.
• Specification of j : Rounded corner type is as follows.
Preset ValueLine Type(Continued to next page)

25-28

0
None

1
Straight

2Curve

It will be set to 0 (None) when omitted.
• k : Rounded corner radius is specified with number of dots (0 - 200).
It will be set to 0 (0 dot) when omitted.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method
Draw (Continued)
Function

FormatDescription

CIRCLE( a , b , c , d ,e , f , g , h ,i )A circle with specified radius from center coordinate is drawn.
a : Center coordinate X, b : Center coordinate Y,
c : X axis radius, d : Y axis radius, e : Line width,f : Line type, g : Foreground color,h : Background color, i : Pattern• e : Line width, f : Line type, g : Foreground color,h : Background color, i : Pattern can be omitted.
• Specification of e : Line width is as follows:
Preset ValueLine Width

1
1 dot

2
2 dots3
3 dots5
5 dotsIt will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification of f : Line type is as follows.
Preset Value

Drawing of
circle andellipseCIRCLE( a , b , c , d )1

5
6Long Dash Long DashLine Type Solid
Dot Dash Long Dash
Dot
Dot Dot
It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width isset to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
• g : Foreground color, h : Background color is specified
by the color data. It will be set to 247 (white: Color No. 255)
when omitted.
For color number and color data, refer to Appendix “Color Data
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
• Specification of i : Pattern is as follows.
Preset Value

0

Line Type

None

2

3

4

Preset Value

9
10
11
12
Slant
Line Type Vertical Slantlines Upwards Down-wards Cross-hatch

13
Tint

It will be set to 0 (none) when omitted.

OffsetFunctionIndirect
OFFSET(
specification

Formata, b )Descriptiona : Reference device addressb : Device address to store the indirect value (0 to 32767)
Specify the device address b words from a .
Indirect readSpecify OFFSET function to the right of the assignment statement.
= OFFSET( a , b )Format example: cOperation:
Stores the value of device address in b
words from a into c .
Indirect write
Specify OFFSET function to the left of the assignment statement.
cFormat example:OFFSET( a , b ) =Operation:
Stores the value of c into the device
address b words from a .

• Store the value appropriate for the data type as the indirect
value. As an example, when the data type is BCD4(B), store theindirect value of BCD4(B) into the device address.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-29

25
Script23478Foreground Foreground Foreground Background Horizontal
100%
25%
50%
100%
lines

4 Script Definition Method● Data Type Designations
You can specify individual data types for the operations in braces "{}". Here, the abbreviations are shown inparentheses and the Execution lines are described as Exe. line 1 , Exe. line 2 , ...
Function
Specifies the
UBIN16(W)Specifies the
BIN16(I)Specifies the
UBIN32(D)Specifies the
BIN32(L)Specifies theBCD4(B)

Specifies the
BCD8(EB)

Specifies the
Float32(F)25-30

Formatasword(asw)

asinteger(asi)

asdoubleword(asd)

aslong(asl)

asbcd4(asb4)

asbcd8(asb8)

asfloat(asf)

Description

asword{}Exe. line 1 ;Exe. line 2 ;asinteger{}

Exe. line 1 ;Exe. line 2 ;Executes the executable statement 1 with the data type
UBIN16 (W).
Executes the executable statement 2 with the data typeconfigured in the Data Type on the Script Editor.
Executes the executable statement 1 with the data type
BIN16(I).
Executes the executable statement 2 with the data typeconfigured in the Data Type on the Script Editor.

asdoubleword{
Exe. line 1 ;}Exe. line 2 ;Executes the executable statement 1 with the data type
UBIN32(D).
Executes the executable statement 2 with the data typeconfigured in the Data Type on the Script Editor.

Exe. line 1 ;Executes the executable statement 1 with the data type
BIN32(L).
Executes the executable statement 2 with the data typeconfigured in the Data Type on the Script Editor.

aslong{}Exe. line 2 ;asbcd4{}

Exe. line 1 ;Exe. line 2 ;asbcd8{}

Exe. line 1 ;Exe. line 2 ;asfloat{}Exe. line 1 ;Exe. line 2 ;Executes the executable statement 1 with the data type
BCD4(B).
Executes the executable statement 2 with the data typeconfigured in the Data Type on the Script Editor.
Executes the executable statement 1 with the data type
BCD8(EB).
Executes the executable statement 2 with the data typeconfigured in the Data Type on the Script Editor.
Executes the executable statement 1 with the data type
Float32(F).
Executes the executable statement 2 with the data typeconfigured in the Data Type on the Script Editor.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Script Definition Method● OtherThis section provides definitions for constant, device address, Temporary Variable, and comment.
■ Constant
Constant can be defined as decimal or hexadecimal numbers.
Sample definition of decimal numbers

1234

Define the numeric value directly.

-1234

Define the negative number with a “-” (minus) symbol at the
beginning.

12.34

Decimal number can be defined for real numbers (Float32(F)).
Define a “.” (period) between the whole numbers and decimal numbers.

There are 2 ways to define hexadecimal numbers.
Sample definition of hexadecimal numbers

0x12AB

Define “0” (zero) and “x” (lower case x) at the beginning of the value.

12ABh

Append “h” at the tail of the value.

■ Device Address
Device Address is defined with the device type and address within “[” and “]”.
Definition of the device address[Device type address number](“ ” represents a space.)

Sample definition

25[LDR 100]

Writes “@” (at sign) and number (1 to 16).
Definition of the Temporary Variable@NumberSpace between the “@” (at sign) and the number is not required.

@2

Temporary Variable 2

Sample definition

All the values for the Temporary Variables are set to “0” when the execution of the script is started.

■ Comment
A note defined in the script is called a comment. The line with “//” defined at the beginning of a line will become a comment.
“//” is defined with a single-byte. Double-byte characters can be used after “//”.
Definition of comment// Arbitrary note
Sample definition// Store the initial value to calculation
data [LDR 100] for process A[LDR 100] = 1234;::←This line is not executed.

• It will be useful to use comments to explain the contents of the script (especially when the editor of thescript has changed or some time has passed since editing).
• Comments are ignored (not executed) when the script is executed, so they can be defined freely withoutworrying about the execution time.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-31

Script■ Temporary Variable
The Temporary Variable is a variable that can be used only with the script. The data size of the Temporary Variable is 2
words.

5 Script Coding Examples

5

Script Coding Examples
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section provides script coding examples for control statements, arithmetic operators, and functions, as well as
the descriptions of their operations.

5.1

Control Statements■ Example 5.1.1

Conditional branch

Scriptif ([LDR 100] == 10){[LDR 200] = 100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 10, then 100 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.2

Conditional branching

Scriptif ([LDR 100] == 10){[LDR 200] = [LDR 300] + [LDR 400] + [LDR 500];}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 10, then LDR300, LDR400, and LDR500 are added and that value is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.3

Conditional branching

Scriptif ([LDR 100] == 10){
if ([LDR 200] != 0){[LDR 300] = 0x1234;}}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 10 and the value of LDR200 is not 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of LDR100 is 10 and the value of LDR200 is 0, then nothing is executed.
If the value of LDR100 is not 10, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR200.

25-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.4

Conditional branching

Scriptif (([LDR 100] != 0) || ([LDR 200] != 0)){[LDR 300] = 100;}else{
[LDR 400] = [LDR 500] + 100;}
Operation description
If either the value of LDR100 or the value of LDR200 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of both LDR100 and LDR200 is 0, 100 is added to LDR500 and that value is stored in LDR400.
■ Example 5.1.5

Conditional branching

Scriptif ([LDR 100] == 0){[LDR 200] = 0x1234;}
else if ([LDR 100] == 1){[LDR 200] = 0x5678;}
else{[LDR 200] = 0x9999;}

25
ScriptOperation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or 1, then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.6

Conditional branching

Scriptif ([LDR 100]){
if ([LDR 200]){
if ([LDR300]){[LDR 400] = 100;}else{
[LDR 400] = 200;}}}
Operation description
If the values of LDR100, LDR200, and LDR300 are all not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR400.
If the values of LDR100 and LDR200 are not 0 and the value of LDR300 is 0, then 200 is stored in LDR400.
If either the value of LDR100 or LDR200 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR300.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25-33

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.7

Iteration

Script[LDR 100] = 10;[LDR 200] = 10;
while (0 < [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
[LDR 100] = [LDR 100] - 1;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is larger than 0, then 1 is repeatedly added to the value of LDR200 and 1 is repeatedly
subtracted from the value of LDR100.
In the script example above, when the while statement repeats ten times, the value of LDR100 becomes 0 and thewhile statement ends.
After this script executes, the value of LDR100 is 0 and the value of LDR200 is 20.
■ Example 5.1.8

Iteration

Script[LDR 100] = 0;
[LDR 200] = 3;
[LDR 300] = 5;
while ([LDR 100] == 0){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;}

if ([LDR 300] == [LDR 200]){
SET([LM 0]);break;}

Operation description
While the value of LDR100 is 0, the while statement repeats.
Inside the while statement, if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal, the while statement will terminate, andafter [LM 0] changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement.
In the script example above, the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice,
and after LM0 changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement loop. After execution, the value of LDR100 is
0, the value of LDR200 is 5, the value of LDR300 is 5, and LM0 is 1.

25-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.9

Indirect write and indirect read using iteration (while statement)

Script// Transfer LDR10 through LDR19 to LDR100 through LDR109// Initialize the indirect value[LDR 0] = 0;// Loop ten times
while ([LDR 0] < 10){// Transfer 1 word by indirect assignment
OFFSET([LDR 100], [LDR 0]) = OFFSET([LDR 10], [LDR 0]);// Increment indirect value[LDR 0] = [LDR 0] + 1;}
This script stores the values of LDR10 through LDR19 in LDR100 through LDR109.
It operates as follows.
First, the indirect value LDR0 is initialized and set to 0.
First iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 0, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements inside whileare executed.
• The value of LDR10, 0 words from LDR10, is stored in LDR100, 0 words from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 1.
Second iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 1, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements insidewhile are executed.

Script• The value of LDR11, 1 word from LDR10, is stored in LDR101, 1 word from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 2.
:(Repeats in this manner for the third to ninth iterations):
Tenth iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 9, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements inside whileare executed.
• The value of LDR19, 9 words from LDR10, is stored in LDR109, 9 words from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 10.
The value of LDR0 is 10, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is false and execution breaks out of the while loop.
After execution, the values of LDR100 through LDR109 are the values of LDR10 through LDR19.
■ Example 5.1.10

Conditional branching with switch statement

Scriptswitch ([LDR 100]){case 10:[LDR 200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 999:[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
SET([LM 10]);break;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 10, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 999, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and LM10 turns on.
If the value of LDR100 is not 10 or 999, then nothing is executed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25

25-35

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.1.11

Conditional branching with switch statement using the default statement

Scriptswitch ([LDR 100]){case 0:[LDR 200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 1:[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
break;
default:[LDR 200] = 0x9999;
break;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or 1, then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.12

Terminate the script with the return statement

Scriptif (0x1234 == [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
return;}[LDR 300] = 0;
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0x1234, then 0 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of LDR100 is 0x1234, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and the script terminates.
The return statement does not break out of a function like the break statement, it terminates the script and executes
the next part or script.
■ Example 5.1.13

Break out of a loop with the break statement

Script[LDR 100] = 0;
[LDR 200] = 3;
[LDR 300] = 5;
while ([LDR 100] == 0){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;}

if ([LDR 200] == [LDR 300]){
SET([LM 0]);break;}

Operation description
While the value of LDR100 is 0, the while statement repeats until LDR200 and LDR300 are equal.
Inside the while statement, if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal, the while statement will end and execution
breaks out of the while statement.
In the script example above, the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice,
and after LM0 changes to 1, the while statement ends. After execution, the value of LDR100 is 0, the value of LDR200
is 5, the value of LDR300 is 5, and the value of LM0 is 1.

25-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples

5.2

Relational Operators■ Example 5.2.1

Equal toScriptif ([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.2

Not equal to

Scriptif ([LDR 100] != [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.3

Less than25

ScriptScriptif ([LDR 100] < [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is less than the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.4

Less than or equal to

Scriptif ([LDR 100] <= [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is less than or equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-37

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.2.5

Greater than

Scriptif ([LDR 100] > [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is greater than the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.6

Greater than or equal to

Scriptif ([LDR 100] >= [LDR 200]){[LDR 300] = 0x100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is greater than or equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.

25-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples

5.3

Logical Operators■ Example 5.3.1

Logical AND

Scriptif (([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]) && ([LDR 300] == [LDR 400] + [LDR 500])){[LDR 600] = 100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200, and if the value of LDR300 is equal to the value of LDR400
and LDR500 added together, then 100 is stored in LDR600.
If either ([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]) or ([LDR 300] == [LDR 400] + [LDR 500]) is false, the processing in the brackets“{ }” is not executed.
■ Example 5.3.2

Logical OR

Scriptif ((0 != [LDR 100]) || (0 != [LDR 200])){[LDR 300] = 100;}

25

■ Example 5.3.3

ScriptOperation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or the value of LDR200 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
If either is true, the processing in the brackets “{ }” is executed.
Logical inversion

Scriptif (!([LDR 100] == 0x1234)){[LDR 300] = 100;}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not equal to 0x1234, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.3.4

Logical inversion

Scriptif (!(0 !=[LDR 100])){[LDR 300] = 100 ;}Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
This is the same as the code “if (0==[LDR 100]))”.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25-39

5 Script Coding Examples

5.4

Arithmetic Operators■ Example 5.4.1

Addition

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] + [LDR 200];
Operation description
The values of LDR100 and LDR200 are added together and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.2

Subtraction

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] - [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR200 is subtracted from the value of LDR100 and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.3

Multiplication

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] * [LDR 200];
Operation description
The values of LDR100 and LDR200 are multiplied together and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.4

Division

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] / [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.5

ModuloScript[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] % [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the remainder is stored in LDR300.

25-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples

5.5

Bitwise Operators■ Example 5.5.1

Logical AND

Scriptif ([LM 100] & [LM 101]){
SET([LM 200]);}else{
RST([LM 200]);}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 1, LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0, LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100 LM101

LM200■ Example 5.5.2

Logical OR

Script25
Scriptif ([LM 100] | [LM 101]){
SET([LM 200]);}else{
RST([LM 200]);}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 1, LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0, LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100

LM200

LM101

■ Example 5.5.3

Logical XOR (exclusive OR)

Script[LDR 200] = [LDR 100] ^ 0xFF;
Operation description
The logical XOR operation on the value of LDR100 and each bit in 0xFF is stored in LDR200.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 15 (0x0F), then LDR200 is 240 (0xF0).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25-41

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.5.4

Inversion

Script[LDR 200] = ~[LDR 100];
Operation description
The bits in the value of LDR100 are flipped and stored in LDR200.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 0, then LDR200 is 65535.
■ Example 5.5.5

Inversion

Scriptif (([LM 100] & ~ [LM 101]) | [LM 102]){
SET([LM 200]);}else{
RST([LM 200]);}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of LM102 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on thevalue of LM100 and the inverted result of the value of LM101 is 1, then LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of LM102 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on thevalue of LM100 and the inverted result of the value of LM101 is 0, then LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100 LM101

LM200

LM102

■ Example 5.5.6

Left shift

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] << [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is shifted left by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 1 and the value of LDR200 is 3, 1 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the result 8 isstored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.5.7

Right shift

Script[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] >> [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is shifted right by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 8 and the value of LDR200 is 3, 8 is shifted 3 bits to the right and the result 1
is stored in LDR300.

25-42

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples

5.6

Bit Functions■ Example 5.6.1

Set a bit

ScriptSET([LM 100]);
Operation description
Turns LM100 to 1. The result is the same as [LM■ Example 5.6.2

100] = 1.

Reset a bit

Script

RST([LM 100]);
Operation description
Turns LM100 to 0. The result is the same as [LM■ Example 5.6.3

100] = 0.

Invert a bit

ScriptREV([LM 100]);

25100] = ~[LM 100].

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

ScriptOperation description
Flips LM100 1 and 0. The result is the same as [LM25-43

5 Script Coding Examples

5.7

Word Functions● Arithmetic operations■ Example 5.7.1

Maximum value

Script[LDR 200] = MAX([LDR 100], [LDR 110], [LDR 120], [LDR 130], [LDR 140]);
Operation description
Out of the values stored in LDR100, LDR110, LDR120, LDR130, and LDR140, stores the maximum value in LDR200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
■ Example 5.7.2

Minimum value

Script[LDR 200] = MIN([LDR 100], [LDR 110], [LDR 120], [LDR 130], [LDR 140]);
Operation description
Out of the values stored in LDR100, LDR110, LDR120, LDR130, and LDR140, stores the minimum value in LDR200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
■ Example 5.7.3

Exponential function

Script[LDR 10] = EXP([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the exponential function of the value of LDR20 and the result is stored in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.4

Natural logarithm

Script[LDR 10] = LOGE([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the natural logarithm of the value of LDR20 and the result is stored in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.5

Common logarithm

Script[LDR 10] = LOG10([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the logarithm of the value of LDR20 with 10 as the base and the result is stored in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.6

Power

Script[LDR 10] = POW([LDR 20],[LDR 30]);
Operation description
Calculates the power of a value.
For example, when the value of LDR20 is 10 and the value of LDR30 is 5, the function calculates 10 to the power of 5
and stores the result in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.

25-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.7

Square root

Script[LDR 10] = ROOT([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the square root of the value of LDR20 and the result is stored in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.8

Sine

Script[LDR 10] = SIN([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the sine of the radian value of LDR20 and stores the result in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.9

CosineScript[LDR 10] = COS([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the cosine of the radian value of LDR20 and stores the result in LDR10.

25

Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.

Script■ Example 5.7.10

Tangent

Script[LDR 10] = TAN([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the tangent of the radian value of LDR20 and stores the result in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.11

ArcsineScript[LDR 10] = ASIN([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arcsine of the value of LDR20 and stores the result as radians in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.12

Arccosine

Script[LDR 10] = ACOS([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arccosine of the value of LDR20 and stores the result as radians in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-45

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.13

Arctangent

Script[LDR 10] = ATAN([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arctangent of the value of LDR20 and stores the result as radians in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.14

Convert angle to radians

Script[LDR 10] = RAD([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Converts the value of LDR20 from degrees (°) to radians and stores the result in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.
■ Example 5.7.15

Convert radians to angle

Script[LDR 10] = DEG([LDR 20]);
Operation description
Converts the value of LDR20 from radians to degrees (°) and stores the result in LDR10.
Only the data type Float32(F) can be used.

25-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples● Data type conversions■ Example 5.7.16

Convert BCD to binary

Script[LDR 200] = BCD2BIN([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the BCD value in LDR100 to a binary value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the BCD value 10 (16 as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, 10 (binary value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.17

Convert binary to BCD

Script[LDR 200] = BIN2BCD([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a BCD value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the binary value 16 (10 as a BCD value) is stored in LDR100, 16 (BCD value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.18

Convert floating point to binary

Script25[LDR 200] = FLOAT2BIN([LDR 100]);

For example, if the floating point value 1234 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, 1234 (binary value)
is stored in LDR200. If the floating point value 1234.56 (0x449A51EC as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, the value
after the decimal point is discarded and 1234 (binary value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.19

Convert binary to floating point

Script[LDR 200] = BIN2FLOAT([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a floating point value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the binary value 1234 is stored in LDR100, the floating point value 1234 (0x449A4000 as a binary
value) is stored in LDR200.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-47

ScriptOperation description
Converts the floating point value in LDR100 to a binary value and stores it in LDR200.

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.20

Convert decimal to string

Script

DEC2ASCII([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Converts the decimal numeric value in LDR200 to a string and stores it in order with LDR100 as the starting address number.
• This function can only be configured when UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B)or BCD8(EB) is specified as the Data Type.
• You can only specify an HMI device.
• When using functions that handle strings, check the Storage Method of string data setting on the
System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Depending on the setting, the upper and lower bytes
are stored in the reverse of the following explanation. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 System Tab” onpage 4-26.
• A NULL terminating character (0x00) is added to the end of the string.
Converting 1234 (when the data type is UBIN16(W))
Device address

Device address Stored value
LDR200

1 234

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100' 1' = 0 x31'2' = 0x 32

LDR101'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

0x00

0x00

LDR102

Terminating
character
Terminating
character

Converting -12345 (when the data type is BIN16(I))
Device address

Device address Stored value
LDR200-1 234 5Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100' -' = 0x2 D'1' = 0x 31

LDR101'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

LDR102'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

LDR1030x00

0x00

Terminating character

Converting 1234567890 (when the data type is UBIN32(D))
Device address

Device address Stored value
LDR200LDR2011234567890

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100'1' = 0x31

'2' = 0x32

LDR101' 3' = 0 x33'4' = 0x 34

LDR102'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

LDR103'7' = 0x37

'8' = 0x38

LDR104'9' = 0x39

'0' = 0x30

LDR1050x00

0x00

Terminating character
Terminating
character

Converting -1234567890 (when the data type is BIN32(L))

Device address Stored value
LDR200LDR201-1234567890

Device address

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR100'-' = 0x2D

'1' = 0x31

LDR101' 2' = 0 x32'3' = 0x 33

LDR102'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

LDR103'6' = 0x36

'7' = 0x37

LDR104'8' = 0x38

'9' = 0x39

LDR105'0' = 0x30

0x00

Terminating character
Terminating
character

25-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.21

Convert string to decimal

Script[LDR 100] = ASCII2DEC([LDR 200]);
Operation description
Converts the stored string starting at LDR200 to a decimal and stores the result in LDR100.
The number of digits that can be converted is the maximum number of digits for each data type with added sign.
If the string to convert contains NULL or characters that cannot be converted to numeric values, the string isconverted up to that character.
• This function can only be configured when UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B)or BCD8(EB) is specified as the Data Type.
• You can only specify an HMI device.
• When using functions that handle strings, check the Storage Method of string data setting on the
System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Depending on the setting, the upper and lower bytes
are stored in the reverse of the following explanation. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 System Tab” onpage 4-26.
Setting the string “1234” (when the data type is UBIN16(W))
Device address

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR200'1' = 0x31

' 2 ' = 0 x 32

LDR201'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

LDR2020x00

0x00

Device address Stored value
LDR1001 2 3425
ScriptTerminating charactercharacter
Terminating

Setting the string “1234567” (when the data type is UBIN16(W))
Device address

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR200'1' = 0x31

'2 ' = 0 x3 2

LDR201'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

LDR202'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

LDR203'7' = 0x37

Device address Stored value
LDR100

1 234 50x00
Terminating character
Terminating
character

Setting the string “-12345” (when the data type is BIN16(I))
Device address

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR200'-' = 0x 2D'1 ' = 0 x31

LDR201'2' = 0x32

'3' = 0x33

LDR202'4' = 0x34

'5' = 0x35

LDR2030x00

0x00

Device address Stored value
LDR100-12345

Terminating charactercharacter
Terminating

String “1234567890” (when the data type is UBIN32(D))
Device address

Stored value
Upper byte

Lower byte

LDR200'1' = 0x31

'2 ' = 0 x32

LDR201'3' = 0x33

'4' = 0x34

LDR202'5' = 0x35

'6' = 0x36

LDR203'7' = 0x37

'8' = 0x38

LDR204'9' = 0x39

'0' = 0x30

0x00

0x00

LDR205

Device address Stored value
LDR100 - 101

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Terminating character
Terminating
character

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual25-49

5 Script Coding Examples● Data comparison and copying■ Example 5.7.22

Word-unit data comparison

Script[LDR 0] = MEMCMP([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 10);
Operation description
Compares the value of 10 words from LDR100 (up to LDR109) with the value of 10 words from LDR200 (up to
LDR209).
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in LDR0. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
LDR100LDR101LDR102

LDR200LDR201LDR202LDR107
LDR108LDR109LDR207
LDR208LDR209Even if the Data Type is set to UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F), the comparison is
performed from the start device address in word units.
■ Example 5.7.23

Bit-unit data comparison

Script[LDR 0] = MEMCMP([LDR 100-2], [LM 0], 10);
Operation description
Compares the third bit of LDR100 through the third bit of LDR109 with the state of the bits from LM0 to LM9.
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in LDR0. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
3rd bit of LDR100
3rd bit of LDR101
3rd bit of LDR102

LM0
LM1
LM2

3rd bit of LDR107
3rd bit of LDR108
3rd bit of LDR109

LM7
LM8
LM9

Even if the Data Type is set to UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F), the comparison is
performed from the start device address in bit units.

25-50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.24

Word-unit data copy

Script

MEMCPY([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 10);
Operation description
Copies the value of 10 word device addresses from LDR200 (up to LDR209) to 10 word device addresses from
LDR100 (up to LDR109).
Copy each
LDR100LDR101LDR102

LDR200LDR201LDR202LDR107
LDR108LDR109LDR207
LDR208LDR209Even if the Data Type is set to UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F), the data is copiedfrom the start device address in word units.
■ Example 5.7.25

Bit-unit data copy

Script

MEMCPY([LM 0], [LDR 100-2], 10);

Copy each
LM0
LM1
LM2

3rd bit of LDR100
3rd bit of LDR101
3rd bit of LDR102

LM7
LM8
LM9

3rd bit of LDR107
3rd bit of LDR108
3rd bit of LDR109

Even if the Data Type is set to UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD8(EB), or Float32(F), the bits are copiedfrom the start device address in bit units.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-51

25
ScriptOperation description
Copies the third bit of 10 words from LDR100 (up to LDR109) to the bit state for 10 of device addresses from LM0 (up to
LM9).

5 Script Coding Examples● String operations
When using functions that handle string data, check the Storage Method of string data setting in the projectsettings.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 System Tab” on page 4-26.
■ Example 5.7.26

Copy a string

ScriptSTRCUT([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 2, 3);
Operation description
Stores in order from LDR100 character count 3 (3 characters worth) from start position 2 (starting from 0, so the 3rd
character) of the string “ABCDEFG” that starts from LDR200.
The start position can be specified in the range from 0 to 127, the character count can be specified in therange from 1 to 128.
Copy from string “ABCDEFG” at start position 2, character count 3
Device address
LDR200LDR201LDR202
LDR203

Start
Stored value position Character countUpper byte

'A' = 0x41

0Lower byte

'B' = 0x421Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

←2

Lower byte

'D' = 0x443Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

4Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

5Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

Device address
LDR1003 characters

LDR101

Stored value

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

'D' = 0x44

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

0x00

Terminating character:
Terminating character

ScriptSTRCUT([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 1, 4);
Copy from string “ABCDEFG” at start position 1, character count 4
Device address
LDR200LDR201LDR202
LDR203

25-52

Start
Stored value position Character count'A' = 0x41

0Lower byte

'B' = 0x42←1Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

←2

Lower byte

'D' = 0x443Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

4Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

5Upper byte

'G' = 0x47:

Lower byte

0x00

Upper byte

Device address
LDR1004 characters

LDR101LDR102

Terminating character

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Upper byte

Stored value'B' = 0x42

Lower byte

'C' = 0x43

Upper byte

'D' = 0x44

Lower byte

'E' = 0x45

Upper byte

0x00

Lower byte

0x00

Terminating character5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.27

Count a string

Script[LDR 100] = STRLEN([LDR 200]);
Operation description
Finds the length (character count) of the string starting from LDR200 and stores that in LDR100.
• The only device addresses that can be specified as function arguments in string operations are HMI
devices.
• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not includedin the string length.)
Device address
LDR200LDR201LDR202
LDR203Upper byte

'A' = 0x41

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

'D' = 0x44

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

Device address
LDR200LDR202

LDR203Upper byte

Device address Stored value
Character
count

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

0x00

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

7

Device address

Stored value

LDR1003

Terminating character

Stored value'A' = 0x41

LDR100Charactercount

25
ScriptLDR201

Stored value

Terminating character

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-53

5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.28

Concatenate strings

ScriptSTRCAT([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Concatenates the string starting from LDR200 to the string starting from LDR100.
• The only device addresses that can be specified as function arguments in string operations are HMI
devices.
• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not includedin the string length.)
Device address
LDR100LDR101

Upper byte

LDR201LDR202

25-54

Device address'A' = 0x41

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

0x00

Device address
LDR200Stored value

LDR100Terminating
character

LDR101
Concatenate

LDR102

Stored value

Upper byte

'D' = 0x44

Lower byte

'E' = 0x45

Upper byte

'F' = 0x46

Lower byte

'G' = 0x47

Upper byte

0x00

Lower byte

0x00

LDR103

Terminating character

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Upper byte

Stored value'A' = 0x41

Lower byte

'B' = 0x42

Upper byte

'C' = 0x43

Lower byte

'D' = 0x44

Upper byte

'E' = 0x45

Lower byte

'F' = 0x46

Upper byte

'G' = 0x47

Lower byte

0x00

Terminating character5 Script Coding Examples■ Example 5.7.29

Search a string

Script[LDR 0] = STRSTR([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Searches for the search string “DEFG” that starts from LDR200 in the string to be searched “ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO” thatstarts from LDR100 and stores the position of the occurrence of the string in LDR0. If not found, -1 is stored in LDR0.
If “?” is specified as a character to search for, it is handled as an arbitrary single-byte character.
When specifying “?” (0x3F) as a character, specify it as “~?” (0x7E3F) in two bytes.
When specifying “~” (0x7E) as a character, specify it as “~~” (0x7E7E) in two bytes.
• The maximum number for the search string is 128 characters.
• The only device addresses that can be specified in all arguments are HMI devices.
When searching for “DEFG” and the string was foundSearch string
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'D' = 0x44
LDR200Lower byte
'E' = 0x45
Upper byte
'F' = 0x46
LDR201
Lower byte
'G' = 0x47
Upper byte
0x00
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

Terminating
character

When searching for “WXYZ” and the string was not foundSearch string
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'W' = 0x57
LDR200Lower byte
'X' = 0x58
Upper byte
'Y' = 0x59
LDR201
Lower byte
'Z' = 0x5A
Terminating
Upper byte
0x00
character
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

String to be searched
Search result
Device address Stored value Position
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100LDR0-1
Lower byte
'B' = 0x421Upper byte
'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte
'D' = 0x443Upper byte
'E' = 0x45
4
LDR102Lower byte
'F' = 0x46
5Upper byte
'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte
'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte
'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte
'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte
'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte
'L' = 0x4C
11
Upper byte
'M' = 0x4D
12
LDR106Lower byte
'N' = 0x4E
13Upper byte
'O' = 0x4F
14
LDR107
Terminating character
Lower byte
0x00

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-55

25
ScriptString to be searched
Search result
Position
Device address Stored value
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100LDR03Lower byte
'B' = 0x421Upper byte
'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte
'D' = 0x44←3Upper byte
'E' = 0x45
4
LDR102Lower byte
'F' = 0x46
5Upper byte
'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte
'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte
'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte
'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte
'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte
'L' = 0x4C
11
Upper byte
'M' = 0x4D
12
LDR106Lower byte
'N' = 0x4E
13Upper byte
'O' = 0x4F
14
LDR107Lower byte
0x00
Terminating character5 Script Coding Examples
When searching for “?” as an arbitrary single-byte character
Search string
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'E' = 0x45
LDR200Lower byte'?' = 0x3F
Upper byte
'G' = 0x47
LDR201
Lower byte
'H' = 0x48
Terminating
Upper byte
0x00
character
LDR202Lower byte
0x00

String to be searched
Search result
Device address Stored value Position
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100LDR04Lower byte
'B' = 0x421Upper byte
'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte
'D' = 0x443←4Upper byte
'E' = 0x45
LDR102Lower byte
'F' = 0x46
5Upper byte
'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte
'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte
'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte
'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte
'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte
'L' = 0x4C
11
Upper byte
'M' = 0x4D
12
LDR106Lower byte
'N' = 0x4E
13Upper byte
'O' = 0x4F
14
LDR107
Terminating character
Lower byte
0x00

When searching for “?” as a character
Search string
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'E' = 0x45
LDR200Lower byte'~' = 0x7E
Upper byte'?' = 0x3F
LDR201
Lower byte
'G' = 0x47
Upper byte
'H' = 0x48
LDR202
Terminating
Lower byte
0x00
character

String to be searched
Search result
Device address Stored value Position
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100LDR04Lower byte
'B' = 0x421Upper byte
'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101
Lower byte
'D' = 0x443Upper byte
'E' = 0x45
←4
LDR102Lower byte'?' = 0x3F
5Upper byte
'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte
'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte
'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte
'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte
'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte
'L' = 0x4C
11
Upper byte
'M' = 0x4D
12
LDR106Lower byte
'N' = 0x4E
13Upper byte
'O' = 0x4F
14
LDR107
Terminating character
Lower byte
0x00

When searching for “~” as a character
Search string
String to be searched
Search result
Device address Stored value
Device address Stored value Position
Device address Stored value
Upper byte
Upper byte
'E' = 0x45
'A' = 0x41
0
LDR100LDR04LDR200Lower byte
Lower byte'~' = 0x7E
'B' = 0x421Upper byte
Upper byte'~' = 0x7E
'C' = 0x43
2
LDR101LDR201
Lower byte
Lower byte
'G' = 0x47
'D' = 0x443Upper byte
Upper byte
'H' = 0x48
'E' = 0x45
←4
LDR202
Terminating LDR102
Lower byte
Lower byte
0x00'~' = 0x7E
5character
Upper byte
'G' = 0x47
6
LDR103Lower byte
'H' = 0x48
7Upper byte
'I' = 0x49
8
LDR104Lower byte
'J' = 0x4A
9Upper byte
'K' = 0x47
10
LDR105Lower byte
'L' = 0x4C
11
Upper byte
'M' = 0x4D
12
LDR106Lower byte
'N' = 0x4E
13Upper byte
'O' = 0x4F
14
LDR107
Terminating character
Lower byte
0x00

25-56

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples● Drawing■ Example 5.7.30

Draw a line

ScriptLINE(20, 20, 60, 60, 3, 1, 20);
Operation description
Draws a line connecting the start coordinates X=20, Y=20 and the end coordinates X=60, Y=60 on the screen where
the script is running. The line has a line width of 3 (3 pixels), line type of 1 (solid line), and line color of 20 (red).
■ Example 5.7.31

Draw a line (omitting arguments)

ScriptLINE(0, 0, 150, 100);
Operation description
Draws a line connecting the start coordinates X=0, Y=0 and the end coordinates X=150, Y=100 on the screen where
the script is running. The line width, line type, and line color have been omitted, so the line's line width is 1 (1 pixel),
the line type is 1 (solid line), and the line color is 247 (white: Color No. 255).
■ Example 5.7.32

Draw a rectangle

ScriptRECTANGLE(20, 20, 100, 60, 1, 2, 24, 22, 13, 2, 5);■ Example 5.7.33

Draw a rectangle (omitting arguments)

ScriptRECTANGLE(0, 0, 150, 100);
Operation description
Draws a rectangle with the start coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's upper-left corner) X=0, Y=0 and the end
coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's lower-right corner) X=150, Y=100 on the screen where the script isrunning. The line width, line type, foreground color, background color, pattern, rounding type, and rounding radius areomitted, so the rectangle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 1 (solid line), foreground color and background color is247 (white: Color No. 255), pattern is 0 (none), rounding type is 0 (none), and rounding radius is 0 (0 pixels).
■ Example 5.7.34

Draw a circle or ellipse

Script

CIRCLE(100, 100, 60, 60, 1, 2, 26, 0, 4);Operation description
Draws a circle with the center coordinate X=100, Y=100, the X-axis radius 60 pixels, and the Y-axis radius 60 pixels.
The circle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 2 (dotted line), foreground color is 26 (light blue), background color is
0 (black), and pattern is 4 (foreground 50%).
■ Example 5.7.35

Draw a circle or ellipse (omitting arguments)

Script

CIRCLE(100, 100, 80, 40);
Operation description
Draws an ellipse with the center coordinate X=100, Y=100, the X-axis radius 80 pixels, and the Y-axis radius 40 pixels.
The line width, line type, foreground color, background color, and pattern are omitted, so the ellipse's line width is 1 (1pixel), line type is 1 (solid line), foreground color and background color is 247 (white: Color No. 255), and pattern is 0
(none).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-57

25
ScriptOperation description
Draws a rectangle with the start coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's upper-left corner) X=20, Y=20 andthe end coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's lower-right corner) X=100, Y=60 on the screen where thescript is running. The rectangle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 2 (dotted line), foreground color is 24 (green),background color is 22 (yellow), pattern is 13 (tint), rounding type is 2 (curve), and rounding radius is 5 (5 pixels).

5 Script Coding Examples● Indirect assignment■ Example 5.7.36

Indirect read

Script[LDR 200] = OFFSET([LDR 10],[LKR 20]);
Operation description
When the value of LKR20 is 8, the value of LDR18, the device address 8 words from LDR10, is read and stored in
LDR200.
LDR10

0000

LKR20

0008

+8
LDR200

1234

LDR18

1234

Read

■ Example 5.7.37

Indirect write

ScriptOFFSET([LDR 10],[LKR 20]) = 1234;
Operation description
When the value of LKR20 is 3, the constant 1234 is stored in LDR13, the device address 3 words from LDR10.
LDR10

0000

LDR13

1234

LKR20

0003

+3
1234
Write

25-58

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Script Coding Examples

5.8

Data Type Designations■ Example 5.8.1

Specify the UBIN16(W) as the Data Type on the Script Editor and the from Lower word as
the Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data for HMI Devices on the System tab in the
Project Settings dialog box.

Script[LDR 100] = 65535;[LDR 101] = 0;
[LDR 200] = 0;
[LDR 300] = 0;
asdoubleword{[LDR 100] = [LDR 100]+1;}[LDR 200] = [LDR 100];
asdoubleword{[LDR 300] = [LDR 100];}
Operation description
Stores 65535 in LDR100, 0 in LDR101, LDR200 and LDR300.
Data TypeUBIN16(W)Device Address

Stored value

LDR10065535

LDR1010

LDR2000

LDR300025

Data TypeUBIN32(D)Device Address
LDR101 Upper word

The value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the
LDR100 is stored in the LDR100 as the "UBIN32(D)".
Stored valueStored value+1

LDR100 Lower word 65535

65535

0

ScriptChanges the Data Type to UBIN32(D).

0

65536

1

Returns the Data Type to the default UBIN16(W).
Stores the value of LDR100 in LDR200.
Data TypeUBIN16(W)Device Address

Stored valueStored value

LDR1000

0

LDR101

1

1

LDR20000Changes the Data Type to UBIN32(D).
Stores the value of LDR100 in LDR300.
Data TypeUBIN32(D)Device Address

Stored value

LDR100 Lower word

0

LDR101 Upper word

1

LDR300 Lower word

0

LDR301 Upper word

0

65536
0

Stored value
0
1
0
1

65536
65536

The handling method of 32-bit numerical data follows the data storage method specified in the Project
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data for HMI
Devices” on page 4-31 and Chapter 4 “Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data” on page 4-51.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-59

6 Important Notes

6

Important Notes
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes important notes when defining a script.

6.1

Important Notes Regarding the While Definition■ Define so it will not go into an infinite loop.
The execution expression is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is satisfied.
However, it will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is satisfied continually.

[LDR 100] = 10;
while (0 != [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;}
In the conditional expression of the while definition, it states to exit the loop when the value of LDR100 turns 0.
However, the value stored in the LDR100 is not changed after storing 10 in the first line of the script, so it will go into
an infinite loop.
When using the while definition, define it so it will not go into an infinite loop.
The value of LDR100 will become 0 when the while definition is repeated 10 times in the next example, and it will getout of the while definition.

[LDR 100] = 10;
while (0 != [LDR 100]){[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
[LDR 100] = [LDR 100] - 1;}
■ Define it so it will not continue the process for longer than the time limit.
For scripts in HMI functions, when the processing of a single script continues for more than the time limit due to awhile definition, etc., an execution time over error occurs and that script will be halted. Define the script so the
execution time for one script does not exceed 3,000 milliseconds.
For details, refer to “1.4 Script Error in HMI Functions” on page 25-4.
■ Do not write into the control device*1 or the external device address.

For scripts in HMI functions, when it is written into a control device*1 or an external device address in the while
definition, a script error will occur.

6.2

Important Notes Regarding the Data Type Designations■ Do not set a Data Type Designations in the braces "{}" for the Data Type Designations.
The maximum number of the hierarchy for the Data Type Designations is one.
An error occurs when the Data Type Designations is set in the braces "{}" for the Data Type Designations.

6.3

Regarding Communication Error
If the external device address is used for the Global Script or the Script Command that configured to the displayed
screens, unless the target device is connected, a communication error will occur even if the Trigger Condition is notsatisfied.

*1 FT2J/1J only

25-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Important Notes

6.4

Maximum Number of Control Devices and External Device Addresses■ Global Script

A maximum of 256 control devices*1 and external device addresses in total can be used as a trigger condition and in
scripts executed as Global Script.

■ Scripts

The number of control devices*1 and external device addresses which can be used in the script are as follows:
Item

Number of devices

Destination control devices*1 and external device addresses

64 max.

Source control devices*1 and external device addresses

64 max.

If the same device address is used in multiple device address settings, the number of used device addresses
is counted as 1. It is not counted as 1 device address per device address setting.

6.5

About the Priority of the Operator
As a basic rule, operators are calculated in order from left of the line, but when multiple calculations are combined,
they are calculated in following priority.
PriorityHigh

Operator()

25! ~ -(Negative number)

Script* / %+ -(Subtraction)
<< >>
&
^
|

< <= > >=
== !=
&&
||
Low

=

*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

25-61

6 Important Notes

25-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 26

Text Group

This chapter describes the Text Group function and how to configure text groups and text.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How to Create the Text Groups and Text Registrations
Text groups are a function where the text used for such purposes as registration text, messages for parts, chartlabels, and titles for Popup Screens are registered in advance. The registered text is loaded and displayed whendisplaying parts and screens. The text can be managed collectively including editing the registered text and adding ordeleting text.
Text groups can perform the following functions.
• Switch the displayed language by value of device address.
Group 1: English
Text ID: 1 Goal reached1

Group 3: Japanese

䗴ᡆⴤḽ

目標達成

Main unit

External device

D100 :

Group 2: Chinese

Goal reached

26
2

䗴ᡆⴤḽ

D100 :

3

目標達成

Text Group

D100 :• Use common text for parts.
Main unit
Group 1: English

RUN STOP
Base Screen 1

RUN

RUN
Text ID: 2 STOP
Text ID: 1

STOP

Base Screen 2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

26-1

1 Overview

1.2

Functions that Support Text Groups
The functions that support text groups are as follows.
Item
ScreenDrawings

Buttons

Lamps

Data Displays

ChartsSetting

Popup Screen

Title

Password Input Screens

Title

Text

Text

Bit Button

Registration Text

Word Button

Registration Text

Goto Screen Button

Registration Text

Print Button

Registration Text

Key Button

Registration Text

Multi-Button

Registration Text

Selector Switch

Registration Text

Pilot Lamp

Registration Text

Multi-State Lamp

Registration Text

Numerical Input

Unit

Message Display

Message

Message Switching Display

Message

Alarm List Display

Message

Alarm Log Display

Message, Title

Data Log Display

Label

Numerical Display

Unit

Bar Chart

X-axis and Y-axis scale labels

Line Chart

X-axis and Y-axis scale labels

Alarm Log

Messages displayed in data output as CSV

Data Log

Labels displayed in data output as CSV

Operation Log

Recorded item labels and event names displayed in data output as CSV• When the text group is switched, the displayed Base Screen is reset. When the current screen is reset,
the displayed Popup Screen is closed and the internal devices restart as if the Base Screen is switched.
The behavior of the internal devices differs according to the internal devices. For details, refer to Chapter
35 “Internal Devices” on page 35-1.
• Enter the password for projects created with WindO/I-NV4 Ver. 1.11.4 or earlier using only 4 to 15
uppercase letters and numbers.

26-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure2

Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the configuration procedure for text groups and text.

2.1

How to Create the Text Groups and Text Registrations

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Text Manager.
Text Manager is displayed.

2 In Number of Text Groups, specify the number of text groups to create (1 to 32).
The configured number of text groups are enabled.

26
Text Group

3 Double click (Text Group Name).
The Text Group Settings dialog box is displayed.

(Text Group Name)(Text Group Name) displays Text Group Number - Text Group Name.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual26-3

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

4 The Text Group Number is displayed to the Text Group Name. Enter the name for the text group in the text box.
The maximum number for the Text Group Name is 20 characters.

(Text Group Number)

To use when the main unit power is turned on or switched to Run Mode, select the Use this Text Groupas Default check box.
The text group displayed within Text Manager is the default.

5 Click OK.
The Text Group Settings dialog box closes.
For one text group, proceed to step 8.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to create the necessary text group.
7 With Change Text Group by Device Address, specify the word device as the condition to switch the text group.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
These options can only be configured when Number of Text Groups is specified as two or more.
When the value of device address is 0, the text group switches to the text group set as the default.
If the value of device address is invalid, the text group is not switched.

8 With (Font), select the font to use for the text to register from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows
When Windows is selected, all the fonts installed on the computer can be used. This allows you to display
fonts and languages that are not installed on the main unit.
Click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box. Configure the details such as the font, style, and size.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.

(Font)(Text Color)

9 With (Text Color), select the color of the text to register (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.

26-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

10 To register the text, double click the cell and enter the text in the Text Manager.
The maximum number is 3750 characters.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text”
on page 2-6.
You can enter multi-line text by inserting a newline. The newline is counted as two characters.

(Text)

26

11 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to create the necessary text in each text group.
This concludes creating text groups and registering text.
• The Text ID Search feature allows you to search for text IDs used in the properties of the object, screen
titles, the functions and settings of the project. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “5.3 Search for Text ID” onpage 2-78.
• The Font Replacement feature allows you to replace fonts set in the properties of the object with
Windows fonts. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “5.5 Replacing Font” on page 2-83.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

26-5

Text Group

12 Click OK.

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure● Saving Registered Text in Unicode Text Format
To use registered text in another project, save the text as a Unicode text file or as a CSV file. This file is called a textlist.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Text Manager.
Text Manager is displayed.

2 Select the (Text) of the Text Group to export.

(Text)To export multiple text groups, select all of (Text) for the text groups to export. To select multiple items of(Text), press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

3 Click(Export).

The Export dialog box is displayed.

4 Enter the location to Location, and then select the file format (*.txt or *.csv) as the Save as type.
The file name becomes "TextGroup**". (** is the same number as the Text Group Number, 01 to 32)
Example: Save the text for text group 1 and text group 2 as a Unicode text file
TextGroup01.txt and TextGroup02.txt files are saved in the specified location.

5 Click OK.
This concludes saving a text list.

26-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure● Editing Text List

1 Open the exported text list file.
Use Notepad, a commercially available text editor, or spreadsheet software.

2 Edit the text and save the file.
When saved in Unicode text format (tab delimited), the structure of the text list data is as follows:: tab
Text group row

Text Group Number

Text Group Name

Text ID

Text

Font

Text Color···
Text ID row

For Windows fonts,
Text ID

Windows

Style

Text

Text Color

Character Pitch

Line Spacing

Font

Character Set

Size

·
·
·
Example: The text of text group 1 (TextGroup01.txt) saved in Unicode text format (tab delimited) is edited.

26
Text Group

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual26-7

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure● Importing Text from a Text List
A text list saved as a Unicode text file or as a CSV file can be imported into Text Manager for the project being edited.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Manager group, click Text Manager.
Text Manager is displayed.

2 Select the (Text) of the Text Group to import.

3 Click(Import).

The Open dialog box is displayed.

4 Select a saved text list and click Open.

To import multiple text lists, select all of the text lists to import. To select multiple text lists, press and hold
SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

26-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
An Import dialog box is displayed if a text ID is included in the text list however it has already been registered on the
Text Manager. Here are your options:• Click Yes to overwrite the text in the text list with the text of the displayed text ID, and then to display confirmation
to overwrite the next text ID.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all the text in the text list without displaying the Import dialog box subsequently.
• Click No to display the next confirmation to overwrite without overwriting the text with the displayed Text Manager
ID.
• Click Cancel to stop importing text.

The imported text is displayed in the Text Manager.

26
Text Group

This concludes importing text from a text list.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual26-9

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

2.2

Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device Address
When multiple text groups have been created, the text group can be switched with a value of device address todisplay a different language.
This section describes an example when the registration text for a button changes between English, Chinese, andJapanese.

Text ID: 1
Text ID: 2Group 2: ChineseGroup 3: Japanese

RUN
STOP

䘆㺂

運転

‫↘ڒ‬

停止

Main unit

External device

D100 :

Group 1: English

RUN STOP

1

Bit Button 2 (Text ID: 2)
Bit Button 1 (Text ID: 1)

D100 :

2

䘆㺂

‫↘ڒ‬

D100 :

3

運転停止

1 Following the steps in “2.1 How to Create the Text Groups and Text Registrations” on page 26-3, specify Number of
Text Groups as 3, and under Text Group Name, enter “English” for Group 1, “Chinese” for Group 2, and“Japanese” for Group 3. Set Change Text Group by Device Address to D100.
Register the following text.
Group 1: English

RUN
Text ID: 2 STOP
Text ID: 1

Group 2: ChineseGroup 3: Japanese

䘆㺂

運転

‫↘ڒ‬

停止

2 Create a Bit Button.

On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Bit Button.

3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Button.

26-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure

4 Double-click the placed Bit Button and the properties dialog box is displayed.

5 Click the Registration Text tab, and then select the Use Text Manager check box.

26
Text Group

6 Specify 1 for the Text ID under OFF.
7 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Properties of Bit Button dialog box closes.

8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 and create a Bit Button to use text ID 2 for the registration text.
This concludes configuring the settings to switch the displayed language by a value of device address.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual26-11

3 Text Manager

3

Text Manager
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons in Text Manager.

3.1

Text Manager
The text that is loaded and displayed when objects and Popup Screens are displayed is collectively managed with Text
Manager.

(Font)(Text Color)(Windows Font)(Text Group Name)(Text Messages List)(Text ID)

(Text)■(Copy)
Select (Text) and click

to copy the text and its attributes to the clipboard.

• To select multiple items of (Text), press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Click (Text ID) to select the entire row.
■

(Paste)Select (Text) and click

to paste the clipboard contents to that cell.

• To select multiple items of (Text), press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Click (Text ID) to select the entire row.
■

26-12

(Delete Unused Texts)
Deletes the text with Text ID numbers that are registered in the Text Manager but are not used in the project.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Text Manager■(Find)
Displays the Find dialog box.
The text entered in Find what is searched for in (Text) in the (Text Messages List).

■(Replace)
Displays the Replace dialog box.
The text entered in Find what is searched for in (Text) in the (Text Messages List) and that text is replaced with thetext entered in Replace with.

■(Destination)
Specifies the text ID to move the focus (1 to 32,000).

26■(Import)Imports text in a text list saved as a Unicode text file or as a CSV file.
Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer to “Importing Text from a Text List” on page 26-8.

■(Export)Saves the text for the text group being edited as a Unicode text file or as a CSV file. This file is called a text list. The
types of files that can be saved are as follows.
• Unicode text file (tab delimited) (*.txt)• CSV file (comma delimited) (*.csv)• CSV file (semicolon delimited) (*.csv)
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving Registered Text in Unicode Text
Format” on page 26-6.
The saved text list can be imported with

(Import).

When Unicode text file (tab delimited) (*.txt) is selected, the file can handle multiple languages byusing a commercially available text editor or spreadsheet software that supports Unicode.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

26-13

Text Group■ Go toMoves the focus to the text ID specified in (Destination).

3 Text Manager■ Number of Text Groups
Specifies the number of text groups (1 to 32).
■ Change Text Group by Device Address
Switches the text group according to the value of device address. Specify the word device to use as the condition toswitch the text group.
Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.
These options can only be configured when Number of Text Groups is specified as two or more.
When the value of device address is 0, the text group switches to the text group set as the default.
If the value of device address is invalid, the text group is not switched.
■ (Font)
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Western, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows■ (Text Color)
Selects the color of the text to register (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 16 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ (Windows Font)
Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using (Font) to display the current setting. You can specify the character spacing (0 to 100) and theline spacing (0 to 100). To change the settings other than the character spacing and line spacing, click Change todisplay the Font Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
■ (Text Messages List)
The attributes for the registered text are displayed in this list.
(Text Group Name): Displays Text Group Number - Text Group Name. Double clicking this item displays the Text
Group Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Text Group Settings Dialog Box” on page 26-15.
(Text ID):

Displays the ID number (1 to 32,000).

(Text):

Displays the registered text.
When registering text, double click the cell for the text group and text ID (1 to 32,000) toregister, and then enter the text.
The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Text” on page 2-6.
A line feed will be added with pressing and holding ALT and ENTER keys. You can enter multi-line text byinserting a newline. The newline is displayed as \n and is counted as two characters.

26-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Text Manager● Text Group Settings Dialog Box
This dialog box is used to configure the Text Group Name and the default.

■ Text Group Name
Displays the Text Group Number. Enter the name for the text group in the text box. The maximum number for the
Text Group Name is 20 characters.
■ Use this Text Group as Default
Select this check box to setup the group to use when the main unit power is turned on and when switching to run
mode.
The text group set as the default is displayed withnext to (Text Group Name).

26
Text Group

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

26-15

3 Text Manager

26-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 27

Web Server Function

This chapter describes how to configure the web server function and their operation on the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The web server function remotely performs the main unit maintenance using a web browser terminal such as acomputer or smartphone.
••••

Monitoring
Remote Control
Remote Monitoring
Displaying Custom Web Page
Custom web pages are downloaded to external memory*1. The external memory*1 must be inserted before
downloading.

27
Web Server Function*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-1

2 System Composition

2

System Composition
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

An example system configuration for using the web server function is shown below.
Configure the main unit Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway) and connect to a local network.
Web Browser Terminal(Computer, Smartphone, etc.)
Web Browser Terminal(Computer, Smartphone, etc.)
Remote Network(2)

External Network(1)
Local Network

Ethernet Communication (TCP/IP)

External Memory Device*1

Main unit

SD memory card

Main unit

External device

External device

USB flash drive
To download
the Custom Web Page

(1) Access the main unit from a web browser connected to the local network to use the web server function.
(2) When the local network is connected to an external network, configure the web browser connected to the remote
network with the local network’s gateway, router, and other settings. Access the main unit from the remote webbrowser to use the web server function.
For gateway, router, and other settings, contact the administrator of the network which the main unit isconnected to.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

27-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Minimum System Requirements

3

Minimum System Requirements
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Use of the following web browsers is recommended with the web server function.
OS of the computer or smartphone
Windows 11/10/8/7

Recommended Web Browsers
Google Chrome 94 or later
Mozilla Firefox 89 or later
Microsoft Edge 109 or later

Microsoft Internet Explorer 11*1
Android

Google Chrome 94 or later

iOS

Safari 14 or laterWeb browsers other than those recommended can use the web server function, but problems may occur
with features such as automatic updates and displaying images.

27
Web Server Function*1 Windows 8/7 only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual27-3

4 How to Set up and Access4

How to Set up and Access
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

Web Server Function Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Configure the items on the Web Server tab.

■ Use System Web Page
The Remote Control page, Remote Monitor page or System Detailed Information page of the main unit can beaccessed from a web browser terminal.
Select the functions that are allowed when the main unit is accessed from a web browser terminal.
Refer to Chapter 4 “Use System Web Page” on page 4-74.
■ Use Custom Web Page
The Custom Web Page saved in the external memory device of the main unit can be accessed from a web browser
terminal.
For details about the Custom Web Page, refer to “6 Custom Web Page” on page 27-16.

3 Click the OK button.

27-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 How to Set up and Access

4.2

Accessing from a Web Browser
Follow the procedure below to display the main unit web page on a web browser.

1 Connect the main unit to a local network.
Connect the main unit’s Ethernet interface to the Ethernet port of the local network’s router or hub with a LAN cable.

2 Configure the main unit.
• Ethernet settings
 Refer to Chapter 4 “When Ethernet is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 4-43.
• User account settings
 Refer to Chapter 24 “3 Security Dialog Box” on page 24-37.
• Remote operation & monitoring function settings
 Refer to “Web Server Function Configuration Procedure” on page 27-4.

3 Connect the main unit.
Start the web browser on the web browser terminal and connect the following URL.
http://(IP address of the main unit)/
Example: The IP address of the main unit is 192.168.0.1

http://192.168.0.1/

Enter a port number after the : (colon) to specify the port number.
Example: The IP address of the main unit is 192.168.0.1 and the web server's port number is 8080
http://192.168.0.1:8080/
In the example above, the web page configured by Default Showing Page on Web Server tab in Project Settings
dialog box is displayed.
To open other pages, go to the following URL.
Name

http://IP address of the main unit/top.html
Example: The IP address of the main unit is 192.168.0.1.
http://192.168.0.1/top.html

Remote Monitor page

http://IP address of the main unit/remote_monitor.html
Example: The IP address of the main unit is 192.168.0.1.
http://192.168.0.1/remote_monitor.html

Remote Control page

http://IP address of the main unit/remote_control.html
Example: The IP address of the main unit is 192.168.0.1.
http://192.168.0.1/remote_control.html

Web Server Function

System Information page

Custom Web Page

27

Recommended Web Browsers

http://Main Unit IP Address/custom_web_page.html
Example: The IP address of the main unit is 192.168.0.1.
http://192.168.0.1/custom_web_page.html
http://IP address of the main unit/viewer/view.htm?pagepath= File nameExample: The IP address of the main unit is 192.168.0.1 and the Page1.page is displayed.
http://192.168.0.1/viewer/view.htm?pagepath=Page1.page

When the connection is successful, the main unit displays the password input screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual27-5

4 How to Set up and Access

4 Enter the user name and password configured in the running project.
Enter the user name and password for a user in the “Administrator”, “Operator”, or “Reader” security group.
User name:

The user name configured in the running project. (Default: User)

Password:

The alphanumeric password of 4 to 15 characters long configured in the running project. If a password
is not set, leave the password blank.

• An “Administrator” or “Operator” user account is required to open the remote operation page.
• If you do not access the main unit for 5 minutes or more after accessing it, you will be required to reenter
your user name and password.
Some web browsers will remember the user name and password you entered and automatically reenter
them when required until the browser is closed. With this kind of web browser, you are not required toreenter your user name and password after 5 minutes or more have elapsed since accessing the main unit.
• The main unit can be accessed simultaneously from multiple web browser terminals. However, themaximum number of web browsers that can simultaneously access it is five.
When the user name and password are successfully verified, the main unit web page is displayed.

27-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 System Web Page

5

System Web Page
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The System Web Page is the provided web pages that can display the system information and support the remotefunctions. Accesses the main unit from a web browser terminal to browse it.

5.1

Page configuration
The main unit web pages have the following page configuration.
System Detailed Information Page

http://IP address of the main unit:Port number/top.html

Remote Functions Page
Remote Monitoring Page
Remote Operation Page
There are links to each page on the System Detailed Information Page (homepage).

27
Web Server Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-7

5 System Web Page

5.2

Screen configuration
Each page can be displayed in either English or Japanese. When the web browser's preferred language is set toJapanese, the pages are displayed in Japanese. When the web browser's preferred language is set to a language
other than Japanese, the pages are displayed in English.
All pages are displayed in a right-left two frame configuration on web browsers that support frames.
See example below.
Left Frame

Right Frame[Maximize] Link

Menu Link
Home Link■ Left frame
Links to each page are shown in this menu frame.
■ Right frameShows the function page.
Except for the full screen remote monitoring screen and remote operation screen, all of the pages shown in the rightframe have a Maximize link, Menu link, and Home link.
[Maximize]:

Disables the frame display and shows the page in the full web browser screen.

Menu:

Shows the menu page.
The content of the menu page is the same as the left frame (menu frame) when showing the frame.

Home:

Goes to the System Detailed Information Page.
When using a web browser that does not support frames, the display position of items changes, but thecontent is the same.

27-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 System Web Page

5.3

System Detailed Information Page
Click the System Detailed Information link in the left frame or the Home link in the right frame to show thesystem detailed information page.
See example below.

27
Web Server Function

The main unit information shown on the system detailed information page is listed below.
Display item

Mode

Error

Description
Shows the system's current mode.
• Run Mode
• System Mode• Monitor Mode
• Offline Mode
• Data Transfer Mode
Shows the following errors. For details on the errors, refer to Chapter 37“Troubleshooting” on page 37-1.
• Communication Error• No Screen Data
• Waiting for Default Screen No.
• Processing Error• Backup Data Lost
• Network Off Line• Device Range Error• Script Error• Control Function Error*1*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-9

5 System Web Page

System

Display item

Description

Type Number

Shows the main unit type model number.

System Version

Shows the main unit system software version.

OS Version*2

Shows the main unit operating system software version.

System Time (m/d/y h:m:s)

Shows the date and time of the internal clock of the main unit when thepage was acquired.

Project Name

Shows the project name.
(When characters other than alphanumeric characters are included on
the English page, the project name is shown as “-Wrong Strings-”.)

Project
AuthorShows the project author.
Information
Shows the project’s last modified date/time. The displayed date/time isDate Modified (m/d/y h:m:s)Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Installed Font*3

Shows the extension fonts installed in the main unit.

InterfaceShows the communication interface.

Manufacturer

Shows the external device manufacturer name.

Communication Driver Name

Shows the communication driver name.

Communication Driver Version

Shows the communication driver version.

(Parameter unique to driver - 1)
(Parameter unique to driver - 2) The four items below the driver version show each driver’s unique(Parameter unique to driver - 3) settings. The item names differ according to the drivers.
External
DeviceCommunication 1 to
*4

4

O/I Link

Ethernet

Wireless
LAN*2(Parameter unique to driver - 4)
Serial Interface

Shows the serial interface used as the External Device Communication 1 to 4.

Baud Rate [bps]Shows the speed of the External Device Communication 1 to 4.

Data Bits

Shows the data length of the External Device Communication 1 to 4.

Stop Bits

Shows the stop bits of the External Device Communication 1 to 4.

ParityShows the parity of the External Device Communication 1 to 4.

Flow Control

Shows the flow control method of the External Device Communication 1 to 4.

Retry Cycles

Shows the number of times to retry communication before displaying acommunication error of the External Device Communication 1 to 4.

Time Out [msec]

Shows the response waiting time from the External Device
Communication 1 to 4.

Transmission Wait [msec]

Shows the transmission interval for a communication command of theExternal Device Communication 1 to 4.

Baud Rate [bps]Shows the O/I link communication speed.

O/I Link Station

Shows the O/I link master station or slave station number.

Slave Registration Settings

Shows the slave registration setting register for the O/I linkcommunication master.

Slave Online Status

Shows the slave online information register for the O/I linkcommunication master.

IP Address

Shows the IP address.

Subnet Mask

Shows the subnet mask.

GatewayShows the default gateway address.

MAC Address

Shows the Ethernet MAC address.

IP Address

Shows the IP address of the wireless LAN.

Subnet Mask

Shows the subnet mask of the wireless LAN.

GatewayShows the default gateway address of the wireless LAN.

MAC Address

Shows the Ethernet MAC address of the wireless LAN.

*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*4 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

27-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 System Web Page

Display item

SystemOperation

Description

Default Screen Number

Shows the screen number displayed when the main unit starts running.

Screen Number Format

Shows the depiction method for the displayed screen number.

Start Time [sec]Shows the time to start communication with the external device anddisplay initial screen after the power of the main unit is turned on and theAuto Backlight OFF [min]Shows the time for the backlight to turn off automatically.

Flashing Cycle [sec]Shows the flashing speed for parts and draw objects with the blinking
attribute.

Touch Sound

Shows On or Off for the touch panel confirmation sound.

Menu Language

Shows the system screen’s display language.

POWER LED (green) changes from blinking to lit*2.

• The contents of the display items on the system detailed information page are the values set on the
Project Settings dialog box displayed by clicking Project under System Setup on the Configuration tab
in WindO/I-NV4.
• For details on the item of the External Device Communication 1 to 4, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External
Device Setup Manual.

27
Web Server Function*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-11

5 System Web Page

5.4

Remote monitoring page
You can remotely monitor the main unit from a web browser. When the left frame is displayed, click the Monitor linkin the left frame to display the remote monitoring page. A screen image of the screen displayed on the main unit isshown.
Example:(Screen Switching tool)• On the remote monitoring page, the main unit cannot be controlled even when the screen image
displayed in the web browser is clicked. To control the main unit, please open the remote control page.
• For the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, when the display of the main unit is off by the
backlight auto off function or the System Area 1 screen display (address number+1, bit 7), the screen
image is not displayed in a web browser.
• If JavaScript is prohibited in the web browser settings, the web page will not operate correctly. Pleaseenable JavaScript.
• The screen image cannot be displayed on web browsers that do not support the bitmap or JPEG format.
• The display may not be updated depending on the web browser's cache settings.
• While displaying the remote monitoring page, the scan time of the main unit becomes longer.*1
The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screen image may differ.

*1 Only scan time of the HMI functions for FT2J/1J. It does not affect the Control functions.

27-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 System Web Page
The following items can be specified on the remote monitoring page.
■ Picture Format
Specify the image format to use in remote monitoring.
JPEG Format (Slow):

Capable of showing the screen image displayed on the main unit in the web browser without
degradation. However, the update speed of the web browser display is slower than Bitmap
Format (Fast) and the screen update speed of the main unit also slows down.

Bitmap Format (Fast): Shows the screen image displayed on the main unit reduced to 256 colors. The screen image
displayed on the main unit is somewhat degraded, but the update speed of the display on the
web browser speeds up and the impact on the screen update speed of the main unit isreduced. (The screen update speed of the Bitmap Format (Fast) tends to be faster than the
JPEG Format (Slow), but it may be slower depending on the screen’s displayed content.)■ [Maximize] link
Hides the left frame, page title, and screen format settings, and shows only the screen image of the main unit. The
screen format settings are the same as before clicking the [Maximize] link.
Example:27■ (Screen Switching tool)
Select the Display Goto Screen Tool on Remote Function Page check box on the Web Server tab in the
Project Settings dialog box to display the following controls.
Back:

You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen
was switched.

Forward:

Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was
switched using Back.

First:

Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data.

Previous:

Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently
displayed. If the screen numbers are not sequential, switches to the screen of next
lowest number.

(Specified Screen): Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number.
Next:

Switches to the screen with screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently
displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive, switches to the screen of next
highest number.

Last:

Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-13

Web Server Function

The Screen Switching tool is hidden after clicking the [Maximize] link.

5 System Web Page

5.5

Remote control page
You can remotely control the main unit from a web browser. When the left frame is displayed, click the Control link in
the left frame to display the remote control page. An image of the screen displayed on the main unit is shown. You
can also control the main unit by clicking on the displayed screen image.
Example:(Screen Switching tool)• If JavaScript is prohibited in the web browser settings, the web page will not operate correctly. Pleaseenable JavaScript.
• The screen image cannot be displayed on web browsers that do not support the bitmap or JPEG format.
• The display may not be updated depending on the web browser's cache settings.
• While displaying the remote control page, the scan time of the main unit becomes longer.*1
The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screen image may differ.

*1 Only scan time of the HMI functions for FT2J/1J. It does not affect the Control functions.

27-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 System Web Page
The following items can be specified on the remote operation page.
■ Picture Format
Specify the image format to use in remote operation.
JPEG Format (Slow):

Capable of showing the screen image displayed on the main unit in the web browser without
degradation. However, the update speed of the web browser display is slower than Bitmap
Format (Fast) and the screen update speed of the main unit also slows down.

Bitmap Format (Fast): Shows the screen image displayed on the main unit reduced to 256 colors. The screen image
displayed on the main unit is somewhat degraded, but the update speed of the display on the
web browser speeds up and the impact on the screen update speed of the main unit isreduced. (The screen update speed of the Bitmap Format (Fast) tends to be faster than the
JPEG Format (Slow), but it may be slower depending on the screen's displayed content.)■ Control Options
Operation restrictions prohibit operation from other computers or the touch panel of the main unit while the main unit
is being remotely controlled.
Disable Control From Other Clients:

Check to prohibit remote control from other computers. When this function isenabled, if a web browser is already accessing the main unit, the message
Remote Control is disabled by other client will be displayed on the otherbrowser and access is denied. When disabled, the main unit can be accessedfrom multiple web browsers.

When the Disable Control From Other Clients check box is selected, remote control from othercomputers becomes possible after 15 seconds without any operations.
Disable Control From Touch Panel:

Check to prohibit control with the touch panel of the main unit. When thisfunction is enabled, if a web browser is already accessing the main unit, themessage Touch panel is disabled by Remote Control Function will be
displayed on the main unit and operation by the touch panel of the main unit
is not possible. When disabled, control by the touch panel of the main unit ispossible.

The Screen Switching tool is hidden after clicking the [Maximize] link.

Back:

You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen
was switched.

Forward:

Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was
switched using Back.

First:

Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data.

Previous:

Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently
displayed. If the screen numbers are not sequential, switches to the screen of next
lowest number.

(Specified Screen): Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number.
Next:

Switches to the screen with screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently
displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive, switches to the screen of next
highest number.

Last:

Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-15

Web Server Function■ [Maximize]
Hides the left frame, page title, and screen format settings, and shows only the screen image of the main unit. The
screen format settings are the same as before clicking the [Maximize] link.

27

6 Custom Web Page

6

Custom Web Page
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Custom Web Page is the web page which you create by the Web Page Editor. Downloads the created web page
file to the external memory device inserted in the main unit, and accesses the main unit from a web browser terminal
to browse it.
Custom web pages are downloaded to external memory*1. The external memory*1 must be inserted before
downloading.
To browse the Custom Web Page on the web terminal, select the Use Custom Web Page check box under
the Web Server tab of the Project Settings dialog box. If the display speed of custom web pages is slow,
change the value of Execute Interval on the Web Server tab in the Project Settings dialog box.

6.1

Web Page Editor
Use the Web Page Editor to create a Custom Web Page.

● Works on the Web Page Editor
The Web Page Editor works on an web browser. The recommended web browser is as follows:• Google Chrome 94 or later• Mozilla Firefox 89 or later• Microsoft Edge 109 or later• Microsoft Internet Explorer 11*2
• The recommended web browser must be set for default web browser before using the Web Page Editor.
• We confirm that up to 100 pages of the Custom Web Page can be created by using the Web Page Editor.

6.2

Creating Custom Web Page
This example describes the case of pressing the Switch 1 turns on the Lamp 1. In this case, the HMI Internal Relay
LM0 have been used in the current project.
Switch 1

Lamp1

Initial image

Initial image (Displays OFF graphic)

Press

When LM0 is 1, Lamp displays ON graphic.

Pressing the switch sets LM0 to 1.

Press

When LM0 is 0, Lamp displays OFF graphic.

Pressing the switch sets LM0 to 0.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 Windows 8/7 only

27-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Custom Web Page

1 On the Configuration tab, in the Editor group, click Web Page Editor.
Web Page Editor starts.

If the Windows Security Alert dialog box is displayed, click Allow access.

2 Configures a Switch 1.
Select Input, Switch in the Components list, and drag and drop it on the editing area.
The switch will be placed on the area with the predefined size.

27

3 Click the switch placed on the work area and on the Property tab, for Link Box, click.

The Device Tree dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-17

Web Server Function

To place a switch on the area with the desired size, click Switch in the Components list, and then drag thecross hair cursor on the editing area.

6 Custom Web Page

4 Click the device address to configure for the Switch 1 and click OK.

The HMI Devices are displayed in the Device Tree dialog box.
To display an address number, it needs to be configured in the project being edited before Web Page Editor
opens.
For device addresses not displayed in the Device Tree dialog box, input them directly into the text box
below Link Box of the Property tab.
The format of the device address to edit directly in text box is as follows:
IDEC: Device type : Device Address . Data Type
Example: Device Type is LDR(HMI Data Register), Address Number is 100, and Data Type is UBIN16(W).
IDEC:LDR:LDR0100.UBIN16(W)This configures LM0 for the Switch 1.

5 Repeat step 2 through 4 to configure the Lamp 1 in the same procedure with the Switch 1.
6 Click File on the menu bar and click Save page as.
The Save Page dialog box is displayed.

27-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 Custom Web Page

7 Enter the file name in Save Name, and click OK.
A confirmation message is displayed.

The saved file name is displayed in Web Page Editor on the Project window.

8 Click OK.

This concludes creating the Custom Web Page.

• By copying values of the control devices*1 or external device addresses to the HMI Devices using the Data
Copy function, etc., you can indirectly use the values of the control devices*1 or external device addresseson the Custom Web Page.
• Table, Trend Bar and Operation Status Graph of the Web Page Editor support CSV files that use .
(period) as the decimal point symbol.

*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

27-19

27
Web Server Function• For details on Web Page Editor, refer to the Web Page Editor help that is displayed by clicking Help of
Help on the menu bar.
• The image files and movie files that have been added with the Web Page Editor are displayed in Web
Page Editor on the Project window.
• To edit the Custom Web Page, double-clicking a file name displayed in Web Page Editor on the Project
window.

6 Custom Web Page

27-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 28

Control Function

This chapter describes how to configure control functions such as external input/output, keep devices, RUN/STOP,
and ladder programs.

1

Ladder Program
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

For details about the ladder program processing of the main unit, refer to Chapter 1 “Ladder Program Operation” inthe Ladder Programming Manual.
The size of the ladder program that can be downloaded to the main unit is 96,000 bytes (12,000 steps). You
can check the program size on the WindLDR status bar. Note that the ladder program is not included in the
project data size.

1.1

RUN and STOP
During the Run/Stop operation of the ladder program, please confirm the safety before proceeding.
Operation mistake may result in equipment damage or accidents.
The Run/Stop state of the ladder program can be switched by the following operations.
 Operation with WindLDR (“Run/Stop operation using WindLDR” on page 28-2)
 Power operation of the main unit (“Run/Stop operation with power” on page 28-2)
 Stop input (“Stop Input” on page 28-6)
 Reset input (“Reset Input” on page 28-7)
 Operations of the maintenance screen (Chapter 36 “1.1 Maintenance Screen Overview” on page 36-1)

The Run/Stop state of the ladder program can be specified when the main unit is powered on. For details,
refer to “Run/Stop Selection at Power Up” on page 28-9.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-1

28
Control Function

Switching from run to stop can be performed by the END processing of the user program. When the user program
stops, the following functions will also stop. For details about END processing, refer to the appendix “Breakdown of
END Processing Time” in the Ladder Programming Manual.
High-speed counter, Frequency measurement, Interrupt input, Catch input, Timer interrupt
In addition, when switching from stop to run, the value of the device address will be cleared or retained according to
the settings in Memory Backup on Function Area Settings. For details, refer to “2.4 Memory Backup” on page28-11.

1 Ladder Program● Run/Stop operation using WindLDR
Changing the ladder diagram program from the Stop state to the Run state

1 On the Online tab, in the PLC group, click Start.
The confirmation message is displayed.

2 Click Yes.
Run the ladder program.
Changing the ladder diagram program from the Run state to the Stop state

1 On the Online tab, in the PLC group, click Stop.
The confirmation message is displayed.

2 Click Yes.
Stop the ladder program.
● Run/Stop operation with power
The main unit can be run and stopped by turning the power on and off.

1 Connect the power terminal of the main unit to a power source.
2 When the power is turned on, the ladder program will run or stop according to the setting of Run/Stop Selection atPower Up in Function Area Settings.

28-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Ladder Program

1.2

Create Program
Ladder diagram program instructions include basic instructions for sorting processing and instruction which performmoves, comparisons, Boolean computations binary arithmetic operations, and bit shifts. For details, refer to theLadder Programming Manual.
Inputting a ladder program requires specialized knowledge.
Please use it after understanding the contents of this manual, the ladder programming manual and ladderprograms.

● Using WindLDR

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click Control Function.
WindLDR starts.

2 Create a ladder program.

28
Control Function

For the basic operation of WindLDR, refer to Chapter 1 “Operation Basics” in the Ladder Programming
Manual.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual28-3

2 Function Area Settings

2

Function Area Settings
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

Function List
Function Area
Settings

Run/Stop
Control

Memory Backup

Input & Output
Configuration

Self Diagnosis

28-4

Function Name

Overview

Reference

Stop Input

Stops the ladder program by external input.

Page 28-6

Reset Input

Clears the values of the control devices with an external input.

Page 28-7

Run/Stop Selection
at Keep Data Error
or Watchdog Timer
Error

Specifies the RUN/STOP state of the ladder program when a keep
data error or watchdog timer error occurs.

Page 28-8

Run/Stop Selection
at Power Up

Specifies the Run/Stop state of the ladder program when the
power of the main unit is turned on.

Page 28-9

Memory Backup

Keeps or clears the values of the following control devices at thestart of a ladder program RUN.
Internal relays, Shift registers, Counters, Data registers

Page 28-11

High-Speed Counter

Counts high-speed pulses by the hardware of the main unit.

Page 28-12

Catch Input

Acquires short pulses that change in less than one scan.

Page 28-30

Interrupt Input

Executes the ladder program with an interrupt, using ON/OFF of
the external input as the operating condition.

Page 28-32

Frequency
Measurement

Measures the frequency of the pulse input to the external input.

Page 28-35

Input Filters

By reading the state of the external input several times during
the set period and judging whether it is ON or OFF, erroneous
input due to noise or bounce is eliminated.

Page 28-36

Analog/Digital
InputsAnalog signals are converted to digital values by analog input, or
converted to ON/OFF by digital input and captured.

Page 28-38

Analog Outputs

The analog output value is converted to an analog signal of 0 to
10 V DC voltage or 4 to 20 mA current and output.

Page 28-40

Timer Interrupt

Executes a ladder program in interrupts at regular time intervals.

Page 28-42

Watchdog Timer
Settings

Sets the watchdog timer time for the ladder program.

Page 28-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings

2.2

Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click the item to be set.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.

28
Control Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-5

2 Function Area Settings

2.3

Run/Stop Control● Stop Input
This is a function to stop the ladder program of the main unit with an external input such as a switch on the control
panel.
External inputs (FT2J: I0 to I7, and I10 to I15, FT1J: I0 to I5, I12, and I13) can be used as stop inputs.
When the stop input is turned on, the running ladder program is stopped. When the stop input is turned off, theladder program is run from the beginning.
The start control M8000 value can also control the RUN/STOP of the ladder program.
If the stop input is off, the ladder program will remain running even if the value of the start control M8000 changes
from 1 to 0.
Even if the stop input is turned off, the ladder program will not run if the start control M8000 value is 0.
Stop Input
Start Control
M8000

ON
OFF
1
0
RUN

Ladder Program

STOP

Stops the ladder program while the reset input is on. For details, refer to “Reset Input” on page 28-7.

Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Use Stop Input check box in Stop and Reset Inputs, and specify the external input to be used as thestop input.

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Stop Input. In this setting example, the ladder program will stop when the value of I0
becomes 1.

28-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Reset Input
This is a function to clear the device address value of the main unit through an external input such as a switch on thecontrol panel.
External inputs (FT2J: I0 to I7, and I10 to I15, FT1J: I0 to I5, I12, and I13) can be used as reset inputs.
When the reset input turns on, the running ladder program stops, and all device address values and general errors
except special internal relays and special data registers are cleared. When the reset input turns off, the ladderprogram starts running from the beginning.
To turn off the reset input and run the ladder program, all of the following conditions must be satisfied.
• The value of Start Control M8000 is 1.
• Stop input is off (if stop input is set)
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Use Reset Input check box in Stop and Reset Inputs, and specify the external input to be used as thestop input.

28
Control Function

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Reset Input. In this setting example, when the value of I1 changes to 1, stop theladder program and clear the value of the device address.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-7

2 Function Area Settings● Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error or Watchdog Timer Error
You can specify the Run/Stop state of the ladder program when operation starts due to a keep data error or watchdog
timer error. For details about the keep data error, refer to Chapter 37 “Keep data error” on page 37-9, and about thewatchdog timer error, refer to “2.13 Watchdog Timer Setting” on page 28-44.
• If the Start running immediately when power on check box is cleared and a keep data error occurs
when the power is turned on, the control function will stop until the HMI function starts. After startup,
perform RUN/STOP operation of this setting.
If the Start running immediately when power on check box is selected and a keep data error occurs
when the power is turned on, the RUN/STOP operation for this setting is performed without waiting for
the HMI function to start.
• If Stop in Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error or Watchdog Timer Error is selected, the ladderprogram will stop if a keep data error or a watchdog timer error occurs. To run the ladder program,perform the appropriate operations from WindLDR, Start Control M8000, or RUN/STOP operation on themaintenance screen. For details, refer to Chapter 1 “Start/Stop Operation” in the Ladder Programming
Manual.
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Run or Stop in Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error or Watchdog Timer Error.

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Run or Stop in Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error or Watchdog Timer Error.

28-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Run/Stop Selection at Power Up
This function specifies the state of the ladder program at the start of operation.
Keep Run/Stop State at Power Down:

Operation starts according to the Run/Stop state held when the power isturned off.

Run (M8000 is turned on):Set the value of M8000 to 1 and start operation in the RUN state.

Stop (M8000 is turned off):Set the value of M8000 to 0 and start driving in the STOP state.

Start running immediately when power on: Select this check box to start operating the control function immediately
when the power of the main unit is turned on. When cleared, start the
HMI function before starting the control function.
The Start running immediately when power on iscleared:The Start running immediately when power on is
selected:

Starts the operation of the HMI function first, and thenstarts the operation of the control function.

Starts operation of the control function without waiting
for the start of operation of the HMI function.

HMI functions

Control functions

HMI functions

Control functions

Power onPower on

Scan ofcontrol functions

Starting
Approx. 13 sec.

Starting
Approx. 13 sec.

Start operation
Scan of
HMI functions

Scan ofcontrol functions

Start scanningfor HMI andcontrol functions

Start operation

Start scanningfor control functio

Start scanningfor HMI functions

Scan of
HMI functions

28• The main unit maintains the Run/Stop state during END processing.
• If a keep data error occurs, the setting for Run/Stop Selection at Power Up takes precedence
regardless of the setting for Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error or Watchdog Timer Error.
• When the stop input or reset input is on, the ladder program stops regardless of the setting for Run/
Stop Selection at Power Up.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-9

Control Function• Synchronize the clock information of the HMI function with the internal clock data (current value) D8008
to D8014 of the control function when the HMI function is activated. FFFFh is stored in the internal clock
data (current value) D8008 to D8014 until the HMI function starts.
• If the Start running immediately when power on check box is selected, wait until the value of the
HMI function startup completion flag M8022 becomes 1 before executing week programmer instructions(WEEK and YEAR) and flow calculation instructions (FLWP and FLWA).

2 Function Area Settings
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the state of the ladder program at the start of operation in Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.

28-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings

2.4

Memory Backup
This function keeps or clears the value of the device address of the main unit.
The device address specified for clearing is cleared when the main unit is powered on and when the ladder program
starts running. Device addresses that can be retained or cleared are:
Shift Register, Internal Relay, Counter Current Value, Data Register
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Memory Backup.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the option for each device address.
Clear All:

Clears the values of the device addresses when the ladder program starts running.

Keep All:

Keeps the values of the device addresses while the power is off.

Keep Specified Range:

Keeps the values of the device addresses in the specified range while the power is off.
The values of the device addresses outside the specified range are cleared when theladder program starts running.

28
Control Function

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Memory Backup.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-11

2 Function Area Settings

2.5

High-Speed Counter
This section describes the high-speed counter for counting high-speed pulses from devices such as rotary encoders
and proximity switches. The high-speed counter is a function that counts high-speed pulses with the main unit
hardware that cannot be read in the execution of a normal program. The high-speed counter has a comparator
function to compare a preset value (target value) and the current value. When the preset value and the current value
match, an external output is turned on or an interrupt program is executed.
■ Application example
This application example punches holes into a roll of paper at a regular interval.
The two pulses (A-phase, B-phase) that carry the phase difference output from the rotary encoder are counted by thetwo-phase high-speed counter of the main unit.
When the current value reaches the preset value, the specified external output turns on and the perforator punches ahole in the roll of paper.
Paper Roll

Paper Feed Roller

Perforator
Pulse Motor

Rotary Encoder

Main unit

28-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Operation Mode
The high-speed counter has the following two operation modes:• Single-phase high-speed counter• Two-phase high-speed counter■ Single-phase High-speed Counter
Available external inputs are I0, I2 to I5.
Group 2 can be used as a clear input for Group 1 when the Counting Mode is set to Up/Down Selection
Reversible Counter or Dual-pulse Reversible Counter. When not used as a clear input, it can be used as anormal input, catch input, interrupt input or frequency measurement.
• Adding counters are supported.
• It supports pulse input up to 20 kHz and can count in a range from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
• When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow occurs, a comparison output turns on or aninterrupt program is executed.
• Writes the preset value to the current value when the reset input (Special Internal Relay) or the clear input I2 is
executed. For details about the Reset input, refer to “Reset input” on page 28-21.
Counting ModeGroup 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

Adding Counter

Pulse input—

Pulse input

Pulse input

Pulse input

Pulse input

Up/Down Selection
Reversible Counter

Pulse input

Up/down
selection input

Clear input

—

—

—

Dual-pulse Reversible
Counter

Pulse input(up)

Pulse input(down)

Clear input

—

—

—

Counting Mode
2-edge count4-edge countGroup 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5I0Group 1
I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

Pulse input(A-phase)

Pulse input(B-phase)

Clear input(Z-phase)———

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-13

28
Control Function■ Two-phase High-speed Counter
Available external inputs are I0 and I1 (Group 1).
Group 2 can be used as a clear input for Group 1. When not used as clear input, it can be used as normal input, catch
input, interrupt input and frequency measurement.
• The two-phase high-speed counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input.
• Supports pulse input up to 10kHz for 2-edge count and up to 5kHz for 4-edge count, and can be counted in therange of 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32bit).
• Even higher speed counting is possible by specifying 2-edge count or 4-edge count.
• Turns on an external output or executes an interrupt program when the current value matches the preset value,
overflows, or underflows.
• Writes the preset value to the current value when the reset input (Special Internal Relay) or the clear input I2 is
executed. For details about the Reset input, refer to “Reset input” on page 28-21.

2 Function Area Settings● Counting Mode
The Counting Mode of the high-speed counter varies based on the Operation Mode.
Single-phase High-speed Counter■ Adding counter
The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
Pulse input

10

Current value

11

12

13

14

■ Up/down selection reversible counter
Up/down selection reversible counter can switch between addition and subtraction by pulse input with the up/down
selection input. When the up/down selection input is on, the counter counts up with the rise in pulse input. When theup/down selection input is off, the counter counts down with the rise in pulse input.
Up/down selection
input

Pulse input

Current value

10

11

12

11

10

■ Dual-pulse reversible counter
This counter switches between the up count and the down count with pulse input (up) and pulse input (down). Whena pulse is input to pulse input (up), the counter counts up with the rise in pulse input. When a pulse is input to pulse
input (down), the counter counts down with the rise in pulse input.
Pulse input (down)
Input

Pulse input (up)Current value

10

11

12

11

10

Two-phase High-speed Counter■ 2-edge countThis counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase
precedes the B-phase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the B-phase. When the B-phase precedes the Aphase, the counter counts down with the rise and fall of the B-phase.
A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

0

1

2

3

4

3

2

1

0

■ 4-edge countThis counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When the A-phase
precedes the B-phase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase. When the B-phase
precedes the A-phase, the counter counts down with the rise and fall of the A-phase and the B-phase.
A-phaseB-phaseCurrent
value

28-14

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

7

6

5

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4

3

2

1

0

2 Function Area Settings● Comparison Actions
The high-speed counter has the following three comparison actions. If the preset value and the current value arecompared and the values match, the following operations are executed.
None:

No operation.

Comparison Output:

The specified external output is turned on.

Interrupt Program:

The subroutine program with the specified label number is executed as the interrupt
program.

A maximum of 16 data registers are required to perform a comparison action. The required number of data registers
varies based on Number of Comparisons setting. If the first data register for Tag Name in WindLDR is set, eachdata register is assigned to each setting item in the Comparison Settings.
For one preset value, the same preset value is compared with the current value each time.
When multiple preset values are configured, the preset value is changed each time the preset value and current value
match. Also, if there are four preset values, when preset value 1 matches the current value, the comparison target
switches to preset value 2, and when preset value 2 matches the current value, the comparison target switches topreset value 3, and so on. Switches up to setting value 4. When the preset value 4 matches, the preset value returns
to preset value 1 and the values are compared.
When each preset value is written by the ladder program and the high-speed counter is executed, the preset value
with the number stored in Current Comparison Number is active, and the current value and the comparison action
are performed.
The following processing is performed each time the preset value and the current value match.
• Write the value of Next Comparison Number to Current Comparison Number.
• Write the next active preset value number to Next Comparison Number.
By changing the value of Next Comparison Number in the ladder program, the next active preset value number
can be set.
■ Preset value storage locations
The preset values (Preset value of the number stored in Current Comparison Number) during high-speed counter
operation are stored as 2 words in special data registers.
Preset Value

Group 1
I0

I1Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

I2

I3

I4

I5

D8052

D8058

D8070

D8136

D8142

Lower Word

D8053

D8059

D8071

D8137

D8143

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-15

28
Control Function

Upper Word2 Function Area Settings

Example:Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter is selected in Group 1, D0 is set in Tag Name and 3 in
Number of Comparisons on the High-speed Counter Settings dialog box.

When the high-speed counter is executed and the current value matches preset value 1, D1 is set to 2
(Next Comparison Number at the start of counting), D2 is set to 3 (the comparison number of thenext effective preset value after Comparison2) is automatically stored.
For the Group 1 preset value, the value of the data registers D4, D5 allocated to Comparison1 is
written to the destination D8052 and D8053 to store the preset value and it is compared to the current
value.

Counting State
Current
Comparison
Number (D1)
Next
Comparison
Number (D2)

Beforecounting starts

Current valueand Preset
value 1 D4, D5
matchedCount starts

Current valueand Preset
value 3 D8, D9matchedCurrent valueand Preset
value 2 D6, D7
matched

0

o

1

o

2

o

3

o

1

1

o

2

o

3

o

1

o

2

Before counting starts, set Current
Comparison Number to 0, and set
Next Comparison Number andComparison1 to Comparison3 tothe count values with the initialize
pulse M8120 in the ladder program.

Preset value 1 is set toCurrent Comparison
NumberPreset value 2
is set.

Preset value 3
is set.

RepeatOnce again,preset value 1
is set.

When the current value and the current preset value match, the preset value with the number stored in
Next Comparison Number becomes active. When the Next Comparison Number preset value
becomes active, the high-speed counter preset value during execution does not change, even when thepreset value for that preset value number is changed. To change the preset value, change the value of the
Next Comparison Number before the Next Comparison Number preset value becomes active.

28-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings
Comparison operation flow
The comparison operation flow is as follows.

1 Start (run) the ladder program.
For the first scan, Current Comparison Number is set to 0, and Next Comparison Number is written to thenumber for preset value 1 with the initialize pulse M8120.
For the second scan, an I/O refresh is performed in END processing and the value of Next Comparison Number iswritten to Current Comparison Number.
The content of Next Comparison Number becomes the preset value n + 1 ("2" in this example).
When Number of Comparisons is 1, Next Comparison Number is always "1".

The data register that stores the preset value(target value).
Specify the start address number.

The outputs (external outputs) whenthe values match.
Transfer

The preset value with the number that
became active is the comparison subject
with the current value and is stored
in the special data registers.
Example: For group 1
Storage destination for the preset valuethat became active.
Stored by group.
Group1

Upper word

D8052

Lower word

D8053

R/W
R/W

R/W is the abbreviation for read/write. When R/W, it can be read and written. When R, it can only be read.
When W, it can only be written.

2 Start the high-speed counter counting.
Turn on the gate input to start counting.

3 Compare the Current Comparison Number preset value and the current value. When the current value and thepreset value match, the next number for the preset value becomes active and the high-speed counter continues
counting.

• Execute Comparison Output or Interrupt Program. (Comparison Output in this example)• Changes the value of comparison (special internal relay) to 1 for only one scan.
• Overwrite Current Comparison Number with Next Comparison Number and start the count with the preset
value for Current Comparison Number.
• Add 1 to Next Comparison Number.

4 When the procedure is executed up to preset value 6, repeat again from the beginning with preset value 1.
During counting, the operation of the data register is as follows.
Current Comparison Number: Read-only
Next Comparison Number, Comparison 1 to Comparison 6: Read and Write

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-17

Control Function

Preset Value

28

2 Function Area Settings● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for the group to use the high-speed counter under the Special
Inputs.

The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

28-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings

3 Configure each item.

4 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the High-speed Counter.

28
Control Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-19

2 Function Area Settings● High-speed Counter Settings Dialog Box■ Operation mode
Select from Single-phase High-speed Counter or Two-phase High-speed Counter. For details, refer to“Operation Mode” on page 28-13. Two-phase High-speed Counter can only be selected for Group 1.
■ Counting mode
Select counting mode. The counting mode varies based on the item selected in Operation Mode. For details, refer to“Counting Mode” on page 28-14
Single-phase High-speed Counter:

Adding Counter, Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter,
Dual-pulse Reversible CounterTwo-phase High-speed Counter:2-edge Count, 4-edge Count

When Group 1, Group 3, or Group 5 is set to Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter, Dual-Pulse
Reversible Counter, or Two-phase High-speed Counter, Group 2, Group 4, or Group 6 has the samesetting.
■ Comparison action
The comparison action is a function that compares the preset value (target value) of the high-speed counter with thecurrent value.
Comparison Output:

Turns on the specified external output.

Interrupt Program:

Execute the subroutine program with the specified label number as the interrupt program.

For details on the comparison actions, see “Comparison Actions” on page 28-15.
■ Comparison settings
Set the details of the comparison action. This option can only be configured when Comparison Output orInterrupt Program is selected as Comparison Action.
Tag Name:

Specify the starting address number of the data register region to store the preset
values.

Device Address:

Displays the address of the data register specified by the tag name.

Number of Comparisons:Set the preset values (target values) for the comparison action. Up to six can be set.

Configure the settings so that an interval of 1 millisecond or more is present between instances of the preset
value and the current value matching. If this interval is less than 1 millisecond in length, it does not perform
any processing other than the comparison that is running.
Output:Configure external outputs (FT2J: Q0 to Q7, FT1J: Q0 to Q3) when Comparison1 to Comparison6
match. This option can only be configured when Comparison Output is selected as Comparison Action.

Label:

Configure the label number of the interrupt program when Comparison1 to Comparison6 match. This
option can only be configured when Interrupt Program is selected as Comparison Action.

Keep:

Select this check box to keep the current value after the preset value matches the current value. When
this check box is cleared, the reset value is written to the current value.

Overflow:

Select this check box to use overflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value
exceeds 4,294,967,295), and configure Output or Label. Executes the action selected in Comparison
Action when an overflow occurs.

Underflow:

Select this check box to use underflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value
falls below 0), and configure Output or Label. Executes the action selected in Comparison Action
when an underflow occurs.

■ Use HSC Reset Input
Select this check box to write the reset value to the current value when the High-speed Counter Reset Input (external
input) turns on.
If the High-speed Counter Reset Input is not used, I2 (Group 2) is a normal input.
■ Keep the current value at the time of power OFF
Select this check box to maintain the current values.
When this check box is cleared, the current values are initialized to 0.

28-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Device Address Allocation
While the high-speed counter is operating, the current value, control output, and operating status value are reflectedin the special internal relays and special data registers with each scan.
The high-speed counter start and stop control signals and the current value, preset values, and reset values areallocated to the special internal relays and special data registers.
Group 1

Functions

I0

I1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

I2

I3

I4

I5

R/W

Comparison output reset
When the value changes to 1, the comparison output
selected on High-speed Counter Settings turns off.

M8030

M8040

M8055

M8166

M8173

R/W

Gate Input
Each group of high-speed counters starts when thevalue changes to 1 and stops when it changes to 0.

M8031

M8041

M8056

M8167

M8174

R/W

M8032

M8042

M8057

M8170

M8175

R/W

M8033

—

—

—

—

R

Comparison Status
When the preset value and the current value match,the value changes to 1 for only one scan.

M8034

M8043

M8060

M8171

M8176

R

Overflow
When the current value exceeds 4,294,967,295, thevalue changes to 1 for only one scan. When thecurrent value overflows, it changes to 0.

M8035

M8044

M8061

M8172

M8177

R

Underflow
When the current value falls below 0, the valuechanges to 1 for only one scan. When the current
value underflows, it changes to 4,294,967,295.

M8036

—

—

—

—

R

Count direction flag
It maintains whether the Group 1 current value isbeing added or subtracted.
0: Subtracting, 1: Adding

M8037

—

—

—

—

R

D8050

D8056

D8068

D8134

D8140

R

D8051

D8057

D8069

D8135

D8141

R

D8052

D8058

D8070

D8136

D8142

R

D8053

D8059

D8071

D8137

D8143

R

D8054

D8060

D8072

D8138

D8144

R/W

D8055

D8061

D8073

D8139

D8145

R/W

Reset input

When the value changes to 1, the reset value iswritten to the current value.
Reset input
Current value N-1

N

N+1

Reset value

Reset Status
When the HSC reset input is enabled in Group 1,change HSC reset input I2 to 1 to write the reset
value to the current value. In this situation, reset
status changes to 1 for only one scan.
HSC reset
input
Reset status
Current value

One scan
N-1

N

N+1

Reset value

Preset value
The preset value for the high-speed counter is stored
in special data registers as 2 words in the order ofupper and lower for each group.
Reset value
The reset value for the high-speed counter is stored
in special data registers as 2 words in the order ofupper and lower for each group.

R/W is the abbreviation for read/write. When R/W, it can be read and written. When R, it can only be read.
When W, it can only be written.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-21

Control Function

Current value
The current value for the high-speed counter is stored
in special data registers as 2 words in the order ofupper and lower for each group.

28

2 Function Area Settings● Timing chart
Example 1: Single-phase high-speed counter (Group 1)
WindLDR settings are as follow.
Dialog Box

Settings

Function Area
Settings

Input & Output
Configuration

High-speed Counter
Settings

Description
Group1:
Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter

Special Inputs

Operation Mode

Single-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter

Comparison Action

Comparison Output
Tag Name

Comparison
Settings

Number of Comparisons

1Comparison1

Output: 1, Keep: Selected

Overflow

ClearedUnderflow

ClearedUse HSC Reset Input

Selected

Current value

Reset value=2
D8054, D8055

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Preset value 1=6

Pulse input I0
Up/down selection input I1

Down count

Up count

Reset input I2
Reset status M8033
One scanGate input M8031
Preset value Comparison status M8034
One scanPreset value 1 Comparison output Q1
Reset
Comparison output reset M8030

1 When the value of reset input I2 changes to 1, the reset value D8054, D8055 is stored in the current value D8050,
D8051.

In this situation, the value of reset status M8033 is 1 for only one scan.

2 When the value of gate input M8031 changes to 1, the counting starts.
3 The counting direction (count up/count down) is determined by the value of the up/down selection input I1, and thepulse input I0 is counted.

The current value is updated with each scan.

28-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings

4 When the preset value 1 D8052, D8053 and the current value match, the values of the preset value 1 comparison
output Q1 and Comparison status M8034 change to 1.

To keep the current value, select the Keep check box in Comparison Settings on the High-speed Counter
Settings dialog box in WindLDR.
The value of preset value 1 comparison output Q1 is 1 until the value of comparison output reset M8030 changes to
1. The value of Comparison status M8034 is 1 for only one scan.

5 When the value of gate output changes to 0, counting stops.
The high-speed counter starts the count operation with the following conditions:• The value of gate input changed from 0 to 1 when the ladder program was in RUN.
• The ladder program went from STOP to RUN when the value of gate input is 1.

28
Control Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-23

2 Function Area Settings
Example 2: Two-phase high-speed counter (Group 1)
WindLDR settings are as follow.
Dialog Box

Settings

Function Area
Settings

Input & Output
Configuration

Description
Group1:
Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter

Special Inputs

Operation Mode

Two-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode

Adding Counter

Comparison Action

Comparison Output
Tag Name

High-speed Counter
Settings

Comparison
Settings

Number of Comparisons

2Comparison1

Output: 1, Keep: SelectedComparison2

Output: 2, Keep: Cleared

Overflow

ClearedUnderflow

ClearedUse HSC Reset Input

Selected

Current value

Preset value 2=14

Preset value 1=8

Reset value=4
D8054, D8055

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

A-phase I0
B-phase I1

1

1
1

0

UP

DOWN

Reset input I2
Reset status M8033
One scanGate input M8031
Preset value Comparison status M8034

One scanOne scanPreset value 1 Comparison output Q1
Preset value 2 Comparison output Q2

Reset
Reset

Comparison output reset M8030

1 When the value of reset input I2 changes to 1, the current value D8050, D8051 is stored in the reset value D8054,
D8055.

In this situation, the value of reset status M8033 is 1 for only one scan.

2 When the value of gate input M8031 changes to 1, the counting starts.
3 When the A-phase pulse I0 precedes the B-phase pulse I1, the count goes up. When the B-phase pulse I1 precedes
the A-phase pulse I0, the count goes down.

28-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings

4 When the preset value 1 D8052, D8053 and the current value match, the values of the preset value 1 comparison
output Q1 and Comparison status M8034 change to 1.

5 When preset value 1 matches, preset value 2 is stored in the preset value 1 as the new preset value and counting
continues.

The value of preset value 1 comparison output Q1 is 1 until the value of comparison output reset M8030 changes to
1. The value of Comparison status M8034 is 1 for only one scan.
● Application
Example 1: When pulses are input to external input I0 and the count reaches 1,000, the value of external output Q2
is set to 1.
■ Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1 under the Special Inputs.
The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

28
Control Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-25

2 Function Area Settings

3 In the High-speed Counter Settings dialog box, configure the settings as follows.
External Input:

Group 1

Operation Mode:

Single-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode:

Adding Counter

Comparison Action:

Comparison Output

Comparison settings
Tag Name/Device Address:D0 (data register)
Number of Comparisons: 1
Comparison Output:

Q2 (external output when matched)Comparison1 (D4):0 (upper word)

Comparison1 (D5):1,000 (lower word)

Keep:

ClearedOverflow:

ClearedUnderflow:

ClearedUse HSC Reset Input:

ClearedKeep the current value atthe time of power OFF:
Cleared■ Ladder Program
1st scanMOV(D)

S11000

D1D0004

REP

MOV(D)

S10

D1D8054REP

MOV(W)

S11

D1D0002REP

The value of initialize pulse M8120 changes to 1.
Store 1,000 in the preset value 1 D4, D5.

M8120

R

Store 0 in the reset value D8054, D8055.

Store 1 in the next preset value number D2.

Change the value of gate input M8031 to 0.

M8031
R

Change the value of M0 to 0.

M0000
SOTU

M8031

M0000

SOTD
M8120

S

S
M0000

3rd scanDetect the rising edge of M0, the value of gate input M8031
changes to 1, start high-speed counter counting in the END
processing after the 3rd scan is executed.

2nd scanDetect the falling edge of initialize pulse M8120, the values of M0 and
reset input M8032 change to 1, store the reset value in the current
value in the END processing after the 2nd scan is executed.

M8032

28-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings

Example 2: Using the two-phase high-speed counter, the pulses from a rotary encoder are input to the main unit anda continuous workpiece is marked at a regular interval.
• The rotary encoder pulses are input to external
input I0. A continuous sheet of paper is marked(holes are punched) at a regular interval (every
2,700 pulses).
• The rotary encoder is directly connected to thepaper feed roller, and output pulses arecounted by the high-speed counter andcontrolled.

Paper Roll
Paper Feed Roller
Pulse Motor

Perforator

RotaryEncoder• The cycle time is the time to count 2,700
pulses.
When the hole punch time is 0.5 seconds, theoperation condition is 2,700 pulse count time >0.5 seconds.

Main unit■ Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1 under the Special Inputs.
The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.

28
Control Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-27

2 Function Area Settings

3 In the High-speed Counter Settings dialog box, configure the settings as follows.
External Input:

Group 1

Operation Mode:

Two-phase High-speed Counter

Counting Mode:

4-edge Count

Comparison Action:

Comparison Output

Comparison settings
Tag Name/Device Address:D0 (data register)
Number of Comparisons: 1
Comparison Output:

Q2 (external output when matched)Comparison1 (D4):0 (upper word)

Comparison1 (D5):2,700 (lower word)

Keep:

ClearedOverflow:

ClearedUnderflow:

ClearedUse HSC Reset Input:

ClearedKeep the current value atthe time of power OFF:
Cleared

28-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings■ Ladder Program
1st scanMOV(D)

S12700

D1D0004

REP

MOV(D)

S10

D1D8054REP

MOV(W)

S11

D1D0002

REP

M8120

The value of initialize pulse M8120 changes to 1.
Store 1,000 in the preset value 1 D4, D5.

RStore 0 in the reset value D8054, D8055.

Store 1 in the next preset value number D2.
Change the value of gate input M8031 to 0.

M8031
R

Change the value of M0 to 0.

M0000

3rd scan
S

SOTU
M0000

M8031
S

SOTD
M8120

M0000

M8032
TIM T000
5

Q2

M8030

Detect the rising edge of M0, the value of gate input M8031 changes
to 1, start high-speed counter counting in the END processing after
the 3rd scan is executed.

2nd scanDetect the falling edge of the initialize pulse M8120, the values of M0
and the reset input M8032 change to 1.
Store the reset value in the current value in the END processing after
the 2nd scan is executed.
When the current value becomes 2,700 pulses, the value of comparison
output Q2 changes to 1, the timer starts and the value of external
output clear M8030 changes to 1 after 5 seconds.

Current value
Preset value 1 = 2,700
2,700 pulses
Reset value = 028Comparison output Q2

Control Function

Perforation time: 0.5 seconds

In this example, Z-phase reset input is not used.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-29

2 Function Area Settings

2.6

Catch Input
The catch input function is used to receive short pulses from sensor outputs regardless of the scan time. Input pulses
shorter than one scan time can be received. The minimum pulse width on-time and off-time that can be captured at
the catch input is 25µs.
When using catch input, the on/off status according to the status of the external inputs during one scan is stored in
Catch Input Status M8090 to M8094 that correspond to each external input group, and those signals can be used as
input conditions. When a pulse is caught, the value of Catch Input Status M8090 to M8094 changes to 1 or 0 for one
scan, and when a pulse is acquired in the next scan, the value of Catch Input Status M8090 to M8094 changes 1 or 0.
The catch input function can receive even pulses shorter than the input filter setting time.

Catching Rising Edge of Input Pulse
Two consecutive pulses in the same scan
are treated as one pulse input.
Input
Catch Input Status
M8090 to M8094

END
processing

One scanCatching Falling Edge of Input Pulse
Two consecutive pulses in the same scan
are treated as one pulse input.
Input
Catch Input Status
M8090 to M8094

END
processing

One scan● Device Address Allocation
The state of external inputs assigned to catch inputs is stored in the following special internal relays for each group.
Name
Catch Input Status

28-30

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

M8090

—

M8091

M8092

M8093

M8094

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Catch Input for the group to use the catch input under the Special Inputs.
The Catch Input dialog box is displayed.

28
Control Function

3 Select the catch input timing from Catch Input Rising Edge or Catch Input Falling Edge.

4 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the catch input.
● Ladder Program
Example:Specify external input I0 as catch input and self-hold output M0 for 1 scan or more.
When the external input I0 is turned on, thevalue of Catch Input Status M8090 changes to 1,
and the value of M0 is maintained in the selfM8090
M0001
M0000
holding circuit.
When the value of NC input M1 changes to 0,
M0000
the self-holding circuit is unlatched, and thevalue of M0 changes to 0.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-31

2 Function Area Settings

2.7

Interrupt Input
In normal ladder program processing, the ladder program is repeatedly executed from the beginning to the end.
However, using the interrupt input interrupts the processing of the ladder program execution, and subroutine
programs can execute at any time regardless of scanning. When the external input turns ON, the subroutine programwith the label number specified by the value of device address is executed as an interrupt program.
When the processing of the subroutine program is done, the running of the interrupted ladder program is resumed.

● Device Address Allocation
The label number of the interrupt program to be executed, the enabled/disabled state of interrupt input, and the edge
at which the interrupt input occurred by the values of the following device addresses can be checked.
Group 1

Name

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.

D8032

—

D8033

D8034

D8035

D8037

Interrupt Input Status

M8070

—

M8071

M8072

M8073

M8074

Interrupt Input Edge

M8080

—

M8081

M8082

M8083

M8084

● Disable and Enable Interrupts
At the start of ladder program RUN, the external inputs I0 and I2 to I5 specified as interrupt inputs are enabled forinterrupts.
The interrupt input status can be changed to enable interrupts with the EI instruction and to disable interrupts with
the DI instruction. For details about the EI instruction and DI instruction, refer to Chapter 15 “Interrupt Control
Instructions” in the Ladder Programming Manual.
● Restrictions• When interrupt inputs I0, I2 to I5 are turned on at the same time, interrupt program execution is given priority to
inputs I0, I1, I2, I3, I4, and I5, in that order.
However, if an interrupt (interrupt input or timer interrupt) is initiated while another interrupt program is executed,
the subsequent interrupt program is executed after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs
cannot be executed simultaneously.
• Some instructions cannot be used in interrupt programs. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Instructions Reference” inthe Ladder Programming Manual.
Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.

28-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select Interrupt Input for the group to use the interrupt input under the Special Inputs.
The Interrupt Input dialog box is displayed.

28
Control Function

3 Select the interrupt generation timing from the following.
Interrupt at Rising Edge, Interrupt at Falling Edge, Interrupt at Both Edges

4 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the interrupt input.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-33

2 Function Area Settings● Ladder Program
Example:Specify external input I0 as interrupt input, and the input I0 status is transferred to output Q0 using the
IOREF instruction when the interrupt input is turned on.
MOV(D)
M8120

S10

D1D8032

REP

Main Program

IOREF

The subroutine program is separated from the main program by
the END instruction.

LABEL
0

When the value of interrupt input I0 changes to 1, program
execution jumps to the subroutine program labeled 0.
The value of ladder program execution status M8125 always
remains 1 during RUN.
IOREF instruction reads the latest value of external input I0 to
M300.

S1

Q0000

M0300
IOREF
M8125

END

I0000

M8125

The value of initialize pulse M8120 changes to 1.
Store 0 to the interrupt input jump destination label number
D8032 with the MOV instruction, and when the value of interrupt
input I0 changes to 1, execute the subroutine program labeled 0.

Output the state of external input I0 read to M300 to external
output Q0.
IOREF instruction immediately outputs the internal memory
status of external output Q0 to external output Q0.

S1
Q0000

LRET

Insert LRET instruction at the end of the subroutine program toreturn to the main program.

Use the IOREF instruction to update input or output information during interrupt program execution. For
details, refer to Chapter 14 “Refresh Instructions” in the Ladder Programming Manual.

28-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings

2.8

Frequency Measurement
Frequency measurement is a function that measures the frequency of pulses input to an external input I2 to I4.
These input pulses are processed with dedicated hardware device, so frequencies can be measured with no relation to
the scan time. The measurement values are stored in special data registers and they are updated with each scan.
Function Specification

Group 1
I0

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

I2

I3

I4

I5

I1

Measurement Range——

1Hz to 20kHz

1Hz to 20kHz

1Hz to 20kHz—

Measurement Error——

Less than ±0.2%

Less than ±0.2%

Less than ±0.2%—● Device Address Allocation
The frequency measurement values are stored in the following special data registers for each external input group.
Frequency
Measurement Value

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

Group 5

I0

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

Upper Word

—

—

D8056

D8068

D8134

—

Lower Word

—

—

D8057

D8069

D8135

—

To reflect the frequency measurement values in the special data registers, a maximum of calculation cycle +scan time is required. However, when the FRQRF instruction is used during ladder processing, the frequency
measurement value of the special data registers can be updated to the latest value.
● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the frequency measurement.
WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-35

28
Control Function

2 Select Frequency Measurement for the group to use the frequency measurement under the Special Inputs.

2 Function Area Settings

2.9

Input Filters
The input filter is a function to reject erroneous inputs due to noise and bounce by reading the external input status
multiple times during a set time and determining ON or OFF. Since the external input is filtered by the pulse width(during the input filter setting time), even if short pulses are mixed in, it can be rejected and only the intended input
signal is taken in. When applying an input filter to an external input, set the relevant external input to Normal Input.
For each external input, the input filter time can be set to 0 (no filter) or 3 to 15 ms (in 1 ms steps).
External inputs (FT2J: I0 to I7, and I10 to I15, FT1J: I0 to I5, I12, and I13) can be used as input filters.
Input Filter Area
The input filter has an indefinite area between the rejected area and accepted area.
Rejected area:

Input signals are rejected and not accepted.

Indefinite area:

Input signals may be rejected or accepted.

Accepted area:

Input signals are accepted without being rejected.

The input filter rejects short pulses below the preset value, however the actual rejected area is the preset value of the
input filter minus 2 milliseconds. The preset value of the input filter is the minimum value of the accepted area.
Example:8 milliseconds is set as the preset value of the input filter.
The area to reject the input signal is 8 ms - 2 ms = 6 ms.
8 ms (Preset Value)
0 ms

6 ms
Rejected

8 ms

Indefinite Area

Accepted

When there is a change in the input, the input filter starts measuring the time.
Once the measured time exceeds the preset value, the change in the input is acquired internally.
Input to I0
6 ms

8 ms

8 ms

Input Filter

I0• Signals that pass through the input filter cannot always be acquired as input. To acquire a signal asnormal input, a maximum pulse width of input filter value + 1 scan time is required.
• When an external input I0, I2 to I5 is set to a high-speed counter, catch input, interrupt input, frequency
measurement, the input filter is disabled.

28-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Specify the value of input filter under the Input Filters.
The input filter can only be configured for groups that have Normal Input selected under the Special Inputs.

28
Control Function

The columns displayed next to I0000 indicate I0 to I7.

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the input filter.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-37

2 Function Area Settings

2.10 Analog/Digital Inputs
External inputs (FT2J: I12 to I15, FT1J: I12 and I13) can be used as analog or digital inputs.
When set to analog input, the analog input of 0 to 10 VDC voltage or 4 to 20 mA current is converted into a digitalvalue and captured. The converted analog signal is stored in the special data register.
When set to digital input, the external input converts an analog voltage to a normal input on/off at a defined
threshold. For details about the threshold voltage for on/off determination, refer to Chapter 1 “Analog Input (shareddigital sink input)” in the SmartAXIS Hardware Manual.
● Device Address Allocation
The analog input value converted to digital value and the analog input status are stored in the following special dataregisters. This value is updated with each scan.
External Input

I12

I13

I14*1

I15*1

Input Terminal

AI0

AI1

AI2*1

AI3*1

Analog Input Value

D8040

D8041

D8172*1

D8173*1

Analog Input Status

D8042

D8043

D8174*1

D8175*1● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Configure each item in Analog/Digital Inputs.

■ Address
Displays the addresses of external inputs (input terminals).
■ TypeSelect Analog or Digital for the type of input to use.
*1 FT2J only

28-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings■ Filter (times)
Specifies the number of filter times (1 to 255) to average the analog input data. This can only be set when Analog isselected for Type.
The analog input data is averaged by the specified filter count. This can reduce rapid fluctuations in the analog input.
The larger this value is set, the slower the tracking of the change in analog input becomes.
When filtering, the input value is calculated with the following equation.
Analog input value after filtering =Total analog input values for filter count n worth of scans
Filter count n■ Signal Type
Select 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20mA DC. This can only be set when Analog is selected for Type.
■ Data Format
Select the data format to handle analog values from the following. This can only be set when Analog is selected forType.
Binary data:

Converts analog values to values in the range 0 to 4,095.

Optional range:

Converts the analog value to a set minimum and maximum value range.

■ Min., Max.
The minimum and maximum values that can be set vary depending on the item selected in Data Format. This canbe set only when Analog is selected for Type and Optional range is selected for Data Format.
Binary data:

Minimum value is 0, Maximum value is 4,095.

Optional range:-32,768 to 32,767■ DataDisplays the special data register to store the analog value of the analog input. The value of device address is updatedwith each scan. This can only be set when Analog is selected for Type.
■ Status
Displays the special data register to store the status code of the analog input. The value of device address is updatedwith each scan. This can only be set when Analog is selected for Type.
Status code

Description

Analog Input Value

Operating normally

Current value

1

Converting data (occurs only once during the initial conversion when the
power is turned on)

Undefined value

2

Initializing

0

3

Parameter setting error

Input value immediately
after the error occurs

4

Overcurrent error

Undefined value

5

Wiring fault (out of maximum range)
The analog input signal exceeds 11 V or 21 mA.

Upper limit value

6

Wiring fault (out of minimum range, open current loop)
The analog input signal is below 2 mA.

Lower limit value

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the analog/digital inputs.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-39

28
Control Function02 Function Area Settings

2.11 Analog Outputs
There are 2*1 Analog Outputs.
This function converts the analog output value stored in the special data register into an analog signal of 0 to 10 VDC
voltage or 4 to 20 mA current and outputs it.
● Device Address Allocation
The analog output value and the analog output status are stored in the following special data registers. This value isupdated with each scan.
Analog Output Terminal

AO0

AO1

Analog Output Value

D8044

D8045

Analog Output Status

D8046

D8047

When the main unit is reset, such as immediately after the power is turned on, the value that minimizes theanalog output is written to the special data register for analog output.
● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Configure each item in Analog Outputs.

■ Address
Displays the addresses of analog output terminals.
■ Signal Type
Select the type of the analog output from the following.
Unused, 0 to 10V DC, 4 to 20mA DC*1 FT2J-7U22KAF-B, FT2J-7U22SAF-B, FT1J-4F14*AG-* only

28-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings■ Data Format
Select the data format to handle analog values from the following.
Binary data:

Converts analog values to values in the range 0 to 4,095.

Optional range:

Converts the analog value to a set minimum and maximum value range.

■ Min., Max.
The minimum and maximum values that can be set vary depending on the item selected in Data Format.
Binary data:

Minimum value is 0, Maximum value is 4,095.

Optional range:-32,768 to 32,767■ DataDisplays the special data register to store the analog value of the analog output. The value of device address is
updated with each scan.
■ Status
Displays the special data register to store the status code of the analog output. The value of device address is
updated with each scan.
Status code

Description

Analog Output Value0

Operating normally

Current value

2

Initializing

0 V/4 mA

3

Parameter setting error

Output value just before
error occurred

10

Unused is selected in Signal Type.

0 V/4 mA

11

The model that does not support analog output is selected.

—

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the analog outputs.

28
Control Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-41

2 Function Area Settings

2.12 Timer Interrupt
In normal ladder program processing, the ladder program is repeatedly executed from the beginning to the end.
However, using the timer interrupt interrupts the processing of the ladder program execution, and subroutine
programs can execute at fixed time intervals regardless of scanning. The subroutine program with the label number
specified by the value of device address is executed as an interrupt program at the set interval. When the processingof the subroutine program is done, the running of the interrupted ladder program is resumed.
● Device Address Allocation
The label number of the interrupt program to be executed and the enabled/disabled state of timer interrupt by thevalues of the following device addresses can be checked.
Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.

D8036

Timer Interrupt Status

M8144● Disable and Enable Interrupts
At the start of ladder program RUN, the timer interrupt is enabled for interrupt.
The timer interrupt status can be changed to enable interrupts with the EI instruction and to disable interrupts with
the DI instruction. For details about the EI instruction and DI instruction, refer to Chapter 15 “Interrupt Control
Instructions” in the Ladder Programming Manual.
● Restrictions• If an interrupt (interrupt input or timer interrupt) is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, thesubsequent interrupt program is executed after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot
be executed simultaneously.
• Some instructions cannot be used in interrupt programs. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Instructions Reference” inthe Ladder Programming Manual.
Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.

28-42

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Function Area Settings● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input & Output
Configuration.

The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the Use Timer Interrupt check box under the Timer Interrupt (ms).

28

3 Set an interval (1 to 1000 ms) to execute the timer interrupt.

Control Function

4 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the timer interrupt.
● Ladder Program
Example:Execute the interrupt program with label number 0 using a timer interrupt.
MOV(W)
M8120

S10

D1D8036REP

The value of initialize pulse M8120 changes to 1.
Store 0 to the timer interrupt jump destination label number
D8036 with the MOV instruction, and executes an interrupt
program labeled 0 at regular time intervals.

Main Program
END

LABEL
0

The interrupt program is separated from the main programby the END instruction.

During RUN, the interrupt program with label 0 is repeatedly
executed at intervals specified in the Timer Interrupt on the
Function Area Settings dialog box.

Interrupt Program
LRET

Insert LRET instruction at the end of the interrupt program
to return to the main program.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

28-43

2 Function Area Settings

2.13 Watchdog Timer Setting
The watchdog timer is a function to monitor the operating status of the main unit.
A watchdog error occurs when the processing time for one scan exceeds the allowed time while the ladder program isrunning. If a watchdog error occurs, stops the ladder program that is being executed and resets the main unit.
When a watchdog timer error occurs, change the value to set the watchdog timer or the processing of the ladderprogram.
Set the value of the watchdog timer as a value with a safety margin added to the maximum value of the scan time. If
the ladder program processing time for one scan takes longer than the design specification, use the NOP instruction in
the ladder program. The watchdog timer is reset when the NOP instruction is executed.
When changing the watchdog timer setting value, select an appropriate value that fully takes into
consideration the safety of the system.
If the watchdog timer setting value cannot be changed due to the system, use the NOP instruction to adjust
the ladder program processing so that it does not exceed the watchdog timer setting value.
The maximum value of one scan while the ladder program is running can be checked with Scan Time
Maximum Value D8024.
● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab of WindLDR, in the Function Area Settings group, click Self Diagnostic.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the value of watchdog timer (100 to 4000 ms) under the Watchdog Timer Settings.

3 Click OK.
The Function Area Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the watchdog timer.

28-44

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Constant Scan

3

Constant Scan
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The scan time of a ladder program varies depending on the instruction execution conditions. Applications that performaccurate repetitive control requires to make the scan time constant. Constant scan makes the processing time of one
scan of the ladder program constant and eliminates fluctuations in scan time. However, when the actual scan time islonger than the scan time preset value, the scan time cannot be reduced to the constant value. To make the ladderprogram scan time constant, store the maximum value of the scan time during ladder program RUN to the constantscan setting value D8022.
Set the preset value to a value larger than the maximum scan time. The actual scan time error with respect to theconstant scan setting is typically ±1 millisecond.
● Special Data Registers for Scan Time
DeviceAddress

Description

D8022

Constant Scan Time Preset ValueStores the preset value of constant scan (1 to 1000 ms) to make the scan time constant.

D8023

Scan Time Current ValueStores the most recent scan time.

D8024

Scan Time Maximum ValueStores the maximum value of the scan time from the running start of the ladder program.

D8025

Scan Time Minimum ValueStores the minimum value of the scan time from the running start of the ladder program.

R/W
R/W

R

R/W is the abbreviation for read/write. When R/W, it can be read and written. When R, it can only be read.
When W, it can only be written.
● Ladder Program
Example:Set the preset value of scan time to 500 ms.

MOV(W)
M8120

S1
500

D1
REP
D8022

When the value of the initialize pulse M8120 is 1,
stores 500 to the constant scan preset value D8022
with the MOV instruction.

28
Control Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual28-45

3 Constant Scan

28-46

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 29

Communication with Main Unit

This chapter describes in detail on how to setup the online function and the operation of the main unit.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

What Can Be Done Communicating with a Main Unit
The online function enables communication with the main unit in WindO/I-NV4. This communication between
WindO/I-NV4 and the main unit, implemented using an exclusive protocol called maintenance communication.
The online function enables the following.
• Write a project data into the main unit.
Computer

Main unit
Download

Project data

• The following functions can be executed with downloading of project data.

When downloading the operating system*1, it cannot be downloaded to the external memory device.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only
*3 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*4 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-1

29
Communication with Main Unit

- Force download the system software and the operating system*1 to the main unit.
- Download fonts and Kanji dictionary data*2.
- Download the system software to the expansion modules.*2- Download recipe files, picture files, sound files*3 and Custom Web Page files to the External Memory
Device folder in the external memory device inserted into the main unit.
- Execute the ladder programs automatically after downloading.*4- Clear the HMI Keep Register (LKR), HMI Keep Relay (LK), Alarm Log Data, Data Log Data andOperation Log Data after downloading.
• For details on writing project data to an external memory device inserted in the computer, refer to
Chapter 33 “Downloading” on page 33-9.

1 Overview• Write files to an external memory device*5 inserted in the main unit.
ComputerExternal memory device*5
Main unit

SD memory card

Download
USB flash drive
Recipe file
Picture file
Sound file*3
Custom Web Page file
Movie file*6
Movie file list*6• Read the project data downloaded to the main unit and then save it to a computer.
Computer

Main unit
UploadProject data

• It is possible to upload recipe files, picture files, sound files*3 and Custom Web Page files from theExternal Memory Device folder in the external memory device inserted in the main unit, together withuploading of project data.
• For details on reading project data saved on an external memory device using WindO/I-NV4, refer to
Chapter 33 “Uploading” on page 33-10.
• Delete the data stored in the internal memory of the main unit or the external memory device*5 inserted in themain unit. Format the external memory device*5 in the main unit.*7
External memory device*5
Computer

Delete Data

Main unit

SD memory card

Delete Data
USB flash drive
Format*7*3 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*5 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*6 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*7 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

29-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview• Display the information about the system software and project data of the main unit.
Computer

Main unit
SystemInformation• Edit a project data in WindO/I-NV4 while checking the operation of the main unit by displaying and changing valuesof device addresses and switching screens using the monitor function.
Main unit
ComputerExternal device

Screen monitor

LDR1=

130

0

130

Main unit
ComputerExternal device

130

29

Switches to Base Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full

Base Screen 2

For details about monitor function, refer to Chapter 30 “1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4” on page 30-1.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-3

Communication with Main Unit

Base Screen 1

1 Overview

1.2

Connect a Main Unit to a Computer
Connection type varies based on the interface between the main unit and computer.
If the Ethernet port on the computer is used for other purposes, such as connecting to the Internet, themain unit can be connected to the computer with an Ethernet cable by using a USB-to-Ethernet port
converter for the connection on the computer side.

● USB cable connection
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The computer must be running Windows 11/10/8/7 (64-bit and 32-bit versions), and must have a USB2.0/1.1 port.
Computer

Main unit
To USB port

A plugTo USB interface
USB cable

Mini-B plug

A USB driver must be installed when connecting the main unit to a computer with a USB cable.
Install the USB driver when making the connection for the first time. For details, refer to "How to install USB
driver". On the upper right corner, click on ▼ to the right ofUSB driver to display the "How to install USB driver".

icon, and then click on the How to install

The USB driver does not have to be installed for subsequent connections. Note, the connection must use thesame USB port that was connected to when installing the USB driver. The computer will not recognize themain unit immediately if the USB cable is connected to a different USB port.
• Multiple main units cannot be connected using different USB ports on the same computer.
• The computer cannot be connected to the main unit via a USB hub.
● Ethernet cable connection
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The computer must be equipped with an Ethernet port.
Computer

Main unit
To Ethernet port

To Ethernet interface

Ethernet cable

It is necessary to configure the main unit according to the local network that is used.
On the Communication Interface tab in the Project Settings dialog box, specify the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway, and clear the Forbid Maintenance Communication check box. For details,
refer to Chapter 4 “3.2 Communication Interface Tab” on page 4-37.

29-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3

Change Communication Settings
To communicate with the main unit in WindO/I-NV4, configure the settings such as communication speed and port
used to match the connection method for the main unit.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm.Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK.

■ Communicate with
Select the device to communicate with from the following items.
Operator Interface:Communicate with the main unit connected to the computer.
For details, refer to “Using the online function for Ethernet communication” on page 29-7.
Computer

Main unit

29

USB cable

Communication with Main Unit

Ethernet cable

External Memory Device: Read or write data to the external memory device inserted in the computer.
For details, refer to Chapter 33 “1.5 Reading/Writing Data” on page 33-5.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual29-5

1 Overview■ PortSelect the communication port on the computer from the following items.
USB*1:

Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB interface on the main unit.

Ethernet: Connect the Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet interface on the main unit.
• The port number is 2537 when connecting from WindO/I-NV4 to the main unit via Ethernet.
• The default network settings configured on the main unit are as follows.
IP Address:
192.168.1.150*2 or 192.168.0.1*1
Subnet Mask:

255.255.255.0■ Interval between communications on the Monitor
Specify the interval (1000 to 32767 milliseconds) for reading the value of device address from the main unit whenusing the monitor function in WindO/I-NV4.
■ Time Out (min)Specify the time to wait for a response from the main unit (0 minute to 20 minutes).
■ Network Adapter
Select the network adapter to use with your computer. Only network adapters that are enabled on your computer are
displayed.
The network adapter can only be set when Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port to
Ethernet.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

29-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview● Using the online function for Ethernet communication
Select Ethernet under Port on the Communication Settings dialog box.
It is necessary to configure the main unit according to the local network that is used.
On the Communication Interface tab in the Project Settings dialog box, configure the IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and port number, and clear the Forbid Maintenance Communication check box.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.2 Communication Interface Tab” on page 4-37.
To download project data
Click Edit in the Communication Settings*1 or click Download*2 on the Download dialog box to display theTarget List dialog box.
Specify the Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and port number) for the communication
target main unit.
Select the target main unit IP addresses from the list IP addresses and you can batch download project data tomultiple main units.
It is also possible to change the Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and port number) forthe main unit to which you are downloading after project data is downloaded.

■ Target List
Target IP Address:

Displays the current IP address for the main unit to download the project data to.

Target Port Number:

Displays the current port number for the main unit to download the project data to.

Set IP Address:

Displays the IP address for the main unit after downloading the project data.

Set Subnet Mask:

Displays the subnet mask for the main unit after downloading the project data.

Set Default Gateway:

Displays the default gateway for the main unit after downloading the project data.

Port Number:

Displays the port number for the main unit after downloading the project data.

29■ EditChanges the settings of the Target List..
Select a download destination from the Target List, and then click this button to open the Target IP Address dialog
box. Using the Target IP Address dialog box, change the Ethernet settings for the main unit to which you aredownloading.
Even if the Ethernet settings for the main unit are changed by using the Target IP Address dialog box when
downloading a project, the Ethernet settings in the editing project data are not changed.
■ Delete
Deletes download destinations from the Target List.
■ IP Address Manager
Open IP Address Manager. Specify the IP address for the target main unit with IP Address Manager. For details, refer
to “IP Address Manager” on page 29-11.
*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-7

Communication with Main Unit

■ Add
Adds a download destination for project data to the Target List. Click this button to open the Target IP Address
dialog box. Using the Target IP Address dialog box, specify the Ethernet settings for the main unit to which you aredownloading.

1 Overview■ Search
Search for a main unit on the same network that can be connected to a computer via maintenance communication.
Click this button to display the Search MICRO/I dialog box. For details, refer to “Search MICRO/I dialog box” onpage 29-9.
Target IP Address Settings dialog box
Specifies the IP address of the main unit used for communication.

■ Target IP Address
Specify the IP address for the target main unit to execute this function.
■ Target Port Number
Specify the port number for the target main unit to execute this function.
■ After downloading, change the settings of Target
Change the IP settings of the target main unit after project data is downloaded. Select from the following setting methods.
Use the IP Settings in "Communication Interface" tab on "Project Settings" dialog box:

Use the following settings:

Use the network settings configured in the Communication Interface tab on the
Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “When Ethernet is selectedunder Interface Configuration” on page 4-43.
Use the following IP settings. Select the check boxes to change items. Settings for which
the check box is clear are not changed.
Enter the IP address to register in the project data.
IP Address:
Subnet Mask:

Enter the subnet mask to register in the project data.

Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway to register in the project data.
Port Number:Enter the port number to register in the project data.

Regarding TCP port number of the main unit, note the following points.
The numbers that cannot be used:• 2101: For FC4A Series MicroSmart direct connection pass-through• 2538: For pass-through• 2539, 2541: For the maintenance communication (Data Transfer)• 2540: For the maintenance communication (Control function)• 44818: For EtherNet/IP communication
Duplicate numbers cannot be configured in the following functions:• Maintenance communication ( refer to Chapter 4 “Port Number” on page 4-43)• Web server function ( refer to Chapter 4 “Port Number” on page 4-75)• FTP server function ( refer to Chapter 4 “Port Number” on page 4-76)• TCP Server is selected for the User Communication ( refer to Chapter 4 “Port No.” on page 4-45)• Modbus as Manufacture and Modbus TCP Server as Communication Driver are selected on
the Communication Driver tab ( refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual)
After downloading the OS, the settings of the target will be the IP settings in the Communication
Interface tab on the Project Settings dialog box.

29-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview
Search MICRO/I dialog box
The result of the search performed by clicking Search in the Target List dialog box is displayed.

(Results List)■ (Results List)
Displays the information of the main unit as search results. Selects the main unit to register in the Target List on theTarget List dialog box.
IP Address:

Displays the IP address of the main unit.

MAC Address:

Displays the MAC address of the main unit.

Type Number:

Displays the type number of the main unit.

Port Number:

Displays the port number of the main unit.

■ Re-search
Search again for a main unit on the same network that can be connected to a computer via maintenancecommunication.
■ Select
Closes the Search MICRO/I dialog box, and then registers the main unit selected from the (Results List).
If there is a main unit of the IP address already registered in the Target List on the Target List dialog
box, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.

■ CloseCloses the Search MICRO/I dialog box.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-9

29
Communication with Main Unit

• Click Yes to overwrite and save the main unit of the IP address displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite and save the main units of all IP addresses.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the main unit of the IP address
displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop importing the main unit of the IP address.

1 Overview
To execute a function other than the project data download
The Target IP Address dialog box will be displayed when any of the following functions are executed.
• Upload a project data.
• Upload data from an external memory device inserted in the main unit.
• Delete data stored in the internal memory of the main unit.
• Delete data from or formatting an external memory device inserted in the main unit.
• Display information about system software and project data.
• Monitor the main unit.
The dialog box allows you to specify the IP address of the target main unit.

■ Target IP Address
Specify the IP address for the target main unit to execute this function.
Click

to display the Target List dialog box. Specify the IP address for the target main unit.

■ Target Port Number
Specify the port number for the target main unit to execute this function.

29-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview● IP Address Manager
You can register target Ethernet settings for performing online function via Ethernet communication to the projectdata.

■ IP Address List
Ethernet settings registered in the project data are displayed in this list.
IP Address:

Displays the IP address.

Subnet Mask:

Displays the subnet mask.

Default Gateway:

Displays the default gateway.

Port Number:

Displays the port number.

Comment:

Displays comment.

■ IP AddressEnter the IP address to register in the project data.
■ Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask to register in the project data.

29
Communication with Main Unit

■ Default Gateway
Enter the default gateway to register in the project data.
■ Port NumberEnter the port number to register in the project data.
■ Comment
Enter comment to register in the project data.
■ Add New
Adds IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Port Number, and Comment to IP Address List.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected IP address from IP Address List.
■ Select
Closes IP Address Manager, and apply the Ethernet settings selected from IP Address List.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual29-11

2 Downloading

2

Downloading
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

Downloading Project Data to the Main Unit
When project data is downloaded to the main unit, the screen data of the main unit is overwritten.

1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator Interface from Communicate with. For details,
refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.
For the FT2J/1J and the HG2J/1J, select the check box of the target in (Target list).

(Target list)

2 Open a project to download.
To download a project without opening it, on the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download
icon. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select a file then click Open. The Download dialog box is displayed.
Proceed to Step 4.

3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.
For the FT2J/1J and the HG2J/1J, proceed to step 5.

If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
• Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.
• Even if the control function settings with WindLDR are changed after displaying the Download dialog box,
the changes will not be downloaded.

29-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Downloading

4 Select data for download under Download Data.

■ All
Download the entire project data.
■ Modified Data Only
Downloads files modified since the previous download.
If download fails, select All to download.

5 Click Download.
The project data starts downloading.
However, for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P, when Communicate with is set to Operator
Interface and Port to Ethernet, the Target List dialog box is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, andthen click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To download project data” on page 29-7.
If security is enabled in the project of the main unit project, the Enter Password dialog box is displayed.
Enter the password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

6 Click Yes.

29

The Download Project dialog box is displayed and downloads the project.

7 Click OK.
8 Click Close on the Download Project dialog box.
This concludes downloading project data.
• Do not turn off the main unit while project data is downloading.
• Turn the power of the main unit off and on and download the project data once again if the following
conditions occur:- The project data downloading failed, then WindO/I-NV4 cannot communicate with the main unit.
- The cable was disconnected or the power was turned off while WindO/I-NV4 and the main unit werecommunicating, and the main unit no longer responds.
Downloading project data repeatedly with the Modified Data Only option consumes the free space in theinternal memory of the main unit.
If there is not enough memory to download the project data with the Modified Data Only option, aconfirmation message will be displayed.
For details on writing project data to an external memory device inserted in the computer, refer to Chapter
33 “Downloading” on page 33-9.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-13

Communication with Main Unit

When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.

2 Downloading

2.2

Download Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons of the Download dialog box.

(Target list)■ Communication Settings
Communicate with: Computer's target device is displayed.
Port:

Communication port that is used by computer is displayed.

Change:Changes communication settings. Click this button to display the Communication Settings dialog
box. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

(Target list)*1:

Displays the main units found by searching on the network when the Download dialog box
opens.
Select the check box of the target to download the project data to.
Can only be set when Communicate with is set to Operator Interface.
Target IP Address:

Displays the IP address of the main unit found by searching on the
network.

Target Port No.:

Displays the port number of the main unit found by searching on the
network.

Type No.:

Displays the type number of the main unit found by searching on the
network.

MAC Address:

Displays the MAC address of the main unit found by searching on the
network.

Search:Updates the (Target list). Click this button to add Target IP Address andTarget Port Number only for the main unit that responded.

Target List:

Change the settings of the (Target list). Click this button to open theTarget List dialog box.
Specify the Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,
and port number) for the target main unit. For details, refer to “ Todownload project data” on page 29-7.

If your computer and the target devices are not in the same subnet and VPN is enabled, the function to
add an IP address that can join the same subnet to your computer will not work.
*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

29-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Downloading■ Download Data*2
Selects data to be downloaded.
All:

All project data is downloaded.

Modified Data Only: Only files that were updated since the previous download are downloaded.
If an upload fails, select All to download.
Downloading project data repeatedly with the Modified Data Only option consumes the free space in theinternal memory of the main unit.
If there is not enough memory to download the project data with the Modified Data Only option, aconfirmation message will be displayed.
■ Download System Software and OS forcibly*1
Select this check box to forcibly download system software and operating system, regardless of whatever the versions
that are downloaded to the main unit, when downloading project data. Normally this option should not be used.
When downloading the operating system, it cannot be downloaded to the external memory device.
Also, the settings configured with the Target List dialog box displayed by clicking Edit are ignored.
■ Download System Software forcibly*2
Select this check box to force download system software, irrespective of the system software version of the main unit,
when downloading project data. Normally this option should not be used.
■ Download Fonts and Kanji Dictionary Data*2
Select this check box to download the following fonts and the dictionary data to the main unit, when downloading
project data.
• Standard Fonts• optional fonts are selected on the Font/Kanji Dictionary Data tab in the Project Settings dialog box• Kanji Dictionary Data
When the Use Kanji input mode check box on the Font/Kanji Dictionary Data tab in the Project
Settings dialog box is not selected, the Download Fonts and Kanji Dictionary Data check box isselected and a project download is executed, deletes the Kanji dictionary data stored in the download
destination.
For details about the optional fonts and the Kanji dictionary data to download, refer to Chapter 4 “3.16 Font/Kanji
Dictionary Data Tab” on page 4-84.

Settings:

Specifies the type of expansion module to download the system software. Click this button
to display the Runtime System of Expansion Modules dialog box. For details, refer to“Runtime System of Expansion Modules Dialog Box” on page 29-17.

■ After downloading, execute the ladder programs automatically*4
Execute the ladder programs automatically after the project data is downloaded.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only
*4 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-15

29
Communication with Main Unit

■ Download Runtime System of Expansion Modules*3
Select this check box to download the system software of the expansion modules attached to the main unit.

2 Downloading■ Clear the following data
Select the values and data to clear after you download project data from the following.
Values of Keep Devices*5, Alarm Log Data, Data Log Data, Operation Log Data
• When project data that changes the settings of the data storage area or the system software isdownloaded, all of the values of Keep Devices for HMI and control functions, and log data are cleared.
• When project data that changes the settings of the Alarm Log Settings, the Data Log Settings or the
Operation Log Settings is downloaded, all of the log data for HMI function are deleted.
■ Download following files to External Memory Device
Recipe Files:

Select this check box to create a RECIPE folder or recipe files in the External Memory
Device folder on an external memory device inserted in the main unit when downloading
projects. Only on channels for which Save to in the Recipe Settings dialog box is set toExternal Memory Device, and Recipe Function is set to Use.
• When Download Data is set to All, recipe files are created for all channels for which
recipe data is set.
• When Download Data is set to Modified Data Only, only recipe files on channels
where recipe data has changed are created.

Picture Files:

Select this check box to create the PICTURE folder under the External Memory Device
folder on the external memory device inserted in the main unit and to save the picture files
when downloading project. Out of the pictures registered in Picture Manager, the picture
files that are saved are those picture files that have been selected with the check box on the
picture list.

Sound Files*6:

Select this check box to create the SOUND folder under the External Memory Device folder
on the external memory device inserted in the main unit and to save the sound files when
downloading project. The sound files that are saved are those with Save To set to External
Memory Device under settings in the Sound Settings dialog box.

Custom Web Page Files: Select this check box to create the WEBPAGE folder under the External Memory Device
folder on the external memory device inserted in the main unit and to save the Custom Web
Page files when downloading project. The Custom Web Page files that are displayed in the
Web Page Editor on the Project window.
■ Download
The project data starts downloading.
For HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P, perform the following operations according to thedisplayed dialog box.
• Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To download
project data” on page 29-7.
• When Communicate with is set to External Memory Device, the Select Drive dialog box is displayed. Selectthe external memory device drive, then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “2.3 Downloading Filesto an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit” on page 29-18.
• When the Download Fonts and Kanji Dictionary Data check box and the Use Kanji input mode check box
on the Font/Kanji Dictionary Data tab in the Project Settings dialog box are selected, the Kanji dictionary
data License Activation dialog box is displayed. Enter the authentication code, and then click OK to start the
download. For details, refer to Chapter 29 “Kanji dictionary data License Activation Dialog Box” on page 29-17.
Do not turn off the main unit while project data is downloading.
If project data downloading fails and communication is not possible, turn the main unit off and on thendownload the data once again.

*5 Includes control devices. However, the control device is only for FT2J/1J.
*6 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.

29-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Downloading
Runtime System of Expansion Modules Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

■ Digital I/O module (Version Number)
Select this check box to download the latest version of the system software to all the digital I/O modules attached tothe main unit.
■ Analog I/O module (Version Number)
Select this check box to download the latest version of the system software to all the analog I/O modules attached tothe main unit.
Kanji dictionary data License Activation Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

■ Open IDEC website
If you do not have an authorization code (4-digit number), click this button to obtain one at the IDEC website
displayed.
■ Enter your activation code
Enter the authentication code (4-digit number).
Click OK to start the download.

29
Communication with Main Unit

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual29-17

2 Downloading

2.3

Downloading Files to an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Specified files can be downloaded to an external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit. The files are downloaded
to External Memory Device folder specified in the Project Settings dialog box for the current project.

1 Insert the external memory device into the main unit.
External memory device
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

2 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator Interface from Communicate with. For details,
refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow under Download.
While editing project data, even if you click the arrow under Download in the Transfer group on theOnline tab, the download menu will be displayed.

4 Select the method for downloading the file to the external memory device.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

■ Files to External Memory Device
Stops operation of the main unit and downloads the file to the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
When the file download is complete, operation resumes.
■ Files to External Memory Device while running
Downloads the file to the external memory device inserted in the main unit without stopping operation of the mainunit.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

29-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Downloading

5 Select the file, and then click Open.

• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to USB*2, the file starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address
dialog box is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to start the download. For
details, refer to “Using the online function for Ethernet communication” on page 29-7.
• If security is enabled in the project of the main unit, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the username and enter the password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function”
on page 24-1.
• WindO/I-NV4 only allows file with alphanumeric characters and symbols used for its file name. However,the file name with the following characters cannot be downloaded to the external memory device.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:"#$&'()*/:;<>?\`|~
Two consecutive periods
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:"*/:<>?\|

6 Click Yes.

The Download dialog box is displayed and downloads the file.

When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.

29

7 Click OK.

To create a recipe file on an external memory device inserted in the computer, use Save Recipe Files inExternal Memory Device in the Recipe Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Creating
Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box” on page 16-17.

*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-19

Communication with Main Unit

8 Click Close in the External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box.

2 Downloading

2.4

Downloading the System Software of Expansion Modules
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Downloads the latest version of the system software to expansion modules attached to the main unit.

1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator Interface from Communicate with. For details,
refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow under Download.
While editing project data, even if you click the arrow under Download in the Transfer group on theOnline tab, the download menu will be displayed.

3 Click the Runtime System of Expansion Modules.
The Runtime System of Expansion Modules dialog box is displayed.

4 Selects the check box for the expansion module that downloads the latest version of the system software, and thenclick the OK.

■ Digital I/O module (Version Number)
Select this check box to download the latest version of the system software to all the digital I/O modules attached tothe main unit.
■ Analog I/O module (Version Number)
Select this check box to download the latest version of the system software to all the analog I/O modules attached tothe main unit.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port to USB, the Runtime System of Expansion
Modules starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box
is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to“To execute a function other than the project data download” on page 29-10.
If security is enabled in the project of the main unit, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user nameand enter the password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page24-1.

5 Click Yes.

The Runtime System of Expansion Modules dialog box is displayed and downloads the system software.

When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.

6 Click OK.
7 Click Close in the Runtime System of Expansion Modules dialog box.

29-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Uploading3

Uploading
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Project data in the main unit or in an external memory device inserted in a computer can be read using WindO/I-NV2
and saved to the computer.

3.1

Upload Project Data from the Main Unit

1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator Interface from Communicate with. For details,
refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Upload icon.
While editing project data, project data can be uploaded from the main unit even by clicking the Upload
icon in the Transfer group on the Online tab.

If project data is being edited, project data will be closed. If the project data was changed, a confirmation
message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click Yes to save the project data and display a dialog box corresponding to the communication settings.
• Click No to close the project data without saving changes and display a dialog box corresponding to thecommunication settings.
• Click Cancel to stop uploading and return to the editing screen without saving the project data.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to USB*1, the Upload dialog box isdisplayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address
dialog box is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to start the upload. For details,
refer to “To execute a function other than the project data download” on page 29-10.

For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-21

Communication with Main Unit

If security is enabled in the project of the main unit, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.

29

3 Uploading

3 Check the project data details, and then click Upload.
If there is a project file with the same file name in the upload folder, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
• Click Yes to start uploading the project data.
• Click Cancel to stop uploading the project data.
When finished uploading, a completion message is displayed.

■ Project Name
The project is saved with the currently displayed name. To change the project name, enter a new name for the file.
The maximum number is 50 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
"*/:<>?\|■ Location
The uploaded project file is saved to the currently displayed location. To change the location of the saved file,click. The Browse folders dialog box is displayed. Select a location, and then click OK.

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close on the Upload dialog box.
A confirmation message to open the project is displayed.

6 Click OK.
The uploaded project opens.
This concludes uploading of project data.
If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Enterthe password for projects created with WindO/I-NV4 Ver. 1.11.4 or earlier using only 4 to 15 uppercase
letters and numbers.
The password to enter varies based on the check box setting of the Use Password to open a Project
found under the Options tab in the Security dialog box.
When this check box is selected, enter the password for Use Password to open a Project.
When this check box is cleared, enter the password for the user account assigned to the Administrator
security group.
For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
For details on reading project data saved on an external memory device using WindO/I-NV4, refer to
Chapter 33 “Uploading” on page 33-10.

29-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Uploading

3.2

Upload Dialog Box
This section describes the settings and buttons of the Upload dialog box.

■ Project Name
The project is saved with the currently displayed name. To change the project name, enter a new name for the file.
The maximum number is 50 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
"*/:<>?\|■ Type Number
Displays the type number selected in project data downloaded to the main unit.
■ Modified
Displays the time that project data downloaded to the main unit was last saved in WindO/I-NV4.
■ Location
Specifies the location for saving uploaded project files.
Click

to display the Browse folders dialog box. Select the location for saving, then click OK.

■ Upload files used in this project from the External Memory Device
To upload files located on an external memory device inserted in the main unit that are used by the project together
with project data, select the file to be uploaded from the following.
Recipe Files, Picture Files, Sound Files*1, Custom Web Page Files

29
Communication with Main Unit

■ UploadStarts uploading of project data.
■ CancelStops uploading of project data.

*1 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual29-23

3 Uploading

3.3

Uploading Files from an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit
Specified data can be uploaded from the External Memory Device folder on the external memory device for thecurrently running project.

1 Insert the external memory device into the main unit.
External memory device
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

2 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator Interface from Communicate with. For details,
refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow next to Upload.
Even if you click the arrow under Upload in the Transfer group on the Online tab, the upload menu will
be displayed.

4 Click Stored Data in External Memory Device.
The Upload from External Memory Device dialog box appears.

5 Select the items to be uploaded, and then specify the destination folder in the Location box.

29-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Uploading
Uploadable data is as follows.
• Screenshots• Alarm Log Files• Data Log Files• Operation Log Files• Recipe Files• Picture Files• Sound Files*1• Movie File List*2• Movie Files*2
If security is enabled for the project on main unit, a dialog appears for you to enter a user name andpassword. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
• Click
to call up the Select a Folder dialog box and specify the destination folder for uploading.
• After starting WindO/I-NV4, screen shots, alarm log data, data log data, and recipe files can be uploaded
from an External Memory Device folder without opening project data.

6 Click OK.
The External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box appears and the data upload begins.
A message box appears when the data upload is complete.

7 Click OK.
8 Click Close on the External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box.

29
Communication with Main Unit

*1 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-25

4 Clear

4Clear
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Deletes data from the main unit or from an external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit.

4.1

Clear Data from the Main Unit

1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.

In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator Interface from Communicate with. For details,
refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the MICRO/I group, click Clear, then click the data to be deleted.

■ All
Deletes project data, Alarm Log data, Data Log data, and Operation Log data. It also clears the values from all device
addresses*2.

■ Alarm Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Alarm Log function.
■ Data Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Data Log function.
■ Operation Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Operation Log function.
■ Values of All Device Addresses

Clears the values of all device addresses*2.

■ Stored Data in External Memory Device
After stopping operation, deletes data saved to the External Memory Device folder on an external memory device.
Click this to display the Clear Data dialog box. For details, refer to “4.2 Deleting Data from an External Memory Device
Inserted in the Main Unit” on page 29-27.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port to USB*3, deletion of the data starts.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address
dialog box is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to start deletion of the data. For
details, refer to “To execute a function other than the project data download” on page 29-10.
If security is enabled in the project of the main unit, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

4 Click Yes.
5 Click Close.
This concludes clearing data.
*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 Includes control devices. However, the control device is only for FT2J/1J.
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

29-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Clear

4.2

Deleting Data from an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator Interface from Communicate with. For details, refer
to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the MICRO/I group, click Clear, then click Stored Data in External Memory Device.
The Clear Data dialog box is displayed.

4 Select the check box for the data items to be deleted from the External Memory Device folder.
Screenshot, Alarm Log files, Data Log files, Operation Log files, and Recipe Files

5 Click OK.

If security is enabled in the project of the main unit, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

6 Click Yes.
7 Click Close.
This concludes clearing data on the external memory device.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-27

29
Communication with Main Unit

• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port to USB*1, deletion of the data starts.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address
dialog box is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to start deletion of the data. For
details, refer to “To execute a function other than the project data download” on page 29-10.

5 Formatting

5

Formatting
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Stops operation of the main unit and formats an external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit.

5.1

Formatting an External Memory Device Inserted in the Main Unit

1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
If communicating with a main unit inserted in a computer, in the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator
Interface from Communicate with. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the MICRO/I group, click Format.

• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to USB, a formatting confirmation
message is displayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address
dialog box is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to display the formatting
confirmation message. For details, refer to “To execute a function other than the project data download” on page
29-10.
• If security is enabled in the project of the main unit, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the
password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
• If formatting on the main unit takes more than 60 seconds, the formatting will be canceled. If formatting
on the main unit does not complete successfully, format the external memory device with the file
management function provided with the computer operating system.

4 Click Yes.
5 Click Close.
This concludes formatting the external memory device.

*1 SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

29-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 System Information

6

System Information
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Displays information about the system software and downloaded project data of the main unit.
This function can be used to show information about project data during editing and to simultaneously check detailsof project data downloaded to the main unit.

6.1

Displaying System Information

1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the main unit.
If communicating with a main unit inserted in a computer, in the Communication Settings dialog box, select Operator
Interface from Communicate with. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Target Info.

While editing project data, information about system software and project data can be displayed even byclicking Target Info. in the MICRO/I group on the Online tab.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to USB*1, the System Information
dialog box is displayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Operator Interface and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address
dialog box is displayed. Specify the IP address of the main unit, and then click OK to display the System
Information dialog box. For details, refer to “To execute a function other than the project data download” on page
29-10.

29
Communication with Main Unit

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-29

6 System Information

3 Check information about the system software and project data.

• To check the optional fonts installed on the main unit and the Kanji dictionary data, click Font/Kanji
Dictionary Data Information to display the Font/Kanji Dictionary Data Information dialog box. For
details, refer to “Font/Kanji Dictionary Data Information Dialog Box” on page 29-32.
• To check information about the external memory device inserted in the main unit, click External
Memory Device Information to display the External Memory Device Information dialog box. For
details, refer to “External Memory Device Information Dialog Box” on page 29-33.
• To check information about the expansion modules attached to the main unit, click Expansion Module
Information to display the Expansion Module Information dialog box. For details, refer to “External
Memory Device Information Dialog Box” on page 29-33.
• To check the communication driver set for the project that is downloaded to the main unit, click
Communication Driver Information to display the Communication Driver Information dialog box. For
details, refer to “Communication Driver Information Dialog Box” on page 29-34.

4 When you have finished checking the information, click OK.
5 Click Close.
This concludes checking system information.

29-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 System Information

6.2

Target Information Dialog Box
This section describes the settings and buttons of the Target Information dialog box.

■ Target Runtime Information
Type Number:

Displays the type number of main unit.

System Software Version:

Displays the system software version of the main unit.

OS Version*1:

Displays the operating system version of the main unit.

Memory Space:

Displays the maximum amount of project data (bytes) that can be
downloaded to the main unit.

Font/Kanji Dictionary Data Information*2: Checks the optional fonts and the Kanji dictionary data currently installedon the main unit. Click this button to display the Font/Kanji Dictionary Data
Information dialog box. For details, refer to “Font/Kanji Dictionary Data
Information Dialog Box” on page 29-32.
Checks the state of an external memory device inserted in the main unit,
its total capacity, available capacity, and used capacity. Click this button todisplay the External Memory Device Information dialog box. For details,
refer to “External Memory Device Information Dialog Box” on page 29-33.

Expansion Module Information*3:

Check the part number, the type and the system software version of the
expansion modules attached to the main unit. Click this button to display
the Expansion Module Information dialog box. For details, refer to“Expansion Module Information Dialog Box” on page 29-33.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-31

Communication with Main Unit

External Memory Device Information:29

6 System Information■ Operator Interface Project Information
Project Name:

Displays the project name of projects downloaded to the main unit.

Modified:

Displays the time that project data downloaded to the main unit was last
saved in WindO/I-NV4.

WindO/I-NV4 Version:

Displays the version of WindO/I-NV4 used to create the project data
downloaded to the main unit.

Communication Driver Information:

Checks the communication driver configured in the project downloaded to themain unit.
Click this button to display the Target Communication Driver Information
dialog box. For details, refer to “Communication Driver Information Dialog
Box” on page 29-34.

■ Opened Project Information
Project Name:

Displays the project name of the project being edited.

Modified:

Displays the time that the project being edited was last saved in WindO/I-NV4.

WindO/I-NV4 Version: Displays the version of WindO/I-NV4 used to create the project being edited.
This function can be used to show information about a project that is being edited and simultaneously checkinformation about project data downloaded to the main unit.
Font/Kanji Dictionary Data Information Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This dialog box is used to check the state of installed optional fonts and the Kanji dictionary data.

The installation status of each optional font and the Kanji dictionary data are shown to the right of the font.
The following additional fonts can be installed.
• Japanese Large Font (First standard)• Japanese Large Font (Second standard)• Simplified Chinese• Traditional Chinese• Hangul• European Large Font
• Central European• Baltic• Cyrillic

29-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 System Information
External Memory Device Information Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Checks the state of an external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit, its total capacity, used capacity, andavailable capacity.

Status:

Displays the state of the external memory device inserted in the main unit.

Memory Capacity:

Displays the total capacity of the external memory device inserted in the main unit.

Used Space:

Displays how much of the capacity of the external memory device inserted in the main unit iscurrently in use.

Free Space:

Displays how much of the capacity of the external memory device inserted in the main unit iscurrently available for use.

Expansion Module Information Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Check the part number, the type and the system software version of the expansion modules attached to the main unit.

29

The In Use displays the Part Number, the Type and the Version.
Part Number:

Displays the part number of the expansion module attached to the main unit.

Type:

Displays the type of the expansion module attached to the main unit.

Version:

Displays the system software version of the expansion module attached to the main unit.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

29-33

Communication with Main Unit

■ Slot1, Slot2, Slot3, Slot4
Display the In Use when the expansion module is attached to the expansion module interface of the main unit, theNot in use when the expansion module is not attached.

6 System Information
Communication Driver Information Dialog Box
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Checks the communication driver configured in the project downloaded to the main unit.

■ External Device Communication 1, External Device Communication 2, External Device Communication
3, External Device Communication 4*1
Manufacturer:

Displays the manufacturer of the external device.

Communication Driver:

Displays the communication driver.

Communicate Driver Version: Displays the communication driver version.

*1 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

29-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 30

Monitor Function

This chapter describes the monitor function that checks operation of the created project data.
Monitor function enables the values of internal devices and the values of the external device addresses to be checkedand changed. This can be done in two ways: using WindO/I-NV4 on a computer connected to the main unit, or
directly on the screen of the main unit.
For details about the monitor function of WindLDR, refer to the Ladder Programming Manual.

1

Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Monitor Function in WindO/I-NV4 is Used
Monitor function in WindO/I-NV4 can be performed as follows.
• Checking values of device addresses used on the screen of the main unit
Main unit
LDR1

Computer
Screen Monitor

External device

130

LM0
LDR1

LM0
Displays device addresses used in a screen.

• Checking values of specified device addresses
Main unit

Custom Monitor

ComputerExternal device

130
Select device address

30

Main unit

Batch Monitor
ComputerExternal device

130

Sequential address numbers(Starting address number)

Length: 3

LM0
LM1
LM2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-1

Monitor Function• Checking values of device addresses of sequential address numbers

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4• Checking the state of external devices connected to the main unit
Main unit
ComputerExternal device
Connect

External Device Monitor

130

External Device ID: 0
External Device ID: 1

External Device ID: 0
External device
Disconnect

External Device ID: 1• Displaying the value of device address in a popup
Object List window

Script Editor

Popup
Popup

• Highlighting objects while satisfying conditions
Trigger Condition
While satisfying the condition: LM0==1

Not satisfied
Condition

LM0 =Satisfied
Condition

30-2Highlighted

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual01

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4• Switching to the screen of the main unit
Main unit
ComputerExternal device

130

Base Screen 1

Switches to Base Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full

Base Screen 2• Opening current screen
Main unit
ComputerExternal device
Tank 1Full

Click
Base Screen 2
Opens
Base Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full

Base Screen 2

30• Change values of device addresses and check the operation of project data offline
D100

Computer

Disconnect

Custom Monitor in the Offline mode

100
150
200
D100=

0

100

D101=

0

150

D102=

0

200

External device

D101

D102

The ladder program can be monitored by the Control Function Setting. For details, refer to Chapter 1"Monitor Operation" in the Ladder Programming Manual.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-3

Monitor Function

Main unit

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4

1.2

Debugging in WindO/I-NV4
This section describes the procedure for monitoring values of device addresses and debugging in WindO/I-NV4.

1 Change the communication setting to match the connection method between a computer and a main unit.
For details, refer to Chapter 29 “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 29-5.

2 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Start Monitor.
The main unit switches to monitor mode and Monitor Mode is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Enterthe password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
To change values of device addresses and check the operation of project data offline, first switch to monitor
mode, and then on the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Go Offline.
The main unit switches to offline mode and Offline mode is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

3 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click the following button or enter the number to the text box to switch
the screen displayed on the main unit to the Monitor screen.

■■(Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
(Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using(Back).

■(First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data.

■(Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not sequential, switches to the screen of next lowest number.

■(Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number.

■(Next Screen)
Switches to the screen with screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive, switches to the screen of next highest number.

■(Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

30-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4

4 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Open Current Screens.
The screen displayed on the main unit opens in the editing window.

5 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, select the monitor being used.
When monitoring starts, the screen monitor is displayed.

■ Screens
Automatically checks device addresses used on the screen displayed on the main unit. For details, refer to “Screen
Monitor” on page 30-6.
■ Object List
Displays values of device addresses in a popup on the Object List window. It also highlights objects while satisfying
conditions. For details, refer to “1.3 Display the Value of Device Address in Popup” on page 30-18, and “1.4Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions” on page 30-18.
■ CustomRegisters monitored device addresses individually and displays the value of device addresses. For details, refer to“Custom Monitor” on page 30-7.
■ BatchRegisters monitored device address as a batch for sequential address numbers and displays the value of device
addresses. For details, refer to “Batch Monitor” on page 30-15.
■ External Devices
Displays the state of external devices connected to the main unit. For details, refer to “External Device Monitor” onpage 30-17.

6 Check operation of project data by monitoring and changing values of device addresses, and edit project data if there
is an error.

If the monitored screen is switches, repeat steps 3 through 4.

30

7 Download the edited project data to the main unit.

Monitor Function

To reflect edits made during debugging, it is necessary to perform a download.

8 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Stop Monitor.

To switch from offline mode to monitor mode, on the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Go Online.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual30-5

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4● Screen Monitor
Automatically displays device addresses used on the screen displayed on the main unit. Enables values of device
addresses to be monitored and changed.

■ Device Address
Displays the device addresses used on the screen displayed on the main unit.
next to Comment toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.
■ Comment
Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only after you click
Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

tonext to■ Data Type
Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 16) stored the display value. 2 single-byte characters can be displayed by 1
word.
This option can only be configured String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese),
String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul), String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic) is
selected as Data Type.
The storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method of String Data on the Systemtab in the Project Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.
■ Value
Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed. The value range depends on the data type. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F):Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, double-click a cell and thenenter a value.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.

to display a popup

String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese), String(Traditional Chinese),
String(Hangul), String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic):
Displays the current value of device address in string. To change a value, double-click a cell and then enter themessages in the language selected.
■ Hexadecimal, Binary
Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change a value, double-click a celland then specify a value. The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.
HEX and BIN values are displayed only after you click
HEX and BIN check box.

30-6

next to Value to display a popup menu and then select the

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4● Custom Monitor
Enables the values of registered device addresses to be monitored and changed.

■ Add to List
Saves device addresses registered in Monitor to project data as a device address list. A saved lists can be monitored
by selecting it from the List.
Click this button to display the Device Address List Name Setting dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving RegisteredDevice Addresses to Project Data as a Device Address List” on page 30-11.
■ Device Address
Registers the device addresses to monitor individually.
Click this button to display the Tag Editor. For details, refer to “Registering the device addresses to monitor
individually” on page 30-9.
■ Script
Batch saves all device addresses used in a script.
Click this button to display Script Manager. For details, refer to “Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts” onpage 30-9.
■ Import
Imports the device addresses from a device address list saved as a CSV text file.

■ Export
Saves the device addresses displayed in Monitor as a CSV text file. This file is called a Device Address List.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving a Device Address List as a CSV File” onpage 30-12.
The saved device address list can be imported using Import.
■ Clear
Deletes all the device addresses displayed in Monitor.
■ ListDisplays a device address list saved with the project data.
Select a list to clear the device addresses shown in Monitor and display the device addresses in the list.
Double-click a cell to display the Device Address List Name Setting dialog box. The name of the device address list canbe edited.
Select a list and press DELETE to delete it from the List.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-7

30
Monitor Function

Click this button to display the Device Address List dialog box. For details, refer to “Importing Device Addresses froma Device Address List” on page 30-13.

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4■ Monitor
The registered device addresses are displayed in a list.
Select the device address list from the List to show the device addresses registered in the list.
Device Address:

The registered device addresses are displayed.
Double-click a cell to register or change a device address. Clickto display the Tag Editor.
For details on how to configure device address settings, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, clicktodisplay a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

Comment:

Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only
after you clicknext to Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment andselect the check box.

Data Type:

Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.

Words:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 16) stored the display value. 2 single-byte characters
can be displayed by 1 word.
This option can only be configured String(Western), String(Japanese),
String(Simplified Chinese), String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul),
String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic) is selected as Data Type.
The storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method ofString Data on the System tab in the Project Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4“Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.

Value:

Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed. The value range depends onthe data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F):Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, doubleclick a cell and then enter a value.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
to display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese),
String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul), String(Central European),String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic):
Displays the current value of device address in string. To change a value, double-click a celland then enter the messages in the language selected.

Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change avalue, double-click a cell and then specify a value. The value range depends on the data type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
HEX and BIN values are displayed only after you clicknext to Value to display a popup
menu and then select the HEX and BIN check box.

30-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4
Registering the device addresses to monitor
Registering the device addresses to monitor individually
Click Device Address. Or, double-click a cell under Device Address in Monitor, and then click.

The Tag Editor is displayed. For details on configuring device address settings, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.

Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts

1 Click Script.
Script Manager is displayed.

30
Monitor Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual30-9

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4

2 Select the script ID of the script for the device address to be batch-saved, and then click Select.

All the device addresses used by the script are registered.

30-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4
Saving Registered Device Addresses to Project Data as a Device Address List
If registered device addresses are saved with project data as a list, then even when the project data is later reopened,
the device addresses can be called from the List to be reutilized.

1 Click Add to List.
The Device Address List Name Setting dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter a name for the device address list.
The maximum number is 40 characters.
The following characters cannot be used for names of device address list.
"*,/:;<>?\|

3 Click OK.
The device address list is added to the List.

30
Monitor Function

4 Saving project data.
If a project file is closed without saving, device address lists will not be saved with the project data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-11

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4
Saving a Device Address List as a CSV File
To use a device address list (registered device addresses list) in another project, save it as a CSV text file. This file iscalled a Device Address List.

1 Click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the save location, enter a File name, and then click Save.

This concludes saving device address list.

30-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4
Importing Device Addresses from a Device Address List
Imports the device addresses from a device address list saved as a CSV text file into custom monitor.

1 Click Import.
The Device Address List dialog box is displayed.

2 Click.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

3 Select a saved device address list, and then click Open.
The device addresses are listed.

30
Monitor Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual30-13

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4

4 Click the device address to import.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.

5 Click OK.
If there is an already registered device address on the Custom Monitor, an overwrite confirmation message isdisplayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the device address displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all the device addresses.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the device address displayed in theconfirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop importing device addresses.
The device address is added to Monitor.

30-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4● Batch Monitor
Displays sequential addresses as a batch.

(Monitor)■ TargetSelect the device that includes the device address that will be set from HMI Device*1, Control Device*1,

MICRO/I*2 or External Device (External Device ID): (External Device Name).

You can configure the External Device ID and the external device name in the Communications Driver Network
tab on the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab” onpage 4-55.
■ Device Type
Selects the device type.
The list only shows device types that can be used.
■ Address Number
Specify the address. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
■ Bit Number
Specify the bit (0 to 15) of the word device when a word device is selected in Device.
■ Length
Specifies the number of device addresses displayed in the list (Bit number of the word device: 1 to 16, Bit Device orWord Device: 1 to 1000).
■ Data Type
Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

30
Monitor Function*1 FT2J/1J only
*2 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-15

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4■ (Monitor)
Automatically displays the selected device addresses, in the number specified under Length, from top to bottom,
consecutively.
Device Address:

The specified device addresses are displayed.

Words:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 16) stored the display value. 2 single-byte characters
can be displayed by 1 word.
This option can only be configured String(Western), String(Japanese),
String(Simplified Chinese), String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul),
String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic) is selected as Data Type.
The storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method ofString Data on the System tab in the Project Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4“Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.

Value:

Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed. The value range depends onthe data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F):Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, doubleclick a cell and then enter a value.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
to display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese),
String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul), String(Central European),String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic):
Displays the current value of device address in string. To change a value, double-click a celland then enter the messages in the language selected.

Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change avalue, double-click a cell and then specify a value. The value range depends on the data type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
HEX and BIN values are displayed only after you clicknext to Value to display a popup
menu and then select the HEX and BIN check box.

30-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4● External Device Monitor
Displays the state of external devices connected to the main unit.

(Connection status)(External Device ID)(External Device Name)■ (Connection status)
Displays the state of external devices connected to the main unit. If a red cross appears over the icon of an external
device, communication is stopped.
Clicking the External Device icon enables switching between connection and disconnection.
■ (External Device ID)
Displays the External Device ID of all external device addresses used in the project.
■ (External Device Name)
Displays the name of external devices used in the project.

30
Monitor Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-17

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4

1.3

Display the Value of Device Address in Popup
During monitoring, mousing over device addresses displayed in the Object List window or device addresses in ascript opened in Script Editor displays the current value in a popup window.
• Object List window• Script Editor• Popup viewing of values of device addresses in the Object List window works only if the screen
displayed in the Object List window matches the screen displayed on the main unit.
• Popup viewing of values of device addresses in Script Editor works only if the script during editing is being
used by a global script command or a script command on the screen displayed on the main unit.
• The maximum number for popup window is 80 characters. Any characters entered after the 80th will not
be displayed.
• If 65 or more device addresses are displayed in the Object List window, monitor refreshing and popup
message will slow down.

1.4

Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions
When the Trigger Condition is satisfied during monitoring, the objects for which conditions are being satisfied arehighlighted in the Object List window.

30-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV4

1.5

Switching the Screen of the Main Unit
During monitoring, it is possible to switch to the screen displayed on the main unit using a WindO/I-NV4 command.

■■(Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
(Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using the

1.6(Back).

■(First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the lowest screen number in the project data.

■(Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive numbers, this command switches to the closest number.

■(Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of a specified number.

■(Next Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive numbers, switches to the closest number.

■(Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

Open Current Screens
The screen displayed on the main unit opens in the editing window.

30
Change Values of Device Addresses and Check the Operation of Project Data Offline
To change values of device addresses and check the operation of project data on the main unit, first switch to monitor
mode, and then click Go Offline.

The main unit switches to offline mode and “Offline Mode” flashes at the bottom left of the screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-19

Monitor Function

1.7

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit

2

Monitoring on the Main Unit
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

It is possible to change values of device addresses and check the operation on the main unit.

2.1

How the Monitoring Function of the Main Unit is Used
Monitoring in the main unit can perform the following functions.
• Checking and changing the value of specified device address
Main unit
LDR1
Device Monitor

Device Monitor
DeviceLM
LDR

Device Monitor
DeviceLM
LDR

Dec/Hex

130

0
1

0
00000

Del

SelectDec/Hex

0
1

0
00000

Data

LM0

Data

Del

SelectDevice Monitor can be used in offline mode. The values of the external device addresses can be checkedand changed with the main unit alone.

30-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit

2.2

Device Monitor
By registering device addresses in Run Mode, both data monitoring and changing can be conducted. Registereddevice addresses are listed in Device Monitor in ascending order (A to Z, 0 to 9). Registered device addresses are
saved until power to the main unit is turned OFF, or the mode is changed.
• Available device address range depends on types and settings of external devices. Selecting unavailable
device address, “Communication error” happens and it can not be back in without reboot. For details,
refer to Chapter 37 “1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen” on page 37-1.
• If three Popup Screens are displayed on the screen (or if two Popup Screens are displayed in the Alarm
Log Settings), in order to use Device Monitor in the same way on Popup Screens, the Device Monitor
cannot be used.

● Displaying Device Monitor

1 Press the upper-left corner of the screen on the main unit for three seconds or more.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.
Main unit
Press and hold3 or more seconds

2 Press Device Monitor.
Device Monitor is displayed.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Back Light

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Selecta user name and then enter a password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

30
Monitor Function

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-21

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit
● Device Address Registration

1 Press Select on Device Monitor.
The Select Device Address screen is displayed.

Device Monitor
DeviceDec/Hex

0

Data

Del

Select2 Press  or  to select the device type.
For Internal Device, proceed to step 4.

Select Device Address
LM

0

(bit)

ID

A

B

C

D

7

8

9

E

4

5

6

F

1

2

3
ENT

0

CLR

CAN

The next address of the device address entered previously is automatically displayed in the Select Device
Address screen.

3 Enter the External Device ID as a hexadecimal value and press ID .

30-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit

4 Enter the address number and then press ENT.
• Press CLR to clear all values entered for the address number.
• Press CAN to stop registering device addresses.

Select Device Address
LM

1

(bit)

ID

A

B

C

D

7

8

9

E

4

5

6

F

1

2

3

1
0

ENT
CLR

CAN

2

If a device address is invalid, pressing ENT will not return to Device Monitor.
The device address is registered to Device Monitor.

Device Monitor
DeviceLM

Dec/Hex

1

0

30
Del

Monitor Function

Data

Select5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to register all device addresses to be monitored.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-23

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit
● Changing Value of Device Address

1 Press  or  to select the device address to be changed the value.

Device Monitor
Device
LM
LDR

Data

Dec/Hex

1
2

0
00000

Del

Select2 Press Data on Device Monitor.
The Write Data screen is displayed.

Device Monitor
Device
LM
LDR

Data

30-24

Dec/Hex

1
2

0
00000

Del

Select

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit

3 Enter the value of device address and press ENT.
• Press Dec or Hex to change the display type for the value to enter.
• Press CLR to delete the entered value of device address.
• Press CAN to stop entering the value of device address.

Write Data
LDR

2

Dec

A

B

C

D

7

8

9

E

Current(word)

4

5

6

F

0
0H

1

2

3

CLR

CAN

/

Hex

1

ENT

1
0

2

• If a value of device is invalid, pressing ENT will not return you to Device Monitor.
• If the display type is decimal, A to F cannot be used.
The value of device address is changed.

Device Monitor
DeviceLM
LDR

Dec/Hex

1
2

0
00001

30
Del

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Monitor Function

Data

Select30-25

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit
● Device Monitor Configuration
Title barMove button

Close button

Device Monitor
Device(Device Address)(Focus)

Dec/Hex

LM
LM

Data

1
2

0
1

Del

Select(Value)■ Title Bar
Displays the title,(Move) button, and(Close) button.

(Move) button: Moves the Device Monitor.
(Close) button: Closes the Device Monitor.
■ Dec/Hex
Switches the display type for the current value of device address. Switches between DEC and HEX.
■ (Device Address)
The registered device address is displayed.
■ (Value)
The current value of device address is displayed.
■ (Focus)
Highlights the selected device address.
■Moves the focus up by one line.
■Moves the focus down by one line.
■ DataChanges the value of the selected device address. Press to display the Write Data Screen. For details, refer to“Changing Value of Device Address” on page 30-24.
■ Del
Deletes the selected device address.
■ Select
Registers a selected device address. Press to display the Select Device Address screen. For details, refer to “Device
Address Registration” on page 30-22.

30-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit

2.3

Change Values of Device Addresses and Check the Operation of Project Data Offline
Offline mode allows you to change values of device addresses and to check the operation of project data on the main
unit only. By possessing virtualized external device addresses inside the main unit, you can efficiently debug using theDevice Monitor function.

● Switching to Offline Mode

1 Press the upper-left corner of the screen on the main unit for three seconds or more.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.
Main unit
Press and hold 3
or more seconds

2 Press System Mode.
The main unit switches to the Top Page of the System Mode.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Selecta user name and then enter a password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

3 Press Offline.
The main unit switches to offline mode and “Offline Mode” is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

IDEC HG G SERIESSYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

OfflineMain Menu

Monitor Function

Run

30

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN<<

BRIGHTNESS 31>>

4 Monitor and change the values of device addresses with Device Monitor to check the operation of project data.
If there are any errors, edit the project data with WindO/I-NV4, and then download the edited project data to themain unit.
To exit offline mode, switch to System Mode with the operations in steps 1 and 2, and then press Run on the Top
Page.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

30-27

2 Monitoring on the Main Unit

30-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 31

Simulator Function

31

The simulator function can be used to check and change the values of internal devices and device addresses ofexternal devices.

1

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Simulator Function is Used
Simulator function in WindO/I-NV4 can be performed as follows.
• Check the operation of parts
Computer

Simulator• Save the screen displayed in the simulator as an image
Computer

Simulator

Save as image

Image Files (png image)• Check the values of device addresses used on screens displayed
Screen Monitor

Computer

Simulator

LSD8
LSD12
LSD11
LSD10
View device addresses used on screensdisplayed in the simulator

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

31-1

Simulator Function

This chapter describes the simulator function, which can be used to check operation of the project data in WindO/INV4 before the created project data is downloaded to a main unit.

1 Overview• Checking values of specified device addresses
Custom Monitor

Simulator

Computer

Select device address• Checking values of device addresses of sequential address numbers
Simulator

Batch Monitor

Computer

Sequential address numbers

LSD10
LSD11
LSD12

(Starting address number)

Length: 3• Change the screen displayed in the simulator
Simulator

ComputerBase Screen 1

Switches to Base Screen 2.
Simulator

ComputerBase Screen 2• Check the operation of Script
Computer

Script Debugger
LSD8
LSD9
LSD10
LSD11

31-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

31• Check the ladder program operation with WindLDR Simulation.

Simulator Function

Simulator

Computer
Operation

Click

Linked to simulator
operations

WindLDR Simulation

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual31-3

2 Using the Simulator

2

Using the Simulator
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

Starting the Simulator● Starting the Simulator
The simulator cannot load project data that cannot be downloaded to the main unit.

1 Open the project data on which to perform the operation check.
2 On the Online tab, in the Simulator group, click the Simulator icon.
The project data being edited will be loaded and the simulator will start.

If the project data was changed before the simulator is started, a save confirmation message will be
displayed.
• Click OK to save the project data and start the simulator.
• Click Cancel to cancel starting the simulator. You will be returned to the editing screen and the project
data will not be saved.
● Starting the Simulator by Loading or Clearing Device Addresses
If the Save Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR) check box is selected and the simulator is
terminated, the loading method of the project data can be selected when the simulator is next started.
The simulator cannot load project data that cannot be downloaded to the main unit.

1 Open the project data on which to perform the operation check.
2 On the Online tab, in the Simulator group, click the ▼ arrow under Simulator.
3 Select the loading method of the project data.
The project data being edited will be loaded and the simulator will start.

■ Load Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR) and Run
The saved values of device addresses on the external device, HMI keep relays (LK), and HMI keep registers (LKR) will
be loaded when the project data is loaded.
■ Clear Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR) and Run
The saved values of device addresses on the external device, HMI keep relays (LK), and HMI keep registers (LKR) will
be cleared when the project data is loaded.
If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click OK to save the project data and start the simulator.
• Click Cancel to cancel starting the simulator. You will be returned to the editing screen and the project
data will not be saved.

31-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Using the Simulator

2.2

31

Debugging in Simulator

Simulator Function

This section describes the procedure for monitoring values of device addresses and debugging in Simulator.

1 In the simulator, use the following buttons and the text box to change the monitored screen.

■■(Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
(Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using(Back).

■(First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data.

■(Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not sequential, switches to the screen of next lowest number.

■(Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number.

■(Next Screen)
Switches to the screen with screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive, switches to the screen of next highest number.

■(Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual31-5

2 Using the Simulator

2 Select the monitor being used.
When monitoring starts, the screen monitor is displayed.

■ Screens
Automatically checks device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Simulator. For details, refer to “3.2 Screen
Monitor” on page 31-12.
■ CustomRegisters monitored device addresses individually and displays the value of device addresses. For details, refer to “3.3Custom Monitor” on page 31-13.
■ BatchRegisters monitored device address as a batch for sequential address numbers and displays the value of device
addresses. For details, refer to “3.4 Batch Monitor” on page 31-15.
■ Script Debugger
Check the operation of the script used in the project. For details, refer to “3.5 Script Debugger” on page 31-17.
■ WindLDR Simulation
Start the simulation in WindLDR to check the ladder program operation.

3 Check operation of project data by monitoring and changing values of device addresses, and edit project data if there
is an error.

If the monitored screen is switches, repeat steps 1.
Click Settings to save the values of device addresses on the external device, HMI keep relays (LK), and
HMI keep registers (LKR) that were input in the simulator.
The Simulator Settings dialog box is displayed.

After the Simulator Settings dialog box is displayed, select the Save Value of Device Address(External Device, LK, LKR) check box, and then click OK.
The values of device addresses that are saved are the values when the simulator is terminated or when
Reload project data is clicked.

4 If you have edited the project data, click Reload project data to update the project displayed in the simulator.
The Reload Project dialog box is displayed.
If the Save Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR) check box is cleared, proceed to step 6.

If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click OK to save and load the project data.
• Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.

31-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Using the Simulator

31

5 Select the loading method of the project data and click OK.

■ Clear Saved Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR)
The saved values of device addresses on the external device, HMI keep relays (LK), and HMI keep registers (LKR) will
be cleared when the project data is loaded.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5, and click

when you have finished debugging.

This terminates the simulator.

2.3

Saving the Displayed Screen as an Image
You can save the screen displayed on the simulator as an image.

1 Click Capture.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the save location, enter a File name, and then click Save.

The color of the screen displayed on the main unit and that of the screenshot may differ.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

31-7

Simulator Function■ Load Saved Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR)
The saved values of device addresses on the external device, HMI keep relays (LK), and HMI keep registers (LKR) will
be loaded when the project data is loaded.

2 Using the Simulator

2.4

Start simulation of ladder program

1 Click WindLDR Simulation.
When IDEC MICROSmart(FC6A) is set as the external device of the editing project, displays the Select External
Device dialog box. When the FT2J or FT1J is set for the model of the editing project, proceed to step 4.

2 Select External Device ID, and then click Next.
When linking for the first time, the Open dialog box is displayed.

External Device ID:

Displays the External Device ID which IDEC MICROSmart (FC6A) is set as the external
device in the editing project.

External Device Name: Displays the name of the external device set for the displayed External Device ID.
Communication Driver: Displays the communication driver set for the displayed External Device ID.

3 Select the WindLDR project to be used with the external device, and then click Open.

4 Starts WindLDR and starts the simulation.

31-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Simulator

31

Simulator
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes items and buttons on the Simulator.

3.1

Simulator
It is possible to change values of device addresses and check the operation on the screen of Simulator.

■ Capture
Saves the screen displayed on the simulator as an image.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “2.3 Saving the Displayed Screen as an Image”
on page 31-7.
■ Screens
Automatically displays the device addresses used on the screen displayed in the simulator. For details, refer to “3.2
Screen Monitor” on page 31-12.
■ CustomRegisters monitored device addresses individually and displays the value of device addresses. For details, refer to “3.3Custom Monitor” on page 31-13.
■ BatchRegisters monitored device address as a batch for sequential address numbers and displays the value of device
addresses. For details, refer to “3.4 Batch Monitor” on page 31-15.
■■(Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
(Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using(Back).

■(First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data.

■(Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not sequential, switches to the screen of next lowest number.

■(Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

31-9

Simulator Function

33 Simulator■(Next Screen)
Switches to the screen with screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive, switches to the screen of next highest number.

■(Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.

■ Script Debugger
Check the operation of the script used in the project. For details, refer to“3.5 Script Debugger” on page 31-17.
■ Reload project data
Reloads the edited project data.
■ WindLDR Simulation
Click this button to start or stop the simulation in WindLDR.
■ Settings
Click this button to display the Simulator Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Simulator Settings Dialog Box” onpage 31-11.
■ Function key*1
Check the operation of the switches (F1 to F12) on both sides of the screen of the HG1P main unit.

Function key

Function key

Right-click the function key and select the action mode for the switch from "Momentary" or "Alternate".
Momentary:

Pressing the function key writes a 1 to the HMI Expansion Input (LI).
Releasing the function key writes a 0 to the HMI Expansion Input (LI).

Operation andview

ReleasePress

Release

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Initial image

ActionAlternate:

Press

Each press of the function key alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the HMI Expansion Input (LI).
Press

Operation andview

ActionReleasePress

Release

Initial image

ON

OFF

Used to check the operation of function key press and hold. When “Alternate” is selected, an * (asterisk) is
displayed on the function keys of the simulator.

*1 HG1P only

31-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Simulator

31● Simulator Settings Dialog Box■ Screen Size
Select 100% or 200% for the screen size magnification in the simulator.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

31-11

Simulator Function■ Save Value of Device Address (External Device, LK, LKR)
Select this check box to save the values of device addresses on the external device, HMI keep relays (LK), and HMI
keep registers (LKR) that were input in the simulator. The values of device addresses will be saved in the project data.
The Reload Project dialog box will be displayed when the simulator is next started or when the project is reloaded.
For details, refer to “2.2 Debugging in Simulator” on page 31-5.

3 Simulator

3.2

Screen Monitor
Automatically checks device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Simulator. Enables values of device
addresses to be monitored and changed.

■ Device Address
Displays the device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Simulator.
next to Comment toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.
■ Comment
Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only after you click
Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

tonext to■ Data Type
Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 16) stored the display value. 2 single-byte characters can be displayed by 1
word.
This option can only be configured String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese),
String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul), String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic) is
selected as Data Type.
The storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method of String Data on the Systemtab in the Project Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.
■ Value
Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed. The value range depends on the data type. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F):Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, double-click a cell and thenenter a value.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.

to display a popup

String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese), String(Traditional Chinese),
String(Hangul), String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic):
Displays the current value of device address in string. To change a value, double-click a cell and then enter themessages in the language selected.
■ Hexadecimal, Binary
Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change a value, double-click a celland then specify a value. The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.
HEX and BIN values are displayed only after you click
HEX and BIN check box.

31-12

next to Value to display a popup menu and then select the

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Simulator

3.3

31

Custom Monitor

Simulator Function

Enables the values of registered device addresses to be monitored and changed.

■ Add to List
Saves device addresses registered in Monitor to project data as a device address list. A saved lists can be monitored
by selecting it from the List.
Click this button to display the Device Address List Name Setting dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “Saving
Registered Device Addresses to Project Data as a Device Address List” on page 30-11.
■ Device Address
Registers the device addresses to monitor individually.
Click this button to display the Tag Editor. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “Registering the device addresses tomonitor” on page 30-9.
■ Script
Batch saves all device addresses used in a script.
Click this button to display Script Manager. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in
Scripts” on page 30-9.
■ Import
Imports the device addresses from a device address list saved as a CSV text file.
Click this button to display the Device Address List dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “Importing Device
Addresses from a Device Address List” on page 30-13.
■ Export
Saves the device addresses displayed in Monitor as a CSV text file. This file is called a Device Address List.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “Saving a Device Address List as a
CSV File” on page 30-12.
The saved device address list can be imported using Import.
■ Clear
Deletes all the device addresses displayed in Monitor.
■ ListDisplays a device address list saved with the project data.
Select a list to clear the device addresses shown in Monitor and display the device addresses in the list.
Double-click a cell to display the Device Address List Name Setting dialog box. The name of the device address list canbe edited.
Select a list and press DELETE to delete it from the List.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual31-13

3 Simulator■ Monitor
The registered device addresses are displayed in a list.
Select the device address list from the List to show the device addresses registered in the list.
Device Address:

The registered device addresses are displayed.
Double-click a cell to register or change a device address. Clickto display the Tag Editor.
For details on how to configure device address settings, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-72.
toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, clicktodisplay a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

Comment:

Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only
after you clicknext to Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment andselect the check box.

Data Type:

Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.

Words:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 16) stored the display value. 2 single-byte characters
can be displayed by 1 word.
This option can only be configured String(Western), String(Japanese),
String(Simplified Chinese), String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul),
String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic) is selected as Data Type.
The storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method ofString Data on the System tab in the Project Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4“Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.

Value:

Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed. The value range depends onthe data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F):Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, doubleclick a cell and then enter a value.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
to display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese),
String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul), String(Central European),String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic):
Displays the current value of device address in string. To change a value, double-click a celland then enter the messages in the language selected.

Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change avalue, double-click a cell and then specify a value. The value range depends on the data type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
HEX and BIN values are displayed only after you clicknext to Value to display a popup
menu and then select the HEX and BIN check box.
For details about how to register device addresses to monitor in the Custom Monitor and how to reuse
registered device addresses, refer to Chapter 30 “Custom Monitor” on page 30-7.

31-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Simulator

3.4

31

Batch Monitor

Simulator Function

Displays sequential addresses as a batch.

(Monitor)■ TargetSelect the device that includes the device address that will be set from HMI Device*1, Control Device*1,

MICRO/I*2 or External Device (External Device ID): (External Device Name).

You can configure the External Device ID and the external device name in the Communications Driver Network
tab on the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab” onpage 4-55.
■ Device Type
Selects the device type.
The list only shows device types that can be used.
■ Address Number
Specify the address. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
■ Bit Number
Specify the bit (0 to 15) of the word device when a word device is selected in Device.
■ Length
Specifies the number of device addresses displayed in the list (Bit number of the word device: 1 to 16, Bit Device orWord Device: 1 to 1000).
■ Data Type
Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.

*1 FT2J/1J only
*2 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual31-15

3 Simulator■ (Monitor)
Automatically displays the selected device addresses, in the number specified under Length, from top to bottom,
consecutively.
Device Address:

The specified device addresses are displayed.

Comment:

Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only
after you clicknext to Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment andselect the check box.

Data Type:

Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.

Words:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 16) stored the display value. 2 single-byte characters
can be displayed by 1 word.
This option can only be configured String(Western), String(Japanese),
String(Simplified Chinese), String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul),
String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic) is selected as Data Type.
The storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method ofString Data on the System tab in the Project Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4“Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.

Value:

Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed. The value range depends onthe data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F):Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, doubleclick a cell and then enter a value.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
to display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese),
String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul), String(Central European),String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic):
Displays the current value of device address in string. To change a value, double-click a celland then enter the messages in the language selected.

Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change avalue, double-click a cell and then specify a value. The value range depends on the data type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
HEX and BIN values are displayed only after you clicknext to Value to display a popup
menu and then select the HEX and BIN check box.

31-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Simulator

3.5

31

Script Debugger

Simulator Function

You can check the operation of script configured in the project.

(Breakpoint)(Script)■ Script List
Displays the list of script used on the project.
Script ID:

Displays the script ID (1 to 32000) of the registered scripts.

Script Name:

Displays the script name of the registered scripts.

Debug:

Selects whether or not to debug the script. Double clicking the cell switches between Enable
and Disable. The maximum number of scripts that can be configured to Enable is 16.

■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in the Script List.
■ Data Type
Displays the data type configured to the script selected in the Script List.
For details about the data type, refer to Chapter 25 “1.3 Data Type of the Script” on page 25-3.
■ Continue
Executes the script paused at the breakpoint up to the next breakpoint. If there is no next breakpoint, execute thescript to the end and exit.
The keyboard shortcut is F5 key.

■ Step Over
Executes the script while pausing each step (one line) at a time. If there is no next step, the script execution is
terminated.
The keyboard shortcut is F6 key.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual31-17

3 Simulator■ (Breakpoint)
When the script is executed, it pauses when the processing reaches the breakpoint. You can check the value of thedevice address at the time of stopping on the Device Address List.
The maximum number of breakpoints that can be configured for one script is 20.
• The trigger condition for the script is satisfied and the script is executed, and then the processing of thescript is stopped when the configured breakpoint is reached.
• When you save the project, the setting of the breakpoint is also saved. However, the project data to be
downloaded does not include the setting of the breakpoint, so there is no breakpoint setting after
uploading the project.
■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in Script List.
Click inside the frame on the left side of (Script) to configure a breakpoint.
the line configured the breakpoint is highlighted.

(red circle) is displayed, and the text on■ Device Address List
Displays the device addresses that are used in the script suspended at breakpoint and the values of them.
Device Address:

Displays the device addresses used on the script.
next to Comment toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are
displayed, click
to display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.

Comment:

Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only
after you clicknext to Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment andselect the check box.

Data Type:

Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available
Data” on page 2-1.

Words:

Specify the number of word devices (1 to 16) stored the display value. 2 single-byte characters
can be displayed by 1 word.
This option can only be configured String(Western), String(Japanese),
String(Simplified Chinese), String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul),
String(Central European), String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic) is selected as Data Type.
The storage order for word device address data is set according to Storage Method ofString Data on the System tab in the Project Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4“Storage Method of String Data” on page 4-31.

Value:

Enables values of device addresses to be display and changed. The value range depends onthe data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
UBIN16(W), BIN16(I), UBIN32(D), BIN32(L), BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), Float32(F):Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, doubleclick a cell and then enter a value.
Click
to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click
to display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
String(Western), String(Japanese), String(Simplified Chinese),
String(Traditional Chinese), String(Hangul), String(Central European),String(Baltic), String(Cyrillic):
Displays the current value of device address in string. To change a value, double-click a celland then enter the messages in the language selected.

Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change avalue, double-click a cell and then specify a value. The value range depends on the data type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.1 Available Data” on page 2-1.
HEX and BIN values are displayed only after you clicknext to Value to display a popup
menu and then select the HEX and BIN check box.

31-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Restrictions

31

Restrictions
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The simulator runs a main unit equivalent to offline mode on the computer to simulate the operation and display ofparts laid out on screens. However, the following functions can not be checked with the simulator.
• External Device Communication, O/I Link Communication, User Communication, Sub Host Communication and,
BACnet/IP Communication, EtherNet/IP Communication and MQTT Communication functions• SNTP Server and Time Zone functions• Entering Hiragana and Kanji to the Character Input using Key Buttons or Keypad• The function to save log data of the Alarm Log Function to the external memory as a CSV file
• The function to save log data of the Data Log Function to the external memory as a CSV file
• The function to save log data of the Operation Log Function to the external memory as a CSV file
• The function to save values of device addresses for the Recipe Function to the external memory as a recipe file
(CSV file)• E-mail Function• Social Media Function• FTP Server Function• FTP Client Function• Sound Function• Multimedia Function• Web Server Function• Control Function• Pass-Through Function• Project Transfer Function• PLC Program Transfer Function• File Copy Function• Printer• Displaying the Maintenance Screen• Adjust Brightness Function• Backlight Control Function• Touch Sound and Beep Sound• The clock function uses the date and time data of the computer on which the simulator is running.
• The simulator replaces the following fonts with Windows fonts and displays them.*1
Stroke:Courier New
7-seg:
7barSP*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

31-19

Simulator Function

44 Restrictions

31-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 32

Pass-Through Function
32

This chapter describes the overview of the Pass-through function, it's configuration and other important details.

Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

How the Pass-Through Function is Used
The Pass-through function downloads or uploads a PLC program from a computer or an external device via the main
unit. The Pass-through function can be used without stopping the operation of the main unit.
Device Link Communication
Main unit

Read
External device

Computer
PLC programming
software

130

Write
Read

Write
Pass-Through Communication

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

32-1

Pass-Through Function

11 Overview

1.2

Supported External Devices
This Pass-through function can be used with the following PLCs:
Manufacturer

Series Name

Model
FC6A

MICROSmart(FC6A)(RS232C/485)

FC5A*1

MICROSmart

FC4A*1IDEC

Mitsubishi*2

Communication Driver

OpenNet Controller

FC3A*1

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite

FT1A

FX Series
QCPU

OpenNet,MICROSmart,SmartAXIS Pro/
Lite(RS232C/485)

FX0, FX0N, FX1, FX1S, FX2, FX2CMELSEC-FX (CPU)FX2N, FX2NC, FX1N, FX1NCMELSEC-FX2N (CPU)FX3U, FX3UC, FX3GMELSEC-FX3UC (CPU)Q02CPU, Q02HCPU

MELSEC-Q (CPU)The corresponding device type differs depending on the communication driver which be used.
For FC6A type, please select MICROSmart (FC6A) (RS232C / 485) driver.
If use OpenNet, MICROSmart, SmartAXIS Pro / Lite (RS232C485) driver, the device type is partiallydifferent. For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
When the IDEC PLC is used, the supported function varies based on the port.
Series Name

Model
FC6A (FC6A-C*****E only)
FC6A (FC6A-C*****J only)

MICROSmart

FC6A (FC6A-D****CEE only)
FC4A*1FC5A*1OpenNet Controller

FC3A*1

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite

FT1A

Serial port

Download,
Upload*3

Port 1 (Internal)

YES

YES

Port 2 to 9

YES

YES*4

Port 1 (Internal)

NO

NOPort 2 to 9

YES

YES*4

Port 1 to 33

YES

YES*4

Port 1YES

YESPort 2YES

YESPort 1YES

YESPort 2YES

YESPort 3 to 7

YES

NO

Port 1YES

YESPort 2YES

YESPort 2YES

NO

Port 3YES

NO*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*2 We tested by GX Developer Version 8*3 User program only
*4 Use WindLDR Ver. 8.6.1 or higher

32-2

Device Monitor

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Overview

1.3

How to Connect when Using the Pass-Through Function

32

Connect the computer and the main unit with an Ethernet cable or a USB cable, and connect the main unit andexternal device with a serial cable.
Main unit
USB cable

External device
Serial cable

Ethernet cable

1.4

Use the Pass-Through Function
The Pass-through function operates under the following conditions:• The main unit is in the Run mode or Monitor mode.
• A communication driver that supports the Pass-through operation.
• In the Project Settings dialog box, on the Communication Driver tab, the Enable Pass-Through check box isselected.
Use the Pass-through Tool if you have the following:• A compertitor's PLC.
• Currently using WindLDR Ver. 5.0* - 6.0*.
For details about Pass-through Tool, refer to the Pass-through Tool Manual.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual32-3

Pass-Through Function

Computer

2 Pass-Through Function Settings Procedure2

Pass-Through Function Settings Procedure
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the settings procedure for the Pass-through function. The Pass-through function can be
configured with WindO/I-NV4 or in System Mode.

2.1

How to Enable the Pass-Through Function in WindO/I-NV4

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Communication Driver tab.

(Function)

3 Select the external device communication from the (Function) to make the Pass-through function is enabled.
The Pass-Through function can only use one of External Device Communication 1, External Device

Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, or External Device Communication 4*1.

4 Under External Device, select the Enable Pass-Through check box.
This option is accessible if the Communication Driver is supported. For details, refer to “1.2 Supported External
Devices” on page 32-2.

5 Click OK.
This concludes the configuration to enable the Pass-through function.

*1 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

32-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Pass-Through Function Settings Procedure

2.2

How to Enable the Pass-Through Function in System Mode on the main unit

32

1 Press the upper-left corner of the main unit screen for three or more seconds.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.

Pass-Through Function

Main unit
Press and hold 3
or more seconds

2 Press System Mode.
The screen changes to the Top Page in the System Mode.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Password Screen is displayed. Select user nameand enter password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 241.

3 Press Main Menu.
The Main Menu screen is displayed.

SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

Run

OfflineMain Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN<<

BRIGHTNESS 31

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

>>

32-5

2 Pass-Through Function Settings Procedure

4 Press Initial Setting.
Main
Menu

---

---

---

InitialSetting

Clock
Setting

OfflineRun

SystemInformation

FileManager

Top Page

Self
Diagnosis

2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

5 Press External Device Communication (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F) or press Ext.
Device (HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P).

Main
Menu

InitialSetting------

System Op.

Initialize

Ext. Device

O/I Link

Communication I/F---------------------

6 Press External Device Communication 1, External Device Communication 2, External Device

Communication 3 or External Device Communication 4*1 (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F) or press Ext. Device 1, Ext. Device 2, Ext. Device 3 or Ext. Device 4 (HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P).
Main
Menu

InitialSetting

Ext.
DeviceExt. Device 1

Ext. Device 2Ext. Device 3Ext. Device 4----------------------------*1 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only

32-6

---

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Pass-Through Function Settings Procedure

7 Press Pass-Through Setting (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F) or press Pass Through(HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P).

InitialSetting

32

Ext.
Device 1

Ext.
DeviceRetry Cycles

Time OutTrans. Wait

Pass-ThroughParameter1

Parameter2

Parameter3

Parameter4

Pass-Through Function

Main
Menu

8 Select the Enable PassThrough check box and press Save (FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F) or SAVE (HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P).

When the setting is saved, "The value was updated." is displayed.
Main
Menu

InitialSetting

Ext.
DeviceExt.
Device 1

Enable PassThroughSave

Cancel

The value was updated.

This concludes the configuration to enable the Pass-through function.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual32-7

3 Important Notes

3

Important Notes
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

• When sending and receiving data with an external device from PLC programming software using the Pass-throughfunction, the Device Link Communication and the Pass-through function communication on the main unit are
performed at the same time, so the data transfer speed of each will slow down.
In the case above, if Device Link Communication between the main unit and the external device is stopped by the
Pass-through Tool, the data transfer speed of downloading or uploading the PLC program via main unit will be
improved. However, "Communication Error" will be displayed on the main unit screen.
• While the WindO/I-NV4 is communicating with the main unit, do not use the Pass-through function to communicate
from the PLC programming software to the external device.
• If the communication via Pass-through fails, change the settings such as Baud Rate, Timeout, Transfer Mode etc on
PLC programming software.
Example:WindLDR
Transfer Mode:

ASCII

Baud Rate:

9600 bps

Timeout:

5000 msec.

• If one of the following problems occurs while using the Pass-through function and a communication error isdisplayed, then reset the power of the main unit.
- The communication cable between the computer and the main unit was disconnected after stopping
communication of the main unit and the external device using the Pass-through Tool.
- The computer was forcibly shut down due to a power loss or other problem• The Pass-through function can only use one of External Device Communication 1, External Device
Communication 2, External Device Communication 3, or External Device Communication 4*1 in theCommunication Driver tab, moreover, the External Device ID set in the Communication Driver Network
tab must be only one.

*1 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

32-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualExternal Memory Devices

Chapter 33

This chapter describes the specifications, functions, and notes to observe when using external memory devices withthe main unit.

133

External Memory Devices

1.1

Supported External Memory Devices
External memory device such as the SD memory card and the USB flash drive are used on the interface of the main
unit. The supported external memory device is different for each model of the main unit.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J,
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F

SD memory card

NO

YES

USB flash drive*1

YES

YES

External Memory Device

1.2

What Can Be Done Using an External Memory Device
The following functions are available when an external memory device is inserted in the interface of the main unit.
(The letters in parentheses are engraved on the back of the main unit.)
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
Functions

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F

HG2G-5T,
HG1G/1P

USB flashUSB flash
SD memory
USB flashUSB flashdrive (USB1) drive (USB2) card (SD) drive (USB2) drive (USB2)

Reference

Screenshot

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Page 7-58
Page 11-28

Alarm Log output

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Page 12-20

Data Log output

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Page 13-18

Reading/writing recipe data

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Page 16-10

Displaying picture files

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Page 2-29

*2

NO

NO

Page 22-7

Playing sound files

YES

NO

YES

Recording video camera images
and microphone sounds.

NO

NO

YES*3*4NO

NOPage 23-1

Playing movie files

NO

NO

YES*3

NO

NO

Page 23-1

Transferring projects

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Page 33-20

PLC programs

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Page 33-35

Copying files

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Page 33-49

*5

*5

NO

YES

YES

Page 33-58

USB Autorun function

YES

YES

USB Popup Screen function

YES*5

YES*5

NO

YES

YES

Page 33-76

Displaying Custom Web Page

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Page 27-16

Configuring MQTT
Communication Settings

YES*6

YES*6

NO

NO

NO

-

*1 USB2.0*2 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only.
*3 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*4 Recording sound function is for HG4G/3G only
*5 Only the port where the USB flash drive that saved the USB autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) is inserted first,
either USB1 or USB2.
*6 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “MQTT Communication” in the Network User's Manual.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-1

External Memory Devices

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1 External Memory Devices

1.3

Specifications of External Memory Devices● SD memory card
Models support SD memory cards with the following specifications:• SD memory cards: max capacity 2 GB. SDHC memory cards: 2 GB to 32 GB.
• Compatible with FAT16 or FAT32 formatting.
Note, SD memory cards with less than 2 GB of capacity must be FAT16 formatted. FAT32 formatted cards cannot
be recognized.
• The maximum size of files that can be read and written is 256 MB.
• File names may be up to 120 characters long. (Includes file extensions.)• File paths may be up to 250 characters long. (Includes file extensions and drive letters.)• Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used for file names and folder names. However, must notcontain the following characters:"*/:<>?\|
Use of IDEC, HG9Z-XMS2 SD memory card (2 GB capacity) is recommended.
Check the IDEC web site for more information about compatible SD memory cards.
● USB flash drive
Models support USB flash drives with the following specifications:• Max capacity 32 GB.
• Compatible with FAT16 or FAT32 formatted USB flash drives.
• The maximum file size that can be read and written is 256 MB.
• File names may be up to 120 characters long. (Includes file extensions.)• File paths may be up to 250 characters long. (Includes file extensions and drive characters.)• Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used for file names and folder names. However, must notcontain the following characters:
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:"#$&'()*/:;<>?\`|~
Two consecutive periods

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:"*/:<>?\|

Check the IDEC web site for more information about compatible USB flash drives.

33-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices

1.4

File structure
When downloading or uploading data using the System Mode on the main unit, or WindO/I-NV4, the folder to be
operated is called the External Memory Device folder. The folder and the file structure of the External Memory Device
folder vary based on the model.

The USB Autorun definition file used by the USB Autorun function is saved in the root directory of the external
memory device. For details about the USB Autorun definition file, refer to “5.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File”
on page 33-65.
Example:External Memory Device(USB flash drive inserted in USB1)
HGDATA01 (External Memory Device folder)

Folder name and File name
/CAPTURE/CAP[date/time].JPG
Date/time format: YYMMDD_hhmmss/ALARMLOG/[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: ALMHTO.CSV, Real time: ALMHTA.CSV/DATALOG/[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: LOGOn.CSV, Real time: LOGAn.CSV/DATALOG/DATA/[user-defined].BIN
Default file name: LOGAn.BIN/OPERATIONLOG/[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: OPLOGO.CSV, Real time: OPLOGA.CSV/RECIPE/[user-defined].CSV
Default file name: RCPn.CSV/PICTURE/[user-defined].BMP, /PICTURE/[user-defined].JPG/SOUND/[user-defined].WAV/WEBPAGE//NVDATA*1/[Project name].ZNV/LDRDATA*1/[Model + port + Station No. + date/time].ZLD*2

Description
Screenshot data
(file name is assigned automatically)
Alarm Log data
Data Log data
(n: Data log channel number)
BIN File(n: Data log channel number)Operation Log data
Recipe data(n: 4 digit sequential number)
Picture files
Sound files
Folders and files are created according to thefile structure specified in Web Page Editor.
ZNV Project FileZLD Project File
Folder to store files required to use TLS/TLS /HGDATA02
hgauto.ini(USB Autorun definition file)Do not tamper a ZNX Project File(.znx), a ZNV Project File(.znv) and a ZLD Project File(.zld). Altered files
cannot be used with main units or PLCs.
Users can create multiple External Memory Device folders for different projects on a single external memory
device. Note, the External Memory Device folder on the external memory device must reside on the root
directory.

*1 Only when project files are uploaded to external memory device*2 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “MQTT Communication” in the Network User's Manual.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-3

33
External Memory Devices■ FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
The External Memory Device folder is created on the USB flash drive. By default, the External Memory Device folder
name is "HGDATA01" and the path delimiter is slash (/). For details, refer to “1.6 Setting the External Memory Device
Folder” on page 33-13.

1 External Memory Devices■ HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P
The location where the external memory folder is created varies based on the model.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:

SD memory card

HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
USB flash drive
By default, the External Memory Device folder name is "HGDATA01" and the path delimiter is backslash (\). For
details, refer to “1.6 Setting the External Memory Device Folder” on page 33-13.
Example: HG5G-V
External Memory Device(SD memory card)
HGDATA01 (External Memory Device folder)

Folder name and File name
\CAPTURE\CAP[date/time].JPG
Date/time format: YYMMDD_hhmmss\ALARMLOG\[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: ALMHTO.CSV, Real time: ALMHTA.CSV\DATALOG\[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: LOGOn.CSV, Real time: LOGAn.CSV\DATALOG\DATA\[user-defined].BIN
Default file name: LOGAn.BIN\OPERATIONLOG\[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
Batch: OPLOGO.CSV, Real time: OPLOGA.CSV\RECIPE\[user-defined].CSV
Default file name: RCPn.CSV\PICTURE\[user-defined].BMP, \PICTURE\[user-defined].JPG\SOUND*2\[user-defined].WAV

Description
Screenshot data
(file name is assigned automatically)
Alarm Log data
Data Log data
(n: Data log channel number)
BIN File(n: Data log channel number)Operation Log data
Recipe data(n: 4 digit sequential number)
Picture files
Sound files
Folders and files are created according to thefile structure specified in Web Page Editor.

\WEBPAGE\\RECORD*3\[Date] \ [Time].AVI*4,\RECORD*3\[Date] \ [Time].MP4*5
Date format: YYYYMMDDTime format: hhmmss

Movie file saved to dated folder(Folder and file name included
automatically)\MOVIE*3\[Custom].AVI*4, \MOVIE*3\[Custom].MP4*5

Movie Files

MOVIE.LST*3

Movie File List

\NVDATA*1\[Project name].ZNV\LDRDATA*1\[Model + port + Station No. + date/time].ZLD

ZNV Project FileZLD Project File

HGDATA02

Do not tamper a ZNV Project File(.znv) and a ZLD Project File(.zld). Altered files cannot be used with mainunits or PLCs.
Users can create multiple External Memory Device folders for different projects on a single external memory
device. Note, the External Memory Device folder on the external memory device must reside on the root
directory.

*1 Only when project files are uploaded to external memory device*2 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only.
*3 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*4 HG5G/4G/3G-V only
*5 HG4G/3G only

33-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices

1.5

Reading/Writing Data

● Using WindO/I-NV4 to read and write to an external memory device inserted in the main unit

This procedure shows how to read and write data to the External Memory Device folder*1 specified for the projectcurrently running on the main unit.
Use either method below to make the connection.
• Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the computer and the Ethernet interface on the main unit.
External Memory Device
Computer

To USB PortA PlugTo USB Interface
USB Cable

To Ethernet Port

Main unit

SD memory card

Mini-B Plug
To Ethernet Interface

USB flash drive

Ethernet Cable

Communication settings
Follow these procedures to configure the communication device and port to allow reading and writing to the external
memory device inserted in the main unit.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm. Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box appears.

2 Select Operator Interface under Communicate with.
3 Select the type of connection under Port, then click OK.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-5

33
External Memory Devices• Connect a USB cable to the USB port on the computer and the USB interface on the main unit.*2

1 External Memory Devices
DownloadingThis procedure shows how to download a specified file into a folder on the external memory device for the currently
running project.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow under Download.
2 Click Files to External Memory Device or Files to External Memory Device while running.
The Open dialog box appears.

■ Files to External Memory Device
This function temporarily stops the main unit and then downloads files to the external memory device inserted in themain unit. The main unit resumes running when files have been downloaded.
■ Files to External Memory Device while runningThis function downloads files to the external memory device inserted in the main unit without stopping the main unit.

3 Specify the file name and click Open.
A confirmation message appears.

If security is enabled for the project on the main unit, a dialog appears for you to enter a user name andpassword. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

4 Click Yes.
The External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box appears and the file download begins.
When the download is complete, a message box appears.

5 Click OK.
6 Click Close on the External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box.

33-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices
UploadingThis procedure shows how to upload specified data from the External Memory Device folder on the external memory
device for the currently running project.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow next to Upload.

33

2 Click Stored Data in External Memory Device.
The Upload Data from External Memory Device dialog box appears.

External Memory Devices

3 Select the items to be uploaded, and then specify the destination folder in the Location box.

Uploadable data is as follows.
• Screenshots• Alarm Log Files• Data Log Files• Operation Log Files• Recipe Files• Picture Files• Sound Files*1• Movie File List*2• Movie Files*2
If security is enabled for the project on the main unit, a dialog appears for you to enter a user name andpassword. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
• Click
to call up the Select a Folder dialog box and specify the destination folder for uploading.
• After starting WindO/I-NV4, screen shots, alarm log data, data log data, and recipe files can be uploaded
from an External Memory Device folder without opening project data.

4 Click OK.
The External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box appears and the data upload begins.
A message box appears when the data upload is complete.

5 Click OK.
6 Click Close on the External Memory Device Maintenance dialog box.

*1 This is applicable for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J and models with an audio interface only.
*2 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-7

1 External Memory Devices● Using WindO/I-NV4 to read and write to an external memory device inserted in the computer

Insert an external memory device*1 into the USB port or memory card slot of your computer, or via a docking station,etc.
SD memory card
Into SD memory card slot

USB flash drive

SD memory card

ComputerUSB flash drive

Into USB port

Via a docking station etc.

Communication settings
To read and write to the external memory device inserted in the computer using WindO/I-NV4, the external memory
device must be specified as the communication device. Configure the communication settings as follows before
downloading or uploading.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm. Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box appears.

2 Under Communicate with, select External Memory Device, then click OK.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

33-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices
DownloadingThis procedure shows how to download the project data to the External Memory Device folder on the external
memory device using WindO/I-NV4.

1 Open the project data to download using WindO/I-NV4.

33

2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the icon above Download.
The Download dialog box appears.

External Memory Devices

3 Click Download.
The Select Drive dialog box appears.

4 Select the external memory device drive, then click OK.
A confirmation message appears.

■ Drive
Specify the computer's drive assigned as the external memory device drive.
■ Network
Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box. This dialog allows you to specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Device Folder
Specify the destination folder for downloading project data.
Clickto call up the Project Settings dialog box. This procedure allows you to change the External Memory Device
folder on the external memory device where the download will be stored.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-9

1 External Memory Devices■ File Type*2
Specify the file format of the project data for transfer to be created.
ZNX (OS, System Software, Project):

A file that contains the operating system, system software, and project data.

ZNV (System Software, Project):

A file that contains the system software and project data.

5 Click Yes.
The Download dialog box appears and the file download begins.
When the download is complete, a message box appears.

6 Click OK.
7 Click Close on the Download dialog box.
UploadingThis procedure shows how to upload the project data from the External Memory Device folder on the external
memory device inserted in the computer, to the computer using WindO/I-NV4.

1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Upload.
The Select External Memory Device folder dialog box appears.

2 Select the external memory device drive, then click OK.
The Upload dialog box appears.

■ External Memory Device folder
Displays the folder specified in the Folder tree described next.
■ FolderSpecify the source folder for uploading the project data.
■ Drive
Specify the computer's drive assigned as the external memory device drive.
■ Network
Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box. This dialog allows you to specify a drive on the network.

*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

33-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices

3 Enter the location to Location, and then click Upload.
The Upload dialog box appears and the file upload begins.
When the upload is complete, a message box appears.

33
External Memory Devices

4 Click OK.
5 Click Close on the Upload dialog box.
A confirmation message appears indicating the project will be opened.

6 Click OK.
The uploaded project opens.
If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Enterthe password for projects created with WindO/I-NV4 Ver. 1.11.4 or earlier using only 4 to 15 uppercase
letters and numbers.
The password to enter varies based on the check box setting of the Use Password to open a Project
found under the Options tab in the Security dialog box.
When this check box is selected, enter the password for Use Password to open a Project.
When this check box is cleared, enter the password for the user account assigned to the Administrator
security group.
For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
● Manipulating files using the file management functions provided with the computer OS
It is possible to use Explorer or any other program provided with the Windows OS to replace the recipe data, pictureand sound files that the main unit uses.
Insert the external memory device into the computer and save the new file(s) using the same name as the existing
files in each folder under the External Memory Device folder.
For the picture files that can be used with the main unit, refer to Chapter 2 “1.4 Available Image Files” on page 2-20.
For the sound files that can be used with the main unit, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Sound Files” on page 2-37.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-11

1 External Memory Devices● External memory device writing timing
If the write timing setting for Alarm Log, Data Log, and Operation Log data is set to Real Time, the data is stored in
the file output buffer once.
The writing timing from the file output buffer to the external memory device*1 is as follows.
• Within 3 minutes of an output event to the external memory device*1.
• The value of the HMI Special Relay LSM18*2 or the HMI Special Relay LSM20*3*4 changes to 1.
• When switching to the System Mode.
• When downloading/uploading project data.
In the following events, the main unit writes the data in the file output buffer to the external memory
device once, and then moves on to the next process. This creates a processing delay which can cause
WindO/I-NV4 to raise a communication error when downloading or uploading a project. If a
communication error occurs, try downloading or uploading the project again.
• When data exists in the file output buffer• When attempting to switch to the System Mode while reading/writing to the external memory device.
• When downloading or uploading project data.
● SD memory card access status
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Models HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F have an SD Memory Card Access Lamp (LED).
The SD Memory Card Access Lamp (LED) indicates the access status to the SD memory card. This status can also beread by monitoring HMI Special Internal Relay LSM21.
The SD Memory Card Access Lamp states and status descriptions of the HMI Special Internal Relay LSM21 are as
follows.
SD memorycard accessstatusSD Memory
Card Access
Lamp state

LSM21
state

Status generation conditions

OFF

0

No SD memory card is inserted.
The inserted SD memory card is not supported.
The inserted SD memory card is unformatted.

Slow blink(ON/OFF every
0.5 seconds)

0

When an SD memory card is inserted.
When the power is switched ON with an SD memory
card inserted (slow blink -> ON).

1

When HMI Special Internal Relay LSM20 changes to 1.
(slow blink -> OFF)

Read/write inprogress

Rapid blink(ON/OFF every
0.2 seconds)

1

Reading/writing data to the inserted SD memory card.
(Note, the LED stays lit when reading or writing to the
SD memory card while using the project transfer
function, or waiting for the operating mode tochange.)StandbyON

1

A usable SD memory card is inserted and can be reador written to.

Read/write accessstoppedRecognizing SD
memory card
Read/write accessstanding by.

Operation

The SD
memory card
can beremoved.

Do not remove
the SD
memory card.

SD Memory Card Access Lamp states
OperationState

At power up

OFF -> slow blink -> Lit

SD memory card is inserted.
HMI Special Internal Relay LSM20 changed to 1.

Lit -> slow blink -> OFF

Data is read/written to the SD memory card (screenshot data, etc.) Lit -> rapid blink -> Lit (reading/writing completed)*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only
*4 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F

33-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices

1.6

Setting the External Memory Device Folder
The External Memory Device folder*1 on the external memory device can be renamed using WindO/I-NV4.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.

33

The Project Settings dialog box appears.

Use only alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numbers (0 to 9) and the maximum is 8 characters.

3 Click OK.
It is not possible to change folder names and file names other than the External Memory Device folder.

The External Memory Device folder is named “HGDATA01” if project data has never been downloaded to themain unit.

*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-13

External Memory Devices

2 On the External Memory Device tab, enter the desired name in the External Memory Device Folder text box.

1 External Memory Devices

1.7

Deleting Files on the External Memory Device
Files in the External Memory Device folder of the external memory device*1 inserted in the main unit during operation
can be deleted using WindO/I-NV4.

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

2 On the External Memory Device tab, select the Remove Files check box.
3 Specify the range of files to delete by checking the appropriate items.

■ All Screenshots
Deletes all files in the CAPTURE folder.
■ All Alarm Log files
Deletes all files in the ALARMLOG folder.
■ All Data Log files
Deletes all files in the DATALOG folder.
■ All Operation Log files
Deletes all files in the OPERATIONLOG folder.

4 In Trigger Device Address, specify the bit device or the bit number of the word device to serve as the condition fordeleting files.

Click
to display the Tag Editor. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-72.

5 Click OK.
The online function in WindO/I-NV4 can also be used to delete files on the external memory device. For
details, refer to Chapter 29 “4 Clear” on page 29-26.
*1 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

33-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices

1.8

Formatting the External Memory Device
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Always format the external memory device before using it.

33

The external memory device inserted in the main unit can be formatted with the WindO/I-NV4 online function.
Using the WindO/I-NV4, the following external memory devices are accessible.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: SD memory card
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:

USB flash drive

1 On the Online tab, in the MICRO/I group, click Format.
A confirmation message appears warning that existing data will be deleted.

• In Communication Settings, Communicate with must be set to MICRO/I in advance, and Port
must be set to USB in advance. For details on how to configure these settings, refer to “Communication
settings” on page 33-5.
• If a project has been saved on the external memory device with security enabled, a dialog appears foryou to enter a user name and password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.
• If formatting on the main unit takes more than 60 seconds, the formatting will be canceled. If formatting
on the main unit does not complete successfully, format the external memory device with the file
management function provided with the computer operating system.

2 Click Yes.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and formatting begins.

3 Click Close.
After completing a format of the external memory device, the External Memory Device folder is automaticallycreated when going to the Run Mode.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-15

External Memory Devices● Formatting an external memory device using the Online Function in WindO/I-NV4

1 External Memory Devices● Formatting external memory device under the System Mode on the Main Unit
External memory device inserted in the main unit can be formatted by using the menu in the System Mode on the mainunit.

1 Insert the external memory device into the main unit.
External memory device
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

2 Press and hold the upper left corner of the main unit screen for 3 or more seconds.
The Maintenance Screen appears.
Main unit
Press and hold 3
or more seconds

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

3 Press the System Mode.
The main unit switches to the Top Page in the System Mode.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

If security is enabled for the project on the main unit, a dialog appears for you to enter a user name andpassword. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.

4 Press the Main Menu.
The Main Menu appears.

IDEC HG G SERIESSYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

Run

OfflineMain Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN<<

33-16

BRIGHTNESS 31

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual>>

1 External Memory Devices

5 Press the File Manager (HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F) or Ext.Mem.Device (HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P).
For the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, File Manager appears.
For the HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P, proceed to step 7.
Main
Menu

---

---

33

---

Clock
Setting

OfflineRun

SystemInformation

FileManager

Top Page

Self
Diagnosis

External Memory Devices

InitialSetting2010/OCT/14/THU 14:57:17

6 Press the source DRIVE: and select an external memory device.
Select SD Card for an SD memory card and USB memory for a USB flash drive.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
USB memory

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS＜DIR＞

HGDATA01---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD ENT

COPY

DEL

7 Press FORMAT.
A confirmation message appears.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
USB memory

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS＜DIR＞

HGDATA01---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD ENT

COPY

DEL

• For the HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P, only FORMAT is displayed in the center of the screen.
• If formatting on the main unit takes more than 60 seconds, the formatting will be canceled. If formatting
on the main unit does not complete successfully, format the external memory device with the file
management function provided with the computer operating system.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-17

1 External Memory Devices

8 Press YES.
The main unit starts formatting the external memory device.
When formatting is completed, “The format completed.” is displayed.

Format USB Flash Drive ?

YES

1.9

NO

Removing an external memory device
Remove an external memory inserted in the main unit after performing the following operations.
Model

External Memory Device

Operation

USB flash drive inserted in USB1

After setting the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM20 to 1,
check that the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM21 is 0.

USB flash drive inserted in USB2

After setting the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM18 to 1,
check that the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM19 is 0.

SD memory card

After setting the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM20 to 1,
check that the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM21 is 0.

USB flash drive

After setting the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM18 to 1,
check that the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM19 is 0.

USB flash drive

After setting the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM18 to 1,
check that the value of the HMI Special Relay LSM19 is 0.

FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F

HG2G-5F, HG1G/1P

While writing the data to the external memory device, the value of HMI Special Relay LSM24 or LSM25
changes to 1. Never turn the power off to the main unit or remove the external memory device whilewriting to it. Otherwise, the data on the external memory device may be destroyed. For details, refer to
Chapter 35 “HMI Special Relay (LSM)” on page 35-2.

33-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 External Memory Devices

1.10 Precautions

flash drive*1 inserted in USB1 or an SD memory card*2 and HMI Special Data Register LSD33 for a USB flash
drive*3 are set with the error status. For details about the error, refer to Chapter 35 “HMI Special Data Register(LSD)” on page 35-13. Manually delete the files by using a computer or the File Manager function.
• If an unusable external memory device is inserted, the following error message appears.
SD memory card: This SD memory card not available.*2
USB flash drive:

This USB flash drive isn't available (USB1)*1
This USB flash drive isn't available (USB2)*1
This USB isn't available.

• If your computer does not have an SD memory card slot, a docking station is required to read/write to the SD
memory card.
• Multiple USB flash drives cannot be used at the same time.
• Do not connect the USB flash drive to the main unit through a USB hub.
• The message “Stopping external memory” appears while reading or until writing stops.
To resume reading or writing to the external memory device, re-insert it.
• Altering folders and files in the External Memory Device folder on the external memory device will make theexternal memory device unusable in the main unit and WindO/I-NV4.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-19

33
External Memory Devices• For projects that use external memory devices, always insert the external memory device before turning the main
unit on.
• The maximum number of screenshots that can be captured can be set in HMI Special Data Register LSD65.
• External memory devices have a limitation on the number of writes allowed.
Regularly backup data on the external memory device.
• Never turn the power of the main unit off remove the external memory device while reading/writing to it.
Otherwise, the data on the external memory device may be destroyed. Should this occur, reformat the external
memory device.
• When a read or write failure occurs with the external memory device, HMI Special Data Register LSD42 for a USB

2 Project Transfer Function

2

Project Transfer Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

2.1

What Can Be Done with the Project Transfer Function
The project transfer function uploads or downloads project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File) between the main
unit and an external memory device inserted in the main unit.
The Project Transfer function supports the project which name is used alphanumeric characters only.

● Downloading the project

Create a project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File) for project transfer and save it on an external memory

device*2. And then, download the ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File saved on the external memory device to themain unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Computer
Create Project
for Transfer

Main unit

Download
USB flash drive

ZNX Project File (.znx)*1
ZNV Project File (.znv)

ZNX Project File (.znx)*1
ZNV Project File (.znv)● Uploading a project

Uploads the project used to operate the main unit and saves it to an external memory device*2.
Main unit

External Memory Device
SD memory card
UploadUSB flash drive

ZNV Project File(.znv)

When using the project transfer function and a project is uploaded, the project name varies based on themodel.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:
project.znv
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
project name + file extension (.znv)*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

33-20

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Project Transfer Function

2.2

Project Transfer Procedures
The following methods can be used to upload or download project between the main unit and an external memory
device inserted in the main unit.

33• Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands
 For details, refer to “2.4 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data” onpage 33-25.
• Using the File Manager in the System Mode on the main unit*1
 For details, refer to “2.5 Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer Project Data” on page 33-26.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-21

External Memory Devices• Using the USB Autorun function
 For details, refer to Chapter 33 “5 USB Autorun Function” on page 33-58.

2 Project Transfer Function

2.3

Converting Project for Transfer
Project must be converted to dedicated data for transfer in order to download project data to the main unit using the
project transfer function.
Use the following procedure to create project data for transfer using an external memory device*1.
The Project Transfer function supports the project which name is used alphanumeric characters only.

1 Insert an external memory device*1 in the computer.
Insert an external memory device*1 into the USB port or memory card slot of your computer, or via a docking station,etc.
SD memory card
Into SD memory card slot

USB flash drive

SD memory card

ComputerUSB flash drive

Into USB port

Via a docking station etc.

2 Open the project to transfer using WindO/I-NV4.
To use the Project Transfer function, select the project which name is used alphanumeric characters only.

3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.

When the project has not been saved after it was opened, a save confirmation message is displayed.
Click the OK button to save the project and display the Download dialog box.
Click on the Cancel button to return to the editing screen without saving the project.

*1 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

33-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Project Transfer Function

4 Check that Communication Settings is External Memory Device, and then click the Download button.
The Select Drive dialog box is displayed.

33
External Memory Devices

1. If Communication Settings is not External Memory Device, click the Change button.
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.
2. Select External Memory Device for Communicate with, and then click the OK button.

5 Specify the drive for the external memory device and click the OK button.
A confirmation message is displayed.

■ Drive
Specify the drive of the computer assigned to the external memory device.
■ Network
Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box. You can specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Device Folder
Specify the folder where the project data is to be downloaded.
Click thebutton to display the Project Settings dialog box. You can specify an External Memory Device folder as
the download destination.
■ File Type*2
Specify the file format of the project data for transfer to be created.
ZNX (OS, System Software, Project):

A file that contains the operating system, system software, and project data.

ZNV (System Software, Project):

A file that contains the system software and project data.

*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-23

2 Project Transfer Function

6 Click the Yes button.
A Download dialog box is displayed and the project data is now being saved.
When this process is complete, a message is displayed.

7 Click the OK button.
8 Click the Close button in the Download dialog box.
The project data for transfer is created in the External Memory Device folder on an external memory device.
For details about the created data folder and file structure, refer to “1.4 File structure” on page 33-3.
If the folder or file structure on the External Memory Device folder is modified, the main unit andWindO/I-NV4 will not be usable.

33-24

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Project Transfer Function

2.4

Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data
Allocate a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the project transfer function to themain unit.

33

 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “5 Key Button” on page 7-72.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “6 Multi-Button” on page 7-111.

● Download

1 Create a project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File) for project transfer and save it on an external memory
device*2.

For details, refer to “2.3 Converting Project for Transfer” on page 33-22.

2 Insert an external memory device*2 in the main unit.
External Memory Device*2
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

3 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Download Project under Data
Transfer on the Key Browser.

● Upload

1 Insert an external memory device*2 in the main unit.
External Memory Device*2
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

2 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Upload Project under Data
Transfer on the Key Browser.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-25

External Memory Devices

 For details, refer to Chapter 11 “6 Multi-Command” on page 11-39.

2 Project Transfer Function

2.5

Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer Project Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Download

1 Create a project (ZNV Project File) for project transfer and save it on an external memory device.
For details, refer to “2.3 Converting Project for Transfer” on page 33-22.

2 Insert an external memory device into the main unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

3 Press the upper-left edge of the main unit screen for three seconds or more.
The maintenance screen is now displayed.
Main unit
Press and hold3 or more seconds

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

4 Press System Mode.
The main unit displays the Top Page in the System Mode.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

When downloading a project configured with security to the main unit, the password screen is displayed.
Select a user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

33-26

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Project Transfer Function

5 Press Main Menu.
The main menu is displayed.

33

IDEC HG G SERIESSYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

OfflineExternal Memory Devices

Run

Main Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN
BRIGHTNESS 31<<>>

6 Press File Manager.
The file manager is displayed.

Main
Menu

---

---

---

InitialSetting

Clock
Setting

OfflineRun

SystemInformation

FileManager

Top Page

Self
Diagnosis

2010/OCT/14/THU 14:57:17

7 Press DRIVE: for the transfer source and select the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
This example screen shows when an SD memory card is selected.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSHGDATA00
HGDATA01
HGDATA02

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOADENTWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

33-27

2 Project Transfer Function

8 Select the ZNV Project File to download.
This example screen shows when the ZNV Project File is “HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV” that has been saved in the External
Memory Device folder “HGDATA01”.
1. Press ▼ to select HGDATA01 and then press ENT.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSHGDATA00
HGDATA01
HGDATA02

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

1

COPY

DEL

2

2. Press ▼ to select NVDATA and then press ENT.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT.
..
NVDATAPICTURE
SOUND

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

FILTER▼---DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

ALL
FILTERS▲▲---RELOAD

ENT

1

COPY

DEL

2

The NVDATA folder is automatically created when the External Memory Device folder is created. For
details, refer to Chapter 33 “1.4 File structure” on page 33-3.
3. Press ▼ to select HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS.
..
HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV

<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

33-28

▼

▲

▲

RELOADENTWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

2 Project Transfer Function

9 Press DRIVE: for the transfer destination and select MICRO/I.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS

<DIR>
<DIR>

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

33

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

When MICRO/I is selected with DRIVE: in the file manager, MICROI.ZNV is always displayed. This is not
the project name downloaded to the main unit.

10 Press COPY.
A process confirmation message is displayed.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS.
..
HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV

<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

11 Press YES.
ZNV Project File(.znv) download starts.
When the download finishes, the results are displayed.

Copy This File ?
HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV

Clear Keep Devices

YES

NO

Select the Clear Keep Devices check box to clear keep devices after the project data is downloaded.
However, when project data that changes the system software or settings of the data storage area isdownloaded, the keep devices are always cleared.
If you download the project data, Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log data is erased
regardless of the Clear Keep Devices check box.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-29

External Memory Devices.
..
HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV---

2 Project Transfer Function

When the ZNV Project File to download is configured with security, the password screen is displayed. Selecta user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

12 Press Ack to close the results screen.

You are returned to the Top Page of System Mode.
Result
The following function completed

Function

Download MICRO/I Project

Ack● Upload

1 Insert the external memory device into the main unit.
External Memory Device
Main unit

SD memory card

USB flash drive

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

2 Press the upper-left edge and the upper-right edge of the main unit screen simultaneously.
The maintenance screen is displayed.
Main unit
Press and hold 3
or more seconds

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

3 Press System Mode.
The main unit displays the Top Page in the System Mode.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

When downloading a project configured with security to the main unit, the password screen is displayed.
Select a user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

33-30

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Project Transfer Function

4 Press Main Menu.
The main menu is displayed.

33

IDEC HG G SERIESSYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

OfflineExternal Memory Devices

Run

Main Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN
BRIGHTNESS 31<<>>

5 Press File Manager.
The file manager is displayed.
Main
Menu

---

---

---

InitialSetting

Clock
Setting

OfflineRun

SystemInformation

FileManager

Top Page

Self
Diagnosis

2010/OCT/14/THU 14:57:17

6 Press DRIVE: for the transfer source and select MICRO/I.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSMICROI.ZNV---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

When MICRO/I is selected with DRIVE: in the file manager, MICROI.ZNV is always displayed. This is not
the project name downloaded to the main unit.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-31

2 Project Transfer Function

7 Press DRIVE: for the transfer destination and select the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
This example screen shows when an SD memory card is selected.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSMICROI.ZNV---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

8 Select the save destination for the project to upload.

1. Press▼

Folder (001) is selected in this example.
to move the cursor to the transfer destination on the SD memory card.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSMICROI.ZNV---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

2. Press ▼ to select 001 and then press ENT.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSMICROI.ZNV---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

1

33-32

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

2

DEL

2 Project Transfer Function

9 Press COPY.
A process confirmation message is displayed.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSDRIVE:
SD card33

FORMAT.
..

External Memory Devices

MICROI.ZNV

---

<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

10 Press YES.

The project upload starts.
When the upload finishes, the results are displayed.

Copy This File ?
MICROI.ZNV

YES

NO

MICROI.ZNV is shown on the confirmation message, but the project file name after uploading is “Project
name + Extension (.znv)”.

11 Press Ack to close the results screen.

You are returned to the Top Page of System Mode.
Result
The following function completed

Function

Upload MICRO/I Project

Ack

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-33

2 Project Transfer Function

2.6

Precautions• An error message is displayed if the project upload or download fails.
For details, refer to Chapter 37 “1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen” on page 37-1.
• While the project transfer function is running, the main unit stops processing other functions.
• If a file exists with the same name in the save destination when uploading a project, the file is overwritten with the
uploaded file without displaying an overwrite confirmation message.
• When using the project transfer function, make the project name alphanumeric characters. Note, the file namemust not contain the following characters:"*/:<>?\|• While running the project transfer function using a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command, if a data transfer
function (project transfer, PLC program transfer, or file copy) is initiated, the only function that will work is thecurrently running function. If two or more data transfer functions are configured to a Multi-Button or MultiCommand, only the data transfer function displayed at the top of the function list on the parts property dialog box
will run.
• When running the project transfer function, the external memory device must have enough free space equivalent
to the size of the ZNX Project File(.znx)*1 or ZNV Project File(.znv). Check that there is sufficient free space on theexternal memory device that will be used with the project transfer function. If the device does not have sufficient
free space, the project upload or download may fail.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

33-34

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

3

PLC Program Transfer Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

3.1

33

Supported PLCs

Manufacturer

Supported system(CPU unit)

Series name
OpenNet Controller

FC3A
FC4A
FC5A

MICROSmart

IDEC

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite

Communication driver• Serial Interface:
OpenNet, MICROSmart, SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (RS232C/485)• Ethernet Interface:
OpenNet, MICROSmart, SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (Ethernet)

FC6A(FC6A-C*****E/-C*****EJ only)• Serial Interface:
MICROSmart(FC6A)(RS232C/485)• Ethernet Interface:
MICROSmart(FC6A)(Ethernet)

FC6A(FC6A-D****CEE
only)

MICROSmart(FC6A)(Ethernet)

FT1A

OpenNet, MICROSmart, SmartAXIS Pro/Lite (Ethernet)

The corresponding device type differs depending on the communication driver which be used.
For FC6A type, please select MICROSmart (FC6A) (RS232C / 485), MICROSmart (FC6A) (Ethernet)
driver.
If use OpenNet, MICROSmart, SmartAXIS Pro / Lite (RS232C485), OpenNet, MICROSmart,
SmartAXIS Pro / Lite (Ethernet) driver, the device type is partially different. For details, refer to the
WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
The ports and functions supported are as follows.
Series Name
OpenNet Controller

Model
FC3A
FC4A

FC5A

MICROSmart

FC6A(FC6A-C*****E/-C*****EJ only)

FC6A(FC6A-D****CEE only)

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite

FT1A

Serial port

Download, Upload*1

Serial port 1

YES

Serial port 2

YES

Serial port 1

YES

Serial port 2

YES

Ethernet port

YES

Serial port 1

YES

Serial port 2

YES

Serial port 3 to 7

NO

Ethernet port 1

YES

FC6A-PH1 (HMI-Ethernet port)

YES

Serial port 1

YES

Serial port 2 to 9

NO

Ethernet port 1

YES

Ethernet port 2

YES

FC6A-PH1 (HMI-Ethernet port)

YES

Serial port 1 to 33

NO

Ethernet port

YES

Serial port 2

NO

Serial port 3NO*1 Ladder Program only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-35

External Memory Devices

PLCs that support the PLC program transfer function are listed below.

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

3.2

What Can Be Done using the PLC Program Transfer Function
The PLC program transfer function is used to upload or download PLC program (ZLD Project File) between a PLC
connected to the main unit and an external memory device inserted in the main unit.

● Downloading a PLC program

Download a PLC program (ZLD Project File) saved on an external memory device*1 to a PLC connected to the main unit.

You must create a ZLD Project File(.znv) for transfer.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Computer

Main unit

PLC

USB flash drive
Create PLC Program
for Transfer

Download

ZLD Project File(.zld)ZLD Project File(.zld)● Uploading a PLC program
Upload a PLC program from the PLC connected to the main unit and save the ZLD Project File(.zld) to an external
memory device*1.
Main unit

External Memory Device
SD memory card

PLC

Save

UploadUSB flash drive

ZLD Project File(.zld)

When a PLC program is uploaded using the PLC program transfer function, the file name is “Model
name_Port number_Station number_Year month day hours minutes seconds + File extension (.zld)”.
The port number varies based on the interface used to upload with HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P. The displayed item is
as follows:
SERIAL1(RS232C): C1,

3.3

SERIAL1(RS422/485): C2,

Ethernet: ET

PLC Program Transfer Procedures
The following methods can be used to upload or download a PLC program between a PLC connected to the main unit
and an external memory device inserted in the main unit.
• Using the USB Autorun function
 For details, refer to Chapter 33 “5 USB Autorun Function” on page 33-58.
• Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands
 For details, refer to “3.5 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer PLC Programs” onpage 33-38.
• Using the File Manager in the System Mode on the main unit*2
 For details, refer to “3.6 Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer PLC Programs” on page 33-40.

*1 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

33-36

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

3.4

Creating ZLD Project File
PLC program must be converted to ZLD Project File(.zld) for transfer in order to download PLC program to the PLC
connected to the main unit using the PLC program transfer function.
Use the following procedure to create a ZLD Project File(.zld) using WindLDR.

33

to the right of Save As on the application menu and click PLC Program.

External Memory Devices

2 Click▼

1 Open the PLC program to to be transferred using WindLDR.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter a file name and click Save.

When using a PLC program with the PLC program transfer function, always enter the file name asalphanumeric characters.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-37

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

3.5

Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer PLC Programs
Allocate a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the PLC program transfer function to
the main unit.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “5 Key Button” on page 7-72.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “6 Multi-Button” on page 7-111.
 For details, refer to Chapter 11 “6 Multi-Command” on page 11-39.

● Download

1 Convert a PLC program file for PLC program transfer.
For details, refer to “3.4 Creating ZLD Project File” on page 33-37.

2 Save it to an external memory device*1.
External Memory Device
Computer

SD memory cardSave
USB flash drive

ZLD Project File(.zld)

3 Insert an external memory device*1 into the main unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit

PLC

USB flash drive

4 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Download PLC Program
under Data Transfer on the Key Browser.

*1 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

33-38

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 PLC Program Transfer Function● Upload

1 Insert an external memory device*1 into the main unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit

33

PLC

2 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Upload PLC Program under
Data Transfer on the Key Browser.

*1 Only USB flash drive for FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-39

External Memory Devices

USB flash drive3 PLC Program Transfer Function

3.6

Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer PLC Programs
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Download

1 Convert a PLC program file for PLC program transfer.
For details, refer to “3.4 Creating ZLD Project File” on page 33-37.

2 Save it to an external memory device.
External Memory Device
Computer

SD memory cardSave
USB flash drive

ZLD Project File(.zld)

3 Insert an external memory device into the main unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

4 Press the upper-left edge of the main unit screen for three seconds or more.
The maintenance screen is displayed.
Main unit
Press and hold3 or more seconds

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

33-40

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

PLC

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

5 Press System Mode.
The main unit displays the Top Page in the System Mode.
Maintenance

33

System Mode
Device Monitor

When downloading a project configured with security to the main unit, the password screen is displayed.
Select a user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

6 Press Main Menu.
The main menu is displayed.

IDEC HG G SERIESSYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

Run

OfflineMain Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN
BRIGHTNESS 31<<>>

7 Press File Manager.
The file manager is displayed.

Main
Menu

---

---

---

InitialSetting

Clock
Setting

OfflineRun

SystemInformation

FileManager

Top Page

Self
Diagnosis

2010/OCT/14/THU 14:57:17

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-41

External Memory Devices

Adjust Brightness

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

8 Press DRIVE: for the transfer source and select the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
This example screen shows when an SD memory card is selected.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSHGDATA01
PLOGRAM01.zld

<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲
▲

▼

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

9 Select the ZLD Project File to download.
This example screen shows when the ZLD Project File is “PLOGRAM01.ZLD”.
Press ▼ to select “PLOGRAM01.ZLD”.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSHGDATA01
PLOGRAM01.zld

<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

10 Press DRIVE: for the transfer destination and select PLC.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSHGDATA01
PLOGRAM01.zld

<DIR>

---

DRIVE:PLC

FORMAT

PLC.ZLDDIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

When PLC is selected with DRIVE: in the file manager, “PLC.ZLD” is always displayed. This is not the
program file name for the PLC connected to the main unit.

33-42

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

11 Press COPY.

A process confirmation message is displayed.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSDRIVE:
PLC

33

FORMAT

PLC.ZLD<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

12 Specify the communication port of the main unit and the slave number or the External Device ID, and then press
YES. Specify the Slave Number when selecting serial interface as the communication port of the main unit, andspecify the External Device ID when selecting Ethernet interface.
The ZLD Project File download starts.
When the download finishes, the results are displayed.
Comm.I/F:
Copy This File ?

SERIAL 1

Communication port

PLOGRAM01.zld
Slave Number:
0

YES

0

0

Slave number orExternal Device ID

NO

When downloading a ZLD Project File to a PLC configured with a password, the PLC password screen isdisplayed. Enter the password.

13 Press Ack to close the results screen.

You are returned to the Top Page of System Mode.
Result
The following function completed

Function

Download PLC Program

Ack

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-43

External Memory Devices

HGDATA01
PLOGRAM01.zld---

3 PLC Program Transfer Function● Upload

1 Insert an external memory device into the main unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit

PLC

USB flash drive

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

2 Press the upper-left edge of the main unit screen for three seconds or more.
The maintenance screen is displayed.
Main unit
Press and hold3 or more seconds

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

3 Press System Mode.
The main unit displays the Top Page in the System Mode.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

When downloading a project configured with security to the main unit, the password screen is displayed.
Select a user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

4 Press Main Menu.
The main menu is displayed.

IDEC HG G SERIESSYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

Run

OfflineMain Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN<<

33-44

BRIGHTNESS 31

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual>>

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

5 Press File Manager.
The file manager is displayed.
Main
Menu

---

---

---

Clock
Setting

OfflineRun

SystemInformation

FileManager

Top Page

Self
Diagnosis

33
External Memory Devices

InitialSetting2010/OCT/14/THU 14:57:17

6 Press DRIVE: for the transfer source and select PLC.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:PLC

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS

PLC.ZLD---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

When PLC is selected with DRIVE: in the file manager, “PLC.ZLD” is always displayed. This is not the
program file name for the PLC connected to the main unit.

7 Press DRIVE: for the transfer destination and select the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
This example screen shows when an SD memory card is selected.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:PLC

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS

PLC.ZLD---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOADENTWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

33-45

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

8 Select the save destination for the PLC program to upload.

1. Press▼

Folder (001) is selected in this example.
to move the cursor to the transfer destination on the SD memory card.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:PLC

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS

PLC.ZLD---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

2. Press ▼ to select “001” and then press ENT.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:PLC

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS

PLC.ZLD---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

HGDATA01
001
002

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

1

COPY

DEL

2

9 Press COPY.
A process confirmation message is displayed.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:PLC

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS

PLC.ZLD---DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT

.
..

<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

33-46

▼

▲

▲

RELOADENTWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

10 Specify the communication port of the main unit and the slave number or the External Device ID, and then press
YES. Specify the Slave Number when selecting serial interface as the communication port of the main unit, andspecify the External Device ID when selecting Ethernet interface.
The PLC program upload starts.
When the upload finishes, the results are displayed.

33

Comm.I/F:SERIAL 1

Communication port

PLC.ZLD
Slave Number:
0

YES

0

0

Slave number orExternal Device ID

NO• “PLC.ZLD” is displayed in the confirmation message, but the ZLD Project File name after uploading is“Model name_Port number_Station number_Year month day hours minutes seconds + File extension(.zld)”.
• When downloading a ZLD Project File to a PLC configured with a password, the PLC password screen isdisplayed. Enter the password.

11 Press Ack to close the screen.

You are returned to the Top Page of System Mode.
Result
The following function completed

Function

Upload PLC Program

Ack

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-47

External Memory Devices

Copy This File ?

3 PLC Program Transfer Function

3.7

Precautions• An error message is displayed if the PLC program upload or download fails.
For details, refer to Chapter 37 “1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen” on page 37-1.
• To create a ZLD Project File, the following version of WindLDR is required.
Manufacturer

Series name
OpenNet Controller

IDEC

Supported system (CPU unit)

WindLDR version

FC3A
FC4A

Ver.6.30 or later

FC5A
MICROSmart

SmartAXIS Pro/Lite

FC6A (FC6A-C*****E/-C*****EJ only)

Ver.8.0.0 or later

FC6A (FC6A-D****CEE only)

Ver.8.6.0 or later

FT1A

Ver.8.0.0 or later• Stops the operation of the main unit and PLC while the PLC program transfer function is running. After the PLC
program upload or download is completed, the main unit returns to the mode immediately before running the PLC
program transfer function and the PLC automatically starts running.
• The PLC program transfer function cannot be run when the main unit is in Offline Mode. Switch to Run Mode,
Monitor Mode, or System Mode before running the PLC program transfer function.
• If a file exists with the same name in the save destination when uploading a PLC program, the file is overwrittenwith the uploaded file without displaying an overwrite confirmation message.
• While running the PLC program transfer function using a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command, if a datatransfer function (project transfer, PLC program transfer, or file copy) is initiated, the only function that will work is
the currently running function. If two or more data transfer functions are configured to a Multi-Button or MultiCommand, only the data transfer function displayed at the top of the function list on the parts property dialog box
is run.

33-48

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 File Copy Function

4

File Copy Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

4.1

33

What Can Be Done with the File Copy Function

Copying from SD memory card to USB flash drive*1, from USB flash drive to SD memory card*1, or fromUSB flash drive to USB flash drive*2

Copy files between an SD memory card and a USB flash drive*1, or between USB flash drives*2 inserted in the mainunit.
SD memory card

USB flash drive
Main unit

Copy
File
USB flash drive

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

Internally copy files on an SD memory card*1
Internally copy files on an SD memory card inserted in the main unit.
Main unit
Copy

SD memory card

File

File
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

Internally copy files on a USB flash driveInternally copy files on a USB flash drive inserted in the main unit.
Main unit
USB flash drive

Copy

File

File
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

When the main unit is under the Run Mode, HMI Special Internal Relay LSM23 is 1 while the File Copy
function is executed.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-49

External Memory Devices

The file copy function is used to copy files between or within the external memory devices inserted in the main unit.

4 File Copy Function

4.2

File Copy Operating Procedures
The following methods can be used to copy files between or within the external memory devices (between an SD

memory card and a USB flash drive*1, between USB flash drives*2, and within an SD memory card*1 or a USB flash
drive) inserted in the main unit.
• Using the USB Autorun function
 For details, refer to Chapter 33 “5 USB Autorun Function” on page 33-58.
• Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands
 For details, refer to “4.3 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Copy Files” on page 33-51.
• Using the File Manager in the System Mode on the main unit*1
 For details, refer to “4.4 Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer Project Data” on page 33-52.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

33-50

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 File Copy Function

4.3

Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Copy Files
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Allocate a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the file copy function to the mainunit.
 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “5 Key Button” on page 7-72.

External Memory Devices

 For details, refer to Chapter 7 “6 Multi-Button” on page 7-111.
 For details, refer to Chapter 11 “6 Multi-Command” on page 11-39.

1 Insert an external memory device into the main unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card*1

Main unit

USB flash drive

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

2 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with File Copy under Data Transfer
in the Key Browser.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33

33-51

4 File Copy Function

4.4

Using File Manager on the Main Unit to Transfer Project Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1 Insert an external memory device into the main unit.
External Memory Device
SD memory card

Main unit

USB flash drive

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

2 Press the upper-left edge of the main unit screen for three seconds or more.
The maintenance screen is displayed.
Main unit
Press and hold3 or more seconds

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

3 Press System Mode.
The main unit displays the Top Page in the System Mode.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

When downloading a project configured with security to the main unit, the password screen is displayed.
Select a user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 24-1.

33-52

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 File Copy Function

4 Press Main Menu.
The main menu is displayed.

33

IDEC HG G SERIESSYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

OfflineExternal Memory Devices

Run

Main Menu

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN
BRIGHTNESS 31<<>>

5 Press File Manager.
The file manager is displayed.
Main
Menu

---

---

---

InitialSetting

Clock
Setting

OfflineRun

SystemInformation

FileManager

Top Page

Self
Diagnosis

2010/OCT/14/THU 14:57:17

6 Press DRIVE: for the copy source and select the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
This example screen shows when an SD memory card is selected.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSHGDATA01

<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOADENTWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

33-53

4 File Copy Function

7 Select the file to copy.
In this example, the sound file (AUDIO1.WAV) saved in the External Memory Device folder (HGDATA01) is selected.
1. Press ▼ to select “HGDATA01” and then press ENT.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERSHGDATA00
HGDATA01
HGDATA02

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

1

COPY

DEL

2

2. Press ▼ to select “SOUND” and then press ENT.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT.
..
NVDATAPICTURE
SOUND

<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>
<DIR>

FILTER▼---DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

ALL
FILTERS▲▲---RELOAD

ENT

1

COPY

DEL

2

3. Press ▼ to select “AUDIO1.WAV”.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS.
..
AUDIO2.WAV
AUDIO1.WAV

<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:MICRO/I

FORMAT

MICROI.ZNV

DIRECTION

▲

▲

33-54

▼

▲

▲

RELOADENTWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

4 File Copy Function

8 Press DRIVE: for the transfer destination and select the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
This example screen shows when a USB flash drive is selected.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS

<DIR>
<DIR>

DRIVE:
USB memory

33

FORMAT

External Memory Devices.
..
AUDIO2.WAV
AUDIO1.WAV

---

<DIR>
<DIR>

001
002
DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

DEL

COPY

9 Select the save destination for the file to copy.

1. Press▼

Folder (002) is selected in this example.
to move the cursor to the copy destination on the USB flash drive.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS.
..
AUDIO2.WAV
AUDIO1.WAV

<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:
USB memory

FORMAT

<DIR>
<DIR>

001
002
DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

2. Press ▼ to select “002” and then press ENT.
File
Manager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS.
..
AUDIO2.WAV
AUDIO1.WAV

<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:
USB memory

FORMAT

<DIR>
<DIR>

001
002
DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

1WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

2

33-55

4 File Copy Function

10 Press COPY.

A process confirmation message is displayed.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS.
..
AUDIO2.WAV
AUDIO1.WAV

<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:
USB memory

FORMAT

<DIR>
<DIR>

.
..
DIRECTION

▲

▲

▼

▲

▲

RELOAD

ENT

COPY

DEL

11 Press YES.

The file is being copied.
Copy This File ?
AUDIO1.WAV

YES

NO

When complete, the file is shown in the save destination.
FileManager

Main
Menu
DRIVE:
SD card

FORMAT--FILTERALL
FILTERS.
..
AUDIO2.WAV
AUDIO1.WAV

<DIR>
<DIR>

---

DRIVE:
USB memory

FORMAT.
..
AUDIO1.WAV

<DIR>
<DIR>

DIRECTION

▲

▲

33-56

▼

▲

▲

RELOADENTWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

COPY

DEL

4 File Copy Function

4.5

Precautions

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-57

33
External Memory Devices• When the main unit is under the Run Mode, the maximum size per single file that can be read or written with theFile Copy function is 256 MB.
• Access to the file being copied is not allowed while the file copy function is running. Therefore, data may be
missing when copying files used by the running project such as log data. When copying a file used by the running
project, use File Manager on the main unit under the System Mode.
• While running the file copy function using a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command, if a data transfer function(project transfer, PLC program transfer, or file copy) is initiated, the only function that will work is the currently
running function. If two or more data transfer functions are configured to a Multi-Button or Multi-Command, only
the data transfer function displayed at the top of the function list on the parts property dialog box is run.

5 USB Autorun Function

5

USB Autorun Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

5.1

Overview of the USB Autorun Function
The USB Autorun function automatically displays a menu screen from which the user can execute predefinedcommands when a USB flash drive is inserted into the main unit.
Main unit

USB flash drive

USB Autorun Function Menu Screen
Confirmation
Production line A - replace
Display program

Copy Display program to USB
flash drive

Replace sound data

Copy PLC program to USB
flash drive

Production line A - replace
PLC program

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

Run All

CancelPress the command to execute.

• This allows operators to change project and PLC programs without using a computer.
• These defined processes are called commands, and the file that contains the details of the command andmenu screen is called the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini).
• A USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) must be stored on the root of the USB flash drive to use the USB
Autorun function.
• FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J operates on either USB1 or USB2 depending on whichever port that has USB flash
drive inserted first with USB autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) saved inside.
• For the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, an SD memory card can be used as thedestination for saving ZNV Project File(.znv), ZLD Project File(.zld), and for copying files.
The commands that can be executed with the USB Autorun function are as follows.
● Downloading a project

Downloads a ZNX Project File(.znx)*2 or a ZNV Project File(.znv) saved on a USB flash drive or an SD memory card*1
to the main unit.

ComputerUSB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)
USB flash drive

Save

Main unit
DownloadSave
SD memory card

ZNX Project File (.znx)*2
ZNV Project File (.znv)

ZNX Project File (.znx)*2
ZNV Project File (.znv)

When the download is complete, the main unit will reset and start running from the beginning of the project that was
just downloaded.
Refer to “2 Project Transfer Function” on page 33-20 for important notes and limitations.
*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

33-58

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 USB Autorun Function● Uploading a project

Uploads the project used to operate the main unit and saves it to a USB flash drive or an SD memory card*1.
ComputerUSB flash drive

Save

Main unit
Upload33
USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

ZNV Project File(.znv)

When the upload is complete, the main unit will reset and start over at the beginning of the project.
Refer to “2 Project Transfer Function” on page 33-20 for important notes and limitations.
To edit a ZNV project file (.znv) saved in an external memory device, use WindO/I-NV4 to upload the project
data saved in the USB flash drive to a computer and open it. For details, refer to “Uploading” on page 33-10.
● Downloading a PLC program (ZLD Project File)

Downloads a ZLD Project File(.zld) saved on a USB flash drive or an SD memory card*1 to the PLC connected to themain unit.

ComputerUSB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)
Save

PLC

Main unit

USB flash drive

DownloadSave
SD memory card

ZLD Project File(.zld)ZLD Project File(.zld)

Refer to “3 PLC Program Transfer Function” on page 33-35 for compatible PLCs, important notes, andlimitations.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-59

External Memory Devices

SD memory card

5 USB Autorun Function● Uploading a PLC program
Uploads the PLC program from the PLC connected to the main unit and saves it as ZLD Project File(.zld) to a USB flash
drive or an SD memory card*1.
Computer

PLC

Main unit

USB flash drive

Save

Save

UploadSD memory card
USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

ZLD Project File(.zld)

Refer to “3 PLC Program Transfer Function” on page 33-35 for compatible PLCs, important notes, andlimitations.
● Copy files
Files can be copied between or within the external memory device inserted in the main unit.
USB flash drive -> SD memory card
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Copies files saved on the USB flash drive to the SD memory card inserted in the main unit.
Computer

Main unit

USB flash drive
Save

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

SD memory card

Copy

File

File

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

SD memory card -> USB flash drive
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Copies files saved on the SD memory card inserted in the main unit to the USB flash drive.
Computer

Main unit

USB flash drive
Save

Copy

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

File*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

33-60

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

SD memory card

5 USB Autorun Function
USB flash drive -> USB flash drive
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

• Copies files saved on the USB flash drive to the USB flash drive inserted in the main unit.
ComputerUSB flash drive
Save

File

Main unit

USB2

File

USB1

USB flash drive

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J

• Copies files saved on the USB flash drive inserted in the main unit to the USB flash drive.
ComputerUSB flash drive
Save

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

Main unit
Copy USB2

File

USB1

USB flash drive

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J

Copy in SD memory card
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Copies files saved on the SD memory card inserted in the main unit in the SD memory card.
ComputerUSB flash drive

Main unit

SD memory card

Save

Copy
USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F
File

File

Copy in USB flash drive
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Copies files saved on the USB flash drive inserted in the main unit in the USB flash drive.
ComputerUSB flash drive

Main unit

USB flash drive

Save

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

Copy

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J
HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F

File

File

Refer to “4 File Copy Function” on page 33-49 for important notes and limitations.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-61

33
External Memory Devices

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

Copy

5 USB Autorun Function

5.2

USB Autorun Function Configuration Procedure● Executing commands using the USB Autorun function
Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

2 On the Autorun tab, select the Enable USB Autorun check box and click OK.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.10 Autorun Tab” on page 4-67.

• If the USB Autorun function of the main unit is not enabled, the menu screen will not be displayed, even
if a USB flash drive is inserted into the main unit.
• Once the USB Autorun function of the main unit is enabled, the function will remain enabled until either a
project with the Enable USB Autorun check box unchecked is downloaded, or the function is disabled
via the System Mode.
When enabling the USB Autorun function using the main unit, on the Top Page in the System Mode, press
Main Menu, Initial Setting, System Operation (for HG4G/3G/2G-5F) or System Op. (for HG2G-5T,
HG1G), and then press Autorun.

3 Create a USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) and save it on the root of the USB flash drive.
For details, refer to “5.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” on page 33-65.
ComputerSave

USB Autorun
definition file(hgauto.ini)

33-62

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

USB flash drive5 USB Autorun Function

4 Prepare the necessary files and store them on the USB flash drive or SD memory card.
If the necessary files are stored on an SD memory card, make sure to insert it into the main unit before using it for
uploading or copying.
The necessary files are as follows.
• To download a project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File)

33

ComputerExternal Memory Devices

Create a ZNX Project File(.znx)*1 or a ZNV Project File(.znv).
For details, refer to “2.3 Converting Project for Transfer” on page 33-22.
• To download an IDEC PLC program
Create a ZLD Project File(.zld).
For details, refer to “3.4 Creating ZLD Project File” on page 33-37.
• To copy files
Create the file to be copied.
USB flash drive
Save

SD memory card

ZNX Project File (.znx)*1
ZNV Project File (.znv)

ZLD Project File(.zld)For download

File

For copy

Operating Procedure

1 Turn the power of the main unit on.
2 Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
The menu for the USB Autorun function appears.
Main unit
USB flash drive

If the menu screen is not displayed, refer to Chapter 37 “3.7 Problem Occurs with USB Autorun Function” onpage 37-14 to resolve the problem, then re-insert the USB flash drive.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-63

5 USB Autorun Function

3 Press the command to execute.
The command executes.
Confirmation
Production line A - replace
Display program

Copy Display program to USB
flash drive

Replace sound data

Copy PLC program to USB
flash drive

Production line A - replace
PLC program

Run All

CancelPress the command to execute.

• Pressing Run All causes all commands defined in the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) to executeone by one.
• If security is enabled for the project on the main unit, a dialog appears for you to enter a user name andpassword. For details, refer to “5.4 USB Autorun Function Security” on page 33-74.
• When uploading or downloading IDEC PLC program to a password-protected PLC, a dialog appears foryou to enter the password.
Do not remove the USB flash drive or SD memory card while command is executing.

4 When the command finishes executing, a screen appears indicating the execution result.
Press Ack to close the execution result screen and display the menu screen.
Result
The following function completed
Production line A - replace
Function Display programAck

If a command executes with a button (except the Run All), the menu screen is displayed after pressing Ack
on the execution result dialog.

33-64

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 USB Autorun Function

5.3

Creating a USB Autorun Definition File
The menu screen that appears when a USB flash drive inserted in the main unit is defined in the USB Autorun
definition file.
The USB Autorun definition file is created using the following methods.

33• Created with the text editor
 Refer to “Created using the text editor” on page 33-65.

● Created using the text editor
You create this file using Notepad or any commercially available text editor. Fill in the items in each section and savethe file with the name “hgauto.ini”.
The USB Autorun definition file has these 3 sections.
Enter the items and definitions for each section.
[AUTORUN] section (required)
Specify the number of command items, enable/
disable the buttons, and the display language to use.

[AUTORUN]
item = 5
button_command = Enablebutton_runall = Enablelanguage = English[COMMAND_1]
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD
src_path = "B:\NV4DATA\HG_PROJECT.ZNV"
reset_keep_device = Enable[COMMAND] section (required)
Specify the command to execute and its parameters.
Create buttons to execute the number of commands
specified in the [AUTORUN]: section from[COMMAND_1] to [COMMAND_5], in that order.

[COMMENT] section
Enter text to display, as necessary, at the bottom of
the menu screen.

plc_run*1=Enable
title = "Production line A - replace Display program"···[COMMAND_5]
command = LDR_UPLOAD
dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Program"
src_port = COM1
src_net_no = 0
title = "Copy PLC program to USB flash drive"[COMMENT]
comment = "Press the command to execute."

Confirmation[COMMAND_1]
execution button

Production line A - replace
Display program

Copy Display program to USB
flash drive[COMMAND_4]
execution button[COMMAND_2]
execution button

Replace sound data

Copy PLC program to USB
flash drive[COMMAND_5]
execution button[COMMAND_3]
execution button

Production line A - replace
PLC program

Displays text enteredin [COMMENT]

Press the command to execute.

Run All

CancelButton to closethe menu screen

Execution button for all commands*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-65

External Memory Devices• Created with the USB Autorun definition file creation tool
 Refer to USB Autorun Definition File Creation Tool manual.

5 USB Autorun Function[AUTORUN] section■ item (required)
Specify the number of commands used from 1 to 5. The USB Autorun function will fail to execute if a value other than
1 to 5 is specified.
■ button_command
Specify whether to enable/disable the execution buttons for [COMMAND_1] to [COMMAND_5].
Enable: enables the button.
Disable: disables the button.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the main unit assumes “Enable”.
■ button_runall
Specify whether to enable/disable the execution buttons for Run All.
Enable: enables the button.
Disable: disables the button.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the main unit assumes “Enable”.
■ language
Specify the language to use for the button labels and messages.
Japanese:Japanese (Shift-JIS)
European:Western (ISO 8859-1)
Chinese:
Simplified Chinese (GB2312)
Taiwanese:
Traditional Chinese (BIG5)
Korean:Hangul (KSC5601)
Central European: Central European (ANSI1250)
Baltic:Baltic (ANSI1257)
Cyrillic:
Cyrillic (ANSI1251)
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the main unit assumes “Japanese”.

[COMMAND] section
For the HG2G-5T, HG1G, only the USB flash drive is available.
■ command (required)
Specify the command to execute.
PRO_DOWNLOAD: Download a project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File)
PRO_UPLOAD:
Upload a project
LDR_DOWNLOAD: Download a PLC program (ZLD Project File)LDR_UPLOAD:
Upload a PLC program
FILE_COPY:
Copy a file
The items required differ for each command except for the “title” item.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

33-66

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 USB Autorun Functioncommand = PRO_DOWNLOAD■ src_path (required)

Specify the path (250 or less characters) where the ZNX Project File*1 or the ZNV Project File is to be downloaded.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:■ reset_keep_device
Specify whether to initialize the keep devices or not when the project file is downloaded. However, when project datathat changes the settings of the data storage area is downloaded, the keep devices are always initialized.
Enable:Disable:Initializes the keep devices.
Does not initialize the keep devices.
If you download the project data, Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log data is erased
regardless of the reset_keep_device.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the main unit assumes "Enable".

■ plc_run*2
Specify whether or not to automatically run the ladder program after downloading the ZNV project file.
Enable:Disable:Runs automatically.
Does not run automatically.

command = PRO_UPLOAD■ dst_path (required)
Specify the path to the folder (250 or less characters) where the uploaded project will be saved.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Use "A:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB1 and "B:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB2.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
Use "A:\" for an SD memory card and "B:\" for a USB flash drive.
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
Use "B:\" for a USB flash drive.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-67

33
External Memory Devices

Use "A:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB1 and "B:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in
USB2.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
Use "A:\" for an SD memory card and "B:\" for a USB flash drive.
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: Use "B:\" for a USB flash drive.

5 USB Autorun Functioncommand = LDR_DOWNLOAD■ src_path (required)
Specify the path (250 or less characters) where the ZLD Project File is to be downloaded.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Use "A:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB1 and "B:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB2.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
Use "A:\" for an SD memory card and "B:\" for a USB flash drive.
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
Use "B:\" for a USB flash drive.
■ dst_port (required)
Specify the port name of the main unit to which the PLC to download from is connected. For details about the port
name, refer to Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.
COM1:

COM2:

ETHER:The name of the serial interface varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG1G/1P*1: COM(RS232C)
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
COM1
HG2G-5T:
SERIAL1(RS232C)
The name of the serial interface varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG1G/1P: COM(RS422/485)
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V:
COM2(RS232C) or COM2(RS422/485)
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
COM2
HG2G-5T:
SERIAL1(RS422/485)
Ethernet interface (LAN)■ dst_net_no (required when specifying the destination as a slave number or External Device ID)
If the communication interface that connects the PLC for downloading is the serial interface, specify the slave number.
If the communication interface is the Ethernet interface, specify the External Device ID. Specify the same number set
as the slave number or External Device ID for the PLC.
■ dst_plc_ip (required when specifying the destination as an IP address)
Specify the IP address of the download destination PLC.
Example: dst_plc_ip = 192.168.0.1■ dst_plc_port
Specify the port number of the download destination PLC.
Example: dst_plc_port = 2101
When specifying the destination as an IP address and this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, themain unit assumes that the value is "2101". This item is not required when specifying the destination as aslave number or External Device ID.

*1 Only special product of HG1P is equipped with a serial interface (RS232C).

33-68

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 USB Autorun Functioncommand = LDR_UPLOAD■ dst_path (required)
Specify the path to the folder (250 or less characters) where the uploaded PLC program will be saved.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Use "A:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB1 and "B:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB2.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
Use "A:\" for an SD memory card and "B:\" for a USB flash drive.
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
Use "B:\" for a USB flash drive.

COM1:

COM2:

ETHER:The name of the serial interface varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG1G/1P*1: COM(RS232C)
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
COM1
HG2G-5T:
SERIAL1(RS232C)
The name of the serial interface varies based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG1G/1P: COM(RS422/485)
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V:
COM2(RS232C) or COM2(RS422/485)
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
COM2
HG2G-5T:
SERIAL1(RS422/485)
Ethernet interface (LAN)■ src_net_no (required when specifying the destination as a slave number or External Device ID)
If the communication interface that connects the PLC for uploading is the serial interface, specify the slave number. If
the communication interface is the Ethernet interface, specify the External Device ID. Specify the same number set as
the slave number or External Device ID for the PLC.
■ src_plc_ip (required when specifying the destination as an IP address)
Specify the IP address of the upload source PLC.
Example: src_plc_ip = 192.168.0.1■ src_plc_port
Specify the port number of the upload source PLC.
Example: src_plc_port = 2101
When specifying the destination as an IP address and this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, themain unit assumes that the value is "2101". This item is not required when specifying the destination as aslave number or External Device ID.

*1 Only special product of HG1P is equipped with a serial interface (RS232C).

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-69

External Memory Devices■ src_port (required)
Specify the port name of the main unit to which the PLC to upload from is connected. For details about the port name,refer to Chapter 4 “Interface Configuration” on page 4-37.

33

5 USB Autorun Functioncommand = FILE_COPY■ src_path (required)
Specify the path (250 or less characters) of a source file or folder to copy.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Use "A:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB1 and "B:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB2.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
Use "A:\" for an SD memory card and "B:\" for a USB flash drive.
• If a file name is specified as the source path name, the specified file is copied.
If a folder name is specified, all of the files and subfolders contained in the folder, and all of the files inthe subfolders, are copied.
• The subfolders can be copied up to five levels.
• To prevent copying the subfolders and the files contained in the subfolders, HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM30 must be set to 1 before executing the copy.
• To stop copying files during the copy operation, write 1 to HMI Special Internal Relay LSM31. However, it
will continue to copy the file until it is finished then it will stop copying.
■ dst_path (required)
Specify the destination path in 250 or less characters.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: Use "A:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB1 and "B:\" for a USB flash drive inserted in USB2.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F:
Use "A:\" for an SD memory card and "B:\" for a USB flash drive.
Common items■ titleEnter a title for the button label. The maximum number is as follows.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 2 lines of 26 characters (total 52 characters)
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P: 2 lines of 14 characters (total 28 characters)• A line feed will automatically be added and it can be added where desired. When added in a desired location, \n will
be inserted automatically and is thus calculated as 2 single-byte characters.
• When using a semicolon (;), backslash (\), or double quotations ("), an escape character (\) will be automaticallyinserted before those characters and will thus be calculated as 2 single-byte characters.

[COMMENT] section■ comment
Enter a message shown at bottom of the menu screen. The maximum number is as follows.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F: 6 lines of 54 characters (total 324 characters)
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P:
3 lines of 29 characters (total 87 characters)• A line feed will automatically be added but can be added where desired. When added in a desired location, \n will
be inserted automatically and is thus calculated as 2 single-byte characters.
• When using a semicolon (;), backslash (\), or double quotations ("), an escape character (\) will be automaticallyinserted before those characters and will thus be calculated as 2 single-byte characters.

Notes on comments
To add comments to the USB Autorun definition file, use a semicolon (;).
All text after the semicolon (;) and up to the line feed will be treated as a non-executable comments.

Restrictions• The maximum number of characters per line is 512 single-byte characters including line feed codes.
All the text on the line will be ignored if there are more than 512 single-byte characters on the line.
• Each item must be described as a single line. If a line feed occurs before the end of the description, all characters
after the line feed are ignored.
• The maximum size of the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) is 512 KB. The file cannot be used if it exceeds
this limit.
• Only line feed codes of the format generally supported by Windows (CR+LF) are supported. If any other format isused, the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) will fail to run properly.

33-70

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 USB Autorun Function

Sample definition file and explanation
Sample definition; sample hgauto.ini(1)[COMMAND_1]
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD(2)

src_path = "B:\HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV"
reset_keep_device = Enable
plc_run=Enable
title = "Production line A - replace Display program"[COMMAND_2]
command = FILE_COPY

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

33

; number of items; enable individual command buttons: enable the "Run All" button.
; use English; download a ZNV Project File; source path; initialize the keep devices; run a ladder program after downloading a ZNV project file; button label

src_path = "B:\Error.wav"; copy a file; source path

dst_path = "A:\HGDATA01\SOUND"
title = "Replace sound data"; destination path
; button label[COMMAND_3]
command = LDR_DOWNLOAD; download a ZLD Project Filesrc_path = "B:\LDRDATA\LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD"
dst_port = COM1
dst_net_no = 0
title = "Production line A - replace PLC program"[COMMAND_4]
command = PRO_UPLOAD; source path; destination port number; destination slave number; button label

dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project"
title = "Copy Display program to USB flash drive"; upload a project; destination path
; button label[COMMAND_5]
command = LDR_UPLOAD; Upload a PLC program

dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Program"
src_port = COM1
src_net_no = 0
title = "Copy PLC program to USB flash drive"[COMMENT]
comment = " Press the command to execute."; destnation path; source port number; source slave number; button label; Message shown at bottom of screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-71

External Memory Devices[AUTORUN]
item = 5
button_command = Enablebutton_runall = Enablelanguage =English

5 USB Autorun Function
Explanation(1) This definition file displays five command execution buttons on the menu screen displayed by the USB Autorun
function. It also enables the Run All button. All button labels and messages are displayed in English.
[AUTORUN]

Defines the number of commands to use and details about the menu
screen.

item = 5

Specifies that five commands will be used.

button_command = Enable

Enables execution buttons for each command from [COMMAND_1]
to [COMMAND_5].

button_runall = Enable

Enables the Run All button.

language = English

Displays all button labels and messages in English.

(2) Downloading a ZNV Project File from a USB flash drive to the main unit.
[COMMAND_1]

Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_1].
This is the first command that executes when Run All is pressed.

command = PRO_DOWNLOAD

Executes “Download a project (ZNV Project File)”.

src_path = "B:\HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV"

Downloads the ZNV Project File “HG3G_DEMO_1.ZNV” saved on theUSB flash drive (B:) to the main unit.

reset_keep_device = Enable

Initializes the keep devices.

plc_run=Enable

Run a ladder program after downloading a project (ZNV ProjectFile).

title = "Production line A - replace Display
program"

Displays the text “Production line A - replace Display program” as
the button label.

(3) Copying a sound file from a USB flash drive to an SD memory card.
[COMMAND_2]

Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_2].
This is the second command that executes when Run All ispressed.

command = FILE_COPY

Executes “File Copy”.

src_path = "B:\Error.wav"
dst_path = "A:\HGDATA01\SOUND"

Copies the sound file “Error.wav”, saved on the root directory of theUSB flash drive (B:), to the “SOUND” folder under “HGDATA01” on
the SD memory card (A:) inserted in the main unit.

title = "Replace sound data"

Displays the text “Replace sound data” as the button label.

(4) Downloading a ZLD Project File from the USB flash drive to the PLC connected to the main unit.
[COMMAND_3]

Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_3].
This is the third command that executes when Run All is pressed.

command = LDR_DOWNLOAD

Executes “Download a PLC program (ZLD Project File)”.

src_path = "B:\LDRDATA\LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD"
dst_port = COM1
dst_net_no = 0
title = "Production line A - replace PLC program"

33-72

Downloads the ZLD Project File “LDR_PROGRAM.ZLD” stored in the“LDRDATA” folder of the USB flash drive (B:) to the PLC (slave
number 0) connected to the COM1 port of the main unit.
Displays the text “Production line A - replace PLC program” as the
button label.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 USB Autorun Function(5) Uploading a project to a USB flash drive.
Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_4].
This is the fourth command that executes when Run All is pressed.

command = PRO_UPLOAD

Executes “Upload a project”.

dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project"

Uploads the project used to operate the main unit and saves it as
the ZNV Project File in the folder “Uploaded_Project” on the USB
flash drive (B:).

title = "Copy Display program to USB flash drive"

Displays the text “Copy Display program to USB flash drive” as the
button label.

(6) Uploading a PLC program to a USB flash drive.
[COMMAND_5]

Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_5].
This is the fifth command that executes when Run All is pressed.

command = LDR_UPLOAD

Executes “Upload a PLC program”.

dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Program"

Uploads the PLC program running on the PLC (slave number 0)
connected to the COM1 port of the main unit, and saves it as the
ZLD Project File in the folder “Uploaded_Program” on the USB flash
drive (B:).

src_port = COM1
src_net_no = 0
title = "Copy PLC program to USB flash drive"

Displays the text “Copy PLC program to USB flash drive” as the
button label.

(7) Displays messages below the menu screen for the USB Autorun function.
[COMMENT]

Defines the number of commands to use and details about themenu screen.

comment = "Press the command to execute."

Displays the text “Press the command to execute.” below the menu
screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

33-73

33
External Memory Devices[COMMAND_4]

5 USB Autorun Function

5.4

USB Autorun Function Security
If security has been enabled for the project in the main unit, the main unit displays a password entry dialog box when
the USB Autorun function runs.

Password
Enter the appropriate password
for Data Transfer Function

▲ ▼

User

********
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

BS

Q

W

E

R

T

Y

U

I

O

P CLR

123
A
abc

S

D

F

G

H

J

K

L CAN

!?# Z

X

C

V

B

N

M

ENT

Select the user name from the security group that has command execution permissions, enter the password, andpress ENT.
● Execution privileges by security groups
The commands that can be executed differ depending on the security group.
Security Group

CommandAdministrator

Operator

ReaderDownloading a project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File)

YES

NO

NO

Uploading a project

YES

NO

NO

Downloading a PLC program (ZLD Project File)

YES

NO

NO

Uploading a PLC program

YES

NO

NO

*2 or USB2*1 to SD memory card*2 or USB1*1)

YES

YES

NO

Copying files (SD memory card*2 or USB1*1 to USB flash drive*2 or USB2*1)

YES

YES

YES

Copying files (USB flash drive■ Example 1: If these two commands are used in the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini).
Downloading a project (ZNX Project File*1 or ZNV Project File)
Copying files (SD memory card*2 to USB flash drive*2)
The security group of user accounts required to execute these commands is given below.
Downloading a project:

Administrator

File copying (SD memory card*2 to USB flash drive*2):

Administrator, Operator, or Reader

Pressing the Run All button:

Administrator

The password for the command with the highest security level listed in the USB Autorun definition file(hgauto.ini) must be entered to execute all commands by pressing the Run All button. In the example
above, a user account from the Administrator security group is required.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

33-74

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 USB Autorun Function■ Example 2: If the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) only contains the file copy command (SDmemory card*2 to USB flash drive*2)
A user account from the Administrator, Operator, or Reader security group is required.

If operator presses CAN instead of entering a password, no commands are executed and the menu screen
closes. To re-execute the USB Autorun function, insert the USB flash drive again.

33
External Memory Devices*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-75

6 USB Popup Screen Function

6

USB Popup Screen Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The USB Popup Screen function displays a specific screen by simply inserting a USB flash drive in the main unit.
This provides an easy way to display a message when the operator inserts a USB flash drive.

6.1

Automatically Displaying a Popup Screen when a USB Flash Drive is Inserted● Configuration Procedure

1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click the Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.

2 On the Autorun tab, select the Open Popup Screen when USB flash drive is inserted check box.
3 Specify the Screen Number of the Popup Screen to display, and the Coordinates, then click OK.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.10 Autorun Tab” on page 4-67.

33-76

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

6 USB Popup Screen Function● Operating Procedure
Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Main unit
USB flash drive

33
External Memory Devices

The Popup Screen appears.

Main unit

Popup Screen

USB flash drive was inserted.

If security is enabled for the Popup Screen that is displayed by the USB Popup Screen function, a dialog
appears for you to enter a user name and password. For details, refer to “5.4 USB Autorun Function
Security” on page 33-74.
When the USB Popup Screen function is enabled, if the USB flash drive contains a definition file (hgauto.ini)
for use with the USB Autorun function, both functions will appear on the menu screen.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual33-77

6 USB Popup Screen Function

33-78

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 34

Peripherals

This chapter describes the functions and operation of the main unit when using peripheral devices, and how toconnect them.

1

Printer
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Peripherals

1.1

Supported Printers
The following printers can be used.
Control codes/Manufacturer/Standard
PictBridge

Supported printers
Printers certified with the PictBridge logo

Always test any printer not listed in the above chart before using it.

1.2

Functions Available with the PrinterThese functions are available when a printer is connected to the main unit.
• Printing screenshots Refer to Chapter 7 “4 Print Button” on page 7-56, and Chapter 11 “4 Print Command” on page 11-26.
• Printing alarm logs (Batch) Refer to Chapter 12 “Alarm Log Function” on page 12-1.

1.3

Connecting a Printer to a Main unit
Connect the USB interface (USB1) on the main unit and the USB port on the printer with a USB cable.
Printer

Main unit
To USB interface(USB1)

Mini-B plug

To USB port

USB cable

A plug

HG5G-V HG4G-V HG3G-V HG2G-V
HG4G HG3G HG2G-5F• Do not disconnect the cable between the main unit and printer while printing.
• Do not use a USB hub when connecting to the printer with a USB cable.
• Printed images may appear differently depending on the printer used. Always check the image byprinting an actual image.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

34

34-1

1 Printer1.4

Setting and Monitoring the Printer● Setting the PrinterWhen printing, specify printer settings such as; paper size and ink color on the Printer tab of the Project Settings
dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.8 Printer Tab” on page 4-65.
• If the printer does not support the paper size selected on the Printer tab in the Project Settings dialog
box, printing is performed with the paper size selected in the printer's settings.
When the edge of the data is not printed, enable No Trimming and Bordered in the printer's settings.
The color cannot be configured. To print in monochrome, configure the print color on the printer that isused.
• When connecting the main unit to a printer, an error may occur on the printer side as an unsupported
device, but data is sent that satisfies the PictBridge standard when printing, so it can be printed correctly.

● Monitoring the PrinterTo monitor the status of the printer, use the System Area.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “System Area 2” on page 4-34.
■ Printer busy
When the printer is printing, bit 3 at the system area address number +3 will turn ON.
■ Printer timeout error
If an error occurs while the printer is printing, bit 9 at the system area address number +2 will turn ON.

34-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 35

Internal Devices

This chapter describes internal devices.
The main unit includes an internal HMI device to control HMI functions, and control device*1 for control functions.

1
1.1

Bit Devices
HMI Device Addresses
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

SymbolR/W

FT2J/1J,
HG2J/1J

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Base

HMI Internal Relay

LM

R/W

0 to 4095

0 to 2047

10

HMI Keep Relay

LK

R/W

Variable

10

LTC

R

0 to 31

10

HMI Timer Contact
*2

LEX

R

0 to 77

8

*2

LEY

R/W

0 to 77

8

HMI Temporary Relay

LBM

R/W

HMI Expansion Input (Bit)*3

LIR

0 to D16

HMI Expansion Output (Bit)*3

LQ

R/W

0 to 1

16

HMI Special Internal Relay

LSM

R/W

Digital Input (Bit)

Digital Output (Bit)

0 to 255

0 to 127

0 to 127

0 to 95

1010R/W is an abbreviation of Read/Write. R/W indicate that both reading and writing are possible, while R
indicates that only reading is possible.
■ HMI Internal Relay (LM)Bit devices used internally on the main unit.
■ HMI Keep Relay (LK)
Bit devices used internally on the main unit. The value of this device can be set to 0 by clearing the project data
download option or online function, or it becomes 0 if the backup battery is drained. The maximum number of HMI
Keep Register depends upon the number set in WindO/I-NV4. For details, refer to Chapter 15 “Minimum andMaximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses” on page 15-2.
■ HMI Timer Contact (LTC)
Bit devices that can be changed to 1 in value of device switched by the Timer from Parts. It can store 32 addresses.
■ Digital Input (LEX), Digital Output (LEY)
Digital input/output relay for expansion module connected to HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “How to use Digital I/O Modules” in the MICRO/I Hardware Manual.
■ HMI Temporary Relay (LBM)
Bit devices used internally on the main unit. The value of this device switches between screens and text groups anduser accounts, and it becomes 0 if the screen is reset.
■ HMI Expansion Input (LI), HMI Expansion Output (LQ)
Input or output bit devices used with HG1P. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Function Keys” in the MICRO/I Hardware
Manual. LIC to LID and LQ0 to LQ1 are reserved areas.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only
*2 HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-1

Internal Devices

Address Number Range
Internal Device Name

35

1 Bit Devices■ HMI Special Relay (LSM)
These relays perform the following special operations. The number of device addresses supported vary based on themodel.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: 128
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: 96
Yes: Supported, No: Not supported or out of range, (blank): Reserved
DeviceAddress

Function

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

LSM0

Always set to 1.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM1

When the default screen is displayed after the power turned ON or when theBase Screen swicthed, the value of this bit is 1 only on the second scan.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or
resetting the display screen.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM2

When the default screen is displayed after the power turned ON or whenthe Base Screen swicthed, the value of this bit is 1 only on the first scan.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or
resetting the display screen.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM3

When the default screen is displayed after the power turned ON or whenthe Base Screen swicthed, the value of this bit is 0 only on the first scan.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or
resetting the display screen.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM4

Alternates between 0 and 1 with each scan.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM5

When Popup Screen is opened, the value of this bit is 1 only on the first scan.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM6

While touch panel is pressed, the value of this bit is 1.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM7

Alternates between 0 and 1 each time data is read (read scan) from all theexternal device addresses being used by External Device Communication 1.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM8

When the power is turned ON, the value of this bit changes to 1. Whenswitching to another screen from the default screen or when switchingtext group or user account, then the value changes to 0.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM9

When value changes from 0 to 1, the backup data stored in flash
memory is restored. When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until
the main unit is reset or 0 is written.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM10

When switched from 0 to 1, the current backlight setting and the data
for HMI Keep Relays and HMI Keep Registers configured in the Data
Storage Area are transferred to the flash memory. Once LSM10switches to 1, it does not change to 0 until the main unit recycles
power or 0 is written to LSM10.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM11

When the default screen gets displayed after the power turned ON orwhen the Base Screen gets switched, the values of all external device
addresses in use are read first. Then the bit changes from 0 to 1. The
bit remains 1 until the screen gets switched to another screen. It also
operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting thedisplay screen.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM12

When Popup Screen is closed, the value of this bit is 1 only on the first
scan.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM13

Value becomes 0 when Popup Screen is opened, and then changes
from 0 to 1 after the values of all external device addresses being usedby that Popup Screen are read.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM18

When value changes from 0 to 1, access to USB flash drive*4 is
stopped. The access state can be checked with the value of LSM19.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the main unit isreset or 0 is written.
If access is stopped using this device address, the USB flash drive*4
will not be accessed until the main unit is turned off or the USB flash
drive*4 is reinserted.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM19

Bit is 1 during USB flash*4 access. When 0, the USB flash*4 can beremoved.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM14 to 17

Reserved*4 USB flash drive inserted in USB2 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J

35-2

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Devices

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

LSM20

Access to the external memory device*5 stops when this bit is switchedfrom 0 to 1. The access state can be checked with the value of LSM21.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the main unit is resetor 0 is written.
If access is stopped using this device address, the external memory
device*5 will not be accessed until the main unit is turned off or theexternal memory device*5 is reinserted.

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSM21

Bit is 1 during external memory device*5 access. When 0, the external
memory device*5 can be removed.

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSM22

This is the Operation Log function. When data in excess of the amountthat can be recorded in one operation occurs, the value becomes 1.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the main unit is resetor 0 is written.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM23

This bit is 1 while file is copied.

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSM24

This bit is 1 while writing the data to the external memory device*5.

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSM25

This bit is 1 while writing the data to the USB flash drive.

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes*6

No

LSM30

If the value of this bit is 0, all files (including the subfolders with files)
under the source folder will be copied to the destination folder. If thevalue is 1, only the files (excluding the subfolders with files) under thesource folder will be copied to the destination folder.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM31

If the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, file copy process is
terminated. If the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1 while copying
the files, the main unit will stop the file copy function after copying thecurrent file. If this value is 1, file copy function is not executed.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM32

Reserved

LSM33

When the number of drawings or parts placed on the top layer exceeds
the upper limit, then the value of this bit is 1. This bit remains at a value of
1 until the main unit is reset or 0 is written, then the value is 0.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM34

Reserved

LSM35This bit is 1 while data is being written to the external memory device*7
with the batch output or real time output of the Data Log function.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM36

This bit is 1 while data is being written to the external memory device*7
with the batch output or real time output of the Alarm Log function.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM37

This bit is 1 while data is being written to the external memory device*7
with the batch output or real time output of the Operation Log function.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM42

Alternates between 0 and 1 each time data is read (read scan) from all
external device addresses being used by External Device
Communication 2.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM43

Alternates between 0 and 1 each time data is read (read scan) from all
external device addresses being used by External Device
Communication 3.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM44

Alternates between 0 and 1 each time data is read (read scan) from all
external device addresses being used by External Device
Communication 4.

Yes*8

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM26

Reserved

LSM27

Stops playing the sound file when this bit is turned from 0 to 1.

LSM28, 29

LSM38 to 41

LSM45 to 47

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved*5 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F*6 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only.
*7 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*8 HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-3

35
Internal Devices

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

DeviceAddress

1 Bit Devices

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

LSM48

200 millisecond clock (alternates between 0 and 1 every 100 milliseconds)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM49

1 second clock (alternates between 0 and 1 every 500 milliseconds)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

DeviceAddress

LSM50, 51
LSM52

Only scans in which the main unit is operated by the remote control
function will be set to 1.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM53

When the value changes to 1, the preset values for IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway (LSD192 to 203), and port number for
maintenance communication (LSD213) are written to the main unit, thenit automatically resets. After the main unit is reset, the value becomes 0.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM54

When the value changes to 1, the preset values for External Device ID, IP
address and port number (LSD204 to 209) are written to the main unit,
then it automatically resets. After the main unit is reset, value becomes 0.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM55

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, it cancels sending of all
the e-mails in "Waiting" status. Even if the value of LSM56 is 1, thisfunction can be executed.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM56

While the value of this bit is 1, it pauses sending of all the e-mails in"Waiting" status. If the value changes from 0 to 1 while sending an email is in progress, it will pause after such e-mail has been sent.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM57

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, get the current timefrom the SNTP server. The acquired current time is written to the main
unit internal clock and stored in the main unit internal current time
data (LSD13 to 19).

Yes

No

No

No

LSM58

Value is 1 while there is a connection with an FTP client.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM59

If the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, the connections for the
FTP client and the main unit is forcibly disconnected. When it becomes
1 value does not become 0 until the main unit is reset or 0 is written.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM60, 61

Reserved

LSM62

When the value of this bit changes to 1, the POWER LED is turned off(unlit). When changes to 1, the POWER LED turns ON (lit in green).
After the main unit is reset, value becomes 1 when operation starts.

LSM63

Reserved

LSM64

Value is 1 while transferring a file.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM65

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, file transfers areprohibited. When the value of this bit changes to 1 during a filetransfer, the file transfer is completed, and then file transfers areprohibited from the next transfer.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM70

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, BACnet/IP
communication is enabled. When the value of this bit changes from 1
to 0, BACnet/IP communication is prohibited.
When the BACnet/IP communication is stopped by error and restarts
the BACnet/IP communication, set 0 to the value of LSM70, and thenset 1 to the value of LSM70 after the status of the BACnet/IP
communication is stopped. The status of the BACnet/IP
communication can be checked with the value of LSD260.
For details about BACnet/IP communication function, refer to Chapter
1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the Network User's Manual.

No

Yes

No

No

LSM71

Stores the status of Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command towhich the Operate key for Data Log Display is assigned.
0: OFF or the trigger condition is not satisfied.
1: ON or the trigger condition is satisfied.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM66

Reserved

LSM67

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, copying and moving
subfolders and files included in subfolders is prohibited whentransferring files from external memory to external memory. When thevalue of this bit changes to 1 during a file transfer, the file transfer iscompleted, and then copying and moving subfolders and files included
in subfolders is prohibited.

LSM68, 69

LSM72 to 74

35-4

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Devices

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

LSM75

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, the main unit cancels
sending all the social media messages in "Waiting" status. Even if thevalue of LSM76 is 1, this function can be executed.

Yes

No

No

No

LSM76

While the value of this bit is 1, the main unit pauses sending of all thesocial media messages in "Waiting" status. If the value changes from 0
to 1 while sending a social media message is in progress, the main
unit will pause after such social media message has been sent.

Yes

No

No

No

LSM77

When the value changes from 0 to 1, the values of SSID, password, IP
address, subnet mask, default gateway and port number for
maintenance communication (LSD292 to 356) of the wireless LAN are
written to the main unit, then main unit automatically resets. After themain unit is reset, value becomes 0 when operation starts.

Yes

No

No

No

LSM78

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, start the wireless LAN
connection. When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, stop thewireless LAN connection.
The status of the wireless LAN connection can be checked with thevalue of LSD366.

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSM79, 80
LSM81

Reserved
When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, stops the monitor
function of WindO/I-NV4 and opens the TCP port used formaintenance communication and pass-through function. When it
becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the main unit is reset or 0 is
written. The status can be checked by the value of LSD227.

LSM82

Reserved

LSM83

Write MQTT Basic Settings from External Memory Devices Execution
Flag
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “MQTT Communication” in the Network
User's Manual.

Yes

No

No

No

LSM84

Write MQTT Basic Settings from External Memory Devices Execution
Completed Output
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “MQTT Communication” in the Network
User's Manual.

Yes

No

No

No

LSM85

Write MQTT Basic Settings from External Memory Devices Error Output
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “MQTT Communication” in the Network
User's Manual.

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

LSM86

Reserved

LSM87

When the value of this bit changes from 0 to 1, EtherNet/IP
communication is enabled. When the value of this bit changes from 1
to 0, EtherNet/IP communication is prohibited.
When the EtherNet/IP communication is stopped by error and restarts
the EtherNet/IP communication, set 0 to the value of LSM87, and thenset 1 to the value of LSM87 after the status of the EtherNet/IP
communication is stopped. The status of the EtherNet/IP
communication can be checked with the value of LSD410. For details
about EtherNet/IP communication function, refer to Chapter 2“EtherNet/IP Communication” in the Network User's Manual.

LSM88 to 95

Reserved

LSM96 to127

Reserved• Transfer of the LSM10 Keep Relay and Keep Register to the flash memory can take an excess of one
second. Writing to the Flash Memory can be repeated a maximum of 100,000 times. Keep writing to theFlash Memory to a minimum.
• When there is no remaining battery power, data transferred with LSM10 will be restored once the power
to the main unit has been turned on.
• LSM1, 2, 3 and 11 also operates when switches the Text Group.
A scan refers to a period during which all parts placed on a screen are processed. It is not related to theperiod of reading values of external device addresses.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-5

35
Internal Devices

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

DeviceAddress

1 Bit Devices
The timing chart representing the operation of the HMI Special Relay (LSM0 to 5, 8, and 12) is as follows.
Power on
↓
LSM0
LSM1
LSM2
LSM3
LSM4
LSM8

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

Operation
processing

1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan

Popup Screen open
↓
LSM5
LSM12

35-6

Basescreen switch↓

1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan

Popup Screen open
↓

1
0
1
0

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Devices

1.2

Control Device Addresses
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● FT2J/1J
Internal Device Name

R/W

Input (Bit)I

Output (Bit)Timer Contact

Address Number Range

Base

FT2J

FT1J

R

0 to 15,
20 to 27*1

0 to 5, 12, 13,
20 to 27*1

8

Q

R/W

0 to 7,10 to 17*1

0 to 3,10 to 17*1

8

T

R

0 to 199

10

Counter Contact

CR

0 to 199

10

Shift Register (Bit)R

R/W

0 to 12710Internal Relay (Bit)M

R/W

0 to 7997

10*2

Special Internal Relay (Bit)

M

R/W

8000 to 8177

10*2

Do not write values to the same address number of the control device using multiple functions such as HMI
and control functions. It may not work as expected.
• R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.
• Can keep or clear the values of shift registers and internal relays when the ladder program is executed.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.4 Memory Backup” on page 28-11.
■ Input (I)Devices that input on/off information from external devices to the main unit.
■ Output (Q)Devices that output on/off information from the main unit to external devices.
While the ladder program is stopped, the value of Q is 0. To turn on the external output while the ladderprogram is stopped, set the value of Maintain Outputs While Stopped M8025 to 1, and then set the value of
Q to 1.
■ Timer Contact (T)This is a bit-unit device that the value changes to 1 once the time set for the timer of the control device has elapsed.
■ Counter Contact (C)This is a bit-unit device that the value changes to 1 once the time set for the timer of the control device has elapsed.
■ Shift registers (R)This is a bit-unit device to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs.
■ Internal Relay (M)Internal relays (M) are relays used in the main unit and cannot be outputted to the output terminals.

*1 Only when using an I/O cartridge*2 The last digit of the address number is 0 to 7 in octal notation.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-7

35
Internal Devices

Symbol

1 Bit Devices■ Special Internal Relay (M)Special internal relays (M) are bit devices used internally on the main unit. Each address number has been assigned a
special function.
Do not write to address numbers that are reserved. Otherwise the main unit may not operate correctly.

DeviceAddress

Description

Ladderprogramstopped

Power
OFF

R/W

M8000

Start Control
M8000 controls the state of the ladder program. When the valuechanges to 1, it is during RUN, and when changes to 0, it is during
STOP. However, Stop Input and Reset Input have precedence overStart Control M8000. For details, refer to Chapter 1 "Run/Stop
Operation by Using Stop input, Reset input or Function Switch
Operations" in the Ladder Programming Manual.
Start Control M8000 maintains its value when the main unit ispowered down, however, if the backup time is exceeded and theretained data is lost, the operation will be the selected option under
the Run/Stop Selection at Keep Data Error or Watchdog
Timer Error in the Run/Stop Control tab on the Function Area
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Run/Stop
Selection at Keep Data Error or Watchdog Timer Error” on page 28-8.

Maintained

Maintained

R/W

M8001

1-sec Clock Reset
While the value is 1, the value of 1-s Clock M8121 is always 0.

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8002

All Outputs OFF
While the value is 1, the values of all outputs Q and WQ are 0. The
self-holding circuit created in the ladder program is also 0.

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8003

Carry (Cy) and Borrow (Bw)
When a carry or borrow results from executing an operation
instruction, the value changes to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 3“Carry and Borrow” in the Ladder Programming Manual.

ClearedClearedR

M8004

Ladder Program Execution Error
When an error occurs while executing a ladder program, the valuechanges to 0. For details about the Ladder Program Execution Error,
refer to Appendix "User Program Execution Error and Ladder
Program Execution Error" in the Ladder Programming Manual.

ClearedClearedR

Operating

Cleared

R

M8005 to 8007

M8010

M8011 to 8017,
8020, 8021

35-8

Reserved
Daylight Saving Time Correction
The value is 1 while the time is being adjusted to daylight savingtime.
The value is 0 when daylight saving time is disabled or not adjusted
for daylight saving time.
Reserved

M8022

HMI Function Startup Completion Flag
When the HMI function startup is complete, the value changes to 1.
When the power has been turned off and on again, it changes to 0.

Operating

ClearedR

M8023

Clock Data Initialization Flag
When clock data initialization occurs, the value changes to 1. Whenthe clock data is reset using the System Area 3 of the HMI function,
the SNTP server function, or LSD20 to 26, it changes to 0.

Operating

ClearedR

M8024

BMOV/WSFT Instruction Executing Flag
While the WSFT instruction or the BMOV instruction is executing, thevalue changes to 1. When completed normally, the value changes to
0. For details about the WSFT instruction and the BMOV instruction,refer to the Ladder Programming Manual.

Maintained

Maintained

R

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Devices

DeviceAddress

Description

Ladderprogramstopped

Power
OFF

R/W

M8025

Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation Stopped
When the ladder program is put into STOP status while the value is
1, the outputs Q and WQ maintain their values. When the STOP
status is changed to the RUN status, the value is 0.

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8026, 8027

Reserved
Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8031

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

M8032

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Comparison Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Overflow

Maintained

ClearedR

Underflow

Maintained

ClearedR

M8037

Count Direction Flag

Maintained

ClearedR

M8040

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Comparison Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

R

M8033
M8034
M8035

High-Speed Counter (Group 1)
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-21.

M8036

M8041
M8042
M8043

High-Speed Counter (Group 2)
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-21.

M8044
M8045 to 8047,
8050 to 8054

Reserved

M8055

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

M8056

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Comparison Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

R
R

M8057
M8060

High-Speed Counter (Group 3)
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-21.

M8061
M8062 to 8067
M8070
M8071
M8072
M8073
M8074
M8075 to 8077
M8080
M8081
M8082
M8083
M8084
M8085 to 8087
M8090
M8091
M8092
M8093
M8094
M8095 to 8097,
8100 to 8107,
8110 to 8117

Reserved
Interrupt Input Status
Allowed: 1
Prohibited: 0
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-32.

Group 1

ClearedClearedGroup 2

ClearedClearedR

Group 3

ClearedClearedR

Group 4

ClearedClearedR

Group 5ClearedClearedR

Reserved
Interrupt Input Edge
Rising edge: 1
Falling edge: 0
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-32.

Group 1

ClearedClearedR

Group 2

ClearedCleared

R
R

Group 3

ClearedClearedGroup 4

ClearedClearedR

Group 5ClearedClearedR

Group 1

Maintained

ClearedR

Group 2

Maintained

ClearedR

Group 3

Maintained

ClearedR

Group 4Maintained

ClearedR

Group 5Maintained

ClearedR

Reserved
Catch Input Status
Rising edge: 1
Falling edge: 0
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-30.
Reserved

M8120

Initialize Pulse
The value is 1 only for one scan at the start of ladder program.

ClearedClearedR

M8121

1-sec Clock
Alternates between 0 and 1 (50% duty ratio) with each 500
milliseconds while the value of Clock Reset M8001 is 0.

Operating

ClearedR

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-9

35
Internal Devices

M8030

1 Bit Devices

DeviceAddress

Description

Ladderprogramstopped

Power
OFF

R/W

M8122

100-msec Clock
Alternates between 0 and 1 (50% duty ratio) with each 50
milliseconds.

Operating

ClearedR

M8123

10-msec Clock
Alternates between 0 and 1 (50% duty ratio) with each 5
milliseconds.

Operating

ClearedR

M8124

Timer/Counter Preset Value Changed
When timer or counter preset values are changed, the value changes
to 1. When the following operations are performed, the valuechanges to 0.
•Downloads the project.
•Clears the changed preset value.
•Switches to System Mode.

Maintained

ClearedR

M8125

Ladder Program Execution Status
Running: 1
Stopped: 0

ClearedClearedR

ClearedClearedR

Result 1

Maintained

ClearedR

Result 2

Maintained

ClearedR

Result 3

Maintained

ClearedR

M8126, 8127,
8130 to 8137,
8140 to 8143
M8144
M8145 to 8147
M8150
M8151
M8152
M8153 to 8157,
8160 to 8165

Reserved
Timer Interrupt Status
Allowed: 1
Prohibited: 0Reserved
Comparison Result
Stores the comparison results of the
CMP= instruction and the ICMP>=
instruction. For details, refer to Chapter
6 “Special Internal Relays M8150,
M8151, and M8152” in the Ladder
Programming Manual.
Reserved

M8166

ClearedCleared

R/W

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Comparison Status

Maintained

ClearedR

M8172

Overflow

Maintained

ClearedR

M8173

Comparison Output Reset

ClearedCleared

R/W

Gate Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Reset Input

Maintained

Cleared

R/W

Comparison Status

Maintained

ClearedR

Overflow

Maintained

Cleared

R

M8167
M8170
M8171

M8174
M8175
M8176

Comparison Output Reset
High-Speed Counter (Group 4)
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-21.

High-Speed Counter (Group 5)
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “Device
Address Allocation” on page 28-21.

M8177

Value of Device Address at STOP or Reset
The values of device addresses of the main unit at each status are as follows:
Device Name

StoppedOutput (Bit)Internal Relay (Bit),
Shift Register (Bit)Stop to Run

During Reset

Power Off0

Maintained00Range Specified as “Keep”

Maintained

Maintained

ClearedMaintained

Range Specified as “Clear”*1

Maintained

ClearedClearedMaintained*2

Maintained

Maintained*2

Special Internal Relay (Bit)*1 Maintain or clear the values of control devices can be configured on the Memory Backup tab in the Function Area
Settings dialog box in WindLDR. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.4 Memory Backup” on page 28-11.
*2 It varies based on the address number. For details about the Special Internal Relay, refer to “Special Internal Relay (M)” on
page 35-8.

35-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 Bit Devices● HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V
SymbolR/W

Address
Number Range

Base

Expansion Input (Bit)#I

R

30 to 107

10*1

Expansion Output (Bit)

#Q

R/W

30 to 127

10*1

Internal Relay (Bit)

#M

R/W

0 to 797

10*1

Device Name

R/W is an abbreviation of Read/Write. R/W indicate that both reading and writing are possible, while R
indicates that only reading is possible.

■ Expansion Output (#Q)
Device addresses that output on/off information from the main unit to external devices. Output Relay for digital I/O
module connected to HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V and BACnet/IP communication. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Using Digital
I/O Modules” in the MICRO/I Hardware Manual and Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the Network User's
Manual.
■ Internal Relay (#M)
This is a bit-unit device for the BACnet/IP communication. For details, refer to Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication”
in the Network User's Manual.
All values of the control device addresses becomes 0 at the start of operation.
When entering the control device, inputs "#" before the symbol (device type). In addition, on the Device
Monitor a "#" is displayed before the symbol.
Example: I100 is configured.
#I100*1 The last digit of the address number is 0 to 7 in octal notation.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-11

35
Internal Devices■ Expansion Input (#I)
Device addresses that input on/off information from external devices to the main unit. Input Relay for digital I/O
module connected to HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V and BACnet/IP communication. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Using Digital
I/O Modules” in the MICRO/I Hardware Manual and Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the Network User's
Manual.

2 Word Devices2
2.1

Word Devices
HMI Device Addresses
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Address Number Range
Internal Device Name

SymbolR/W

FT2J/1J,
HG2J/1J

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

Base

HMI Data Register

LDR

R/W

0 to 16383

0 to 8191

10

HMI Keep Register

LKR

R/W

Variable

10

LTD

R

0 to 31

10

WLEX

R

0, 20, 40, 60

10Digital Output (Word)*1

WLEY

R/W

0, 20, 40, 60

10

HMI Temporary Register

LBR

R/W

LLR

R/W

0 to 63

10

WLI

R

0

16

HMI Expansion Output (Word)*3

WLQ

R/W

0

16

HMI Special Data Register

LSD

R/W

HMI Timer Current Value
Digital Input (Word)*1

HMI Link Register*2
HMI Expansion Input (Word)*3

0 to 255

0 to 511

0 to 127

0 to 383

1010R/W is an abbreviation of Read/Write. R/W indicate that both reading and writing are possible, while R
indicates that only reading is possible.
■ HMI Data Register (LDR)
This register is an internal register of the main unit.
■ HMI Keep Register (LKR)
This register is an internal register of the main unit. The value in these registers is retained during power OFF. The
maximum number of HMI Keep Register depends upon the number set in WindO/I-NV4. For details, refer to Chapter
15 “Minimum and Maximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses” on page 15-2.
■ HMI Timer Current Value (LTD)This register stores the current value of Timer from the parts. 32 points are available.
■ Digital Input (Word) (WLEX), Digital Output Word (WLEY)
These registers handle the relays for digital inputs (words) and digital outputs (words) of expansion modules
connected to the HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F in word units. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Using Digital I/O Modules” in
the MICRO/I Hardware Manual.
■ HMI Temporary Register (LBR)
This is an internal register that can be used to store value as temporary. This register value will be cleared to 0 whena text group or user account is changed, when a screen is reset or the screen is changed.
■ HMI Link Register (LLR)
An area that stores the data of the registered device addresses for the external device during when HG5G/4G/3G/2GV, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/5T, or HG1G/1p make Sub Host Communication.
64 points are available.
This register can also be used as an internal register like LDR when Sub Host Communication is not used.
■ HMI Expansion Input (Word) (WLI), HMI Expansion Output (Word) (WLQ)
These registers handle the expansion input or the expansion output used with HG1P in word unit. WLQ is a reserved area.

*1 HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 HG1P only

35-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Devices■ HMI Special Data Register (LSD)
These registers perform the following special operations. The number of device addresses supported vary based on
the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J: 512
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P: 384
Yes: Supported, No: Not supported or out of range, (blank): Reserved
DeviceAddress

LSD19

LSD20
LSD21
LSD22
LSD23
LSD24
LSD25
LSD26
LSD27
LSD28
LSD29

LSD30

LSD31

Reserved
Scan time Maximum value (msec.)
Screen switch response time (msec.)
Read scan communication time of External Device Communication 1 (msec.)
Scan counter (incremented at each scan)
1 second counter (incremented each second)
10 msec. counter (increments every 10 msec.)
100 msec. counter (incremented every 100 msec.)
200 msec. counter (incremented every 200 msec.)
500 msec. counter (incremented every 500 msec.)
Stores the current time data of “Year” from the main unit. (4 BCD digits)
Stores the current time data of “Month” from the main unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores the current time data of “Day” from the main unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores the current time data of “Hour” from the main unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores the current time data of “Minute” from the main unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores the current time data of “Second” from the main unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores the current time data of “Day-of-week” from the main unit. (1BCD digit)
0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday,
5: Friday, 6: Saturday
When a value of “1” is written into this special register, the Internal
clock in main unit is updated according to the data stored in LSD2126. It automatically resets to “0” after the update.
Stores a setting value for “Year” of the internal clock data of the main unit.
(2 BCD digits)
Stores a setting value for “Month” of the internal clock data of the main
unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores a setting value for “Day” of the internal clock data of themain unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores a setting value for “Hour” of the internal clock data of themain unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores a setting value for “Minute” of the internal clock data of themain unit. (2 BCD digits)
Stores a setting value for “Second” of the internal clock data of themain unit. (2 BCD digits)
Scan time Current value (msec.)
Scan time Minimum value (msec.)
Execution result of SNTP Server
0: Successfully Completed
2: Timeout error
4: Other error
Stores the elapsed time (0 to 65535 minutes) from the point whenthe main unit obtained the time from the SNTP server until now.
The value resets and elapsed time starts getting stored once the main
unit successfully obtain current time from the SNTP server. In casethe main unit fails to obtain the current time, the elapsed time will notreset and keep on getting stored until successfully obtaining the time.
Stores the currently displayed screen number.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

35-13

35
Internal Devices

LSD0 to 3
LSD4
LSD5
LSD6
LSD7
LSD8
LSD9
LSD10
LSD11
LSD12
LSD13
LSD14
LSD15
LSD16
LSD17
LSD18

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

LSD32

LSD33

FunctionSet a value (in reference to a Base Screen number you want to switchto) and it will automatically switch to a specified Base Screen number.
The data type is determined by the data type specified in Screen
Number Format on the Project Setting dialog box.
USB flash drive error status
0: Normal
1: A write occurred when the USB flash drive was not inserted orwhen an incompatible USB flash drive was inserted
2: Format error
3: Access error, Insufficient memory in USB flash drive or Reading
or writing failure
4: Unsuccessful read of picture data

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

LSD34

USB flash drive*4 free memory capacity Lower word (Kbytes)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD35

USB flash drive*4 free memory capacity Upper word (Kbytes)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD36

USB flash drive*4 total memory capacity Lower word (Kbytes)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD37

USB flash drive*4

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No
No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes

No
No
No

LSD42

External memory device*5 error status
0: Normal
1: A write occurred when the USB flash drive was not inserted orwhen an incompatible USB flash drive was inserted
2: Format error
3: Access error, Insufficient memory in Memory card or Reading or
writing failure.
4: Unsuccessful read of picture data

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSD43

External memory device*5 free memory capacity Lower word (Kbytes)

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSD44

External memory device*5

free memory capacity Upper word (Kbytes)

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSD45

External memory device*5

total memory capacity Lower word (Kbytes)

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

LSD46

External memory device*5

total memory capacity Upper word (Kbytes)
Reserved (for Communication drivers)
Reserved
Stores the O/I Link slave station number. (Read-only)
The sequence value of the message number (or channel number if
the alarm function is being used) selected by the cursor in the Alarm
List Display is stored.
A value of between 1 and 1024 (allocated using ((Block No. - 1) x 16
+ bit number + 1)) is stored for the number.

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD38
LSD39
LSD40
LSD41

LSD47
LSD48
LSD49
LSD50

LSD51
LSD52

LSD53

total memory capacity Upper word (Kbytes)
Cyclic script execution time Current value (msec.)
Cyclic script execution time Maximum value (msec.)
Cyclic script execution time Minimum value (msec.)
Reserved

Brightness level: -16 to 31*6, 0 to 31*7
The ID number of the script for which the error occurred.
Script error status
0: Normal
1: Processing error
2: Execution time over error
3: Writing count error
4: Indirect device error
5: Parameter error
6: Cyclic Script execution time over
7: Fixed interval execution error
For details about the Script error, refer to Chapter 25 “Types andcauses of script errors” on page 25-4.

*4 USB flash drive inserted in USB2 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J*5 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F*6 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G , HG2G-5F only
*7 HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P only

35-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress
LSD54
LSD55
LSD56

Function
Reserved (for Script)
Reserved
The number of lines of data from the start line to the line currently
selected with the cursor displayed in the Alarm List Display or Alarm
Log Display is stored.

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

The number of log data pieces stored in the Data Storage Area by
the alarm log function is stored. (0 to 1024)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD58

USB flash drive download status
The following bit changes to 1 while downloading to USB flash driveby WindO/I-NV4.
The bit changes to 0 after the download.
Bit 2: Recipe fileBit 5: Picture file

No

No

No

Yes

LSD59

SD memory card download status
The following bit changes to 1 while downloading to SD memory
card by WindO/I-NV4.
The bit changes to 0 after the download.
Bit 2: Recipe fileBit 5: Picture fileBit 8: Sound file*8

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD60

Reserved (for Line Chart)

LSD61

Reserved (for Trigger Condition)

LSD62

Reserved (for TCP/IP)

LSD63 to 64
LSD65

Reserved
Maximum number of screenshots that can be saved to external
memory device*9.

LSD66

Reserved

LSD67Stores the connection status for TCP clients and the TCP server for
the User Communication set to the Ethernet interface.
Bit 0: User Communication 1
Bit 1: User Communication 2
Bit 2: User Communication 3

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD68

When the value changes from 0 to 1, the connections for the TCP
clients and the TCP server for the User Communication set to the
Ethernet interface are forcibly disconnected.
Bit 0: User Communication 1
Bit 1: User Communication 2
Bit 2: User Communication 3

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD69 to 71

Reserved

LSD72Stores the currently played sound file number.

Yes

Yes

Yes*8

No

LSD73

Stores the sound ID which could not be played by any errors.

Yes

Yes

Yes*8

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

LSD74 to 78
LSD79
LSD80 to 96

Reserved
Quantity of Expansion I/O Modules
Reserved

LSD97

Read scan communication time of External Device Communication 2(msec.)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD98

Read scan communication time of External Device Communication 3(msec.)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD99

Read scan communication time of External Device Communication 4(msec.)

Yes*10

Yes

Yes

Yes

*8 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only.
*9 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P*10 HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-15

35
Internal Devices

LSD57

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

LSD100Reserved (for O/I Link Communication)

LSD101

Polling period register for the O/I Link Slave

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD102

Slave registration setting register for O/I Link Master

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD103

Reserved (for O/I Link communication)

LSD104

Slave online information register for O/I Link Master

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD105Reserved (for O/I Link communication)

LSD106

Slave error information register for O/I Link Master

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD107

Reserved (for O/I Link communication)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes*11

No

No

Yes

Yes*11

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD108, 109
LSD110, 111
LSD112
LSD113 to 119

LSD120 to 123

Reserved
Reserved (for Communication drivers)
Register for Communication drivers
For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
Reserved (for Communication drivers)
The preset value for Preferred DNS Server
When the value of LSM53 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the set values of the project are read to these device
addresses.
Example:When the IP address is 192.168.0.11
LSD120=192, LSD121=168, LSD122=0, LSD123=11

LSD124 to 127

The preset value for Alternate DNS Server
When the value of LSM53 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the set values of the project are read to these device
addresses.
Example:When the IP address is 192.168.0.12
LSD124=192, LSD125=168, LSD126=0, LSD127=12

LSD128 to 154

LSD155LSD156 to 164

LSD165LSD166 to 191

LSD192 to 195

Reserved
Event Recording Function Status Information
While data is being recorded after an event occurs with the event
recording function or while recorded data is being saved to theexternal memory device, the value of bit 0 changes to 1. It changes
to 0 when the saving operation completes.
Reserved
Multimedia Function Error Information
0: Normal
1: Specified file does not exist
2: File format is incorrect
3: Specified parameter value is out of range
Reserved
The preset value for IP address of the main unit
When the value of LSM53 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the set values of the project are read to these device
addresses.
Example:When the IP address is 192.168.0.1
LSD192=192, LSD193=168, LSD194=0, LSD195=1

LSD196 to 199

The preset value for subnet mask of the main unit
When the value of LSM53 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the set values of the project are read to these device
addresses.
Example:When the subnet mask is 255.255.254.0
LSD196=255, LSD197=255, LSD198=254, LSD199=0*11 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

35-16

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

LSD200 to 203

Function
The preset value for default gateway of the main unit
When the value of LSM53 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the set values of the project are read to these device
addresses.
Example:

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

When the default gateway is 192.168.0.24
LSD200=192, LSD201=168, LSD202=0, LSD203=24

LSD204The preset value for IP address of external device
When the LSM54 changes from 0 to 1, the values of these device
addresses are written to the main unit. When the value of LSD204
changes, the set values of the project are read to these device
addresses.
Example:The IP address is 192.168.0.2
LSD205=192, LSD206=168, LSD207=0, LSD208=2

LSD209LSD210 to 212
LSD213
LSD214 to 220

The preset value for the port number of the external device
When the value of LSM54 is changed to 1, the value of this device
address is written to the main unit. When the value of LSD204
changes, the set value of the project is read to this device address.
Reserved
The preset value for port number for maintenance communication of
the main unit
When the value of LSM53 changes from 0 to 1, the value of this device
address is written to the main unit. When the power is turned on, theset value of the project is read to this device address.
Reserved

LSD221

Number of e-mail in “Waiting” status

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD222

Result of e-mail sending
0: Successfully Completed
1: Parameter error
2: Timeout error (Timeout period: 30 seconds)
3: Authentication error
4: Other error

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD223E-mail number which has been sent

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD224 to 226

Reserved

LSD227

Stores the status of the TCP port used for the monitor function of
WindO/I-NV4, maintenance communication or pass-throughfunction. When not used, the bit is 0. When in use, the following bit
is 1:
Bit 0: WindO/I-NV4 monitor function
Bit 1: TCP port for Maintenance communication (2537)
Bit 2: TCP port for Pass-through function (2101, 2538)

LSD228Reserved

LSD229Specifies the character encoding method used when reading and writing
strings from the Custom Web Page.
0: No Conversion (UTF-8)
1: Japanese (Shift-JIS)
2: Western (ISO 8859-1)
3: Simplified Chinese (GB2312)
4: Traditional Chinese (BIG5)
5: Hangul (KSC5601)
6: Central European (ANSI1250)
7: Baltic (ANSI1257)
8: Cyrillic (ANSI1251)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-17

35
Internal Devices

LSD205 to 208

The External Device ID to change the IP address and the port
number2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

LSD230

Number of the FTP server connected to using the FTP client function

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD231

Number of file transfer successes
The register is set to 0 at the start of file transfers. 1 is added to theregister when a file transfer ends without any errors.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD232

Number of file transfer failures
The register is set to 0 at the start of file transfers. 1 is added to theregister when any error occurs in the file transfer.

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD248File transfer status to the USB flash drive by using the FTP server
function.
The following bit changes to 1 while transferring files to USB flash
drive inserted into the main unit from an FTP client.
The bit changes to 0 after the transfer.
Bit 2: Recipe fileBit 4: ZNV Project File
Bit 5: Picture fileBit 8: Sound file*8
Bit 9: ZLD Project File
Bit 10: Movie file*11
Bit 15: Other file

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

LSD249File transfer status to the SD memory card by using the FTP server
function.
The following bit changes to 1 while transferring files to SD memory
card inserted into the main unit from an FTP client.
The bit changes to 0 after the transfer.
Bit 2: Recipe fileBit 4: ZNV Project File
Bit 5: Picture fileBit 8: Sound file*8
Bit 9: ZLD Project File
Bit 10: Movie file*11
Bit 15: Other file

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

No

LSD233 to 239

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

Reserved
Version number of the system software

LSD240, 241

Example:The version number of the system software is version
4.38.
LSD240=0438(Hex), LSD241=0000(Hex)

Version number of WindO/I-NV4
LSD242, 243

Example:

LSD244 to 247

Reserved

The version number of WindO/I-NV4 is version 1.2.3.
LSD242=0102(Hex), LSD243=0300(Hex)

LSD250 to 255
LSD256
LSD257 to 259

Reserved
Input mode of Character Input
Stores the input method from the keypad for the Character Input.
0: Direct input mode
1: Kanji input mode
Reserved*8 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only.
*11 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.

35-18

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

LSD260

BACnet/IP communication status
Bit 0: Stopped
Bit 1: Ready
Bit 2: Operating
Bit 3: Stopped by error
For details, refer to Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the
Network User's Manual.

Yes

LSD261The last error information that has occurred in BACnet/IP
communication.
Bit 0: Normal
Bit 1: Invalid device ID
Bit 2: Invalid IP address
Bit 3: Invalid BBMD IP address
Bit 4: BBDM registration failure
For details, refer to Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the
Network User's Manual.

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

Yes

No

No

35
Yes

Yes

No

No

Reserved

LSD270

Expansion Module Slot 1 Information (Type ID and Status)

No

Yes

No

No

LSD271

Expansion Module Slot 1 Information (System Software Version andPosition Information)

No

Yes

No

No

LSD272

Expansion Module Slot 2 Information (Type ID and Status)

No

Yes

No

No

LSD273

Expansion Module Slot 2 Information (System Software Version andPosition Information)

No

Yes

No

No

LSD274

Expansion Module Slot 3 Information (Type ID and Status)

No

Yes

No

No

LSD275

Expansion Module Slot 3 Information (System Software Version andPosition Information)

No

Yes

No

No

LSD276

Expansion Module Slot 4 Information (Type ID and Status)

No

Yes

No

No

LSD277

Expansion Module Slot 4 Information (System Software Version andPosition Information)

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

LSD278 to 285

Reserved
MAC address number

LSD286 to 291

LSD292 to 308

Example:The MAC address number is 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8.
LSD286=0000(Hex), LSD287=0003(Hex),
LSD288=007B(Hex), LSD289=00F0(Hex),
LSD290=0012(Hex), LSD291=00A8(Hex)The preset value for the SSID of the wireless LAN
When the value of LSM77 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the preset values of the project are set to these device
addresses.
(The seventeenth word is recognized as a NULL terminating
character (0x00) regardless of the value of device address. Add a
NULL terminating character (0x00) as the end of the string datawhen the string length is less than sixteen words.)
Example:The SSID of the wireless LAN is “wlanexample”.
LSD292=‘wl’(0x77, 0x6C), LSD293=‘an’(0x61, 0x6E),
LSD294=‘ex’(0x65, 0x78), LSD295=‘am’(0x61, 0x6D),
LSD296=‘pl’(0x70, 0x6C), LSD297=‘e’(0x65, 0x00),
LSD298 to LSD308=‘’(0x00, 0x00)

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-19

Internal Devices

LSD262 to 269

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

2 Word Devices

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

LSD366

Wireless LAN connection status
0: No setting
1: Stopped
4: Connecting

Yes

No

No

No

LSD367Signal strength of the wireless LAN SSID (LSD292 to 308)
When the SSID is set to stealth, the signal strength cannot bemeasured.
0: No signal
1: Bad2: Normal
3: Good

Yes

No

No

No

LSD368

Number of social media message in “Waiting” status

Yes

No

No

No

LSD369Result of social media message sending
0: Successfully Completed
1: Parameter error
2: Timeout error
3: Authentication error
4: User error
5: Other error

Yes

No

No

No

Social media message number which has been sent

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

DeviceAddress

LSD309 to 341

Function
The preset value for the password of the wireless LAN
When the value of LSM77 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the preset values of the project are set to these device
addresses.
(The thirty-third word is recognized as a NULL terminating character(0x00) regardless of the value of device address. Add a NULL
terminating character (0x00) as the end of the string data when thestring length is less than thirty-two words.)
Example:

LSD342, 343

LSD344 to 347

Reserved
The preset value for IP address of the wireless LAN
When the value of LSM77 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the preset values of the project are set to these device
addresses.
Example:

LSD348 to 351

LSD356
LSD357 to 365

LSD370
LSD371 to 377
LSD378LSD379 to 383

35-20

The IP address is 192.168.0.150
LSD344=192, LSD345=168, LSD346=0, LSD347=150

The preset value for subnet mask of the wireless LAN
When the value of LSM77 changes from 0 to 1, the values of thesedevice addresses are written to the main unit. When the power isturned on, the preset values of the project are set to these device
addresses.
Example:

LSD352 to 355

The password of the wireless LAN is "password".
LSD309=‘pa’(0x70,0x61), LSD310=‘ss’(0x73,0x73),
LSD311=‘wo’(0x77,0x6F), LSD312=‘rd’(0x72,0x64),
LSD313 to LSD341=‘’(0x00,0x00)

The subnet mask is 255.255.255.0
LSD348=255, LSD349=255, LSD350=255, LSD351=0

Reserved
The preset value for port number for maintenance communication of
the wireless LAN
When the value of LSM77 changes from 0 to 1, the value of thisdevice address is written to the main unit. When the power is turned
on, the preset value of the project is set to this device address.
Reserved

Reserved
When the inside of the main unit becomes hot, it is incremented
every minute. Even if the power is turned off, the value is retained.
Reserved

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress
LSD384 to 389

Function

FT2J/
1J,
HG2J
/1J

Reserved

HG5G
/4G/
3G/
2G-V

HG4G
/3G,
HG2G
-5F

HG2G
-5T,
HG1G
/1P

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

LSD391

Write MQTT Basic Settings from External Memory Devices Execution
Error Information
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “MQTT Communication” in the
Network User's Manual.

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

LSD392 to 409

Reserved

LSD410EtherNet/IP Communication Status
Bit 0: Stopped
Bit 1: Ready
Bit 2: Executing
Bit 3: Restarting
Bit 15: Stopped by error
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “EtherNet/IP Communication” in the
Network User's Manual.

Yes

No

No

No

LSD411The last error information that occurred in EtherNet/IP
communication
Bit 0: Normal
Bit 1: Timeout waiting for link up
Bit 2: Timeout waiting for communication to start
Bit 3: Timeout waiting for communication to stop
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “EtherNet/IP Communication” in the
Network User's Manual.

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

LSD412 to 511

Reserved• LSD4 and 6 store the maximum value, and when the Base Screen is switched, they are reset.
• The values of LSD4 to 6 are included errors of +/- 10 msec.
• The values of LSD38 to 40 are included errors of +/- 10 msec.
• When registers LSD7 to 12 contain FFFF (H) and are incremented, the value becomes 0.
• When you reckon time by using LSD9, the time difference (in 10ms units) from the previous value can becalculated.
• The range for the “Year” in LSD13 is 2000 to 2099, and reverts to 2000 after 2099.
However, the FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J can handle up to the maximum UNIX time (03:14:07 on January 19,2038).
• When “1” is written to LSD20, internal clock is updated by the contents of LSD21-26. After setting theyear, month, day, hour, minute, and second data in LSD21 to 26, writes a “1” to LSD20. However, if evenone of LSD21 to LSD26 contains invalid data, the internal clock data of the main unit will not be updated.
• The display format for LSD31 is set under “Screen No. Format” in Project Settings. (BCD, BIN)
• The data type of the value stored in LSD32 is determined by the data type specified in Screen Number
Format on the Project Settings dialog box.(BCD, BIN)
If the screen number is not exist in the project, “No Screen Data” message will appear.
If 0xFFFF(Hex) is written to LSD32, the main unit will display the Top Page of System Mode.
In case that the current screen is changed by System Area1 and LSD32 at the same instant, the screen
number of the System Area1 will be displayed.
• The data stored in LSD34 to 37, 43 to 46 are stored in kilobytes. 1 K byte is 1024 bytes. Values of lessthan 1 K byte are rounded up.
• By using the LSD50 value in the Message Switch Display you can display the message that corresponds tothe cursor in the Alarm List Display.
• Refer to Chapter 25 “1.4 Script Error in HMI Functions” on page 25-4 for details regarding LSD52 andLSD53.
• LSM7 and LSD6, 102 to 107 are not available for Slave units when using O/I link communication.
• The maximum number of the Screen Captures stored in the external memory device*10 is set in LSD65.
The value in LSD65 can be anywhere from 1 to 999. (The default value is 99.)

*9 USB flash drive inserted in USB1 for FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J, SD memory card for HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F,
USB flash drive for HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-21

35
Internal Devices

LSD390

Write MQTT Basic Settings from External Memory Devices Execution
Information
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “MQTT Communication” in the
Network User's Manual.

2 Word Devices

2.2

Control Device Addresses
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● FT2J/1J
SymbolR/W

Address Number Range

Base

Input (Word)

Device Name

WI

R

0, 20

8

Output (Word)

WQ

R/W

0

8

Timer Preset Value

TP

R/W

0 to 199

10

Timer Count ValueTC

R

0 to 199

10

Counter Preset Value

CP

R/W

0 to 199

10

Counter Count ValueCCR

0 to 199

10

*2

10

Shift Register (Word)

WM

R/W

0 to 112Internal Relay (Word)

WR

R/W

0 to 7980*1

10Special Internal Relay (Word)

WM

R/W

8000 to 8160*1

10

Data Register

D

R/W

0 to 3999

10

D

R/W

8000 to 8199

10

R/W

0 to 151*4*5

Special Data Register
Index Register*3

P

Do not write values to the same address number of the control device using multiple functions such as HMI
and control functions. It may not work as expected.
• R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.
• Can keep or clear the values of the following control devices when the ladder program is executed. For
details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.4 Memory Backup” on page 28-11.
Counter current values, Shift registers, Internal relays, Data registers■ Input (WI)
This is a register for handling bit device Input (I) in word unit.
■ Output (WQ)This is a register for handling bit device Output (Q) in word unit.
While the ladder program is stopped, the value of Q is 0.
■ Timer Preset Value (TP), Timer Current Value (TC)This register stores the preset value and current value of the timer used internally on the main unit.
■ Counter Preset Value (CP), Counter Current Value (CC)This register stores the preset value and current value of the counter used internally on the main unit.
■ Shift Register (WR)This is a register for handling bit device Shift Register (R) in word unit.
■ Internal Relay (WM)
This is a register for handling bit device Internal Relay (M) in word unit.
■ Special Internal Relay (WM)
This is a register for handling bit device Special Internal Relay (M) in word unit.
■ Data Register (D)This register stores numerical data used internally on the main unit. It can also be used as a bit unit device.
*1 Multiples of 20 only
*2 Multiples of 16 only
*3 This device address is a 32-bit device.
*4 The first two digits indicate the address number, and the last digit indicates whether the data is an upper or a lower word of
32-bit data. (0: Upper word, 1: Lower word)*5 The first two digits are in decimal, and the last digit is in binary.

35-22

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Devices■ Special Data Register (D)This register stores numerical data used internally on the main unit, and special functions are assigned to eachaddress number. It can also be used as a bit unit device.
Do not change the data of reserved area, otherwise the Touch may not operate correctly.

DeviceAddress
D8000, 8001
D8002

UpdateR/WPower-upR

Reserved
Model Information
The model information of the main unit is stored.
3: FT2J/1J
Reserved

D8005

General Error CodeThe general error information of the main unit is stored. For details, refer to
Chapter 37 “General Error” on page 37-9.

When error
occurred

R/W

D8006

The ladder program execution error information of the main unit is stored. For
details, refer to Appendix “User Program Execution Error and Ladder Program
Execution Error” in the Ladder Programming Manual.

When error
occurredR

D8007

Reserved

D8008

Year

Every 500 ms*6

R

D8009

Month

Every 500 ms*6

R

Day

Every 500 ms*6

R

Day of Week
0: Sunday, 1: Monday,
2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday,
4: Thursday, 5: Friday,
6: Saturday

Every 500 ms*6

R

D8012

Hour

Every 500 ms*6

R

D8013

MinuteEvery 500 ms*6

R

D8014

SecondEvery 500 ms*6

R

―

R/W

D8010

D8011

D8015 to 8021

Internal Clock Data (Current Data)
The date and time data for the internal clockof the main unit is stored.

Reserved

D8022

Constant Scan Time Preset Value
The preset value of the constant scan time that make the scan time constantis stored. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “3 Constant Scan” on page 28-45.

D8023

Scan Time Current Value
The most recent scan time is stored.

Every scan

R

D8024

Scan Time Maximum Value
The maximum scan time since the ladder program started running is stored.

At occurrence

R

D8025

Scan Time Minimum Value
The the minimum scan time since the ladder program started running isstored.

At occurrenceR

D8026 to 8030

Reserved*6 If the scan time is 500 milliseconds or longer, updates the value with each scan.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-23

35
Internal Devices

D8003, 8004

Description

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress

UpdateR/WPower-up

R

Group 1―

R/W

Group 2―

R/W

Group 3―

R/W

Group 4

―

R/W

D8036

Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.
The jump destination label number when the timer interrupt occurs is storedin D8036. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.12 Timer Interrupt” on page 2842.

―

R/W

D8037

Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.
The jump destination label number of Interrupt Input
configured in Function Area Settings dialog box is stored.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.7 Interrupt Input” on page28-32.

―

R/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

D8031

D8032
D8033
D8034
D8035

D8038, 8039
D8040
D8041
D8042
D8043
D8044
D8045
D8046
D8047
D8048, 8049

Description
Optional Device Connection Information
The usage status of optional products is stored.
0: Not in use
1: In Use
The bit number assignments for optional products are as follows.
Bit 2: Cartridge Slot 1
Bit 3: Cartridge Slot 2
Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.
The jump destination label number of Interrupt Input
configured in Function Area Settings dialog box is stored.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.7 Interrupt Input” on page28-32.

Reserved
Analog Input Value
It varies based on the Type selected under Analog/Digital AI0
Inputs in Function Area Settings dialog box. For details,
refer to Chapter 28 “2.10 Analog/Digital Inputs” on page 28- AI1
38.
Analog Input Status
The status of analog input is stored. For details, refer to
Chapter 28 “2.10 Analog/Digital Inputs” on page 28-38.

AI0

Every scan

R

AI1

Every scanR

Analog Output Value
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.11 Analog Outputs” onpage 28-40.

AQ0*7

Every scan

R/W

AQ1*7

Every scan

R/W

AQ0*7

Every scan

R

AQ1*7

Every scanR

Every scanR

Analog Output Status
The status of analog output is stored. For details, refer to
Chapter 28 “2.11 Analog Outputs” on page 28-40.
Reserved

D8050
D8051
D8052
D8053
D8054

Upper Word
High-Speed Counter (Group 1)
The current value, preset value and reset
value of the high-speed counter are stored.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.5 HighSpeed Counter” on page 28-12.

D8055
D8056
D8057
D8058
D8059
D8060
D8061
D8062 to 8067

Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

High-speed Counter/Frequency Measurement(Group 2)
The current value, preset value and reset
value of the high-speed counter or themeasurement value of the frequency
measurement is stored. For details, refer to
Chapter 28 “2.5 High-Speed Counter” onpage 28-12 or Chapter 28 “2.8 Frequency
Measurement” on page 28-35.

Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

Reserved*7 FT2J-7U22KAF-*, FT2J-7U22SAF-* only

35-24

Group 5

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Current Value
Preset Value
Reset Value
Current Value /Measurement
Value
Preset Value
Reset Value

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress
D8068
D8069
D8070
D8071
D8072
D8073
D8074 to 8076

High-speed Counter/Frequency Measurement(Group 3)
The current value, preset value and reset
value of the high-speed counter or themeasurement value of the frequency
measurement is stored. For details, refer to
Chapter 28 “2.5 High-Speed Counter” onpage 28-12 or Chapter 28 “2.8 Frequency
Measurement” on page 28-35.

UpdateR/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

Every scan

R

Type ID, Status

Power-up

R

System Software Version

Power-up

R

Type ID, Status

Power-up

R

System Software Version

Power-up

R

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

―

R/W

Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

Current Value /Measurement
Value
Preset Value
Reset ValueReserved
Out-of-range Error Status of Analog Input
When the analog input signal exceeds 11 V or 21 mA (Out of Upper Limit
Range Error), or falls below 2 mA (Out of Lower Limit Range Error), the valueof the corresponding bit changes to 1. When it is 2 mA or more and 11 V or 21
mA or less, it changes to 0.
Bit 0: Analog Input AI0 (Out of Upper Limit Range Error)
Bit 1: Analog Input AI1 (Out of Upper Limit Range Error)
Bit 2: Analog Input AI0 (Out of Lower Limit Range Error)
Bit 3: Analog Input AI1 (Out of Lower Limit Range Error)
Bit 4: Analog Input AI2 (Out of Upper Limit Range Error)*8
Bit 5: Analog Input AI3 (Out of Upper Limit Range Error)*8

Bit 6: Analog Input AI2 (Out of Lower Limit Range Error)*8
Bit 7: Analog Input AI3 (Out of Lower Limit Range Error)*8
D8078 to 8121
D8122
D8123
D8124
D8125
D8126 to 8133
D8134
D8135
D8136
D8137
D8138
D8139

Reserved
Cartridge Slot Information (Slot1)
The information of cartridge slot (Slot1) isstored. For details about the bit assignment,
refer to “Cartridge Slot Information” on page35-27.
Cartridge Slot Information (Slot2)
The information of cartridge slot (Slot2) isstored. For details about the bit assignment,
refer to “Cartridge Slot Information” on page35-27.
Reserved
High-speed Counter/Frequency Measurement(Group 4)
The current value, preset value and reset
value of the high-speed counter or themeasurement value of the frequency
measurement is stored. For details, refer to
Chapter 28 “2.5 High-Speed Counter” onpage 28-12 or Chapter 28 “2.8 Frequency
Measurement” on page 28-35.

D8140
D8141
D8142
D8143
D8144

Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word

High-Speed Counter (Group 5)
The current value, preset value and reset
value of the high-speed counter are stored.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.5 HighSpeed Counter” on page 28-12.

D8145
D8146 to 8171

Upper Word

Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word
Upper Word
Lower Word

Current Value /Measurement
Value
Preset Value
Reset Value
Current Value
Preset Value
Reset ValueReserved*8 FT2J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-25

35
Internal Devices

D8077

Description

2 Word Devices

DeviceAddress
D8172

D8173
D8174
D8175

D8176

D8177

D8178
D8179
D8180 to 8185

D8186

D8187

D8188
D8189
D8190 to 8199

Description

R/W

Every scanR

Every scan

R

AI2*8

Every scan

R

AI3*8

Every scanR

AI4/AQ2

Every scan

R/W

AI5/AQ3

Every scan

R/W

AI4/AQ2

Every scanR

AI5/AQ3

Every scanR

AI6/AQ4

Every scan

R/W

AI7/AQ5

Every scan

R/W

AI6/AQ4

Every scanR

AI7/AQ5

Every scanR

Analog Input Value
AI2*8
It varies based on the Type set under Analog/Digital
Inputs in Input & Output Configuration tab on the
Function Area Settings dialog box is stored. For details,
refer to Chapter 28 “2.10 Analog/Digital Inputs” on page 28- AI3*8
38.
Analog Input Status
The status of the analog input is stored. For details, refer to
Chapter 28 “2.10 Analog/Digital Inputs” on page 28-38.
Analog I/O Cartridge Data (Slot1)
It varies based on the type of analog I/O cartridge.
Analog input: The value converted from the input value ofthe analog input cartridge to a digital value
according to the settings of Analog/Digital
Inputs in Input & Output Configuration
tab on the Function Area Settings dialog
box is stored.
Analog output: The stored value is converted to an analog
value according to the settings of Analog
Outputs in Input & Output
Configuration tab on the Function Area
Settings dialog box, and output from theanalog output cartridge.
For details about the Analog I/O Cartridge, refer to Chapter
2 “2 Analog I/O Cartridge” in the SmartAXIS Hardware
Manual.
Analog I/O Cartridge Status (Slot1)
The status information of the analog I/O cartridge is stored.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Status” in the SmartAXIS
Hardware Manual.
Reserved
Analog I/O Cartridge Data (Slot2)
It varies based on the type of analog I/O cartridge.
Analog input: The value converted from the input value ofthe analog input cartridge to a digital value
according to the settings of Analog/Digital
Inputs in Input & Output Configuration
tab on the Function Area Settings dialog
box is stored.
Analog output: The stored value is converted to an analog
value according to the settings of Analog
Outputs in Input & Output
Configuration tab on the Function Area
Settings dialog box, and output from theanalog output cartridge.
For details about the Analog I/O Cartridge, refer to Chapter
2 “2 Analog I/O Cartridge” in the SmartAXIS Hardware
Manual.
Analog I/O Cartridge Status (Slot2)
The status information of the analog I/O cartridge is stored.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 “Status” in the SmartAXIS
Hardware Manual.
Reserved■ Index Register (P)This register stores the value used to indirect device addresses.

*8 FT2J only

35-26

UpdateWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Word Devices
Value of Device Address at Stop, Reset, or Power OFF
The values of device address for each state of the main unit are as follows.
Stop to Run

DuringResetPower Off0

Maintained00Maintained

Initialized

ClearedClearedRange Specified as Keep*1

Maintained

Maintained

ClearedMaintained

Range Specified as Clear*1

Maintained

ClearedClearedMaintainedSpecial Data Register*2

Maintained

Maintained

Maintained

Index Register0

Maintained

ClearedClearedOutput (Word)
Timer Current Value
Counter Current Value,
Shift Register (Word),
Internal Relay (Word),
Data Register

Cartridge Slot Information
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

D8122, D8124

StatusType ID

D8123, D8125

Reserved

System Software Version

Type ID

0Type Number

00h

FC6A-PJ2A

01h

FC6A-PK2AV

02h

FC6A-PK2AW

03h

FC6A-PJ2CP

09h

FC6A-PTS4, FC6A-PTK4

0Ah

FC6A-PN4

FFh

Not used

StatusCause

00h: Normal―

81h: Communication error

An error has occurred in the communication between the cartridge and the main unit.

82h: Unknown device detected

A cartridge that the main unit cannot recognize is installed.

83h: Device setting error

No cartridge is installed or the installed cartridge is different from that set in the Module
Configuration Editor.

84h: Device writing error

Failed to set the operation of the cartridge.

*1 Keep or Clear the value of the control device can be set in the Memory backup tab on the Function Area Settings dialog
box. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2.4 Memory Backup” on page 28-11.
*2 It varies based on the address number.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

35-27

35
Internal Devices

StoppedDevice Name

2 Word Devices● HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V
Device Name

SymbolR/W

Address Number Range

Base

Expansion Input (Word)#WI

R

30, 50, 70, 90

10Expansion Output (Word)

#WQ

R/W

30, 50, 70, 90, 110

10Internal Relay (Word)

#WM

R/W

0 to 780*1

10Data Register

#D

R/W

0 to 2999

10

R/W is an abbreviation of Read/Write. R/W indicate that both reading and writing are possible, while R
indicates that only reading is possible.
■ Expansion Input (#WI)
This is a device address for handling bit device Extension Input (#I) used with digital I/O module and BACnet/IP
communication in word unit. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Using Digital I/O Modules” in the MICRO/I Hardware
Manual and Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the Network User's Manual.
■ Expansion Output (#WQ)
This is a device address for handling bit device Extension Output (#Q) used with digital I/O module and BACnet/IP
communication in word unit. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Using Digital I/O Modules” in the MICRO/I Hardware
Manual and Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the Network User's Manual.
■ Internal Relay (#WM)
This is a device address for handling bit device Internal Relay (#M) in word unit.
■ Data Register (#D)
This is a word device used for analog I/O module and BACnet/IP communication. For details, refer to Chapter 2“Using Digital I/O Modules” in the MICRO/I Hardware Manual and Chapter 1 “BACnet/IP Communication” in the
Network User's Manual.
All values of the control device addresses becomes 0 at the start of operation.
When entering the control device, inputs "#" before the symbol (device type). In addition, on the Device
Monitor a "#" is displayed before the symbol.
Example: D100 is configured.
#D100*1 Multiples of 20 only

35-28

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 36

Main unit Setup

This chapter describes the main unit setup screen and how to perform setup.

1

Maintenance Screen
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

1.1

Maintenance Screen Overview
Using the screen that is displayed when the main unit is in Run Mode, you can switch from Run Mode to SystemMode, open the device monitor or adjust brightness screen, and RUN or STOP the ladder program.

Maintenance

Maintenance

System Mode

System Mode

Device Monitor

Device Monitor

Adjust Brightness

Adjust Brightness

Ladder RUN/STOP

Maintenance screen functions are indicated below:
ButtonDescription

System Mode

Switch the main unit to System Mode. In System Mode, the main unit can be changed to its initial
settings and data can be initialized.
For details, refer to “2 System Mode Overview” on page 36-3.

Device Monitor

Shows the Device Monitor. This screen can be used to register device addresses and monitor andchange values of device addresses. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Device Monitor” on page30-21.

Adjust Brightness

Shows the adjust brightness screen. This screen is used to adjust the brightness of the main unit.

Ladder RUN/STOP*1

Switch the ladder program between RUN and STOP by manipulating the value of the special
internal relay M8000. While the ladder program is STOP, the words “Ladder STOP” flashes at thebottom right of the screen.

• If a password has been configured for the project data and press System Mode or Device Monitor, theEnter Password screen will be displayed. Select a user name and then enter a password. For details, refer
to Chapter 24 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 24-1.
• When the value of the stop input or reset input is 1, the value of the Start Control M8000 cannot operate
the ladder program. For details about the stop input or the reset input, refer to Chapter 28 “2.3 Run/Stop
Control” on page 28-6.

*1 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

36
Main unit Setup

HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G,
HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P

FT2J/1J

36-1

1 Maintenance Screen

1.2

Displaying the Maintenance Screen
When the following operation is performed during operation, the Maintenance Scree appears on the screen.
• Press the upper-left corner of the main unit screen for three seconds or more.
If the Base Screen is switched before three seconds have elapsed, the load operation for the maintenance screen
will be canceled. Please press it again.
Main unit
Press and hold3 or more seconds• Press the RESET switch on the back of the main unit*1 three times with a fine-tipped object.
Example: HG2J
BackFine-tipped object
RESET switch

The location of the RESET switch on the rear panel varies depending on the model. For FT2J/1J, refer to the
SmartAXIS Hardware Manual, and for HG1J, refer to the MICRO/I Hardware Manual.
• The Maintenance Screen is not displayed in the System Mode.
• To display the maintenance screen, select the Enable Maintenance check box under the System tab in
the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 System Tab” on page 4-26.
• Do not touch the screen of the main unit when operating the RESET switch.

1.3

Adjusting Screen Brightness

1 On the maintenance screen, press Adjust Brightness.
The Adjust Brightness screen is displayed.
Maintenance
System Mode
Device Monitor
Adjust Brightness

Also, pressorto adjust to your preferred brightness.

×

Maintenance

Adjust Brightness＜＜＞＞

Screen brightness can be adjusted using methods other than the ones listed above.
•or
buttons on the Top Page in System Mode
• Changing the values for HMI Special Data Register LSD51.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

36-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 System Mode Overview

2

System Mode Overview
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The System Mode allows you to access the initial settings of the main unit, self diagnosis, and clearing logged data. In
this mode, the project in the main unit will not be running.

2.1

System Mode ScreensIn the System Mode, the Top Page appears (as shown below).
Main Menu screen

Top Page

36
SYSTEM MODE TOP PAGE

Oﬄine

Main unit Setup

Run

Main Menu

Offline

MAC Address 00:03:7B:F0:12:A8
IP Address 192.168.0.1(DHCP)
2010/OCT/14/THU 14:56:44

ENG/JPN<<

BRIGHTNESS 31>>

Press Main Menu to display the Main Menu screen
shown in the right figure.

For information on accessing the main unit System Mode, refer to “1.2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen”
on page 36-2. Design may change slightly depending on model.
● Icons■ Battery Level Status*1
The symbol of Battery Level Status is displayed on the Top Page and the Main Menu screen.
Full

Battery level is full.
Battery level is running low. (The “Battery Level Low” message appears at the top of the screen.)

Empty

Battery level is almost empty, or not inserted. (The “Replace Battery. Battery Level Low” message
appears at the top of the screen.)

The Symbols depend on the main unit model.

*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual36-3

2 System Mode Overview■ Wireless LAN signal strength*2
An icon indicating the signal strength of wireless LAN is displayed on the Top Page.
Strong signal
Medium signal
Weak signal
No service

The icon is not displayed when wireless LAN is not used.

● Buttons
The Top Page and Main Menu screen have the buttons shown below. Pressing each button switches to thecorresponding setting or operation screen.
■ Top Page
Buttons

Descriptions

See page

Run

Switches to Run Mode.

Page 36-12

OfflineSwitches to Offline mode.

Page 36-12

Main Menu

Switches to Main Menu screen.

Page 36-4

Descriptions

See page■ Main Menu screen
Buttons
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J,
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V,
HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F

HG2G-5T,
HG1G/1P

Initial Setting

Initial Setting•Setup the settings relating to operation andcommunication parameters of the main unit.
•Initialize the log data.

Page 36-7

Clock Setting

Clock Setting

Sets the internal clock of the main unit.

Page 36-11

OfflineOfflineGoes to Offline mode.

Page 36-12

Run

Run

Goes to Run mode

Page 36-12

System Information

System Info.

Displays information relating to the type No.,projects, as well as system software of thecurrent main unit.

Page 36-12

Manage the files saved in SD memory cards,
USB flash drives, and the internal memory of themain unit.

Page 36-13

Ext.Mem.Device

Format USB flash drive.

Page 36-13

Top Page

Top Page

Switches to Top Page.

Page 36-13

Self Diagnosis

Self Diag.

Executes self diagnosis of memory, the clock,the touch panel, display, communication,
expansion interface and others.

Page 36-13

File Manager*3――

For the FT2J/1J, the HG2J/1J, the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, the HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F, you can change thedisplay language by pressing ENG/JPN . HG2G-5T and HG1G/1P can only display the screens of the System
Mode in English.
*2 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only

36-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 System Mode Overview

2.2

Names and Layout of Setup Menus■ FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F
Main Menu

Initial Setting

System Operation

Backlight
Start Time
Details
Default Scr. No.
Password
AutorunAlarm Log

Initialize

Data Log
Operation Log
Touch Panel Adjust*1

External Device 1

External Device

36

Retry Cycles

Trans. Wait
Path Through Setting
Parameter 1 to 4
External Device 2

Retry Cycles
Time OutTrans. Wait
Path Through Setting
Parameter 1 to 4

External Device 3

Retry Cycles
Time OutTrans. Wait
Path Through Setting
Parameter 1 to 4

External Device 4*2

Retry Cycles
Time OutO/I Link

O/I Link Setting 1

Trans. Wait

O/I Link Setting 2
Clock Setting

Serial 1

Communication I/F

OfflineSerial 2

Run

Serial 3

System Information

System*1

Font

Ethernet Default Gateway*1

Top Page
Self Diagnosis*3

Ethernet IP Address

System 2
File Manager

Path Through Setting
Parameter 1 to 4

Ethernet Misc Setting
Ext. Device IP Address

Memory
Display

LED
Draw
Brightness
Backlight
BuzzerSound
Video
RESET Switch

Touch Panel
Communication
Change TypeLCD Size
I/O
Sequential Check

*4
*5
*6

Communication 1

*1
*1
*7

Communication 2*1

Sequential Check Start*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*3 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V only
*4 This is applicable for models with an audio interface only.
*5 This is applicable for models with a video interface only.
*6 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*7 FT2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

36-5

Main unit Setup

Time Out2 System Mode Overview■ HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P
Main Menu

Initial Setting

Backlight

System Op.

Start Time
Details
Default Scr. No.
Password
AutorunAlarm Log

Initialize

Data Log
Op. Log
TP AdjustExt. Device

Ext. Device 1

Retry Cycles
Time OutTrans. Wait
Pass ThroughParameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4

Ext. Device 2

Retry Cycles
Time OutTrans. Wait
Pass ThroughParameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4

Ext. Device 3

Retry Cycles
Time OutTrans. Wait
Pass ThroughParameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4

Ext. Device 4

Retry Cycles
Time OutO/I Link

O/I Link Set1
O/I Link Set2

Clock Setting
OfflineExt.Mem.Device

Comm. I/F

RS232C
RS422/485

SystemIP Address

System 2

Default Gateway

Font

Misc Setting

Top Page
Self Diag.

Ext. IP Address
Memory
Display

LED
Draw
Brightness
Backlight
BuzzerTrace

Touch Panel

Fixed Points
Comm.
I/O
Seq. Check*8
Sequent*8 HG1P only

36-6

Pass ThroughParameter 1

Run
System Info.

Trans. Wait

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4

3 Settings

3

Settings
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The followings are displayed in the FT2J/1J, the HG2J/1J, the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, the HG4G/3G and the HG2G-5F.
Description between the parentheses are displayed in the HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P.

3.1

Initial Setting (Initial Setting)Pressing Initial Setting in the Main Menu screen displays the setup screen.
You can use this screen to input the settings for the main unit operation and communication parameters, and to clear
the logs.
To return to the Main Menu screen, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.

• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set (Init Set) at the top of the screen.
• To return to the system operation menu screen from any of the settings screens below, press System
Operation (System Op.) at the top of the screen.
■ Backlight (Backlight)
Backlight Control
Set the amount of time (in minutes) until the backlight brightness is reduced automatically when the screen of themain unit is not touched or switched.
Auto Backlight OFF
Set the amount of time (in minutes) until the backlight turns off automatically when the screen of the main unit is nottouched or switched.
Operating Procedure

1 From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), System Operation (System Op.), and thenBacklight (Backlight).

2 Press the left/right buttons to select the item, and then enter the time until the backlight brightness is reduced
automatically with the numeric keys.

3 Press the left/right buttons to select the item, and then enter the time until the backlight automatically turns off with
the numeric keys.

4 Press SAVE (SAVE) button to save the settings.
• If you switch to another screen or change the value before pressing SAVE (SAVE), the settings are not saved.
• Functions with the time set to 0 are disabled.
■ Start Time (Start Time)It can be set vary based on the model.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

Specifies the time to start communication with the external device and display initial screen(0 to 9999 seconds) after the power of the main unit is turned on and the POWER LED(green) changes from blinking to lit.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P:
Specifies the time to start communication with the external device and display initial screen(0 to 9999 seconds) after the power of the main unit is turned on.
This item sets the amount of time (in minutes) until communication with the external device starts after the main unit
power ON. This can be used to synchronize boot times with the external device.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), System Operation (System Op.), and thenStart Time (Start Time).
Enter the time with the keypad.
Press SAVE (ENT) to apply the entered value.
Press CAN (CAN) to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

36-7

36
Main unit Setup● System Operation (System Op.)
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), and then System Operation (System Op.)
to display the system operation menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the items below. Press the button for each item to set it.

3 Settings■ Details (Details)
The following items can be set.
• Whether or not to have a sound made when a touch switch is pressed.
• Select the screen number to be displayed as a binary number or BCD (binary coded decimal).
• To set blink cycle.
• Display the error message in Japanese or English.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), System Operation (System Op.), and then
Details (Details).
Select the item to change using theor. The selected item is highlighted. Each press of the(CHG)button changes the property of the selected item. Repeat this procedure until the desired properties are displayed.
Press ENT (ENT) to apply the entered value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

■ Default Screen No. (Default Scr. No.)This item sets the No. (as a decimal value) of the screen to display after power ON.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), System Operation (System Op.), and thenDefault Screen No. (Default Scr. No.).
Use the Keypad to enter the value.
Press SAVE (ENT) to apply the entered value.
Press CAN (CAN) to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
• The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
• If the Default Screen No. is set to 0, the main unit will display the screen set in the external device
instead of the internal initial screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “System Area 1” on page 4-32.
■ Password (Password)
Changes the password set for the user account.
If security function is used, you will be able to change the password for the selected user account (either as anadministrator or other users registered in the security group) from the touchscreen.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), System Operation (System Op.), and thenPassword (Password).
Press(CHG) to change the user account.

Press Change Password (Change Password) to display the password input screen.
Use the password input keys to enter a password from 4 to 15 characters.
Pressing ENTER (ENT) applies the entered password and closes the password input screen.
Pressing CLR (CLR) clears the password input field.
• If you press CAN (CAN) on the Password Screen, the setting is not updated and you return to the
Password Screen.
• Pressing ENTER (ENT) without entering a password disables the password function.
When you do not assign a password to a project data, the Password is blank.

■ Autorun (Autorun)
Enables or disables the USB Autorun function.
When this option is enabled, Autorun function will be executed when a USB flash drive is inserted to the main unit.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), System Operation (System Op.), and thenAutorun (Autorun).
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

36-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Settings● Initialize (Initialize)
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), and then Initialize (Initialize) to display the
initialization menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the following items. Press the button for each item to set it.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set (Init Set) at the top of the screen.
• To return to the initialization menu screen from any of the settings screens below, press Init (Init) at the
top of the screen.
■ Alarm Log (Alarm Log)
Clears all the alarm log data.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Initialize (Initialize), and then Alarm Log(Alarm Log).
Press Yes to clear the Alarm Log data.

■ Operation Log (Op. Log)
Clears all the operation log data.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Initialize (Initialize), and then Operation
Log (Op. Log).
Press Yes to clear the Operation Log data.
■ Touch Panel Adjust (TP Adjust)
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Adjusts the analog touch panel.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Initialize (Initialize), and then Touch
Panel Adjust (TP Adjust). The position of the analog touch panel is properly adjusted and set.
Press Yes and adjust the touch panel according to the instructions on the screen.
HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F
HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P

Press the center of the symbol.

Press the center of eachsymbol displayed on the screen, in
the following order: upper-left corner, upper-right corner, lowerright corner, lower-left corner of the main unit screen.

Press the center of the symbol.

Press the center of eachsymbol displayed on the screen, in
the following order: lower-left corner, lower-right corner, upperright corner, upper-left corner of the main unit screen.

● External Device (Ext. Device)
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), External Device (Ext.Device), and thenExternal Device 1 (Ext.Device 1), External Device 2 (Ext.Device 2), External Device 3(Ext.Device 3) orExternal Device 4 (Ext.Device 4)*1 to display the menu screen for the external device communication.
To specify settings, press the button to select a choice. External Device Communication setting items vary based on
the currently connected hardware. For details about settings, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
If Not Use are selected from the Communication Driver, you cannot select this option.
To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.

*1 External Device 4 for HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G-V, HG4G/3G and HG2G-5F, Ext.Device 4 for HG2G-5T, HG1G/1P

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

36-9

36
Main unit Setup■ Data Log (Data Log)
Clears all the data logged from Data Log.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Initialize (Initialize), and then Data Log(Data Log).
Press Yes to clear the Data Log data.

3 Settings● O/I Link (O/I Link)
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), and then O/I Link (O/I Link) to display the O/I linkmenu screen.
This screen presents information on the O/I Link.
Various settings can be made by pressing O/I Link Setting1 (O/I Link Set1) or O/I Link Setting 2 (O/I Link Set2).
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set (Init Set) at the top of the screen.
• For details about settings, refer to the WindO/I-NV4 External Device Setup Manual.
● Communication I/F (Comm. I/F)
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), and then Communication I/F (Comm. I/F)
to display the communication interface settings menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the items below. Press the button for each item to set.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set (Init Set) at the top of the screen.
• Press Comm. I/F (Comm. I/F) at the top of the screen to return to the communication interface
settings menu.
■ Serial 1
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface 1.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting, Communication I/F, and then Serial 1.
■ Serial 2
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface 2. For the HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, RS232C andRS422/485 can be set individually.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting, Communication I/F, and then Serial 2.
■ Serial 3
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface 3.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting, Communication I/F, and then Serial 3.
■ (RS232C)
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface (SERIAL1) (RS232C).
From the Main Menu screen, press (Initial Setting), (Comm. I/F), and then (RS232C).
■ (RS422/485)
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface (SERIAL1) (RS422/485).
From the Main Menu screen, press (Initial Setting), (Comm. I/F), and then (RS422/485).
■ Ethernet IP Address (IP Address)
Use the following procedure to set the IP address and Subnet mask settings.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Communication I/F (Comm. I/F), andthen Ethernet IP Address (IP Address).
Press the left/right buttons to select an item, then use the Keypad to enter the IP address and subnet mask values.
Press SAVE (SAVE) to save the settings.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

36-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Settings■ Ethernet Default Gateway (Default Gateway)
Specify the default gateway.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Communication I/F (Comm. I/F), andthen Ethernet Default Gateway (Default Gateway).
Press the left/right buttons to select an item, then use the Keypad to enter the default gateway value.
Press SAVE (SAVE) to save the settings.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
■ Ethernet Misc Setting (Misc Setting)Specify whether to allow or prohibit Maintenance Communication via TCP/IP (refer to Chapter 29 “Using the online
function for Ethernet communication” on page 29-7).
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Communication I/F (Comm. I/F), andthen Ethernet Misc Setting (Misc Setting).

36

Select the item to set using

Main unit Setup

or. The selected item is highlighted.

Each press oforchanges the property of the selected item. Repeat this procedure until the desired
properties are displayed.
Press ENT (ENT) to apply the entered value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
■ Ext. Device IP Address (Ext. IP Address)
Change the IP addresses of the External Device IDs for external devices.
From the Main Menu screen, press Initial Setting (Initial Setting), Communication I/F (Comm. I/F), andthen Ext. Device IP Address (Ext. IP Address).
Operating Procedure

1 Press the left/right arrow buttons to select the External Device ID, and then enter a value of the External Device ID
with the numeric keys.

2 Press the left/right arrow buttons to select the item, and then enter the IP address with the numeric keys.
3 Press SAVE (SAVE) to save the settings.
The settings are not saved if you display another screen or change the External Device ID before pressing
SAVE (SAVE).

3.2

Clock Setting
Press Clock Setting (Clock Setting) in the Main Menu screen to display the clock settings screen.
Use this screen to set the internal clock of the main unit.
To return to the Main Menu screen, press Main Menu (Main Menu) at the top of the screen.
Operating Procedure

1 Press the left/right buttons to select an item, then use the Keypad to enter the date or time.
2 Press SAVE (SAVE) to save the date/time setting.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual36-11

3 Settings

3.3

Offline (Offline)
This mode allows you to change values of device addresses and to check the operation of project data on the main unit.
To return to the Main Menu screen, press Main Menu (Main Menu) at the top of the screen.
Press Offline (Offline) in the Main Menu screen to run under the offline mode.
Under offline mode, values of the external device addresses may be cleared by zero when the Base Screenchanges.
Using the Device Monitor Function in conjunction with the Monitor function is a more efficient means ofdebugging. For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Device Monitor” on page 30-21.

3.4

Run
Switches to run mode and executes the project.

3.5

System Information (System Info.)
From the Main Menu screen, press System Information (System Info.), and then press System (System) or
System 2 (System 2) to display the system information screen. This screen displays information such as the type
number of the main unit, stored system software type and version No.
To return to the Main Menu screen, press Main Menu (Main Menu) at the top of the screen.
Only the first 15 characters of the project name are displayed.

● System (System)
From the Main Menu screen, press System Information (System Info.), and then press System (System).
Displays the following settings:• O/I Type
• MAC Address• OS Version*1• Boot Version*2• System Version
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. (System Info.) at the top of the screen.
● System 2 (System 2)
From the Main Menu screen, press System Information (System Info.), and then press System 2 (System 2).
Displays the following settings:• Project name• Communication Interface of External Device Communication 1, External Device Communication 2, External Device

Communication 3 and External Device Communication 4*3- External device manufacturer- Communication driver name- Communication driver version
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. (System Info.) at the top of the screen● Font (Font)

FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

From the Main Menu screen, press System Information (System Info.), and then press Font (Font).
Displays the font type stored in the main unit.
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. (System Info.) at the top of the screen.
*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

36-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Settings

3.6

File Manager
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

File Manager manages files stored on SD memory cards, USB flash drives, and the internal memory of the main unit.
It can format external memory devices, copy and delete files, and run associated applications.
To return to the Main Menu screen, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.
• FormatSelect the drive you want to format, and then press FORMAT.
• CopySelect the file you want to copy, and then press COPY.
When the main unit or PLC is selected as the file copy source or copy destination, execute the Project Transfer
function. For details, refer to Chapter 33 “2 Project Transfer Function” on page 33-20.

If the external memory device is not recognized correctly, press RELOAD to reload it.

3.7

Ext.Mem.Device
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

From the Main Menu screen, press (Ext.Mem.Device), and then (Format) to format the USB flash drive.
To return to the Main Menu screen, press (Main Menu) at the top of the screen.

3.8

Top Page
Press Top Page (Top Page) in the Main Menu screen to return to the Top Page.

3.9

Self Diagnosis (Self Diag.)
Self Diagnosis is a special screen for factory inspections. Please do not use it during the operation.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

36-13

36
Main unit Setup• Delete
Select the files you want to delete, and then press DEL.

3 Settings

36-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualChapter 37

TroubleshootingThis chapter describes the errors that may occur with the main unit and the measures necessary to correct theseerrors.

1

HMI Function Error
The main unit displays a variety of error messages in order to assist you in quickly analyze and resolve problems withthe hardware, communications system, and user screen data.

1.1

Errors Displayed on the Screen
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The following error messages are displayed in the event of communication system problems and problems with user
screen data. When an error occurs, take the appropriate indicated action. If an error persists despite your attempts tocorrect it, contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation.
Cause

Solution

Waiting for default screen No.

The default screen number is set at 0.

Either write the screen number to the
System Area display screen number
region, or set the initial screen number
to a number other than 0.

No screen data

The specified Base Screen does not exist.

Set the Base Screen and download it to
the main unit.

Stop the external memory before removing External memory device was removed
the device
while it was being accessed.

Stop the access to the external memory
device using the special internal relays
LSM18 to 21, and then remove it.
If the external memory device isremoved while being accessed, the data
in it may be corrupted.

No SD memory card exists*1

No SD memory card inserted when the unit Insert an SD memory card.
attempted to access the SD memory card.

No USB flash drive exists*2

No USB flash drive inserted when the unit
attempted to access the USB flash drive.

No USB flash drive exists (USB1)*3

Insert a USB flash drive.
Insert a USB flash drive into the USB1.
Insert a USB flash drive into the USB2.

No USB flash drive exists (USB2)*3
This SD memory card not available*1• The type of inserted SD memory card is Please use a new recommended SD
memory card.
not recognized.
• The SD memory card is broken.

This USB flash is not available*2• The type of USB flash drive is notrecognized.
• The USB flash drive is broken.

Please use a new recommended USB
flash drive.

SD memory card Access Error*1

When the unit attempted to access the SD
memory card with either one or more of
the following condtions:• The SD memory card did not haveenough free space.
• The SD memory card was removed
partway through.
• The SD memory card was broken.

Create some free space on the SD
memory card or get a new one.

USB flash Drive Access Error*2

When the unit attempted to access the USB Create some free space on the USB
flash drive or get a new one.
flash drive with either one or more of thefollowing condtions:• The USB flash drive did not haveenough free space.
• The USB flash drive was removed
partway through.
• The USB flash drive was broken.

This USB flash drive isn't available (USB1)*3
This USB flash drive isn't available (USB2)*3

USB flash drive Access Error (USB1)*3
USB flash drive Access Error (USB2)*3*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F only
*2 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only
*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

37-1

37
Troubleshooting

Error Message

1 HMI Function Error

Error Message

Cause

Solution

ZNV file is not found

The ZNV Project File was not in the specified location on theexternal memory device when a download was executed using
the Project Data Transfer function.

Check whether or not the file is in
the specified location on theexternal memory device.

ZLD file is not found

The ZLD Project File was not in the specified location on theexternal memory device when a download was executed using
the PLC Program Transfer function.

Check whether or not the file is in
the specified location on theexternal memory device.

ZNV file format Error

When a download was executed using the Project Data Transfer Remake the ZNV Project File.
function with either one or more of the following conditions:• The ZNV Project File format is invalid.
• The file is corrupt.

ZNX file format Error*3

When a download was executed using the Project Data Transfer
function with either one or more of the following conditions:• The ZNX Project File format is invalid.
• The file is corrupt.
• The model of the downloaded project and the model of thedestination main unit are different.

Recreate the ZNX Project File.
Check the model that is set in the
project file you want to download isthe same as the model name of thedestination unit.

OS Version is not correct*3 When a download was executed using the Project Data Transfer Create a ZNX project file and use it
function, the OS version supported by the ZNV project and the with the Project Transfer function.
OS version of the main unit to which the project is to be
downloaded are different.
ZLD file format Error

When a download was executed using the PLC Program Transfer Remake the ZLD Project File.
function with either one or more of the following conditions:• The ZLD Project File format is invalid.
• The file is corrupt.

Product Series is notcorrect

When a download was executed using the Project Data Transfer Check that the model name that isfunction, the model of the downloaded project and the model of set in the file you want to download
is the same as the model name ofthe destination main unit were different
the destination main unit.

PLC Type is not correct

Check PLC models and runtime
When a download or upload was executed using the PLC
program versions.
Program Transfer function with either one or more of thefollowing conditions:• The model of the downloaded PLC Program and the model ofthe destination PLC were different.
• The runtime program version using the downloaded PLC
Program and the one of the destination PLC were different.

PLC Password is not valid

When a download or upload was executed using the PLC
Program Transfer function, the password you entered wasincorrect.

Enter the correct password.

PLC communication Error

When a download or upload was executed using the PLC
Program Transfer function, a communication problem with the
PLC occurred.

It is possible that there is aproblem with the connection with
the PLC. Check the connection
between MICRO/I and the PLC.

The specified files are not
found

The specified files were not in the specified location on theexternal memory device when the File Copy function was
executed.

Check whether or not the file is in
the specified location on theexternal memory device.

File Size Error

The size of the source file exceeded the limit when the File Copy Check the source file size. For thefunction was executed.
maximum file size that can becopied, refer to Chapter 33 “4.5Precautions” on page 33-57.

Insufficient memory error

The resource memory of the main unit is insufficient because of Clear the Scroll or Display cursor
checkbox, or delete parts to reduce
the use of a large number of the following parts.
memory resource utilization.
• Pilot Lamps, Multi-State Lamps, and Picture Displays.
• Message Display, Message Switching Display, and Alarm List
Display with the Scroll checkbox is selected.
• Line Chart with the Display cursor checkbox is selected.
• Parts over the number limit of parts that can be set per
screen by overlapping Base Screen.

Device write error

The script generated a lot of write data, and the write operation Reduce the number of write
failed.
operations to be performed at thesame time.

*3 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J only

37-2

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

1 HMI Function Error

Error Message
Communication error: READ
Illegal reply from Ext.device.
Confirm PLC, Device Address.
Communication error: WRITE
Illegal reply from Ext.device.
Confirm PLC, Device Address.
Communication error: INIT
Illegal reply from Ext.device.
Confirm PLC, Device Address.

Cause
The external device returned an error for a readrequest of a device address from the main unit.

The external device returned an error for a write
request of a device address from the main unit.

The external device returned an error for an
initialization request to start communications fromthe main unit.

Solution
Check the following.
• The ID and name of the external device
for which the communications error
occurred will be displayed. Check if anerror has occurred on the corresponding
external device.
• An error may have occurred internallyon the external device. Check the
manual of the external device.
• Check the address range of the external
device to see if a non-existent address isbeing accessed.

Communication error: READ

Processing error

Check the calculation or settings.
• A value is divided by 0.
• There is data which cannot be handled with thespecified data type; BCD4(B), BCD8(EB), or
Float32(E).
• The setting of Origin, Minimum, or Maximum for
the Bar Chart or Line Chart are invalid, or the
Minimum and Maximum are the same values.
• The setting of Minimum, Maximum, or ranges for
the Meter are invalid, or the Minimum andMaximum are the same values.
• There is invalid clock data which is used in
Calendar parts.

Device range error• The data is written to the device with the address outof the range.
• The number of device addresses exceeds thelimitation.

Check the device address settings.

Script error

An error occurred during the execution of the scriptor the Global Script for HMI function.

Check the value of HMI Special Data
Registers LSD52 and LSD53, and correct
the script. For details, refer to Chapter 25“Script” on page 25-1.

Network off-line

This error message is only displayed when O/I Link is For details, refer to the WindO/I-NV4
being used.
External Device Setup Manual.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

37-3

37
Troubleshooting

There was no response from the external device for a Check the following.
read request of a device address from the main unit. • The ID and name of the external device
for which the communications error
No reply from Ext.device.Conoccurred will be displayed. Check if an
firm PLC,Cable,Com.settings.
error has occurred on the corresponding
Communication error: WRITE There was no response from the external device for aexternal device.
write request of a device address from the main unit.
• Check for problems with the cables,
No reply from Ext.device.Consuch as incorrect wiring and loose
firm PLC,Cable,Com.settings.
connection.
Communication error: INIT
There was no response from the external device for• The power supply to the external device
an initialization request to start communications frommay be turned off or the external device
No reply from Ext.device.Con- the main unit.
may have been reset. Check the manualfirm PLC,Cable,Com.settings.
of the external device.
• Check the communications settings todetermine if the communications
settings of the HMI and external device
are the same.

1 HMI Function Error

1.2

Low Power Supply Voltage
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The following warning messages will be displayed when it is time to replace the battery.
To display the warning message, in the Project Settings dialog box, on the System Settings tab, select theBattery warning message check box.
MessageCause

Solution

Replace battery

The voltage of the backup battery has dropped.

Replace the battery.

Replace battery(Battery level LOW)

The remaining battery level is low.

Replace the battery immediately, otherwise thedata backed up by the battery may be lost.

When the message is displayed, the value of the Bit 12 (Replace battery error) or Bit 13 (Replace battery error) ofaddress number + 2 in the System Area 2 changes to 1 depending on the cause. When the value changes to 1, it
remains 1 until the battery is replaced or 0 is written to the Bit 9 (Error clear) of address number + 1 in the System
Area 1.

1.3

Initializing Clock Data and Backup Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

When the clock data and backup data of the main unit are initialized, the following warning message is displayedwhen the power is turned on.
The warning messages are not displayed on the screen when the following check boxes are cleared on the
System Settings tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J:

Notify when clock data is initialized

HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G:

Enable Low Battery Warning■ FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
Message

Cause

Initialized Clock data Clock data has been initialized due to powerinterruption for more than 20 days.

Solution
Turn on the power and set the time.

■ HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G
Message
Backup data lost

Cause
Data collected by the Log functions, clock data,
and values of HMI Keep Registers and HMI Keep
Relay were initialized because the backup battery
ran out.

Solution
Replace the batteries and set the brightness
and time.

When the message is displayed, the value of the Bit 14 (Backup data error) of address number + 2 in System Area 2changes to 1. It returns to 0 after when the power is turned off and then on again.
In case of storing the values of HMI Keep Relays and HMI Keep Registers to the flash memory using HMISpecial Internal Relay LSM10, stored data is transferred to the memory automatically when Backup data is
lost.

37-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Control Function Error

2

Control Function Error
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Errors in control functions are called general errors. The general error status can be checked with the WindLDR or thevalue of special data register D8005. To clear the error, execute the Clear from the Monitor of the WindLDR or set thevalue of special data register D8005.15 to 1.

2.1

Check error status● Check error status with WindLDR

1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click Control Function.
WindLDR starts.

37
Troubleshooting

2 On the Online tab, in the Monitor group, click Monitor.
Starts monitoring.

3 On the Online tab, in the PLC Status group, click Status.
The PLC Status dialog box is displayed.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual37-5

2 Control Function Error

4 On the General tab, in the Error Status, click Details button.
The Error Status dialog box is displayed. Display the errors that are currently occurring.

5 Click OK.
Close the Error Status dialog box.

This concludes checking error status.

37-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Control Function Error

2.2

Clearing Errors● Clearing Error Information from WindLDR

1 Remove the cause of the error.
2 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click Control Function.
WindLDR starts.

3 On the Online tab, in the Monitor group, click Monitor.
Starts monitoring.

37
Troubleshooting

4 On the Online tab, in the PLC Status group, click Status.
The PLC Status dialog box is displayed.

5 On the General tab, in the Error Status, click Clear button.

6 Click OK.
Close the Error Status dialog box.
This concludes clearing error information.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual37-7

2 Control Function Error● Clear the error information with the ladder program
Changing the value of Error Clear Bit D8005.15 of the Special Data Register to 1 in the ladder program clears General
Error D8005. The value of Error Clear Bit D8005.15 automatically changes to 0.
Example:

1

S
M0000

2

D8005.15

When the value of M0 is set to 1, the value of D8005.15 changes to 1.
Error information is cleared at the end of the ladder program scanning
process.

R
M0000

37-8

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 Control Function Error

2.3

Error Information● General Error
The general error information is stored in special data register D8005. If an error occurs, the value of thecorresponding bit will be 1.
Bit

15

Bit

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D8005
Error clear bit

Bit
No.
0

Name

Error information bits

Cause

SolutionIf this error occurs frequently even though thepower supply voltage is within the operating
input voltage range, the power supply or main
unit has to be replaced.

Watchdog timer error• The processing time exceeded thevalue set by the watchdog timer of
the Self Diagnostic function.
• A watchdog timer error occurred in
the control function of the mainunit.

• Check your ladder program.
• Turn the power off and then on again. If
this error occurs frequently, the main unit
has to be replaced.

Analog Input
Overcurrent Detection

When 4 to 20 mA DC (current input)
is set for Signal Type of the analog• When applying voltage, download a projectin which 0 to 10 V DC (voltage input) is set
for Signal Type of the analog input (AI0,1

input (AI0, AI1, AI2*1, AI3*1) of themain unit,• a voltage was applied.
• a current of 40mA or more wasapplied.

AI1, AI2*1, AI3*1) to the main unit.
• If current is applied, set the applied current
to 0 to 20 mA and turn the power off andthen on again.

――

Keep data error

Memory backup failed and the values

If this error occurs frequently, the main unit
has to be replaced.

7

Ladder program syntax
error

The ladder program is not downloaded
or corrupted.

Download the ladder program.

8

Reserved

2

3 to 5
6

9
10

Reservedof the Keep Devices*2 were cleared.

――

System error

Unable to recognize the productinformation of the main unit.

Turn the power off and then on again. If thiserror occurs frequently, the main unit has tobe replaced.

Clock error

Clock data was initialized.

Check clock data.

Expansion bus
initialization error

An error occurred in the cartridge
installed in the main unit.

Turn the power off and then on again, or
update the system software. If this error
occurs frequently, the cartridge has to be
replaced.

Installed cartridge configuration andproject settings are different.

Check and correct the settings in the Module
Configuration on the WindLDR.

―

―

11

12

Reserved

13

Ladder program
execution error

14

Reserved――

15

Error clear bit――

Advanced instruction did not work
properly.

Check the ladder program execution error list
and correct the cause of the error. For details,
refer to the Ladder Programming Manual.

All values of control devices are cleared when the Keep data error occurs.

*1 FT2J only
*2 Control device only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

37-9

37
Troubleshooting

Power Failure Detection The power supply voltage is lower
than the operating input voltage
range, or an error has occurred in the
supply voltage to the internal circuits.

2 Control Function Error
The timing of error checking and the state of the main unit when a general error occurs are as follows.
Name

Error
Check

State of Main unit
LadderprogramExternal
Outputs

Display of
ScreenPower Failure Detection
Any time

Run orStop

MaintainedNo

The main unit restarts.
The ladder program status reflects thesetting of Run/Stop Selection atPower Up in the Function Area
Settings dialog box.

Watchdog timer error

Analog Input
Overcurrent Detection

Comments

Any time

Run or
Stop

OFF

Yes

The main unit restarts.
The ladder program status reflects thesetting of Run/Stop Selection at Keep
Data Error or Watchdog Timer Errorin the Function Area Settings dialog
box.

Any time

Maintained

MaintainedYes―

At start ofcontrolfunction

Run or
Stop

OFF

Yes

The ladder program status reflects thesetting of Run/Stop Selection at Keep
Data Error or Watchdog Timer Errorin the Function Area Settings dialog
box.

Ladder program syntax
error

At start ofcontrolfunction

Stop

OFF

Yes

―

System error

At start ofcontrolfunction

Stop

OFF

Yes

―

Clock error

At start of
HMI
function

Maintained

MaintainedNo

For details, refer to “1.3 Initializing Clock
Data and Backup Data” on page 37-4.

Expansion bus
initialization error

At start ofcontrolfunction

Maintained

OFF

Yes

―

Any time

Maintained

Maintained

Yes

Keep data error

Ladder program
execution error

For details, refer to the Ladder
Programming Manual.

Only general errors with Display of Screen set to Yes are detected as control function errors of the Web
server function.

37-10

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Handling Problems

3
3.1

Handling Problems
Cannot Download Project Data
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

■ FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
Turn on the power while pressing the RESET switch on the back with a fine-tipped object, and keep pressing it for atleast three seconds. However, do not use anything with a fragile or sharp tip.
Back
Fine-tipped object
RESET switch■ HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P
Press the top left corner of the panel for three seconds or longer while at the same time turning the power off andback on again.
Main unit

The screen in the System Mode is displayed, and then the main unit becomes downloadable status. If you download
via Ethernet, check again the setting of TCP/IP before executing the download.
When the main unit does not show the System Mode screen and continues a blackout having a bleep each second, besure to download a project using a port for USB.

3.2

The backlight is OFF and the buzzer sounds
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

If you fail to download the runtime program to MICRO/I, the backlight may turn to OFF and a beep may soundcontinuously every second, even after the power has been turned off and on again. Rectify the situation by
downloading the project using WindO/I-NV4 via USB cable.
When the backlight is OFF and the buzzer sounds, you cannot download the project to MICRO/I via Ethernet
or using an external memory.

3.3

Touch Panel Does Not Respond Correctly
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

■ FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J
Press the RESET switch on the back with a fine-tipped object or turn the power off and then on again.
■ HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P
If the touch panel needs to be readjusted, then go to the System Mode on the main unit to readjust the touch panel.
For details about adjusting method, refer to Chapter 36 “Touch Panel Adjust (TP Adjust)” on page 36-9.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

37-11

37
Troubleshooting

When the POWER LED turns orange and changes from blinking to lit, a message is displayed and the main unit
becomes downloadable status. The IP address of the FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J type is 192.168.1.150. Please check thecommunication settings, and then download.

3 Handling Problems

3.4

Power LED light is OFF
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

If the LED on the front of the main unit does not light up when power is turned ON, it may indicate a problem exists
in the main unit. Contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation.

3.5

POWER LED is lit or flashing
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

FT2J/1J and HG2J/1J indicate the status by the color of the POWER LED and by lighting or flashing.
POWER LED

Symptom

SolutionLighting Red
Flashing Orange

The POWER LED on the main unit keeps
lighting red or flashing orange when poweris turned ON.

It may indicate a problem exists in the main unit.
Contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation.

Flashing GreenThe POWER LED on the main unit keeps
flashing green when power is turned ON.

• The operating system may be corrupted, please
download the project and update the operating
system. For details, refer to Chapter 29 “2.2Download Dialog Box” on page 29-14.
• If updating the operating system does not
improve the symptoms, it may indicate a problem
exists in the main unit. Contact your vendor or IDEC
Corporation.

Lighting Orange

The POWER LED on the main unit keeps
lighting orange when power is turned ON.

• Make sure that the RESET switch is not held
down, and then turn the power off and then on
again.
• If the symptoms do not improve after turning thepower off and then on again, the operating
system may be corrupted, please download the
project and update the operating system. For
details, refer to Chapter 29 “2.2 Download Dialog
Box” on page 29-14.
• If updating the operating system does not
improve the symptoms, it may indicate a problem
exists in the main unit. Contact your vendor or IDEC
Corporation.

37-12

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

3 Handling Problems

3.6

Problem Occurs with Control Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the possible causes of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble of the Control Function
occurs while operating the main unit.
Symptom

Cause

ActionLadder program doesn't
execute.

The value of Start Control M8000 is not 1.

Set 1 to Start Control M8000.

The Stop and Reset Inputs have been set in
Run/Stop Control of the Function Area
Settings dialog box.

Turn off the external inputs set as Stop
Input and Reset Input.

Ladder program cannot be
stopped.

The value of Start Control M8000 is not 0.

Set 0 to Start Control M8000.

The Stop and Reset Inputs have been set in
Run/Stop Control of the Function Area
Settings dialog box.

Turn on the external inputs set as Stop
Input and Reset Input.

Input does not operate
normally.

The value of the input device address is not 1.

Correct the ladder program.

37

The input wiring is incorrect.

Correct the input wiring.

The input terminal is not powered.

Supply the rated voltage to the input
terminal.

Wiring or operation of external device is incorrect.

Correct the external device wiring.

The allocation number of the output is incorrect.

Correct the ladder program.

Output does not turn on and off.

Replace the main unit.

The output connection of the main unit

Check the output connection.

Watchdog timer error
occurs.

The scan time of the ladder program exceeds
watchdog timer setting time.

Modify the ladder program so that thewatchdog timer setting time is notexceeded.

The catch input orinterrupt input cannot
receive short pulses.

The input ON/OFF voltage level are not correct.

Make sure of correct input voltage.

Frequency measurement
does not work.

No signal is input to the input terminal.

Select Single-phase High-speed
Counter in the Groups 1 through 5.

The function settings in WindLDR is not configured
correctly.

Specify the used group in thefrequency measurement settings.

Output does not operate
normally.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

37-13

Troubleshooting

The allocation number of the input is incorrect.

3 Handling Problems

3.7

Problem Occurs with USB Autorun Function
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

This section describes the possible causes of trouble and actions to be taken when a problem occurs after inserting a
USB flash drive with USB Autorun settings into the main unit.
Symptom

Cause

ActionThe USB Autorun function
does not work.

In the Project Settings dialog box of the project inthe main unit, on the Autrun tab, the Enable USB
Autorun check box is cleared.

Download a project with the Enable USB
Autorun check box selected to the main
unit. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.10Autorun Tab” on page 4-67.

• The USB autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) does
not exist on the inserted USB flash drive.
• The contents of the USB autorun definition file(hgauto.ini) are incorrect.

Create the USB autorun definition file(hgauto.ini) using the USB Autorun
definition file creation tool or text editor.
For details, refer to Chapter 33 “5.3
Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” onpage 33-65.

The destination of USB autorun definition file(hgauto.ini) is incorrect.

Save the USB autorun definition file(hgauto.ini) on the root directory of a USB
flash drive.

The main unit does not recognize the USB flash drive.

Use an external memory device that has
been tested for operation. Can be checked
the devices that have been tested for
operation on our website (https://jp.idec.com/product/usb-sd).

The power was turned on with a USB flash drive
inserted in the main unit.

Turn on the power and then insert theUSB flash drive into the main unit.

Security is enabled for the project on the main unit.

On the displayed Password screen, selectthe user name from the security groupthat has command execution permissions,enter the password, and press ENT.

The Password screen isdisplayed.

37-14

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualAppendix
This chapter contains the color number, and describes details about the Color Palette and other settings used in
WindO/I-NV4.

1

Color Number
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

● Color Data Correspondence Table
This table is used when using Message Display and Script. Select a value from the Data column of the table and you
can change the display color of an object by values of device addresses.
Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

Color No.

Data

000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
032
033
034
035
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044

0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2A
0x2B
0x2C

045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
062
063
064
065
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085

0x2D
0x2E
0x2F
0x30
0x31
0x32
0x33
0x34
0x35
0x36
0x37
0x38
0x39
0x3A
0x3B
0x3C
0x3E
0x3F
0x40
0x41
0x43
0x44
0x45
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4A
0x4B
0x4C
0x4D
0x4E
0x4F
0x50
0x51
0x52
0x53
0x54
0x55

086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

0x56
0x57
0x58
0x59
0x5A
0x5B
0x5C
0x5D
0x5E
0x5F
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x66
0x67
0x68
0x69
0x6A
0x6B
0x6C
0x6D
0x6E
0x6F
0x70
0x71
0x72
0x73
0x74
0x76
0x77
0x78
0x79
0x7A
0x7B
0x7C
0x7D
0x7E

127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
160
161
162
163
164
165
166

0x7F
0x80
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x84
0x85
0x86
0x87
0x88
0x89
0x8A
0x8B
0x8C
0x8D
0x8E
0x8F
0x90
0x91
0x92
0x93
0x94
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x98
0x99
0x9A
0x9B
0x9C
0x9D
0x9E
0xA0
0xA1
0xA2
0xA3
0xA4
0xA5
0xA6

167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
204
205
206

0xA7
0xA8
0xA9
0xAA
0xAB
0xAC
0xAD
0xAE
0xAF
0xB0
0xB1
0xB2
0xB3
0xB4
0xB5
0xB6
0xB7
0xB8
0xB9
0xBA
0xBB
0xBC
0xBD
0xBE
0xBF
0xC0
0xC1
0xC2
0xC3
0xC4
0xC5
0xC6
0xC7
0xC8
0xC9
0xCA
0xCC
0xCD
0xCE

207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
218
219
220
221
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
236
237
238
239
241
242
243
244
245
246
255

0xCF
0xD0
0xD1
0xD2
0xD3
0xD4
0xD5
0xD6
0xD7
0xD8
0xDA
0xDB
0xDC
0xDD
0xDF
0xE0
0xE1
0xE2
0xE3
0xE4
0xE5
0xE6
0xE7
0xE8
0xE9
0xEA
0xEC
0xED
0xEE
0xEF
0xF1
0xF2
0xF3
0xF4
0xF5
0xF6
0xF7

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

A-1

AppendixColor No.

1 Color Number● Windows RGB Value Correspondence Table
The color numbers correspond to the following Windows RGB values.

A-2

Color
No.

Windows
RGB value

Color
No.

Windows
RGB value

Color
No.

Windows
RGB value

Color
No.

Windows
RGB value

Color
No.

Windows
RGB value

Color
No.

Windows
RGB value000

000000045

006666086

3399CC

127

66CC00167

9900CC207

CCFF99001

111111

046

006699087

339999128

66CC33

168

9900FF

208

CCFF66002

222222

047

0066CC

088

339966

129

66CC66

169

9933FF

209

CCFF33003

333333

048

0066FF089

339933130

66CC99170

9933CC210

CCFF00004

444444049

0099FF

090

339900131

66CCCC

171

993399211

FFCC00005

555555050

0099CC

091

330000132

66CCFF

172

993366212

FFCC33006

666666051

009999092

330033

133

66FFFF

173

993333213

FFCC66007

777777052

009966093

330066134

66FFCC

174

993300214

FFCC99008

888888053

009933094

330099135

66FF99175

CC0000215

FFCCCC009

999999054

009900095

3300CC

136

66FF66176

CC0033216

FFCCFF

010

AAAAAA055

00CC00096

3300FF

137

66FF33177

CC0066218

FFFFCC011

BBBBBB

056

00CC33097

3333FF

138

66FF00178CC0099219

FFFF99012

CCCCCC

057

00CC66

098

3333CC

139

99CC00179

CC00CC220

FFFF66013

DDDDDD

058

00CC99099

333399140

99CC33180

CC00FF221

FFFF33014

EEEEEE

059

00CCCC

100

333366141

99CC66181

CC33FF223

FF6600019

880000060

00CCFF102

333300142

99CC99182

CC33CC224

FF6633020

FF0000062

00FFCC103

660000143

99CCCC

183

CC3399225

FF6666021

888800063

00FF99104660033144

99CCFF

184

CC3366226

FF6699022

FFFF00064

00FF66105660066145

99FFFF

185

CC3333

227

FF66CC

023

008800065

00FF33106

660099146

99FFCC186

CC3300228

FF66FF024

00FF00067

33CC00107

6600CC

147

99FF99187

CC6600229

FF99FF025

008888068

33CC331086600FF

148

99FF66188

CC6633

230

FF99CC

026

00FFFF

069

33CC66

1096633FF

149

99FF33189

CC6666231

FF9999027

000088070

33CC991106633CC150

99FF00190

CC6699232

FF99660280000FF

071

33CCCC

111

663399151

996600191

CC66CC233

FF9933029

880088072

33CCFF

112

663366

152

996633

192

CC66FF

234

FF9900030

FF00FF

073

33FFFF

113

663333

153

996666193

CC99FF

236

FF0033032

000033074

33FFCC

114

663300154

996699194

CC99CC

237

FF0066033

000066075

33FF99115

666600155

9966CC

195

CC9999238

FF0099034

000099076

33FF66

116

666633

156

9966FF

196

CC9966239

FF00CC

035

0000CC

077

33FF33118

666699157

9999FF

197

CC9933

241

FF33FF

037

0033FF078

33FF00119

6666CC

158

9999CC198

CC9900242

FF33CC

038

0033CC079

336600120

6666FF

160

999966199

CCCC00243

FF3399039

003399080

336633

121

6699FF

161

999933200

CCCC33244

FF3366040

003366

081

336666

122

6699CC

162

999900201

CCCC66245

FF3333041

003333082

336699123

669999163

990000202

CCCC99246

FF3300042

003300083

3366CC

124

669966

164

990033204

CCCCFF

255

FFFFFF

043

006600084

3366FF

125

669933165

990066

205

CCFFFF

044

006633085

3399FF

126

669900166

990099206

CCFFCCWindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

2 View Browser

2

View Browser
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The View Browser displays the list of graphics that have been prepared in advance in WindO/I-NV4. The settings
displayed on View Browser vary based on the parts.
These graphics can be used as the outline of parts.
Example: Bit Button

Appendix■ TypeSelects the category of graphics.
■ OFF, ON
Displays the graphic when OFF or ON. Click ON or OFF to switch the graphics displayed on the list.
■ Picture List
Displays the list of registered graphics. Select the graphic to use as the outline of the part.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualA-3

3 Color Palette3

Color Palette
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Color Palette is used to select colors for drawing objects, text on parts, outlines, flanges, plates and other objects.
Display the Color Palette by clicking a color in the Properties dialog box and then select the color.
The type of color palette shown depends on the models being used.
■ 256 Color Palette*1(Color)■ 16-level Monochrome Palette*2(Color)■ More Colors, Close
Switches the palette display. Clicking More Colors shows all the colors assignable to the Color button. Close shows
only the basic colors assignable to the Color button.
■ Text Manager ColorThis feature allows use of the text color specified in the Text Manager. Click here to use the text color specified in the
Text Manager. This option can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
■ Transparent Color
Converts the color in the imported picture to be transparent. This option can only be selected when Picture Manager
was used.
■ NoneThis option is no fill color. This can only be set for Background Color in drawing object text.

*1 FT2J/1J, HG2J/1J, HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/5T* (*Color LCD models), HG1G/1P only
*2 HG2G-5T* only (*Monochrome LCD models)

A-4

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

4 Pattern Palette

4

Pattern Palette
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

The Pattern Palette is used to select patterns or tonal gradations for drawing and part objects.
The Pattern Palette appears when you click Pattern in the object’s Properties dialog box.
Click Pattern and select a pattern or tonal gradations.
Drawings

Pattern image
Gradation image

Parts

Pattern image

Appendix

Gradation image● Foreground and Background Colors
Drawing and part objects are formed by foreground and background colors.
■ Pattern
The selected pattern is applied to the foreground color.
Foreground color
Background color

The background color is visible through the unpainted parts of the foreground color.

■ Gradation
The selected gradation is applied to the foreground color.
Foreground color
Background color

The background color is visible through the unpainted parts of the foreground color.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

A-5

4 Pattern Palette● Patterns and gradations
These patterns and gradations are available on WindO/I-NV4. When 024 on the Foreground Color and 000 on the
Background Color are selected for the Rectangle, the display images are as follows:■ Patterns
Pattern name

None*1

Foreground100%

Foreground25%

Foreground50%

Background100%

Horizontal
lines

Vertical lines

Slant
Upwards

Slant
Downwards

Crosshatch

Tint

Diagonal up 1

Horizontal 1

Diagonal
down 1

Vertical 1

Diagonal up 2

Horizontal 2

Diagonal
down 2

Vertical 2Central 1

Central 2

Vertical 3

Vertical 4

Horizontal 3

Horizontal 4

Pattern buttons

Display sample

Pattern name
Pattern buttons

Display sample■ Gradation
Gradation nameGradation buttons

Display sample

Gradation nameGradation buttons

Display sample

Gradation nameGradation buttons

Display sample*1 None can only be applied to drawing objects. Selecting None is the same as not applying any color at all.

A-6

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

5 Text Alignment

5

Text Alignment
FT2J FT1J HG2J HG1J HG5G-V HG4G-V HG4G HG3G-V HG3G HG2G-V HG2G-5F HG2G-5T HG1G HG1P

Text Alignment is used to adjust the way text appears on Drawing Objects and Parts.
● Horizontal Writing
These examples show how text appears using different combinations of the Align Text Horizontal and Align Text
Vertical properties.
Align Text Horizontal
Left

CenterTop

Center-Left---

Center(Center-Top)

Appendix

Align Text
VerticalRight

Bottom---■ Align Text Horizontal
Left:

Aligns the text along the left edge.
Aligns along left edge

Center:Centers the text horizontally in the center.
Centers text in the middle

Right:

Aligns the text along the right edge.
Aligns along right edge

Center-Left:

Centers the line containing the most number of characters, and then aligns the other lines
to the left end of that line.
Aligns to left end of line with most characters

Centers line with most characters

If Align Text Horizontal is set to Center-Left, Align Text Vertical will automatically be set to CenterTop. Center-Top results in the same display as Center.

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

A-7

5 Text Alignment■ Align Text VerticalTop:

Aligns the text along the top edge.
Aligns text along top edge

Center (Center-Top):

Centers the text vertically in the center.

Centers text in the middle

Bottom:Aligns the text along the bottom edge.

Aligns text along bottom edge

● Vertical Writing
These examples show how text appears for Align Text Horizontal.
Align Text Vertical defaults to Top.
Align Text Horizontal
Left

Align
Text
VerticalA-8

CenterTop

WindO/I-NV4 User’s ManualRight5 Text Alignment■ Align Text Horizontal
Left:

Aligns the text along the left edge.
Aligns along left edge

Center:Centers the text horizontally in the center.
Centers text in the middle

Right:

Aligns the text along the right edge.
Aligns along right edge

Appendix• Vertical text cannot be set if Font is set to Stroke*1.
• Take note of these points when the Vertical Writing check box is selected:- When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters areleftaligned.
Aligned toleft edge- Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-bytecharacters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters*1 HG5G/4G/3G/2G-V, HG4G/3G, HG2G-5F/-5T, HG1G/1P only

WindO/I-NV4 User’s Manual

A-9

Speciﬁcations and other descriptions in this manual are subject to change without notice.
Information in this manual is current as of July, 2024.
2015 IDEC Corporation, All Rights Reserved.
B-1701(18)